BURG  SOONECK  AM  RHEIN. 


NEW  GERMAN  GRAMMAR 

FOR  BEGINNERS 


BY 

PAUL   VALENTINE   BACON 


Ser  frembe  0prad)en  nid)t  fennt,  tueijs  itidjts  Don  feiner  eigenen. 

—  ©oetfye. 


ALLYN   AND    BACON 
Boston  Nefo  gorfe 


V 


COPYRIGHT.  1916,  BY 
•AUL  VALENTINE   BACON. 


NorfoootJ  $regs 

J.  S.  Gushing  Co.  —  Berwick  &  Smith  Co. 
Norwood,  Mass.,  U.S.A. 


PREFACE. 

Tin:  New  German  Grammar  combines  reading  and  syntax. 
Easy  stories  illustrating  the  grammar  are  taken  up  from  the 
very  first  <1  ng  the  pupil  the  satisfaction  of  reading 

connected  German  from  the  beginning. 

These  stories,  which  are  taken  from  the  author's  Vorwaerts, 
are  interesting,  carefully  graded,  and  closely  connected  with 
the  syntax  which  they  illustrate.  They  treat  the  most  com- 
mon and  some  of  tin-  quaintest  phases  of  German  life,  and  the 
descriptions  are  made  more  vivid  by  frequent  pictures,  col- 
lected in  Germany  by  the  author. 

No  effort  has  been  spared  to  make  the  grammar  practical, 
simple,  and  thorough.  Conversational  work  —  the  most  prac- 
phase  of  (lernuin  study  —  abounds  throughout  the  reading 
and  is  a  special  feature  of  every  lesson.  Material  for  memo- 
ri/ing  is  provided  at  the  beginning  of  each  chapter  in  the  form 
of  idioms,  proverbs,  or  short  poems.  German  questions  on 
the  reading  furnish  a  further  basis  for  conversation.  Practice 
in  writing  connected  German  is  given  in  each  review. 

The  book  is  especially  simple,  and  the  learner  is  given  all 
the  legitimate  help  possible.  Accents  and  puzzling  quantities 
are  marked,  so  that  the  pupil's  first  conception  of  a  word  may 
be  the  correct  one.  Comparisons  and  contrasts  with  English 
usage  are  constantly  made.  Each  phase  of  every  rule  is  illus- 
trated by  simple  examples.  Complete  tables  of  inflectional 
forms  and  strong  verbs  are  given  for  reference.  Every  form 
in  the  reading  occurs  in  the  vocabulary.  Separable  verbs  are 
found  under  both  simple  verb  and  prefix.  The  article  is  printed 
with  every  noun,  the  auxiliary  with  every  verb,  and  the  prin- 
cipal parts  of  irregular  verbs  are  given  in  full. 

iii 


iv  PREFACE. 

The  exercises  are  particularly  thorough.  The  sentences  are 
divided  into  several  groups,  each  of  which  illustrates  the  rules 
and  words  of  the  lesson.  Syntax  and  vocabulary  are  fixed  by 
oral  drill  in  German  and  in  English.  Every  fifth  lesson  is  a 
review  which  clinches  the  points  of  the  preceding  four  lessons. 

For  those  who  wish  to  make  a  thorough  study  of  German 
pronunciation  there  is  a  special  chapter  with  diagrams  and 
practical  hints.  The  Appendix  contains  rules  in  German  for 
those  who  wish  to  use  the  book  according  to  the  direct  method. 
These  rules  are  adapted  from  the  grammars  of  Wetzel,  Heyse- 
Lyon,  Martin-Vorbrodt,  and  Michaelis. 

The  vocabularies  are  limited  to  an  average  of  eight  words 
to  the  lesson,  a  number  which  any  pupil  can  easily  master. 
There  is  a  chapter  on  word  formation  and  a  simplified  state- 
ment of  Grimm's  Law  which  afford  an  opportunity  for  extend- 
ing this  vocabulary. 

The  book  contains  a  number  of  the  best-known  German 
songs  with  music,  and  a  double-page  colored  map  of  Germany. 
A  brief  chapter  on  phonetics  explains  this  subject  and  gives 

examples  of  phonetic  transcription. 

P.  V.  B. 

WELLESLEY  HILLS, 
April,  1916. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 

PAGE 

THE  GERMAN  ALPHABET x 

INTRODUCTION     .         .  '      .         .  .  .  .         .       xi 

MAP  OF  GERMANY following     xx 

EASY  READING 

In  der  Schule 1 

Der  nachste  Tag       ' 2 

Ein  Tag  im  Sommer 4 

• 

Im  Garten 6 

In  der  Klasse 7 

Wanderers  Nachtlied  .  Goethe        9 

Wanderer's  Night  Song       ...         .         .         ,         .  Longfellow        9 

Auf  dem  Spielplatz •  .         .         .10 

Im  Walde 11 

Die  Madchen 13 

Vor  der  Schule 15 

Das  Spiel 16 

Du  bist  wie  eine  Blume Heine       17 

Heidenroslein Goethe       18 

Spruch Ruckert       18 

In  der  Waldschule 19 

Die  Knaben  mit  den  Miitzen 21 

Im  Hause    .         .         . •         .22 

Das  Zimmer •         •         .24 

Karl  und  Johann  ' '•..--•         .26 

Spruch .     •  V       •  Greif      27 

Gute  Nacht ;         .        .         .       Korner      28 

Die  Prapositionen •         •         •        •         •       29 

In  derStadt .        .        .        •-- ;     -      30 

v 


VI  TABLE   OF   CONTENTS. 

PAGE 

Frische  Wurst     ...........  32 

Durch  Feld  und  Wald          .                  .     '    ......  34 

Die  Frauen  mit  dem  Holze          ........  35 

Das  Schloss  am  Meer          .......        Uhland  36 

Deutsche  Offiziere       ......      .....  38 

Ein  schbner  Feiertag  ........         .         .40 

Das  Veilchen      .........         Goethe  43 

Sprliche       .......         ...         Storm  44 

Die  Eisenbahn    ...........  45 

Auf  dem  Bahnhofe      .......  46 

Beim  Schneider  ...........  50 

• 

Barbarossa          .........      Ruckert  52 

Vergissmeinnicht         .......         Fallersleben  53 

Im  Spreewald      .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .54 

Etwas  anderes    .         .         .         .         .         .  •      .         .         .         .         .57 

Deutsche  Trachten      .....         .....  58 

Wiegenlied          ...         .         .         .         .         .         .         .-  Cornelius  60 

Schwalbeniied     .........         Sturm  61 

Auf  den  Strassen         ..........  62 

Auf  dem  Markt  ...........  65 

Erlkb'nig      ..........         Goethe  69 

Unter  den  Studenten  ......         .         .         .         .71 

Vor  Jena     .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .        Dreves  78 

Das  Wandern      ...........  79 

,  Einkehr       ..........        Uhland  87 

Ich  fahr'  in  die  Welt    ........       Scheffel  88 

Deutsche  Schlosser     ...         .......  89 

Wie  ist  doch  die  Erde  so  schb'n  ......       Reinick  99 

Guter  Rat   ..........      Fontane  100 

Wert  der  Muttersprache      .....         .                    Greif  100 

Die  Wartburg      ...........  101 


Piiret 


TABLE   OF   CONTENTS.  yii 

PAGE 

Spruch        .  Geibel  109 

Der  Wintersport 110 

Deutsche  Dome 113 

"Endlich"  .         .' 118 

SONGS 

Die  Lorelei Heine-Silcher  120 

Der  gute  Kamerad Uhland-Silcher  122 

Ich  bin  der  Doktor  Eisenbart Volkslied  123 

0  Tannenbaum Volkslied  124 

Friihlingsgruss Heine- Schubert  125 

Du  bist  wie  eine  Blume Heine- Ruben  stein  126 

Sah  ein  Knab'  ein  Rdslein  stehn          ....    Goethe-Werner  128 

Stille  Nacht Volkslied  129 

GRAMMAR 

LESSON 

I.  Present  of  tyafccu  and  fcitt       .....        e        .  131 

II.  Past  of  Ija&eit  and  fern    ........  133 

III.  Present  of  (often 136 

IV.  Past  of  foftett ,     ,         .         .  139 

V.  Review.    Present  of  feljeit        .......  141 

VI.   Past  of  fetyen ...     144 

VII.   Present  of  toerbeu 146 

VIII.  Past  of  toerben .     .        .        .        -149 

IX.  Future  Tense          .        .        .        .        .        .        .        .        .  .  151 

X.   Review.    Use  of  Present  for  Future 154 

XI.  Perfect  Tense  with  tyafteit      .         .        .        .        .        .        .157 

XII.    Perfect  Tense  with  fcitt 160 

XIII.  Past  Perfect  Tense .        .163 

XIV.  Future  Perfect  Tense ......        .166 

XV.  Review.    Outline  of  Declensions     .        .         *        .        .        .169 

XVI.  Prepositions  with  Dative  or  Accusative         .  .        .173 


viii  TABLE   OF   CONTENTS. 

PAGE 

XVII.    Personal  Pronouns 175 

XVIII.   Prepositions  with  Dative 178 

XIX.   Prepositions  with  Accusative   ^ 181 

XX.  Review.    Apposition         .        .        .                 .        .        .184 

XXI.   Strong  Declension  of  Adjectives 187 

XXII.  Weak  Declension  of  Adjectives 190 

XXIII.  Mixed  Declension  of  Adjectives       .        .        .        .        .     193 

XXIV.  Adjectives  after  tteldj,  fpUty,  etc 196 

XXV.   Review.    Summary  of  Adjectives 199 

XXVI.  Present  of  Modal  Auxiliaries  ......     203 

XXVII.   Past  and  Future  of  Modals .200 

XXVIII.   Perfect  Tenses  of  Modals 209 

XXIX.   Special  Uses  of  Modals 212 

XXX.   Review 215 

XXXI.  Possessive  Pronouns        .        .        .        .         «        .        .218 

XXXII.  Interrogative  Pronouns    .        .        .        .         .        .         .221 

XXXIII.  Demonstrative  Pronouns          ......    224 

XXXIV.  Inflected  Indefinites .    228 

XXXV.   Review ...     231 

.XXXVI.  Relative  Pronouns  .         .        .        .         .        .        .        .     234 

XXXVII.    Indirect  Questions 237 

XXXVIII.    Conjunctions .240 

XXXIX.    Dependent  Order  for  Modals 243 

XL.    Review 246 

XLI.    Separable  and  Inseparable  Verbs 249 

XLII.    Separable  and  Inseparable  Verbs 254 

XLIII.    Imperative 258 

XLIV.  Infinitives  and  Participles                               '.        .        .    261 

XLV.   Review 265 

XL VI.  Comparison  of  Adjectives  and  Adverbs  ....     268 

XLVII.    Numerals 272 

XT.VTTT  FI5IT7Q     Mnn+liG     r>g+aa                                                                                                           97ft 


TABLE   OF  CONTENTS.  ix 


PAGE 


XLIX.  Proper  Nouns 280 

L.  Review 282 

LI.  Passive  Voice 285 

LII.  Passive  Voice 289 

LIII.  Reflexive  Verbs 293 

LIV.  Impersonal  Verbs 296 

LV.  Review •  391 

LVI.  Subjunctive  of  Auxiliaries          ......  303 

LVII.  Subjunctive  of  Weak  and  Strong  Verbs     ....  307 

LVIII.  Subjunctive  of  Modals.    Conditions  of  Fact      .        .        .  310 

LIX.  Conditions  Contrary  to  Fact 313 

LX.  Review      ... 318 

LXI.  Genitive  and  Dative  Cases          ......  320 

LXII.  Verbals 323 

LXIII.  Word  Order 326 

LXIV.  Idiomatic  Particles     ........  330 

LXV.  Review  334 


LIST  OF  STRONG  AND  IRREGULAR  VERBS 337 

SUMMARY  OF  INFLECTIONS 343 

PRONUNCIATION 363 

WORD  FORMATION 377 

GRIMM'S  LAW     .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .        .         .384 

GERMAN  RULES 387 

PHONETICS 391 

GERMAN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY         .......  1 

ENGLISH-GERMAN  VOCABULARY         .......  51 

INDEX                                                                                                         .  77 


- 


(\    | 

v)     Jl 

a  f 

g  i 

2JJ  m 
3le  a  t 

Oe  a  6    (7 

lie  U  II    ^ 


THE  GERMAN   ALPHABET. 

German  type.     German  script.  Same.          German  type.      German  script.          lame. 

21  a 

®  b 

&  c 

2)  b 

g  e 

8  f 

©  9 

©  * 


ah 

91    n       ^ 

bay 

Do        C 

tsay 

*$     P        y 

day 

Q    q        C 

(b)ay 

$t    r        I 

ef 

®f«        ; 

gay 

£     t         > 

hah 

11    u       ^ 

ee 

93     b        £ 

yot 

23   »        <i 

kah 

X       5             c 

el 

2)   ») 

<: 

^          em 

3    3 

6 

ah-umlaut 

§ 

oh-umlaut 

i 

co-umlaut 

@c&       fd& 

6 


oh 
pay 

koo 

air 

es 

tay 

(t)oo 

fou(l) 

vay 

ix 

ipsilon 

tset 

es-tset 
tsay-kah 


INTRODUCTION. 

The  following  pages  give  in  a  general  way  the  pronuncia- 
tion of  German  letters.  For  a  more  detailed  treatment,  see 
§§  386-404. 

I.      VOWELS. 

(a)  Quality  and  Length  of  Sound.  —  Unlike  English  vowels, 
each  German  vowel  has  only  one  kind  of  sound.  This  sound 
varies  in  length.  The  five  German  vowels  may  be  long  or  short. 

(1)  They  are  usually  short  when  followed  by  two  or  more 
consonants  or  a  double  consonant :  bd§  SBaffer,  ba$  33ett,  ber 
gifd),  bie  SBotte,  ber  §unb. 

(2)  Otherwise  they  are  long,  especially  when  doubled  or 
followed  by  I) :  ber  SSater,  ba$  33eet,  ifynen,  tool)!,  tun. 

(3)  Some   monosyllables,    mostly    indeclinable,   have   a 
short  vowel  before  a  single  consonant :  an,  ab,  man,  in,  e$,  ob. 

The  chief  difference  between  the  pronunciation  of  long  and 
short  vowels  in  German  is  that  long  ones  are  pronounced  less 
vigorously  than  the  short.  The  short  vowels  are  uttered  with 
a  tenseness  —  they  are  almost  coughed  —  which  clips  them  short 
and  carries  the  sound  immediately  to  the  following  consonant. 

(6)  Pronunciation  of  Vowels. 
(1)  LONG. 

Long  a  as  in  father,  never  as  in /ate;       25ater,  aber. 
"     e  "    "  they,         "      "   "  he;         getytt,  2Beg. 
"     i  "    "   machine,  "      "    "  fine;       tfynen,  bir. 

«        n     "      «     /nn//>  •  (Krtfitt.  fftfifttt. 


xii  INTRODUCTION. 

(2)  SHORT. 

Short  a  as  in  a(haj,  never  as  in  fat;        ZBaffer, 
"    e  "    "  net;  toenn,  genfter. 

«     i  "    "  pin;  gifdj,  id)  bin. 

"    a  "    "   obey;  @onne,  Doll. 

"    u  "    "  put,          "     "   "  fun;      gfa§,  2fttttter. 
German  final  unaccented  e  is  like  English  final  unaccented  a. 
Pronounce  Grcf e  to  rhyme  with  Mecca,  tfyre  like  era.    $  *s  foun<l 
only  in  foreign  words ;  it  is  pronounced  like  t. 

(c)  Umlaut.  —  When  in  Old  and  Middle  High  German  a  stem 
whose  vowel  was  a,  0,  It,  or  ail  was  followed  by  a  suffix  con- 
taining the  vowel  t  (later  e)  the  sound  of  the  stem  vowel1 
was  modified,  becoming  more  like  the  vowel  in  the  ending. 
Thus  a,  Of  II,  or  ail  came  to  be  spoken  a,  3,  ii,  or  ait  (Old  High 
German,  fallu,  fellis,  fellit;  Middle  High  German,  valle, 
vellest,  vellet ;  New  High  German,  fatte,  fdtteft,  fftttt).  This 
change  of  sound  is  called  Umlaut. 

(</)  Pronunciation  of  Umlaut  Vowels.  —  (1)  Short  a  is  like  e 
in  met;  long  a  is  properly  the  same  quality  of  sound,  only 
longer.  It  is  a  pure  sound,  not  like  a  in  late,  but  more  like  the 
first  e  in  there,  or  ai  in  faith  when  spoken  with  Irish  brogue.  In 
North  Germany,  however,  it  is  coming  to  be  spoken  more  and 
more  like  long  e  except  to  distinguish  similar  forms.  Pro- 
nounce :  Me  aftdnner,  Me  SBcitber  ;  gafynen,  iMtjlen.  Distinguish 
carefully :  Slfyre,  (gfyre  ;  jafye,  fefye. 

(2)  Short  3  has  the  lips  rounded  as  in  short  0  and  the 
tongue  in  the  position  for  short  e  (e  in  met) ;  long  3  has  the 

1  The  best  English  illustration  of  Umlaut  is  the  difference  we  make 
in  pronouncing  the  o  in  looman,  when  we  speak  the  plural  form,  women. 
The  change  in  the  last  vowel  affects  the  sound  of  the  first. 


INTRODUCTION.  Xlii 

lips  rounded  in  the  position  for  long  0  (whistling  position)  and 
the  tongue  in  the  position  for  long  c  (Sftel)!).  Pronounce: 
bte  §otte,  offnen,  bie  §oli(e,  bie  £)fen.  Distinguish  carefully: 
§5tte;  fyette ;  fimnen,  fcnnen  ;  §ol)lett,  fyefjlen. 

(3)  Short  it  has  the  lips  rounded  as  in  short  u  and  the 
tongue  in  the  position  for  short  i  (i  in  pin) ;  long  u  has  the 
lips  rounded  as  in  long  u  (whistling  position)  and  the  tongue 
in  the  position  for  long  i  (i  in  machine).     Pronounce :  bte  £)ittte, 
f  i'ttten,  bie  §itte,  f itf)(en.    Distinguish  carefully :  Stiffen,  Siffen  ; 
Sitfte,  $ifte ;  mitffen,  tntffen. 

(4)  The  diphthong  ait  is  pronounced  just  like  eit* 

(5)  Notice  that  in  every  case  an  Umlaut-vowel  has  the 
same  lip  position  as  the  corresponding  non-umlauted  vowel, 
but  the  tongue  is  raised  nearer  the  position  for  i  (see  Fig.  1, 
p.  .S64).     As  this  i  was  originally  the  sound  of  the  following 
syllable,  we  may  say  that  the  tongue  began  to  prepare  for  the 
ending  while  pronouncing  the  vowel  of  the  stem.     Thus  Um- 
laut may  be  called  an  assimilation  of  the  stem  vowel  to  the 
vowel  of  the  ending. 

(e)  Diphthongs  are  pronounced  about  as  shown  below.     For 
more  specific  directions  see  §§  391-392. 

( Satfer. 


'hi 
et  J 


like  ai  in  aisle;       s  _. 

1  (gutter,  em, 

(Ut  like  ou  in  house;          §att$,  fdttt, 

cu  i  ..  ftreu,  8eute. 

\  like  01  in  toil;         \  „  „   P      ,„ 
ait  J  .1  Qanfa,  tauten, 


(f)  Digraphs.  —  In  English  we  have  many  double  vowels 
for  single  sounds,  as  in  the  words  each,  heart,  heard,  believe, 
receive,  and  so  on.  German  has  but  few  'of  these  digraphs. 
They  are  ic,  pronounced  like  long  i;  aa,  pronounced  like 


XIV  INTRODUCTION. 

long  a;  CC,  pronounced  like  long  e ;  DO,  pronounced  like  long  o, 
All  these  digraphs  are  used  merely  to  show  by  the  spelling 
that  a  sound  is  long.  They  are  employed  usually  where  a 
simple  vowel  would  naturally  be  short,  (gie,  triel,  bie  ©ddt, 
ber  @aal,  ba3  JBcct,  ba$  afteer,  ba§  Soot. 

H.      CONSONANTS. 

(a)  Classification  of  Consonants.  —  German  consonants  are 
classified  in  three  different  ways :  (1)  according  to  the  kind  of 
sound  they  make;  (2)  according  to  the  vibration  of  the  vocal 
cords  during  the  sound;  and  (3)  according  to  the  place  of  the 
sound  in  the  mouth. 

(1)  According  to  the  first  classification  I  and  t  are  called 
liquids;  m,  tt,  and  n<J,  nasals.     The  remaining  consonants  are 
either  stops  or  spirants.     A  stop  is  produced  by  a  short  puff 
following  a  complete  closure  of  the  oral  passage ;    as  6,  b, 
jff  t,  ty.     In  pronouncing  a  spirant,  the  breath  passes  through 
a  narrow  opening,  producing  a  hissing  or  buzzing  sound ;  as 

f,  f, »,  w. 

(2)  A  consonant  is  voiced  if  the  vocal  cords  vibrate  in 
producing  it,  as  m,  6,  b ;  otherwise  it  is  voiceless,  as  3,  f,  p,  t* 
This  vibration   can   best   be  felt   by  putting   the  fingers  on 
the  throat.     Compare  zeal  (z  voiced),  seal  (s  voiceless) ;   van 
(v  voiced),  fan  (/voiceless) ;  bat  (b  voiced),  pat  (p  voiceless). 

(3)  A  consonant  is  guttural  if  it  is  produced  between  the 
back  part  of  the  tongue  and  the  soft  palate ;  as  g  in  good,  ck 
in  luck.     If  produced  in  a  similar  way,  but  farther  forward,  it 
is  palatal;  as  y  in  year.     It  is  dental  if  produced  between  the 
fore  part  of  the  tongue  and  the  upper  teeth ;  as  d,  t.     It  is 
labial  if  produced  between  the  lips ;  as  b,  p. 


INTRODUCTION.  XV 

(6)  Pronunciation  of  Consonants.  —  (1)  Of  the  consonants, 
f,  I),  f,  I,  m,  n,  p,  q,  t,  and  £,  and  generally  6  and  b,  are  pro- 
nounced as  in  English :  baben,  £)tebe,  fyolen,  beten,  Iran!,  2ftann, 
^aar,  quer,  §eye,  finben*  But  at  the  end  of  a  word  or  part  of 
a  compound  word,  and  before  voiceless  consonants,  6  is  pro- 
nounced like  p,  and  b  like  t.  Thus,  ab,  Job,  Slbjtdjt,  SKabdjen, 
er  Itebt,  bit  Itibft,  grdbft,  Iteb,  are  pronounced  as  if  written  ap, 
2ot,  3lpfi^t,  aWStdjen,  er  (iept,  etc. 

(a)  bt  like  t:  @tabt,  gefanbt. 

(b)  I)  after  an  accented  vowel  is  silent:    $ulj,  (a^ 
fitf)Iett. 

(c)  rf  like  fe:  @to<f,  $RU(fen. 

(2)  Simple  c  is  found  only  in  foreign  words. 

(a)  c  before  a,  0,  It,  or  a  consonant,  like  k:   Safe, 
Satlrin,  Sana!,  @ontre,  Sretne.     In  the  latest  offi- 
cial spelling  it  is  largely  supplanted  by  jf, 

(b)  c  before  e,  t,  S,  or  8,  like  te :  geber,  gtcero,  Siifar* 
In  the  latest  official  spelling  it  is  largely  sup- 
planted by  %. 

(3)  d)  is  a  voiceless  spirant.     It  has  two  different  sounds 
not  found  in  English. 

(a)  After  a,  0,  tt,  CM,  it  is  guttural,  as  in  Scotch  loch  : 

33ucf),  £>adf),  bocf),  aurf). 
(6)  After   other  vowels  and  after  consonants  it  is 

palatal :  8td)t,  redjt,  id),  toelfy. 

Note.  To  pronounce  the  guttural  rf),  raise  the  back  of  the  tongue  till 
it  almost  touches  the  soft  palate  and  expel  the  breath  forcibly.  To  pro- 
nounce the  palatal  dj,  raise  the  tongue  to  the  position  for  ee  in  feet  and 
breathe  out.  Do  not  pronounce  dj  like  English  k  or  sh. 


xvi  INTRODUCTION. 

(4)  d)3  at  the  end  of  a  root-syllable  is  pronounced  like  ks: 
£)acf)3,  $11(1)3*     But  where  the  $  is  added  as  an  ending,  as  in 
ba$  SRetd),  be$  3tetrf)3,  the  d)  retains  its  proper  sound. 

(5)  dj  in  foreign  words  is  like  k  or  sh  :  k  in  Greek  words, 
as  @I)or,  Shrift,  Sfjaralter  ;  s/i  in  French  words,  as  Sfyarabe, 
Sniffer,  (Sfyocofabe.     In  the  latest  official  spelling  French  d)  is 
largely  supplanted  by  ©d):  Sdjarabe,  @d)ofotabe. 

(6)  g  has  three  different  sounds. 

(a)  When  doubled,  or  at  the  beginning  of  a  word  or 
syllable,  it  is  pronounced  like  the  English  g  in 
go:  geben,  grim,  gtogge,  Sage,  £nge. 

(6)  When  final,  after  a,  9,  tt,  or  att,  it  is  a  voiceless 
guttural  spirant,  like  d)  in  ad)  (II.,  (6),  3,  a):  £ag, 


(c)  When  final,  after  c,  t,  Ct,  a,  8,  or  a  consonant,  it  is  a 
voiceless  palatal  spirant,  like  d)  in  id)  (II.,  (6), 
3,  6)  :  $5ntg,  2Beg,  £etg,  «erg. 

1.     Officially  final  g  is  like  f  in  (b)  and  (c),  but  few  Germans 
pronounce  it  that  way. 

Note  2.     In  gfc,  gtr  and  gft,  g  has  the  same  sound  as  above  in  (2) 
and  (3)  :  2ftagb,  er  fagte,  fticgt,  bu  btegft. 

(7)  ng  is  always  pronounced  like  ng  in  singer,  never  like 
ng  in  hunger:  ginger,  fingen,  fang,  brtngen, 

(8)  I  like  y  in  yes  :  $afy,  ja. 

(9)  p^  is  pronounced  like  f,  by  which  it  is  being  gradu- 
ally supplanted  :  ^3^tlo[opt),  (Slefant,  Sfen. 

(10)  t  is  always  pronounced  sharply  and  distinctly.     It 
is  either  guttural  or  trilled  with  the  tip  of  the  tongue.     It  must 
never  be  slurred,  as  in  English,  fuhthah  for  further. 

(11)  German  f,  3  has  three  pronunciations  just  like  the 
three  of  English  s. 


INTRODUCTION.  xvii 

(a)  When  at  the  end  or  next  to  the  end  of  a  sylla- 
ble, or  when  doubled,  it  is  like  s  in  see:  e$, 
ttm$,  bift,  fyaft,  laffen. 

(6)  When  at  the  beginning  of  a  syllable  it  is  like 
s  in  rose:  fefyen,  ber  @aat,  bie  3Jofe,  ber  Unfinn. 

(c)  When  f  begins  an  accented  syllable  whose  second 
letter  is  t  or  p,  it  is  like  s  in  sugar:  fteljen,  fpre* 
d)en  are  pronounced  as  if  spelled  fd)tel)en,  [djpre- 
cfyen. 

Note.  For  those  not  using  German  script,  the  distinction  between 
j  and  3  is  immaterial.  Those  who  write  German  script  should  remember 
to  use  3  at  the  end  of  a  word  or  of  a  stem  syllable,  f  in  all  other  cases. 

(12)  fd)  like  sh  in  ship:  @rf)tff,  tmfdjen. 

(13)  ft  is  like  ss:  (Scfyfoft. 

(a)  After  a  short  vowel,  ft  is  changed  to  ff  when  an 
ending  beginning  with  a  vowel  is  added  :  (Scfyloft, 
@rf)(offer. 

(b)  After  a  long  vowel  or  a  diphthong  or  before  a 
consonant,  it  remains  unchanged  :  guft,  $U  fje,  id) 
toetjs,  id)  muftte. 

(14)  ti  before  another  vowel  in  foreign  words  is  like  tsee: 
Nation,  patient. 

(15)  tf}  is  like  t:    Sweater,  ©oetye. 

JVbte.  In  all  but  foreign  words  and  proper  names  the  silent  ty  after  t 
has  recently  been  dropped.  But  pupils  should  be  prepared  to  meet  it  in 
newspapers  and  letters  and  in  all  but  the  most  recent  books. 


(16)  *§  is  like  ts:  fi^en,  blifeen, 

(17)  t>  is  like  /:  23ater,  23ogef,     But  in  foreign  words  it 
is  pronounced  like  English  v  :  33enit$,  SSerattba,  3Serbum, 

(18)  to  is  like  English  v  in  vice:  ttrir,  SBotf. 


xviii  INTRODUCTION. 

(19)  5  is  like  ts  in  hats:  ju,  ^ett,  @eri*     For  ||  and  ij,  see 
(13)  and  (16). 

(20)  In  pf,  git,  and  ftt,  both  letters  must  be  distinctly 
enunciated,  as  in  English,  hopfarm.  ignoble,  banknote:   *i)3ferb, 
®nabe,  Sna&e* 

HI.      SYLLABICATION. 

In  general,  words  are  divided  into  syllables  as  they  are 
spoken  when  articulated  slowly  :  ©e-fdjledj-ter,  gr  ewt'be$'trette. 

(a)  Compound  words  are  divided  according  to  their  compo- 
nent parts  :  I)tn=au3,  £)ten$*tag. 

(6)  Otherwise  a  single  simple  sound  (including  j  and  5)  goes 
with  the  following  vowel  :  33it'd)er,  SBa-frfje,  et-nen,  ret'gen. 

(c)  Of  several  consonants  the  last  one  goes  with  the  follow- 
ing vowel,  except  that  the  combination  ft  is  not  divided:  gin* 
ger,  2BaHer,  [it^en,  ^nof^e,  Stable,  be*fte,  meHte,  gentler. 


IV.      PUNCTUATION   AND   CAPITALIZATION. 

German  rules  for  punctuation  and  capitalization  are  much 
like  English,  especially  in  regard  to  the  beginning  of  a  sen- 
tence, the  use  of  the  period,  colon,  quotation  marks,  interroga- 
tion point,  and  so  on. 

(a)   TJie  comma  is  used  more  frequently  in  German. 

(1)  Relative    clauses    are    always    set    off    by    commas 
(§  204,  c). 

(2)  In  many  compound  sentences  where  English  omits 
the  comma,  German  uses  it  to  separate  the  two  parts  of  the 
sentence. 


INTRODUCTION.  xix 

(6)   The  exclamation  point  is  also  commoner  in  German  than 
in  English. 

(1)  A  command  is  always  followed  in  German  by  an 
exclamation  point  (§  78). 

(2)  The  address  inside  a  letter,  as  Dear  Carl,  is  often 
followed  by  an  exclamation  point:  Sieber 


(c)  German  begins  all  nonns  with  a  capital. 

(1)  When  an  adjective,  verb,  or  other  part  of  speech  is 
used  as  a  noun,  it  is  always  written  with  a  capital. 

(2)  On  the  other  hand,  when  nouns  have  lost  their  noun 
force  they  are  written  small  (§  175). 

((/)  The  formal  pronoun  ©ie  and  its  possessive  Qfy  always 
begin  with  a  capital,  though  its  reflexive  fief)  is  small. 

(1)  The  pronoun  bu  and  its  plural  il)r,  with  the  posses- 
sives  and  reflexives,  beitter,  eiter,  bid),  and  eudf),  are  written 
small  except  in  letters,  where  they  are  capitalized 

(e)  Adjectives  are  capitalized  after  etftw$  and  nid)t3  (§  191, 
a  and  e). 

V.     GERMAN   EQUIVALENTS   FOR  GRAMMATICAL 
TERMS. 

The  letter  (of  the  alphabet),  ber  23urf)'ftabe. 

The  vowel,  ber  SBofaf  ,  or  ber  ©elbff  taut. 

The  consonant,  ber  $onfoncmt',  or  ber  3ftit'taut 
The  sentence,  ber  @a^* 

The  subject,  ba3  (Subjeff;  the  predicate,  ba3  ^Jrabifaf* 

The  main  clause,  ber 

The  subordinate  clause,  ber 


XX  INTRODUCTION. 

The  parts  of  speech,  bte  9?e'betetfe. 
The  article,  ber  Slrti'fel,  or  ba3  ©efd&Ie 
Definite,  beftttnmt';  indefinite,  un'befttmmt 
The  noun,  ba$  ©ub'ftanttt),  or  ba$  §aupt'tt)ort 
First,  second,  third  class,  er'fte,  gtoet'te,  brtt'te  Sfaffe. 
The  pronoun,  ba§  ^rono'men,  or  ba$  gitr'toort 
The  adjective,  ba$  Slb'ielttt),  or  ba$  @i'genfdjaft§toort 
The  numeral,  ba$  Dtatera'fe,  or  ba§  3a^'tDort. 
The  adverb,  bd$  3lbt)erb',  or  ba$  Um'ftanb^n)ort, 
The  verb,  ba^  SSer'bOnn),  or  ba§  3e^/n)ort» 

Strong,  (tar!;  weak,  fdjlDarf) ;  separable,  trenn'bar;  in- 
separable, un'trennbar;  transitive,  trcmftttt/;  intransi- 
tive, intranfitit)'. 

The  preposition,  bte  ^rapofitton',  or 
The  conjunction,  bte  ^onjunftton',  or  ba$ 
The  interjection,  bte  ^ttterjeftion',  or  ba^ 
The  gender,  ba$  ®efd)Iecf)f:    masculine,  mann'tirf) ;  feminine, 

iDetbltd) ;  neuter,  ftid^Urf). 
The  number,  bie  3<*I)l'form' 
Singular,  ber  (Singular',  or  bte 
Plural,  ber  ^(u'raf,  or  bte 
The  case,  ber  gatt  (pi.  bte 

The  nominative,  ber  Sto'mttiatit) ;  genitive,  ber  ©e'ntttt) ;  da- 
tive, ber  £)a'tto ;  accusative,  ber  2lf  fufatfo. 
The  inflection,  bte  SMe'gung  ;  to  decline,  bellinte'ren* 

The    declension,    bte    £)ef(tnattott' ;    strong,    ftarf ;     weak, 

f(^tt)a(^ ;  mixed,  gemtfd)t. 

To  conjugate,  fonjugte'ren ;  conjugation,  bte  ^oniugation'. 
The  comparison,  bie  $omj)arattott',  or  bte  ©tet'genwg  ;  to  com- 
pare, ftet'gent ;  positive,  ber  ^5o'ftttD ;  comparative,  ber 
;  superlative,  ber  ©u'pertattt). 


/  1 

THE  GERMAX  EMPIRE 

since  1871 

SCALE  OF  MILES 


EASY  READING. 


Ein  Schiller. 


for 


ift  fjier.  ($r  ift  in  ber  ©djnte,  Der  Scorer  ift  and) 
f)ier.  grife  unb  ber  8e!)rer  finb 
fjier.  @ie  finb  in  ber  @djnfet 

bin  ber  8eljrer*     3^% 
bift  bit?"  5 

„$&)  bin   ber  ©filler.     34 
bin  ^ier,    S3ir  finb  ^ier  in  ber 


feib  bic  .  ©d^tilcr,  nic^t 


r,3fa,  i^ir  finb  Me  ©djftler." 
w!Cic  ©fitter  finb  atfc  in  ber 


^^ci,  fie  finb  attc  ^ier." 

J)er  8c^rcr  ^at  ein  Surf), 
Su^  ift  l^ier  in  ber  ©d^ute. 
^at  cmcl)  ein  S5ud^.    35ie 
fyaben  geber  nnb  papier, 

,f§at  ber  ©chiller  ein 

W3a,  nnb  er  ^at  and)  geber  nnb 
papier," 

,(§abt  if)r  afle  geber  nnb  ^a^ 


@ie  finb  ^ier," 


,,$a,  tt)ir  I)aben  gcbcr  unb 
rrgrife,  iDa^-^aft  bn?" 

r,3?d»  ^abe  ein  fflud&.    3)ie  ©pilfer  f)aben  geber  nnb 

i 


25 


EASY  .BEADING. 


5)er  Cefyrer  ift  fyier  in  ber  ©cfyufe.    (Sr  fyat  ein 
©cfyitter  finb  and)  fyier.    @ie  fyaben  geber  unb  papier. 
8efyrer  fyat  ba$  33ucfy,  unb  bie  @c^it(er  fyaben  ba^  papier, 

,,©eib  ifyr  ade  fyier?" 

5     n$&r  tofr  \wb  a^e  fyi^^«" 

rfUnb  ifyr  fyabt  afie  geber  unb  papier,  nidf)t 
^^a,  n)ir  fyaben  atle  geber  unb  papier." 
w@ut!    SBtr  f^reiben!" 


In  der  Schule. 


Der  nadjfte 


nnb  fiarl  finb  Sriiber*    @ie  finb  and)  ©dourer,    @ie 
10  finb  gut.    £)ie  @cf)uler  finb  fyier  in  ber  ©c^ute,    5)er  Secret 
ift  and)  in  ber  ©d&ule. 

(,  ^aben  ©ie  einen  Sruber  unb  eine  ©c^tocftcr?" 


DER   NACHSTE   TAG. 


,,$a,  id)  fyabe  jmei  33ritber  nnb  eine  Sdjmefter." 

,,9S?o  maren  fie  geftern?" 

,,@te  maren  sn  @anfe.    3Keine  Sautter  tt)ar  au^  ju 

,,llnb  mo  maren  @te  geftern?" 

ff$tf)  mar  t)ter  in  ber  ©civile." 

ff@o  ?    SBaren  @ie  geftern  fjier?'' 


Eine  deutsche  Schule. 

£)er  Scorer  mar  geftern  in  ber  ©djule.    (gr  tjatte  geber 
nub '  papier,    tart  mar  and)  geftern  in  ber  ©djute.    gr  ^atte 

geber  nnb  papier,    grife  ^atte  ein  ®uc^. 
,ftart,  ma§  fatten  @ie  geftern  l)ier  in  ber  ®^ule?"  w 

,,3?d)  tjatte  geber  nnb  papier." 
rrUnb  ma^  {)atte  gri^?    gr  Ijatte  ein  «n^r  nit^t  ma^r?" 
ff^a,  er  ^atte  ein  Snc^.    £)a3  33nt^  mar  btau." 
w@tc  fatten  and)  ein  Sn^,  nid^t  mafjr?" 
n$a,  aber  id)  ^attc  ba$  Snc^  jn  ©aufc."  '5 


EASY   READING. 


,,2Bo  fjatten  ©ie  bie  geber?" 

„$<$)  fyatte  bie  geber  fyier  in  ber  ©djule,  aber  ba$  Surf)  jit 
gaufe," 

gri£  unb  $arl  tDaren  Sritber.  ©ie  fatten  etne  ®c()ti)eftei\ 
5  £)ie  SBiuttcr  unb  bie  ©t^njcftcr  toaren  ju  ©aufc.  gril^  unb 
Sari  ttwren  in  ber  ©c^ule.  ©ie  fatten  geber  unb  papier. 

€tn  Cag  tin  Sontiner. 

©  ift  toarm.  @^  ift  ©ommcr.  '3)er  ©ontmer  tft  mann. 
Slber  ber  SBinter  ift  nid)t  itjarm.  $fy  fobe  ben  ©omnter. 


Der  Lehrer  und  die  Schiiler. 


@«  ift  toarm  in  ber  ©rf)u(e.     3)ie  ©fitter  ftnb  nirf)t  in 
10  ber  ©djule.    @ie  finb  ^ier.     Der  gefyrer  ift  auc^  ^ier.    @r 
(obt  bie  ©rf)uler.    &  fagt  : 

,  ©ie  lernen.    Qfy  (obe  ©ie/' 
©ie  loben  and)  meinen  53ruberr  nicfyt  ti)a()r?" 


EIN   TAG   IM    SOMMER. 


£)er  I'eljrer  fagt  :  f,$a,  ber  33rnber  lernt  and).    Semen  @te 
hn  Sotnmer,  3°^™?" 

,f"){ein,  e#  ift  511  luarm  tin  ©ommer.    Qfy  terne  nicfyt  im 
Sommcr/ 

Wra^  in  bem  Jyelbe  ift  grun  im  ©omtner.    3°^tts 

fpielt  im  @ommer  unb 
Icrnt  im  Sinter,  Slber 
bie  ©d)tDefter  lernt  im 
Sommer  unb  auc^  im 
Sinter.  £)er  getter 
tobt  bie  @c^it)cftcr. 


Die  Schwester. 


Sie  im  ©ommer?" 
wgBir  fpielen  «aC." 
,,Unb  IDO  fpieten  ©ie  15 
Caff?11 

n$d)  fpiele  in  bem 
gelbe  niit  tneinem  33m- 
ber/' 

,,ginben  @ie  33tnmen  20 
in  bem  gelbe  ?w 
.  ,f3fa,  tt)ir  fjaben  9?ofen 
in  bem  gelbe.    2Birfin= 
ben  au^  tinmen  in  bem 
®ra$,     ®a^  ®ra^  in  25 
bem  $elbe  ift  grim,  abcr 
bie  Sfnmen  finb  blau." 


wllnb  fpielt  bie  @c^tt)cftcr  ancf)  in  bem 
ff^einr  i^  fage  jn  metner  ©d^tocftcr:  '©nlernft,  nnb  ttrir 
fpiefen  S&all.'    @ie  loben  meine  @d)tt)efter,  nicf)t  tt)a{jr?^         3° 
,,3<a,  ic^  (obe  alle  ©fitter,  toenn  fie  ternen." 


EASY   READING. 


3m  (Bartett 

£)er  ©arten  ift  fdjon.  35a$  ®ra$  im  ©arten  ift  grim. 
SKein  33ruber  .3'oljcmn  unb  id)  fpielten  fyeute  im  ©arten.  &Hr 
fpietten  mit  einem  33oote  tm  SSaffer. 

3lber  tnein  Sruber  Sari  unb  nteine  Scfytoefter  2lnna  fernten. 
5  ©te  lernten  gut,  unb  metn  i5ater  lobte  |te.  @r  [agte : 

,,2lnna  unb  Sart  lernen  gut.  grife  unb  3^^ann  lernten 
geftern  gut,  aber  fie  fptetten  fjeute  mtt  etnem  Soote  im 
©arten." 


Im  Garten. 


toar 


,,2lber  3Saterr  e^  toar  ^eute  fe^r  ft^on  im  ©arten. 
10  geftern  nifyt  fefyr  fd^Sn.    SSir  [pielten  geftern  ntdfjt." 

^^a,  aber  bu  fpielteft  I)eute  im  ©arten,  unb  ^o^ann  fyielte 
aucf).    Sart  unb  9Inna  lernten  fyeute  gu  @aufe.    Q$  fobte  fie." 

ff?ernten  ^art  unb  3Inna  au§  etnem  SSnfy  ?u 

,,$a,  fie  fatten  ein  53u(i)  unb  eine  geber.    @ie  tt)aren  auf 
15  einer  33anf  .    ©ie  lernten  gut.    2Ba$  lerntet  i^r  ?" 


IN   DER   KLASSE. 


,,3of)ann  unb  id)  ternten  ntdjt.    SBtr  tyielten  fjente  int 
ten*    2Bir  ternten  geftern.    &  tjatte  ein  93u^  in  ber  §anb, 
nnb  id)  Ijatte  and)  ein  Suc^." 

GS  luar  Ijeute  fe^r  [c^on  tm  ©arten.     gri^  nnb  ^oljann 
jpieften,  aber  *2lnna  nnb  Sari  (ernten  im  §anfe.    @ie  fernten  5 
anf  einer  Sanf.    S5a^  33nd)  n)ar  anf  bem  ^JJnlte, 

2lber  gri^  nnb  3ol)ann  lernten  Ijente  nic^t.  ©ie  f|)ielten  mit 
einem  33oote  tm  SBaffer.  Unb  fie  lernten  nidjt  2)er  3Sater 
(obte  9(nna  nnb  Sart,  aber  er  lobte  ^ri^  nnb  ^o^ann  nid)t 


In  der  Klasse. 

3n  ber  Klaffc. 

@ef)en  @ie  bie  ©d^UIer  in  ber  Piaffe  ?    £)ie  Sinter  fernen  10 
£)er  8ef)rer  ift  an^    ^ier,     @r  fprid)t  mit  ben 


,,©el)r  tuenig,  aber  id)  fprecfye 


EASY   READING. 


©pred)en  bie  ©critter  £)entfd)V" 
Qa,  fie  tyredjen  nnb  lefcn  £)ent[dj." 
i£  fiefyt  ben  Sefyrer  ntd)t,  aber  ber  gefyrer  fiefyt 
auf  einer  ^Banf.    S)cr  Setter  fprid)t  gu  gri^.    gr  fagt 


,,^ar  aber  id)  fprecfje  e^  ntd)t  fe()r  gut." 


Wo  Goethe  ''liber  alien  Gipfeln  "  schrieb. 


,,Unb  fortdjt  bein  33rnber  tarf 

,,Sr  fpricfyt  ^entfd)  in  ber  Staffe,  nnb  er  Heft  i 
@r  ternt  fcfjr  gnt." 
10     ,,2Ba3  (eft  if)r  in  ber  $(affe?" 

ff2Bir  (efen  ein  33nd^.    S3  ift  ^ter." 

®a^  53n^  toar  b(an.    3)er  Se^rer  (obte  ba$ 
8ef)rer  (obte  anc^  ^ri^.    Sari  ttar  in  ber  Sfaffe,  aber  er  lobte 
fetnen  ^Brnber  nicfyt    @r  fagte : 


WANDERERS   NACHTLIED  9 


fprtdjt  nidjt  gnt,  unb  er  HefLfcl)*  menig." 
,,2lber  er  fpridjt  iSngltfd),"  fagte  ber  Setter. 
,,2Btr  fpredjen  atte  (gtifllifd),  aber  grtfe  Ueft  fefyr  toentg 


lefcn  etc  f)ter,  J)eut(c^  ober 
lefc  mein  «ud)  ^ier.    ^c^  lefe 
tieft  ba^  33u^,    gr  Heft  ©eutfd)  etn  menig,  aber  er 
fprid)t  e^  ntc^t  [e^r  gut. 


IDanfcerers 

liber  aflen  ©ipfefn 

ift  9iu^ 

in  alien  SBtyfeln 

fpitreft  bit 

!anm  etnen  §andj ; 

bie  2?ogelein  f^metgen  un  SBalbe. 

SBarte  nnr,  balbe 

bn  and).  —  3ol]ann  IPoIfgang  i?on  (Soetfye. 


Wanderer's  Night  Song. 

O'er  all  the  hill-tops 

Is  quiet  now, 

In  all  the  tree-tops 

Hearest  thou 

Hardly  a  breath ; 

The  birds  are  asleep  in  the  trees ; 

Wait ;  soon  like  these 

Thou  too  shalt  rest.  —  LONGFELLOW. 


10 


EASY   READING. 


bem 

Sir  toaren  geftern  auf  bem  ©piefyta^.    SBtr  fafyen  bie 
©cpler.    @ie  ubten  mit  2lrmen  unb  fanben  nnb 


144J1 

••-    L  ..^  -^«ffl 


Auf  dem  Spielplatz. 

?el)rer  mar  auc^  auf  bem  ®piefyla£.    Sr  fpra^  ju  ben 


5     f,2Ba^  taten  Ste  geftern?"  fagte  ber  8e^rer. 
f,9Btr  itbten,"  fagten  bie  ©filler, 
ff@ie  fatten  alle  3J?it^en,  nic^t  tua^r?    SBo  fanben  ©ie  bie 


,,2Bir  fanben  fie  ju  §anfe." 
10     f,Unb  ttm$  taten  @ie  bann?" 
,,2Bir  famen  in  bie  ©cljule/ 
,,llnb  tt)a^  taten  ©ie  bann?" 
,,2Bir  itbten  anf  bem 


IM   WALDE. 


11 


,,Ubten  @ie  mit  ben  2lrmen  unb  giiften?" 
,,$a,  unb  urir  Ubten  and)  mit  ben  §cinben." 
£)ie  ©cfjuter  fanben  ben  8el)rer  auf  bent  ©ptefyfa^     gr 
fat)  fie.    gr  fprarf)  Seutfct).    ®ie  Sinter  lafcn  (SngHfcf)  in 


Die  Schiller  iiben. 


ber  @d)ule,  aber  fie  fpra^en  J)entfc^    auf  bem 
ber  Sefjrer  Ia^  gnglifc^  unb  fpra^ 

3m  IPalbe. 


g^  ift  fyeute  fef)t  fe^5n.    S)a^  ©ra$  trirb  griin  unb  ber 
(gomnter  tmrb  warm.    2lber  e^  ift  fitl)I  int  SBalbe. 

§ier  im  SBalbe  finb  bie  TOab^en.    £)ie  Gutter  finb  nic^t 
^ier.    (Sie  finb  ju  §aufe.    9lur  bie  Xodjter  ber  3)littter  finb  10 
im  SBalbe. 


12 


EASY   READING. 


£)te  £od)ter  fpieten  itn  SBalbe,     @ie   fincjen  itnb  tanjen* 
(53    itrirb   toarm,  itnb  fie   inerben  mitbe.    £)ie    £tid)ter  be$ 
8el)rer3  finb  ^ter,  aber  bcr  Server  tft  ntdjt  fjier.    @r  tft  in  ber 
©djule, 
5     f,2Berben  bie  Softer  be3  ge^rer^  mube?" 

unb  tanjen.    Sie  tDerben  fefjr  mitbe." 


Die  Tochter  tanzen. 

bie  Xd^ter  be^  £el)rer$  f c^5n  ?" 
ein,  fie  finb  nid)t  fd)i)n,  aber  fie  toerben  fd^dn,  nid^t 
malt?11 
10     /f3^r  fic  mcrben  fd^fin." 

w@^  nrirb  toarm  im  SBalbe,  nic^t  n?al)r  ?" 
,,%lnn,  ba^  gelb  tnirb  marm,  aber  e^  ift  fitljl  im  SBalbe," 
@^  tt)irb   fpat     3)ie  Xd^ter   be^  Seljrer^  tDerben  ntitbe, 
@tc  fpielen  nnb  tanjen  }e^t  ni^t.    !Der  9Sa(b  nrirb  fitf)I, 
bie  9)iab(^en  getjen 


DIE   MADCHEN. 

Die 


13 


2Btr  itwren  geftern  im  SBatbe.    333ir  fafyen  bie  3ftabd)en  ba. 

toar  toarm,  aber  e$  ttntrbe  fait,     3)te  3JJdbd^en  f|)tetten» 

murben  rot  unb  mube. 
£)te  9J?abd)en  finb  je^t  in  ber  Sc^ufe.    @te  fptelen  unb 


Die  Madchen  im  Walde. 

tanjen  nic^t.    Sie  (efen  unb  fdjretben.    @te  [c^reiben  anf  bem  5 
^>ult    Qdj  fprecfje  jn  einem  9)?dbc^en. 
f,2Ba^  f^retben  Sie  auf  bem  ^ult  ?u 
,,3^  fd)retbe  einen  @a|T  §iev  finb  geber  nnb  papier." 
wSBo  ift  ba^  33nd)  ?" 

,fj)er  Scorer  gab  bem  SKabd^en  mein  $8n&)."  w 

gaben  @ie  bem  Setter?" 
9a&  ^em  Setter  SBaffcr  in  einem  ©fa$.IJ 
,,S5ar  ba^  Staffer  loarm?" 


14 


EASY   READING. 


,,9?ein,  e$  toar  luljt,  aber  e$  ftmrbe  toarm." 
,,llnb  ttw$  taten  @te  bann  ?" 
,,@$  ftmrbe  [pat,  unb  icf)  cjtng  narf)  @aufe»" 
£)te  Jotter  be^  8e^rer§  gab  bem  ©c^uter  ba^  papier  unb 
5  etne  geber,    J)er  @(f)U(er  fdjrteb  mit  ber  geber,    @r  fcfyrieb 
einen  ©a^.    (5r  f(^rteb 


Die  Madchen  schreiben. 

2ftabif)en  f^rteb  bem  8e^rer  einen  Srtef. 
rf)en  fc^rieb  fdjneft,  aber  ber  33rief   n?ar  nidjt  tang. 
Secret  lobte  ba3  3Rttbc^cn/  ®a§  SKab^en  gab  bem  8ef)rer 
10  eine  geber  unb  ba§  papier. 

g«  n)urbe  fpat    ©ie  3Kab(^en  gtngen  fdjneH  narf)  §au[e. 
g^  tDurDc  ju  fitt)(  in  ber  @^uler  aber  e$  tt)ar  fe^r  marm  ju 


VOR   DER   SCHULE. 


15 


Dor  ber  Scfytik 

)ei  Sriiber  ftanben  fcor  ber  ©djnle.  ®art  mar  gro£  ; 
V.T^  mar  f(ein.  <2ie  fprac^en  nii^t  t)on  ber  ©djnfe ;  fie 
fprac^en  Mm  Spiefe. 

,,SBirft  bit  morgen  33alf  fpielenV"  fagte  gri^. 

ff3^r  t$  tDtrb  feljr  marm  fein,  aber  mir  merben  fpiefen."       5 


Vor  der  Schule. 

r,SBo  mirft  bu  bte  Salte  finben?1' 

erbe  bte  53al(e  311  §aufe  finbetu    @te  »crbcn  gett)t§ 
fein/' 
wUnb  tt)o  ttJtrft  bu  Salt  fpieten?" 

merben  im  gefbe  dor  ber  Sd^ute  fjnelen."  i 

^(f)  iucrbc  gefyen  unb  ba§  ©piel  fe^en." 
3roet  2Kcibrf)en  ftanben  au^  t)or  ber  @c^ufe,    glfa  mar 
gro§ ;  ©retrfjen  mar  Kein.    @ie  fpradjen  ni^t  t)om 
fie  fpracfjen  t)on  ber 


16  EASY   READING. 

,,2Bann  merben  Me  3)Mbd)en  in  ber  filaffc  (Snglifd) 
fpredjen?"  fagte  (glfa. 

,,2Bir  toerben  ntorgen  Snglifdj  fpredjen,  unb  ber  8efyrer  tt)irb 
tnorgen  Snglifd)  lefetu" 
5     ,,SBerben  bie  2ftabdjen  bie  ©a^e  fcerfteljen?" 

»$<*/  fletotis/  ffe  tDerben  bte  (Sai^e  Icfcn." 

w@o?  ®a§  iDtrb  fc^njcr  fctn.  -3$  ^erbe  ni^t  Derfte^en* 
2lber  id)  inerbe  je^t  nad)  §aufe  geljen.  ^d)  tocrbc  ba  gut 
(ernen." 

10  ®ie  @d)iller  unb  bie  9Jfcibd)en  ttjcrben  ntorgen  in  ber 
@cf)u(e  [ein*  @ie  njerben  aHe  Icfcn  unb  fd)reiben.  @ie 
tocrbcn  and)  (Snglifd)  fprec^cn.  ®ann  toerben  bie 
nad)  §aufe  geljen,  unb  bie  ©cpler  rt)erben  Sail  fpiclcn. 

Das  Spiel 


wS33ir  fpielen   ^eute   ein  @pie(/'  fagt  ber  Seljrer.    MSBtr 
15  fernen  unb  tpir  fpiclen." 
f,2Bie  mat^en  urir  ba^V" 

,fSBir  madjen  e^  fo:  Sin  (Sdjitler  fagt,  '$&)  finbe  nteinen 
Satt  nic^t/  ober,  <@iel)ft  bu  bie  2Ku^e??  obcr  <gr  ge^t 
nad^  @au[e/  ober  '  3^r  fingt  fe^r  gut/ 
20     ffj)aS  i[t  nic^t  fc^njcr*    2lber  ma^  tun  it)ir  bann?" 

,,£)er  ndd)(te  ©djitler  fagt:  '.3^  fa^  meinen  SBatt  ntd^t/ 
unb  ber  nad)fte  :  ^^)  it)erbe  meinen  33att  nid)t  finben/  unb  fo 
toeiter.  3Serftef)en  @ie  ?M 

w^a,  »ir  Dcrftc^cn." 
25     ,,3fcfet  aber  fdjttefl  ! 
w!Dic  @ii£e  finb  fe^r 
nadjfte!" 

maren  fe^r  fdjluer," 


DU  BIST   WIE   EINE   BLUME.  17 

,,®ut  !    £)er  nftdjfte." 
,,S)ie  @ci^e  toerben  fefyr  fd)tt)er  fein," 
,,©tf)on  !    $efet  better!    Unb  fdjnefl!    £)er  nacfyfte," 
fore^e 


tocrbc 
tear  gut  !    Setter  !    £)er  nadjfte." 


f,3Serftanben  @ie  ba$  (Spiel  V" 

,,3Berbett  @te  ba^  ©ptel  Dcrftc^cnV"  i 

frgr  fltbt  ber  Xo^ter  be^  8c^rcr«  ein  SBoot." 

wgr  gab  ber  Jocf)ter  be^  8e^rer^  ein  S3oot." 

wSr  toirb  ber  ;Joc^ter  be§  8e^rer§  ein  Soot  geben," 

w@(^rctbft  bu  bem  9fttibd)en  einen  Srief  ?" 

w@(^ricbft  bu  bent  SKSb^en  einen  33rief  ?"  i 

W933irft  bu  bent  aKdb($en  einen  Srief  f^reiben?" 

toar  fc^r  gut.    2Bir  merben  fefet  brei  @a^e  geben, 
U)irb  genug  fctn. 


Du  bift  uric  eine  Blumc. 


!Du  bift  ftrie  eine 
fo  fyolb  unb  fd^5n  unb  rein  ; 
itf)  fd^au'  bi^  °an,  unb  9Bef)tnut 
fc^Icid^t  ntir  in 


ift,  ate  ob  16)  bie  £mube 
auf$  §aupt  bit  fegen  [ottf, 
betenb,  ba£  ®ott  bid)  er^alte 
fo  rein  unb  frf)5n  unb  l)0lb.  —  ^einrid? 


18  EASY   READING. 

fjetbenroslettt 

©at)  em  tnab'  em  SftoSlein  fteljtt, 
9?o$Iein  auf  ber  geiben, 
toar  fo  jung  unb  morgenfdjint,. 
lief  er  fdjnelt,  e$  nal)  311  fefyn, 
fal)'§  mit  melen  greuben. 
9to^einr  9?o^femr  9?o§Iem  rot, 
9?ti3(etn  auf  ber  §eiben. 

Snabe  fpradj  :  ,,Qd)  bre^e  btc^, 
auf  ber  §eibeu!" 
.  farad):  „$$  fte^e  bid), 
ba§  bu  ettug  benfft  an  mid), 
unb  id)  nritt'3  ni^t  leiben." 

,  JRo^Iein,  ^Ro^Iein  rot, 
auf  ber  §eiben. 


Unb  ber  tottbe  Snabe 
ein  auf  ber  §eiben  ; 
lue^rte  fid)  unb  fta^, 
fjatf  il)tn  bod)  lein  9Be^  unb  2ld), 
eben  leiben. 

Ro^fein,  ^o^Iein  rot, 
ein  auf  ber  §eiben, 

—  Jofyann  IPolfgang  r»on  (Soctl^e. 

Sprucfy 

21m  3lbenb  mirb  man  Hug 
fiir  ben  tiergangenen  S^ag, 
bod)  niemals  Kug  genug 
25  fitr  ben,  ber  lommen  mag.  —  ^riebrtd?  Biicfert. 


IN   DER   WALDSCHULE. 


19 


3n  ber 

2ftanner  fyaben  geftern  Me  2Batbfd)nte  gefefyen. 
fyaben  ba  tnete  Sinber  gefunben. 


@ie 


Die  Waldschule. 

trar  fefjr  fcf)5n.    J)te  2Bci(ber  finb  tmmer  fc^Bn. 
Scanner  fprac^en  mit  ben  Stnbern, 
,f®arlr  ^aben  Ste  geftern  nene  SBorter  geternt?"  5 

tt$a,  n)ir  ^inber  ^aben  geftern  tnete  2Borter  geternt*" 
,,Unb  toas  ^aben  ®te  bann  getan?" 
,,2Btr  ^aben  bann  auf  ben  gelbern  gefpteft*" 
J)te  tinber  tuarcn  geftern  in  ber  SBa(bfd)n(e,    ©te  fd)rieben 
SBorter  unb  lafen  ®Uc^cr.    ©tc  ^aben  t)tele  aBi)rter  gef^rteben  10 
unb  stnet  53ud)er  gelefen,    £)er  ge^rer  mar  au^  ba.    (Sr 


20 


EASY   READING. 

,  unb  bte  fiinber  fpracfyen  I)eutfd).    Sr  fyat  bte 


fprad) 

®tnber  gelobt. 

,,tarl,  fyaben  @te  ba$  ©ebtdjt  geternt?" 
t,yiein,"  fagte  ^arl,  f,ic^  fyabe  e^  no^  nirf)t  geternt. 
5     ,,@te  tDaren  geftern  311  ©aufe/  ntc^t 


Die  Kinder  lesen  und  schreiben  in  der  Waldschule. 

,r$a,  idj  mar  geftern  ju  £wufe.    ^cf)  fyabe  ba  triele  SBBrter 
gelernt,  aber  ba^  ©ebtd)t  nifyt." 
,,§aben  @ie  ba^  ©ebtt^t  gut  tterftanben?" 
„$&,  ify  ^abe  e^  tierftanben,  aber  nod^  nit^t  gelernt," 
10     ,,$(ber  @ie  merben  e^  lernen,  nid^t  lua^r?" 
n$a,  id)  (erne  e$  morgen." 
,,®ut,  ba^  ttrirb  frit1^  genug  fein." 

J)te  SJftanner  gingen  bann  nad^  §aufe,  unb  Me  $inber  tafen 
bie  93itd)er  unb  fd^rieben  bie  SKdrter  in  ben 


DIE   KNABEN   MIT   DEN   MUTZEN. 


21 


Pic  Knaben  mit  ben  JHufeert 

0        ^ 

Die  Snaben  finb  geftern  auf  bem  ©jriefytak  getoefen.  ©ie 
fyaben  ba  genbt  @ie  finb  lange  ba  gebtteben*  9?eun  ^naben 
fatten  3Kit^en  unb  fedjs  tDaren  ofjne  9)lu^en» 

(Sin  Snabe  ^at  [eine  9Kit^e  uerloren  nnb  ift  ft^nett 


Die  Knaben  mit  den  Miitzen. 

§an[e  gegangen.    @r  ift  mitbe  geiporben  nnb  ift  fpcit  in  bie  5 
©cfynte  gefommen,    !Der  Server  fyat  i^n  nirf)t  gelobt,    ©er 
Snabe  ift  fe^r  rot  getDorben. 

,,9Bo  finb  ®ie  getuefen?"  fagte  ber  ^efyrer. 

,,$3)  ^abe  meine  9ftittje   uerloren.    3cf)  bin  nac^  §anfe 
gegangen,"  ic 


22  EASY   READING. 

,,3Barum  finb  ©ie  nicfyt  fyier  geblieben?    £un  ©ie  ba$  nirf)t 
ttrieber !" 

„$$)  'war  ofyne  2ftii£e,  unb  e$  twr  auf  bem  ©jriefyla^  fo 
fait*    $df)  bin  ftfjnell  ttrieber  in  bie  ©rfjute  gelommen," 
5     „(£$  ift  auf  bem  ©Jriefytafe  fait  getoefen.    Slber  e$  ift  je^t 
nid^t  fait*    SBtr  fdjreiben  jcfet.    ^Bitte,  geben  @ie  ben  Snaben 
bie  gebern*    ©d^reiben  @ie  \u 

S)er  8e^rer  ift  fpater  nat^  bem  §anfe  be^  Snaben  gefom- 
men,    ©r  ift  bann  in  ben  ©arten  gegangen.    £)ie  53Iumen  in 
10  bem  ©arten  iDaren  9?ofen,    ©ie  iraren  ftf)dn  nnb  rot,    (J5er 
8ef)rer  Ijat  in  bem  ©arten  bie  9Kit^e  be§  Snaben  gefnnben, 

©ie  @d)tt>eftern  be^  Snaben  maren  and)  in  bem  ®artcn. 

©ie  finb  lange  im  ©arten  geblieben.    S)er  8e!)rer  ^at  einer 

©c^tocftcr  be^  ®naben  eine  9Jofe  gegeben.    J)a^  3ftabd)en  ift 

15  fefjr  rot  getoorben.     S)ie  jtt)ei  ©t^tt)eftern  finb  bann  in  ba$ 

§an^  gegangen,  nnb  ber  Sefjrer  ift  nad)  £)anfe  gegangen. 

3m  £)aufer 

SBir  toaren  nad^  ^anfe  gegangen,  aber    tmr  fatten  bie 
^nngen  nit^t  gefefyen.    @^  war  fpat  gemorben  nnb  ttrir  fatten 
fie  nt^t  gefunben.    J)ann  famen  fie, 
20     ,,@inb  ©ie  fdf)on  lange  ^ier?/y  fagten  bie  ^ungen. 

,fS55ir  marten  fdjon  se^n  3Kinuten,    33itte,  lommen  ©ie  }e£t 
in  ba^  ©au«!" 

SBir  fatten  ben  ^ungcn  ba^  §an3  noc^  ntd^t  ge^eigt,    SBir 
toaren  lange  in  ber  ©t^nle  geblieben,  aber  fie  maren  nidf)t 
25gelommen,     23ir  fatten  lange  gctoartct.    3^t    tuaren  fie 
^ter,  nnb  ttrir  jeigten  ben  ^nngen  ba^ 
au«  ^at  t)iele  genfter,  nit^t 
a,  unb  e$  ^at  antf)  t)iele  3immer,    $6)  f)abe  ein 


IM   HAUSE. 


23 


Dimmer,    ©  f)at  stoei  fatten,    $ontnten  @ie  unb  fefyen  @ie 
tnein  ^hunter!" 
,,§aben  @ie  ba$  ^hunter  f^o 


jetgte  5 


SBtr  gittgen  tnit  ben 


in  metn  ^ttnntei4. 


Das  Haus. 

ben  $ungen  bte  jtoet  Setten,    (Sin  geberbett  mar  auf  bent 
(Snbe  be^  S3ette^, 

ift  ba^  auf  bent  @nbe  be§  »ettc«?w 
ift  ein  geberbett    Sir  ^aben  geberbetten  auf  ben 
33etten,    @ie  finb  im  SBinter  fefjr  mrm."  i 

,,$m  ©ontnter  aurf),  ntt^t  toa^r  ?" 
,,3a,  aber  fie  bfeiben  im  ©ontnter  nid^t  auf  ben  JBetten." 

ba§  geberbett  int  SBinter    auf    bent    (5nbe    be^ 


24  EASY   READING. 


)  nein,  nidjt  toenn  id)  311  33ett  gefye." 
3^9^  tociren  ftinf  Sftinuten  gebtteben,    @te  fatten 
unb  mem  3^mmer  u^  fcte  3^ei  -S^tten  ge[e^en» 
@ic  fatten  bte  geberbetten  au^  gefe^en.    @ie  finb  bann  nadf) 
5  §aufe  gegangen. 


Das  Federbett. 


Das  Dimmer. 


§ter  tft  etn  3^mmer  in  tneinem  §aufe,  (Sin  Stu^I  ftefjt 
neben  ber  Siir*  5)te  £ur  ift  offen.  §ter  ift  cuidj  em  Ofen, 
&%  ift  em  beutf^er  Ofen.  gin  bentf^er  Dfen  ift  fe^r  tuarm 
im  SBinter.  S)ie  bentfrf)en  Ofen  bleiben  tange  tt)arm» 

bem  Dfen  fte^t  ein  Sifcf).    9?cbcn  bem  anberen 
fte^t  ein  ffeiner  Sif(^.    ^(^  fe^e  smei  @tiil)Ie  unb 


DAS   ZIMMER. 


25 


,,3ft  baS  aHeSV    2Ba$  fefjen  @ie  nod)?" 

,,2lci)  nein,  ba$  ift  nid)t  alteS  ;  id)  fetje  etn  93Ub  neben  bent 


^a,  itnb  uber  ber  Sitr  ift  aud)  ein  Stlb," 
ff3t(lr  t^  fef)e  ^re^  °^er  ^^er  33i^^»    @te  finb  fe^r  ft^iJn."     5 
,,2Rein  3itnmcr  ift  toarm  im  SSinter  unb  lit^t  im  ©otntner* 
3  ift  fel)r  flcmiitlicf)." 
ift  feljr  fc^Bn.11 


Mein  Zimmer. 

,,2(nf  ber  ncidjften  ©eite  ift  audj  ein  Dimmer,  a&er 
nid)t  in  meinem  §anfe." 

,,$ft  e$  ein  bentfc^e^  Dimmer?" 

,,3att)ot)t !    g^  ift  ein  Dimmer  in  einem  fef)r  alten  ©i 
in  SBittenberg.    @ef)en  ©ie  nic^t  ben  beutfd)en  Dfen  in  ber 
gcfe?" 


26  EASY   READING. 

,,3<att)ol)I  nnb  autf)  einen  £iftf).    Unb  ift  ber  £iftf)  autf)  fo 
fefjr  alt?" 

ft$a,  ber  £ifdj  ift  trier  f)unbert  ^ct^re  alt,    ginben  @ie  ba^ 
Dimmer  fd^Cn?" 
5     ^ein,  ttf)  finbe  e^  nidf)t  fdjon,  aber  fe^r  intereffant," 


Das  alte  Zimmer. 


Karl  unb 


^at  ^^^^^  ciuf  bem  @ptefyta|  gefunben, 
lt)ar  geftern  ?u  §aufe  gebfieben,  urn  bet  feincr  Sftutter  311  fein. 
(Seine  Gutter  toar  Irani.  @r  ^atte  aud^  Sail  gefyielt  gr 
tt)ar  nid^t  in  bie  ©c^ule  gelommen,  @r  fprarf)  5U  Sari. 

t,  ttrie  lange  fernen  @ie  fcfjon  (gngtifd)?" 

(erne  fc^on  fe^^  2Bocf)en 


KARL   UND   JOHANN.  27 

,,llub  ttms  Ijabeu  ©te  geterut?" 

„$<$)  Ijabe  tnete  SBorter  gelerut,  urn  gut  ju  lefeu.    £)ie 
anberen  $uugeu  fyabeu  fdjou  jtDet  SMtdjer  gelefeu." 
,,®ut!    SMtte,  lefeu  @ie  bicfc  SBorter!    $tf)  fcerftefje  bie 
ntc^t,    g^  ift  [e^r*  fdjtoer,  (gnglifc^  gu  lernen,  nt^ts 


l^at  bie  SBorter  gefdjrteben.  &  ^at  fie  bann  getefen, 
@r  ^atte  gut  gelernt.  (Sr  fjatte  aud^  bie  @d^e  gefdjrteben. 
(Sr  fprad)  je^t  ju  ^oljftmL 

ff^of)anur  tt)o  mareu  Sie  gefteru  ?" 

,,3f(^  bfieb  gefteru  ju  §aufe,  um  bei  meitter  Gutter  ju  fcin. 
@ie  toar  franf.  3^  ^iu  uid)t  iu  bie  ©d)u(e  ge!ommeu." 

ff§abeu  @ie  ju  §aufe  SBatt  gefpielt  ?" 

,,3a,  icf)  ^abe  im  ©arteu  SBatt  gcfptclt." 


w(Sd  mar  tuarm  im  ©aufe,  aber  e$  ift  im  ©arteu  feljr  fait 
gcworbcn.  $d)  f)abe  uirf)t  lauge  gcfptctt." 

,,@o!  @ie  fyabett  gefpielt  uub  ^abeu  uic^t  gelerut  2lber 
ic^  fjabe  gut  gelerut.  3^  fyfo  ^^  ®^fee  gefcfyriebeu, 
Se^eu  @ie  bie  Sci^e  !" 

^o^auu  ^at  je^t  bie  @ii^e  gefe^eu.  @ie  toarcn  tticfjt  laug. 
!Dtc  euglif^eu  3Bi)rter  iu  beu  Sit^eru  toarcn  ui^t  fcfjtuer, 
uub  bie  ^uugeu  ^abeu  bie  @ii^e  fefjr  gut  geft^riebeu. 


Sprucfy 


Ob  auf  bem 
ntcfjtS  fte^tr  ob  t)ielr 
toa^r  fei  beiu  SBort  : 

©ott  f)ilft  bir  °fort! 

—  Iltarttn  (Sretf. 


28  EASY   READING. 


(Bute 


®ute 

Sltlen  3ftitben  fet'3  gebradjt 
5Rciflt  ber  £ag  fid)  (till  jum  (Snbe, 
3htl)en  alle  flei^gen  §anbe, 
ber  2ftorgen  neit 

©lite  5«arf)t  ! 


®ef)t  g 

©djlteftt  bie  mitben  Slugen  °jit. 
©tiller  nrirb  e^  auf  ben  ©traj^en, 
Unb  ben  Sacf)ter  ^ijrt  man  bfafen, 
Unb  bie  5Md)t  ruf  t  alien  >  : 
nr 


Srciwnt  end)  ener 

2Bem  bie  8iebe  ranbt  ben  grieben, 

ein  [c^oner  Sranm  befdjieben, 

ob  IHebc^en  i^n 


®nte 

i^  ber 

@(^fnntmert,  bte  ber  neue  3ftorgen 
®ommt  mit  [einen  nenen  ©orgen, 
ber  33ater 


—  (Efyeobor  Korner. 


DIE   PRAPOSITIONEN. 


29 


Die  prdpofittonett 

£)er  getter  toar  fdjon  fange  in  ber  ©cfyule.  (5r  fa§  auf 
einent  @tut)Ie  unb  Ia3  em  33urf).  £)ie  ^ungen  ftnb  fpcit  in  bie 
@d^n(e  gefommen*  £)er  8e^rer  fpra^  ju  ben  3un9en» 

,,®nten  SfZorgen!    SSiet)iete  SBorter  I)aben  @ie 
Icrnt?" 

,,2Bir  ^aben  ^ente  neun  SBorter  gclcrnt." 

,,Unb  tDie  fjei^en  biefe  neun  SJBSrtcr?" 

f,@ie  ^ei^en  ^rtipofitionen." 

w©ut !    Setter !    9?ennen  @ie  biefe  ^rapofitionen !" 


Auf  der  Strasse. 

,,@ie  fjeifcen:  an,  auf,  fyinter,  in,  neben,  tiber,  unter, 
unb  ^tirifdjen." 

,,©cf)on!    @ier  if*  ein  ®ilb  ^on  einer  @tra^e  in 
3=e^t  fprerfjen  @ie  t)on  bem  53ilbe,  unb  gebrau^en  ©ie  bie 
^riipofitionen  in  ben  ©a^en ! 


39  EASY   READING. 

,,Sine  gran  ftefyt  auf  ber  Strafe  fyinter  ben  33tnmen." 

,,©ut !    $3)  fefye  bie  gran.    £)er  niidtfte !    Sraun!" 

,,Der  3Kann  fyat  ein  33nd)  in  ber  £wnb." 

,,Die  nacl)ften  !    Slber  fennel! !    SBarten  @ie  nicfjt  I1' 
5     ,,©n  Sftann  mit  tinmen  ftefyt  neben  ber 

f,Sine  gran  Ijat  etma§  ^a^ter  nnter  bem 

W3fc^  fe^e  einen  SDtatut  jtDifc^en  ben  granen." 

ff®ut !    SBeiter !    3l6er  lange  ©ftfee  !M 

Die  Snaben  [djrieben  biefe  @a^e:  (gin  Sif^  fte^t  Dor  ber 

ic  £nr ;  id)  ge^e  an  ben  Xift^.    SSir  famen  ilber  ba^  getb  in 

ben  SBalb.    ^^  9^9  ™  ^a^  3imtner  un^  fan^  weinen  33ftft 

neben  einent  Snd)  nnter  ber  S3anf.    Der  Snabe  Ijat  feine 

Sftu^e  anf  einent  @tu^I  t»or  ber  Jiir  gefe^en* 

,,®nt !  @ie  gebran^en  biefe  Sorter  ridjtig !  SBerfte^en 
15  ©ie  biefe  ^rapofitionen?" 

n$a,  \mv  Derfteljen  fie." 

,,@d)on!    3)a§  ift  genng/' 

3n  ber  Stabi 

gri|  Ittuft  in  ba3  Dimmer.  Seine  SJZntter  fifct  in  bent 
Dimmer  neben  bem  Dfen.  gri^  fie^t  feinen  @nt  nic^t.  @r 
2ofud^t  i^n  fjinter  bem  Ofen  nnb  nnter  bem  -Hfcfje,  aber  er 
finbet  il)n  nic^t. 

,f2Jfntter,  ^aft  bn  meinen  §nt  gefe^en  ?  ^^  fann  i^ti  nid^t 
finben." 

w@r  tt)irb  too^I  ^ier  fein.  §aft  bn  ifyn  anf  bem  Jifd^  nnb 
25  nnter  alien  ©tiMjIen  gefn^t  ?u 

^^atDo^I!  $tf)  ^abe  meine  9Jiii^e  gefnnben.  @ie  ift  Ijier 
anf  bem  (Stn^I,  aber  idj  fn^e  fie  nifyt." 

ffSBir  gefyen  ^ente  in  bie  @tabt  nnb  lanfen  bir  einen  nenen 


IN  DER   STADT.  31 

,,®anfen  ftrir  ifyn  in  einem  gro^en  Saben?" 

,,3a,  id)  faufe  ifyn  bit  in  einem  fcfydnen  groften  Saben." 

nnb  feine  Gutter  fa^ren  mit  bem  Dmnibn^  in  Me 


In  der  Stadt. 


@tabt,    @ie  ge^en  in  einen  8aben,  nnb  ein  9J?ann  jeigt  i^nen 
triele  gtttc  anf  dielen  3Tifd)en,  5 

foftct  btcfcrgut?" 

foftet  seljn  3)?arl.    ©a^  ift  ein  fefyr  gnter 
ift  gn  t)iel    ^(^  -gebe  ^^nen  nnr  fed) 


32 


EASY   READING. 


,,28ir  tjaben  anbere  §iite  gu  fecl)3  3ftarf.    $d)  toerbe  fie 
3I)nen  jeigen." 

£)er  3ftann  fucljt  anbere  giite  auf  ben  Si[cf)en»    Sr  getgt 
ber  3JJntter  btefe  §iite, 

s     ,,£)a!"  fagte  fie,    ff!Dicfcr  §ut  ift  fetyr  gnt    Sitte,  geben 
@ie  i^n  mir !" 

®er  9Kann  ^at  i^r  ben  §nt  gegeben.    ©ie  gibt  i^n  bent 
Snaben.    S)er  §nt  ift  f(^dn  unt?  luarm.    ®ie  Gutter  unb 
ber  Snabe  [oben  iljn.    ©ie  fafjren  bann  mit  bent  OmnibM 
10  nrieber  nac^  §anfe. 

^rifd?e  IDurft 

©eftern  iDaren  tmr  bei  bent  gfeifcfyer.    ©er  gleif^er  tt)ar 
in  feinent  Saben.    Sr  ftanb  mit  feiner  Scfyitqe  im  8aben  nnb 


Frische  Wurs\. 


FRISCHE   WURST.  33 

faf)  au$  ber  £iir.    3Sor  bet  £itr  ftanb  em  ©tufyt,  unb  barauf 
tear  etne  ©djiirje. 

bebeutet  ber  ©tufjl  mit  ber  ©djitrje?" 
bebeutet :  ©eute  gibt  e$  frifc^e  SBurft." 
t  ba^  beutfd»e  Sitte  ?"  5 

/  ba^  ift  bcutfc^c  @ttte.    X)er  gleif^er  ftetlt  etnen 
Dor  bie  £itr  unb  (egt  etne  (Scfjitrje  barauf,  tDenn  er 
frifc()e  SBurft  ^at." 


Die  Frau  mit  den  Wurstchen. 

^n  ©eutfd)tanb  fic^t  man  Diet  SBurft    @clbft  auf  ber 
©tra^e  fot^t  man  2Bitrft(f)en.    ©icr  ift  etn  ^Bi(b  Don  einerio 
gran  mit  3Burft^en.    ©ie  Ijat  einen  !(einen  Ztftf)  mit  einem 
(Simer  barauf. 

(5in  ^nabe  mit  einer  fleinen  ajfufee  fte^t  neben  ber  gran, 
gr  toartct.    ®ie  gran  mirb  i^m  SBiirftrf)en  auS  bent  (gimer 


34  EASY    BEADING. 

geben*     £)ie    SBitrftdjen   an$   bem   (Sinter   finb   frifd)   unb 


£)ie  fatten  SBnrftcfyen  legt  bie  gran  in  ba$  SBaffer  in  bem 
(Sinter.    £)a§  SBaffer  tft  nmrm.    ^e^t  lorf)t  bie  gran  bie 
5$3nrft(^en.    £)ann  tuirb  fie    bent   ^naben  ntit  ber  fleinen 
ein  2Biirftd)en  geben. 


Durd?  ^elb  unb 


©egen  Slbenb  ging  ein  }nnger  Sftann  bnr^  ein  ge(b 
ben  SBalb.  @^  n?ar  fitl){,  nnb  er  tuar  of)ne  §nt  X)a 
ein  fleine§  9JJabc^en  ntit  i^rer  @^itrje  anf  bent  9lrm. 


an 


Durch  Feld  und  Wald. 


10     ,,@aben  @ie  feinen  §nt?"  fragte  ba^  SDittbc^en.    ,,©e()en 
@ie  ofjne  §nt  bnr^  ben  2BaIb  ?u 

n$tf)  ^abe  nteinen  §nt  tierforen;  aber  e^  madjt  nid^t^;  er 
tt)ar  fc^r  alt," 


DIE   FRAUEN   MIT   DEM   HOLZE. 


35 


,,3Barten  @ie,  bitte!  $n  unferem  gaufe  fudje  id)  etne 
fitr  ©ie.  Stfein  23ater  fyat  feme  alte  2ftu^e  fyier  ge* 
laffen.  Qfy  gebe  fie  ^fjnen." 

,,£)anfe!  bit  bift  fefyr  gut.  2lber  bann  f)at  betn  9Sater  feme 
alte  3Kii^e.  ^d)  9e*)e  fe^r  9evn  °^)ne  tneiueu  £wt  @^  tnarf)t  5 


fteine  9)?ab(f)eu  legte  i^re  ©djurje  auf  einen  ©tern 
uub  gtttg  in  ba^  §au^.  3)aun  fam  fie  f^neH  o^ue  bie  2ttu£e 
burcf)  bie  Sitr. 

f,3^  fiube  fie  nidjt,"  fagte  ba^  3fttibd)ett,  ffaber  ^ier  ift  fetnio 
alter  £ut.    ^}ft  er  ju  fie  in  fiir  @ie  ?" 

ff3Jein/'  fagte  ber  9J?ann,  ffer  ge^t  fefyr  gut,  3lber  bein 
$ater  ttrirb  o^ne  @ut  fein.  Qfy  gebe  Mr  eine  9ftarf  fiir  ben 
atten  gut." 

!£a$  ffeine  9ftabcf)en  na^m  ba^  ®elb  fiir  ben  §ut  unb  ging  15 
bamit  in^  §au^/    S)er  junge  Stfann  fe^te  fid)  auf  ben  @tein 
unb  fa^  iiber  ba^  getb  nac^  bem  28a(be.    (gr  tt>ar  fe^r  ntiibe, 
J)ann  ging  er  burc^  ben  SBalb, 


Die  ^rcmen  mit  bem 


3luf  bent  Sanbe  arbei- 
ten  bie  grauen.  @ie 
fjolen  @olj  au^  bem 
2Balbe.  ®ie  miiffen 
§0(3  fiir  tyre  Dfen 


ber  25 


Die  Frauen  mit  dem  Holze. 


SJhttter 
bie  alte 
mutter  mit  einem  $orb 
auf  bem  9tu(fen,  ift  in 
ben  2Balb  gegangen. 


36 


EASY   READING. 


£)al)tn  finb  and)  Me  Gutter  unb  Me  Softer  gefommen, 
Sftabdjen  tft  Jung  unb  fdjon,  abet  e$  tnuf;  and)  §olj  tragen. 

§ter  Ijabe  id)  bte  brei  gefefjen,    ©ie  ftanben  auf  einem 
engen  ^fabe  unb  tt)ar= 
fyabe    id) 
£)te 
unb     bte 


©a 


5  teten. 

fie  pl)i 

©rofnnutter 

£orf)ter   fcerftanben    e$ 

nicfyt,  aber  Me  SKutter 
10  fyat  getad)t 

J)ie  anbere  Sod)ter, 

Me  ©c^tDefter  be£  %Jla& 

(^en^,  btieb  ju  §aufe, 

um  ba^  §olj  ju  flatten. 
15  ©ie   ftanb   neben   bem 

§aufe  unb  fpaltete  ba^ 

§0(5.    £)ie  anberen  brei 

latnen  mit  i^rem  §olj  fpat  nai^  ©aufe.    ®ann  ^aben  bie  jtoet 
;  §015  gefpalten* 


Die  andere  Tochter. 


Das  Scfyloft  am 


©aft  bu  baS  @(^to^  gefe^en, 
£)a$  ^o^e  @(^IoB  am 
©olben  unb  rofig 
©te  SBoIfen  britber  °^er. 

@^  nt^te  fid)  ntebernetgen 
^n  bte  fptegel!(are  glut, 
68  moc^te  ftreben  unb  ftetgen 
^n  ber  2lbenbtt)oHen 


DAS   SCHLOSZ   AM   MEER.  37 


b'  id)  e$  gefeljen, 

am  9fteer, 
llnb  ben  Sftonb  baritber  ftefyen 
Unb  sJJebet  toeit  umfyer," 


£)er  SBtnb  unb  be^  5J»eere^  SBatlen, 
®aben  fie  f  rtf  c^cn  tfang  ? 
2?erna^mft  bu  au^  ^ofjen  fatten 
©atten  unb  geftgefang  ? 


)ie  Stnbe,  bte  SBogen  afle 
8agen  in  tiefer  9tul)'  ; 
Ginem  ^(agetieb  an^  ber  §at(e 
mit  Xrcinen  °sn." 


©a^eft  bit  oben  ge^en 
£)en  Sonig  unb  [ein  ©entail? 
£)er  roten  3Kant 
£)er  golbnen  kronen 


gu^rten  fie  nidjt  mit  9Bonne 
(Sine  fdjone  ^^^gf^ciu  °barr 
§err(ic^  mie  eine  ©onne, 
©tra^lenb  im  golbnen  §aar? 


a^  id)  bie  gltern  beibe, 
ber  kronen  ?i(^t, 
^njaqen  Jrauerffeibe  ; 
ie  ^ungfrau  fa^  ic^  nit^t." 


38 


EASY   READING. 


Deittfcfye 

gier  finb  fciele  bentfcfye  Offi^iere.  @te  finb  alk  jnnge 
Scanner*  £)ret  ober  tner  Don  ifynen  finb  fedj$  gn£  ^orf)»  @te 
tragen  fc^one  Untfortnen  unb  ^o^e  £>eltne.  3)eutf(^e  Dfftjtere 


Deutsche  Offiziere. 

tragen  and)  lange  ©ctjtoerter.    ©te  fyaben  fi(berne  Snopfe  an 
5  ben  $Roden  nnb  ant^  tret^e  33anbet\ 

J)ie  Offtjiere  fte^en  t>or  bem  @c^Io^  nnb  marten  anf  ben 
Saifer.  ®er  Saifer  ^at  triete  Dffijiere  ntit  f^onen  llnt= 
formen  nnb  langen  @c^it)ertern. 

Qtyt  lontmt  ber  Satfer  mtt  anberen  Dffijieren.    §ier  [inb 
10  and)  t)tete  gro^e  ©olbaten,     S)ie(e    ©olbaten  tragen  nene 
llntformen  ntit  fe^r  ^of)en  §eltnen,    ®ie  nenen  llntformen 
finb  gran* 


DEUTSCHE   OFFIZIERE. 


39 


£)er  ®aifer  gefyt  fcor  ben  ©olbaten.  @eine  Officiate  gefyen 
neben  ifym.  Sin  Officer  fyat  ein  @tu<J  papier  in  ber  @anb. 
§inter  iljnen  fiefyt  man  ein  @d)IoB  mit  runbent  £nrm  unb 
t)ie(en  genftern.  S3  ift  be§  fiaifcr^  ©rfjto^  in  33erlin.  S3 
t(t  [e^r  groft,  aber  ni(i)t  [e^r  f(f)dn,  5 


Der  Kaiser  mit  seinen  Offizieren. 

n  bem  ncit^ften  53i(be  fefyen  it)ir  bie  bentfc^en  ll^fanen. 
beut[cf)en  ll^Ianen  ^aben  ft^one  ^ferbe,    !Die  f(i)dnen 
finb  fcfytoars, 

beutfdien  ll^Ianen  ^aben  fdjtoarge  ^ferbe  nnb  lange 
8anjen.    $n  biefem  ncic^ften  Silbe  ge^en  bie  fdjonen  ^Pferbe  10 
iiber  ba$  griine  gelb, 
,,@e^en  ©ie  bie  brei  jungen  Offijiere?" 
n$a,  fie  fjaben  bie  [d^onften  ^ferbe.    @ie  reiten  uor  ben 
anberen  linemen  nnb  tragen  bie  langften  (Sdjtoerter. 
bentf^e  Offijier  tragt  ein  IcmgeS  ©^tDert/' 
,f3eben  Jag  fiefyt  man  ^ier  t)iele  ©olbaten," 


40 


EASY   BEADING. 


,,2lber  nadjften  ©omtner  toerben  tint  tnefyr  Dffijiere  unb 
Ufylanen  fefyen." 

.   ,,©nt!    3)a$  toirb  intereffant  fein.    3d)  fwbe  bk  beutfrfjen 
U^Ianen  mtt  ben  fdjonen  ^Pferben  unb  ben  (angen  Sanjen  nnb 
5  ben  fteinen  ga^nen  [e^r  tntereffant." 

S)te  Ufylanen  retten  iiber  ba^  griine  gelb  mit  ben  tangen 


Die  deutschen  Uhlanen. 


8angen  in  ben  §anben. 
Barmen  2Btnbe.    J)ie  Jungen 
U^fanen. 


(Sin  fd^oner 


ftetnen  gafjnen  ffattern  im 
re  reiten  t)or  ben  anberen 


io     ®art  fprang  an§  feinent  Keinen  33ette  nnb  lief  an  ba$ 
fter,    (S3  ttmr  ein,  fdjdner,  iDarmer  Jag*    5)ie  ©onne  fd)ien 
bnrd)  ba^  genfter.    3lber  gri£  lag  noc^  im  53ett, 

,,§eute  ift  geiertag/'  fagte  SarL    ,,23or  ber  ©tabt  Hegt  ein 
grof$e#  ^elb,  it)o  bie  (Solbaten  iiben.    §ente  ge^en  tt)ir 

15  biefem  $elbe,  nm  bie  ©otbaten  gn  fe()en." 


EIN   SCHONER   EEIERTAG. 


41 


ift  fd)on,"  fagte  $1%    ,,3$  tettc  mein  neue# 

,,2lrf)  nein!  SSSir  miiffen  ju  gufc  gefyen.  9Bir  mitffen  gute 
befommen,  urn  Me  ©olbaten  ju  fc^en." 

,f£)cmn  trage  tc^  meinen  neuen  §ut,  abcr  ic^  mu^  meinen 
alten  Stocf  tragen,  SJJetn  neuer  9tod  tft  noc^  ni^t  ferttg."  5 

,,£)a$  ma^t  ntcf)t^.  fictn  cinjigcr  SJJenf^  it)trb  un^  an- 
fe^en;  fie  [e^ett  nur  bte  Solbaten  unb  i^re  tapferen  Dffi* 
jtere." 

,,§offentltd)  befommen  toir  gute  ^tti^e.  8e^te^  3Wat  ^atte 
mein  3Sater  feinen  guten  ^Plafe.  @r  belotnmt  nie  einen  guten  10 


Die  Soldaten. 

jtt)ei  ^Briiber  ge^en  nac^  bem  bretten  gclbc  t)or  ber 
Stabt.  @ie  befommen  gute  ^tci^e,  um  bte  Solbaten  311  fe^en, 
@^  ift  ein  fc^oner  ^ag, 

^c^t  fommen  Me  @olbaten.  ©ie  Zru^cn  tragcn  iljre 
tuei^en  §ofen  unb  i^re  fdjttmrgen  9tocfe.  ^eber  tapfere 
©ctbat  trttgt  eine  neue  gltntc  in  ber  Hnfcn  §anb. 

©inter  ben  anberen  tragt  ein  after  @o(bat   eine  fd)5ne 


42  EASY   READING. 


gin  jnnger  Officer  get)t  fcor  feinen  tapferen  £rnp- 
$en.    @r  tragt  in  ber  §anb  ein  langeS  ©djtoert 

,,S33etd)    em  £ag    unb   rt>eld)   etn   Slnblirf!"    fagte    Sari. 
,,$d)  fyabe  folcfje   fdijonen  @olbaten  nod)  nie  gefefjen.    ©ie 
5  ntarfdjieren  fefjt  gnt," 

,,2Ber  tft  ber  junge  3Kann?"  fragte  gri^ 
f,2Be!djer  junge  SKann?    2l(^f  ber  junge  9Jiann  t^or  ben 
©olbaten?    £)a$  tft  etn  Offtster,    @ie^ft  bn  fein  @d)tt)ert 
ntcl)t?" 

0     f,2lcf)  ja!     Xragen  alle  bte  bentfdjen  Offt^iere 
ffamolf!" 


,,2lber  manner  Sotbat  tragt  and)  ein  @cf)U)ert,  nidjt 
,,s?Jein,  nnr  bie  Dfftjiere." 

,,2lber  biefer  Dffijter!"  fagte  $ri£.    n$d)  Ijabe  ntand)en 
istapferen  Sofbaten  gefefyen,  aber  fold)  einen  fd)onen  jnngen 
Dffijier    fyabe    id)   nie   gefefjen.     §aben  all    bie    bentfcfjen 
STrnppen  fold)  jnnge  Cffijiere?" 

WO  nein!    SD?and)e  bentfd)en  Offijiere  finb  fe^r  aft.    2lber 

ad  bie  fefyr  aften  Dffijiere  ntarfd)ieren  nic^t  mit  ben  Jrnppen." 

20     £)ann  ging  ber  jnnge  Officer  mit  af(  feinen  Jrnppen  itber 

ba$  gefb.    9lff  bie  anberen  ©ofbaten  marfdjierten  an^  itber 

ba$  gefb.    J)en  gangen  Xag  fafyen  bie  ^tDei  ^naben  bie  Sofba- 

ten  anf  bent  gro^en  gefbe.    ^ann  gingen  fie  mitbe  nad)  §anfe. 

S)ie  jtt)ei  Snaben  toofynten  in  einem  nenen  §anfe.    @s 

2$  ftanb  an  bent  breiten  ^?Ia^e.    31ft  bie  ^anfer  nm  biefen  brei- 

ten  ^5Iafe  ttmren  fe^r  fc^on. 

Smitten  anf  jenem  breiten  *i)3Ia^e  tt)aren  t^iefe  33itfdje  nnb 
®anme.    §ier  fa^en  ttrir  gro^e  ®anme  nnb  anc^  Ifeine.    S)ie 
Ifeinen  tDaren  gans  jnng.    @ofc^e  jnngen  ^8annte  fatten  ganj 
3o  f feine  53fatter. 

inaren  fciele  3Kenfd)en  anf  bent 


DAS   VEILCHEN. 


43 


Sttten  faften  unb  fpradjen  mttetnanber,    £)ie  ^nngen  Uefen 
nnb  fpielten.    2ln  einent  ^eiertag  ift  ber  gauge  ^Ia^  t)oll  t)on 


Das  Haus  am  breiten  Platze. 


ift  em  neue§  Stfb  t?on  bem  ^(c^e.    Qd)  ^abe  aucf)  ein 
aber  ba^  neue  tft  beffer.    3)ie  alten  §au[er  maren  ni^t 
bie  neuen  [tub  Diet  fdjoner. 

Das  Pcildjen. 

(Sin  2?eitc^en  auf  ber  SBtefe  ftanb, 
geburft  in  fid^  unb  unbefannt  : 

e^  iDar  ein  fyeqig'3  33eild)en, 
3)a  fan:  eine  junge  @(f)dferin  1 

mit  (ei^tem  @d)ritt  nnb  mnnternt  Sinn, 

ba^er,  bafyer, 

bie  28ie[e  ^er  nnb  fang. 


44  EASY   READING. 

2ld)  !  benft  ba$  23eilcf)en,  ttwr'  idj  nut 
bte  fdjonfte  33tume  ber  9?atur, 

ad),  nut  ein  HeineS  SBeilcfyen, 
bi$  midj  ba$  Siebcfyen  abgepflucft 
;  unb  an  bem  33ufen  matt  gebritdf  t  ! 

2l(^  nur,  a^  nur 
ein  ^Btertelftunbdjen  lang  ! 


2l(^  !  aber  ad)  !  ba^  2Kab(^en  fam 
unb  nicfyt  in  ac^t  ba^  23et(d)en  na^nt, 

ertrat  ba^  arnte  a?eild)en, 
@^  fanf  nnb  ftarb  nnb  frenf  fid)  nod)  : 
nnb  fterb'  i^  benn,  fo  fterb'  \§  bo^ 

bnrd)  fie,  bitrc^  fie, 

gu  i^ren  S^Be^  ^°^» 

IPoIfgang  r>on  (Soetfye. 


Spriidje* 

15  9Som  Ungtitcf  erft 

jtel)  °ab  bie  ©t^ut 
ttm$  itbrig  ift, 
trag  in  ©ebittb ! 


£)er  eine  fragt :  38a$  fommt 
20  ber  anbre  fragt  nur :  3ft  e$  redjt? 

Unb  alfo  unterfdjeibet  fid^ 

ber  greie  t)on  bem  ^nec^t* 

—  (Efyeobor  Storm. 


DIE   EISENBAHN. 


45 


Die 

§eute  miiffen  jtuei  grennbe  narf)  Berlin  fasten*  §ier 
bitrfen  fie  nidjt  (anger  Meiben.  3lber  in  Berlin  tooften  fie 
tange  bteiben.  £)er  eine  fagt: 

,,98arnm  fotlen  nrir  gef)en?  $$)  lann  e^  nic^t  tjcrftc^cn. 
mag  nic^t  gel)en."  « 

w!Da^  macf)t  nic^t^.    SQBir  miiffen  ge^en/' 

,f3Jtit  melrfient  ,3^  Pollen  mir  fa^ren?" 


Der  Bummelzug. 


ttyjlit  bent  Sumnteljuge,    3^  ntag  bie  ©^nettjnge  nic^t. 
@ie  fafyren  311  fc^nelL    SBir  fonnen  nicl)t  fo  t)ie(  feljen." 

,f2Berben  ttrir  t?iet  fefjen?"  I0 

^^^^o^U  ^ttrifdjen  ^ier  nnb  Berlin  Knnen  ttrir-triefe  fc^dne 
§aufer  nnb  gro^e  SBalber  fe^en," 

ff®nt!    SCBann  miiffen  rtrir  einftetgen?" 

f,3uerft  mitffen  mir  nnfere  gafyrfarten  I5fen»    ®ann  biirfen 
toir  anf  ben  53a{)nfteig  gef)en.    £)er  ^ng  lt)irb  fommen;  bens 
Sc^affner  tt)irb  'ginfteigen7  rnfen;  bann  fonnen  ttrir  einfteigen." 


46 


EASY   READING. 


,,Unb  toerben  totr  in  ^Berlin  cm$fteigen?" 
,,3atool)n    £)er  ,3ug  ttrirb  nad)  ^Berlin  lomtnen;  bet 
net  ttrirb  '  Slu^fteigen '  rufen;  bann  bitrfen  tt)tr  au^fteigen," 

cine  greunb  ge^t,  um  bie  ga^rfarten  311  lofen.    !j)er 
fotntnt ;  ber  (Sd^affner  ruft '  (Sinftetgen ! '    3)ann  fasten 
bie  jtoei  greunbe  nac^ 


, 


"  Einsteigen!  " 

2luf  bem 


©eftern  tootttcn  Sarlr  grife  unb  ^o^ann  nat^  §au[e  faljrett. 
@ie  burften  ni^t  attetn  fasten*    @ie  mit^ten  mit  il)retn  Dnfef 
fasten*    @ie  tDoIIten  i^r  ®epad  mit  in  ben  ,3ug  tragen,  aber 
10  fie  fonnten  e$  -nid^t.    @ie  ntn^ten  e^  f  d)t<Jen. 


AUF   DEM   BAHNHOFE. 


47 


@ie  toottten  al(e$ 
@ie  bnrften  nur 


@ie  fatten  einen  Coffer  unb  jtoei  Sflrbe. 
in  ben  ,3119  tragen,  aber  ©ie  burften  nidjt* 
§anbgepacf  mtt  in  ben  $ng  nefymen. 

@ie  tmtftten  fcier  gafyrlarten  tofen,  nnb  bte  ga^rlarten 
fofteten  tneL    Dann  fonnten  fie  i^r  ©eptid  f^iden.    2lbers 
ba^  loftete  nod)  etttmS. 

f,2Berbcn  mir  jefet  einfteigen  bitrfen?"  fragte 


Das  Gepack. 

[agte  $arl$  GnleL    ,,3nerft  tDerben  mir  auf  ben 
33af)n(teig  ge^en  ntiiffen,    SBenn  ber  ,3ug  ba  ift,  bann  tDerben 
tt)ir  einfteigen  !onnen,    SBenn  er  noc^  nic^t  ba  ift,  toerben  10 
it)ir  marten  ntitffen." 

,,Sa,"  fagte  grife  (acfjenb,  „$<$>  tDerbe  nic^t  einfteigen 
tDotten,  MS  ber  £ng  ba  ift,  2Bir  fonnen  ni^t,  felbft  menn 
ttrir  eS  tDollen." 

,,®vmmt,"  fagte  ber  OnfeL    „$$  ^abe  bie  gafjrfarten  fcf)on  15 
geloft.    SBir  mitffen  jefet  anf  ben  «at)nfteig  gefjen,  nm  f^nett 
einfteigen  gn  ftfnnen,  tDenn  ber  3^9  fommt." 


48 


EASY   READING. 


,,£)ntel,  fjaft  bu  je  auf  einer  gofotnotbe  fafyreu  bitrfen?" 
^atoofyt,  eiumat  ^abe  icf)  fafyreu  moflen,  uub  id)  ^abe 
ud)  gefotmt" 


Auf  dem  Bahnsteige. 

,,2Bte  [o?  SBir  biirfen  nicf)t  auf  ben  beutf^en  gofomottoett 
5  fasten,  SBte  ^aft  bu  barauf  fasten  biirfeu?" 

„&$  tt)ar  iu  SImerila.  9lfe  junger  Sftautt  iu  9lmertfa  mar  tc^ 
fefjr  arm,  Q&)  ^abe  t^iet  ju  gu^  ge^eu  miiffeu,  aber  id)  Ijabe 
imtner  mtt  bem  $uge  fa^ren  motleu,  Qfy  ^atte  emeu  greunb; 


AUF  DEM  BAHNHOFE. 


49 


Die  grosse  Lokomotive. 

er  mar  ?ofotnottt»fitf)rer;  unb  eintnal  fyat  er  mid)  cmf  ber 
moti&e  fasten  laffen.' 

,,2lcf),  tt)ie  fcfjon!    3$  fyabe  nie  auf  einer  gofomotit^e  fasten 
fonnen!' 

,,§ier  in  35eutfcf)(anb  barf  man  ntrf)t    2lber  fefjt!    Qtyts 
fomntt  ber  3ng !    ©ef)t  bte  gro^e  8ofotnottDe !" 

n$a,  bte  9taber  finb 
fo  fyoc!)  lt)te  ein  9Kann. 
@inb      bie      amertfa* 
nifc^en  8ofomottt)en  fo  10 
fc^on  tDte  btefe?" 

WO  ja,  aber  nnfere 
8o!omottden  finb  nidjt 
al(e  fo  gro^  li)ie  biefe. 
^abe  ic^  etne  15 


Die  kleine  Lokomotive. 


50  EASY   READING. 

fomifdje,  atte,  ffeine  gofomottoe  fasten  fefyen,  £)er  8ofomo= 
ttofitfyrer  fyat  fie  fcfjnett  fafjren  laffen  tootten,  aber  fie  fyat  nidjt 
fdjnett  fasten  fonnen.  (£3  toar  fefyr  !omifd)." 

,,2Botten  ttrir  je^t  einfteigen?" 
5     ,,3?atooljl  !    §8rt  ben  ©djaffner  !    2Bie  er  ruft  !" 


Beim  Sc^netber. 

Sin  alter  §err  fall  anf  ber  ©tra^e  einen  jnngen 
3)er  Jnnge  ^)err  tooftte  eben  jn  feinem  ©c^neiber  gefyen.    Der 
@d)neiber  trar  fein  greunb.    (5r  fprac^  ^u  bem  alien  ,^errn» 
ffl^ennen  ©ie  meinen  grennb,  ben  ©t^neiber?" 
toeift  nirf)t.    SBarnnt  fragen  ©ieV 
(affe  bei  il)in  einen  nenen  2lnjug  ntarf)en.    (Sr  fo((  fefyr 
arm  fein,  aber  er  foil  ein  feljr  gnter  ©c^neiber  fein." 

,,£)a3  !ann  fein,  aber  id)  mag  biefe  armen  ©cl)neiber  nidjt 
15  $tf)  ^abe  einmal  bei  einem  t)on  i^nen  einen  9lnsng  mac^en 
laffen,    @r  I)at  ifyn  nid)t  gnt  gemac^t." 

,,2lber  mein  grennb  foflte  gnt  arbeiten.  &  ift  fcfyon  je^n 
^a^re  ©djneiber." 

,,®arf  id)  Sfymi  Slnjng  fefjen?    23ietleicf)t  mag  ic^  if)n  fefyr 
20  gernr  aber  id)  tt)ei§  nicf)t." 

,,3Bot(en  tt)ir  jnm  ©djneiber  ge^en?  Qd)  ^abe  ben  Slnjng 
bort.  ^4  Sei9e  ^w  $ljnen  \tfy  Qtw*  &  ^i^b  bei  biefem 
fatten  SBetter  f^on  nnb  tt)arm  fein/' 

^^amo^U    ^^  SBinter  follte  man  fe^r  marme  Sleiber 
2stragen.    3lHe^  anbere  mag  id)  nidjt    SBie  treit  ift  e$  jum 
©d)neiberr  lt)iffen  ©ie  ?" 

ffTOd)t  twit;  aber  t)iefleid)t  ge^en  ©ie  nic^t  gern  jn  gn^." 
,,2lcf),  ba^  macf)t  nic^t^  !    ©ie  ftfnnen  fo  fdfjnett  nnb  fo  toeit 
luie  fie  tootlen*    3"^  9e^e  fe^)r  9ern  3 


BEIM   SCHNEIDER. 


51 


,,@d)i)n!    £)ann  taffen  @ie  un$  jit  guft  gefyen!" 
£)cmn  gingen  bie  5*t)ei  §erren  burd)  eine  lange  (Strafe  unb 
uber  einen  breiten  $Ia£.    §ier  fafyen  fie  t)iele  8eute,  aber  bie 
3tt)ei  §erren  fannten  fie  afle  nicf)t.    @ie  lt)u^ten,  e$  tuar  f^iit, 
unb  fie  gingen  fd)nett  burc^  no^  eine  Strafe  nnb  famen  jum  5 
©djneiber. 

w®utcn  aKorflcn,  §err  @d)mibt  !    2Bie  gef)t^  ?" 
,,@e^r  gut,  id)  banfe!    SBomit  lann  id)  bienen?    SBoKen 
©ie  nid)t  ^5(a^  ne^men?    ®arf  i(^  3^ne^  t)ief(eid)t  ttoc^ 
einen  9lnjug  madjen  Caffen?"  10 

ff3fd)  tDoIItc  meinem  ^reunbe,  §crrn  Sftitfier,  meinen  neuen 
9lnjufl  geigen." 

ff@c^on  !    ^>ier  ift  er.    (Sin  feljr  fdjoner  Slnjug  !    3^)  ma9 

biefe   garbe    befonber^ 


gern." 


ift  fe^r  f^on,  unb  ba$ 
Ju(^  foH  and)  fe^r  gut 
fein." 


ift 

brei 

feinen    neuen     Sln^ug 

ntac^en  laffen  miiffen, 

3lber  Ijoffentlidj  n)erbeu 

@ie  ni^t  fo  fange  war- 

ten 


Frauenmoden  im  Spreewald. 


ber^ocf^breioberDier?" 

ff©ief  e^    ^a^r    nur  3o 
brei.^ 


52  EASY   READING. 


,,$>tefe$  $af)r  nitr  brei!    2Ba3  foil  benn  baS?" 
,,£)a$  ift  jefet  3»obe." 

,,3d)  mag  biefe  Sftoben  gar  nid)t    $iir  bie  gtauen  finb  fie 
trietteidjt  fefjr  gut,  aber  twr  §erren  foltten  letne  SKoben  fyaben." 
5     ,,2lber  §err  33taun,  -3l)re  Sleiber  mitffen  immer  na(^  ber 
te^ten  9)iobe  [ein,    @onft  mogen  ®ie  bie  Sleiber  ni^t." 
n$a,  ba^  lann  fein,    SBoIten  @ie  mir  ben  Sln^ug  f^icfen? 
tnorgen  tragen/' 
geute  noc^  foil  er  bei  Qfynen  fetn!" 


,,2luf  SBieberfeljen,  meine 

Barbaroffa. 

3)er  atte  33arbaroffa, 
•   ber  Saifer  grieberirf), 
tm  unterirb'f^en  @rf)Ioffe 
er  tteqaubert  fi(^, 


@r  ift  niemal$  geftorben, 
er  lebt  barin  nod)  je^t  ; 
er  ^at  im  @tf)Io^  t)erborgen 
fid) 


(Sr  ^at  fyinabgenomnten 
be^  9teid)e^  §errlid)feit 
nnb  nrirb  einft  tt)ieberfommen 
mit  i^r  ju  feiner 


ift  elfenbeinern, 
25  baranf  ber  ®aifer  fi^t  ; 

ber  Jifd^  ift  marmelfteinern, 
n)orauf  fein  §aupt  er 


VERGISSMEINNICHT.  53 

©em  33art  ift  nicljt  toon  fttacJjfe 
er  ift  toon  generSglnt, 
ift  bnrdj  ben  £ifd)  getoac!)fen, 
tooranf  fein  $inn  an$rnl)t 

&  nidi  al$  tt)ie  tnt  Jranme,  « 

fein  2Ing;  l)a(&  offen  jft)tnft, 
nnb  je  nacf)  tangent  9?anme 
er  einem  $naben  tt)tnft. 


pr(i)t  im 

°f)tn  t)or«  @c^(o^  o 
nnb  fief),  ob  nod)  Me  9?aben 
Ijerfliegen  nnt  ben  33erg  ! 


,,Unb  tDenn  bie  alten  9taben 
noc^  ftiegen  imnterbar, 
fo  ntnft  ic^  ant^  no(^  fcf)Iafen 
Dcrgaubcrt  ^nnbert  ^afjr," 

—  ^rtebrid?  HiicFert. 

Oergt^meinnicl^t 


ein  fdjdneS 
anf  nnfrer  griinen  Sin'  ; 
fein  2lng;  ift  ttrie  ber  ^itnntef, 
fo  ^eiter  nnb  fo  bfan. 

@^  toeift  nid^t  t)iel  gn  reben, 
nnb  atteS,  tt)a^  e^  fprit^t, 
ift  unmet  nnr  ba$fe(be, 
ift  nnr  :  93ergi£meinnirf)t 

—  ^of  mann  con  ^allersleben. 


54 


EASY   READING. 


3m 

©pree  ift  em  bentfcfyer  $(nJ3*    &  flte^t   in  trielen 

$ana(en  bnrdj  einen  groften  2BaIb.    ©iefen  SBalb  nennt  man 

ben  ©preetoatb.    £)ie  33anme  im  ©preetoalb  finb  Ijod),  aber 

nirfjt  fo   f)ocf)   iDte    bte 
5  nnfrtgen* 

3Jidb(i)en     im 
[inb  fcfybn. 

§ier  fe^en  tt)ir  eine^. 

@^  ift  ein 
10  djen.      ©eine 

finb  ni(f)t  mie  bte 

gen. 

§nt  ift  breit  nnb 

^t)rer  ift  frf)ttmrj  nnb 
15  Item.     @ein  Sleib  ift 


.$m  ©preetuatb  tra- 
gen  bie  granen  befon* 
bere  $leiber,  gar  nidjt 
20  U)ie  bie  nnfrigen.  3^re 
Steiber  finb  getoofynlid) 
fnrj  nnb  breit ;  nnfere 
finb  fang  nnb  eng.  Em  Madchen  aus  derh  Sprecwald. 

@etbft  bie  Scanner  tragen  befonbere  §itter  ffein  nnb  rnnb,  gar 
25  nidjt  U)ie  meiner.  9lber  bie  ©djnfye  finb  iDie  bie  nnfrigen. 

£)ie  Sftntter  be^  ffeinen  SWabc^en^  fyat  biefen  @ut  felbft 
gema^t,  aber  ben  ifyrigen  ^at  fie  madjen  laffen.  ®ie  granen 
im  ©preettmlb  foKen  fetjr  flei^ig  fein. 

,,9Bol)er  icf)  ba^  tuei^  fragen  @ie?"    Nun,  id)  tt)ar  felber  im 


IM   SPREE  WALD. 


55 


unb  fjabe  at(e$  felbft  gefefyen.  2ln  einent  Sonntag 
toar  id)  bort,  unb  id)  i)abe  fciele  grauen  in  bie  Sirdje  ge^en 
fe{)en.  Setyen  ©ie  ba^  Heine  3J?ab^en?  ^un,  i^re  §iite 
iDaren  atte  nrie  ber  feine. 

it)ar  mit  einem  greunbe  bort.    ^^  fatte  tneinen  Sobaf  5 


Sonntag  im  Spreewald. 

bei  ntir,  unb  er  ^atte  ben  fetnigen,    Sir  fyaben  bie  grauen 
p^otograp^iert.    §ier  finb  bie  ^^otogra|3^ien, 
Qm  SpreetDalb  fyaben  \mr  atte^  fe^r  intereffant  gefunben. 
fa^en  bie  befonberen  $feiber  ber  ^rauen  unb  felbft  ber 
S)ie  9Wdnner  trugen  Sfeiber  beina^e  n)ie  unfere^i 
aber  ifyre  §itte  lt)aren  nid^t  trie  bie  unjrigen. 

t)a^  ndrf)fte  9)?al  bfeiben  mir  (anger  im  ©preeiDalb.    &  ift 
bort  f o  frf)on !    Unb  bie  Xracfyten  finb  fo  intereffant. 


56 


EASY   READING. 


fur  £rarf)ten  finb  benn  ba$?" 
,,3Bot>on    foremen    @ie?     3Ba$    meinen    @ie?     SBelcfye 
£ratf)ten?" 

,,3<(i)  meine  bie  SHeiber  ber  8eute  auf  biefem  nadjften  33ilbe. 
fur  geute  finb  benn  ba^?" 

finb  §effen.     35te    §effen   tjaben  aud^    befonbere 
,  aber  biefe  finb  nidjt  \mt  bie  ^leiber  tnt  Spreetoalb." 


Hessische  Trachten. 


,,§aben  benn  alle  3)eutfc^en  biefe  befonberen 
§aben  ®ie  nirf)t  ^(eiber  lt)ie  anbere  gente?" 
D     ff  J)ie  tneiften,  Ja  !    3lber  uberatt  in  £)eutfcf)Ianb  finbet  man 
biefe  befonberen  2rad)ten.    Unb  e^  finb  f(^one  Xra^ten,  nic^t 


!    Slber  ba^  finb  feine  neuen  Sftoben  !" 
3^.  biefe  9Koben  finb  immer  neu  !    ©ie  iuerben  nie  alt  ! 
,,2Borau3  mac^en  bie  Seute  biefe  $leiber?" 


ETWAS   ANDERES. 


57 


,,£)ie  SEradjten  fnr  bie  granen  unb  2ftabdjen  finb  an§ 
@eibe  gemadfjt,  an$  ber  beften  @eibe.  £)ie  0eiber  ber 
banner  finb  son  fdjtoarsem  Znfy." 

,,£)a$  finb  f  rfjflne  $f  erbe,  nidjt  ftmfjr  ?w 

,,3;att)ot)(  !    £)ie  Jungen  Scanner  fifeen  auf  fc^onen,  f^tt)arjen  s 
^Pferben.    £)ie  alten  banner  fte^en  neben  ben  Sftixbdjen.    @« 
ift  ein  tntereffanteS  53Hb." 

€trt)as  dnbcres. 

©cftern  lafen  bte  <Sd)it(er  itber  bentfc^e  Irarfjten.  §eute 
ternen  fie  ettra^  anberes.  @^  ift  nidjt  ba^felbe  ttrie  ba^  anf  ber 
t»ori(\cn  Seite.  (S^  ift  t>ie(  njentger.  2lber  e^  ift  etlt)a^  ?Jene^.  10 

®ie  lefen  meniger  unb 
arbeiten  tne^r.  g^  ift 
nic^t^  8eicl)te3.  SBenn 
man  etn)a^  ©d)iDere^ 
(ernen  milt,  mu§  man  15 
met)r  arbeiten,  Da$ 
tt)ei§  jebermann, 

®iefe  SBdrter  finb 
nid)t  biefelben  it)ie  oben. 
'Die  tt)aren  nic^t  fo20 
fcljtoer,  llnb  bie^  finb 
nic^t  biefelben  @a^e. 
Diefe  @a^e  ^aben  mefyr 
Sorter,  tt)ie  bie  anf  ber 


Waschfrauen  im  Spreewald. 


ttorigen  @eite. 

©eftern  lafen  bie 
©d)iUer  ettnaS  9Zeue$  nber  beutfc^e  £rad)ten.  IRorgen  n?erben 
fie  auc^  etrtmS  ^ntereffante^  iiber  beutfc^e  Xrac^ten  (efen. 
@ie  tDerben  nic^t  biefelben  atten  @d^e  lefen  miiffen. 


25 


58 


EASY   READING. 


lefen  gern  meljr  2B5rter  mil  roeniger 
ftaben.    2lber  bieje  SBorter  toerben  tnefyr  33nd)ftaben  fjaben, 
al$  bie  auf  ber  fcorigen  @eite, 

3Kan  faun  ntc^t  Jebertnann  gefafien.    ®iefe  SBorter  unb 
5  @a^e  gefafien  ben  metften  in  ber  Piaffe;  ba^  ntn§  genng  fetn, 

Deutfd^e  Crac^ten. 

f,2Ba^  finb  benn  btefe 

beibenSitber?" 
ff!J)a«  finb  noci)  einige 

beutf^e  Zvafyten." 
10     ,M     biefe     Silber 

[c^einen  bentfd^e  Zrafy 

ten  jn  fein.    J)a^  a(fe$ 

gefaflt  tnir  nirf)t.    (Snt- 

pit    benn    ba3    ganje 
15  S3nd)      nnr      bentfc^e 


ltyt&)  nem ! 
ben  nodj   t>iele   anbere 
33i(ber  fefyen.  2Bir  toer- 

20  ben  einige  33ilber  t)on 
bentf(f)en  3)onten  nnb 
me^rere  ^^otograpfjien 
Don  bentfd)en  @d)Id(fern 
fe^en»" 

25  „(£«  fc^eint  alfe« 
bent[^  jn  feinr  nic^t 


Auf  dem  Lande. 


ift  e^  ! 
W9?ur  ein  tnenigr  aber  tc 


Diet 


£)eutf  d)  ?" 
gelefen, 


DEUTSCHE   TEACHTEN. 


59 


£ag  lefen  totr  tnel)rere  bentfd)e  @afee.    2lber  meine  beiben 
33ritber  fprecfyen  ©entfd).    @ie  (ernen  ed  fd)on  stoei  Qafyt." 

,,Sa,  bad  ift  ettoad  anbered.    Qe^t  mitffen  @ie  ba^  ganje 
Qaljv  arbetten,    bann    lt)erben  @ie    ait(^    S)eutf(^    fprerfjen 
lonnen.    @te  follten  nod)  btefe  SBo^e  nod)  etn  48uc^  tefen*  5 
!^a6e  etnige  ^Bitd^er  itber  bentfdje  Jra^ten*" 
&)  ^abe  nod)  nte  ettDa^  fo  @cf)tt)ere^  gelefen,  tote  ba$ 
anbere  53ud)  itber  bte  bentfc^en 


,,2lber  id)  fetye  nidjt 
in  jenem  Snc^e.    (Sd  fc^eint  mir 
fefyr  leic^t." 

ift  ed  fetjr  leicfyt  fitr 


,,23ielfeidjt  nteinen   mir  nic^tis 
ba^felbe  48ud).    Qfy  meine  ba^- 
Jenige  anf  bent  $nlt,  ba^  rote. 
SBeldjeS  meinen  @ie  ?" 

„$&)  meine  ba3  nteinige  ^ier. 
6^  tft  ntd)t  ba^felbe.  @e^en  ®ie,  20 
e3  ift  brann,  nnb  ettoa$  fo  ©cfjtDe- 
red  f)abe  id)  nie  gelefen,  @^  er- 
$af)It  Don  bent[(^en  Jra^ten,  unb 
bte  33ilber  finb  fc^r  \tf)$n.u 

f,2Ber  ^at  e§  3=^nen  gegeben?25 
9Son  toent  ^aben  @ie  ba^  33nd)?" 

^^^    ^abe    e§    Don   nteinem 
grennbe,  bem  atten  Scorer/ 

({eft 


InderStadt. 

;  er  lie  ft  nnr  grofte,  bide,  fcf)tt)ere  $itd)er. 
jebermann." 


60  EASY    READING. 

,,9?nn,  fjoffentlidj  gibt  tntr  niemanb  toieber  fold)  em  fd)ft)ere$ 
$8n&).  ©elbft  mein  SSater  fcerftanb  nidjt,  toofcon  e-3  eqdfylte." 

,,9Jian  fotlte  nn$  toeniger  fd)toere  Sitter  nnb  me^r  tetd)te 
geben,  (5^  i(t  beffer,  t)te(  8etcf)te3  ju  lefen.  Ntemanb  fann 
5  alfe$  lernen." 

„$&)  finbe  bte  beiben  braunen  S3itdf)er  ju  fdjtoer.  5)a^  eine 
^at  me^rere  fdjtoere  @a^e  ;  ba§  anbere  tjat  ganje  ©etten  mit 
ju  tnelen  fangen  SBortern*  @te  gefatlen  tntr  betbe  ntc^t/' 


^  ftrirb  Qfynen  t)tel(et(^t  gefatlen.    S^  tft  gar 
nt(i)t  fo  f^tner  tine  ba$  branne." 
te  e$  mtr  jetgen?" 
\rnll  e$  3c^nen  g^ben.    ^otntnen 


3?ogletn  fltegt  bent 
^at  fief)  tnitb'  geffogen  ; 
(Si^iffletn  fndf)t  tm  §afen  9tn^ 
t?or  ben  lt)an!enben  SBogen. 

@onne  benft  nnn  anct),  fie  Ijtttf 
tang  genng  ge[tf)tenen  ; 
tegt  fi(^  in  if)r  §itntnelbett 
mit  ben  roten  ©arbinen. 


SSoglein  fi^t  itn  Barmen 
(ein  tiegt  itn  §afenr 
©onne  fcfjlixft  fc^on  tief  nnb  feft, 
25  and)  mein  Sinb  mitt  fcfytafen. 

—  peter  (£ornelius. 


SCH  WALBENLIED.  61 


fernem  8anb, 


auf  fjoljen,  lufttgen  SBegen 

fHegft,  ©djroalbe,  bu 

oljne  $Raft  unb  3htl) 
ber  Ueben  §etmat  °entgegen. 

O  fprtcf),  mo^er 

itber  8anb  unb  9fteer 
^aft  bu  bie  Sunbe  fcernotmnen, 

bag  tm  §eimatlanb 

ber  SBtnter  [c^tDanb, 
uub  ber  grilling,  ber  gn^ting  gefonttnen? 


[efbernic^t 
toofyer  mtr  gelommen  bte  SKa^nuug  ;  15 

bod)  fort  unb  fort 

&on  Drt  gu  Ort 
locft  mic^  bte 


fr@o  ot)ne 

in  freubtger  @aftr 
auf  f)o^eu,  lufttgen  SBegen 

flteg'  tc^  untjertDanbt 

bent  ^eintatlanb, 
bent  lensgefdjmitcften,  °entgegen!" 

—  Julius  Sturm, 


62 


EASY   READING. 


ben 


9lnf  ben  @tra£en  in  ^Berlin  fiefyt  man  trie(e$,  toa$  fefjr  in- 

tereffant  ift    £)ie  geute,  toetcfye  bie  ^eitnngen  fcerfanfen,  ftnb 

nicfyt   Snaben,   ft)ie    in 

2ltnerifcu    g^  finb  ge^ 
5  mo^nlirf)  9Kanner  ober 

granen* 
§ier    ift    ein    after 

aWann,  ber  eine 

in  ber  §an 
10  ift    me^r    aB     fiebjig 

^a^re    alt,    nnb 

twfanft  er  immer 

feine   >$dhtngen,     S5er 

anbere,  ber  neben  iljm 
15  fte^t,  Heft  eine  ^eitung, 

bie  er  eben  ge!auft  fyat. 

!Dcr  3l(te,  beffen  ^eitung 

ber  anbere  eben  gelauft 


t,  tt>irb  ganj  fpat 


er  mtt  feiner  gran  inof)nt,  ift  Mcin.  £>ie 
er  in  n)el^er  e^  ftefyt,  ift  fnrj  nnb  eng,  aber  ber  alte 
SJJann  ift  fetyr  glndlid),  @r  ^at  atte^,  m$  er  tt)itnf(f)tr  eine 
gnte  alte  gran  nnb  gtoei  @df)ne, 

25     £)ie  beiben  @o^ner  bie  bei  bem  3tttcn  it)ot)nen,  arbeiten  anf 
ben  @tra£en.    @ie  reinigen  bie  @traf;en,    ®ie  8ente,  tt)el(^e 
bie  Strain  reinigen,  arbeiten  imnter  fefyr  f(ei^ig,  befonber^ 
einent  3tegen. 
SHnber  ber  beiben  @^ne  ge^en  ntorgen^  in  bie 


AUF  DEN  STRASSEN. 


63 


35er  alte  ©roftuater,  bei  bem  fie  tooljnen,  Uebt  fie  feljr. 
mittagS  fiefyt  man  fie  oft  cmf  ben  ©traften.  @ie  ftrieten  mit 
ben  anberen  $inbern,  toetdje  fie  auf  ben  ©traften  finben*  @ie 
finben  alle^  fef)t  intereffant,  toaS  fie  anf  ben  ©tra^en  fefyen. 

f,3Biffen  @ie,  ma^  bie  Sinber  gutocilcn  anf  ben  ©trains 
finbenV" 


Die  reine  Strasse. 


,,91ein,  id)  toeift  nid)tr  ma^  fie  finben,  aber  id)  ^abe  gefe^en, 
too  fie  geftern  na^mtttag  toaren." 

,,28o  toaren  fie  benn?  $tf)  fyabe  nic^t  gefe^en,  toa^  fie 
geftern  taten."  i 

fr@ie  toaren  anf  bem  breiten  ^ta£e.  $fy  oerftefye  ni(^t,  tote 
fie  fo  toeit  Dom  §anfe  gegangen  finb,  aber  id)  f)abe  jtoei  t)on 
tfynen  bort  gefef)en,  @ie  ftanben  f)inter  einer  alten  ^ranr  bie 


64 


EASY   READING. 


einen  groften  $  orb  boll  33tumen  fyatte,  £)er  erne  $nabe, 
toelcfjer  feine  ©djnfye  itnb  feme  Stritmpfe  an  ben  5^Ben  fyfttte, 
ttmftte,  ttrie  er  nad)  @anfe  fontmen  fonnte.  £)er  anbere  fannte 
ben  2Beg  nicfjt" 

5     f,?ld)  }a,  ic^  gtaube,  id)  ^abe  bte  betben  Snaben  gefe^en* 
J)er  eine  ^atte  ein  @tit(J  papier  in  ber  §anb;  ber  anbere 


Auf  dem  breiten  Platze. 


Unb  neben  ifynen  (tanb 
gefe^en  ^abe. 


I)atte  feine  ©d)nl)e  an  ben 

ein  3Kann  mit  bem  3lrm  anf  einem 

n$d)  Der[tel)e  ni(J)t,  tuarnnt 
10  3lber  it^  ^abe  @ie  ni(^t  gefefyen." 

,,2lber  id)  t^ar  bod)  ba,    3Serfte^en  @ier  U)ie  bie  SOhttter 
meig,  mo  fie  geiDij^nli^  ifyre  Sinber  finben  fann  ?u 

^ein,  nnb  i^  tierfte^e  anc^  nidjt,  t^arnm  fie  if)re 
nad)tnittag3  anf  ber  (Strafe  (anfen 


AUF   DEM   MARKT. 


65 


Die  Gemusefrau. 


2luf  bem  ZlTarft 

grill)  am  DJforgen  gefjt  biefe  alte  $rau  auf  ben  3Karft,  benn 
fie  brill  ifyr  ©emitfe  Derfaufen.  @ie  ift  nirfjt  nur  alt,  fonbern 

and)  fef)r  arm,  @ie  Ijat 
einen  fleinen  2Bagen 
Doll  ®emitfe.  5 

9?eben  iljr  ge^t  i^r 
treuer  §tmb.  ®te  ^at 
etn  53rettr  toorauf  er 
Itegen  lann,  benn  Me 
©trafte  tft  f^r  faltio 
SBcifyrenb  fie  auf  bent 
©emitfe  t)cr* 

bet    ©ttttb 

auf  feinem  SBrett.     @r 

liegt  fe^r  gern  barauf,  ba  e^  auf  ber  Strafe  fo  fait  ift    9todj*  15 
bent  bie  atte  gran  ba^  ©emitfe  ocrfauft  ^at,  gefjt  fie  nac^  §aufe. 

Qn  beutfdjen  ©tabtcn  fiel)t  man  Diele  9ftarfte.  $tbt  @tabt 
^at  i^ren  SWarft,  »o  man  ©emitfe  unb  allerlei  anbere^  !aufen 
fann,  3utt)e^en  fyflben  bit  8eute  auf  bent  90?arfte  auc^  ^drbe, 
©tittle,  Xopfe  unb  alle$  mi)glic^e  ju  uerfaufen,  20 

S)a  fommt  eine  anbere  gran  mit  einem  ®orbe  in  ber  §anb. 
@ie  n^ill  Sartoffeln  faufcn.  ©obalb  fie  bie  alte  gran  mit 
bent  ©emufe  fie^t,  gefyt  fie  ju  i^r. 

,Ma%  foften  biefe  ^artoffeln  ba^  ^3funb?"  fragt  fie. 

,r-3ene  Sartoffeln  foften  gttwtigig  pfennig  ba^  ^funb. 
finb  fe^r  gute." 

f,3a,  ba^  follten  fie  ju  folrf)em  ^5reife  fein!   £)a$  tft 
t)tel  !  " 

anbere  ©emttfe, 


66 


EASY   READING. 


„$&)  gtanbe  nidjt,  ba£  id)  ba$  atteS  in  meinen  $orb  toerbe 
legen  fdmten.    gr  ift  ju  fie  in." 

,,3<ati)ol)(,  tt)enn  @ie  t)ie(  ©entitfe  fanfen  H)ol(enr  fo  [oflten 
@ie  einen  gro^en  ^orb  ntitbringen." 
5     ,,2lber  mein  jnnger  Unabe,  ben  id)  sn  @au[e  ^abe  toff  en 


Auf  dem  Markt. 

miiffen,  f)at  meinen  gro^en  torb  tjaben  tootten,  nm  bamit  ju 
fpieten." 

,,ltnb  fatten  @ie  nnr  ben  einen  groften  Sorb,  mit 
er  fjat  [pielen  Gotten?" 

10     ,,3<att)ol)I,  aber  itf)  gfanbe,  ba^  id)  ^ier  anf  bem  9J?arlte 
einen  merbe  fanfen  li^nnen/1 

r,2lci)  ja!    ®ort  an  ber  @<fe  fe^en  @ie  eine  ^ran,  bie 
nnb  t5rbe  tjerlanft." 


AUF   DEM   MARKT. 


67 


,,3<ft  ba$  bie  gran,  bte  id)  fyente  morgen  fo  fritf)  auf  ben 
9Karft  Ijabe  geljen  fefjen?" 

,,3=atool)n  Qd)  glaube,  ba^  man  fie  Jeben  SKorgen  [e^en 
fann,  benn  fie  ge^t  mil  i^ren  £ityfen  nnb  Sorben  fe{jr  frit^ 
auf  ben  2»arft."  5 


Topfe  und  Korbe. 

^offe,  ba^  fie  fyente  abenb  frii^  lt)trb  nacfy  §anfe  ge^en 
burfen,  benn  fie  nwft  fefjr  mitbe  fein." 

,,3a,  ba^  ift  fie,  aber  fie  ge^t  erft  bann  na^  ©aufe,  menn  fie 
alt  i^re  Zityfe  nnb  ^forbe  ^at  t)erfanfen  Iflnnen.  $d)  toct^ 
baj^  fie  ba$  atte^  berlanfen  mn^/'  J 

£)ann  ift  bie  ^ran  mit  bent  ffeinen  ^orbe  jn  bet  anberen 
gran  gegangen,  bie  bie  Sttyfe  nnb  ^5rbe  ^at  Derfanfen  rooffen. 


68  EASY   READING. 

SMefe  tsar  ntdjt  alt,  fonbern  gans  jnng,  aber  fie  fcfyten  fefyr 
ntitbe.  @te  ftanb  neben  ifyren  Jopfen  unb  Sorben,  bte  auf 
33rettern  Iagen. 

f,2Ba^  foftcn  bicfc  Si)rbe?"  fragte  bte  erfte  gran, 
s     ,,£)ie,  bte  Dor  Qfyntn  Itegen,  loften  eine  3Rarf  fttnfgtg. 
auf  ben  33rettent  bort  loften  gtoet  SJiarl  funfjig." 


Deutsches  Geld. 

tDttt  einen  »on  benen  fanfen,  bte  gtoci  SWarl  flhifgig 
loften.    3U  ©aufe  ^a^e  ^  nur  e^nen  8^<>Betl  ^orb." 

f,@o?    ®er,  ben  @tc  laufenr  tft  ber  befte,  ben  itf)  fyabe, 
io@ie  ^aben  mtr  etn  Srehnartftitcf  gegeben,  ntt^t  l^a^r?" 

!  @te  fagten,  jener  f  orb  loftct  jtoet  9Kar!  fiinfjtg*" 
§ier  finb  fnnfjtg  pfennig.    Qtf)  banle." 


ERLKONIG.  69 

,,StttefeIjr!    Slbien!" 

Dcmn  ging  fie  mit  ifjrem  gro^en  Sorb  jn  ber  $ran,  tion  ber 
fie  bie  Sartoffeln  fyatte  fcmfen  tooflen.  9?adjbent  fie  bie  Sar- 
toffeln  unb  ba$  anbere  ©emitfe  in  ben  Sorb  getegt  fyatte, 
naf)m  fie  ben  Sorb  anf  ben  3lrm  nnb  ging  nac^ 


Auf  dem  Wege  nach  Hause. 

@^  iDar  fpat  getoorben,  nnb  fie  ^at  t>iele  Sente  gefe^en,  bie 
i^re  SBaren  nicf)t  fatten  Derlanfen  lonnen.  3jiejenigenr  toetdje 
i^re  SBaren  tierfanft  fatten,  toaren  fcf)on  anf  bem  SBege  narf) 
§anfe.  ®ie,  bie  i^re  SBaren  no^  ni^t  fatten  uerlanfen  fon* 
nenr  tDofiten  nod)  ba  bfeiben. 


SBcr  reitet  fo  foftt  bnrc^  5Wac^t  nnb  SBinb? 
g^  ift  ber  3Sater  mit  feinem  Sinb  ; 
er  ^at  ben  Snaben  tt)o^l  in  bent  2lnn, 
er  fa^t  i^n  fid)er,  er  fytilt  i^n 


70  EASY   READING. 


@of)tt,  tons  birgft  bu  fo  bang  bein  ®efid)t?- 
©teljft,  SSater,  bu  ben  (Srlfcinig  nidjt? 
Sen  (Srlenfonig  mit  Sron'  unb  @d)tt)eif?- 
2ftein  @ol)tt,  e3  ift  ein  9Jebelftreif.- 

,,3)u  Iiebe$  $inb,  lomm,  get)  ntit  mir  ! 
®ar  fdjone  ©ptele  fpteP  id^  mit  Mr  ; 
manc^  bnnte  ^Blnmen  finb  an  bem  @tranb  ; 
metne  Sautter  ^at  tnant^  gittben  ©etoanb."- 

9J?etn  3Sater,  mein  SSater,  unb  Ijijreft  bu  nic^t, 
toaS  (Srlenfonig  mir  letfe  tierfprtdjt?  — 
@et  rul)tg,  bleibe  ru^ig,  mein  Stub  ; 
in  bitrren  Slattern  faufelt  ber  SBinb.  - 

ffSBil(ft,  f  einer  Snabe,  bu  mit  mir  gef)n  ? 
9JJeine  3^5d)ter  follcn  bid)  marten  [d)on  ; 
meine  X6d)ter  fit^ren  ben  nad)tHd)en  9?eif)n, 
unb  miegen  unb  tanjen  unb  ftngen  bid)  °etn."— 

3?ater,  mein  3Sater,  unb  fiel)ft  bu  nid)t  bort 

Ji)d)ter  am  bitftern  Drt?  — 
SKein  ©of)nr  mein  Soljn,  ic^  \d)y  e^  genau  ; 
20  e$  [c^einen  bie  atten  SBeiben  f  o  gran,  - 

,,$i)  liebe  bi(^r  mid)  rei^t  beine  fd)i)ne  ©eftalt  ; 
unb  bift  bu  nidjt  millig,  fo  brand)'  id)  ©emalt"- 
90?ein  33ater,  mein  3Sater,  je^t  fa§t  er  mid)  °an  ! 
(grlf  onig  fyat  mir  ein  8eib^  getan  !  - 

25  £)em  SSater  graufet^,  er  reitet  gefd)it)inbr 

er  fyalt  in  ben  9Irmen  ba^  adj^enbe  Sinb, 
erreid^t  ben  §of  mit  SRitfye  unb  5yjot  ; 
in  feinen  3lrmen  ba^  Sinb  toar  tot, 

IPoIfgang  von  (5oettje. 


UNTER  DEN   STUDENTEN. 


71 


Unter  ben  Stubentett 

2Inf  bentfdjen  Unfoerfitciten  Ijaben  bie  ©tnbenten  eine  @itte, 
Me  nn$  2lmerifanern  ganj  fremb  ift  ©iefe  ©itte  lotnmt  nie* 
mats  in  Slmerifa  °t?or.  ©fet(^  tm  erften  3a^re  f^ngen  bte 
beittfcfyen  (Stubenten  °anr  mit  @c^tt)ertern,  bte  man  <@d)tager ' 
nennt,  jn  fecfjten.  5 

@ol(^  etn  !SueII  nennen  bte  Stnbenten  eine  '  3ftenfnr.' 
©tefe  9Ken[nren  finben  faft  jeben  Jag  °ftatt.  gin  Stubent 


Eine  Mensur. 

anS  einer  3Serbinbitng  ft^Iagt  fid^  mit  einem  anberen 
benten^  ber  jn  einer  anberen  2?erbinbnng  ge^ort,  J)ie 
fnren  finben  gen)o^nHc^  in  einem  grofeen  f3to^e^  °ftatt. 
®ei  ber  3Kcnfur  fte^en  bie  beiben  ©tnbenten  ganj 
beieinanber.  J)ann  fangen  fie  °an.  gin  ©tnbent  rnft  °an$  : 
rr8luf  bie  2)?enfnr !  gertig  !  8oS !"  5lber  er  fagt  e^  fo  fc^nell, 
ba^  man  nnr  ,/fnr  fe'g  Io« !"  prt.  £)ann  ge{)t  eS  °(oS !  3Me 


72  EASY   READING. 

betben  ©tubenten,  Me  ifjre  ©djlciger  fyorf)  itber  bem 
gefyalten  fyaben,  frfjlagen  breimal  aufetnanber  °(o$. 

3)ann  fyort  man  °auf,  urn  ju  fefjen,  ob  Jemcmb  tjertDunbet  tft. 
@te  t)erlDunben  fief)  getDd^nlic^  am  ^opfe»    SBenn  feitter  t)er- 
5  tDitnbet  tft,  ober  luenn  einer  nicf)t  fe^r  ftarf  fcerttmnbet  i(t,  fo 
fasten  fie  mit  ber  SWenfur  °fort» 

,,§aft  bu  folt^  etne  SKenfur  gefefyen?" 


Nach  der  Mensur. 

3$  f)cibe  etne  9)?enfnr  gefefyen,  bet  ber 
(Stnbenten  fortfnfyren,  ftd^   gu  frf)Iagen,  fetbft  nadjbem  Jeber 
jmet  ober  brei  SBnnben  er^alten  ^atte," 

,/J)a^  mnft  furc^tbar  an^gefe^en  ^aben ! " 

,,^a,  bte  ©tubenten  fe^en  ntdjt  fe^r  fc^on  °an^r  aber  toenn 
man  etnmal  angefangen  Ijatr  anf  bte  Sftenfur  sn  ge^en,  ift  e$ 


UNTER   DEN   STUDENTEN. 


73 


,,2l6er  ift  e$  nid)t  fcerboten,  fo  ju  fedjten?" 

,,2lc!)  }a,  aber  fie  umgefyen  ba3  @efe£.    23ie(e  grofte  Scanner, 
toie  33i3marcl,  finb  at£  ©tubenten  auf  bie  Sftenfur  gegangen. 
$d)  pbe  gans  £)eutfrf)(anb  burc^retft ;  i^  bin  burdj  faft  all 
bie  ©tcibte  gereift,  too  Uniderfitatett  finb  ;  unb  in  Jeber  llni^  5 
DerfitatSftab-t,  too  itf)  Ringing,  gingen  bie  ©tubenten  auf  bie 


ff2lber  toaS  tun  bie  ©tubenten,  toenn  fie  fcertounbet  finb?" 
,,28enn  fie  dertounbet  finb,  derbinbet  man  fie  mit  £itcf)ern. 

gel)en  fie  mit  biefen  Jitc^ern  °^erum,  unb  ba^  unter^  10 
bie  anberen  fe^r  gut,    <2ie  fe()en  fel)r  fomifc^  Oau$,  aber 

fie  finb  fe^r  ftolj  auf 
i()re  SBunben,  toelt^e  fie 
'Sdjmiffe'  nennen," 

^^ft  ba^  benn  eine  15 
@ljre,      mit       folcfjen 


()en  ?" 


Schmisse. 


te^te  Srtat,  al$ 
id)  Seutf^Ianb 
reifte,  unter^iett 
ein  ©tubent  mit 
(Srsa^Iung  t>on  feinen 
2ftenfuren.  grljattefi^ 
je^nmal  gefcf)Iagen. 


B,  ba§  er  nidjt  ubertrieben  pt,  benn  er  fyatte  ba^  ganje 
©efit^t  fcolf  (£rf)miffe  unb  auc^  unter  ben  §aaren  noc^  anbere,  30 
bie  er  leiber  ni(^t  jeigen  fonnte!" 


74  EASY  READING. 


r,!Da$  tear  fefyr  intereffant    Slber  ersafyle  tnir  better  Don 
ben  ©tnbenten!    @te  fdfjlagen  fie!)  boci)  nid)t  immer?    ^u- 
toeilen  befncfyen  fie  bie  23ortefnngen  ber  ^rofefforen,  nidjt 
toafyr  ?    Somm,  fafyre  mit  beiner  (Sqafylnng  °fort  !" 
5     ,,2lber  [age  mir  bod),  toa$  bu  fjoren  ttnttft!" 

,,&$t)k  t)om  ?eben  in  ber  23erbtnbwtg,  tuenn  man  ni(J)t 
anf  bie  sltfenfur  gel)t  !  gange  mit  ben  erften  Xagen  anf  ber 
Untoerfitat  °an!" 

ffsJJatur(i^  fc^Iagen  fid^  bie  ©tubenten  ni^t  immer.    @ie 
10  mad&en  3ln^f(iige  anf  ba$  ?anb,  befonber^  menn  bie  Untoerfi* 
taten,  toic  §eibelberg,  5D?arburg  nnb  greibnrg,  in  fe^r  fcfyimen 
©egenben   liegen*     ©ie   fingen,  fptelen  nnb   crga^Icn   ©c* 
fdjic^ten,  nnb  giwetten  ftubtcrcn  fie  fogar,    SBenn  ein  @tn^ 
bent  ftnbieren  ttritt,  ^at  niemanb  ettDa^  bagegen." 
15     ,,3lber  mitffen  fie  nic^t  a  He  ftnbieren  nnb  bie  23c-rlefnngen 
befndjen?" 

r,O  nein!    &%  ift  nidjt  tDtc  bei  nn^.    SJJan  barf  anf  ber 
Unit^erfitat  bleiben,  fotange  man  tDitl,  felbft  U)enn  man  nidjt 
ftnbiert." 
20     ,,3l^r  ba$  mn^  fe^r  Ieid)t  fein  !" 

,,2lber  man  mn^  fe^r  ftei^ig  lernen,  e^e  man  anf  bie  llni* 

t)erfitiit  lommt.    3)a^  ift  and)  nicfyt  luie  bei  nn$,  fonbern  t)iel 

fc^tt)erer.    Unb  man  mn£  natitrlidf)  ftnbieren,  tt)enn  man  bie 

Sjamen  befte^en  will.    3lber  man  brant^t  nid^t  bie  (Syamen 

23  jn  befte^en,  nm  anf  ber  Unit)erfitat  bfeiben  jn  fdnnen," 

,,SBie  gebran^t  man  bie  geit,  menn  man  nid^t  jn  ftnbieren 
brancl)t?" 

ff@o  ^5re  mat  °gn!    2Bie  id^  fd^on  gefagt  fyabe,  mac^t  man 

3lMpger  tt)o  man  fid)  fefyr  gnt  nnter^att.     £)ie  bentfdjen 

soStnbenten  fingen  an^gesei^net*    S3  ttingt  ipnnberfdfjon,  U)enn 

man  im  SBatbe  fi^t  nnb  bie  ©tnbenten  fingen 


UNTER   DEN   STUDENTEN. 


75 


,,©ingen  bie  Stnbenten  immer,  toenn  fie  Mefe  2ln$fliige 

madjen?" 

,,®enri£!    SefonberS  toenn  fie  bnrd)  ben  SBatb  geljen." 
,fllnb  it)ie  oft  madjen  bie  ©tnbenten  biefe  Sln^pge?" 
^eben  Jag !    ^atnrlid^  mad)en  Mefelben  Stubenten  ntcf)t  5 

jeben  Jag  einen  2lu$f(ug,  aber  jeben  Jag  fann  man  tnefe  @tn= 

benten  in  ben  fdjonen  ©egenben  urn  ^peibelberg,  Warburg 

ober  greibnrg  fefyen." 

t)ief  t)om  ^arjer  crjtt^tcn  I)oren.    SBa^  ift  benn 


Ein  Studententisch. 

V 

ei  barf  bie  ©tnbenten  nic^t  Derf)aften,  SBenn 
ein  @tubent  etlua^  3Serbotene^  tnt,  mn^  er  in  ben  Sarjer 
ge^en,  anftatt  in$  ©efangnfe  ge^en  ju  mitffen.  3lber  ba^ 
fommt  nte^t  fef)r  oft  °t?or,  9Benn  ber  @tnbent  etit)a^ 
©c^Iec^te^  getan  I)at,  mnj}  man  i^n  beftrafen.  3lber  ba$  tut  15 
bie  Uniderfitat,  ofyne  bie  ^olijei  e^  tDtffen  ju  laffen/ 


76 


EASY   READING. 


f,Unb  tt)te  lebt  bcr  beftrafte  ©tnbent  im  larger  ?" 
,,3hiftatt  gut  ju  leben,  Ijat  er  nut  ein  IjarteS  Sett,  einen 
Ilcincn  Dfen,  einen  fdjmaten  £tfd),  unb  einen  atten  @tnf)L 
Urn  jn  ftnbieren,  fyat  er  nur  eine  alte  8ampe*  ©a  er  getrti^n^ 
lid)  nifyt  ftubieren  n)it(,  ma^t  er  33itber  nnb  fd)reibt  ©ebid)te 
an  bie  SBanb.  'I)er  Parser  fyat  immer  t^iete  t)on  btefen  t»on 


Der  Karzer. 

ben  ©tubenten  genta^ten  93Ubern  nnb  ©ebid^ten.  3)a  ber 
©tnbent  ntd^t  ntit  ben  anberen  ©tnbenten  f)ernmge^en  lann, 
^at  er  nicfjts  anbere^  jn  tnn." 

,fUnb  tt)ie  fange  mn^  er  im  ^arjer  bfeiben,  o^ne  bie  anberen 
jnfeljen?" 

lommt  baranf  °an/' 
lann  nirf)t  fe^r  nnter^aftenb  fein/' 
^aben  ttrir  ersafjlt,  ofjne  jn  nbertreiben,  tine  bie  @tn- 
15  benten  fid)  nnter^atten*    Slnftatt  immer  ^n  ftnbieren,  madjen 


UNTER   DEN   STUDENTEN. 


77 


fie  2ln3fluge  anf  ba$  8anb,  ober  fie  gefyen  auf  bie  SDfcnfnr. 

£)iefe  2D?enfnren  finben  faft  }eben  £ag  °ftatt 
SBenn  jtoei  @tubenten  eittmat  angefangen  fyaben,  fid)  gu 

fdjlagen,  fo  fasten  fie 
gemo^ntic^  cfort,  bte  5 
einer  tion  iljtiett  ben 
anberen  t)ertt)unbet  ^at. 
@elbft  bann  ^ort  man 
nt(^t  tmtner  °auf, 

J)a^  8eben  auf  einer  ™ 
bentfc^en  Untoerfitat  ift 
fe^r  fd)on.     §Wur  lt)enn 
man  in  ben  Saqer  ge^en 
mn^,  ift  e$  nic^t  intc* 
reffant.    3Dort  mn^  ber  15 
t»on  ber  llnitierfitat  be- 
ftrafte  Stubent  bleiben, 
o^ne  bie  anberen  fe^en 
311  bitrfen, 

©eiDo^ntic^  tragen  bie  20 
Stubenten  ber 
bnngen  Heine 
n)ie  tt)ir  fie  fdjon  in  ben 
SSilbern  gefe^en  fjaben, 
2lber  pnjeifen  fie^t  man  25 
fie  and)  in  2Bicf)$*  SBenti 
bie  ©tnbenten  in  SBid^^ 
finb,    tragen    fie    eine 

fcfyijne  Uniform,  ttrie  anf  biefem  fe^ten  48ttbe.    S)ann  fe^en 

fie  fe^r  fdjon  °an^»    SBenn  fid)  bie  ©tnbenten  p^otograp^ieren  30 

(affen,  fie^t  man  fie  faft  immer  in 


In  Wichs. 


78  EASY    READING. 


Dor 


Sluf  ben  33ergen,  Me  33nrgen, 
Qm  Sale,  bte  Saale, 
£)ie  9ftabd)en  im  Stabtdjen  — 
(Sinft  afteS  ttrie  ^eut  ! 
3^^t  toerten  ©efafjrten, 
28o  (etb  t^r  £ur  3eit  mir, 
^^  Iteben,  geblteben? 
9lc^,  afie  jerftreut  ! 

£)te  etnen,  fie  tDetnen, 
S)te  cmbern,  fie  iDanbern, 
3)ie  britten  nod)  mitten 
3m  SBe^fel  ber  £ett  ; 
Slnc^  t)iele  am  £idt, 
^u  ben  Xoten  entboten, 
SSerborben,  geftorben 
$n  8nft  ober  ?eib. 


atleine,  ber  eine, 
i'  tuieber  fyernieber 
@aa(e  im  Jale, 
tranrig  nnb  ftnmm ; 
(Sine  Sinbe  im  SBinbe, 
S)ie  tmegt  fi^  nnb  biegt  fid), 
9?anfd)t  fd^anrig  nnb  tranrig, 
ttmrnm ! 

Drews. 


DAS   WANDERN. 

Das  IDanbertt 


79 


SBanbern  tft  ba$  grtiftte  33ergnitgen  ber  £)eutfd)en. 
@to(f  unb  ^ucffad;  manbern  fie  ntd^t  nur  bur^  2)eutfc^= 
lanb,  fonbern  aitd)  burrf)  anbere  8dnbei\    SBo  bte  getber  am 


Der  Wanderer. 


griinften  finbr  two  bte  SS?dtber  am  fdjonften  unb  bte  93erge  am 
fyodjften  ftnb,  fte^t  man  ben  2Banberet\  5 

gur  ben  95?anberer  gtbt  e^  ntc^t^  3lngenef)mere^  ate  ^o^e 
33erge  unb  gro^e  ©differ,  ^o^ere  Serge  unb  gro^ere  Scfyldffer, 


80 


EASY   READING. 


ats  er  ju  §aufe  tjat,    %ttit  feinem  ©totf  in  ber  §anb,  fetnem 

3ht(lfa(J  auf  bem  3fttden  unb  emer  geber  am  §u*e'  fuc*)t er 

ba$  befte  unb  ba$  fdjonfte,  tt>a$  er  finben  lann.    SBenn  er 

miibe  trnrb,  gefyt  er  nidjt  °tt)eiter,  [onbern  er  fudjt  ben  nii^ften 
s®aft^ofr  nm  fid)  an^nrnfyen.    ^e  tocntgcr  er  mttjune^nten 

braud)t,  befto  lieber  i(t  e§  i^m, 
^m  @ommerr  lt)enn  bie  Sage  am  tangften  finb,  fiefyt  man 

bte  meiften  SBanberer.    ©ann  ftnb  bie  ^atfjte  am  fur^eften, 

aber  jntDeilen  ftnb  fie  ebenfo  fcfyon  toic  bie  3Tage.    SBenn  ba$ 
10  ^Setter  am  U)armften  ift,  ge^t  ber  SBanberer  lieber  bnrd)  bie 

SBalber,    ®ort  ift  e$  nic^t  fo  ^eig  it)ie  anf  ben  gelbern,  unb 

man  gel)t  fi^neKer  unb 

angene^mer,      Slber  am 

tiebften  gefyt  er  auf  bie 
isf)of)en  Serge. 

9Sor  einigen  Jagen 

i(^  in  einem  !(einen 

einen  SBanberer  gefefjen. 

(£$  ttmr  eine  [)albe  SKeile 
aotion  einem  gro^en  Serge 

unb    anbertfyatb    SD^eilen 

^ffe  entfernt. 
,,®uten3ftorgen!"fagte 


Im  kleinen  Dorfe. 

25     ,,®uten  SJforgen!"  er- 

ttriberte  ber  SBanberer,  inbem  er  ben  §ut  mit  ber  toeifjen 
geber  abnafym*    „ £)arf  id)  @ie  ettt)a3  fragen?^ 

H    SBarum  benn  ni^tV" 

\,  erften^,  tt)ie  meit  ift  e^  nad)  bem  na^ften  ©orfe? 
30 ,3tt)eiten3,  ift  bort  ein  guter  ©aftfjof  ?    ©ritten^,  menu  bort 
fein  guter  ©aftljof  ift,  mo  befommt  man  ettoas  ju  effen?" 


DAS   WANDERN.  81 


,,SS  finb  breiunbeinfyalb  9fteilen  nadf)  bent  nadjften  £)orfe, 
unb  fie  ftnben  bort  einen  guten  ©aftfjof.  <gie  fdfjeinen  biefe 
©egenb  nid)t  feljr  gut  gu  fennen*" 

,,2?or  fiebseljn  ^a^ren  war  id)  einmal  ate  $inb  fyier;  baS 
war  im  $afyre  aS)tgel)nf)ittibert  ftebenunbneunsig*    S)ie^  ifts 
JJaIr  ba§  tt^  btefe^  ©orf  gefe^en  ^abe.    3tber 
toar  e^  nur  ein  3Stertet  fo  gro^,  ober  t)ieHei(^t  em 
©rtttel.    S)ie  §alfte  bet  §ciufer  finb  ganj  neu." 

,^^^01)1!  ®amaB  ftmr  ba^  ®orf  !aum  ^alb  fo 
2lber  Je^t  tm  fyalben  ©orfe  fte^t  man  nene  §aitfer* 
glaitbe,  tt)ir  fyaben  elf  ober  jmoff  neue  ©ebtinbe." 

,,®a^  ift  fe^r  intereffant,  aber  id)  muft  ge^enr  inenn  id)  in 
anbert^alb  ©tunben  jum  3ftittageffen  im  nacfiften  35orfe  an^ 
fommen  f  ott,  3lbieu  I" 

,,3Ibien,  nnb  gnten  2lppetit!"  15 

!Da  ging  ber  SBanberer  °tt)eiter.  g^  ttmr  SDJontag,  unb  bie 
@onne  fc^ien  fe^r  warm.  S^  war  gnrifdjen  f)a(b  elf  unb  brei 
SSicrtcI  elf,  unb  ber  SSanberer  njotftc  urn  jtt)5If  ober  wenigften^ 
t)or  ein  SSiertel  ein^  ju  3J?ittag  effen. 

Um  gtoangtg  ober  fimfunbjttwnjig  SKinuten  nac^  etf  !am  er20 
an  einen  ^lu^  wo  eine  gro^e  SriicEe  war.    Dben  auf  ber 
^Brittle  war  ein  3U9«    &%  ^^r  fo  ^i§/  ba§  cr  im  ^(uffe  baben 
wottte,  urn  fic^  ju  erfrifdf)en. 

„(£$  mac^t  nic^t^,"  fagte  err  ,,wenn  id^  erft  urn  se^n  3Kinuten 
t^or  ein^  ober  fogar  filnf  SKinuten  nad^  ein^  anfomme.    £)a$  25 
Sabcn  wirb  mtd^  erfrifdfjen." 

2lber  ate  er  nac^  bem  gfuffe  ^inunterging,  fa^  er  bort  ein 
fleineS  9JZabd^en  fi^en.  SRatttrfid)  wollte  er  ba  ni(^t  baben;  er 
ging  °weiter,  unb  urn  ein  3?iertel  ein§  fam  er  im  nadjften 
J)orfe  °an.  3° 

£)a  neben  einem  ^o^en  £urm  ftanb  ber  ©aft^of*    Sr  fyatte 


82  EASY    READING. 

fern  <Sd)ttb,  abet  ein  SBagen  ftanb  baneben  unb  nod)  etn 
SBagen  bafcor.  Dafjer  trmjste  bet  SBanberer,  baft  ba$  ber 
©aftfjof  lt)ar.  @r  gtng 


Der  Fluss. 

,,®uten  Sag !"  fagte  ber  SBirt,  f,@te  finb  gerabe  jjur  rec^ten 
5  $dt  gefommen.    SBtr  cffcn  urn  fyalb  ein«." 

fr!Da«  freut  mid),  ba  tc^  glctc^  iDcttcrgc^cn  mufj.    3^)  ^a^e 
nut  jjiDci  SBoj^en  ^nen  unb  it^  mu^  fotriel  fe^en  lt)te  mbgtid)," 
r,2Bann  finb  bte  gcrten  Corbet?" 


DAS   WANDERN. 


83 


,,3BeId)en  £ag  fyaben  ttrir  fjeute,  unb  ben  ttrietrielten?" 
,,£>eute  tft  2ftontag,  ber  fiebenunbstoanjigfte  $nl\." 
,,£)anfe !    Sfteine  gerien  fingen  am  ©onnabenb,  bem  adjt* 
anr  unb  fie  fyoren  am  @onntag,  bem  jtDetten  Sluguft 
auf .    2lm  5Kontagr  bem  brttten  JIuguft  um  ac^t  llfyr  morgen^  5 

icf)  ttneber  an  ber  Slrbett  fetn»" 
,,£)ann  ^aben  @te  nur  noc^  etne  SS 


Der  Gasthof. 

35ann  fe^ten  fie  fic^  jn  Xtft^.    9?eben  bem  SBanDerer  fag 
ein  junger  SKann,  ber  ^ri^  ^ermann  fyteg  unb  in  (Sifenac^ 
tDo^nte.    gr  arbeitete  auf  §errn  3KuIIer^  ©ut  unb  fufyr  eben  10 
mit  feinem  SBagen  nad^  bem  fcfyonen  ©fena^, 

§err  33raun,  ber  SBirt,  ber  au^  am  3Ttf^e  fafc,  erjaf)(te 
biete  ®efc^tcf)ten  t)on  ber  ©egenb  um  gifenac^.    ©er  3Ban= 


84 


EASY   READING. 


berer,  ber  triele  gdnber  fannte,  erjafylte  nicfyt  nur  Don  £)eutfd^ 
lanb,  fonbern  and)  fcon  ber  fc^dnen  ©cfymeij.  §errn  93raun$ 
fteiner  ©ofyn  §an$  mar  and)  ba,  unb  er  fyorte  mtt  offenem 

mar  ju  Hein,  urn  ba 


@^  mar  etn  3Siertet  jmet,  aB  fie  mit  bem  SRittageffen 

ferttg  maren.    S5er  SBanberer  bejafyfte  bte  atec^nung,  na^m 

feinen  §ut  mit  ber  mei^en  geber,  feinen  $Ru(ffacf  unb  feinen 

(Stocf,  unb  ntacfyte  fid)  auf  ben  38eg,     2lt§  er  oor  ben  ©aftfyof 

iotratr[a^  er  gri^  SBagen  mit  Dier  Ocfjfen.    ®iefe 


Die  Ochsen. 

gefyorten   bem   §errn  Gutter,  aber  man  nannte  fie 
Deafen*    @ie  maren  fcf)dne  Jiere  unb  fatten  breite  @ute  °auf, 
um  fi(^  t)or  ber  @onne  ju  f^u^en. 

,,§aben  @ie  etma$  bagegen/'  fragte  ber  SBanberer,  ,,menn 
15  ic^  eine  9lufna^me  mad^e?" 

,,®ettriJ3  nirf)t»    2lber  barf  id)  um  etmaS  bitten?  SBoCen 


DAS   WANDERN. 


85 


mtr  em  33Ub  filr  meine  alte  aflutter  in  gifenacf)  fdjtden? 
9ftetne  Slbrcffe  ift:  #rt£  germann,  Sifenad),  8ntf)erftra£e  25." 

,,3fltt  bem  gropten  $ergnitgen,"  erttriberte  ber  SBanberer 
unb  macfyte  tnit  fetnem  S'oba!  etne  9lufna^mc.    ,,£)a$  ®tlb 
fcf)i(fe  irf)  nad^fte  SBoc^e  au^  Berlin  an  §errn  grt£  §erntann,  5 
(Stfenad),  Sut^crftr.  25,    $ft  ba^  ri^tig?" 

W3att)o^n    SStelen  ®anf  nnb  gnte  SRcifc!"  fagte  ^rtfe  nnb 
gtng  mit  fetnen  Ocfyfen  °fort, 

tnac^te  fid^  ber  SBanberer  tnieber  auf  ben  2Beg. 


Der  Tanz  vor  der  Scheune. 

er  ben  grt^  nnb  §errn  53rannr  ben  SBtrt,  toevltefe,  gtng  10 
er  jtDet  ober  bret  ©tnnben  bie  ©tra^e  entfang,  o^ne  ettt)a^ 
Sefonbere^  ?n  fef)en.    (Snb(t(^,  nm  nngefaf)r  ^e^ 
t)or  Dierr  lam  er  nad)  einent  grogen  ®nte.    llnb  anf  bent 
t)or  ber  groften  ©d)enne  tanjte  man. 

toar  §errn  9JinIIer^  ®ntr  nnb  e$  mar  §errn  ajitttfcr^  15 


86 


EASY   BEADING. 


®ebnrt$tag!  (£r  fjatte  ben  $ri£  511  fetner  alten  3Kutter  in 
gifenad)  gefjen  laffen,  itnb  Me  anberen  53anern  an$  ber  ©egenb 
tt)aren  afle  gefommen,  nnt  ba^  ^eft  gn  fetern. 

J)er  SBanbcrcr  blieb  fte^en  nnb  fa^  °5U.    ®ie  granen  unb 
s  3JJabd)en  fatten  \\K\fc  <pauben  °au[,    @ie  tangten  fe^r  eifrig 


Mitten  in  den  Bergen. 

tmtetnanber,  (Sintge  SJJanner  tan^ten  aurf)  tntt  ben 
aber  bte  metften  ftanben  nnb  fa^en  °gn.  £)er  SBanberer  blteb 
jtDanjtg  ober  fiinfnnbjttmnstg  9)Jtnnten  bort,  @r  ntat^te  mtt 
[einem  ^obal  ein  paar  Slnfnafymen. 

nngefafyr  ein  3SierteI  fitnfr  nnb  er  tun^te,  ba§ 


EINKEHR.  87 

er  toeitergefyen  mnftte,  um  fcor  fedj$  ober  fyalb  fieben  in  bem 
nadjften  £)orfe  anjnlommen.  (£r  fjatte  gefragt,  unb  e$  toaren 
fieben  ober  arf)t  2fteilen. 

@df)on  fing  e$  °an,  filler  sn  toerben.    $n  ber  gerne  fonnte 
er  bie  ^oljen  33erge  fe^en,  tt)o  ba^  nd^fte  £)orf  lag,  nnb  too  er  5 
ju  3lbenb  effen  iDottte,    (5r  ging  immer  °tt)eiterr  lt)d^renb  er 
$utoeifen  fang  ;  benn  bie  Seutfdjen  fingen  gern,  nnb  fie  Ijaben 
tiiele  SBanberlieber* 

(gnbli^  fam  er  nacf)  bem  !Dorfe»  &  toar  ein  ganj  ffeine^, 
mitten  in  ben  Bergen  liegenbe^  £)orf.  3lnf  atten  ©eitenio 
ftanben  fyofye  Serge,  eine  fleine  tapeffe,  fitnf  ober  fec^^ 
§anferr  fieben  ober  ac^t  ©c^ennen  nnb  ein  tt>ei£er  ©aft^of 
iraren  atte^,  m%  er  faf).  Slber  bie  ©egenb  tear  fo  ft^on,  nnb 
er  twr  fo  mitbe,  baj^  er  gleici)  in  ben  ©aft^of  ging,  nm  fid) 
nad)  feinem  langen  SBanbern  an^jnrn^en.  15 


Sei  einem  SBirte  mnnbermilb, 
ba  mar  id)  jimgft  jn  ©afte  ; 
ein  gofbner  3lpfet  mar  fein  <3c£)i(b 
an  einem  langen  3lfte, 


@S  tuar  ber  gnte 
bei  bem  id)  eingelefjret  ; 
mit  fitter  ^oft  nnb  frifc^em  @cf)anm 
^at  er  rnit^  tool)!  genaljret 


g^  famen  in  fein  grimes 
t)ief  Iei(i)tbef(^n)ingte  ©afte  ;  25 

fie  fprangen  frei  nnb  fyielten 
nnb  fangen  anf  ba$  befte. 


88  EASY   READING. 


fanb  etn  Sett  gn  fitter  9?nf) 
auf  toeidjen,  grnnen  fatten  ; 
bet  SBtrt,  er  bedte  felbft  midj  °ju 
mit  feinem  listen  (Sdjatten, 

sJhw  fragt'  idj  nad)  ber 
ba  fc^ftttctf  er  ben  SBipfeL 
©efegnet  fet  er  afle 
t)on  be 


faljr'  in  bte  IDelt 

Serggt^fef  erglii^en, 


3ugt)oget  mit  ©ingen 
er^ebt  feme  @c^U)ingen  ; 
id)  faljr'  in  bie 


9Kir  ift  jnm  ©elette 
in  tidjtgolbnem  ^leibe 

gran  ©onnc  beftellt  ; 
fie  totrft  meinen  ©fatten 
anf  blnmige  fatten  ; 
r?  in  bie  2BeIt 


bie 
mem  8ager  im  9Jfoofer 

ber  gimmel  mein  gelt  ; 
mag  tanern  nnb  tranern, 
25  tt)er  will,  fyinter  3Kanern  ; 

id)  faljr'  in  bie  SBelt  !  —  Diftor  con  Sd?effel. 


DEUTSCHE   SCHLOSSER. 


89 


Deutfdjc  Scfyloffer, 

3=n  alten  gtittn  ttwrben  triele  ©djloffer  tion  ben 
gebaut.    £)tefe  fet^Idffer  tDerben  jefei  itberatt  in  £)eutfdjlanb 


Ein  deutsches  Schloss. 


90  EASY   READING. 

gefunben.    $fticf)t  nitr  am  3tl)eine  toerben  fie  gefefyen,  fonbern 

and)  in  alien  STeiten  be$  beutfdjen  9teicl)e3. 
@eit)ol)nlirf)  nmrbe  fiir  ba$  ©cfytoft  ein  !(einer  33erg  ober  ein 

fyofjer  gels  Don  einem  fitter  getoafjlt.    £)cftw  ttmrben  triele 
5©teine  fcon  feinen  Snecfjten  auf  ben  33erg   fyinaufgetragen, 

2lu3  biefen  ©teinen  tt)urbe  ba$  @(f)Iofe  bann  t)on  ben 

gebaut. 
3tt)ei  greunbe   fprad^en   itber   biefe    beutf^en 

Der  eine  tuar  fc^on  (ange  in  £)eutfcf)[anb,    3)er  anbere  tt)ar 
iceben  angefotnmen. 

f,2Benn  @ie  me^r  in  £)eutfdf)tanb  reifen/'  fagte  bet  eine, 

,,fo  tDerben  @ie  t)iele  t)on  biefen  ©djtftffern  fe^en," 
,,9lber  tDarnm  fetjen  tt)tr  fo  t)iet  tne^r  @d)ltiffer  in 

(anb  aB  in  anberen  Canbern?" 
15     ,,^n  atten  3e^en  1I)ar  5)^utfc^Ianb  gar  nidjt  lt)ie 

2)amal^  tuar  {eber  !(eine  fitter  faft  unab^angig.    Unb  t?on 

jebem  ffeinen  nnab^iingigen  SJitter  tt)urbe  ein  (Sc^Io^  gebaut, 

ntn  fitter  ju  fein,  n)enn  er  mit  anberen  fleinen  nnab^angigen 

bittern  Ittmpftc." 
20     ff33a«  mn^  fefyr  intereffant  gen)efen  fein.    3lber  ttmrben  alt 

bie  ©(^Idffer  t)on  biefen  alten  bittern  gebant?    $tf)  fyabe 

t»ie(e  gefe^en,  bie  gans  nen  ansfefyen.    J)iefe  tDnrben  gen)i^  in 

ber  te^ten  £tit  gebaut, 

,,2lrf)  }a !     S)ie  neuen  ©djWffer  ftnb  ntc^t  fo  ftarf .    3lber 
25  bie  @^Ic5ffer,  bie  im  SJHttetalter  gebaut  murben,  mu^ten  fefjr 

ftarf  fein.    Qfyrt  3Kauern  ttmrben  fe^r  bid  gemad)t,    Qm 

§eibetberger  @(^(o^  mar  ein  Jurm,  beffen  3)?auern  fe^r  ftarf 

roaren.    211$  er  t)on  ben  gransofen  gefprengt  tt)urbe,  ift  er 

in  jtuei  §dtften   gefpattet    njorben,  anftatt  in    ©tiitfe    gu 
30  fpringen*    $tf)  merbe  3!^nen  e^  ^Bi^  batton  jeigen. 

3lufna^me  tDurbe  Don  tneinem  53ruber 


DEUTSCHE   SCHLOSSER. 


91 


Silb  ift  fef)r  frf)ijn." 
,,@el)en  @ie  !    I)er  £nrm  ift  gefprengt 
ben  'gefprengten  £ttrm,'    (5r  ift  t)on  ben 


nennt  i^n 
gefprengt 


Der  gesprengte  Turm. 

it)orben.     @^   mnrbe    i^nen   anc^    Don    anberen    9lationen 
ge^offen." 


92  EASY   READING. 

,,$a,  id)  fetye.  SDic  cine  £>a(fte  be§  £nrme3  fte^t  nod),  aber 
bie  cmbere  @alfte  tiegt  unten  im  ©raben." 

,,3^,  ber  £nrm  ift  gefpatten,  itnb  bie  ©ttlftc  tft  in  ben  ®ra* 

ben  gefatten.    @$  toar  ber  ftarffte  £nrm  in  £)entfcf)Ianb,  fagt 

5  man*    3Sie(e  ®efd)id)ten  toerben  fcon  biefen  ©dpffern  crgit^It." 

,,2lber  erja^It  man  benn  feine  ©efd^ic^ten  t)on  ben  nenen 
@d)ttffem,  bie  anf  fo  Dtclcn  S3ergen  gebant  finb?" 

,,2Benige  ©ef^i^ten  tperben  i^on  biefen  erja^It,  aber  fie  finb 

bodE)  fe^r  tntereffatit.    ©ie  finb  gelDdfjnlicf)  fe^r  gut  gebant,  oft 

10  an^  ben  beften  (Stetnen,  nnb  fie  ^aben  fciele  iDnnberDofie 


rf@inb  fie  and)  Don  SRtttcrn  gebant  njorben?" 
fr3utt)cUcn,  aber  bie  fd^dnften,  bie  id)  gefeljen  fjabe,  finb  t)on 
Sftnigen  gebant  tDorben,    SBenn  tt)ir  nadj  53at)ern  fa^ren, 
15  n)erben  ttrir  ©c^Idffer  fe^en,  bie  ec^te  ^atafte  finb.    2Sie(Ieid)t 
erlanbt  man  nn$,  in  biefe  @d)(i)ffer  gu  gefyen  nnb  bie 
gu  feljen," 

W2)a^  tt)irb  mir  fe^r  gef  alien.    8affen  @ie  nn^  nad) 
fa^ren,  benn  id)  Ijabe  nod)  feine  ^alafte  gefe^en." 
20     fr®nt!    SBenn  @ie  ba^  molten,  fo  lonnen  tt)ir  mit  bent 
nadjften  3^9  fa^ren." 

@pat   am    fetben    ^ac^mittag    befanben    fid)    bie    beiben 

grennbe  in  einer  f(einen  @tabt  in  53at)ern.    @ie  frenten  fid), 

ba£  fie  fo  f^netl  gefommen  toaren.  ®ie  lilmmerten  fid)  toenig 

25  nm  einen  ©aft^of  ;  bocf)  fnc^ten  fie  einen,  nm  bis  ^nm  na^ften 

Jage  ^n  bfeiben. 

S)ort  am  breiten  ^fa|e  befanb  fic^  ein  fe^r  gnter  ©aftfyof, 
©er  bide,  frennbtid)e  SBirt  rnfyte  fid)  anf  einer  33anl  neben 
ber  £iir  °anS. 

30     ,,®nten  Sag,  metne  §erren!"  fagte  er,  inbem  er  fidf)  t)on  ber 
33anf  er^ob.    f,2Bie  bepnben  @te  fid)  ?" 


DEUTSCHE   SCHLOSSER. 


93 


,,®ut,  bcmfe!"  fagte  ber  erne  greunb.  ,,§aben  ©te  em 
Dimmer  mtt  jtoet  S3etten  fret?" 

,,®eitri£!"  criDtbertc  ber  SBtrt  unb  begab  fid^  m^  nadjfte 
Dimmer,  ff§ter  ^aben  @ie  etn  gemittltdjeS 


Ein  Kbnigsschloss. 

btefen  Setten  fc^Iaft  e3  fid)  fel)r  gut.    @^  tft  nt^t  mte  ems 
af  jimmcr  auf  bem  ©^(o§,  aber  bte  33etten  finb  fe^r  gut" 
foftct  ba^  Dimmer!" 


te  2lbererf(tiren@teftrf)! 
meinen  ©ie  mtt  bem  ©djfaf  jtmmer  auf  bem  ©d^Ioffe?" 


94  EASY    READING. 

,,@inb  @ie  noci)  nicfyt  auf  bem  ©cfytoffe  gemefen?" 

,,9?ein,  notf)  nicfyt,    2lber  ttrir  gefjen  morgen  °Ijin,    Qefyt  ift 


befinbet  fid)  etn  tDitnberDoHe^  @cf)IafstmTner,  aber  id) 
5  freue  tni^,  ba£  ic^  nic^t  bort  ju  fcfyfafen  brau^e.    Qn  folc^ 


Das  Schlafzimmer  auf  dem  Schloss. 


cittern  pmcfyttgen  r3immer  fc^Iiift-  e^  fief)  gar  ttid)t  gut  ;  e^  ift 
nidjt  gemitttic^!" 

atte^    fefjen    tuir   morgen,    SBo  befinbet    fidj    ba^ 
3ft  e^  tocit  oon  ^icr?M 
3     ,,S33.enn  @ie  biefe  ©tra^e  entfang  ge^en,  fo  ift  e$  ungefd^r 
eine  fyalbe  ©tunbe  ;   bitr^  ben  SBatb  finb  e^  nur  stDanjig 
aJMnuten.    3lber  int  SBalbe  ge^t  e^  fic^  ni^t  fe^r  gut," 

!    3)ann  ge^en  tt)ir  morgen  biefe  ©trafte  enttang. 


DEUTSCHE   SCHLOSSER.  95 

Uub  je£t  effeu  fair  311  2lbeub,  urn  frit!)  jit  Sett  gefyeu  ju 
fouueu." 
,,®nt!  ba$  Sffen  ift  gteirf)  fertig." 

#  *  * 

2U$  fie  am  uadjfteu  Sftorgeu  auftoacfyteu,  regnete  e$. 

„(§:$  freut  mid),  baft  itrir  triel  $eit  fabeu,"  fagte  ber  eiues 
greuub.    „(£$  fcerftefyt  fid),  baft  ttrir  bet  folc^em  ^Better  nic^t 
auf  ba^  @(^Io^  gefyen  iDoIten/' 

ff(S^  tut  mir  letb,  ba^  @te  ntt^t  ge^en  tootten,"  ermiberte  ber 
anbere,  ffaber  e^  fattt  mir  gar  nid^t  °em,  {)ier  ,5U  bteiben,  ob  eS 
regnet  ober  nic^t.    @^  ift  niemanb  anber^  I)ter,  itnb  e$  tt)irb  10 
un^  gen)i^  fefyr  gut  gelmgen,  atfe^  gu  feljeu." 

,,3^^^!!  3$  glaube,  @ie  Ijaben  redE)t.  g^  gibt  uid^t^, 
tt>a$  id^  lieber  fe^er  al^  biefe  (S^Ioffer,  uub  e^  freut  mid),  baft 
ttrir  enblid^  ^ier  fittb.  §offentti^  f)5rt  ber  9?egen  batb  °auf. 
g^  tut  mir  leib,  baft  e$  reguet,"  15 

,,3u  biefer  £nt  gefdjielit  ba^  nid)t  fe^r  oft.    2lber  fiubeu 
ui^t,  baft  e^  ^ier  iu  biefem  @d^(af^immer  eutfe^Iid^ 
?   2ld),  @ie  ^aben  ba^  ^enfter  offeu  gelaffeu.    ^^  tocrbc 
mid)  freueu,  iDenu  mir  iu§  gftsimmer  fommeu/' 

@ie  jogen  fic^  fdjnetl  °an  uub  giugeu  iu^  aubere  3intmer.  20 
Sort  faft  ber  bicfe  SBirt  uub  traul  feiueu  Saffee.    T)ie  beibeu 
greuube  belameu  gum  gritfyftitcf  ^affee  uub  33rotdjeu. 

2Baf)reub  fie  beu  Saffee  trattfett,  ^orte  e^  °auf  5U  regueu, 
uub  fie  freuteu  fi(^,  baft  fie  bei  gutem  SBetter  auf  ba$  @d)Ioft 
ge^eu  louuteu,  25 

®(eid)  uad^  bem  grit^ftitcf  madjteti  fie  fid^  auf  beu  2Beg  uub 
giugeu  bie  ©trafte  eutlaug,  bi^  fie  ba^  ©c^Ioft  fafyeu.  @^  (ag 
^ot^  auf  eiuem  gelfett  uub  ^atte  ttiele  Jitrme  uub  befouber^ 
t)iefe  geufter.  @ie  giugeu  °^iuauf  uub  itber  bie  33ritde,  IDO 
fie  t)ou  eiuem  ©olbateu  aufgeljafteu  murbeu.  911^  fie  if)m3o 


96 


EASY   EEADING. 


fagten,  iuaS  fie  nwftten,  gefang  e3  ifym,  emeu  gitfyrer  filr  fie 
ju  finben.  liefer  fitfyrte  fie  burd)  erne  breite  Zivc  in  eine 
grofce  ©aterie. 

n$n  biefer  ©aterie  toerben  bie  groften  geftli(i)!eiten  abge- 

5  fatten/'  fagte  ber  gii^rer.    ,,§ier  tan^t  man  an^  gntDeilen, 

tt>enn  ber  Sonig  f)ier  ift»    S)ie  ©alerie  ift  me^r  aB  fyunbert 


Die  grosse  Galerie. 

9Keter  (ang.  §ier  ift  ber  ^onig  eintnal  t»on  bent  ^aifer 
befnc^t  toorben.  Qtyt  mollen  tt)ir  in^  ©djlafghnmer  ge^en." 

f,3lt^  ja,  t)om  @^Iaf Dimmer  ^at  nn$  ber  2Sirt  fcfyon  er^ 
10  ja^It.  g^  fdjlaft  fic^  Diet  beffer  in  feinen  SBetten,  aU  ^ier  auf 
bem  ©t^Ioffe  ;  tuenigften^  ba^  fagt  er." 

ffS)a«  lann  fein/'  erttriberte  ber  gn^ret\  ,,Q3)  fenne  feine 
SBetten  nic^t.  SBenn  ber  tonig  ^ier  anf  bem  ©c^Ioffc  ift,  ift 
e$  fe^r  intereffant,  aber  er  fommt  nnr  einmal  in  $aljre.  &% 


DEUTSCHE   SCHLOSSER. 


97 


freut  un$,  toetm  er  fyter  ift,  unb  e$  tut  un$  letb,  tt)enn  er  wt$ 
ld^t,  benn  tt)tr  Heben  unfcren  Sontg.    (5r  ift  fo  gut  unb 


fremtblicfj. 


Der  Speisesaal. 

ncicf)(te 


er  °fort,  f,ift 


98 


EASY    READING. 


,,2BirfUd)?    £>ci8  fieljt  ntcfyt  ttrie  ein  glimmer  °au$." 

,,®ie  fbnnen  e$  nennen,  ttrie  @te  tuotten,    @ter  ttrirb  e§ 

immer  ber  Spetfefaat  Ijenannt    §ter  effen  ber  Sontg  unb  bie 

$dntgin.    @^  ift  nic^t  gro^  genug,  um  bet  gro^en 

5  feiten  gebrau^t  ju  tDerben.^ 

,,@at  bev  ^ontg  letnen  ST^ronV 
SEfyron  gefe^en,    2Bie  fie^t  ber  X^ron 

^^n  biefem  ncit^ften  ^hntner  ^ 
nennen  bitrfen.    2lber  ber  ®ontg  l)at 


^abe  no^  nte  etnen 


fetnen 


Der  Prunksaal. 

10  @r  fifct  in  etnem  gro^en,  f^onen  @tu^t  oben  auf  einer  Slrt 
£ifd),  unb  bie  ^onigin  ft^t  neben  tljnu    3lber  etnen  tutrflt^cn 
J^ron,  tt)ie  er  im  3J?ttteIaIter  gefunben  tDurbe,  gtbt  e^  niif)t. 
Unb  }e^t  ^aben  @tc  aQc«  gefeljen,  »a«  ge^etgt  toirb." 
U)ir  feine  anberen 


WIE   1ST   DOCK   DIE   ERDE   SO   SCHON.  99 

,,9Jetn,  nur  biefe  toerben  gejeigt,  unb  toenn  ber  Sonig  fyier 
ift,  toerben  fetbft  biefe  nidjt  geseigt. 

,,@S  freut  mid),  ba£  er  nidjt  fyier  ift,  aber  e$  tut  mir 
leib,  ba^  ganje  ©djtoj}  ni(i)t  fef)en  ju  lonnen,    Slber  tt)ir 
bo^  t)iele  fd^one  ©tnge  gefe^en.    2lbieu!"  5 

,,2l$ieu,  tneme  §erren!y< 

Unb  bte  betben.  ^reunbe  t)crlic§cn  ba^  (Sd^Io^  unb  gingen 
mieber  in  bie  @tabt. 


ie  ift  bod]  bie  €rbe  fo  (d?on! 


SBie  ift  bod)  bie  @rbe  f  o  fc^5n>  f  o  frfjon  ! 

iriffen  bie  SBogelein  ; 
@ie  ^eben  ifyr  leic^t  ©efieber 
Unb  fingen  fo  frofylicfye  2ieber 
^n  ben  blaiten  §immel  ^inein. 

SBie  ift  bod)  bie  @rbe  fo  f  e^On,  f  o  fcfjon  ! 
®a^  tDiffen  bie  gtitff  nnb  Seen  ; 
@ie  ntalen  in  Marem  @piege( 
£)ie  ©arten  nnb  Stabf  nnb  §ngef, 
Unb  bie  SBotlen,  bie  britber  ge^n* 


Unb  Danger  nnb  2fta(er  tt)iffen  e§ 
Unb  ^inber  nnb  anbere  8ent' ; 
Unb  toer'3  nid^t  malt,  ber  fingt  e$, 
Unb  it)er^  nirf)t  fingt,  bem  flingt  e^ 
$n  bem  §eqen  dor  tanter  grenb'. 

—  Hobert  Hetntc?. 


100  EASY   READING. 


<5uter 


9ln  cittern  ©omntermorgen 
ba  nitnm  ben  SBanberftab, 

e$  fatten  beine  ©orgen 
tt)ie  Sftebel  Don  bit  °ab. 

£)e$  §intmel3  Retire  Slime 
larfjt  bit  in$  §erj  cl)inein 

ttnb  fcfytteftt,  iDte  ©otte^  £rene, 
tnit  fetnem  ®a^  bt^  °ein. 


Sliltcn  nnr  nnb  £riebe 
nnb  @altne  t)on  ©egen  [df)it)er  ; 
bit  ift,  al$  joge  bte  8iebe 


@o  ^einufc^  alle^  fttnget 
at^  iDte  im  3Sater^an^, 
15  nnb  ttber  bte  gerrfjen  fcfynringet 

Me  ©eele  [id)  °^tnan^,     —  Ojeobor  ^ontane. 


IDert  ber 


fann  etn  SSoIf  entbefyren, 
menn  ba^n  bte  9^ot  e$  gtDtngt, 
bo(^  bent  getnbe  mn£  e^  tt)e^renr 
bet  e$  nm  bte  ©prad^e  brtngt* 


nnfer  8eben 
nnb  erfyalt  bnr^  fie  Seftanb  ; 
luer  fid^  %er  ^at  begeben, 
ber  t)erlor  fein  3Sater(anb,      —martin 


DIE   WARTBURG.  I'Ol 

Die  IDartburg. 

fagt,  baft  bie  SBartbnrg  ba$  intereffantefte  @djlo£  in 
Dentfcfylanb  fei;  toenigften$  Ijabe  fie  bie  intereffantefte  ©e- 
fdjidjte,  Die  ©efctjirfjte  erstiljtt,  baft  mand)  alter  fitter  bort 
geiDofjnt  fyabe,  benn  bie  SBartburg  fei  Dor  §nnberten  toon 
^afyren  gebaut  toorben.  5 

SBir  lefen  in  ber  ©efcljicfyte,  ba§  Subttrig  ber  (Springer  bie 
SBartbnrg  gebant  fyabe.  (£r  fei  anf  biefen  ^o^en  ®erg  gelom^ 
ntenr  nnb  e^  ^abe  iljm  bort  fo  gef alien,  ba§  er  fagte,  ,,3Barf 
53erg,  bn  follft  mir  eine  33nrg  tragen."  ®a^er,  fagt  man, 
fyabe  biefe^  @(^Iog  ben  ^anten  'ffiartbnrg'  befommen.  IQ 

®ie  SBartbnrg  fte{)t  anf  einent  ^o^en  33erg  mitten  im  Zfyfc 
ringer  26a(b.  Die  Dentfc^en  fagen,  e^  fei  eine  ber  fdjonften 
©egenben  in  gang  Dentfcfylanb.  3Inf  alien  ©eiten  fief)t  man 
fc^one  SBalber  nnb  tfeine  intereffante  Dorfer.  Unb  Don 
jebem  Dorfe  njerben  allerlei  ©efdfyicfyten  er5df)tt,  15 

(Sine  alte  ©efdjicfjte  ergci^It,  it)ie  8nbrt)ig  ben  sJZamen  fber 
©pringer'  befommen  ^abe.  ginmat  ^abe  i^n  ein  anberer 
fitter  gefangen  genommen*  Diefer  fitter  fyabe  i^n  anf  fein 
©cf)Io§  ©iebidjenftein  gebrarf)t,  Dort  fei  8nbtt)ig  lange  ge- 
blieben,  o^ne  entfommen  jn  fdnnen.  20 

Da§  @c^Io§  ©iebicfyenftein  (iegt  an  ber  @aate,  S3  ift  je^t 
nnr  eine  alte  9?nine,  tt)ie  man  fie  fo  oft  in  Dentfdjtanb  fie^t* 
$efet  ge^t  ein  breiter  SBeg  gnrifdjen  ber  Snrg  nnb  bem  gfluffe. 
9lber  bamaB  lt)ar  ber  ^In^  t)iel  gr(5pr  nnb  tiefer,  fo  ba£  bie 
Snrg  am  lifer  be$  gtnffe^  ftanb*  25 

(SineS  5Ra(^mittag^r  at§  bie  2Ba(^ter  Garten  fpietten,— fo 
fafjrt  bie  ©ef^ic^te  °fort  —  fei  8nbtt)ig  in  feinem  Heinen  Dim- 
mer im  fyofyen  Jnrm  gemefen.  &  t)abe  nnr  ein  !Ieine§ 
fter  gefyabt,  aber  ba^  genfter  ^abe  offen  geftanben*  Da  fei 


102 


EASY   READING. 


Die  Wartburg. 


DIE    WARTBURG. 


103 


bem  8ubtoig  eingef  alien,  ber  g-tuft  fet  gerabe  unter  tfym,  unb 
e$  fet  mogltd),  fo  ju  entfommen. 

fet  ber  fitter  txm  ©tebid)enftetn  ju  tl)m  gefommen. 

,,2ftorgen    mup    bu 
fterben,"  fyabe  er  gefagt  5 
bu  einen  te^ten 


15 


metnen  treuen 
fret,  urn  metner 
(teben  ^rau  einen  le^ten  10 
©rn^  5U  bringen." 

•  „(&&    foil 
Srmgt  ben  $necf)t 
ein!" 

S)a  Ijabe  ?ublt)tg 
letfe  mtt  bem 
gefpro^en,  nnb  btefer  fci 
traurtg  Don  i^m  gegan- 
gen.  9l(^  ber  Snec^t 
fret  tear,  f)abe  er  3tt)et20 
^ferbe  gefto^Ien  unb  fet 
mit  tfynen  na^  ber 
ren  ©ette  be 

gefd)tt)0mmen. 

bem  genfter25 


Schloss  Giebichenstein. 

311^  8ubn)tg  if)n  bort  gefefyen  ^abe,  fet  er 
gefprungen  unb  fet  na^  ber  anberen  Sette  be^  gfuffeS  ge= 
fc^tDommen.  Sluf  btefe  28etfe  fet  er  t)on  bem  fitter  t)on 
©tebtc^enftetn  entfommen,  unb  toegen  be^  ©prunge^  ^abe  er 
ben  tauten  fber  ©pringcr'  befommen.  SStele  ^a^re  fpater 
^abe  er  Me  SSartburg  gebaut.  30 

6^  totire  laum  mogttc^,  eine  fc^dnere  ©egenb  ju  ftnben  al^ 


104 


EASY   READING. 


Thiiringer  Wald  und  die  Wartburg. 

Me,  too  Me  SBartburg  fteljt.  2ld) !  I)8tte  man  nur  folrfje  SBittber 
in  Sfaierif a !  Die  8ente  wilrbcn  fro^  fetn,  ba^  aQc«  f efyen  sn 
lijnnen.  Unb  toaren  in  2lmeri!a  nnr  fold^e  fdjifnen  @(i)Ioffer 
trie  bie  2Battbnrg ! 


DIE   WARTBURG.  105 

Diet  toofynten  hn  Sftittelalter  bie  beritfymten  ganbgrafen  t)on 
Xfyitringen,  unb  fyierfyer  tamen  bie  (ganger  unb  £)id)ter  Don 
ganj  £)entfd)Ianb.  §ier  fanb  im  breijefynten  Qa^^un^tt  bet 
bernfymte  @anger!rteg  °ftatt,  bet  bem  all  bie  beften  £)id)ter  unb 
eanger  in  £)entfd)Ianb  ifyre  ®ebid)te  fangen.  2ld),  ba£  man  5 
jebe$  $al)r  f old)  einen  ©angerfrieg  fyatte !  £)ann  inurben  no(^ 
t)ief  ntefyr  Danger  auf  ber  SBartburg  i^re  8ieber  fingen* 

^cbe^  Qafy  fontnten  anf  bie  SSartburg  Diele  ©tubenten  tion 
alien  Seikn  S)eitt[^(anb^.  Sftit  i^ren  9tndfaden  anf  ben 
9titcfen,  gel)en  fie  bnrd)  ben  fcfyonen  3BaIb  anf  bie  SBartbnrg  10 
°^inanf,  J)abei  fingen  fie  ifyre  ft^onen  8ieber,  SBenn  fie 
oben  anlomnten,  fanfen  fie  atterlei  ©rfrifcfynngen,  efje  fie  bie 
SBartburg  befncfyen.  @^  mare  fel)r  fcf)i)n,  biefe  Stnbenten 
anf  ber  SBartbnrg  jn  fe^en, 

92i^t  nnr  ift  bie  ©egenb  nm  bie  SBartbnrg  fefyr  fd)tin,  fon- 15 
bern  and)  bie  3'mmer  ^e^  @^Ioffe^  finb  pcf)ft  intereffant. 
J)a  ift  ein  Dimmer  mit  afierlei  SBaffen  an£  bem  3KitteIa(ter* 
^e^t  iDitrbe    man    gar  nid)t  baran    benfen,  fo(d)e   fc^onen 
33?affen  jn  mad)en  ober  ^n  tragen.    $n  einem  gro^en  ®aa(r 
ben  man  ben  'Sangerfaal'  nennt,  fie()t  man  an  ber  2Banb20 
bie  Sieber  gefc^rieben,  toelcfje  bie  Sanger  bei  bem  beritfjmten 
Sangerlrieg  fangen. 

(S^*H)are  nidjt  moglid),  alt  bie  fd)iJnen  Singe  jn  nennen,  bie 
man  anf  ber  SBartbnrg  fief)t,  SSiele  3^^er^  HI  tuelc^en  bie 
atten  Sanbgrafen  it)o^ntenr  finb  ^ente  ebenf or  tt)ie  fie  in  alten  25 
3eiten  toaren.  ®a  ift  andf)  ba^  Dimmer,  morin  ber  Je^ige 
Saifer  toofynte,  aU  er  bort  jnm  SBefndj  tt)ar,  @^  gibt  bort 
fo  t)iet  5n  fe^en,  ba§  bie  SSartbnrg  jebe^  3a^r  ^on  Xanfenben 
t)on  9JJenf(^en  befn^t  tt)irb, 

9ln  einem  fd^onen  ^a^mittag  gingen  gtoet  (Stnbenten  anf3o 
einem  breiten  $fabe  na^  ber  SBartbnrg 


106  EASY   BEADING. 

,,3Benn  ftrir  nidjt  fdjneller  gefjen,"  fagte  ber  cine,  ber 
l)ief$,  ,,fo  ftrirb  e£  ju  fpat  fein,  toenn  toir  oben  anfommen." 

,,2lber  man  lann  ju.  Jeber  3e^   fyineingeljen,  nid)t  ttwfyr, 
toenn  man  etn  Xrinfgelb  gibt,"  erftriberte  gans,  Jelbft  tocnn 


etn,  ba$  gtanb^  i(f)  nit^t*    §ier  foil  man  fefyr  ftreng  fein." 
un^  f(i)net(er  ge^enr  benn,  fommen  trir  ju  fpat 
°an,  fo  muffen  tDtr  bi^  morgen  tuartcn." 

,,2Benn  tt)tr  ettca^  fdjneKer  ge^en,  fo  fommen  mtr  getnt^ 
fril^  genng  °an/'  fagte  §an£. 

er  ba^  fagte,  fing  ^aut  °an,  frf)netter  jn  gefyen,  nnb 
te  t^m.    S)er  brette  ^3fab  fii^rte  red)t^  unb  linU  jtt)t- 
f^en  bie  fyofyen  33anme  nnb  itber  gelfen  nnb  ©teme.    9Zac^ 
je^n  ober  jlnolf  3)Hnnten  !amen  bie  betben  oben  Dor  bem 
15  groften  ©d)foffe  °an. 

9?eben  ber  3J?aner  ftanb  etn  jtemlid)  gro^e^  SBtrt^^au^,  too 

bie  Dieten  93efn(^er  (Srfrifc^nngen  betommen  fonnten.    S5a 

tDaren  an^  Snben,  tt)o  man  2Infi(i)t^farten  lanfen  fonnte,  nm 

fie  an  bie  grennbe  jn  fcf)icfen,  bie  bie  28artbnrg  nie  gefe!)en 

20  fatten, 

3)ie  beiben  ©tnbenten  bad)tenr  fie  fatten  noc^  Diet  geit, 
nnb  fie  fe^ten  fi(^  an  einen  £ifd)  Dor  bem  SBirt^fjan^,  nm 
ettoa$  jn  trtnfen.     9Kan  fonnte   aHeiiei  (Srfrifd^nngen  be^ 
fommen,  njenn  man  ftottte. 
25     w^fft  man  bnrftig,  fo  mn§  man  trinfen  !"  fagte  §an^, 

?ta^  ben  (Srfrif^nngen  gingen  bie  beiben  nac^  ben  33nben 

nnb  fanften  Diete  2lnficf)t3farten.    &  gibt  Diele  3lnfi(^ten  Don 

ber  SBartbnrg  nnb  Don  ben  Diefen  Siiten*    9lf^  fie  jefyn  ober 

jtDblf  gefanft  nnb  in  bie  Jafcfye  geftetft  fatten,  toollten  fie  in 

30  bie  33nrg  ge^en, 

r,$Benn  @ie  ^ineinge^en  tooffen,  fo  mitffen  @ie 


DIE    WARTBURG. 


107 


fatten  fanfen,"  fagte  em  alter  Sftann,  ber  neben  ifynen  ftanb, 

,,unb  id)  glaube,  baft  e3  je£t  jn  fpat  ift!' 
,,3)a3  Jpcire  bocf)  fcfyabe,  menn  ttnr  nid)t  t)ineinge^en  fonntett!" 

fagte  ^au(. 

ff28o  belommen  ftrir  bte  (gtntritt0farten?"  fragte  §an^.         5 
f,£)ort  Itn!^  in  ber  ffetnen  Sube/'  crtDtbertc  ber  alte 


Die  Wartburg. 

@ie  ettten  narf)  ber  33uber  aber  man  fagte  tfjnen,  ba^  fie  ju 
fpat  gefomnten  feien  unb  bi$  morgen  marten  mlt^ten,  urn 
fjineingufotmnen* 

,,9Bie  fc^abe!"  rief  §an^,    ,,3Benn  »ir  ba^  gemu^t  fatten,  10 
fo  toaren  mir  getDt^  fd^nefler  gegangen." 

^^amo^I/'  ertDiberte  ^anl,  ffober  ttrir  fatten  unfere  @rfri= 
fc^ungen  fpciter  gente^en  fonnen." 

ein/'  fagte  §an$,   frtt)ir  fatten  fc^ncttcr  ge^en  foffen. 


108  EASY   READING. 

J)cmn  fatten  ttrir  3eit  genug  gefyabt,  unb  ttrir  fatten  and)  Me 
Srfrifdjungen  unb  9ln[irf)t^farten  belommen  ftinnen." 

,,$tyt  module  id)  eine  3eitlang  fyier  bleiben;  e$  ift  fyier  oben 
fo  fd)on,    !Dann  mi)^te  id)  morgen  tDteberlomtnen,  urn  ben 
5  ©cingerfaat  unb  bie  anberen  3^^^^  JU  fe^cn*" 

,,®ett)i^!    ^^  rnot^te  nic^t  tt)etterreifen,  o^ne  bte  SBartburg 
grunbltdj  gefe^en  ju  ^aben." 

n$a,  ba  fjaft  bu  red)t/^  fagtc  $aul.    ,,®ie  SBartburg  m5c^te 
tt^  lieber  at^  aHe  anberen  ©c^Ioffer  £)eutfdjlanb$  fe^en," 
10     ,,®ort  fe^e  id)  SBotlen,    S^  fie^t  °au^,  at$  ob  e^  morgen 
regnen  ftmrbe." 

f,§offentltrf)  ntd)t.     ^^  Hto^te  btefen  langen  9Beg  t)on  ber 
@tabt  nic^t  int  9tegen  mac^en.    2Bir  fatten  ^eute  ba^  @(^to^ 
befidjttgen  follen.    SBciren  \mv  fc^neller  gegangen,  [o  fjiitten 
15  tDtr  e$  Dielletc^t  befic^ttgen  fonnen." 

;,33tettet(^t,    9lber  morgen  merben  tuir  [e^r  frill)  ^erauf- 
fommen*    ®ann  fef)en  ttrir  atte$." 
Unb  bte  betben  ©tubenten  gingen  burt^  ben  f^bnen  3Ba(b 
tfenac^  °3uritcf. 


Der  reicfyfte 


^Jretfenb  mtt  triel  fc^onen  3?eben 
t^rer  8anber  2Bert  unb  gaty, 
fa^en  t)iete  beutfdje  gitrften 
etnft  ju  2Borm^  tm  ^atferfaaf. 


ber  gitrft  t)on 
ift  mein  8anb  unb  feine 
©ilber  ^egen  feine  Serge 
tt)ol){  in  man^em  tiefen 


DER   REICHSTE   FURST.  109 

@ef)t  mem  8anb  in  ityp'ger  gutte, 
fpracl)  ber  $urfurft  Don  bem  SRfyein, 
gofbne  ©aaten  in  ben  Zalern, 
auf  ben  ^Bergen  ebten  SBein  ! 

©rofte  @tabte,  reirfje  Softer,  « 

Snbltrig,  §err  gu  -SBatyern,  fpra^, 
f^affen,  ba^  mein  8anb  ben  enern 
lt)of)I  nit^t  ftefyt  an  ©c^d^en  nac^, 


b,  ber  mit  bem  33arte, 
SBUrttemberg^  getiebter  §errr 
fprad^:  9Wein  8anb  f)at  Keine  ©tdbte, 
tragt  nicfjt  53erge  fitberfcf)rt)er  ; 


ein  Steinob  ^aft^  Derborgen  : 
baft  in  SBalbern,  norf)  fo  grog, 
id)  mein  £witpt  !ann  fufyntirf)  legen 
jebem  llntertan  in  ©djofc, 

llnb  e^  rief  ber  §err  t)on  ©ac^fen, 
ber  t)on  Saljern,  ber  Do 
®raf  im  «art,  Qt>r  feib  ber 
@uer  8anb  tragt  (Sbefftein. 

-  3ufttnus  Kerner. 

Sprud?. 

3)ie  fd^5ne  gorm  mad^t  fein  ®ebicf)t, 
ber  frfjone  ©ebanfe  tuf  «  and^  no(^  nidjt  ; 
e^  lommt  brauf  °an,  bag  8eib  nnb  @eete 
jnr  guten  ©tnnbe  ftd^  tjerma^Ie. 

—  €marwel  (5eibcl. 


Ho 


EASY   READING. 


Der  IDinterfport 

fagt,  ber  SBinter  fet  fdjoner  in  ©eutfdjtanb,  al$>  in 
irgenb  einem  anberen  Canbe,  toeit  man  bort  fo  Diet  ©cfynee 
fyabe.    33ielleirf)t  tDdre  e^  in  (Snglanb  ober  granfreid)  ebenfo 
ft^dn,  toenn  man  bort  Diet  (Sconce  fyatte.    3lber  bort  gibt  e^ 
5  im  SBinter  nur  menig  Sdjnee. 

SBenn  man  im  SBinter  nadj  S)ent[rf)Ianb   reiftr  fo  jie^t 
man  bie  fd)onen,  mit  ©t^nee  bebedten  Jannenbanme.    3)ie 


Der  Wald  im  Winter. 

£)entfcf)en  f5nnten  fagen,  baft  e$  nidf)t^  S^onere^  gebe,  al$ 
einen  bentfd^en  SBalb  im  28tnter. 

>     (Sin  S)cutfc^er  ^cirte  £tt)ei  2lmerifaner  uber  ben  bentfc^en 
SBinter  fpred^en. 
r,3Benn  @ie  nad)  £)entfd)lanb  reifen,"  [agte  ber  eine,  ,,fo 


DER   WINTERSPORT. 


Ill 


fottten  @ie  bort  bis  jiim  Sinter  bteiben,  urn  Me  SBdtber  ju 
fefyen." 

,,23origen  SBinter  roar  id)  bort," 

,,£)ann  l)aben  @ie  gemip  bte  fcfjonen,  mit  @(i)nee  bebedten 
Sciume  ber  beutfdjen  9Bci(ber  gefefjen/'  5 

,,£eiber  ntcljt!  Qd)  ftubterte.  ^^  ^ar  hi  ^Berlin  auf  ber 
llnberfitdt*" 

,,2Bie  fc^abe!  @ie  fatten  bie  SBcilber  unb  ben  aBinter- 
fport  fefyett  foKen.  Sa^  fatten  @ie  im  ^aq  ober  im 
9ttefengebtrge  fefyen  !d 


Rodeln  im  Harz. 


md^te  id)  fe^en,    (£3  gibt  triele  IDtnge,  bie  icf) 
fe^en  tnbgen,  aber  id)  tootlte  fo  t)iet  tt)ie  moglidj  ftubieren." 
ff3l^,  @ie  fatten  nic^t  fo  Did  ftubieren  [offen,    2ilte3, 
man  auf  einer  llntoerfitat  ftubiert,  fann  man  au^  in  3lmerifa 


112  EASY   READING. 


ternen.  £)a$  fatten  @ie  and)  in  2lmerifa  ternen  fonnen. 
3l6er  bie  2ftenfd;)en,  Me  ©cfjtoffer,  bie  £)orfer,  bie  SBatber,  bie 
£)ome,  ba$  SBanbern  wtb  ben  SBinterfport  fatten  fie  intrHid) 
[e^en  [often*  S)a^  atfe§  gtbt  e§  in  Slmerifa  nid)t." 
5  ,f@ie  fprecf)en  t)om  $8inter[port.  3Ba$  meinen  @ie  bamtt, 
Ianfen?  @ine$  Sage^r  tt)at)renb  be§  SBinter^,  faf) 
8ente  im  £iergarten  je 


Schlittschuhlaufen  im  Tiergarten. 

lanfen*    J)ort  tying   bie  amerifanif^e  gatyne  5tt)ifd)en  gtoet 

bentfctyen  gatynen.    g^  tt)ar  fetyr  [d^bn.    Jro^  be^  fatten  9Set- 

10  ter^  tDaren  Sinber,  granen  nnb  banner  bort,  nnb  atte  tiefen 

®(auben  @ie  mir,  e$  tyat  mir  fetyr  gefatfen." 
gtanbe  i(^,    S)a^  ©rfjfittfdjnljtcmfen  ift  ben  Seutfd^en 
fetyr  angenetynt,    Stber  ben  beften  ^Binterfport,  ba$  9tobetn, 
fietyt  man  nnr  im  ©ebirge." 


DEUTSCHE   DOME.  113 


SRobeln?    £)a$  2Bort  tft  mir  gang    fremb. 
meinen  @ie  bamit?" 

,,$Benn  man  mit  <Srf)Iitten  fafjrt  ober  mit  einent  ' 
ba$  nennt  man  <9?obeln.'    &%  ift  ber  fdjdnfte  SBinterfport. 
©S  gefaltt  nn$  alien  am  be  [ten.  "  5 

,,Unb  ba$  fiefyt  man  nur  im  ©ebirge  ?" 
,,3att)ol)l,  tDa^renb  be^  ganjen  SEinter^,  tro^  ber  ^alte 
fd^rt  man  mit  33ob$  ober  ©c^Htten  ben  33erg  °f)tnab»    S^  gtbt 
Diete  tur&en,  nnb  U)enn  ein  33ob  'etne  £nrt)e  ntmmt/  it)ie 
U)ir  fagen,  fo  ift  e§  fe^r  gefafyrlirf)."  J0 

,faBtrfU^?    gttDa^  fo  ©efafyrltcljeS  gefiiHt  mir  gar  nic^t. 
£)a  fanfe  itf)  Iteber  @^ftttf(^nl).    £)a$  gefadt  mtr  utet  beffer." 
n$a,  ba^  @d)ttttfcf)U^[aufen  i(t  t)te(  angenefymer,  unb  tDegen 
ber  ©efa^r  fefyen  t)te(e  betm  SRobeln  (ieber  °ju.    ©ine^  SBin- 
ter^  ^abe  ic^  im  §arg  einen  §errn  fennen  gelernt,  ber  ttjegen  J5 
ber  ©efafyr  gar  nid^t  robette.    (g$  gefiet  i^m  fe^r  jusnfe^en, 
aber  er  toottte  ben  anberen  nicfyt  fotgen.    35a^  |)a^te  t^m  nicljt" 
ff!J)a^    nai^fte  9Ka(,  menn    idj  md^renb  be^  SBinter^  in 
£)entfd)tanb  bin,  ge^e  id)  ine  ©ebirge,  nm  beim  9?obe(n  jn= 
fy  mot^te  fef)en,  ob  e$  mir  nic^t  beffer  gefaHt,20 
glaube." 

@ie  ba^  \    Unb  gfanben  @ie  mir,  e^  tt)irb  ^^^^ 
ber  ©efa^r  fe^r  gnt  gef  alien." 

Deutfcfye  Dome. 

3n  ©entfd^Ianb  gibt  e$  t)iele  fc^dne,  gotif^e  £)ome.    SBenn 
man  t)on  gotifc^en  3)omett  fpri^t,  fo  benlt  man  getodfyntid:)  an  25 
^,  anftatt  bag  man  an  Sentfdjtanb  benlt.  Unb  granl- 
mef)r  gotifcfje  £)ome,  boc^  I)at  ®eutf(f)tanb  an^  triele. 
ba^  toir  lange  narfjbenfen,  faltt  nn^  ber  tdlner  £)om 


114 


EASY   READING. 


gletrf)  °ein,  ftenn  ttnr  Don  bentfdjen  £)omen  fpredjen.    SSiele 
fatten  ifyn  fitr  ben  fcfyonften  gottfrf)en  Dom  ber  28elt    (5r  tft 


Kolner  Dom. 


etner  ber  tt)entt3enf  bte  oo((enbet  finb.     2lber  erft  Dor  breipg 
ober  Dierjtg  ^a^ren  tft  er  DoUenbet  morben  (1880). 


DEUTSCHE   DOME. 


115 


3>er  33au  be$  $ofner  Domes  ttmrbe  int  breijefynten 
fjunbert  begonnen  (1248),  aber,  anftatt  bag  man  ifyn  gleid) 
fcoUenbete,  fyat  man  nngefafjr  bretfjnnbert  Qafyve  baran  ge- 
baut.  Hub  bte  beiben  Xurme  iDurben  bod)  ntdjt  tioUenbet. 

3Som  fec^jefinten  bte  jum  neunjef)nten  ^^^*t)^nbert  mitrbe  5 
faft  nifyt$  baran  getan.    9lber  int3:af)re  1824  fing  man  ftrieber 


Kolner  Dom  :  Seitenportal. 

can  tDeitersnbaiien.    ®te  alten  ^tane  maren  ntcfjt 

unb  man  ift  tfynen  genan  gefotgt.    T)te  beiben  £urme  fintv 

ungefa^r  fnnf^nnbert  gn£  ^oc^. 

S«  ift  ber  einjige  3)om  in  ber  2Bett,  ber  jttjei  folc^e  [rf)onen  10 
£itrme  ^at.    'Die  Xitrme  finb  fo  ^oc^,  nnb  ber  J)om  ift  fo 
gro£,  ba^  e^  fefyr  frf)tt)er  ift,  einen  gnten  Segriff  badon  ^n 
befommen,  o^ne  bag  man  aufterfjalb  ber  ©tabt,  ober 
ge^t. 


116 


EASY   READING. 


Slber  ber  Joiner  £>om  ift  bod)  titdjt  ber  IjBdjfte  in  £)eutfd) 

lanb,    £)a§  2ftiinfter  ju  Uttn  ift  nod)  f)df)ei\    £)er  £nrm  be 

Ulmer  3ftunfter$  tft  ber 

ljdd)fte  in  ganj  35eutf(^= 
5  tanb.    @$  ift  etner  ber 

^dc^ften  gotifrfjen  Jitrnte 

in  ber  gangen  2Bett 
lllm   ift   eine   ft^dne 

alte    @tabt    in    @iib- 
10  bentfd)(anb.     @ie  Uegt 

am    linfen    lifer    '  ber 

fdjdnen  bfanen  35onau.' 

§ier    fie^t    man   -nid)t 

nur    ba^    U)unberf(^dne 
15  SWttnftcr,  fonbern  and) 

triele     afte     maferifc^e 

§anferr  nrie  man  fie  in 

faft  alien  alten  bentfdjen 

©tcibten  fet)en  tann. 
20     Wad)     bem     Joiner 

J)om  unb  bem  lllmer 

SKilnftcr  ift  ba$ 

fter   ju   $reifmrg 

Iciest  ba^  fdjdnfte 


25  f(^e  ©ebanbe  in  £)entf  fy 
lanb.  ®a§  9Kttnfter 
fetbft,  mit  feinem  f^fi* 
nen  groften  Snrm  nnb 
feinen  ^tuei  fteinen 


Das  Miinster  zu  Ulm- 


30  men,  bietet  einen  mirfti^  ganj   it)unberfcf)dnen  9lnblicf. 
Slber  Diel(eid)t  nod)  fdjdner  ift  bie  8age  ber  @tabt 


DEUTSCHE   DOME.  117 

liegt  mitten  in  einem  fcfjonen,  son  griinen  §uge(n  nmgebenen 
unb   in  faft  alien   ©trafcen   flieftt  ba^   SBaffer    Don 


Freiburg. 

einem  Heinen  g(u£,  ber  buri^  ba^  Sat  Humbert,    ©e^^alb  ift 
greiburg  eine  ber  reinften  ©tabte  in  ber  SBett. 


118  EASY   READING. 

9luf  atten  §ugeln  unb  Bergen  um  bie  @tabt  finb  grofte 
bunfetgrime  £annenbaume.  £)iefe  33aume  finb  fo  bunfef, 
baft  man  ben  SBafb  ben  '©djtoarjtoalb'  uennt  §ier  mitten 
tm  ©djtoarjtoalb  liegt  biefe  fdjdne  ©tabt  mit  ifyrer  alten 
5  Unberfitdt,  ifyren  inter  eff  ant  en,  reinen  Strain  unb  ifyrem 
tt)nnber[d)onen  Some, 


n%lnn,  e^  fveut  mic^,  baft   lt)ir  enblit^  mit  btefem  (ang* 
iDeiligen  Snc^e  fertig  finb/' 

,,2Ba$    ift   benn   Io§?    ^cf)  fya&e   e^   nifyt  fanglDeitig  ge- 
iofnnben.    @ie  fagten  bo^  nenlit^,  e$  fei  ein  fe^r  intereffante^ 


gefagt,  aber  bamate  tt)ar 
nocf)  ni(f)t  fo  fc^tt)er  getoorben." 

gtaube,  mir  merben  fdjon  mit  einem  noc^  f 
anfangen  mitffen.    S)a^  iDirb  ^^^  ^ann  rao^  ntc^t 
fefyr  gut  gef  alien." 

rrDa§  tDirb  ja  furc^tbar  fein!    SBarum  mitffen  ttrir 
immer  arbeiten?    SBir  fyaben  fc^on  fo  t)iet  gelefen.    llnb 
ift  bo^  fo  bumm!" 

20     ,,3)umm?    SBie  meinen  @ie  benn  ba^?    $<fy  ^a 
intereffant  gefunben*    SBir  Ijaben  ft^on  giemlirf)    t)ie(  itber 
£)eutfcf)(anb  unb  bie  35eutfd^en  gelernt." 

f,2lber  it^  mag  bie  3)eutfd)en  unb  if)r  8anb  unb  befonber^ 
itjre  @^ra(^e  gar  nic^t,    $tf)  gfaube,  @ie  fagen,  ba^  53udf)  fei 
25  intereffattt,  tt)eil  @ie  &om  Setter  getobt  merben  lt)offen,  aber 
@ie  mbgen  e^  n)of)I  felbft  ntd^t." 

,,J)o^  !    3J?ir  gefalft  e^  fe^r  !    3lber  ttrie  Ibnnen  @ie  benn 
f  o  son  ben  £)eutfrf)en  unb  t)on  Seutfdjlanb  fpredjen,  menu  @ie 


"ENDLICH!"  119 

feme  ©eutfdjen  lennen  unb  nie  in  Seutfdjtanb  getoefen  fittb? 
Die  beutfdje  ©pradje  lonnen  @ie  and)  laum  lefen,  unb  @te 
fpred)en  fie  furrfjtbar  frfjfedjt" 

,,£)eSl)alb  gefafft  fie  mir  nicfyt !    34  fabe  Ictngc  gearbeitet, 
t)iete  ©eiten  gelefen,  triele  ©ebidjte  geternt  nnb  Diete  Slufgaben  5 
gefdjrieben,  unb  bocf)  lann  icf)  biefe  fangtneitige  @prad)e  nic^t 
fpre^en."  • 

,,3lber  @ie  merben  fie  f c^on  fprerf)en  lonnen.    9Kan  fann 
nic^t  atte$  in  menigen  9J?onaten,  ober  felbft  in  einem 
ternen*    £)aju  braud^t  man  tuo^I  me^rere  Qafye."  *° 

ff2Barunt  mtlgen  @ie  Me  £eutfcl)en  unb  i^re  ©prac^e  fo 
gern?    @ie  lennen  bo(^  feine  3)eutfcf)enV" 

,,3)oc^!    $d)  ^abe  adjt  ober  jet)n  2)eutf(^e  lennen  geternt, 
unb  e$  tt)aren  fe^r  gute,  freunbfidje,  intereffante  8eute,    llnb 
bie  beutfd)e  S^rat^e  unb  bie  beutf^en  8ieber  unb  ®ebirf)te  15 
finbe  id)  ftmnberfdjBn." 

fann  fein,  aber  mir  gef alien  fie  }a  nid)t" 
ei  biefen  S)ingen  ift  e$  gerabe  tt)ie  bei  t)ie(en  anberen. 
fie  gut  lennen,  um  urteilen  ju  I5nnen.    J)ie  3lmeri* 
laner,  tt)etdf)e  3)eutf^tanb  unb  bie  Seutfdjen  am  beften  lennen,  20 
mogen  fie,    Unb  bie  ©djuler  unb  ©tubenten,  bie  ba$  meifte 
3)eutfc^  lonnen,  mogen  e$  am  liebften," 

,,9Keinen  @ie  benn,  bag  i^  ni^t  urteilen  fottte,  bi^  ic^  me^r 
geternt  fyabe." 

!    ©erabe  ba$  meine  id).    J)eutf^  ift  nicljt  f^mer,  25 
@ie  iDerben  e$  ft^on  fpret^en  lernen  lonnen.    llnb  menu  @ie 
e^  fernen,  toerben  @ie  tt)ot)(  nad^  3)eutfc^Iant)  reifen.    S)ort 
werben  @ie  t)iete  J)eutfdje  lennen  lernen,  unb  @ie  toerben 
fe^en,  bag  fie  3}ienfd^en  finb,  eben  h)ie  tt)ir." 

„  £)a$  lann  fein !    @^  ift  toofyl  mog(irf) !"  3<> 

„(£$  ift  nicf|t  nur  mbgti^  ;  e$  ift  ma^r," 


Die  LoreleL 


HEINRICH  HBINB. 


TRIEDRICH  SILCHEB. 


Ob         h 

_A      .       ^          rs  J^^-P  T     r 

—  1             -1  K— 

j^vhfi    m 

—  g  ^  d  g 

1  1        *=F 

—  -A  1  p  — 

—  *H  m  m  

(|j)   PH—  3  — 

4                      tf           -     M 

d  d  =1  

_H_  1  j_ 

1.  Ich 
2.  Die 
3.  Den 

mf 

•<  s9                       ^^^ 

weiss      nicht,   was      soil        es        be    •    deu    -     ten,       dass 
schon      -       ste         Jung      -       frau        sit     -     zet         dort 
Schif  -    fer       im        klei        -       nen      Schif    -    fe           er  - 

_^  "p     ^         £     "%          •      ^    _  _          £:     -.  ^ 

^T~i?~fl  \  

—  1-5  i  1 

»  *  •  

-l-i  1  

b  bM 

^  [/+  ^E  b 

f>  ^  —  ^   - 

^  — 

i  —  j^  p  ^ 

F 

•   0   H- 

fv-,  —  N- 

-ft 

IN 

7h?h" 

—  K- 

—  f-r 

s  — 

n"^=^j 

~*Tm~~ 

=^TT 

—  lp  

9      J 

-•f— 

fpK^I? 

j 

! 

m        • 

I 

3 

\-\) 

• 

f  i- 

I 

1  •      S 

J 

j       m 

J  , 

^ 

^^ 

*  t 

9 

r 

ich 

so 

trau  • 

-  rig     bin,  .  . 

ein     Mar  - 

chen  aus      al    • 

ten 

o  -  ben 

wun  - 

der  -  bar,  .  . 

ihr     gold  - 

nes    Ge  -  schmei-de 

greif  t  es 

mit 

wil  - 

dem     Weh,  . 

er   schaut 

j 

nicht  die       Fel  • 

sen  • 

5m 

^T~b" 

|        j~ 

| 

i 

=f 

•S?  —  r- 

-*-* 

I      •                    {• 

i        (•  

P  1? 

!*v    '15 

-  r  - 

.  f- 

Tf 

•r^t?  —  t— 

^ 

$ 

t  1  

*  - 

3CZ      -                                       5 

(frr^  —  *^  —  ~j|  1~ 

^£-f  -i  ~i 

1^   - 

W  J             J  .               V               * 

m  •         ft          ft              J              j 

f.^ 

Zei      •      ten,          das 
blit      -      zet,          sie 
rif       -      fe,            er 

I  j  _     n  «~r  —  ^-^^~ 

*<  —  '                     * 

kommt         mir       nicht       au 
kammt          ihr         gol    -     de 
schaut    nur      hin     -    auf         in 

i  —  F^  —  ^~  ^    ~F~~ 

s        dem 
-     nes 
die 

—  p  •     .  L   •  _Jp            L            J 

f     "^ 

1                  V 

V  ~*~^~V          V             V             fr 

y 

120 


Die  £orelet. 


121 


cres. 


Die  Luft  ist  kuhl  und  es  dun  -  kelt 
Sie  k&nmt  es  in  it  gol  -  de  •  nem  Kam  -  me 
Ich  glaube,  die  Wei  -  len  ver  -  schlin  -  gen 

cres.  _     f_£_.        +_ 


=P 


m 


und 
und 
am 


dim. 


ru  -  hig       fliesst    der      Rhein,      .  der       Gi   -  pfel    des      Ber  -  ges 

singt     ein       Lied       da  •  bei,      .     .  das      hat       ei  -  ne       wun  -  der  • 

En  •  de    Schif  -fer  und     Kahn,       .  und     das      hat    mit      in    -    rem 


dim.  .x"^»    .A. 


fofr-4i— 

T    K  U           ^ 

?=f= 

—  fn 

-f  £- 

-r«n-e  H 

—  = 
^-f^rlf 

\)               9 

?  PL- 
*—t 

-fJ 

-p  —  ^ 

fe^=^ll 

^ 

fun 

-    kelt 

im 

A    -    bend 

-   son     -    nen    -    schein. 

sa 

me, 

ge    - 

wait'  -    ge 

Me     -     lo     -     dei. 

Sin 

-     gen 

die 

Lo     -    re 

•     lei            ge     - 

tan. 

7*i'          B—  ? 

T 

f- 

^ 

-1    r_h= 

n=— 

»^P^rH 

1  

—  £  — 

FT    •  P 

—  ^^ 

r^v   H 

Der  gute  Kamerad. 


LUDWIG  UHLAND. 


FRIEDRICH  SILCHER. 


1.  Ich     hatt'  ei-nenKa-me  -  ra  -  den,  ei-nen  bes  -  sern  findst  du    nit. 

2.  Ei-neKu-  gel      kam  ge   -  flo  -gen.  Gilt's  mir     o-dergilt  es     dir? 

3.  Will     mir    die  Handnoch    rei  -  chen,  der  -  weil     ich        e-ben    lad'. 


•*-    -*-• 


Sfcfce 


I 


15=1 


-y — t/- 


iit 


1 


^s 


Die  Trommel  schlug  zum  Strei  -te,  er  ging  an  mei  -  ner  Sei  -  te  in 
Ihn  hat  es  weg  -  ge  -  ris  -  sen,  er  liegtmirvor  den  Fii- ssen,als 
"Kanndir  die  Hand  nicht  ge  -  ben,  bleib  du  im  ew'-gen  Le  -ben  mem 


a; 


glei  -  chem  Schritt  und  Tritt, 
war's  ein  Stiick  von  mir, 
gu  -  ter  Ka  -  me  -  rad, 


in       glei  -  chem  Schritt  und    Tritt. 

als     war's    ein  Stuck    von      mir. 

mein     gu  -  ter     Ka  -  me  -  rad  !  " 


i 


as 


122 


Ich  bin  der  Doktor  Eisenbart. 

Volkslied. 


Heiter. 


m 


Ich  bin     derDok-tor    Ei  -  sen-bart    val -le- ral  -  le  -  ri,  juch-hei!     ku  - 
Des  Kiis  -  ters  Sohn  in    Di  -  del-dum,  val  -  le-  ral  -  le  -  ri,  juch-hei!     dem 

•— k— f- 


T=4: 


die  Lent' nach  mei - ner  Art;     val  -le-  ral-le  -  ri,     juch-hei!     kann 
ich  zehn  Pf  und  O   -pi   -  uin;   val  -  le  -  ral  -  le  -  ri,     juch-hei!    drauf 


l_  —  u  —  |0  

1  

—  b  —  m  — 

P 

9  

•=£= 

#    i/    ^    ^           L 

L     X 

! 

x     b 

—  r 

f 

ina-  chen,dass  die  Blin-den  gehn,     val-  le-  ral-  le  -  ri,  juch-hei  -  ras  -  sa!   und 
schlief  er    Jail -re,  Tag  undNacht,  val- le- ral- le  -  ri,  juch-hei- ras  -  sal  und 


IN 

fc 

£ 

N          +-+--+-+-   -9- 

f"  ^ 

9 

^ 

^ 

-' 

« 

m  U_     L     L     L     L 

M 

\ 

I 

•i  P     i        r 

I 

r 

5 

rjnil     *     V     p     p 

f 

E 

6 

fv 

>  PU  .D    C    U 

—  1  

If 

—  w  — 

^_um^         _s    _A  pv,  —  Ps  R    J      ,^-fc  —  i 

fc        fc        fc        Is           IN            1 

P  B^  —  ^  —  ~fr-i  —  *~ 

~a^  —  i  —  i  — 

—  "T  —  a 

—  Jr~*r~*\  —  4~ 

d~^rrl 

\>                m     m        m 

i        •    j 

i     i    J      i 

i       II 

4'* 

*        9 

J 

J    J    *     J 

!           II 

9  •         0       «           #           9  • 

dass      dieLah-men   wie   -  der  sehn.  Val-le 
ist       bis  jetzt  noch  nicht     er-wacht.  Val  -  le 

—  —  ^                                                   :  ^—  *  r-* 

« 

-  ral  -  le  -  ri,    juch  -  hei  ! 
-  ral  -  le  -  ri,    juch  -  hei! 

•  •—  r-*  r. 

^^-           =|I=====t- 

c:  L  i 

^f— 

r  —  r- 

1        1    | 

=f-     ==y=^=T-I-b^-^^- 

123 

Massig 


0  Tannenbaum. 

Volkslied. 


Volksweise. 


1.  O  Tan-nen-baum,  o   Tan-nen-baum,  wie  treu   sind  dei  -  neBlat-ter! 

2.  O  Tan-nen-baum,  o    Tan-nen-baum,   dukannstmir  sehr    ge  -  f al  -  len; 

3.  0  Tan-nen-baum,  o    Tan-nen-baum,  deinKleid  will  mich  was  leh  -ren: 


* 


=t 


-- — p- 


-fS -fr 1 ^  ,    |s & 


O  Tan-nen-baum,  o  Tan  -  nen-baum,  wie  treu  sind  dei  -  ne  Blat-ter! 
O  Tan-nen-baum,  o  Tan-nen-baum,  dukannstmir  sehr  ge  -  fal  -  len. 
O  Tan-nen-baum,  o  Tan  - nen-baum,dein  Kleid  will  mich  was  leh  •  ren: 


* 


=t 


m 


Du  griinst  nicht  nur  zur  Som-mer  -zeit,  doch  auch  im  Win  -  ter,wenn  es  schnei 
Wie  oft  hat  nicht  zur  Weihnachtszeit  einBaumvondir  michhoch  er-freut! 
Die  Hoff nung  und  Be  -stan  -  dig  -  keit  gibt  Trost  und  Kraft  zu  al  -  ler  Zeit. 


©  tTannenbaum* 


125 


m 


Tan-nen-baum,  o  Tan  -  nen-baum,  wie  treu  sind  dei  -  ne  Blat-ter! 
Tan  -  nen-baum,  o  Tan-nen-baum,  dukannstmir  sehr  ge-fal-len. 
Tan-nen-baum,  o  Tan  -  nen-baum,  dein Kleid will  mich  was  leh - ren. 


HEINRICH  HEINE. 
f)  Langsam. 


Fruhlmgsgruss. 

FELIX  MENDELSSOHN-BARTHOLDY. 


1.  Lei    -  se    zieht  durch  mein  Ge  -  miit      lieb  -  li  -  dies    Ge     -    lau  -   te. 

2.  Kling  bin  -  aus    bis      an    das  Haus,    wo    die    Blu-men      sprie  -  ssen. 


r 

• 

*_                   JL       JfL       JjL       JL       JL            -_j£_-             K^ 

—  f  —              rr                   —  r-i  —  »•»  —  t  *—  L 

0 

_5_ 

p  H  ' 

•  _jg 

T  —  ^  — 

—  En  b  —  t7    ~t  

-»  »  — 

I    i/          i/      u*        i/ 

1           1 

v      y      v      v      ^      v 

I 


Klin  -  ge,   klei  -  nes  Frith-lings-  lied,  kling  bin  -  aus     ins      Wei    -    te. 
Wenn  du      ei  -  ne     Ro  -  se  schaust,  sag,  ich    lass'  sie       gru    -    ssen. 


Du  bist  wie  eine  Blume. 


HEINRICH  HEINE. 
Innig 


ANTON  RUBINSTEIN. 


^f^:r-f:f:^—-'^^=f^      q—jylE     I      -1    -JV+  4_q_j 

3=BM— f-bH— i>— Fg=E^==j=E^_:jZ[zg — ^ 


Du      bist    wie        ei  -  ne     Blu   -  me         so      hold      und   schon     un< 


E±=P=E=:= 

b/ — H 


±3 


-*-*— F= 


1  V  V 

Ich    schau'  dich      an      und     Weh  -  niut  schleicht  mir      ins 


^7r     t  .  t;   •  .  i;  -s-r^--^EM*-  ,frt;-* 

^  j^  i  ^pb=EzpE^-=E=p:^pr— tnT  ~tg 

1 1  u     I   I      — fr— 


^=J^J— -. 

*==i==3=: 


Herz       hin    -    ein.  .  .         Mir        ist         als         ob        ich      die       Han 


fcfez: 


**^-PM^ 


/L'b    KJ          J 

J              , 

2-1    Ju'         J 

22 

4   M> 

«         j        j 

f(\\u  ZHt3         fl 

n  •     g 

"!/•        ^ 

. 

i    ^ 

i    i         f          \ 

vMJ     k  J            2 

h 

j 

• 

ib 

J             J      J 

S3 

J 

kJ 

de        aufs  Haupt     dir        le       -      gen        sollt',                 be  -  tend,  dass 

^•^.,    |  .   —  lv 

-17 

i- 

1 

dz 

r    ^B 

u 

^ 

p  :  p  p_ 

g  b  —  t.- 

i  1  —  , 

^f^^  —  ^—  5- 

126 


Du  Kft  tme  cine  Blume. 


127 


y=*- 


Gott    dich    er  -  hal     •     te       so     rein     und     schon  und     hold. 


cres 


=^ • lE= 

=^N^a 

r~  p      y 


i  '  *    ^ 

so      rein     und 


Be   -   tend,  dass    Gott     dich     er  -    hal 
cres        ...        cen 

•&* 


te 
do 


± 


^L          ^1        1 


iEEl 


F=f 


schon         und    hold  . 


Be  -   tend  dass     Gott       dich        er    - 


V — H & — H5> — v-t— ^ — P » to 

^=H.^=t=(^t^r»-rr^-yr 


i  -       i 


i 


-«|-i T 

lf±=il 


^f 


1   1 


hal    .    te 


so      rein       und        schon  und        hold. .  . 


\  !• 


i 


Sah  ein  Knab'  ein  Roslein  stehn. 


JOHANN  WOLFGANG  VON  GOETHE. 
Mdssig  bewegt 


HEINRICH  WERNER. 


1.  Sah  ein  Knab'  ein  Ros-lein  stehn, Ros-lein  auf  der  Hei  -  den,  war  so  Jung  und 

2.  Kna  -be  sprach:  ich  bre  -  che  dich,Ros-  lein  auf  der  Hei  -  den  !R6s-lein  sprach:  ich 

3.  Und  der  wil  -  de  Kna  -  be  brach's  Ros-lein  auf  der  Hei  -  den;  Ros-lein  wehr-te 

f>+      -9- 


ft -9-      -9-  -9—9-9-    -9-      -9-    -*-*     -9-      -9-  -t-9_-*        m  .           1 

^RFt— P— ?^N-fc-Ft=t—   — ftp — ^— feij=£zips^ig^ 

-^*L  M—  I P — r-^ — I b b b~: 1 r- — I — I — f hi 1 — - 

^^R  i    b^—^s-u-pp — ^— p  rr   t^B^-H^t- 


-  9 


mor-genschon,lief  erschnell,es  nah  zu  sehn,sah's  mit  vie-lenFreu-den. 
ste  -  che  dich,dass  du  e  -  wig  denkst  an  mich,  und  ich  will's  nicht  lei  -  den. 
sich  und  stach,half  ihm  doch  kein  Weh  und  Ach,musst'  es  e  -  ben  lei  -  den. 

-,^,-,-,^^rf^-f^f^|Eg^  1'  - 


HP-2- 


;=F=t£ 


mfcres.  ~-  f  


R6s-lein,Ros-lein,     Ros-lein  rot,     Ros  -  lein  auf     der      Hei    -  den. 
mfcres. 


mj  cres.       —  /. 

V  I       i    I 


128 


Sanft 


StiUe  Nacht. 

Volkslied. 


Volksweise. 


r>f> 


1.  Stil  .  le    Nacht,    hei  -  li  -  ge  Nacht !    Al   -   les  schlaft,  ein  -  sam  wacht 

2.  Stil  -  le    Nacht,    hei-  li-ge  Nacht!   Hir   -  ten    erst  kund       ge-macht 

3.  Stil-le    Nacht,    hei  -  li -ge  Nacht!   Got  -  tes  Sohn,     o         wielacht 


=P^: 


ifii 


m 


-^- 

nur      das    trau  -  te,  hoch  -  hei  -  li  -  ge    Paar.    Hoi  -  der  Kna  -  be  im 

durch     der     En  -  gel    Hal  -  le       -      lu  -   ja,     tont       es  laut         von 

Lieb*    aus       dei     -     nem  gott  -  li-chen  Mund,  da       uns  schlagt    die 


f- 

-9- 

_0J_» 

f-  f-   -+ 

•    -0- 

-+- 

-^  r-~ 

£^^- 

:   r 

—  10  — 

—f^~ 

-H0  — 

^—^t 

—  —  i  — 

-t  — 

-£^- 

—  •  

9  — 

~"r^~B~ 

p  

\J^-' 

•g 

,         V 

m 

I* 

m  . 

L       ^      j 

1 

tr 

V 

V 

$ 

r 

r 

U1         i/      I/ 

V 

^=^y 

b 

F^r 

lock  -  i  -  gen  Haar,schlaf '  in  himin  -  li-scher  Ruh1,  schlaf  in  himmlischer 
fern  und  nah:  Christ  der  Ret  -  ter  ist  da,  Christ  der  Ret  -ter  ist 
ret  -  tende  Stand', Christ,  in  dei  -  ner  Ge  -  burt,  Christ,in  dei-  ner  Ge- 

dim. 


T 

Ruh'I 

da! 

burtl 

f>f> 


129 


Krdfttgt  itnb  iibet  ben  (Seift  an  tt>enigen,  uwrbigen  Stoffcn ! 
<£uer  23eruf  ift  erfiillt,  tt>cnn  ttjr  311  lernen  gelernt. 

—  ©oetfye. 


130 


4 

LESSON  I. 


Present  of  fjafien  arid  feitu    Gender. 


(Jrifd?  begonnen,  fyalb  gemonncn.  —  2)eutfdje3 
Well  begun  is  half  done.  —  German  Proverb- 


1.         Present  Tense  of  fyabetl,  to  have,  and  feitt,  to  be. 

id)  Ijafce,  I  have.  id)  Bin,  lam. 

bit  (aft,  thou  hast.  bit  &tft,  ^ow  ar£. 

er,  ficf  e3  (at,  fte,  s/ie,  if  has.  '  er,  ficf  c^  ift,  he,  she,  it  is. 


ttur  Jjafcen,  toe  /tave.  nitr  fhtb,  toe  are. 

t^r  ^abtf  you  have.  tljr  fcibr  yow  are. 

fie  fjafcen,  ^ey  /iave.  fie  fittbf  ^e?/  are. 

2.  Gender.  —  Like  English,  German  has  three  genders  :  mas- 
culine, feminine,  and  nenter.  Names  of  males  are  usually 
masculine  and  names  of  females  usually,  feminine. 

But  inanimate  objects  may  be  masculine,  feminine,  or  neuter. 
Thus  the  German  word  for  knife  is  neuter  ;  for  fork,  feminine  ; 
and  for  spoon,  masculine. 

(a)  To  indicate  gender  the  definite  article  (masc.  ber,  fern. 
Me,  neut.  bd$,  the)  should  be  learned  with  every  noun.  It 
should  be  considered  a  part  of  the  noun  and  learned  as  a  first 
syllable;  not  (gdjiUer,  but  ber  ©djitter;  not  @d)u(e,  but  Me 
©cljule  ;  not  93ud),  but  ba$  $Bnfy. 

131 


132  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

3.  German  Questions,  —  In  German,  as  in  English,  a  question 
is  asked  by  inverting  subject  and  predicate,  or  by  using  an 
interrogative  adverb  or  pronoun. 

Sittirf)?    Ami? 

280  &ift  btt  ?     Where  art  thou  ? 

(a)  The  English  repetition  of  the  auxiliary  in  a  question,  as 
isn't  he  ?  don't  you  f  won't  they  ?  can't  I  ?  etc.,  is  given  in  Ger- 
man simply  by  nidjt  or  ntcfyt  fodljr,  (is  it)  not  true? 

We  are  the  pupils,  aren't  we?    2Bir  fittb  Me  Sdjitler,  nidjt  (ttwljr)  ? 
She  has  the  book,  hasn't  she  ?    @ie  tyat  ba3  Stttty,  ttidjt 


4.  Vocabulary. 

ber  Setter,  teacher.  feitt,  to  be. 

bet     (Sdjii'Ier,     pupil     (compare  ttwljr,  true. 

scholar).  J)terf  here. 

bte  ^e'ber,  pen;  also  feather.  too?  where? 

bte  Sdju'Ie,  school;  in  ber  Sdjule,  ir^f  /;  mirr  i^e;  bitr  ^ow;  i^r,  yo?^; 

i^  or  at  school.  erf  Ae;  fte,  she;  e^f  i^;  fief  they. 

ooA:.  jaf  yes. 

f  paper.  nid)tt  not. 

fja'fcen,  «o  7i«t?e.  unbf  and. 

(a)  Note  that  the  same  word,  fte,  means  she  or  they. 

5.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  l.  $8)  bin  ber  ©djttler.      2.  £m  btft  ber  gefyrer,  ntcfjt 
3.  gr  ift  in  ber  (Sdjule,      4.  2Btr  fjaben  bte  geber, 
5.        r     abt  ba^    33ud.      6. 


(&)  1.  Where  is  the  book  ?  2.  It  is  here,  isn't  it  ?  3.  The 
teacher  has  the  book.  4.  I  have  the  paper.  5.  They  are 
at  (in  bet)  school.  6.  We  have  the  pen  and  the  paper. 


PAST   OF   HABEN   AND    SEIN.  133 

6.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.   Kead  Qn  ber  ®djnle,  Easy  Reading,  1. 

2.   Point  out  illustrations  of  the  use  of  fjabett  and  fetn  ;  of 
inanimate  feminines ;  of  German  questions  ;  of  ntd^t  tfldfyr. 

(b)  L  3ft  ber  @d)U(er  fyter?     2.  $rf)  bin  ber  gefyrer,  nid)t 
toaljr  ?      3.  |>aft  bit  ba3  33ncl)  ?      4.  2Bo  finb  fie?     5.  §aben 
fie  geber  unb  papier?      6»  @mb  tt)ir  in  ber  @d)nle? 

(c)  1.    The  pupil   is  here.       2.   Where  are   you?      3.   We 
have  the  book  and  the  paper.      4.    The  teacher  is  at  (in  ber) 
school,  isn't  he  ?      5.    I  have  the  pen,  haven't  I  ?      6.    They 
are  here  in  school,  and  they  have  the  book. 

(c£)  "  Where  are  you  ?  " 

"  We  are  here  at  school." 

"  You  have  the  pen,  haven't  you  ?  " 

"  Yes,  we  have  the  pen  and  the  paper." 

"  Is  the  teacher  here  ?  "  i^ 

"  Yes,  and  he  has  the  book." 

LESSON  II. 
Past  of  fya&ett  and  fcin. 


2IUcr  2lnfang  tft  fd?mer. 

Every  beginning  is  hard.  —  German  Proverb. 


7.  Past  Tense  of  Ijaben  and  fetn. 

tcfy  ^attcf  I  had.  tptr  Ijatten,  we  had. 

bu  ^attcftr  thou  hadst.  t^r  ^attctf  you  had.        if 

crf  ficr  e§  fjatte,  he,  she,  it  had.  fte  fatten,  they  had. 


134  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

id)  ttwr,  I  was.  ttrir  ttwren,  we  were. 

bit  ttwrft,  thou  wast.  if)r  ttwrt,  you  were. 

er,  fie,  e3  ttiarr  fte,  sfte,  it  was.  fie  ttwren,  Me?/  were. 

8.  Nominative  and  Accusative  Cases.  —  The  nominative  and 
accusative  are  always  alike,  except  in  the  masculine  singular. 

(a)  The  Nominative,  as  in  English,  is  the  case  (1)  of  the 
subject,  and  (2)  of  the  predicate  after  intransitive  verbs  like 
fern,  to  be,  and  ftevben,  to  become. 

^er  SBater  ttwr  gut     The  father  was  good. 
(£r  ift  ber  Setter*    He  is  the  teacher. 

(6)  The  Accusative,  like  the  English  objective,  is  the  case  of 
the  direct  object. 

<3ie  Ijat  einen  $ater,    She  has  a  father. 
ir  fatten  einen  Setter*     We  had  a  teacher. 


9.  Table  of  Nominative  and  Accusative  Forms. 


Definite  Article,  the. 

Singular.  Plural. 

M.       F.        N. 

Norn,     bet      bie       ba£  bte 

Ace.     ben     bie     ba3          bie 


Indefinite  Article,  a. 

Singular.  Plural. 

M.          F.       N. 

Nom.    ein       einc    ein    (Want- 
Ace,     einen    eine    ein        ing.) 


(a)  Note  that  bie  is  the  form  of  the  nominative  and  accusative  of  the 
definite  article  for  all  genders  in  the  plural,  and  for  the  feminine  singular. 
Observe  especially  the  masculine  singular,  contrasting  the  nominative  and 
accusative  forms. 

10.  A  Predicate  Adjective,  as  in  English,  is  not  declined. 

fieljm  ift  gttt»     The  teacher  is  good. 

S3udj  ttttb  bie  Dlofe  finb  rot.     The  book  and  the  rose  are  red. 

11.  Terms  of  Address.  —  £)u  (plural  tfyr)  is  used  in  address- 
ing intimate  friends,  relatives,  young  children,  and  animals  ; 


PAST   OF   HABEN   AND    SEIN.  135 

but  in  more  formal  intercourse  German  uses  the  third  person 
plural  form  with  the  pronoun  capitalized. 

Have  you  the  book  ?  (To  the  teacher.)  ^>afceit  8te  ba3  SSttdj  ? 
(To  a  fellow  pupil.)  £aft  bit  bag  SBitd)  ? 
(To  several  pupils.)  £abt  tfjr  ba3  SBurf)  ? 

(a)  ®ie  is  the  common  mode  of  address  to-day  in  Germany  for  both 
singular  and  plural,  except  when  bil  (ifyr)  is  required.  Think  whether  you 
are  addressing  intimate  friends  or  not  ;  when  in  doubt,  use  @ie. 

12.  Vocabulary. 

bet  SBru'ber,  brother.  gut,  good. 

ber  SBn'ter,  father.  eitt,  a,  an. 

bic  Sftitt'ter,  mother.  aud),  ateo,  too. 

bic  <3rf)ttie'fterf  sister.  gc'ftertt,  yesterday. 

ba§  $an^f   house;  511  $au'fef  «^      ttcinf  wo. 
home* 


13.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  i.  S)er  SSater  tt)ar  gut.  2.  ©te  ®c^lt)efter  ^atte  einen 
53ruber.  3.  SBaren  fie  aut^  gut?  4.  2Ba3  fatten  @tel? 
5.  SBtr  ^atteu  eiue  ®cl)it)efter.  6.  S)u  t^arft  gu  §aufer  ^i^^ 
ttafjr? 

(6)  1.  I  had  a  brother.  2.  The  sister  was  good.  3.  Were 
you  (write  three  ways)  at  home?  4.  The  father  and  the 
mother  had  a  house.  5.  Was  the  pupil  good,  too  ?  6.  The 
house  was  good,  wasn't  it  ? 

14.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.    Eead  £)er  ncicijfte  £ag,  Easy  Reading,  2-4. 

2.  Point  out  illustrations  of  the  past  of  fyabetl  and  (eitt  ;  of 
the  nominative  and  accusative  cases  ;  of  both  articles  ;  of  a 
predicate  adjective  ;  of  terms  of  address. 


136  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

(b)  i.  Sareu  @ie  geftern  511  §aufe?     2.  £wtte  bie  Gutter 
eiue  ©djtoefter  unb  aucf)  eiueu  Sruber?    3,  2Bareu  bie  @cl)tt>efter 
unb  bie  Sautter  gut?     4,  fatten  toir  einen  SSater  unb  aucf) 
etueu  33ruber?      5.  SBo  ttmr  ber  S^iiler,  uub  ttm$  fyatte  er? 
6.  fatten  @ie  gefteru  eiu  Surf)  iu  ber  @dntle  ? 

(c)  1.  I  have  a  brother  and  a  father ;  they  are  good.     2.   They 
were    at    home    yesterday    (translate,    yesterday    at    home). 
3.   Were  you  also  at  home  ?      4.   No,  I  was  at  (iu  ber)  school 
yesterday.       5.    What  had  you  at  school  yesterday  ?     Was  it 
good  ?      6.   The  mother  and  the  sister  have  a  house. 

(d)  "  Where  were  you  yesterday  ?  " 

"I  was  not  at  (iu  ber)  school ;  I  was  at  home." 

"  And  what  had  you  yesterday  at  home  ?  " 

"  We  had  a  book ;  it  was  good." 

"  Have  you  a  father  and  a  mother  ?  " 

"  Yes,  and  also  a  sister  and  a  brother.     They  are  good,  too." 

LESSON  III. 
Present  of  fofcen.    Definite  Article. 


Das  ZPerf  lobt  ben  IKetfter.  —  2>eutfdje3  (^rtdjwort 
The  work  praises  the  master.  —  German  Proverb. 


15.  Classification  of  Verbs. — Verbs  are  generally  called 
strong,  or  irregular,  when  the  stem  vowel  changes  in  the  past ; 
weak,  or  regular,  when  it  remains  the  same  :  (weak,  fobeu,  tobte ; 
strong,  fefyeu,  jot)).  Compare  English  praise,  praised;  see,  saw. 

Note. — These  terms  were  invented  by  the  German  scholar,  Jacob 
Grimm.  A  strong  verb  has  strength  enough  to  form  its  past  by  changing 
its  vowel ;  a  weak  one  requires  the  help  of  an  ending. 


PRESENT   OF   LOBEN.  137 

16.  The  Weak  Verb  has  the  following  personal  endings  in 
the  present  tense.     These  are  added  to  the  verb  stem,  which 
is  found  by  dropping  the  infinitive  ending  ?ett. 

Singular.  Plural. 

1st c  —  en 

2d  -  -(e)ft  -  (c)t 

3d (c)t  —  en 

(a)  Euphony  requires  that  certain  verbs  have  -e-  before  the 
ending  in  the  second  person  singular  and  plural  and  in  the 
third  singular:  bu  grufjeft,  thou  greetest;  er  todftet,  he  waits. 
Otherwise  the  sound  of  the  ending  would  be  lost  in  that  of 
the  stem :  bu  gritftft,  er  toartt. 

17.  Present  Tense  of  toben,  to  praise.     Stem,  (ob. 

id)  (ofte,  I  praise.  tint  (often,  we  praise. 

btt  (oftft,  thou  praisest.  i(jr  (oftt,  you  praise. 

er,  fie,  e3  (oftt,  he,  she,  it  praises.  fie  (often,  they  praise, 

(a)  Conjugate  like  foben  the  present  of  fagett,  tyieten,  and  fernett. 

18.  English  Progressive  and  Emphatic  Forms   are   given    in 
German  by  the  simple  verb. 

/  am  studying,  I  do  study.    $dj  (erne* 
He  was  praising,  he  did  praise.     ($r  (oftte* 
Were  you  saying?  Did  you  say?    3agtcu  &it? 

19.  The  Definite  Article. 

Singular.  Plural. 

Masc.                   Fern.  Neut.  All  genders. 

Norn.      bet,  the.               bie,  the.  ba3,  the.              bie,  the. 

Gen.        be3,  of  the.           ber,  of  the.  be3,  of  the.           bet,  of  the. 

Dat.       bent,  to  the.         ber,  to  the.  bem,  to  the.         ben,  to  the. 

Ace.       ben,  the.              bie,  the.  bag,  the.             bie,  the. 
(a)  Note  the  similarity:  ber  —  er,  bie  —  fte,  ba$  —  e3,  bie  — fte. 


138  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

20.  Vocabulary. 

fcer  (Som'mer,  summer;  im  8om=  to'bett,  to  praise. 

met,  in  (the}  summer.  ffi'&enr  £o  sa?/. 

fcer  2Bht'ter,  winter  ;  im  Winter,  ftrie'fett,  £o 

in  (the}  winter.  Qfiitt,  green. 

bte  Ofa'fe,  rose.  ttwrm,  warm. 

im  gette,  in  the  ba3,  ^a«. 


grrass.  inr  with  the  dative,  in  ;  tmf  for  tit 

(er'ttcn,  to  learn;  to  study.  bcmf  in  the. 

21.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  i.  gernen  @ie  im  SBtnter?  2.  Qd)  [pick  im  ©ommer, 
3.  8obt  er  bie  SRofcV  4.  3ft  ba^  ©ra^  grim?  5.  3^er 
©fitter  fptclt  im  gelbe.  6.  SBarum  fagt  er  ba^  ? 

(6)  1.  I  study  in  winter.  2.  We  play  in  summer. 
3.  What  are  you  saying?  4.  They  are  praising  the  rose. 
5.  The  grass  is  green.  6.  Why  do  you  play  in  the  field  ? 

22.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  -Read  gin  Jag  im  ©ommer,  Easy  Reading,  4,  5. 

2.  Point  out  illustrations  of  the  definite  article;  of  weak 
verbs  ;  of  verbs  that  may  be  translated  by  the  progressive  or 
emphatic  forms. 

(6)  1.  9Ba3  fagen  ©ie?  SBarum  fagen  @ie  ba$?  2.  ©pieten 
ttrir  im  ©ommer  unb  lernen  ttrir  im  SBinter?  3.  3ft  ba$  ®rd$ 
im  getbe  griin  im  @ommer?  4.  3Ba$  ift  ba^?  3ft  e$  bie 
$Rofe?  5.  8obt  ber  Secret  bie  9tofe?  6.  SBarum  fpielen  @ie 
nidjt  im  getbe  ? 

(c)  1.  Do  you  study  in  summer  and  also  in  winter? 
2.  The  grass  in  the  field  is  green  in  summer.  3.  What  are 


PAST   OF   LOBEN.  139 

you  playing?       4.   Why  are    you  learning  that?       5.   I  am 
praising  the  rose.      6.    The  teacher  is  praising  the  pupil. 

(d)    "  Why  aren't  you  studying?  " 

"  What  do  you  say  ?     Why  am  I  not  studying  ?  " 

"  Yes,  you  are  playing,  aren't  you  ?  " 

"  Yes,  we  are  playing  in  the  field." 

"Does  the  teacher  praise  the  pupils  (bie  ©djitler)  ?  " 

-"  No,  he  does  not  praise  the  pupils,  when  (toetm)  they  play." 

LESSON  IV. 
Past  of  fo&en*    Indefinite  Article. 


IPte  gebt  cs?    <5art3  gut,  id?  banfe. 

.x» 
How  goes  it?     Quite  well,  I  thank  (you). 

23.  The  Past  Tense  of  Weak  Verbs  is  formed  by  adding  ^ 
to  the  present  stem.     The  personal  endings  are  the  same  as  in 
the  present  tense,  except  that  the  third  singular  is  like  the  first. 

24.  Past  Tense  of  loben. 

id)  lofcte,  I  praised.  ttrir  lofcten,  we  praised. 

bit  (o&teft,  thou  didst  praise.  tfyr  lobtet,  you  praised. 

Ctf  ftcr  t§  (oitcf  he,  she,  it  praised.  fie  lofitett,  they  praised. 

•(a)  Conjugate  the  past  tense  of  fernen,  fagen  and  fpielen. 

:25.  The  Indefinite  Article. 

Singular. 


Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Nom. 

ein,  a. 

cincr  a. 

cittf  a. 

Gen. 

cittc§f  of  a. 

cittcr,  of  a. 

eitic§r  of  a. 

Dat. 

etttejtt,  to  a. 

einer,  to  a. 

etnem,  to  a. 

,U     .Ace. 

etncnf  a. 

cmcf  a. 

eittf  a. 

140  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

26.  Position  of  ntd)t  —  When  ntcl)t,  not,  modifies  the  whole 
sentence,  it  stands  at  or  near  the  end  ;  otherwise  it  comes  just 
before  the  word  or  phrase  it  negatives. 

lofcen  ben  Sdjitfer  ttirfjt.     We  are  not  praising  the  pupil. 
SBoot  ttwr  ttidjt  im  2$affer»     The  boat  was  not  in  the  water. 


27.  Vocabulary. 

Or)  Sri*?,  Fred.  ba3  $ftlt,  desk. 

(bcr)  $0'f)fttttt,  John.  ba3  Gaffer,  water;  im  293affer,  in. 

(tier)  $avlf  Charles.  the  water. 

be*  ®ar'ten,  garden;  im  ®arteu,  .     frf)iw,  beautiful. 

in  the  garden.  Jjeu'te,  to-day. 

bie  SSattl,  bench.  gut,  adv.,  weZZ  (see  §  12). 

(not  boot).  ttrie? 


28.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  i.  §ter  ift  etne  53anf.  2.  8obten  @ie  etnen  ©arten 
nict)t?  3.  ®a^  33oot  ift  ftf)dn  ;  e^  ift  tudjt  ^irn  SBaffcr.  4.  9Bie 
ternten  lt)ir  ^eute?  5.  SBarum  fpielten  @ie  ^eute  nt(^t? 
6.  §atteft  bu  em  ^ult? 

(6)  1.  The  bench  was  not  in  a  garden.  2.  Why  didn't 
you  praise  the  pupil  ?  3.  Is  the  boat  in  the  water  ?  4.  A 
desk  is  in  the  garden.  5.  I  didn't  study  well  to-day  (translate, 
to-day  not  well).  6.  How  beautiful  is  the  rose  ? 

29.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.    Read  Qm  ©arten,  Easy  Reading,  6,  7. 
2.  '  Point  out  illustrations  of  the  past  of  weak  verbs  ;  of  the 
indefinite  article  ;  of  the  position  of  ntrf)t. 

(6)  1.  ©ptelten  ber  33ruber  unb  bte  Scfjroefter  fyeitte  im  ®ar* 
ten?  2,  2Sie  ternten  grife  nnb  ^o^ann  geftern?  3.  §atte 
$ar(etn93oottin2Baffer?  4.  SBarnm  lernten  gri£  nnb 


PRESENT   OF   SEHEN.  141 


fyeitte  nicfyt?      5,  §atte  ber  8el)rer  ein  ^utt  unb  etne 
6.  9Bar  e$  fyeute  fdjbn  tm  ©arten? 

(c)  1.   It  is  beautiful  to-day  in  the  garden,  isn't  it.      2.  Were 
you  playing  to-day  with  (tnit  ivith  dative)  a  boat  in  the  water  ? 
3.   No,  we  studied  at  home  ;  we  were  studying  well.       4.    The 
teacher  has  a  desk  and  a  bench  at  (in  ber)  school,  hasn't  he  ? 
5.  How  were  you  playing  yesterday  ?       6.  We  were  not  play- 
ing yesterday  ;  we  were  studying  at  home  in  the  garden. 

(d)  "  How  did  you  study  to-day  ?  " 

"  We  studied  well  ;  the  teacher  praised  us." 
"  Did  Charles  and  John  play  with  (tnit  with  dative)  a  boat  in 
the  water  ?  " 

"  No,  they  didn't  play  ;  they  studied  too  ;  they  studied  well." 
"  What  did  they  have,  a  book  and  a  pen  ?  " 
"  Yes,  and  they  had  a  desk  and  a  bench,  too." 

LESSON  V. 
Present  of  feljetu    Review. 


Das  IPctb  fiebt  ticf ;  ber  UTann  ftetjt  u>ett.  —  2>eutfdjeS  < 
Woman  sees  deep;  man  sees  far.  —  German  Proverb. 


30.  Certain  Strong  Verbs  change  the  stem  vowel  of  the  sec- 
ond and  third  persons  singular  in  the  present  indicative,  as 
in  feljett  (bu  fietyft,  er  fiefjt);  fpre^en  (bit  fortdjft,  er  ft>rtd)t). 
A  list  of  strong  verbs  will  be  found  on  pages  337  to  342. 

31.  Present  Tense  of  fefyett,  to  see. 

tdj  feljef  I  see.  ttrir  fefjettf  we  see. 

btt  fiel)ftr  thou  seest.  t^r  fc^tf  you  see. 

er,  fie,  e3  fieljt,  he,  she,  it  sees.  fie  feljett,  they  see. 

(a)   Conjugate  the  present  of  foremen  (bu  tyricf)ft)  and  finben  (bu  finbeft). 


142  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

32.  The  Possessives  meitt,  my,  betn,  thy,  feht,  his,  etc.,  are 
declined  like  ein  (§  25).     The  plural  is  regular  :  meine,  mehter, 
tnetnen,  meine,  for  all  three  genders. 

33.  Vocabulary. 

(ba$)  £>eittfdj,  German  (language).  fpre'djett,  bit  tyridjft,  to  speak. 

(baS)  (Sinu'liftl),  English  (language).  beittf  thy;  your  (singular). 

btc  $faffe,  class.  metit,  my. 

le'fen,  bit  lieft  (or  Kefeft),  cr  Heft,  fcinf  his. 

to  read.  ttic'ttig,   little,  in  the  sense  of  not 
fe'ljett,  bit  fietyft,  to  see.  much;  em  tteitig,  a  little. 

ftt'aen,  bit  fi#  (or  ftyeft),  to  sit  a'fcer,  but. 

(§16,  a).  fe^rf 


34.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  L  ©ic^ft  bu  bie  Slaffc?      2.  2Rcm  2Sater  Heft 

3.  @ein  S3ruber  fprtdjt  (Sngltfc^.      4.  SBir  fi^en  feljr  tuenig. 
5.  (Sprint  bie  fifoffe  J)eutfc^?      6.  ©ie^ft  bu  bie  9to(e? 

(6)  1.  My  class  is  reading  German.  2.  Your  (thy)  teacher 
speaks  English.  3.  Does  his  brother  read  very  little? 

4.  He  does  not  see  the  teacher.       5.    Is  she  sitting  in  the 
garden  ?       6.    How  does  he  speak  German  ? 

35.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.   Bead  ^n  bet  Slaffe,  Easy  Reading,  7-9. 

2.  Point  out  illustrations  of  the  present  and  past  of  [ein  and 
of  weak  verbs  ;  of  the  present  of  strong  verbs  ;  of  the  definite 
and  indefinite  articles  ;  of  possessives  ;  of  the  position  of  ntdjt  ; 
of  predicate  adjectives  ;  of  terms  of  address. 

(6)  1.  ©iefjt  ber  gefyrer  ben  Scpter  in  ber  Staffe?  2.  gieft 
metn  S3ater  £)eutfd)  unb  (gtiflHfdj?  3.  @prid)ft  bu  in  ber 
Staffe  IDeutfd)?  4.  SBo  fifet  bein  Sruber,  unb  tDa^  Heft  er? 


REVIEW.  143 

5.    ©iefjt    er   feme    ©rfjtoefter?      6,    SBarum  ftmdjt  er  fefjr 
toentg  £}entfd)? 

(c)  1.   Does  his  sister  speak  German  and  English  in  the  (in 
ber)  class?       2.   Do  you  (singular)  see  your  house?       3.   My 
brother   speaks   very  little   German,   but  he   reads   English. 

4.  I  do  not  see  your  (thy)   mother;    where  is  she  sitting? 

5.  His  father  speaks  English,  but  very  little  German.      6.  My 
sister  reads  German,  but  she  does  not  speak  it  (e$). 

(d)  "  Do  you  (singular)  speak  German  in  the  class  ?  " 
"  No,  I  speak  English,  but  I  read  German  a  little." 

"  Does  your  teacher  speak  and  read  German  ?  " 
"  Yes,  he  speaks  and  reads  it  (e$)  very  well." 
"  Do  you  see  my  book  here  ?  " 

"  It  was  here  yesterday  (translate,  yesterday  here),  but  I  do 
not  see  it  to-day." 

36.  Review  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  Conjugate  in  the  present  and  past  Qtf)  fyabe  etne  $e* 
ber.  9Bo  bin  id)?  •$&)  fjriefe  tnt  ©arten.  2.  Conjugate  in 
the  present  $d)  felje  nteinen  53ruber.  8efe  tc^  ©eutfdf)?  ^c^ 
fprec^e  nid)t  fe^r  gut.  3.  Decline  ber ;  etn ;  tnein.  4.  Give 
the  rule  for  pronouns  of  address ;  for  the  position  of  ntdfjt ; 
for  translating  the  emphatic  and  progressive  forms  of  the 
English  verb. 

(6)  1*  $tf)  bin  ber  @cf)u(er,  ntrf)t  toa^r?  2.  3Ba§  ^at  ber 
?ef)rer?  3.  So  fatten  @ic  metn  33u^  ?  4.  J)er  2?ater  unb 
bte  Gutter  tt)aren  gn  £wnfe.  5.  SS3ir  f^teften  tnt  gelbe. 

6.  3Reine  ©c^tocftcr  fobt  bte  9?ofe.      7.  §attc  fein  Srnber  etn 
Soot  tnt  SBaffer?      8.  £)n  ftcfift  bte  33anl  tnt  ©arten  ntc^t. 
9.  2J?ein  33ater  tie  ft  S)entf^r  aber  er  f  priest  e$  nt(^t.      10.  28o 
fi^en  ber  (Settler  nnb  fetn  33ruber? 


144  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR.' 

(c)  1.  Have  you  my  paper  ?  2.  It  is  at  school,  isn't  it  ? 
3.  His  teacher  had  a  bench  and  a  desk.  4.  You  were  at 
school  yesterday*  weren't  you  ?  5.  They  were  playing  in  the 
water.  6.  We  studied  at  home  to-day.  •  7.  Do  you  (singular} 
see  your  book  ?  8.  His  mother  reads  German,  doesn't  she  ? 
9.  Yes,  and  she  speaks;  it  a  little.  '10.  We  do  not  speak  it 
very  well  (not  very  well,  §  26). 

LESSON  VI. 
Past  of  fdjett.    Masculine  Nouns  of  the  First  Class. 


Was  tft  bas  ?    3°*?  t>erftetje  es  ntcfyt. 
What  is  that?    I  don't  understand  it. 


37.  The  Past  Tense  of  Strong  Verbs  has  the  same  personal 
endings  as  the  present,  except  that  the  first  and  third  persons 
singular  have  no  personal  ending. 

Past  Tense  of  fefyen. 

id)  f afj,  /  saw.  ttrir  f  aijett,  we  saw. 

bit  fafyft,  thou  sawest.  iljr  faljt,  you  saw. 

er,  fie,  e3  falj,  he,  she,  it  saw.  fie  fallen,  they  saw. 

(a)  Conjugate  the  past  of  tyrerfjen  (tyradj),  finben  (fanb),  fi£ett  (fag), 
and  lefen  (lag). 

38.  Classes  of  Nouns.  —  Nouns  are  divided  into  five  classes 
according  to  the  way  they  are  declined. 

The  first  class  contains  those  which  do  not  change  in  the 
plural,  except  sometimes  to  take  umlaut. 

(a)  Umlaut  means  changed  sound  and  is  indicated  by  two  dots  over 
the  vowel.  $,  o,  and  u  are  the  only  vowels  that  can  take  umlaut.  Com- 
pare the  English  :  man,  men;  foot,  feet.  See  also  I,  c  of  the  Introduction. 


MASCULINES   OF   THE   FIRST   CLASS.  145 

39.  The  First  Class  of  Nouns  contains  only  words  of  more 
than  one  syllable.     It  includes  : 

(1)  All  masculine  and  neuter  nouns  ending  in  ?ef,  -er,  *etu 

(2)  All  diminutives  (neuter)  ending  in  ^cfjetl  or  4em. 

(3)  Neuter  nouns  with  prefix  ©e-  and  suffix  *e. 

(4)  The  two  femiiiines  2)httter  and  Jodjter. 

40.  Declension  of  a  Masculine  Noun  of  the  First  Class. 

Singular.  Plural. 

Nom.  bcr  SBruber,  the  brother.  bie  23ritber,  the  brothers. 

Gen.    be3  S3ruber3,  the  brother's.  bcr  SBritber,  the  brothers'. 

Dat.    bcm  SBruber,  (to}  the  brother.  bctt  SBritbertt,  (to)  the  brothers. 

Ace.    ben  SBruber,  the  brother.  bte  SBriiber,  the  brothers. 

(a)  Like  ber  SBritber  decline  ber  @d)iUer,  ber  £efjrer,  ber  $ater  (bie 
$ater),  ber  ©arten  (bie  ©arten),  ber  @ommer,  ber  ^Sinter.  Decline  each 
of  these  nouns  also  in  the  singular  with  etn.  See  §  25. 

41.  Vocabulary. 

bcr  $rm,  arm.  btc  SJHit^e,  cap. 

tor  $u&  foot.  ftn/bcnf  faitb,  to  find,  found. 

bie  5tuf'gaBcf   exercise  (of  the  les-  titttf  tatf  to  do,  did. 

son).  tt'Bcttr  iifcte,  ^o  exercise  (practise), 
bic  £wttb,  /iawd  exercised. 


42.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  1,    ©e^en    ©te  meinen  Wrm?      2.    3Ba^   taten  beine 
SSriiber?     3,  S)ie  ©rf)ufer  lafen  etne  Slufgabe.    4.  ganb  ber 
Setter  jeine  9J?it^e?     5.  £m  fa^ft  fetnen  gu§  unb  feme  |>atux 
6.  SBtr  fa^en  im  ©arten  unb  [^teften, 

(b)  1.    She  was  reading  an  exercise.      2.   Did  you  find  my 
cap  ?      3.    The  pupils  spoke  very  little.      4.    I  saw  his  hand, 
his  arm,  and  his  foot.      5.    What  did  the  teachers  do  to-day  ? 
6.   Did  your  (thy)  father  speak  German  ? 


146  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

43.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.   Bead  2luf  bent  @ptetylat$,  Easy  Reading,  10, 11. 
2.   Point  out  illustrations  of  the  past  tense  of  strong  verbs  ; 
of  masculine  nouns  of  the  first  class. 

(6)  1.  SBaS  fallen  ttrir  geftern?  2.  2Bo  fanb  bet  @d)itler 
feme  3Kn£e?  3.  ©afyft  bu  etnen  2lrnt,  eine  §anb,  nnb  etnert 
gufj.  4,  2Ba3  taten  meine  33ritber  fyente  ?  5.  2Bie  fafyen  @ie 
[etne  §anb  unb  [etnen  gn£,  aber  ntdjt  [etnen  2lrtn?  6.  8a[en 
@ie  ge[tern  eine  3lnfgabe  ? 

(c)  1.   He  exercised  with  (nut  with  dative)  his  arm,  his  hand, 
and  his  foot.       2.  Did  you  (singular)  find  your  cap  at  home 
(jn  §an[e)  ?      3.  Did  the  pupils  read  an  exercise  to-day  ?     4.  I 
saw  his  cap,  but  he  did  not  find  it  ([te).      5.   She  saw  my  hand 
and  my  arm,  but  not  my  foot.       6.   How  did  you  do  that  ? 

(d)  "  Were  you  at  home  yesterday  ?  " 

"  Yes,  my  brothers  and  I  were  at  home." 

"  What  were  you  doing  ?  " 

"  I  was  reading  an  exercise." 

"  And  what  did  the  brothers  do  ?     Did  they  read,  too  ?  " 

"  No,  they  played  and  exercised." 

LESSON  VII. 
Present  of  toerben.     Feminine  Nouns  of  the  First  Class. 


TOas  lange  roafyrt,  tmrb  gut.  —  2>eutfrf>e3  <Sprirf>toort. 
What  takes  long,  becomes  good.  —  German  Proverb. 


44.  Present  Tense  of  toerben,  to  become,  get. 

id)  ttierbc,  /  become,  get.  torn*  tterbcn,  we  become. 

bu  tutrft,  thou  becomest.  ttjr  tt»crbctf  you  become. 

crf  ficf  e^  ttilrb,  he,  she,  it  becomes.      fie  tticrbcn,  they  become. 


PRESENT   OF    WERDEN.  147 

45.  Declension  of  a  Feminine  Noun  of  the  First  Class. 

Singular.  Plural. 

Nom.   bie  Xodjter,  the  daughter.  bie  £orfjtcrf  the  daughters. 

Gen.     bet  Xodjter,  the  daughter's.  bet  Xfirfjter,  ^e  daughters\ 

Dat.     bet  £orf)ter,  («o)  ^e  daughter.  bCtt  Stirfjtertt,  («o)  ^e  daughters. 

Ace.     bie  Xodjter,  ^e  daughter.  bie  $i)rf)ter,  ^e  daughters. 

(a)  Note  that  feminine  nouns  keep  the  same  form  throughout  the  sin- 
gular. 2)ie  ^ot^ter  forms  the  plural  merely  by  taking  umlaut,  hence  it  is 
of  the  first  class.  Like  bie  £od)ter  decline  Me  2Jhitter,  the  only  other 
feminine  of  the  first  class. 

46.  The  Possessive   Genitive.  —  The    German   genitive,  like 
the  English  possessive,  is  used  to  denote  possession.     As  in 
English,  it  may  precede  or  follow  its  noun. 

$03  Srf)itter3  Shtrfj*     The  pupil's  book. 
$te  9fafe  bet  Sodjter,     The  rose  of  the  daughter. 

(a)  The  genitive  singular  masculine  and  neuter  of  all  nouns  except 
Class  V  ends  in  (e)§. 

47.  Vocabulary. 

bcr  2Bafb,  wood,  forest;  im  28afbef  ge'ljettf  fltn<Jf  to  go,  went. 

in  the  wood.  fitt'gett,  fftttg,  to  sing,  sang. 

fcie  £0dj'terf  pi.,  btc  Xodjter,  daugh-  tauten,  tattle,  to  dance,  danced. 

ter.  tt)eYbenf  to  become,  to  get. 

ttadj  ^)att'fef  home,  toward  home,  ntU'be,  tired. 

homeward.  fiiljl,  cool. 

48.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  i.  @s  mkb  Ifi^I  im  SBalbe.  2.  !Dtc  Jd^ter  be^  £ef)rer3 
fangen.  3.  2Berben  @te  tniibe  ?  .4*  SBtr  gtngen  nad)  §aufe. 
5.  ®ie  ©d^tocftcr  be3  @cf)U(er^  tangtc.  6.  S)ie  3lufgabe  metner 
@c^it)efter  ift  t)ter, 

(6)  1.  The  daughters'  mothers  are  getting  tired.  2.  Is  it 
getting  cool  in  the  wood?  3.  The  daughters  of  my  teacher 


148  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

went  home.       4.    The  sister  of  his  daughter  danced  and  sang. 

5.  The  summer  is  getting  warm.      6.    Did  you  see  my  sister's 
book? 

49.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.    Bead  Qm  SBdlbe,  Easy  Reading,  11,  12. 
2.   Point  out  illustrations  of  the  present  of  toerben  ;  of  femi- 
nines  of  the  first  class  ;  of  the  possessive  genitive. 

(6)  1.  2Btrb  e$  fdjfltt  tm  2Ba(be?  2.  SBerben  Me  £oci)ter  be$ 
Setters  mitbe?  3.  ©cmgen  (ie  tm  3Sa(be?  4.  ©tngen  Me 
£od)ter  be$  8e^rer3  nad)  @aufe?  5.  Jan^en  fie,  unb  toerben 
fie  milbe  ?  6.  SBirb  ber  3BaIb  fiifjl  im  (Sommer  ? 

(c)  1.    It  is  getting  cool  here  at  (in  ber)  school.       2.    The 
daughters  of  the  teacher  were  singing  in  the  wood.      3.    They 
sang,  danced,  and  went  home.      4.  Is  the  teacher  getting  tired 
in  the  wood  ?      5.    We  are  getting  tired,  and  it  is  getting  cool. 

6.  Did  the  pupils'  mothers  go  home  ? 

(d)  "  Are  the  teacher's  daughters  getting  tired  ?  " 

"No,  they  are  singing  and  dancing,  but  they  are  not  getting 
tired." 

"  Where  are  they  singing  and  playing  ?  " 

"  In  the  wood." 

"  But  it  is  getting  cool  in  the  wood,  isn't  it  ?  " 

"  Yes,  it  is  getting  cool.     They  are  going  home." 


PAST  OF    WEEDEN.  149 

LESSON  VIII. 
Past  of  toerben.    Neuter  Nouns  of  the  First  Class. 


Was  fcfyretben  Ste  ba  ?    §et($en  Ste  mtr  bas  papier  i 
What  are  you  writing  there  ?     Show  me  the  paper. 


50.  Past  Tense  of  toerben* 

irf)  ttwrbe,  /  became.  ttrir  nmrben,  we  became. 

bn  ttwrbeft,  thou  becamest.  ifyr  nmrbet,  you  became. 

er,  fie,  e$  ttwrbe,  he,  she,  it  became.      fie  towben,  they  became. 

(a)  The  other  forms  for  the  singular  of  the  past  tense  of  toerbett,  id) 
ttmrb,  bu  ttmrbft,  er  tt)arb,  are  no  longer  used;  but  pupils  may  meet  them 
in  their  reading,  especially  in  poetry. 

51.  Declension  of  a  Neuter  Noun  of  the  First  Class. 

Singular.  Plural. 

Norn.  bd3  9ttabttjettf  the  girl.  btc  9ttabrfjett,  the  girls. 

Gen.    be3  9ttabrf)ett3,  the  girVs.  be*  TObrfjCtt,  the  girls1. 

Dat.    bem  2ftabdjenf  (to)  the  girl.  ben  9ftabrf)ett,  («o)  ^e  ^iWs. 

Ace.    ba£  9Jlab(^cnf  ^e  ^'r?.  bic  TObrfjen,  ^e  ^zr?6-. 

(a)  Like  ba§  3Jidb(f)en  decline  ba§  ^Baffer,  and  ba§  ^Better,  weather. 

52.  The  Indirect  Object.  —  The  dative  is  used  to  denote  the 
indirect  object.     If  both  objects  are  nouns,  the  dative  generally 
precedes,  as  in  English. 

Sic  gafc  bcm2clcr  cin  SBudj,     She  gave  the  teacher  a  book. 
fejttejtJBoter  etncn 


Scigtc  bet  Xo^tcr  cine  Olofe*     /  showed  the  daughter  a  rose,  or  1 
showed  a  rose  to  the  daughter. 

(a)    The  dative  plural  for  all  genders  always  ends  in  (e)n. 


150  NEW   GERMAN  GRAMMAR. 

53.  Vocabulary. 

ber  $rtef,  letter.  ge'&en,  ga&,  3d  person  singular,  e* 

ber  @n^,  sentence.  gt&t,  to  #we. 

bie  ©ei'te,  joa^e;  also  side.  fdjm'fcett,  frf)rieb,  to  write. 

ba3  @to3,  #Zcm;  im  ®to3,  zw  the  itbcrfet^eit,  itfcerfe^'te,  to  translate. 

glass.  sei'gett,  seigte,  to 

ba3  9tt8b'd)ett,  bic  9Wabr^cnf  ^M.  fait, 


54.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  i.  £)a$  SBaffer  im  ®fa£  n^urbe  fait.  2. 
f^retbt  meinem  ^3ruber  einen  33rtef.  3.  ^c^  itberfe^te  bte 
@ette,  4.  ©d^reikn  ©tc  bem  9ftabd)en  einen  @a^?  5.  ^(^ 
jeigte  nteiner  ©c^Jrefter  ben  Srief,  6,  £)te  SIMb^en  itber* 
[e^ten  ben  @a^. 

(6)  1.  The  girl's  brother  gave  the  pupil  a  letter.  2.  Was 
the  water  in  the  glass  getting  cold  ?  3.  We  wrote  the  exer- 
cise. 4.  Did  you  translate  the  sentence  and  the  page? 
5.  I  showed  the  girl  a  glass.  6.  The  exercise  was  getting 
long. 

55.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  Bead  £)te  3fttib(i)en,  Easy  Reading,  13,  14. 
2.   Point  out  illustrations  of  the  past  of  tDerben  ;  of  neuters 
of  the  first  class  ;  of  the  indirect  object. 

•(&)  1.  SBurben  bte  2ftdbd)en  im  SBalbe  mitbe?  2.  ©djrteb 
ba3  2ftabc!)en  bem  8el)rer  einen  33rief?  3.  ,3etgteft  bit  bem 
SKabtfjen  beinen  @a£?  4.  Uberfe^ten  bie  3fttibd)en  bte  @eite  ? 

5.  ®ab  ber    33ruber    be§  ©c^itler^    bem    Secret    ba$    ©Ia^? 

6.  ffinrbe  e^  faft  in  ber  (Sc^nfe  ? 

(c)  1.  The  brother  of  the  girl  wrote  (to)  the  teacher  a  letter. 
2.  It  was  getting  cold,  and  the  girls  were  getting  tired. 


THE   FUTURE   TENSE.  151 

3.    The  pupil  showed  the  girl  his  brother's  letter.      4.   The 
girls  are  translating  the  page.       5.   I  wrote  the  teacher  a  sen- 
tence and  showed  the  page  to  my  brother.       6.   The  water  in 
the  glass  was  getting  warm ;  he  gave  the  glass  to  his  father. 
(d)  "  Did  the  girls  write  the  teacher  a  letter  ?  " 
"No,  they  wrote  a  sentence  and  showed   the  teacher  the 
page." 

"  Did  the  teacher  give  the  pupil  a  glass  ?  " 
"  Yes,  the  teacher  gave  the  pupil  a  glass  of  water  (ehl 
SBaffer). 

"  Was  the  water  getting  cool  ?  " 

"  The  water  was  cold,  but  it  was  getting  warm." 

LESSON   IX. 
The  Future  Tense. 


€tnen  priifftctn  roirft  bu  ftnben  tm  (Sebet.  —  SRiirfert 
Thou  wilt  find  a  touchstone  in  prayer.  —  Ruckert. 


56.  Formation  of  the  Future  Tense.  —  Used  independently, 
toerbett  means  to  become.     Used  as  an  auxiliary  (that  is,  with 
a  present  infinitive),  it  forms  the  future  tense.    All  verbs  form 
the  future  in  the  same  way :  simply  by  prefixing  the  present 
indicative  of  toerbett  to  the  present  infinitive. 

3d)  foerbe  mitbe.     /  am  getting  tired. 
$dj  tuerbe  (often,    I  shall  praise. 

57.  Future  Tense  of  foben. 

id)  tucrbc  foften,  /  shall  praise.  ttiir  tterben  fo&ett,  we  shall  praise. 

on  nrirft  {often,  thou  wilt  praise.  U|r  tterbet  (often,  you  will  praise. 

er,  fte,  e3  nrirb  (often,  he,  she,  it  fie  ttierben  (often,  they  will  praise, 
will  praise. 


152  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

Future  Tense  of  fefyetu 

idj  iuerbc  feljett,  I  shall  see.  tttr  toerben  feljett,  toe  s/ia^  see. 

bu  ttrirft  feljett,  thou  wilt  see.  iljr  tterbet  feljett,  2/0 w  wi7Z  see. 

er,  ftcf  e3  ttrirb  feljett,  he,  she,  it     ftc  foerbett  feljett,  ^ey  wtf«  see. 
will  see. 
(a)  Conjugate  in  full  the  future  of  fyabett,  feitt,  and  toerben. 

58.  Position  of  the  Infinitive.  —  The  infinitive  stands  after 
all  its  modifiers,  usually  at  the  end  of  the  sentence. 

$rfj  toerbe  belt  £eJjrer  nidjt  feljett*    I  shall  not  see  the  teacher. 

@ie  tuirfc  bcm  @c^u(cr  cin  S3ut^  gefcen*    She  will  give  the  pupil  a  book. 

59.  Nouns  of  the  Second  Class  add  ?t  to  form   the   plural. 
Masculines   take   umlaut  usually,   feminines   always,  neuters 
seldom.     This  class  contains  (1)  many  masculine,  feminine,  and 
neuter  monosyllables,  and  (2)  words  of  more  than  one  syllable 
ending  in  -tg,  nttg,  -fat,  -nt$,  and  sfuttft 

Learn  the  declension  of  bet  @d^,  bte  48(mf,  and  bd$  33oot  on 
page  343,  §  370,  a,  b,  and  c. 

(a)  In  like  manner  decline  bcr  gufe  (bte  giifte),  ber  $rm  (bie  5(rmc)f 
ber  «aU  (bie  BfiUe),  bte  ^anb  (bie  ^cinbe),  ba«  $ult  (bie  ^tilte). 

60.  Vocabulary. 

ber  23aJIf  bte  S3dttef  ball.  mor'gen,  to-morrow. 

ba§  6^JieIf  bie  6t>iele,  ^ame;  com-  grogf  large,  big. 

pare  fytefen.  l(etnr  small,  little. 

fte'tyen,  ftanb,  to  stand.  ba,  there. 

Herfte^en,  Uerftanb,  to  understand.  o'berf  or. 

61.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  i.  SBerben  ©te  ba  fptefen?  2.  (Sr  tirirb  bte  @pte(e  fter* 
fte^en.  3.  £)u  toirft  bie  SSatfe  finben.  4.  3<ft  ber  ©arten 
grof;  ober  Hein?  5.  @r  nrirb  morgen  ^ier  fte^en.  6.  £)te 
Derftanben  bte  Sptele  nicf)t 


THE   FUTURE   TENSE.  153 

(6)  1.  Where  will  they  stand  to-morrow?  2.  I  did  not 
understand  the  game.  3.  Are  the  balls  large  or  small? 

4.  He  will  stand  there  to-inorrow  (translate,  to-morrow  there). 

5.  Will  the  girls  play  the  games  ?       6.  The  pupils  will  under- 
stand the  sentences. 

62.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.   Bead  33or  ber  @<i)Ufe,  Easy  Reading,  15,  16, 
2.   Point  out  illustrations  of  the  future  tense  ;  of  the  position 
of  the  infinitive ;  of  the  second  class  of  nouns. 

(&)  1.  2Bo  toerben  bte  Sritber  bte  33atfe  finben?  2.  3Ba3 
toerben  bte  3ftabrf)en  ntorgen  lefen  unb  fcfjretben?  3.  SBirb  bet 
©emitter  ba3  @ptet  fcerftefyen?  4.  SBotoerben  bte  Softer  tnet^ 
tte^  8el)rer3  tnorgen  fte^en?  5.  SBerben  bte  33at(e  gro^  ober 
flein  fetn?  6.  SBtrb  e^  morgen  irarm  ober  fitljl  iuerben? 

(c)  1.  Will  he  stand  here  or  there  to-morrow  (translate,  to- 
morrow here  or  there)?  2.  My  hands  are  large,  but  my  feet 
are  small.  3.  Will  she  understand  the  game,  or  will  she  go 
home  ?  4.  My  father  is  big,  but  my  sister  is  little.  5.  She 
will  get  big,  won't  she  ?  6.  You  will  find  the  balls  for  (fitr 
with  accusative)  the  game  there. 

(c?)  "  Shall  you  stand  there  to-morrow  (to-morrow  there)  ?  " 
"Yes,  I  shall  stand  there  to-morrow.    I  shall  see  the  game." 
"  Do  you  understand  the  game  ?  " 
"Xo,  but  I  shall  understand  it  (eS)." 

"  Will  they  play  with  (mtt  with  dative)  a  ball  ?  Will  the  ball 
be  large  or  small  ?  " 

"  They  will  play  with  a  ball,  and  it  (er)  will  be  very  small/' 


154  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

LESSON    X. 

Review. 


libnng  mactyt  ben  ITTetfter. — 2>eutf$eg  ( 

Practice  makes  perfect  (literally,  the  master).  —  German  Proverb. 


63.  The  Use  of  the  Present  for  the  Future.  —  As  in  English, 
German  often  uses  the  present  for  the  future,  when  no  misun- 
derstanding can  arise.     This  occurs  usually  when  the  sentence 
contains  an  adverbial  expression  referring  to  the  future. 

They  will  play.    <Sie  foerben  ftrideiu 

To-morrow  they  (will)  play  ball.     Sftorgett  f  pie  (en  fie  23aU» 

We  shall  study  German.    293ir  toerben  ^entfrf)  lernen* 

We  (shall)  study  German  next  year.    293ir  lenten  nadjfteS  Saljr  $>eutfdj. 

64.  Vocabulary. 

geniig',  enough.  fo,  so. 

f  rfjmer,  hard,  difficult.  ttiei'ter,  further  ;   go  on  ;   nnb  fo 

bfinnf  then  ;  next.  letter,  and  so  forth. 

je^t,  now.  tt)ie  fdja'be  !  what  a  shame  I  that's 

ttf  fast,  quickly.  too  bad  ! 


65.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.    Read  £)a$  ©piet,  Easy  Reading,  16,  17. 

2.  Point  out  illustrations  of  the  use  of  the  present  for  the 
future  ;  of  the  present,  past,  and  future  tenses  ;  of  the  posses- 
sive genitive  ;  of  the  indirect  'object. 

(b)  l.  SBerben  Me  ©djiiter  ba$  Spiel  jefet  ftrielett?      2.  9Bie 
frfjabe!    9Ba3  tDerben  fie  bcmn  tun?      3.  9Berben  fie  fd^nett  ge^ 
^en?       4.    'Die  @a£e  finb  fo  ft^trer!    3=ft  ba$  nid)t  genug? 


REVIEW.  155 


5.  2Btrb  ber  ?el)rer  bcmtt  lefen?     6.  3ft  ber  ®<x£  fdjluer  genug, 
ober  fterben  bie  Scfjiiler  je^t  fcfynett  lefen? 

(c)  1.   That  is  so  hard  !     Isn't  it  enough  ?       2.  He  will  read 
now,  but  not  so  fast.        3.  Now  go  on,  fast!       4.   What  a 
shame  !     What  did  they  do  then  ?       5.    The   exercise   is   so 
hard  ;  that  will  be  enough.      6.  Now  ;  go  on  ;  fast  ;  so  ;  enough  ! 

(d)  "  I  don't  understand  the  sentences." 

"  That's  too  bad  !     We  shall  read  then  (then  read)." 
"The  sentences  are  so  hard.     Why  do  we  read  them  (fie)?  " 
"  No,  they  are  not  hard  enough  !     Go  on,  fast  !  " 
"  I  shall  read  a  sentence  now,  but  I  do  not  understand." 
"  What  a  shame  !    Is  the  book  so  hard  ?    That  will  be  enough 
then  (then  enough  be)." 

66.  Review  Questions. 

(a)  1.  Make  an  outline  table  of  the  present,  past,  and  future 
tenses  of  fyaben,  fein,  toerben,  loben,  and  feljen.      2.  Note  that 
the  verb  forms  of  the  first  and  third  persons  plural  and  the 
second  person  for  formal  address  are  always  alike.    In  the  past 
the  first  and  third  persons  singular  are  also  alike.     The  second 
person  singular  always  ends  in  *\i  ;   the  second  person  plural 
always  in  *t,  except  in  the  case  of  fein,  which  has  feib. 

(b)  1.   How  do  the  personal  endings  of  the  past  differ  from 
those  of  the  present  in  weak  verbs  ?  in  strong  verbs  ?        2.  Do 
strong  verbs  always  have  the  same  root  vowel  in  the  present  ? 
3.   Do  weak  verbs  ?        4.    How  can  you  distinguish  the  two 
uses  of  toerben? 

(c)  1.    In  what  letter  does  the  dative  plural  always  end? 
2.    How  do  feminine  nouns  differ  from  masculine  nouns  in  the 
singular  ?      3.  How  is  the  indirect  obj  ect  expressed  in  German  ? 


156  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

(d)  1.  What  endings  are  included  in  the  first  class  of  nouns  ? 
the  second  class?  2.  What  pronoun  would  you  use  in 
speaking  to  your  mother?  your  brother?  your  dog?  your 
teacher  ?  a  good  friend  among  your  classmates  ?  several  of 
your  classmates  ?  3.  Give  two  original  sentences  illustrating 
the  use  of  the  present  for  the  future. 

67.  Review  Exercise. 

(a)  i.  SBerben  ®te  mit  3lrmen  unb  §ixnben  unb  gitpen 
iibett?  2.  SBerben  bte  2ftabcf)en  morgen  ntitbe  toerben? 
3.  Xanjen  bte  Sodjter  be$  8el)rer3,  ober  frfjret&en  fie  bte 
@a£e?  4,  ©tbt  bte  ©djtoefter  be$  ©emitters  ntetner  Jotter 
etn  ®Ia3?  5.  SBerben  bie  ®atte  groft  ober  ftetn  fetn? 
6.  3eKjte  tnetn  23ater  metner  9J?utter  metnen  53rtef? 

(6)  1.  We  play  ball  to-morrow  (to-morrow  ball).  2.  The 
girls  will  stand  there  and  play  a  game.  3.  You  will  write 
my  father  a  letter.  4.  I  did  not  understand  the  sentences, 
but  I  showed  them  (fie)  to  the  teacher.  5.  They  sang  and 
danced,  but  they  did  not  understand  the  game.  6.  My 
mother  will  give  my  sister  a  rose. 

(c)  At  School.  —  The  pupils  were  in  the  school.  They  were 
studying  or  writing  the  sentences.  They  showed  the  teacher 
the  sentences.  The  teacher  will  praise  the  sentences  of  the 
pupils.  The  girls  were  standing  in  front  of  (Dor  ivith  dative) 
the  school.  They  were  not  studying.  They  were  singing  and 
dancing  and  playing  games.  They  got  tired  and  went  (to) 
home.  The  teacher  will  not  praise  the  girls  to-morrow.  What 
a  shame ! 


THE   PERFECT   TENSE.  157 

LESSON  XI. 
Perfect  Tense.    Nouns  of  the  Third  Class. 

Was  fyaben  Ste  gefagt?    3<i?  fyabe  Ste  ntcfyt  getjort. 
What  did  you  say  ?    I  did  not  hear  you. 


68.  Formation  of  the  Perfect  Tense.  —  The  perfect  tense  is 
formed,  as  in  English,  by  prefixing  the  present  tense  of  Ijaben, 
to  have,  to  the  past  participle. 

Perfect  Tense  of  (oben. 

id)  Ija&e  gelobt,  /  (have)  praised.  tmr  (jafcen  gclobt,  we  (have)  praised. 

bit  Ijaft  gdoftt,  thou  (hast)  praised.  \fyv  Ijafct  gefabt,  you  (have)  praised. 

er,  fie,  e3  Ijat  gdobt,   he,  she,  it  fie  Ijafcen  ge(obtf  they  (have)  praised. 
(has)  praised. 

(a)  In  like  manner  conjugate  id)  fjabe  e§  gefefjen,  ic^  ^abe  e$  get)abt,  ic^ 
t)abe  ntd)t  gefprorf)en,  id)  ^abe  (Sic  tierftanben. 


69.  The  Principal  Parts  of  a  German  verb  are,  as  in  English, 
the  present  infinitive,  past,  and  past  participle:  fcitl/^par,  getoe- 
fen  ;   Ijaben,  fyatte,  ge^abt  ;  (oben,  fobter  getobt  ;   fel^enr  faf), 
gefe^en. 

The  weak  past  participle  always  ends  in  *(e)t,  the  strong  in 
Ke)tU  Verbs  take  the  prefix  ge-  in  the  past  participle,  if 
they  are  accented  on  the  first  syllable. 

(a)  From  the  list  in  §  369  learn  the  principal  parts  of  finben,  geben, 
geljen,  fefen,  fd)reibett,  fefyett,  fein,  fttjett,  fingcn,  fprec^en,  fte^en,  tun,  tter* 
fte^en,  tnerben. 

70.  Position  of  Participle.  —  The  past   participle,   like   the 
infinitive  (§  58),  stands  at  the  end  of  the  sentence. 


158  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 


ba3  $«<*)  nie^t  gefwtbctu    I  have  not  found  the  book. 
£aft  bit  bem  Setyrer  cine  Ofofe  gegefcen?    #ave  yo?*  ^'ven  ^e  teacher 
a  rose  f 

71.  Use  of  Past  and  Perfect  Tenses.  —  To  report  a  single  fin- 
ished act,  especially  in  conversation  and  in  questions,  German 
uses  the  perfect  where  English  has  the  past.     The  English  did 
is  usually  a  sign  that  the  German  perfect  should  be  used. 

/  did  not  understand.     $rfj  Ijafcc  ttidjt  Dcrftanben. 
Did  you  find  the  girl  f    £aben  Sic  bag  Sftabrfjcn  gefunben? 
(a)  The  German  past  is  the  English  past  progressive,  and  is 
used  in  continued  narration. 

The  teacher  was  speaking,    $>er  Scorer  fprad). 

The  pupil  was  reading  the  book.    $>cr  (Sdjitfer  la£  bag  $wl). 

72.  Nouns  of  the  Third  Class  add  *er  to  form  the  plural  and 
take  umlaut  whenever  possible  ;  that  is,  when  the  stem  vowel 
is  a,  o,  U,  or  ait.     This  class  contains  a  large  number  of  neuter 
monosyllables  and  about  twelve  masculines,  but  no  feminines. 
Nouns  ending  in  -inm  modify  the  vowel  in  the  ending  *tUIU, 
instead  of  in  the  stem. 

Learn  the  declension  of  ber  Sftdtttt  and  bd$  33uc^  on  page  343, 
§  370,  a  and  c. 

(a)  In  like  manner  decline  ba§  ge(b  (bic  gefber),  ba$  $inb  (bie  $inber), 
ba«  §ait8  (bie  §fiufer),  ba§  @fa3  (bic  ©Icifer),  ber  SSalb  (bie  28atber). 

(6)  From  now  on  the  class  of  each  noun  will  be  indicated  in  the 
vocabularies  .by  a  Roman  numeral. 

73.  Vocabulary. 
ber  9Jiftimf  bic  banner  III,  man.       alt,  old. 

ba£  ®ebtrf)t'f  bic  ®cbidjtc  II,  poem,  tm'mer,  always. 

ba3  ®htb,  bic  ®htber  III,  child.  trie!,  much,  a  great  deal;  pi.,  Hick 

ba3  2Bortr  bic  SBiJrtcr  III,  word.  many. 

p'ren,  reg.,  to  hear.  nod),  yet;  not^j  nit^tr  not  yet, 

ttCtt,  new.  mitf  prep,  with  dative,  with. 


THE   PERFECT   TENSE.  159 

74.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  1.  3Me  banner  fyaben  Me  $tnber  gefyort  2.  J)te  ®inber 
fyaben  fctele  ©ebtcfyte  gefernt  3.  £)te  Scanner  fjaben  nod)  ntcfyt 
mit  ben  $tnbern  gefyriett  4.  SBaren  bte  SBorter  ber  ©ebtcfyte 
nen?  o.  $cf)  f)a&e  imtner  trie!  gelefen.  6.  $tf)  fyabe  ba^ 
©ebtdE)t  norf)  ntc^t  geprt. 

(6)  1.  The  children  have  learned  many  words.  2.  Is  the 
poem  old  or  new?  3.  I  have  not  yet  Jieard  the  poems. 

4.  He  has  always  played  ball  with  the  men.       5.    Did   you 
hear  the  children  ?       6.    The  poem  is  old,  but  many  words  in 
it  (burin)  are  new. 

75.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.   Eead  Qn  ber  28albfcf)u(e,  Easy  Reading,  19,  20. 

2.  Point  out  illustrations  of  the  perfect  tense ;  of  the  posi- 
tion of  the  participle ;  of  the  uses  of  the  past  and  perfect ;  of 
nouns  of  the  third  class. 

(6)  1.  §aben  bie  banner  tnete  Stnber  gefeljen?  2.  @aben 
bte  $inber  me(e  2£tfrter  gelernt?  3.  §aben  @te  nod)  nidjt  nut 
ben  Stnbern  gefptelt?  4.  3ft  bte  9ftti£e  be$  ©rfjitter^  nen? 

5.  §aben  bte  Scanner  tmnter  fo  gut  gefungen?      6.   §at  ber 
Sefyrer  t)ie(e  ©ebtc^te  gelefen? 

(c)  1.  The  men  didn't  always  play  with  the  children. 
2.  Many  words  of  the  poem  are  new.  3.  The  man's  chil- 
dren haven't  yet  learned  the  words.  4.  The  children  of 
the  teacher  have  always  had  a  great  deal  to  say  (ju  fagen). 
5.  Didn't  you  understand  the  poem  or  the  words  ?  6.  Did 
the  pupil  with  the  cap  play  with  the  children  ? 

(cf)  "  Haven't  the  children  learned  the  poem  yet  ?  " 


160  NEW  GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

"No,  the  words  of  the  poems  were  new.  They  haven't 
learned  it  (e$)  yet." 

"  But  many  words  of  the  poems  are  always  new." 

"  Yes,  but  the  children  were  playing  with  the  men.  They 
did  not  study  (fernen)  the  words." 

"  They  have  played  a  great  deal.  The  teacher  will  not 
praise  them  (fie)." 

"  They  have  learned  many  words.  But  they  do  not  always 
study  well." 

LESSON  XII. 
Perfect  with  fein.    Weak  Nouns. 


Ste  ftnb  311  fpdt  gefommen;  cr  ift  fcfyon  gegangcn. 

You  have  come  too  late  ;  he  has  already  gone. 


76.  Use  of  f em  as  Auxiliary.  —  Some  verbs  take  f  eht  instead 
of  fyabetl  as  the  auxiliary  for  the  perfect.  They  are  (1)  intran- 
sitives  that  indicate  motion  (like  gefyen,  fommett,  etc.)  or  change 
of  condition  (like  fter&en,  to  die,  toerben,  etc.),  (2)  fein,  to  be, 
and  bletbetl,  to  remain,  and  (3)  some  impersonals  (§  301,  a). 

Perfect  Tense  of  gefyen* 

idj  Bin  gegangen,  /  have  gone,  I  mir  finfc  gegangen,  we  have  gone, 

went.  we  went. 

&u  &tft  gegangenr  thou  hast  gone.  tfjr  feib  gcgangcn,  you  have  gone. 

erf  fie,  e£  ift  gegangcn,  he,  she,  it  fie  flub  gegangenf  they  have  gone. 

has  gone. 

(a)  In  like  manner  conjugate  id)  bin  nicfyt  gefommen,  ic^  bin  ba  getoefen, 
tc^  bin  ntiibe  getrorben,  id)  bin  nad)  §anfe  gegangen. 

Note.—  Many  verbs  take  fjaben  or  fetn  as  auxiliary.  If  the  verbal 
action  is  emphasized,  fjaben  is  used  ;  if  the  destination  is  given,  use  fcin. 


PERFECT   WITH    SEIN.  161 

We  marched  all  day.    2Btr  fyaben  ben  gangen  £ag  marfdjiert. 
We  marched  into  the  city.    2Btr  ftnb  in  bie  @tabt  tnarfdjiert. 
He  rode  very  well.    (£r  fyat  fefyr  gut  gerttteiu 
He  rode  into  the  garden.    (£r  ift  in  ben  ©arten  geritten. 

Of  course  when  such  a  verb  is  used  transitively,  it  takes  fyaben. 
I  rode  my  horse.    3d)  Ijabe  ntein  $ferb  gerttten. 

77.  The  Fourth  Class  of  Nouns,  commonly  called  the  Weak 
Declension,  contains  only  masculines  and  feminines.  The  mas- 
culines form  all  cases,  singular  and  plural,  by  adding  -(e)n 
to  the  nominative  singular.  Feminines  do  not  change  in 
the  singular  ;  in  the  plural  they  add  *(e)tl.  The  fourth  class 
includes  : 

(1)  Most  masculines  ending  in  ?e  and  about  twenty  mascu- 
line monosyllables  which  used  to  end  in  ?e  (@elb,  9tor,  etc.). 

(2)  Foreign  masculines  with  the  accent  on  the  last  syllable 
((Stubenf,  ^fjotograpf)',  etc.). 

(3)  Most  feminines  of  more  than  one  syllable,  and  those  of 
one  syllable  not  in  Class  II. 

Learn  the  declension  of  ber  $ttdbe  and  bie  ^rait  on  page  343, 
§  370,  a  and  b. 

(a)  Like  bie  gran  decline  bie  Slufgabe,  bie  geber  (bie  gebern),  bie  tfoffe, 
bie  TOifee,  bie  $ojer  bie  @eite,  bie  (Sdfynte,  Me  <3cf)tt>efter  (bie 


78.  The  Imperative  in  formal  address  is  like  the  indicative 
inverted.  (For  a  full  treatment,  see  §§  243  and  -244.)  An 
exclamation  mark  usually  follows  a  command  in  German. 

Head  the  sentence,    fiefett  Sic  ben  @a^  ! 
Write  the  exercise.    <3rfjmf»ett  <Sie  bie  5(uf  gafce  ! 

(a)  German  uses  the  expression  (id))  bitte,  I  beg  (of  you),  for  the 
English  (if  you)  please. 


162  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

79.  Vocabulary. 

bcr  Shta'fce,  bc3  Shmfccn,  bic  ®na=  fcittc,  please. 

fecit  IV,  boy.  fcfcttictt,  blicb,  gcfclicfcctt  (font),  to 

bcr  (SlnePpIa^,  bic  6£iefyla^e  II,  remain,  stay. 

playground;     schoolyard;     auf  tocrlicrctt,  tocrlor,  ticrforctt  (Jjafccn), 

bcm  8picfyla^,  on  or  at  the  play-  to  lose. 

ground.  tot,  red. 

bic  S3fo'mc  IV,  flower.  fpat,  adv.,  Zate. 
bic  gfnw  IV,  woman;  wife.               .    oljnc,  prep,  with  ace.,  without. 

80.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  1.  £)ie  Snaben  ftnb  fpat  auf  bem  ®ptefy(a£  gebtteben. 
2.  @$  t(t  [pat  gett)orben.      3.  ^Bttter  geben  @ie  tneinem  -Sruber 
bte  93Iume !      4.  J)ie  grait  ift  o^ne  ben  Snaben  fpat  gebtteben. 
5.  §aben  @te  bte  S3(ume  t)er(oren?      6.  SBir  finb  auf  bem 
©ptefyla^  getDefen. 

(b)  1.   Did  you  stay  late  at  the  playground  ?       2.  Have  the 
boys  gone  home  without  the  flowers  ?       3.   Please  show  the 
boy  the  sentences.       4.    The  women  have  stayed  late.       5.    I 
have  lost  my  flowers.       6.  Please  give  the  boys  the  book. 

81.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.   Eead  £)te  $naben  mit  ben  2J?u£en,  Easy  Reading, 

21,  22. 

2.    Point  out  illustrations  of  the  use  of  fein  as  auxiliary  ;  of 
the  fourth  class  of  nouns  ;  of  the  formal  imperative. 

(&)  1.  @tnb  bte  ®naben  geftern  auf  bent  ©ptefyla^  gebHeben? 

2.  2Barum  ift  ber  finabe  fpat  in  (to)  bte  @cf)ule  gefontmen? 

3.  |)at  er  feine  9ftit£e  bertoren,  unb  ift  er  ofyne  feine  9ftit£e 
narf)  @aufe  gegangen?      4.    3 ft  e§  auf  bem  ©pielpla^  fait 
getoorben?      5.   Sitte,   bleiben  ©ie  nic^t  fo    fpat    auf    bem 


PAST  PERFECT  TENSE.  163 

la£ !     6.  <jft  ber  ®nabe  ofjne  bie  33tutnen  fefyr  fpat  nadj 
gefotntnen? 

(c)  1.   Did   the  women   stay   late   at   the   playground  (auf 
bem  ©ptetyla^)  ?       2.   My  sisters  have  gone  home ;  they  lost 
the  flowers.       3.    It  is  getting  late,  and  it  has  become  very 
cold.      4.  Have  the  boys  been  cold  without  the  caps  ?      5.  Do 
not  go  home ;  please  stay  at  the  playground.    *  6.    The  boys 
(have)  stayed  late  at  school  yesterday  without  the  teacher. 

(d)  "  Did  the  boys  stay  late  at  the  playground  yesterday  ?  " 
"  Yes,  they  were  there  without  caps,  and  it  got  very  cold." 

"  Didn't  I  see  the  women  there  ?  " 

"  Xo,  the  women  weren't  there ;  they  went  home." 

"  Did  they  lose  the  flowers,  or  didn't  they  have  the  roses  ?  " 

"  Yes,  the  women  had  roses  and  many  other  (cmbere)  flowers." 

LESSON  XIII. 
Past  Perfect  Tense.     Mixed  Declension. 


HMe  langc  ftnb  Ste  fcfyon  tjter  ? 
How  long  have  you  been  here? 


82.  Formation  of  the  Past  Perfect  Tense.  —  The  past  per- 
fect is  formed  as  in  English ;  Ijatte  or  foat  is  the  auxiliary 
used.  See  §§68  and  76. 

Conjugation  of  the  Past  Perfect  Conjugation  of  the  Past  Perfect 

with  fyatte.  with  war. 

iefy  ftattc  0e(oBtf  I  had  praised.  irfj  mar  gegangett,  I  had  gone. 

bit  fjatteft  gdofct,  thou  hadst praised,  bit  ttwrft  gegangen,  thou  hadst  gone. 

ctr  fte,  e3  Ijatte  gelofct,  he,  she,  it,  crf  ftcr  e3  tuar  gegangcn,  he,  she,  it 

had  praised.  had  gone. 


164  NEW    GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

ttrir  tjattcn  gcfo&r,  we  had  praised.  toir  ttwrcit  gcganijCtt,  we  had  gon 
tljr  i/attct  gcfofct,  I/OM  ftad  praised.  iljr  ttwrt  gcgangcn,  ?/cm  ftad  #one. 
fie  fatten  gclobt,  they  had  praised.  ftc  toarett  gegangen,  they  had  gon< 

(a)  In  like  manner  conjugate  idj  fyatte  e§  gejefyen,  id)  ftmr  ba  getoejei 
id)  fyatte  e3  gefyabt,  id)  ftmr  md)t  gefommen,  id^  fyatte  ntc^t  ge^rod)en, 

83.  German  Substitutes  for  English  Perfect  and  Past  Perfect.  - 

When  the  English  perfect  denotes  what  has  been  and  still  ii 

German  uses  the  present  with  frfjoil,  already. 

Have  you  been  here  long?    @inb  (Sic  fdjfltt  (angc  Ijter? 

How  long  have  you  studied  German  ?    9Bic  fange  (critcn  Sic  f t^on  ^)cutf t^ 

(a)  Similarly  when  the  English  past  perfect  denotes  wha 
had  been  and  still  was,  German  uses  the  past  with  fdjott. 
Had  you  been  there  long?    SBaren  Sic  frfjoit  fangc  ba? 
How  long  had  you  studied  German  ?   2Bie  langc  Icrntcn  Sic  f rf)0tt  ^cutf r^j 

Note.  —  If  the  question,  How  long  have  (had)  you  studied  Germa 
is  translated,  Sic  fange  fjaben  (fatten)  @ie  2)eutfrf)  gelernt,  it  implic 
that  you  have  (had)  stopped  studying  German  at  the  time  of  the  questioi 

84.  The  Mixed  Declension.  —  A  few  masculines  and  neutei 
are  declined  strong  in  the  singular  and  weak  in  the  plura 
Hence  they  are  said  to  belong  to  the  Mixed  Declension. 

Learn  the  declension  of  bet  @tddt  and  bd$  33ett  on  page  34^ 
§  370,  a  and  c. 

85.  Vocabulary. 

t>cr     Sittn'gc,     fccS    3itngcttr    Me  bag  g-cn'ftcr  I,  windoiv. 

3»UttgCtt  IV,  boy  (a  bit  commoner  ba3  gim'mcr  I,  room. 

than  ®na&c).  ttwr'tcn,  reg.  (^abctt),  to  wait. 

tmS  S3cttf  bc^  «cttc^f  bic  SBcttctt  ft^on,  already. 

V,  bed;  $u  S5cttr  to  bed.  toicUicr?  how  much?  ttiiclric'lc 
ba§  @n'bcf  bc3  @nbc§f  bic  @nbcn  how  many? 

V,  ewe?.  latt'gc,  adv.,  ?on^,  a  long  time. 

ba§  ftc'bcrfcctt,  bcS  ^c'bcrbcttc§f  ae^nr  ten. 

bic  Jyefocrbettcn  V,  feather-bed.  §tt>cif  «too. 


PAST   PERFECT   TENSE.  165 

86.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  i.  ?ernt  ber  ^unflc  fdjon  lange  £)eutfd)?     2.   £)a3  Sett 
be$  3um3en  *)at  jroet  Stibcn.     3.  SBtetnete  genfter  fyat  ba$ 
Dimmer?    4.  £>te  sefjn  gratten  marten  fdjon  lange.     5.  SBaren 
@te  ju  §aufe  geblteben?      6.  $d)  Ijatte  bte  3lufgabe    ntdjt 
Derftanben. 

(b)  1.    The  boy's  father  has   been  waiting  (a)  long  (time) 
at  the  playground.        2.    The  room  with  the  two  beds   had 
many  windows.      3.   We  had  studied  German  (a)  long  (time). 
4.   How  many  feather-beds   do  you  see?      5.   We  had  been 
waiting  a  long  time  and  had  got  very  tired.       6.    How  long 
had  they  studied  German  ? 

87.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.    Kead  $tn  ©aufe,  Easy  Beading,  22-24. 
2.   Point  out  illustrations  of  the  past  perfect  tense ;  of  the 
present  with  fd)on  for  the  perfect ;  of  the  mixed  declension. 

(6)  1.  SBaren  bte  3^^9e^  f^ttt  gelommen  ?  2.  SBarteten  tirir 
fdjon  lange  ?  3.  SBtetriefe  geberbetten  fatten  bte  ^ungen  auf 
(on)  bent  (gnbe  be$  33ette$  gefefyen  ?  4.  SBtetuete  genfter  Ijatte 
ntetn  ^ttnnter  ge^abt?  3^?  5*  ^e  ^an9e  towtn  ®'e  f^ott 
ba?  SBarteten  @tc  fc^on  tange?  6.  gBtetriefe  genfter  ^at  ba^ 
Dimmer  be£  ^ungen,  unb  lr)tet)iefe  geberbetten  finb  auf  bent 
(Snbe  be^  33ette3  ? 

(c)  1.   I  had  a  room  with  ten  windows  and  a  bed  with  two 
feather-beds.     2.  How  long  have  you  been  waiting  ?      3.  How 
many  windows  has  the  boy's  room  ?      4.   I  see  the  end  of  the 
bed  in  the  (tnt)  room  with  the  two  windows.       5.    Had  the 
boy's  sister  been  waiting  long  ?       6.   The  boys  had  been  wait- 
ing a  long  time  at  the  playground. 


166  NEW  GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

(d)  "  Had  the  boys  had  a  room  with  two  windows  ?  v 
"Yes,  they  had  a  room  with  two  windows  and  two  beds." 
"  How  long  had  they  had  the  room  ?  " 

"  Since  (jett  ivith  dative)  the  end  of  the  summer.     The  room, 
is  cold  in  winter." 

"  I  am  going  to  bed.     We  have  waited  here  long  enough." 
"  Yes,  it  is  getting  late." 

LESSON  XIV. 
Future  Perfect.    Gender. 


(Etne  Scfytualbe  mad?t  fetnen  Sommer.  —  2)eittfd)e3  0prtcf)h>ort 
One  swallow  doesn't  make  a  summer.  —  German  Proverb. 


88.  The  Future  Perfect  is  formed  by  combining  the  future 
of  the  auxiliary  (id)  foerbe  Ijaben,  etc.)  and  the  past  participle. 
The  infinitive  of  the  auxiliary  follows  the  past  participle. 

$rf)  toerbe  ijefo&t  Ijuftetu    I  shall  ham  praised. 
3dj  foerbe  gegangcn  feitu.    I  shall  have  gone. 

(a)  As  in  English,  the  future  perfect  is  seldom  used  in  German. 

89.  Rules  of  Gender. — There  are  no  very  helpful  rules  for 
German  gender.     Below  are  those  which  have  fewest  excep- 
tions.    These  rules  fall  into  two  classes :  those  that  determine 
the  gender  by  meaning,  and  those  that  determine  it  by  ending. 

(a)  Nouns  that  determine  the  gender  by  their  meaning :  — 

1.  Names  of  males,  days,  months,  and  seasons  are  mascu- 
line:  ber  9!ftamt,  the  man;  ber  (Sonn'tag,  Sunday;   ber  3Jiat, 
May ;  ber  ©OTtUtier,  summer. 

2.  Names  of  females  and  abstract  nouns  are  mostly  femi- 
nine:  bte  $rcm,  the  woman;  bte  greube,  joy;  Me  8tebe,  lorn. 


FUTURE  PERFECT.  GENDER.  167 

3.  Names  of  cities  or  countries  and  words  not  nouns,  but 
used  as  such,  are  usually  neuter  :  bd$  fcfyotte  ^Berlin',  beautiful 
Berlin;  bd$  treue  ©eutfdj'fattb,  loyal  Germany  ;  bd$  8eben,  life 
(leben,  to  live). 

(b)  Nouns  that  determine  the  gender  by  their  ending  :  — 

1.  Nouns  having  the  ending  nd),  4g,  -ling,  or  *er  expressing 
agency,  are  masculine.     Those  in  ?er  belong  to  Class  I,  those 
in  4d),  -tg,  or  4tng  to  Class  II:  ber  Sep'pidj,  the  carpet;  ber 
So'ttig,  the  king;  ber  S'ting'ttng,  the  young  man;  ber  Seljrer,  the 
teacher. 

2.  Nouns  having  the  ending  ^et,  -Ijett,  *fett,  4n,  'fdjdft,  or 
*ttttg,  and  most  names  of  inanimate  objects  ending  in  ?e,  are 
feminine.     These  are  all  weak  (Class  IV)  :    bte  Sftttigm,  the 
queen;  bte  §off'nwtg,  hope;  bte  ^reunb'fdjdft,  friendship;  bte 
gret'fyett,  freedom;  bte  33Iwne,  flower. 

3.  Nouns  ending  in  the  diminutive  suffixes,  -d)en  or  4ettt, 
are  neuter.     These  belong  to  Class  I  :  bd$  2JMbdf)ett,  the  girl; 
bd^  grtiufem,  the  young  lady. 

90.  Vocabulary. 

fret  O'feit,  bte  Dfen  I,  stove.  bte  £tir  IV,  door. 


ber  StuI)If  bie  (Stii^le  II,  chair.  ba3  S5i(bf  bie  23Uber  III,  picture. 

ber  ^tfc^f  bte  Xtfr^e  II,  table.  ba§  ^aljr,  bte  ^a^re  II,  year. 

bie  (S'efe  IV,  corner;  in  ber  ($rfef  intereffant^  interesting. 

in  the  corner.  bretr  three.  tlier,  four. 

91.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  l.  28tr  toerben  bd^  SUb  gefeljett  ^dben.  2.  gr  iDtrb 
bret  Qafyt  gemdrtet  ^dben.  3.  SBtetnete  Jtfclje  unb  ©tittle 
fe^en  &ie?  4.  ®te  Jur  tft  in  ber  gcfe.  5.  5Dtc  t)ter  4Bi(ber 
tDdren  feljr  tntereffdnt.  6.  SBerben  ®te  morgen  gegdngen  fein? 


168  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

(7>)  1.  Shall  you  have  seen  the  pictures  to-morrow?  2.  They 
will  have  stayed  four  years.  3.  The  table  and  the  chair  are 
in  the  corner.  4.  Do  you  see  a  door  and  a  stove?  5.  They 
will  have  gone  to-morrow.  6.  We  saw  the  three  pictures  in 
the  corner. 

92.  Exercise. 


(a)  1.    Eead  £)a$  3*mmer'  Easy  Reading,  24-26. 
2.   Point  out  two  illustrations  of  each  gender. 

(&)  1.  SBtetnete  $al)re  ttrirb  fie  getoartet  fyaben?  2, 
@te  Me  brei  @tuf)fe  unb  bte  fcter  33tlber  in  bent  ^hunter  gefetjen? 
3.  3ft  ba3  23tfb  in  ber  (Scfe  fefjr  tntereffant?  3ft  e3  triele 
.^afyre  alt?  4.  SBtetnefe  @titf)Ie,  Xtfd)er  Dfen,  Suren,  unb 
33ttber  I)at  ba^  3immerk;)  5*  ^te  ^er  ^fen  *n  ^er  ®^e  a^ 
nnb  tntereffant?  6.  §at  mein  3^^er  ^rei  2uren  unb  t)ier 


(c)  1.   He  will  have  waited  three  or  four  years.      2.    The 
chairs  and  tables  are  old,  but  they  are  not  interesting.     3.  He 
had  waited  three  or  four  years  ;  he  was  getting  tired.       4.    Is 
the  stove  in  the  corner  a  stove  without  (a)  door?      5.   How 
long  have  they  been  waiting  ?      6.    The  picture  in  the  corner 
is  three  years  old  ;  it  is  not  very  interesting. 

(d)  "  How  many  pictures  do  you  see  in  the  room  ?  " 

"  I  see  four  pictures,  and  also  two  tables,  a  chair,  and  a 
stove." 

"  Don't  you  see  the  door  in  the  corner  ?  " 

"  I  see  the  door,  but  it  (fie)  is  not  in  the  corner." 

"  The  stove  is  many  years  old,  isn't  it  ?  " 

"Yes,  but  this  (btefe$)  isn't  interesting.  I've  studied 
enough.  I'm  going  to  bed." 


REVIEW. 


169 


LESSON  XV. 
Review. 


IHan  mug  eiwas  fein,  um  etwas  311  macfyen.  —  ®oetf>e. 

One  must  be  something  in  order  to  do  (make)  something. 


93. 


Outline  of  Declensions. 


CLASS. 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

PLURAL. 

TAKE  UMLAUT. 

5t  strong 

el,  en,  cr 

Gutter, 
Sodjter 

el,  en,  cr, 
^cnr  loin 

add 
nothing 

sometimes 

1  strong 

mono- 
syllables 

mono- 
syllables 

mono- 
syllables 

add  c 

usually 

1  strong 

tuttt  and 

mono- 
syllables 

none 

turn  and 

mono- 
syllables 

add  cr 

always 

h  weak 

(e) 

(e) 

none 

tt,  Cttf  ttCtt 

never 

,h  mixed 

few 

none 

few 

ttf  Ctt 

never 

94. 


Strong  Noun  Endings. 


Singular. 

Class  II.       Class  III. 


-(e) 


-e* 

-(e) 


Plural. 
Class  I.         Class  II.        Class  III. 


"Ctt 


Note.  —  The  above  tables  are  not  meant  to  be  complete,  but  just  to 
ive  a  graphic  impression  of  the  declensions. 


170  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

95.  Perfect  Tenses. 

Present  Perfect  =  present   of  auxiliary  (fyabett  or  feitt)  -f 
past  (also  called  perfect)  participle. 

Past  Perfect  =  past  of  auxiliary  -+-  past  participle. 
Future  Perfect  =  future  of  auxiliary  -j-  past  participle. 

96.  Table  of  Cases. 

Nom.  Gen.  Dat.  Ace. 

Masc.  $>er  SSruber      be3  attainted      gati    bcm  Scorer       ben  Stuljl. 


$>ie  Xorfjter       ber  $rau  ga&    ber  Gutter       Me 

Neut.    $>a3$ittb         be$  TOumleittS  gafc    bem  TOb^en    ba 

an  dress 


97.  Infinitive  of  Purpose.  —  The  expression  to,  in  order  to, 
denoting  purpose  in  English,  is  rendered  in  German  by  uitt 
*  .  *  JU  with  the  infinitive.     A  comma  precedes  utlt,  and  the 
infinitive  comes  at  the  end. 

He  stayed  to  see  the  teacher.    (£r  Wiefc,  urn  ben  fietyrer  git  feljeiu 
We  read  in  order  to  understand.    993ir  (efctt,  itm  gtt  tierftcffCtt. 

98.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  1.  @r  blieb,  urn  511  fefen*  2.  2Bir  finb  nac^  §aufe  ge= 
•gangen,  itm  gu  f^teten»  3.  9Bir  ge^en  in  bie  ©cfjute,  urn  ju 
(ernen.  4.  @ic  ternen,  um  gut  311  fpred)en.  5.  ©tngft  bu, 
urn  bie  Slittne  ju  fe^en?  6. 


(6)  1.  We  stayed  to  see  the  boy.  2.  Do  you  go  to  school 
to  learn  ?  3.  He  has  gone  home  to  study.  4.  They  study 
in  order  to  read  well.  5.  The  boys  read  much,  in  order  to 
understand  well.  6.  She  has  stayed  at  home,  in  order  to 
read  my  book. 


REVIEW.  171 


99.  Exercise. 


(a)  1.    Read  ®art  imb  3°^annr  Easy  Reading,  26,  27. 

2.  Point  out  illustrations  of  the  perfect  and  past  perfect 
with  fyabeu  and  fern  ;  of  distinctions  between  the  past  and 
perfect  ;  of  the  imperative  ;  of  the  third  and  fourth  classes 
of  nouns  ;  of  substitutes  for  the  perfect  ;  of  the  infinitive  of 
purpose. 

(b)  1.  2Bo  mar  ^ofjamt  geftern  gebUeben?      2.  2Bie  fcmge 
tetnte  $ar(  fcljon  Sugltfd)?      3.  gerttte  er  Gmgtifd),  urn  gut  311 
Icfcn?      4.  SBo  Ijat  ^otjann  Salt  gefoielt?      5.  Saturn  Ijat 
er  bie  ©a^e  ntdjt  gef(i)riebeu?      6.   $ft  er  ju  §aufe  geblteben, 
urn  Sail  3U  fpteten? 

(c)  1.  He   has   stayed   at  home,    (in   order)    to   play   ball. 
2.   The  pupil  has  studied  German  two  years.       3.    Does  he 
study  it,  in  order  to  speak  well  ?       4.    German  is  not  hard, 
but  we  do  not   understand   it.        5.    How   many   books    has 
the    boy   (already)    read?       6.    The   girls    had    written    the 
words  and  the  sentences  very  well. 

(d)  "  Why  did  you  come  so  late  ?  " 

"  How  long  have  you  been  waiting  here  ?  " 

"  I've  been  waiting  here  a  long  time.  Didn't  you  come  to 
play  ball  ?  " 

"No,  I  came  to  see  the  game.  Aren't  the  boys  playing 
yet  ?  " 

"  Yes,  they  have  been  playing  a  long  time,  but  they  are  get-  . 
ting  tired." 

"That  is  not  very  interesting.  I'm  going  home  to  write 
my  brother  a  letter." 


172  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

100.  Review  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  Illustrate  the  difference  between  the  use  of  the  Ger- 
man past  and  perfect.  2.  Give  examples  of  the  use  of  the 
German  present  for  the  English  perfect ;  of  the  German  past 
for  the  English  past  perfect. 

(6)  1.  §aben  @te  bte  3J?anner  nnb  bte  $tnber  gefefyen,  ober 
ttmren  fie  ntdjt  ba?      2.  @tnb  bte  Snaben  auf  bem 
ofyne  2ftii£en  geblteben?      3.    28te  fange  lernen  bte 
fd^on  Seutft^?      4.   Stetnete  ^3etten  maren  in  bem  Dimmer? 

5.  @tnb  bte  Sttber  unb  ber  Stu^I  in  ber  (gcfe  ntcf)t  tntereffant? 

6.  3Bar  ber  Dfen  in  ber  (S(fe  geljn  ^a^re  att? 

(c)  1.   Did  the  children  learn  the  poems  with  many  words  ? 
2.    Stay  here  and  read  the  sentences,  please.       3.    The  boys 
had  been  waiting  a  long  time.      4.   How  many  years  have  you 
studied  German  ?      5.   Is  the  boy's  brother  three  or  four  years 
old  ?       6.    The  boys  didn't  come  home  to  study ;  they  came 
home  to  play  ball. 

(d)  At  Home.  —  The  boys  were  studying  yesterday  at  home. 
They  were  studying  German.     They  had  studied  German  two 
years  and  (they)  had  found  it  interesting.     They  studied  a  long 
time  yesterday.     They  learned  three  poems.     Many  words  in 
the  poems  were  new.     It  got  late  and  they  became  very  tired. 
Then  they  went  (went  they)  to  bed. 


PREPOSITIONS   WITH   DATIVE   OR   ACCUSATIVE. 

LESSON  XVI. 
Prepositions  with  the  Dative  or  Accusative. 


3d?  ftanb  auf  tjofyen  Bergen  unb  fatj  ins  ttefe  Cal. — i 

I  stood  on  lofty  mountains  and  looked  into  the  deep  valley.  —  Folksong. 


101.  Prepositions  with  Dative  or  Accusative.  —  The  preposi- 
tions used  with  either  dative  or  accusative  are  :  cm,  auf ,  fyitlter, 
in,  neben,  iiber,  unter,  t>or,  jttrifdjen. 

They  take  the  dative  in  answer  to  the  question  where?  in 
what  place  ?  (too  ?)  ;  the  accusative  in  answer  to  the  question 
whither?  to  or  into  what  place?  (toofjttl?). 

Sr  fa§  in  bent  ^anfe.     He  sat  in  the  house.     (2Bo  fa  ft  er?) 
Ghr  ging  in  ba3  £an3*    He  went  into  the  house.     (Sofyin  ging  er?) 
G£r  ftanb  in  bent  3twmcr»    He  stood  in  the  room.     (2Bo  ftanb  er?) 
Sir  ging  in  ba3  gamier.    He  went  into  the  room.     (28of)tn  ging  er?) 
Sr  ging  in  bent  ^iwmcr  anf  nnb  ab»    He  went  back  and  forth  in  the 
room.     (2Bo  ging  er  anf  nnb  ab?) 

(a)  Many  prepositions  may  unite  with  the  definite  article  :  am  for  an 
Oem;  im  for  in  bem;  in8  for  in  ba8;  anfg  for  auf  ba§,  etc. 

102.  Vocabulary. 

trie  ^ra^ofttton'  IV,  preposition.  font' men,  famf  gefpmmen  (fetn)f  to 

trie  Strafe  IV,  street.  come. 

&e&ran'rfjett,  geBtant^te,  geBrant^t  nen'nenf  nannte,  genannt  (^aben)f 

(§aien)f  to  use.  to  name,  call. 

[jet'ften,  ^ie^r  gefjei^en  (^aben)f  to  efma^  indecl.,  something;  some, 

be  named,    be  called;    er  Ijetftt  etttiaS  ^Sa^lier,  some  paper. 

3Wntterr  his  name  is  Miller.  rid)'rtgf  right,  correct(ly). 

anr  by,  near;  to.      aufr  on,  upon,  onto.      fjtnter,  behind. 
inf  in,  into.         ne;Benf  beside.         fi'fcerf  over,  above;  across;  about. 
Itnter,  under;  among.       t>orf  before,  in  front  of.       jttii'fdjen,  between. 


174  NEW    GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

103.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  1.  £)te  ^rityofitionen  in  ber  9lufgabe  finb  ridjtig.  2.  @8 
tt)ar  attf  einem  £ifrf)e  unter  einem  33nd)e.  3.  Qfy  tarn  ne= 
ben  meinem  SSater  nber  bie  Strafe.  4.  (Siefyft  bu  etft)a3  an  bem 
Jtfcfye  Dor  bem  genfter?  5.  (£r  lommt  jftrifcfyen  bie  §anfer  fyin= 
ter  ben  ©arten,  6.  (StttmS  ift  auf  bem  ©tnfyle  neben  bem 


(b)  1.    I  see  something  near  the  chair  beside  the  window. 
2.    Are  you  coming  across  the  street  into  the  garden  behind  the 
house?        3.    Are  the  prepositions  in  the  exercise    correct? 
4.  He  found  something  among  the  books  on  the  table.       5.  We 
came  in  front  of  the  house  between  the  flowers.        6.    He 
went  across  the  street  between  the  houses. 

104.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.   Read  £)te  ^riipofitionen,  Easy  Reading,  29,  30. 
2.   Point  out  illustrations  of  all  nine  prepositions. 

(6)  1.  Stanb  bie  gran  anf  ber  @tra£e  mit  etrt)a$  papier  nnter 
bem  3lrm?  2.  §aben  @ie  eine  3?ofe  nnter  ben  SInmen  im 
©arten  fyinter  bem  £>anfe  gefnnben?  3.  Sam  ber  3un9e  3^ 
fcfyen  bie  ©tittle  an  ben  £ifcf)  neben  bem  genfter?  4.  SBarnm 
!am  ba$  SKabc^en  iiber  bie  'Strafe,  nnb  ftmrnm  ftanb  fie  t)or  ber 
@d)nte?  5.  §aben  \mv  bie  ^rapofitionen  ricf)tig  gebrand^t? 
6.  Sitte,  nennen  <2ie  bie  ^rftpofitionen!  SBie  fyeiften  fie? 

(c)  1.    You  will  find  something  between  the  books  on  the 
chair  behind  the  stove.       2.    The  boy  came  across  the  street 
and  stood  under  the  window  in  front  of  the  house.       3.    The 
boy's  teacher  came  to  (an)  the  desk  beside  the  table.       4.   Are 
you   using   the   prepositions    correctly?        5.     His   name   is 


PERSONAL   PRONOUNS.  175 

John,  but  we  call  him  (tt)n)  Jack  (§cm$).       6.   I  saw  some-     « 
thing  under  some  paper  on  a  chair  behind  the  door  between 
the  two  rooms. 

(d)  "  Name  the  prepositions  and  use  them  (fie)  in  sentences. 
What  are  their  names  (use  fyeiften)  ?  " 

"  I  stood  on  a  chair  beside  the  table.  The  paper  is  behind 
the  desk  in  a  book.  We  came  beside  the  boy  across  the  street. 
They  came  under  the  window  between  the  two  benches  in  front 
of  the  house." 

"  Good !  You  have  used  the  prepositions  correctly.  The 
teacher  will  praise  you  (@te)." 

"  The  sentences  in  the  book  are  hard  ;  they  have  too  many 
words,  and  the  words  are  new." 

"Yes,  but  the  prepositions  are  not  hard.  You  have  used 
them  (fie)  correctly." 

LESSON  XVII. 
Personal  Pronouns.     Position  of  Objects. 


IDer  tft'ba?         3d?  bin  es.         Stub  Sic  es?         <£r  tft  es. 

Who  is  there  ?  It  is  I.  Is  it  you  ?  It  is  he. 


105.  Personal  Pronouns. 

First  Person.  Second  Person. 


N.  \&),  i.  nrir,  we. 

G.  meiiter,  of  me.  itnfer,  of  us.' 

D.  mtr,  to  me.  \m§r  to  us. 

A.  mief),  me.  m$,  us. 


bur  thou.  iljr,  Sie,  you. 

betner,  ofthee.  euer,  3^rerf  of  you. 

bit,  to  thee.  eurfj,  Sfjnen,  to  you, 

bictyf  thee.  cud),  Sic,  you. 


176  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

Third  Person. 

N.    er,  he.  fie,  she.  e3,  it.  fie,  they. 

G.   feiner,  of  him.      iljrer,  o/Aer.      f  enter,  of  it.  iijrer,  of  them. 

D.   iljm,  £o  Mm.  iljr,  to  her.          itym,  to  i«.  ifyncu,  to  them. 

A.   ifytt,  Mm.  fie,  her.  e3,  it.  fie,  them. 

106.  Agreement  of  Pronouns.  —  In  German  a  personal  pro- 
noun of  the  third  person  must  agree  with  its  antecedent  in 
gender  as  well  as  in  person  and  number. 

<$ffen  Sic  ben  gfifd)  ttirfjt;  er  ift  nidjt  gut.    Do  not  eat  the  fish ;  it  isn't  good. 
3d)  Ijafce  bie  Otofe  nidjt ;  ttio  ift  fie?    I  haven't  the  rose;  where  is  it? 
$>a  ift  ein  4>au£.    ®&  ge^brt  mir.     There  is  a  house.    It  belongs  to  me. 

107.  The  Position  of  Objects  in  German  is  just  as  in  English. 

(a)  A  personal  pronoun,  whether  the  direct  or  the  indirect 
object,  stands  right  after  the  simple  verb  or  auxiliary. 

(£r  ga&  e3  bent  fietyrer*    He  gave  it  to  the  teacher. 

<$r  J)at  tttir  einen  23rief  gefdjriebetu    He  has  written  me  a  letter. 

(b)  If  both  direct  and  indirect  objects  are  personal  pronouns, 
the  accusative  comes  first. 

3<f)  fjafie  e3  iljm  QC$etgt.    /  have  shown  it  to  him. 

(c)  If  both  objects  are  nouns,  the  indirect  object  (dative) 
usually  comes  before  the  direct  (accusative).     See  §  52. 

108.  Vocabulary. 

ber  £itt,  bie  £tt'te  II,  hat.  faljrt,  to  drive;  to  go  or  ride  (by 

ber   Sa;bCttf    bie    Saben    I,   store,          car  m  carriage). 

shop.  fau'fett,  reg.  (Jjafcett),  to  buy. 

bie  Stabt,  bie  Stab'tc  II,  city ;  in  ftf'ften,  reg.  (fja&ett),  to  cost. 

bie  @tabt,  to  town,  down  town.  (au 'fen,  fief,    gelaufen  (fein),   er 
bie  9ttarf,  pi.   stuei  9War!,   fe^§         lauft,  to  run. 

SJlarf,  etc.,  mark,  German  coin  fu'djen,    reg.    (Jjafien),    look  for, 

worth  about  a  quarter.  seek. 

faty  ren,  fu^r,  gefa^ren  (fein),  er  nitrf  only. 


PERSONAL   PRONOUNS.  177 

109.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  1.  $tf)  felje  emeu  §nt;  ft>a3  loftet  er?  2.  ©ucfjett  @tc 
bie  33fnme?  @ter  ift  fie.  3.  SBtr  fnfjren  in  bie  ©tabt;  fie 
tuar  feljr  graft.  4.  Sfteine  SDhttter  fyat  einen  8aben ;  er  ift  feljr 
f(ein.  5.  @ie  Ijat  einen  ®tnl)(  gelanft;  er  ift  fefyr  fd)8n. 
3*  -3^  fa£  auf  e™er  ®an^ ;  f^e  ftan^  im  ©cirten. 

(6)  1.  Here  is  my  hat ;  it  is  green.  2.  They  have  driven 
to  the  city ;  it  was  very  beautiful.  3.  He  has  a  ball ;  it  cost 
two  marks.  4.  I'm  looking  for  my  cap  ;  it  is  in  the  garden. 
5.  Translate  the  sentence  ;  it  is  not  hard.  6.  We  are  reading 
an  exercise ;  it  is  very  interesting. 

110.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.   Read  $n  ber  @tdbt,  Easy  Reading,  30-32. 

2.  Point  out  illustrations  of  personal  pronouns ;  of  the 
agreement  of  pronouns  in  gender  as  well  as  in  person  and 
number ;  ,of  the  three  different  positions  of  objects. 

(6)  1.  §at  bie  SJhttter  einen  §nt  in  bent  8aben  in  ber  @tabt 
gefanft?  2.  3Ba3  foftete  er?  3.  3ft  bie  3Kntter  be3  $nngen  in 
bie  ©tabt  gefafyren,  urn  ifjm  einen  §nt  jn  lanfen?  4.  Uoftete 
ber  §nt  nnr  jtoei  Sftcui?  5.  @nd)te  ber  $nn$t  ben  £mt  in 
bem  8aben  in  ber  @tabt,  ober  ^at  er  i^n  jn  §anfe  gefnnben  ? 
6*  gnfyren  @ie  ober  lief  en  @ie  in  bie  @tabt? 

(c)  1.  I  bought  a  hat  in  a  store  in  the  city,  and  it  cost  only 
three  marks.  2.  The  boy  ran  into  the  house  to  look  for  his 
hat,  but  it  was  not  there.  3.  My  brother  and  I  drove  to  town 
(in  bie  @tabt)  to  buy  a  chair  ;  it  cost  only  four  marks.  4.  She 
looked  for  the  rose  in  the  garden,  but  she  did  not  find  it. 
5.  She  gave  him  a  flower,  but  he  gave  it  to  his  sister.  6.  You 
found  a  rose  in  the  glass  ;  give  it  to  me. 


178  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

(d)  "Did  you  drive  to  town  yesterday  to  buy  a  hat  in  the 
-store?" 

"  Yes,  it  is  very  beautiful ;  I  had  been  looking  for  a  hat  a 
long  time." 

"  How  much  did  it  cost  ?  " 

"  Only  ten  marks.  The  man  in  the  store  showed  me  many 
hats,  but  I  bought  only  this  one  (Me)  en)." 

"  Please  show  it  to  me." 

"  Come  with  me,  and  I  will  show  it  to  you." 

LESSON  XVIII. 
Prepositions  with  the  Dative.     Inverted  Order. 


mit  IDetle. — 
The  more  haste,  the  less  speed  (literally,  haste  with  delay). 


111.  Prepositions  with  Dative.  —  The  commonest  prepositions 
with  the  dative  are  au$,  bet,  mit,  nadj,  feit,  Don,  511. 

bcm  £aufc,  out  of  the  house. 
ci  ttttS,  with  us,  at  our  house. 
bcr  Stafct,  from  the  city. 


112.  When  referring  to  inanimate  objects  bd(r)-  is  generally 
compounded  with  prepositions  instead  of  a  personal  pronoun. 
Compare  the  English  thereupon,  therewith. 

On  it,  out  of  it,  in  it.    $>arauf,  barau£,  fcartn. 
With  it,  beside  it,  from  it.    $amit,  fcanefceit,  babon. 

113.  Inverted   Order.  —  In   the   inverted  order   the    subject 
stands  directly  after  the  simple  verb  or  auxiliary. 

(a)  This  order  is  used,  as  in  English  (1)  in  direct  questions 


PREPOSITIONS   WITH   DATIVE.  179 

whose  subject  is  not  an  interrogative  pronoun,  and  (2)  in  com- 
mands where  the  form  with  @te  is  used. 

Do  you  speak  German  ?    Spredjctt  6ic  $eutfdj  ? 
When  will  he  come  f    2Batm  tturb  cr  fommcn  ? 
Give  me  the  book.    ®eben  <3te  nth*  fc 


(b)  The  inverted  order  is  used  in  declarative  sentences,  when 
they  are  introduced  by  some  element  other  than  the  subject. 
English  sentences  have  this  same  inversion,  when  introduced 
by  scarcely,  hardly,  no  sooner,  and  so  on. 


Now  I  am  ready.    $ttot  bin  id)  fertig* 

In  summer  it  is  beautiful.    $m  Summer  ift  e$  fdjoiu 

Pm  looking  for  a  pen,  not  for  ink.     (Sine  $eber  fucfye  id),  nidjt 

114.  Vocabulary. 

fcer  (£i'mer  I,  pail.  fteCIeit,    reg.    (^abcn),    to    stand 
t>er  JJtot'fdjer  I,  butcher.  (transitive),  put  (in  an  upright 

btc  @r^iit'5C  IV,  apron.  position). 

bte  293urftr  bic  SBiirftc  II,  sausage.  an$r  out  of,  from  (out  of). 

&ei>eu'tettf  fcefceutete,  bcbcutct  (^a=  6etr  at  the  house  (store)  of;  with. 

belt),  to  mean  (of  things).  ttfldj,  to  (of  places);  after;  accord- 
ed rjibt,  there  is,  in  a  general  sense.          ing  to. 

fo'djeit,  reg.  (Ijaben),  to  cook,  boil.  fett,  since. 

(e'jJCtt,  reg.  (^abcn)f  to  lay,  put  (in  Uonf  from;  of. 

a  reclining  position)  .  511,  at;  to  (especially  of  persons). 

115.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  i.  93et  bem  gktfcfjer  fcmbett  tt)tr  etnen  gimer  mtt  SSitrften 
bavin.  2.  @eute  gtngett  \mv  au^  bem  ®arten  nac^  bem  getbe. 
3.  ©eit  geftern  finb  tt)tr  311  §au[e  gebtteben.  4.  ©a^  Sinb 
fam  t)on  [etner  Gutter  ju  feinem  9Sater.  5.  3lM  ber  @cf)ufe 
famen  bte  ^ungen.  6.  ©eftern  ging  ber  gletf^er  nadf)  bem 
um  eine  Sdjutje  ]n  laufen. 


180  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

(6)1.  Yesterday  we  were  at  (bet)  the  butcher's.  2.  To- 
day I  went  out  of  the  school  to  the  wood.  3.  At  home 
we  had  a  pail  with  sausages  in  it.  4.  Yesterday  they  had 
not  yet  heard  of  it.  5.  He  went  from  his  house  to  buy 
sausage  at  the  butcher's.  6.  To-day  I  came  out  of  the  school 
with  my  teacher. 

116.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.    Head  grtfdje  2Burft,  Easy  Reading,  32-34. 

2.  Point  out  illustrations  of  prepositions  with  the  dative  ; 
of  the  use  of  the  compound  with  bd(r)*  for  a  pronoun;  of  the 
inverted  order. 

(6)  1.  SBaren  ttrir  geftern  bet  bem  gleifdjer  mit  ber  ©djitqe? 
2.  3Ba3  bebeutet  ,,e$  gibt"?  3.  8tef  ber  ^unge  mit  ber  3ftit£e 
Don  ber  ©djule  gu  ber  grau  mit  bem  (Stmer  mit  SBitrften  barm  ? 

4.  Segte  Me  grau  bte  SBitrfte  in  ben  Sinter  nnb  lorfjte  fie  fie  bartn? 

5.  3ft  btr  gletfcfyer  an$  bem  8aben  ge!ommenr  unb   fyat  er 
etnen  @tuf)I  mit  enter  ©c^itrje  barauf  t)or  bte  £tir  geftellt? 

6.  @aben  @te  bte  ^rtipoftttonen  geternt?    SBa^  bebeuten  fie? 

(c)  1.    At  the  butcher's  we  were  cooking  sausages  in  a  pail. 
2.   He   came   out   of   the   house  to   us,    stood  the   pail   with 
sausages  beside  us  and  laid  his  apron  on  it.       3.  Yesterday 
the  boy  ran  from  the  school  to  the  field  to  play  ball  with  the 
pupils.         4.   What    does    that    mean  ?       5.    To-morrow    the 
butcher  with  the  apron  will  lay  the  sausages  in  a  pail,  put 
the  pail  on  the   stove  and  cook  the  sausages.       6.    To-day  I 
was  at  (bet)  my  mother's,  and  I  went  out  of  the  house  and 
ran  from  the  garden  to  the  school. 

(d)  "  Were  you  at  the  butcher's  yesterday  ?  " 

"  Yes,  yesterday  I  was  at  the  butcher's.  He  gave  me  a  sau- 
sage out  of  a  pail." 


PREPOSITIONS   WITH  ACCUSATIVE.  181 

"  He  had  an  apron,  didn't  he  ?     What  did  he  do  with  it?  " 

"  He  stood  a  chair  in  front  of  the  door  and  laid  the  apron 
on  it.  That  means  fresh  (frtfdje)  sausage  to-day." 

"  And  what  did  he  do  then  ?  " 

"  Then  he  laid  four  sausages  in  a  pail,  put  the  pail  on  the 
stove,  and  gave  me  two  of  them  (bat) on)." 

LESSON  XIX. 
Prepositions  with  the  Accusative.    Possessives. 


*  (Dtjne  2Jrbeit  fetn  <5en>tnn.  — 
No  profit  without  work. 


117.  Prepositions  with  Accusative.  —  The  prepositions   used 
with  the  accusative  are  MS,  burtf),  fur,  gegen,  ofytte,  um,  ttriber. 

$iir  ba3  SHttfc,  for  the  child. 

1>ttrd)  ben  ®artett,  through  the  garden. 

118.  The  Possessive  Adjectives  are  formed  from  the  genitive 
of  the  personal  pronouns.     See  §  105. 

(id))  mew,  my.  (fie)  ttjrf  her.  (Ujr)  eiter,  your. 

(btt)  beitt,  thy.  (e3)  feitt,  its.  (Sie)  3Ijr,  your. 

(er)  feittf  his.  (wit)  unfetr  our.         (fte)  i^trf  «*e/r. 

(a)  The  possessives  and  the  negative  feitt,    not   a,   no,   are  called 
,,ein"  words,  because  they  are  declined  in  the  singular  like  cin. 

119.  Declension  of  the  Possessives. 

Singular. 

Masc.  Fern.  Neut. 

N.    mem  SBntber  meine  $<wf  mew  Sudj 

G.    metne^  SBruberd  meiner  ^Ban!  metne^ 

D.    meinem  S3ntber  meiner  S5anf  meinem 

A.    meinen  Sntber  meine  Sanf  mein 


182                             NEW  GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

Plural. 

Masc.  Fern.                            Neut. 

N.    nteine  SBritber  meitte  SBfittfe  mettte 

G.    meitter  Sritber  tncincr  battle  mettter  23itrf)er 

D.    tttcinctt  SBritbertt  mettten  23attlett  meinett  $itrf)ertt 

A.    mewe  SBritber  meitte  S3an!e  meinc  SBitrfjer 


(a)  In  like  manner  decline  bein  §itt,  feine  Xocfyter,  if)r  §au§,  eure  ®tabt, 
unfere  SBIume,  3fyr  23oot,  letn  ©artetu 

(b)  Note  that  the  endings  are  the  same  for  all  genders  in  the  plural, 
and  that  eitcr  usually  drops  its  second  e  for  euphony  when  it  has  an  end- 
ing :  etter,  eure,  euer  ;  eure§,  eurer,  enre§,  etc.    llnfer  may  do  the  same  but 
oftener  it  drops  the  first  e  :  uttfer,  unjre,  unfer  ;  unfre§,  unfrer,  itnfre^,  etc. 

120.  Agreement  of  Possessives.  —  A  possessive  adjective  must 
agree  in  stem  with,  its  antecedent  ;  in  ending,  with  its  noun. 

I  have  my  book.    %d)  Ijafce  mettt 

I  have  my  books.    $dj  Ijafce  mettte 

We  have  our  book.    2Btr  Jiaftett  uttfer 

Every  rose  has  its  thorns.    $efce  O^ofe  l|at  t^re 


121.    Use  of  fein*  —  German  uses  fein  to  express  no,  not  any, 
not  a,  unless  it  is  very  emphatic.     ?Hd)t  eitt  means  not  one. 

I  haven't  any  boat.     $&)  Ija&e  fettt  SBoot* 

He  didn't  say  a  word.     ($r  fagte  leitt  SSort* 

Not  one  word  did  he  speak.    Wifyt  etn  235ort  f^rar^  er» 


122.  Vocabulary. 

bet  9l'&etti>,  bte  3(Bettbe  II,  evening.  letttf  not  a,  not  any,  no. 

bet  8tettt,  bie  Steitte  II,  stone.  ifyf  her;  their. 

ba3  ^e(bf  bte  ^$e(ber  III,  money.  $Ijrf  your  (polite  form). 

ttta'rfjett,   reg.   (^aBen)r  to  make;  ittt'ferf  our. 

e^  ma^jt  tttd)t3f  it  makes  no  dif-  bttrdj,  through. 

ference  ;  that's  all  right.  fitr,  for. 

ne^menf    ttaljm,    genommen    (^a=  ge'gen,  toward;  against. 

ben),  et  mmmt,  to  take.  umf  around. 


PREPOSITIONS   WITH   ACCUSATIVE.  183 

123.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  1.  gaben  @ie  fein  ©etb  fitr  Qfytn  33rnber.  genommen? 
L  38ir  gingen  um  bie  ©tabt  unb  bnrd)  ben  2Ba(b.  3.  ®egen 
jlbenb  fudjte  ba3  9Kabd)en  ifyre  ©rfjitrse.  4.  £)f)ne  ifyre  gitte 
;amen  bte  ^ungen  cms  ber  ©cfyule.  5.  llnfere  ©djmefter  lief 
}egen  einen  Stein  ;  fie  fyat  ifyn  nic^t  gefe^en.  6.  Qfy  fyabe  lein 
Setb  bei  mir, 

(6)  1.  I  didn't  take  any  money  for  you.  2.  No  boy  came 
through  our  garden  around  the  house.  3.  Toward  evening  I 
ran  against  a  stone.  4.  Haven't  you  any  (have  you  no) 
money  for  me  ?  5.  Not  one  pupil  has  written  the  exercise  for 
tiis  teacher.  6.  He  came  through  the  wood  without  his  hat. 

124.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.   Eead  £)nrcf)  gelb  nnb  SBalb,  Easy  Beading,  34,  35. 

2.  Point  out  illustrations  of  the  prepositions  with  the  accu- 
sative ;  of  possessive  adjectives  and  their  agreement ;  of  the 
use  of  lein. 

(6)  1.  ©ing  ber  3ftann  gegen  9lbenb  ofyne  feinen  §ut  burcl)  ba3 
5e(b?  2.  SBarnm  nalnit  er  feinen  ©ut?  3.  got  ba$ 
ijen  fein  ®elb  fitr  ben  §ut  i^re§  23ater3  genommen?  4. 
^a^  3ftabrf)en  t^re  ©^itrje  anf  einem  Steine?  5.  §aben  @ie 
^fjren  gitt  felbft  (yourself)  gema^t?  6.  ©ing  er  gegen  2lbenb 
am  ben  ©arten,  um  fein  ©elb  £u  fu^en? 

(c)  1.    Toward  evening  we  found  our  money  beside  a  stone. 

2.  I  haven't  taken  any  money,  but  it   makes  no   difference. 

3.  Without  our  hats  we  went  around  the  field  and  through 
the   wood.       4.   Yesterday   I   made   a   cap    out   of    my  hat. 
5.    The  girl  lost  her  money  beside  a  stone,  but  toward  evening 
she  found  it.      6.  'Here  is  some  money  for  you  ;  take  it. 


184  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

(d)  "Were  you  going  through  the  wood  yesterday  with 
your  sister?  " 

"Yes,  toward  evening  we  went  around  the  garden,  across 
the  field,  and  through  the  wood." 

"  Were  you  without  your  hats  ?  " 

"  Yes.  We  did  not  take  our  hats,  but  it  made  no  difference. 
It  was  very  warm." 

"  Did  you  see  many  stones  in  the  field  ?  " 

"  No,  we  didn't  see  any  (saw  no)  stones.  The  field  was 
beautiful  and  green." 

LESSON  XX. 
Apposition.     Review. 


£?unbe,  bte  bellen,  betgen  ntcfyt.  — 

Barking  dogs  do  not  bite. 


125.  Apposition.  —  A  noun  in  apposition  with  another  has 
the  same  case. 

Nominative.    $teitt  $ater,  ber  fiefjrer,  ift  gefommetu    My  father,  the 

teacher,  has  come. 
Genitive.     $d|  lefc  ba3  Sttrf)  tttehteS  $ater£,  be3  SeljrerS,     lam  reading 

the  book  of  my  father,  the  teacher. 
Dative.    (£r  Ijat  e3  ntctncm  ^aterf  bcm  Scorer,  gegeften*    He  gave  it  to 

my  father,  the  teacher. 
Accusative.    4?aft  &tt  weittcn  2^atci*f  ben  Scorer,  gefdjen?    Have  you 

seen  my  father,  the  teacher  f 

126.  Vocabulary. 

ba3   $ol$,  bic   ^ol^Ct  III,   (fire-)  Ijo'lett,  reg.  (^abcn)f  to  go  and  get, 

wood,  as  distinguished  from  bet  fetch. 

$Balb,  forest.  fpal'tett,  reg.  except  past  part.  ge= 

ba3  Sanbr  bic  Sattbcr  III,  country;  ftwltett  (^aftcn),  to  split. 

aitf  bcm  Sattbe,  in  the  country.  tra'gen,  trug,  getragcn  (^aben),  cr 

ar'bcttcn,  reg.  (!|abett)f  to  work.  tragt,  to  carry ;  to  wear. 


APPOSITION.     REVIEW.  185 

127.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  Bead  £)ie  Sftcmen  m&  &em  €>0^e'  Easy  Reading,  35,  36. 

2.  Point  out  illustrations  of  apposition ;  of  prepositions 
with  the  dative ;  with  the  accusative ;  with  both  cases ;  of 
personal  pronouns  and  their  agreement ;  of  inverted  order ; 
of  possessive  adjectives. 

(ft)  1.  3lrbettete  ba$  SMbcfjen,  bie  ©rfjtoefter  be§  @d)Mer3? 
2.  ©poltctc  fie  ba3  §olj?  3.  Slrbetteten  @te  mit  ber  grait, 
ber  Gutter  be$  '3ftabd)en3,  aitf  t>em  8anbe?  4.  §olte  bie 
grcm  ba$  §olj  au£  bem  3BaIbe,  unb  trug  fie  e$  in  ba^  §aM? 
5.  £ragen  bie  3Kdb(^en  auf  bem  ?cmbe'  §itte  ?  6.  ©patten  fie 
ba$  §0(5,  ober  fyolen  fie  e^  nur  au§  bem  3Batbe? 

(c)  1.   Yesterday  I  worked  in  the  country  with  my  brother, 
the  teacher.       2.    We  fetched  wood  and  split  it.       3.   Then 
we  carried  it  into  the  house.       4.    The  girl  beside  the  house, 
the  daughter  of  the  woman,  isn't  splitting  any  (splits  no) 
wood.       5.    In  the  country  the  boys  work  ;  they  fetch  wood 
and  split  it.       6.    My  sister,  the  girl  with  the  apron,  isn't 
wearing  any  (wears  no)  hat. 

(d)  "  Did  you  work  yesterday  ?  " 

cf  Yes,  I  worked  with  my  brother,  the  pupil." 

"  Where  were  you  and  what  did  you  do  ?  " 

"  We  were  in  the  country.  We  fetched  wood  and  split  it. 
Then  we  carried  it  into  the  house." 

"  Didn't  you  get  tired  ?  " 

"No,  it  was  so  beautiful  in  the  country.  We  didn't  get 
tired." 

"  Did  you  wear  your  hats  ?  " 

"  No,  we  didn't  wear  any  (wore  no)  hats." 


186  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

128.  Review  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  Illustrate  the  use  of  the  dative  and  accusative  with  in, 
auf,  UUter,  and  jtirifrfjen.  2.  What  German  pronoun  is  used 
for  it  in  referring  to  the  German  for  ball,  bench,  letter,  Jlower, 
hat,  and  cap  ?  3.  How  is  it  usually  translated  after  a  prepo- 
sition? 4.  Give  and  illustrate  the  rules  for  the  inverted 
order,  the  agreement  of  the  possessive,  and  the  use  of  lein. 

(&)  1.  |)tiben  @te  metn  Surf)  unter  betn  papier  auf  bem 
£ifrf)e  t>or  bem  genfter  gefunben?  2.  $ft  ber  gteifrfjer  mit 
feiner  ©rfjitrse  sttrifdjen  bte  ©tittle  fyinter  bie  53cm!  in  feinen 
8aben  gegcmgen?  3.  $  ft  bie  aflutter  be£  $ungen  tntt  tfym  in  bie 
@tabt  gefafjren,  unt  i^m  fur  nur  t)ier  3J?arf  einen  §ut  ju  faufen? 
4.  §aben  (Sie  be^  5^if^e^  ©djuqe,  unb  toerben  @ie  fie  ifjnt 
geben?  5.  ®ing  ber  Sftann  o^ne  ®elb  au^  bem  @aufe  meine^ 
JBrubcrd,  be^  gieifrfjer^  ?  6.  Sftafjm  ba^  Stub  ben  (Stein  au$ 
bem  getbe  burcf)  ben  ©arten? 

(c)  1.  I  don't  use  the  prepositions  well ;  what  (ttrie)  are  they 
(called)  ?  Please  name  them  for  me.  2.  I  laid  my  hat 
beside  the  books  on  the  table  behind  the  door.  3.  The  boy, 
my  brother,  took  it,  and  you  will  find  it  now  on  the  bench  in 
the  garden  under  the  window.  4.  Yesterday  I  drove  to  town 
to  look  for  a  hat  in  a  store,  but  I  didn't  buy  any  (hat)  :  they 
cost  too  much.  5.  At  home  in  my  room  I  have  some  wood  ; 
I  shall  make  a  boat  out  of  it.  6.  He  didn't  have  any  hat, 
and  he  didn't  have  any  money  to  (um  .  .  .  ju)  buy  a  hat. 

(cf)  In  the  City.  —  Yesterday  my  brother,  the  teacher,  and 
I  went  to  town  to  buy  me  a  hat.  We  went  into  a  store  in  the 
city  and  saw  many  hats  there  on  the  tables.  We  went  be- 
tween the  tables  and  looked  for  a  hat  for  me,  but  we  didn't 


STRONG   DECLENSION   OF   ADJECTIVES.  187 

find  any  (hat).  Then  we  saw  a  cap ;  it  was  small  but  beauti- 
ful, and  we  bought  it.  It  cost  only  three  marks.  Then  we 
went  home  with  it.  To-morrow  I  shall  wear  it. 

LESSON  XXI. 
Strong  Declension  of  Adjectives.    Nouns  of  Measure. 


(Suten  Utorgen,  fjerr  £efyrer.    (Suten  (Tag,  metne  Ktnber. 

Good  morning,  (Mr,)  teacher.     Good  day,  (my)  children. 


129.  Strong  Declension  of  Adjectives.  —  When  not  preceded 
by  an  article,  or  some  other  word  with  distinctive  end- 
ings (§  134), 'the  adjective  must  indicate  number,  gender, 
and  case  of  the  noun.  This  is  the  Strong  Declension  of 
Adjectives. 

The  adjective  takes  the  following  endings,  akin  to  the  defi- 
nite article,  except  that  with  strong  nouns  in  the  genitive 
singular  masculine  and  neuter,  euphony  requires  ?ett  instead 
of  -e$.  Here  the  adjective  does  not  need  to  be  strong,  as  the 
noun  ending  indicates  its  number  and  case. 

Singular. 

Masc.  Fern.  Neut. 

N.  guter  9ftauu  gute  grau  gute£ 

G.  guteu  9ftamtc3  gutcr  $rau  gutcu 

D.  gutem  3Ramt(e)  flitter  $rau  gutcm  2huf)(e) 

A.  gutcn  9ftamt  gutc  $rau  gnte3  SBitrfj 

Plural. 

N.  gutc  banner  gutc  ^ratten  gute  Sitdjer 

G.  guter  Planner  gutcr  graitcn  gttter  SBurfjcr 

D.  gutett  aJlaimetn  gutcn  ^raucn  gutcn 

A.  gutc  aWauucr  gutc  §raucu  gutc 


188  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

(a)  In  like  manner  decline  junger  @rf)uler,  toarmer  2lbenb,  griitte 
fcfybtte  £od)ter,  gropes  Simmer,  ttmrme§  28affer. 

(b)  Below  are  given  the  typical  strong  endings.    Note  their  resem- 
blance to  those  of  the  definite  article. 


Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Plu. 

=er          (fret) 

=e    (bie) 

=e£         (bag) 

=e    (bie) 

=e£  (en)  (be£) 

=er  (bet) 

=eg  (en)  (beg) 

=er  (bet) 

=cm        (bent) 

*er  (be*) 

=em        (bem) 

=en  (ben) 

=cit         (ben) 

=e    (bie) 

=eg         (ba«) 

=e    (bie) 

130.  Omission  of  the  Preposition  after  Nouns  of  Measure. — 
Nouns  following  expressions  like  a  glass  of,  a  piece  of,  etc., 
are  given  in  German  without  a  preposition.    They  are  put  in 
apposition,  and  so  are  in  the  same  case  (§  125). 

A  glass  of  water,    (gin  ©Ia3  Staffer. 

A  piece  of  wood,    ©in  Stiirf  §0%* 

With  a  glass  of  warm  water.    $iit  einem  ($la3  ttwrment  Staffer » 

(a)  Masculine  and  neuter  nouns  of  measure  after  a  numeral 
usually  have  the  same  form  in  both  singular  and  plural.  Fem- 
inine s  have  the  regular  plural  form. 

Win  $\l%,  four  feet. 
SieBen  $fnnb,  seven  pounds. 
3toei  Saffen,  two  cups. 

131.  Vocabulary. 

ber  £efatf  bie  £elme  II,  helmet.  bag  Stiicf,  bie  Stiirfe  II,  piece. 

ber   Dfft3ier'f    bie    Dffisie're   II,  bentfrfj,  adj.,  German. 

officer.  8tattr  ffray. 

ber  ©olbat',   be3   @u(ba'tenf    bie  ^oi^f  inflected : 

6o(ba'ten  IV,  soldier.  high,  tall. 

bie  Uniform'  IV,  uniform.  (angf  long. 

bag  Srfjfoert,  bie   (Sdjtnerter  III,  fedjS,  six. 

sword.  ^ei 


NOUNS   OF   MEASURE.  189 

132.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  1.  J)eutfd)e  Dfftjiere  tragen  fcfjtfne  Uniformen.  2.  £)ie 
§elme  beutfdjer  ©otbaten  finb  ^od).  3.  £)ie  Offijiere  geben 
trieten  ©olbaten  (ange  ©cfytoerter.  4.  §aben  triele  ©olbaten 
graue  liniformen  unb  fyofye  §elme?  5.  3?tele  Dffijiere  finb 
fecf)3  gufc  tjorf).  6.  33itte,  geben  @ic  mir  ein  ®(a$  iDartne^ 
SBaffer  ! 

(6)  1.  German  officers  Jiave  gray  uniforms.  2.  He  gave 
me  a  piece  (of)  white  wood.  3.  German  soldiers  have  many 
officers  with  long  swords.  4.  Good  boys  read  hard  exercises 
well.  5.  The  uniforms  of  German  officers  have  tall  helmets 
and  long  swords.  6.  Is  the  soldier  six  feet  tall  ? 

133.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.   Eead  £)eutfd)e  Offijtere,  Easy  Reading,  38,  1—39,  5. 

2.  Point  out  illustrations  of  the  strong  declension  of  adjec- 
tives ;  of  the  omission  of  a  preposition  after  a  piece;  of  a 
masculine  plural  with  singular  form. 

(6)  1.  £ragen  beutfrfje  Dffijtere  graue  llntformen  nut  fjoljen 
§efmen?  2.  @inb  beutfrfje  ©olbaten  fe^§  gu£  I)orf)?  3.  §at 
ber  Officer  ein  ©titcf  toeiJ3e3  papier  in  ber  (his)  §anb? 
4.  §aben  beutfdje  ©olbaten  ft^dne  Unifornten  mit  ^o^en  §e(- 
men  unb  langen  @(^tt)ertern?  5.  §aben  @ie  bem  ^ungen 
ein  ®(a^  tDarme^  SBaffer  gegeben?  6.  @e^en  ©ie  beutfdje 
Dffijiere  mit  iDei^en  §etmen,  grauen  Uniformen  unb  fangen 


(c)  1.  German  soldiers  wear  gray  uniforms  with  high  hel- 
mets, but  they  carry  no  swords.  2.  The  officer  had  a  piece 
of  white  paper  in  his  (ber)  hand  and  was  drinking  a  glass  of 
cool  water.  3.  Good  pupils  write  long  sentences  with  many 


190  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

hard  words.       4.    German  officers  have  white  helmets  and  gray 

uniforms  with   long  swords.       5.    Please  give  the  soldier  a 

glass  of  water.       6.    Here  is  a  piece  of  paper  and  a  pen  and 

some  ink ;  I  shall  write  my  mother  a  letter. 

(d)  "  Do   German   soldiers   wear   white   helmets   and   long 

swords  ?  " 

"  Their  helmets  are  gray,  and  they  carry  no  swords." 
"  But  German  officers  carry  long  swords,  don't  they  ?  " 
"Yes,  German  officers  wear  beautiful  gray  uniforms  with 

high  helmets  and  long  swords." 

"  Have  you  seen  many  German  officers  ?  " 

"  Not  many,  but  I  have  spoken  with  two  or  three,  and  they 

were  very  interesting  men." 

LESSON  XXII. 
Weak  Declension  of  Adjectives. 


3ebcr  tft  fid?  fclbft  ber  ZTad?fte.  — 

Charity  begins  at  home  (literally,  Every  one  is  nearest  to  himself). 


134.  Weak  Declension  of  Adjectives.  —  An  adjective  is  weak 
when  used  with  bet,  or  with  btefer,  this,  jener,  that,  or  jeber, 
every.  These  are  called  ,,ber"  words,  as  they  have  endings 
like  bet*  The  number  and  case  of  the  adjective  are  shown  by 
the  strong  endings  of  the  ,,ber"  word. 

Singular. 

Masc.  Fern.  Neut. 

N    ber  gute  SPtamt  biefc  gute  gfratt  jene3  gute 

G.    fce3  gutett  9ftamte3        btcfcr  gutcn  $rau  jetted  gutcit 

D.    bem  gutcn  9Wann(e)      biefer  gutett  grau  jcncm  gittcn 

A.    ben  gitten  Wtann  bicfc  gutc  ??rau  jcnc^  gutc 


WEAK   DECLENSION   OF   ADJECTIVES.  191 

Plural. 

Masc.  Fern.  Neut. 

N    bic  gutctt  banner         biefc  gutcn  $raucit  jcitc  gutctt  Siirfjcr 

G.    ber  gutctt  banner         bicfcr  gutctt  $raueu  jcncr  gutctt  Sitter 

D.    ben  gitten  ^iaimcrn       btcfen  gntcn  $raucit  jcttcn  guten  $iidjcrtt' 

A.    bic  gitteit  banner         bicfc  gutcn  $raucit  jeite  gutcn  Mrfjer 


(a)  Decline  ber  fcfyorte  ©artert,  jene  fteifte  iSlume,  jebeg  !(eine 
(6)   Below  are  given  the  typical  weak  endings.     Notice  that  a  weak 
ending  of  an  adjective  is  preceded  by  a  strong  ending  of  another  word. 


Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Plu. 

(=er)  =c 

(.e)   =c 

(=C^)    =C 

(»e)    =cn 

(*eS)  =en 

(=cr)  =ctt 

(*e«)  =ctt 

(=cr)  =cn 

(-cm)  =cn 

(»er)  =cn 

(-cm)  =cn 

(=cn)  =cn 

(=en)  =cn 

(«e)   =c 

(=c$)  =c 

(=C)     =Ctt 

135.    Accusative  of  Definite  Time.  —  The  a-ccusative  is  gener- 
ally used  to  express  definite  time. 

Every  summer,  jcbctt  Summer  ;  this  year,  bicfc3 


136.  Vocabulary. 

bcr  Xagr  bic  £agc  II,  day.  rct'tcu,  nttr  gcrtttcn  (^aficn  or  fctnf 
berU^(an'f  bc3  U^a'ncn,  bicU^a'=          §  76,  Note),  to  ride  (horseback). 

ttClt  IV,  light  cavalryman,  uhlan.  att'bcr,  other,  in  the  sense  of  differ- 
btc  ^a^'ttC  IV,  flag.  ent,  not  more. 

bic  San^c  IV,  lance.  bic'fcr,  bicfcf  bicfc§  or  bic3,  this. 

ba§  ^Sfcrb,  bte  ^ferbc  II,  horse.  jc'bcr,  jcbc,  jcbc^f  every,  each. 

nat^ft,  next.  jcrncr,  jcucf  jcttc^  ^a«. 

137.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  1.  ^tirfjften  ©ommer  fe^en  wtr  jene  anberen  ll!)Ianen. 
2.  3te^e^  Xag  rette  it^  biefe^  fc^dne  ^3ferb.  3.  ©efjen  @te  bte 
(angen  Sanjen  ber  anberen  It^fanen,  4.  ^ft  ba%  ba^  Sud^  be^ 
nad)ften  SdjulerS?  5,  Sitte,  geben  Ste  jenem  jungen  Snaben 


192  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

biefen  ffeinen  SSalll     6.  3^er  grcme  §ut  be3  Ifeinen 
foftete  fed>«  3ftar!. 

(6)  1.  Every  beautiful  day  the  German  uhlans  ride  on  the 
green  field.  2.  Those  other  horses  of  these  German  officers 
are  white.  3.  Next  year  these  little  boys  will  go  to  school. 

4.  See  the  white  flag  of  the  German  soldier  !      5.  I  gave  those 
little  pupils  these  new  pens.      6.   Did   you  take   that  little 
boy's  gray  hat  ? 

138.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.   Read  £)entfrf)e  Offtjiere,  Easy  Reading,  39,  6—40,  9. 
2.   Point  out  illustrations  of  the  weak  declension  of  adjec- 
tives ;  of  the  accusative  of  definite  time. 

(&)  1.  ©efjen  ©te  Me  bentfdjen  Ufjtcmen  in  bem  nadjften 
33i(be?  2.  SRetten  biefe  cmberen  ©olbaten  jeben  £ag  mtt  jenen 
fdjtfnen  'pferben?  3.  §aben  Me  beutfcfyen  Ufylanen  {eben  Jag 
tntt  ben  8anjen  unb  ben  grauen  ga^nen  gerttten  ?  4.  §aben 
@ie  auf  jenem  gritnen  gelbe  bie  beutfdje  ga^ne  gefe^en? 

5.  §aben  Mefe   beutfdfien  Ul)Ianen   fcf)5ne  ^ferbe   unb  lange 
gan^en?      6.  @e!^en  @te  biefe  anberen  ©olbaten   in   jenem 
na^ften  Stlbe? 

(c)  1.  These  German  uhlans  in  that  next  picture  ride  very 
well.  2.  Next  summer  they  will  ride  in  (anf)  the  other  field 
with  those  long  lances  and  the  beautiful  flags.  3.  Every  day 
I  ride  this  beautiful  gray  horse,  but  to-morrow  I  shall  ride  that 
white  horse.  4.  In  the  next  picture  you  will  find  those  other 
soldiers.  5.  Next  summer  we  shall  play  those  new  games. 

6.  Every   winter  we   go   to   the   big  school  and  study  these 
interesting  books. 


MIXED   DECLENSION   OF  ADJECTIVES.  193 

(d)  "  Are  these  big  soldiers  on  the  beautiful  horses  the 
German  uhlans  ?  " 

"  Yes,  and  in  the  next  picture  you  see  those  other  German 
soldiers." 

"  Every  day  we  read  of  (t)0tt)  these  soldiers  with  the  long 
lances  and  the  beautiful  flags." 

"  Those  beautiful  pictures  in  this  little  book  are  very  inter- 
esting, aren't  they  ?  " 

"  Yes,  this  little  book  with  the  beautiful  pictures  is  very 
interesting.  Shall  we  use  it  next  year  ?  " 

"  No,  next  year  we  shall  use  that  hard  book." 

LESSON  XXIII. 
Mixed  Declension  of  Adjectives. 


§u  jefcem  cjanjen  tPerf  getjort  em  gan3er  HTann.  —  SRurfert. 

Every  complete  work  requires  a  complete  man. 


139.  Mixed  Declension  of  Adjectives.  —  An  adjective  is  de- 
3lined  as  on  the  next  page,  when  it  follows  the  article  ettt,  the 
legative  fettt,  no,  none,  or  any  possessive,  like  tnettt,  bent,  tf)r, 
itc.  These  are  all  declined  like  ettt,  and  are  called  ,,eitt" 
ivords.  Note  that  unfer  and  euer,  though  they  end  in  *er,  are 
,em"  words. 

In  the  nominative  singular  masculine,  and  nominative  and 
iccusative  singular  neuter,  ffettl"  words  have  no  ending.  There- 
fore a  following  adjective  must  be  strong,  in  order  to  show 
lumber  and  case.  In  all  other  instances  the  adjective  is  weak. 
Eence  the  term  Mixed  Declension,  because  the  adjective  is 
lometimes  strong,  sometimes  weak. 


194 


NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 


Singular. 

Fern. 

fcinc  anbere 
feiner  attberen  Stabt 
feiner  anbcren 
Ictttc  anberc 


Neut. 

ifjr  Ileine3  ®inb 
if)te3  lleinen 
ifjrem  fieinen$inb(e 
if)r 


Masc. 

N.  mein  nener  §n 
G.  meine3  nenen . 
D.  meinent  nenen 
A.  meinen  nenen 

Plural. 

feine  anberen  Stabte  iljre  ffeinen  SHnber 

leiner  anberen  Stabte  ifyrer  ffeinen  $inber 

leinen  anberen  <3tabten  ifjren  I leinen  ®tnbern 

feine  anberen  Stabte  iljre  Heinen  $inber 

(a)  Decline  em  alter  Sftann,  3I)r  grower  ^nabe,  metne  it)etge  Sftofe,  ur 
jere  a(te  Gutter,  fein  neiie^  53itb,  euer  atte§  §au3.     (See  §  119,  b.) 

(b)  Below  are  given  the  mixed  endings  for  ,,eitt"  words  and  adjectives 
Compare  them  with  the  tables  in  §  129,  6,  and  §  134,  b. 


N.  meine  neucn 
G.  nteiner  neuen 
D.  meincu  nenen  Bitten 
A.  metne  nenen 


Masc. 

Fem. 

(—  )    =er 

(=e)   =e 

(=e3)  =en 

(=er)  =en 

(=em)  =en 

(=er)  =en 

(=en)  =en 

(=e)    =e 

Neut. 
(-)    =e3 
(=e§)  -en 
(=em)  =en 


Plu. 

(=e)  =en 
(=er)  =en 
(=en)  ^en 
(=e)  =en 


140.    Position  of  nie.  —  97te  has  the  same  position  in  the  sen 
tence  as  ntcf)t  (§  26). 

I  never  saw  those  roses.    $d)  fade  jene  JRofen  nie  gef e^en. 
He  never  came  into  the  city.    ($r  fant  nie  in  bie  Stabt» 

141. 


ber  9iorff  bie  D^iitfe  II,  coat. 
ber  $(a^r  bie  ^la^e  II,  seo« 


Vocabulary. 

lie'genf   lag,   gelergen  (Ijafcen),  t 

;  (city)          lie.     Compare  with  legen  (reg.) 

tolay(§lU). 
bie  $lin'te  IV,  (shot)  gun.  (e^tf  last. 

befom'men,     befam'f     Befont'men     tap'fer,  brave, 
to  get,  secure.  nie,  never. 


MIXED   DECLENSION   OF   ADJECTIVES.  195 

142.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  1.  $fy  fyabe  ^fyren  fdjttmrjen  ^ocf  me  gefefyen.  2,  ®a£ 
9Jiat  belam  mem  alter  8ef)rer  einen  gnten  ^(a^.  3.  35er 
apfere  @olbat  fyat  feme  neue  gtinte.  4.  5ftacf)fte3  3fta(  befom* 
tien  toir  gnte  ^fa^e.  5.  ©em  neuer  ©nt  Uegt  auf  enter 
ijtoarjen  33anf.  6.  Unfer  alte$  §au^  fte^t  in  einem  fdfjonen 
Garten. 

(6)  1.  Next  time  I  shan't  get  a  big  gun.  2.  Your  little 
irother  didn't  get  a  good  seat.  3.  My  old  coat  lay  on  a  big 
hair.  4.  Her  black  horse  was  lying  in  (auf)  a  green  field. 
.  Your  old  father  has  got  a  new  coat.  6.  .My  little  sister 
.as  never  seen  my  gray  coat. 

143.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  Read  gin  fcfyoner  getertag,  Easy  Reading,  40, 10— 42,  2. 
2.    Point  out  illustrations  of  the  mixed  declension  with  em, 
nn,  mem,  fein,  if)r  ;  of  the  use  of  trie, 

(6)  i.  3ft  baS  em  tapferer  ©otbat  mtt  einem  fdjttwrsen  9?0(J? 
.  ©at  ber  ^nnge  einen  guten  ^)3Iafe  belommen?  3.  §aben 
5ie  $fyt  altc  gHntc  nie  fcerloren  ?  4.  ©at  ber  tfeine  ^nnge 
^te§  9D?aI  einen  tangen  @a^  gelefen?  5.  SBirb  ber  tapfere 
5ffijier  mit  bem  granen  9tocf  nnb  ber  f^marjen  glinte  ein  nene^ 
Jferb  befommen?  6.  9Bar  ba^  ein  gro§e^  gelb,  nnb  ^aben  bie 
^nngen  Ie£te3  3)ial  gnte  ^Ici^e  befommen  ? 

(c)  1.  Last  time  I  got  a  good  seat.  2.  Didn't  you  ever  (not 
ver,  nie)  see  a  black  horse  ?  3.  Your  black  coat  is  lying 
•eside  my  new  gun.  4.  A  brave  soldier  is  never  without  his 
~un.  5.  I  have  never  lain  so  long  in  my  warm  bed.  6.  Last 
ime  she  saw  the  soldiers  very  well,  but  to-day  she  didn't  get 
.  good  seat. 


196  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

(d)  "  Didn't  you  get  a  good  seat  last  time  ?  " 

"  No,  I  never  get  a  good  seat.     Last  time  I  lay  in  bed  to< 

long." 

"  I  got  a  good  seat,  and  I  saw  the  brave  soldiers  with  thei: 

black  coats  and  their  new  guns." 

"  Was  my  old  teacher  there  ?     He  rides  a  black  horse." 

"  I  didn't  see  any  black  horse.     An  old  officer  with  a  grai 

coat  was  there,  but  I  didn't  see  any  teacher." 
"  Next  time  I  shall  not  lie  in  bed  so  long." 

LESSON  XXIV. 
Adjectives  after  toeld),  fold),  etc. 


2JlIer  guten  Dtnge  finb  bret,  — 
Of  all  good  things  there  are  three. 


144.   2Ratld),  many  a,  fold),  such  a,  and  tt)e(d),  which,  may  b* 
declined  like  ,,ber"  words.    A  following  adjective  is  then  weak 


Many  an  old  book,  mandjed  alte 

On  such  a  warm  day,  an  foldjem  ttmrmen 

Which  young  boy?  SSddjer  jwtge  ^nabc  ? 

(a)  But  usually  these  words  are  indeclinable  and  do  nol 
affect  a  following  construction  at  all.  The  adjective  may  be 
strong  or  mixed.  When  indeclinable,  toe  Id)  is  exclamatory  and 
means  ivhat. 

Many  an  old  book,  mattdj  afteS  SBudj, 

maud)  cut  alte£  SBudj. 
On  such  a  warm  day,  an  fold)  marntcut  £age. 

an  fold)  cincm  luarmcn  Xage. 


ADJECTIVES   AFTER    WELCH,  8OLCH,  ETC.  197 

What  a  young  boy !  28eld)  jnttger  Ahwbc ! 

SBefrfj  cin  jnnger  ,Q  nnbc ! 
With  what  a  young  boy  I  Wit  ttield)  jungem  .Una ben  ! 

9Jiit  tueld)  cinern  jnngen  $na&en ! 

(6)  ©old),  when  used  without  an  adjective,  may  follow  cut 
or  feitl  and  is  then  inflected  according  to  the  mixed  declension. 
On  such  a  day-,  an  cittern  foldjcu  £age. 

(c)  2(11,  all,  is  usually  declined  as  a  ,,ber"  word  when  fol- 
lowed directly  by  an  adjective.  When  followed  by  a  ,,ber" 
word  or  an  ,,eitt"  word,  it  is  usually  indeclinable. 

All  good  tea,  alter  gnte  Xcc, 

Of  all  good  things,  after  gnten  $)inge. 

All  the  old  books,  all  Me  alien  Mrfjer. 

Of  all  these  bluejlowers,  all  biefer  blattcu  $huncn. 

With  all  my  little  friends,  nut  all  ntcincn  fleinen  ^rettttben. 

145.  Adverbs.  —  The  uninflected  form  of  most  adjectives  is 
used  also  as  an  adverb.    A  single  adverb  has  the  same  position 
as  nidjt  (§  26).     If  there  are  several  adverbs,  they  have  this 
order :  (1)  time,  (2)  place,  (3)  manner. 

^tt  tfift  gnt  (adj.).     You  are  good. 

$n  (crnft  gnt  (adv. ).     You  learn  well. 

$er  8a^  ift  rirfjtig  (adj.).     The  sentence  is  correct. 

^aft  bn  rit^tig  gcfd)ric6en  (adv. ).     You  wrote  that  correctly. 
ir  (crnten  ^ente  gnt*    We  studied  well  to-day. 
(£r  war  geftern  tyier.    He  was  here  yesterday. 

146.  Vocabulary. 

bcr  ^tt'fcftrf,  bic  9lttfc(irfe  II,  sight.  gattgf  adj.,  whole;  adv.,  quite,  en- 
bit  £rnypettf  pi.,  troops.  tirely. 

marfrf)tc'rcnf     tuarfdjier'te,     mat-  allf  all. 

fc^iert'   (^abcn   or   fetnr    §    76,  mandj,  many  a;  pi.,  many. 

Note),  to  march.     For  omission  fofrf),  such  a ;  such;  so. 

of  ge=,  see  §  69.  tt)eWjr  what  a,  what ;  which. 


198  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

147.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  1.  SBeld)  CM  toarmer  Jag!      2.   2Betd)e  Jrn^en  mar* 
fdjieren    fjeute?       3.    2Uf    btefe    Jrnppen    finb    ganj    tniibe. 
4.  2ftandje  jungen  (Skitter  ftnb  fjente  fyier.       5.  @o(d)  einen 
fdjiJnen  Slnbltd  fyabe  id)  nod)  nte  gefefjen.      6.   <paben  alt  bte 
Sruppen  folrfje  fd)5nen  Uniformen? 

(b)  1.   Which  troops  have    such  old    coats  ?       2.   All   the 
troops  march  the  whole  day.       3.    Many  a  young  pupil  did 
not  study  well  yesterday.       4.    I  have  never  seen  such  an  old 
green  hat.       5.   What  an  old  gray  coat !     Did  you  Wear  it  ? 
6.   Will  they  march  with  all  those  troops  ? 

148.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.   Read  @trt  fdjoner  getertag,  Easy  Reading,  42,  3-23. 

2.  Point  out  illustrations  of  the  uses  of  mcmd),  fold),  tDeld), 
and  alt  ;  of  an  adverb  with  the  form  of  an  uninflected 
adjective. 

(6)  1.  SBetd)  ein  Jag  unb  tDeldj  etn  fcfyoner  Slnblirf! 
2.  §aben  (§  76,  Note)  alt  biefe  Jruppen  ben  ganjen  Jag 
marfdjiert?  3.  @inb  (§  76,  Note)  fie  iiber  ba8- gauge  $elb 
marfdjtert?  4.  §aben  ntandje  Jrnppen  fold)  einen  fdjinten 
9lnbIt(J  getiabt?  5,  2Betd)  etn  fd)oner  $nt!  2Bo  ^aben  @te 
fol(^  einen  fdjonen  §ut  gefauft?  6.  3BeI(^e  bentfdjen  @ol- 
baten  merben  ben  gan£en  Jag  ntarfd^teren? 

(c)  1.  What  a  beautiful  day  !    I  have  never  seen  such  an  in- 
teresting picture.       2.   Many  a  young  soldier  has  (§  76,  Note) 
marched  the  whole  day.       3.    All  the  troops  will  march  the 
whole  day,  but  many  an  old  officer  will  get  tired.       4.   What 
a  beautiful   sight!      Did    you   ever    (je)    see    such   a  field? 


REVIEW.  199 

5.  Which  troops  have  (§  76,  Note)  marched  through  all  the 
streets  ?  6.  How  did  that  young  pupil  write  all  the  sen- 
tences with  such  long  words  ? 

(d)  "  What  an  interesting  sight !     See  all  the  troops  ! " 
"  Yes,  all  those  troops  have  (§  76,  Note)  marched  the  whole 
day.     They  are  quite  tired/7 

"  Do  you  see  that  handsome  (fd)ott)  officer  ?  " 
"  Which    handsome    officer  (accusative)  ?     I    see    many    a 
handsome  officer." 

"  Yes,  but  this  officer  is  marching  in  front  of  his  troops. 
I  have  never  seen  such  a  handsome  officer." 

"  Come  with  me !     I  have  seen  enough  of  (t)OTt)  your  hand- 
some young  officer  !     I'm  going  home." 

LESSON  XXV. 
Review. 


Die  2llten  $nm  Hat,  Me  3ungen  3iir  Cat.  — 

The  old  for  counsel,  the  young  for  action. 


149.  Summary  of  Adjective  Declensions. 

(a)  A  predicate  adjective  is  not  inflected. 

(&)  An  attributive  adjective  is  inflected.  It  is  inflected  weak 
when  preceded  by  a  ,,ber"  word,  mixed  when  preceded  by  an 
,,em"  word,  and  strong  when  not  preceded  by  either.  But, 
while  an  attributive  adjective  has  these  three  kinds  of  declen- 
sion, it  has  only  two  kinds  of  ending :  (1)  weak  and  (2)  strong. 

(1)  Its  endings  are  weak  when  preceded  by  a  ,,ber"  word  or 
an  inflected  form  of  an  ,,em"  word.  The  adjective,  when  weak, 
has  only  two  endings,  -e  and  *(e)tt.  It  takes  *e  in  the  nomina- 


200  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

tive  and  accusative  singular  of  all  genders  except  the  accusa- 
tive masculine ;  -(e)tl  in  all  other  cases. 

(2)  The  endings  of  an  adjective  are  strong  when  not  pre- 
ceded by  a  ,,ber"  word  or  an  inflected  form  of  an  ,,ein"  word. 
When  strong  it  takes  endings  like  the  definite  article. 

Note.  —  The  endings  of  an  adjective  in  the  Mixed  Declension  are  the 
same  as  those  in  the  Weak,  except  in  cases  where  the  ,,ein"  word  has  no 
ending  (is  not  inflected).  Then  the  strong  ending  (wanting  in  ,,ein" 
words)  is  substituted  for  the  weak  ending  in  the  adjective. 

(c)  An  adjective  used  as  a  noun  is  written  with  a  capital  to 
show  its  noun  nature,  and  declined  like  an  adjective  to  show 
its  adjective  nature. 

(£itt  9(rmer,  a  poor  man.  $>er  $Heitte,  the  little  fellow. 

$a$  <3rf)i)tte,  the  beautiful.          5ttte,  old  people. 

(c?)  To  translate  English  one  following  an  adjective,  German 
uses  simply  the  inflected  adjective,  agreeing  in  gender  with 
the  noun  implied  in  one. 

Give  me  this  look  and  that  one.    ®efcett  Sic  mir  biefe3  SBttd)  uttb  jene3 ! 
Where  is  a  pen  f    I  haven't  one.    293o  ift  eitte  gfcber?    3d)  Ijafce  fcinc. 
That's  not  my  hat;  I  bought  a  new  one.     ^a^  ift  tttCUt  ^>ttt  ttidjt;   trff 
Ijafce  einen  ncucn  gefauft, 

150.  Vocabulary. 

be*  S5aumf  bic  SSchtme  II,  tree.  ba3  23tottf  bie  flatter  III,  leaf. 

ber  $Bitfd)r  bic  SBiifrfje  II,  bush.  tt)ol)'nen,  reg.  (tyabcit),  to  reside, 
bcr  9ttcttfrf)f  be3  ^ttettfdjen,  bic  live. 

SJienftfjett  IV,  man,  in  the  sense  fccffer,  adj.  and  adv.,  better. 

of    human    being ;    pi.,    people.  Brett,  broad,  wide. 

(Compare  ber  -SDtatttt,  §  73.)  al§,  than. 

151.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  1.  £)er  9llte  Ijat  bie  flatter  gefeljetu  2.  ${)r  9tocf  ift 
alt ;  id)  ^abe  einen  nenen,  3.  £)er  alte  ift  beffer  a(^  ber  neue. 


REVIEW.  201 


4.   aftetn  bretter  §ut  tft  beffer  alS  Qfy  itemed      5. 

33ud)  tft  beffer  al%  ba$  graue.      6.  gr  fyat  em  fdjimeS  ">pferb, 

aber  trf)  fyabe  Ietne3. 

(6)  1.  That  is  a  little  bush  ;  we  have  a  big  one  in  our  gar- 
den. 2.  Your  new  boat  is  better  than  my  old  one.  3.  You 
have  a  beautiful  picture,  but  she  hasn't  one.  4.  We  live  in 
a  big  house,  but  the  teacher  lives  in  a  better  one.  5.  The 
old  pupils  learn  better  than  the  young  ones.  6.  I  live  in  a 
little  street,  but  she  lives  in  a  broad  one. 

152.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.   Eead  (Sin  f(f)oner  getertag,  Easy  Reading,  42,  24—43,6. 

2.  Point  out  illustrations  of  the  use  of  adjectives  translated 
by  English  one;  of  adjectives  used  as  nouns;  of  the  strong, 
the  weak,  and  the  mixed  declensions. 

(6)  1.  SBofynen  triete  Sftenf  d)en  am  brettett  ^5(a£e  ?  2.  @mb 
bie  bretten  Siifcfye  beffer  a(£  bie  Ketnen?  3.  §aben  btefe  fyofyen 
33tiume  beffere  93(atter  a(3  bie  Hetnen  33itfd)e?  4.  gobeti  triele 
aftenfdjen  ba3  ©ttte  unb  ba3  @(f)dne?  5.  ^n  met^em  Memett 
§aufe  tDo^nten  bie  2llten?  6.  2Bot)nten  fie  in  jenem  Hetnen 
§aufe  ^tnter  ben  fd^onen  33Ufdjen  nttt  fo(cf)  bretten  Slattern? 

(c)  1.  These  broad  trees  are  better  than  those  little  bushes 
with  the  green  leaves.  2.  Many  people  live  in  old  houses 
without  trees  or  bushes.  3.  This  leaf  is  better  than  that 
one.  4.  Many  people  praise  the  beautiful.  5.  You  have 
bought  a  new  hat  ;  where  is  your  old  one  ?  6.  No  man  lives 
in  that  little  house,  but  many  people  live  in  this  big  one. 
7.  I  have  never  seen  such  a  tall  tree. 

•    (d)  "Do  many  people  live  in  that  little  house  under  the 
broad  tree  ?  " 


202  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

"  Yes,  a  man  and  his  wife  and  four  children." 
"  Are  all  the  children  little  ?     I  don't  see  any  big  ones." 
"Yes,  they  are  all  small.     The  old  (people)  are  sitting  un- 
der the  broad  tree.     The  children  are  playing  in  the  bushes." 
"  It  is  cool  under  the  tree.     It  has  such  broad  leaves." 
"  Yes,  under  the  broad  tree  it  is  better  than  in  the  house." 

153.  Review  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  Illustrate  the  strong,  the  weak,  and  the  mixed  de- 
clension of  adjectives.  2.  Translate  :  I  have  a  glass  of  warm 
water;  with  a  piece  of  good  wood;  four  feet.  3.  Give  two 
German  examples  of  the  accusative  of  definite  time.  4.  Con- 
trast the  position  of  nte  and  never  in  two  sentences.  5.  Trans- 
late in  three  ways:  many  an  old  book;  on  such  a  warm  day. 
6.  Explain  and  illustrate  the  uses  of  atL 

(6)  1.  3ft  jener  beutfcfje  ©olbat  fecl)3  gufc  tjocf)?  2.  £ragen 
beutfdje  Offigtere  graue  Untformen  mtt  fdjonen  §elmen  unb 
tcmgen  ©cfytter  tern?  3.  §aben  @te  mem  [drones  neue$ 
me  gefefyen?  4.  2Birb  3^  Memer  SSruber  mtr  nad^fte^ 
etn  ©fa^  SSaffer  geben?  5.  9?ad)  lt)e[(^er  @tabt  reiten  jene 
beutfc^en  lll)(anen?  6.  §aben  all  biefe  2Wenfc^en  folc^  f^dne 


(c)  1.    The  old  (man)  was  carrying  a  piece  of  wood  into  his 
little  house.       2.    All  these  long  sentences  have  hard  words. 

3.  Last   summer   in    the   wood   we    saw   many   a    tall    tree. 

4.  No  other  man  has  such  a  beautiful  horse.       5.    We  shall 
never  understand   all  the   sentences.        6.    They  have   never 
(yet)  got  good  seats  ;  next  time  they  will  get  good  ones. 

(d)  With  the  Soldiers.  —  Last  summer  we  went  to  a  broad 
field  and  saw  the  German  soldiers  and  their  young  officers. 


PRESENT   OF   MODAL   AUXILIARIES.  203 

We  had  never  seen  such  tall  officers.  They  were  all  six  feet 
tall.  What  a  beautiful  sight !  They  wore  long  swords,  but 
the  soldiers  didn't  have  any.  Those  tall  officers  and  the  other 
soldiers  marched  the  whole  day  across  that  beautiful  green 
field.  I  had  never  had  such  an  interesting  sight.  Next  year 
we  are  going  to  the  field  to  (uttt)  see  them,  and  we  shall 
stay  the  whole  day. 

LESSON  XXVI. 
Present  of  Modal  Auxiliaries. 


Sed?s  IDorter  netjmen  mid?  in  2Infprud?  jeben 

3d?  foil,  id?  mug,  id?  farm,  id?  mill,  id?  barf,  id?  mag.  —  SKiicfert. 


154.    The  Modal  Auxiliaries  are  followed  by  the  present  in- 
finitive.   They  correspond  to  the  English  modals  as  follows  :  — 

Present  Infinitive.  Past.       Past  Participle. 

Miff  en,  may,  to  be  permitted;  must  (not).  bnrfte  gebnrft 

fonnen,  can,  to  be  able  to ;  may  (possibly).  funntc  gefonnt 

ntfigen,  (may) ;  to  like  (to).  mortyte  gemoefjt 

tttiiffett,  must,  to  have  to.  mufjte  flcmuftt 

fatten,  shall,  (ought),  to  be  to.  fottte  gefottt 

niotten,  will,  to  want  to ;  to  be  about  to.  ttottte 

Present  Indicative  of  Modals. 


idj  barf 

faun 

mag 

mng 

foil 

mitt 

bn  barfft 

fannft 

magft 

muftt 

fottft 

ttJtllft 

er  barf 

faun 

mag 

mufj 

foU 

JUtU 

twr  bilrfen 

fonnen 

mogen 

mitffen 

fallen 

rootten 

ifjr  bilrft 

fount 

ntiigt 

miifet 

fullt 

mottt 

fte  biirfen 

fonnen 

miigen 

miiffen 

fatten 

rotten 

204  NEW    GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

155.  Use  of  Auxiliaries.  —  (a)  The  English  will  is  translated 
in  two  ways  in  German  :  to  indicate  simple  futurity,  toerben  is 
used  ;  to  indicate  desire,  use  toollen.     Reread  §  56. 

He  will  go  to-morrow.     (£r  ttrirb  morgcn  gefjen* 
He  will  (is  about  to  or  wants  to}  go..     (£r  toitt  gefjetu 
SBerbett  (Sic  fommen  ?     Shall  you  come  (at  some  future  time}  ? 
233ottctt  @tc  lommen  ?     Will  you  come  ?   (are  you  ivilling  to,  do  you 
want  to  ?) 

(b)  English  shall  we  is  usually  tootten  iDtr.  Use  follen  Urir 
only  when  you  can  substitute  are  we  to. 

Shall  we  go  home  f    Gotten  four  natty  £aufe  getyen  ? 

Shall  we  read  now  f  (to  the  teacher).    (Soflcn  ttitr  jc^t  lefcn  ? 

Note.  — SBerben  is  used  for  future  meanings  of  shall  and  will.  ©oUen 
is  used  when  the  decision  rests  with  some  one  besides  the  subject;  ttoUen,' 
when  the  decision  rests  with  the  subject. 

156.  Vocabulary. 

be*  $rettttfcf  Me  §tcunbe  II,  friend.  Me  ^a^r'farte  IV,  ticket. 

ber  6r^(lff'nerf  Me  Sdjaffner  I,  con-  lB'fenf  reg.  (Ijafcen),  to  buy,  pur- 

ductor.  chase  (of  tickets). 

ber  3w9f  foie  3&$t  II,  train.  ru'fen,  rtef,  geritfen  (^aben)f  to 
Me  SBaljtt'ftetg,  bte  ^Ba^nfteige  II,         call,  call  out. 

(station)  platform.  UW1W  ?  interrog.,  when  9 

157.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  I.  ®er  ©djaffner  barf  rufcn,  aber  er  fatm  nicf)t.    2. 
@d)UIer  muj}  ternen,  aber  er  mill  nic^t.     3.  @te  fotten  bie 
fatten  Idfen  ;  tndgen  ®ie  nit^t  ?     4.  SBann  bilrf en  toir  auf  ben 
59a^nfteig  ge^en?     5.  SBoCcn    tuir  mit    bem    3u9e  fd^ren? 
6.  SBerben  tt)tr  bie  fc^dnen  Saume  fefyen? 

(b)  1.   May  I  buy  the  tickets,  or  will  you?      2.   He  doesn't 
want  to  do  it,  but  he  must.       3.    We  like  to  ride  in  (mit)  the 


PRESENT   OF   MODAL   AUXILIARIES.  205 

train.  4.  Shall  (toott.etl)  we  ride  in  (mit)  the  train  ?  5.  Shall 
(foil)  I  go  on  the  platform?  6.  Shall  (tflerben)  we  see  you 
to-morrow  ? 

158,  Exercise. 

(a)  1.    Read  £)ie  gtfenbdfyn,  Easy  Reading,  45,  46. 

2.  Point  out  illustrations  of  all  six  modals ;  of  iDDtten  ttrir 
for  shall  we.  Find  examples  for  contrasting  toerben  and 
tflolten* 

(b)  l.  2J?nffen  bie  jtoet  grennbe    mit    bem  3nge  *fftf)ren? 
2.  £)arf  ber  ©djaffner  oljne  eine  galjrfarte  anf  ben  33al)nftetg 
gefyen?      3.  SBann    tDolIen    tt)ir    unfere    gafjrlarten    Ibfen? 

4.  SBarum   mogen   bie    greunbe    btefe    langen    ,3u9e    ntt^t? 

5.  SBann  fott  ber  ©cfyaffner  rufen?     6.  Sann  ber  greunb  be^ 
©^affner^  auf  bem  SSa^nfteige  feine  ga^rlarten  lof en  ? 

(c)  1.   When  shall  we  buy  our  tickets  ?      2.  The  conductor's 
friend  wants  to  call  out,  but  he  can't  speak.      3.    Shall  I  buy 
my  tickets  now,  or  may  I  wait  till  (6i$)  to-morrow?       4.    The 
train  will  come ;   the  conductor  will    call   out ;   we  shall  go 
onto   the   platform.       5.   I  do  not  like  to  ride  in  (mit)  the 
train,  but  I  must  go   to  my  friends.       6.   When  may  we  go 
home,  please? 

(d)  "I  must  go  to  my  friends  in  the  city.     Will  you  go 
with  me  ?  " 

"  I  like  to  go  to  the  city,  but  I  can't  go  to-day.  May  I  go 
with  you  to-morrow  ?  " 

"  Yes,  will  you  go  to-morrow  ?  Shall  we  go  by  train  (mit 
bent  ^nge  f afyren)  ?  " 

"I  like  to  go  by  train.  Shall  I  buy  the  tickets,  or  will 
you?" 


206  NEW   GERMAN    GRAMMAR. 

"  You  must  buy  the  tickets.  I  can't  buy  them  ;  I  haven't 
money  enough." 

"  All  right  (frfjtfn) !  I  can  get  them  very  well.  See  you 
later  (2luf2Bieberfe^en)!" 

LESSON  XXVII. 
Past  and  Future  of  Modals. 


IDenn  id?  tuollte,  was  id?  follte,  fount'  id?  attes,  was  id?  tuollte. 


159.  Past  Tense  of  Modals.  —  The  Modal  Auxiliaries  are  con- 
jugated in  the  past  indicative  like  any  weak  verb. 

id)  fomtte,  I  could.  ttrir  lonnten,  we  could. 

fcn  fonnteft,  thou  couldst.  ifjr  lonntet,  you  could. 

cr  fonnte,  he  could.  fie  fount-en,  they  could. 

(a)  Conjugate  the  other  five  modals  in  the  past. 

160.  Future  Tense  of  Modals.  —  The  future  is  regular. 

id)  toerfoe  fpredjen  fciirf  en,  /  shall  be  permitted  to  speak. 

bit  ttiirft  fomtnen  fonnen,  thou  wilt  be  able  to  come. 

et  Hurt)  gefjcn  founen,  he  loill  be  able  to  go. 

ttiir  tuerben  (emeu  miiffen,  we  shall  have  to  study. 

tyr  ttietbet  ftetben  miiffen,  you  will  have  to  die. 

fie  merfcen  f^ie(en  moflen,  they  will  want  to  play. 

(a)  2ft  o  g  en  and  joften  are  rarely  used  in  the  future  tense. 

161.  Modals  with  e$  and  ju.  —  (a)  Where  English  says  I  can, 
you  musty  and  so  on,  German  generally  uses  e$  as  object  of 
the  auxiliary,  $dj  fann  e$,  @ie  miiffen  e$,  etc.     In  negative 
sentences,  e$  is  not  necessary:  3$  fann  nic^t,  @ie  miiffen  ntc^t. 

(6)  When  a  verb  ivlth  ju  is  used  with  a  modal  auxiliary,  ju 
comes  between  the  auxiliary  and  the  verb. 


PAST   AND   FUTURE   OF   MODALS.  207 

He  studied  to  be  able  to  read.    (£r  tcrittc,  urn  tcfctt  $tt  f  onnciu 

We  ran  to  be  able  to  see  better.     SSHr  Ucfctt,  ttttt  fecffc*  fctycit  $tt  f  onneiu 

162.  Vocabulary. 

bcr   SaJjtt'Jjof,  bic    SSaljttpfc   II,  fra'gctt,  reg.  (Ijafccn),  with  ace.,  to 

(railway}   station;   auf  bcm   or  ask. 

ben  $al)ttf)off  at  or  to  the  station.  frfjt'rfett,  reg.  (fjaften),  to  send. 

bcr  Coffer,  bic  Coffer  I,  *rwn*.  alleitt',  alone. 

bcr  $or&,  bic  $iir&e  II,  &asA*tf  .  tt0d^f    more  ;     notf)    etttia^f    some 

bcr  Dtt'fef,  bic  Dnlcl  I,  wwcZe.  (thing)    more  ;    noi^    ctnf    one 

II,  baggage.  more  ;  nod)  toiclc,  many  more. 


163.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  i.  SDZettt  Dnfcl  burfte  aKein  geljen,  aber  er  tt)ottte 

2.  9Bir  iDerben  bte  toffcr  unb  S5rbe  auf  ben  «a^of  fdjtcfett 
mitffen.      3.  $$    iDerbe    ba$  ©e^acf    aCcin   tragen   fbnnen. 

4.  (Sr  fottte  feinen  Coffer   tragen,  aber  er  ntodjte  e^    nicfyt. 

5.  SBerben  lt)tr  noc^  ettoa'S  fragen  bitrfen?      6.  @ie  iDotlten 
t^r  ®epacf  fcf)t(fen,  aber  fie  lonnten  nidfjt 

(b)  1.   He  was  able  to  carry  his  basket  alone,  but  he  didn't 
want  to.      2.   I  shall  have  to  send  my  baggage.      3.   We  were 
to  come  to  town,  but  we  weren't  permitted.      4.    She  didn't 
like  to  go,  but  she  had  to.      5.   They  will  be  able  to  play 
to-morrow.      6.   My  uncle  wanted  to  send  his  trunk  to  the 
station,  but  he  couldn't. 

164.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.   Bead  9luf  bent  33aljnl)ofe,  Easy  Reading,  46,  7—47,  17. 
2.   Point  out  illustrations  of  the  past  and  future  of  modals, 

and  of  their  use  with  e§  and  with  jtt. 

(b)  1.  3Jhi£te  $f)r  Onfet  fetn  ®epa<J  tragen,  ober  bnrfte  er 
e$  fdjtden?     2.  2Birb  er  fragen  tooCen,  nnt  feinen  Coffer  finben 


208  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

311  !ijnnen?  3,  2Sir  toollten  aftein  fafyren,  aber  ftrir  fonnten 
nitfjt  4.  §aben  ©te  alt  3^r  ®epad,  ober  ttrirb  $f)r  Onfel 
nod)  einen  Coffer  fdjicfen  mitffen?  5.  Durfte  ber  3<nnge  nod) 
em  ®ta$  SBaffer  fyxben?  6.  9Btrb  mein  Onlet  nocf)  einen  $orb 
anf  ben  33al)n^of  [(^t(fen  ntnffen  ? 

(c)  1.   My  uncle  was  alone  on  the  platform,  and  he  had  to 
send  his  baggage.       2.    You  will  want  to  buy  two  more  (nod) 
jtoet)  trunks,  won't  you?      3.    I   couldn't  go   to   the   station 
alone  with  my  baskets  ;  I  wasn't  permitted.      4.   We  were  to 
send  our  trunks  home,  but  we  couldn't ;    it  cost   too   much. 

5.  Will  the  boy  be  permitted  to  play  that  new  game,  or  will 
he  have  to  stay  at  home  to  writo  many  more  (nodj)  sentences  ? 

6.  They  wanted  to  go  to  (in  bie)  school  to  be  able  to  learn 
better. 

(d)  "  Did   your   uncle  want   to    carry  his   baggage   to   the 
station  ?  " 

"  Yes,  but  he  couldn't ;  he  wasn't  permitted." 
"  Why  ?     How  much  did  he  have  ?  " 

"  He  had  this  big  trunk  and  two  more  baskets ;  he  had  to 
send  them  (fie),  to  be  able  to  have  them  to-day." 

"  How  much  was  it  to  (f  ollte  e$)  cost  ?     Did  you  ask  him  ?  " 
"  Yes,  he  had  to  give  the  conductor  four  marks  more." 


PERFECT   TENSES   OF   MODALS.  209 

LESSON  XXVIII. 
Perfect  Tenses  of  Modals. 


<£ine  fyalbe  Stunbe  fyaben  unr  ftefyert  miiffen.  — 


165.    The  Perfect  Tenses  of  Modals  are  conjugated  with 

Present  Perfect. 
trf)  fjabe,  bit  Ijaft,  etc.,  gefonnt,  gemu^t,  etc.,  I  have  been  able,  etc. 

Past  Perfect. 
id)  ljattef  bit  Ijatteft,  etc.,  gelomtt,  cjcmufit,  etc.,  I  had  been  able,  etc. 

Future  Perfect. 
The  Future  Perfect  of  the  modals  is  regular,  but  rare. 

(a)  These  regular  past  participles  of  the  modals  are  used 
when  there  is  no  dependent  infinitive.     (§  161,  a.) 
I  couldn't.    3d)  fjafce  e3  nidjt  gefotmt 


He  didn't  want  to.    (£r  Ijat  e3  ttidjt 

166.  "Two  Infinitives."-  -The  modals  and  nine  other  verbs 
(fiiI)Ien,/eeZ;  l)et£en,  bid;  {jelfett,  help;  f)5ren,  hear;  (affen,  let 
or  have  (a  thing)  done;  lefyren,  teach;  lernen,  learn;  macfyen, 
make;  and  [e^ett,  see)  have  two  past  participles,  one  of 
which  has  the  same  form  as  the  infinitive.  This  latter 
form  is  used  in  compound  tenses  governing  a  dependent 
infinitive.  The  dependent  infinitive  precedes  the  past  parti- 
ciple (with  infinitive  form)  of  the  modal. 

At  the  top  of  the  next  page  will  be  found  the  arrangement 
of  these  verbs  with  a  dependent  infinitive. 


210  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

Present  Perfect. 

id)  Ijafce  f  Jrielett  bitrfett,  /  have  been  or  was  permitted  to  play. 
bit  tyaft  fdjm&Ctt  fiwttett,  thou  hast  been  or  wast  able  to  write. 
er  Ijat  frf)ret&eit  lernen,  he  (has)  learned  to  write. 
ttiir  Ijafcen  lommcn  miiffen,  we  (have)  had  to  come. 
ifyr  tyafct  arbeiten  Ijelfen,  you  (have)  helped  work. 
fie  Ijaben  geljen  tuottcn,  they  (have)  wanted  to  go. 

Past  Perfect, 
id)  tyatte  fjrielen  bitrfen,  etc.,  I  had  been  allowed  to  play,  etc. 

(a)  Conjugate  each  of  the  above  combinations  in  full  throughout  the 
perfect  and  past  perfect. 

(6)  Remember  that  German  often  uses  the  perfect  where  English  em- 
ploys the  past.  (See  §  71.) 

(5r  fyat  nicfyt  tyiefen  toottetu    He  didn't  want  to  play. 
3d)  fyabe  bleiben  miiffen.    /  was  obliged  to  (had  to)  stay. 

167.  Vocabulary. 

bic  Sofamotf'&e  IV,   engine,   loco-  amerifa'nifd),  adj.,  American. 

motive.  fo'mifrf),  funny,  queer. 

ba§  ^tnc'rila,  America.  ein'mal,  once. 

ba^  9flabf  bic  $abe*  III,  wheel.  jcf  ever. 

168.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  1.  ^rf)  fjabe  bie  lomtf^e  gofomotfoe  fasten  fe^en.     2.  (Sr 
Ijat  ge^en  tt)ol(enr  aber  er  l)at  e^  nifyt  gelonnt.      3.  3Btr  fjat^ 
ten  fptelen  bitrfen,  aber  nrir  fatten  nacf)  @aufe  gefyett  mitffen. 
4.  @ie  ^aben  £)eutfcfy  gut  fprec^en  fernen*      5.  §aben  @te  i^n 
fotnmen  ^5ren?      6.  @r  ^at  arbeiten  mitffen,  aber  er  Ijat  e^ 
nic^t  getooltt 

(b)  Use  perfect   tenses.  —  1.   We    have    heard    them    play. 
2.   I  wanted  to  see  those  big  wheels,  but  I  wasn't  able  to. 


PERFECT   TENSES   OF   MODALS.  211 

3.  They  were  permitted  to  go  into  the  garden.  4.  She  had 
to  study,  but  she  didn't  like  to.  5.  I  have  learned  to  speak 
German  very  well.  6.  Have  you  ever  seen  that  American 
mgine  go  (f afyren)  ? 

169.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.   Bead  2(uf  bettt  33d!)ttf)ofe,  Easy  Reading,  48,1  —  50,  6. 
2.   Point  out  illustrations  of  the  perfect  tenses  of  modals, 
Doth  the  regular  use  and  the  "  two  infinitives." 

(6)  1.  §at  ber  Dnfel  ber  $naben  je  auf  einer  amertfantfcljen 
golomotbe  fasten  bitrfen?  2.  SBarum  fyat  er  e$  etttmal  ge* 
fonnt?  3.  §aben  bte  jtoet  Snaben  tljr  ©epacf  auf  ben  SQafyn* 
fyof  tragen  miiffen?  4.  §at  ber  Dnfef  eittmal  in  3lmertfa  auf 
einer  ftetnen,  fomtfc^en  ?ofomotbe  fatjren  molten?  5;  §aben 
@ie  Je  eine  fotmfdje,  amertfanifrfie  8ofomotit)e  nttt  ffeinen 
9tabern  fe^en  fonnen?  6.  §aben  bte  3^9^  immer  fptelen 
tDoIIenr  unb  ^aben  fie  e^  au^  gefonnt? 

(c)  Use  perfect  tenses  when  possible.  —  1.  Did  you  ever  want 
to  see  that  funny  old   engine   with  the  four   little   wheels  ? 
2.    The  boys  have  had  to  stay  at  home ;  they  haven't  been 
permitted  to  ride  on  the  engine.       3.  In  America  the  wheels 
of  the  American  engines  are  always  very  large.       4.   Yester- 
day we  wanted  to  go   to   the  city  to  buy  some   paper,  but 
we  couldn't.       5.    Only  once  have  the  pupils  been  permitted 
to  use  the  new  books.       6.   We  always  had  to  go  home,  but 
we  never  wanted  to. 

(d)  Use  perfect  tenses  when  possible.  —  "  Was  that  funny  old 
engine  with  the  little  wheels  ever  able  to  go  (fafyren)  ?  " 

" I  saw  it  go  once  (fat)ren  fefyen).    Did  you  want  to  see  it? n 
"  Yes,  I  like  these  funny  old  American  engines." 


212  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAK. 

"  In  America  I  have  never  been  permitted  to  ride  011  an  I 

engine,  but  I  have  always  wanted  to." 

"  So  ?     Have  you  always  had  to  ride  in  the  train  ?  " 

"  Yes,  always.     No  boys  are  permitted  to  ride  011  American 

engines.     I  have  never  been  able  to." 

LESSON  XXIX. 
Special  Uses  of  Modals.    Saffetu 


Das  !    3^?  ma9  es  ntdjt. 


170.  Special  Uses  of  Modals  and  laffen. —  3)iirfen,  Itfnnen 
tflotfett,  and  tnitffen  are  used  regularly  in  the  meanings  alread} 
given;  mftgen  and  [olfen  have  also  special  uses. 

(a)  9ft5gen  is  usually  translated  by  English  like,  especially 
when  accompanied  by  the  adverb  gem,  gladly. 

$rfj  mag  gent  fhtgen  or  id)  fhtgc  gertu    /  like  to  sing. 
TOgett  (Bte  fctefe  SBfamen  ?    Do  you  like  these  flowers  f 

(1)  English    may    is    usually    rendered    by   bitrfetl    to 
denote  permission ;  by  f onnen  to  denote  possibility. 

You  may  speak.    $u  barfft  fpredjett* 
That  may  be.    £>a3  faittt  fcitt* 

(b)  @otten  is  often  used,  especially  in  the  present,  to  report 
hearsay.     It  is  translated  is  said  to. 

&  foil  feljr  arm  f  tin.     He  is  said  to  be  very  poor. 
@ic  foil  feljr  gut  fingeiu     She  is  said  to  sing  very  well. 

(1)  An  especially  common  German  idiom  is  the  ques- 
tion, 3Ba$  foil  (benn)  ba$?     What  do  you  mean  by  that  ? 

(2)  The  past  subjunctive  of  folfen  (fottte)  is   like  the 
past  indicative.     It  regularly  means  ought  to. 


SPECIAL  USES  OF   MODALS.  213 

$>it  fottteft  (ernen.     You  ought  to  study. 
(£r  faUte  arbettetu    He  ought  to  work. 

(c)  Besides  its  regular  meaning,  toolferi  is  also  used  in  the 
sense  of  to  be  about  to  or  to  be  determined  to. 

(£r  UioUtc  geljem    He  was  about  to  go. 
Sefj  ttittt  tyred)  en*     /  insist  upon  speaking. 

(d)  8affen  in  its  causative  meaning,  to  have  (done),  to  cause  to 
(be  done),  is  used  like  the  modals.     It  always  takes  the  active 
infinitive,  but  sometimes  with  passive  sense. 

•     (£r  ISjft  ehten  Oforf  madjen,    He  is  having  a  coat  made. 

2Bir  Jja&ett  tieite  $itte  faitfcn  (affetu     We  have  had  new  hats  bought. 
28tftft  bit  tttcitt  SBttd)  fjolett  laffeit  ?    Will  you  have  my  book  brought  9 

171.  Vocabulary. 

bcr  5Jn'5ttgf  btc  5(tt5iige  II,  suit.  ttrif'fen,  tt»u^ter   getoftgt'  (fjafcen), 

ber  S^nci'bcr  I,  «at7or.  tcfy  tuctfe  bu  tt>ct^tf  er  meiff,  «o 

Ictt'ncn,  !anntef  gcfdnnt  (fjafceit),  A;noio,  Tiave  knowledge  of. 

to  know,  be  acquainted  with.  ftfttt,  poor. 

faf'fenf  (ic§f  gclaffcn  (Ija&ett),  cr  tt>citr/ar  (not  to^e). 

l&fyt,  to  let  ;  to  have  done  or  cause  gent,    gladly;    usually    translated 

to  be  done;  to  leave.  like  to. 

172.  Oral  Drill. 


(a)  1.  g$  foH  nt(J)t  toett  fctn.  T)a^  fann  fctn.  2. 
@tc  emeu  Sln^ug  madden  laffcn?  3.  @r  met^  tttdjt,  aber  ber 
@(^netber  ^at  etnen  neuen  9Injug  mac^en  laffcn  tDolfen*  4.  J)er 
@rf)netber  foil  fefjr  arm  fctn.  tennen  @tc  tljn?  5.  SBiffcn 
@ie,  tcf)  ge^e  gern  in  bie  ©d^ulc  ?  B.  @te  ^at  etnen  neuen  §nt 
fanfen  taffen. 

.(6)  1.   I  know  him,  but  he  doesn't   know  it.       2.    He  is 
having  a  new  suit  made.       3.    The  tailor  ought  to  work;  he 


214  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

is  said  to  be  very  poor.  4.  Do  you  like  to  play  ball  ? 
5.  Do  you  know,  I  am  having  a  gray  suit  made  ?  6.  That 
may  be,  but  I  did  not  know  it. 

173.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.   Bead  4Beint  ©djnetber,  Easy  Reading,  50,  7—51,  6. 

2.  Point  out  illustrations  of  the  use  of  nttfgen  and  gent,  used 
together  and  also  separately ;  of  fotfen  in  two  special  mean- 
ings ;  of  tootten  in  the  sense  of  to  be  about  to;  and  of  (affen  in 
its  regular  and  of  its  causative  meanings. 

(b)  1.  §at  bet  jnnge  2ftann  bei  (cittern  artnen  ©cfynetber  eittett' 
neuen  Sln^ng  madjen  laffen  ?      2.  $annte  ber  alte  grennb  ben 
©djtteiber?      3.  2ftag  er  feitten  neuen  9lnjug  gern  tragen,  ober 
nriffen  @ie  ntdjt?      4.  SBie  toett  tft  e^  nad^  bent  brettent  ^5(a^e? 
SBet^  Sfyr  grennb?      5.  @ottte  td^  etnen  nenen,  granen  9tocf 
ntac^en  laffen?      6.  §at  ber  ©olbat  bet  bent  artnen  ©djnetber 
etnen  nenen  2lngng  ntacfyen  taffen  rotten  ? 

(c)  1.   How  far  is  it  to  the  tailor's  shop,  do  you  know  ? 
2.   I  have  wanted  for  a  long  time  (§  83)  to  have  a  new  suit 
made,  but  I   don't  know  any  good   tailor.       3.   Those  poor 
boys  ought  to  like  to  study.       4.   I  like  to  have  all  my  new 
suits  made  at  (bet)  that  poor  tailor's.       5.    Is  your  tailor  said 
to  be  very  poor,  or  don't  you  know  ?      6.  Do  you  know  a  good 
tailor  ?     I  must  have  a  new  suit  made. 

(d)  "  That  old  tailor  is  said  to  be  very  good.     Do  you  know 
him?" 

"I  don't  know,  but  I  always  like  to  have  my  new  suits 
made  at  (bet)  a  good  tailor's." 

"  Let  us  go  to  him.     It  is  not  far." 

"  Shall  we  go  on  foot  (jn  ^uf;),  or  shall  we  ride  (fasten)  ?  " 


REVIEW.  215 

"I  like  to  walk  (ju  guf;   gefyen).      How  far  is   it?     Do 
you  know  ?  " 

"  It  ought  not  to  take  (bauertl)  long.     Come,  let  us  go  ! " 

LESSON  XXX. 
Review. 


IDtHft  bu  tmmer  u>etter  fcfyroetfen  ? 

Stetj,  bas  03ute  Itegt  fo  naty  1 
£erne  nur  bas  03liicf  ergretfen, 

Denn  bas  (Sliicf  tft  immer  ba.  —  ©oetlje. 


174.  Review  Questions. 

(a)  1.  Name  the  German  modals.  2.  In  what  two  ways 
may  English  will  be  translated  ?  3.  Give  the  ways  of  trans- 
lating English  may.  4.  What  does  tnftgen  usually  mean  ? 

(6)  1.  Which  modal  means  must  (not)  in  withholding  per- 
mission ?  2.  What  peculiarity  have  the  modals  when  gov- 
erning a  dependent  infinitive  ?  3.  What  is  the  difference  in 
the  use  of  the  past  participles  of  modals  ? 

(c)  1.  Give  two  meanings  for  f  often ;  two  for  la  (fen ;  two 
for  fijmtetu  2.  Explain  the  use  of  e$  and  ju  with  modals. 

175.  Vocabulary. 

ber  Shiotf,  Me  Shtityfe  II,  button.  bag  Siuty,  btc  Sitter  III,  cloth. 

bcr  3Dtor'genf  bic  SJlorgcn  I,  morn-  batt'fett,  reg.  (Ijafcett),  with  dat.,  to 

ing;    written  small  when  used  thank. 

with  an  adverb :    this  morning,  bie'ttCtt,  reg.  (f)rtficn)r  with  dat.,  to 

fjeute  morflcm  sewe. 

bie  ^far'fce  IV,  color.  abieit'   (pronounced   abjo')f  good- 

bie  ^Jlo'be  IV,  fashion,  style.  bye,  farewell. 

ba3  *Hetbr  bic  ^Icibct  III,  caress;  5(uf   SSic'bctfe^cn,    «i7Z   we   meet 

pi,  clothes.  again. 


216  NEW  GERMAN  GRAMMAR. 

176.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  1.  $tf)  fjabe  ettt  netted  ®leib  macfyen  taffen  molten, 
2.  9Bir  Ijaben  £)eutfcf)  fdjreiben  lernen  muffen.  3.  §aben  ©ie 
fein  Znd)  faufen  laffen  limnen?  4.  (gr  l)at  fie  nid)t  fingen 
f)5ren  mogen.  5.  £m  fyatteft  fie  nidjt  fpielen  fefyen  burfen. 
6.  @te  Ijat  ^eute  tnorgen  fdjreiben  fernen  tooffetu 

(6)  Use  perfect  tenses.  —  1.  We  wanted  to  learn  to  sing. 
2.  He  had  to  have  a  new  coat  made.  3.  She  couldn't  see 
him  play.  4.  They  weren't  permitted  to  hear  us  speak  Ger- 
man. 5.  Didn't  you  like  to  learn  to  play  ball?  6.  She 
couldn't  have  the  dress  made  this  summer. 

177.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.   Read  33etm  ©djnetber,  Easy  Reading,  51,  7—52,  11. 

2.  Point  out  different  uses  of  each  of  the  six  modals  and  of 
laffen. 

(5)  1.  ®uten  2ftorgen!  SBotten  ftrir  gnm  ©tfjnetber  gefyen? 
2.  2Btet)teIe  Snityfe  muffen  unfere  Sletber  Ijaben,  nm  nacf)  ber 
le^ten  2Kobe  jn  fetn?  3.  SBomit  lann  id)  bienen?  4. 
@ie  biefe^  Zud)  nifyt?  <gs  foK  fe^r  gut  fein.  5.  ^ft  ba^ 
nid^t  toon  ber  ridjttgen  garbe  ?  6.  SBarnnt  muffen  tt)ir  anbere 
tnityfe  ^aben?  Q]t  ba^  Jefet  3M>e? 

(c)  1.  Good  morning !  Till  we  meet  again !  Good-bye ! 
2.  You  ought  to  thank  him  ;  he  has  served  you  well.  3.  We 
have  to  wear  our  clothes  with  cloth,  buttons,  and  color  accord- 
ing to  (nacl))  the  latest  (le^t)  style.  4.  What  do  you  mean 
.  (§  170,  6,  1)  by  that?  I  don't  like  this  style.  5.  I  don't 
like  this  dress;  the  cloth  is  not  of  (toon)  the  right  color, 
and  the  buttons  are  too  small.  6.  I  thank  you ;  I  will  have 
a  better  dress  made. 


REVIEW.  217 

(d)  "  Good  morning  !     I  must  have  a  new  dress  made." 

<;  May  I  show  you  some  cloth  ?  " 

"  Please !   Does  the  latest  (fe^t)  fashion  have  many  buttons  ?  " 

"  Yes,  and  the  cloth  must  be  of  the  right  color." 

"I  like  this  new  style.  The  dress  ought  to  be  very 
beautiful." 

"Yes,  our  tailor  is  said  to  be  very  good.  Shall  we  go  to 
his  store  ?  " 

"  No,  I  must  go  home  now.     I  thank  you  !     Good-bye ! " 

"  Till  we  meet  again  !  " 

178.  Review  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  SBoMen  tirir  anf  ben  SBafynfteig  gefyen,  urn  nut  bent 
3uge  fasten  sn  lonnen?  2.  @ott  id)  bie  gafyrlarten  Itffen,  ober 
rotten  @tc?  3.  §at  <Jl)r  alter  Onfcl  feine  Coffer  itnb  Sorbe 
auf  ben  33al)nijof  fdjtdfen  mitffen?  4.  SSerben  <Ste  attetn  nod^ 
etma^  ®e^ci(f  anf  ben  33al)nf)of  tragen  fonnen?  5.  §at  bet 
@(^affner  je  auf  enter  anterifani[(^en  8o!omottt?e  fa^ren  bilrfen? 
6.  3Jiijgen  @ie  Qfyt  Sfetber  bet  jenent  arnten  ©i^netber  ntacfyen 
faffen? 

(&)  1.  May  I  call  your  friend  the  conductor,  or  will  you? 
2.  He  was  to  buy  the  tickets,  but  he  couldn't ;  he  had  no 
money.  3.  You  do  not  like  to  write  these  sentences,  but 
you  must.  4.  Will  your  uncle  be  able  to  carry  two  more 
trunks  onto  the  platform?  5.  The  conductor  had  once 
been  permitted  to  ride  on  the  funny  old  engine  with  the 
little  wheels.  6.  I  don't  like  to  see  you  in  that  old  coat ; 
you  ought  to  have  a  new  suit  made. 

(c)  At  the  Station.  —  Two  friends  wanted  to  go  to  the  city  in 
the  train.  The  one  (ber  etne)  had  to  see  his  old  mother.  The 


218  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

other  (ber  cmbere)  was  to  have  a  new  suit  made.  They  were 
not  permitted  to  go  onto  the  platform,  for  (betttt)  they  had  not 
yet  been  able  to  purchase  their  tickets.  The  conductor  was 
at  the  station,  and  they  knew  him  and  spoke  with  him.  He 
was  said  to  be  a  very  good  conductor,  but  he  wasn't  permitted 
to  stay  long  with  them.  Then  they  bought  their  tickets  ;  the 
train  came ;  and  they  had  t  go. 

LESSON  XXXI. 
Possessive  and  Intensive  Pronouns. 


(Efyret  Me  ^rcmen  1    Ste  flectyten  unb  meben 
fye  Hofen  ins  trMfcfye  s£eben. — 


Review  Sections  105,  106,  107,  112,  118,  119,  and  120. 

179.  The  Possessive  Pronoun  stands  for  a  noun.  It  is  some- 
times called  the  independent  possessive,  because  it  is  used  inde- 
pendently, without  its  noun.  Below  are  given  the  neuter  forms 
of  the  possessive  pronouns  and  the  corresponding  possessive 
adjectives.  See  §  118. 

Possessive  Adjectives.  Possessive  Pronouns. 

my  nteiit  mine  ntetneg  fca3  metn(ig)e 

thy  beitt  thine  fceme3  ba3  fceitt(iij)e 

his  fcitt  his  femes  ba3  fcin(ig)c 

her  if)*  hers  tfjreS  ba3  %(ig)c 

our  wtfer  ours  uttf(e)re3  ba3  iwfr(icj)e 

your  %fy  yours  %$n$  ba3  $i)r(tg)e 

eiter  eure3  ba^  eur(tg)c 

their  iljr  theirs  Urc^  ba§  il)r(ifl)e 


POSSESSIVE   AND   INTENSIVE   PRONOUNS.  219 

(a)  When  the  German  possessive  pronoun  is  preceded  by 
the  definite  article,  it  is  declined  like  a  weak  adjective.     The 
article  agrees  with  the  noun  which  the  pronoun  represents. 

Sftein  23nd)  ift  alt,  bag  beine  (beinige)  ift  tteiu    My  book  is  old,  yours  is  new. 
SJleine  SBiidjer  ftnb  aft,  bie  beaten  (beinigen)  finb  nen*    My  books  are 
old,  yours  are  new. 

(b)  If  the  article  is  not  used,  the  possessive  takes  the  end- 
ings of  a  strong  adjective  agreeing  with  the  noun  understood. 
The  forms  in  n    cannot  be  used  without  the  article. 


ift  aftf  3ft*eg  (bag  31)re,  bag  Sfjrige)  ift  nen.    My  book  is 

old,  yours  is  new. 
Sein  S3ntbet  ift  ber  Setter,  meiner  (be*  tneine,  ber  nteinige)  ift  ber 

Stfjiiler*     His  brother  is  the  teacher,  mine  is  the  pupil. 
Srfj  fjafce  rnein  $ndj  Ijier,  aBer  30^nn  ^at  feineg  (bag  feinef  bag  feinige) 

tierloren.     /  have  my  book  here,  but  John  has  lost  his. 
>!>icr  tft  3l)r  $utf  nbcr  meiucu  (ben  rnctucu,  ben  meinigen)  Ijabc  id)  uirljt 

gef  nnben*     Here  is  your  hat,  but  mine  I  have  not  found. 

Note.  —  The  same  rule  applies  also  to  ein  and  fein,  except  that  they  do 
not  take  the  suffix  =tg,  and  fein  cannot  be  preceded  by  the  article. 

Reiner  toon  iljnett  ftetyt  e$.    No  one  (none)  of  them  sees  it. 
£)er  eine  ift  nirfjt  ^ier.     One  (of  them)  is  not  here. 
(Sitter  tttitjs  l)eiraten.     One  (of  them)  must  marry. 

180.  The  Intensive  Pronoun,  fefbft  or  fetber,  myself,  yourself, 
himself,  herself,  itself,  ourselves,  yourselves,  themselves,  is  indeclin- 
able. It  is  used  for  all  persons,  genders,  numbers,  and  cases. 

<3ie  ift  felber  gefomnten*    She  came  herself. 

298ir  Ijafcen  eg  feffift  gefe^en.     We  saw  it  ourselves. 

%tf)  Ijafce  eg  f  elfcer  (f  elbft)  getan.    /  did  it  myself. 

(a)  When  fetbft  precedes  its  noun,  it  means  even. 

Sie  mag  f  elbft  bie  Ofafen  nidjt    She  does  not  even  like  roses. 

Sefbft  fein  S5rnber  JieBt  i^n  nidjt.    Even  his  brother  does  not  love  him. 


220  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

181.  Vocabulary. 

bet  $ln%r  bte  $(ftffe  I,  river.  eitg,  narrow  ;  of  shoes  or  clothing, 
ber  Sdjulj,  bic  <3djufje  II,  shoe.  tight. 

bic  ^fyotograpljie',  bic  $f)otogra=  fur^,  sftorz. 

plji'ctt  IV,  photograph.  ttrie,  as. 

flte'ftett,    flflff,   geftf'fteit    (fcitt)r  to  ftltft,  self ,  selves  ;  even. 

flow. 

182.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  1.  £)tefe  $l)otogra:pljten  finb  beffer  ate  nnfere.      2.  (Sure 
@d)ul)e  finb  ntdjt  fo  eng  tme  bte  tneinigen*      3.  3ft  rnetn  9tocf 
fo  furg  tDte  ^^rer?      4.  §ier  ift  mem  §ut;    tDO  ift  f enter? 
5.  llnfere  53oote  finb  beffer  ate  bte  ^rtgen,      6.  3<dj  ^abe 
metnen  @df)U^  gefttnben;  er  fttdjt  ben  feinen, 

(b)  Write  all  possessive  pronouns  three  ways.  —  1.    My  photo- 
graph is  better  than  yours  (nine  ivays).       2.    Their  shoes  ace 
not  so  short  as  ours.       3.  This  rose  is  not  so  beautiful  as  hers. 
4.    There  is  your  hat,  but  I  don't  find  mine.       5.    Your  new 
suit  is  better  than  his.       6.    Your  new  book  is  not  so  big  #s 
mine. 

183.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.    Read  ^m  ©preettwlb,  Easy  Reading,  54,  55. 

2.  Point  out  illustrations  of  various  possessive  adjectives 
and  possessive  pronouns,  and  distinguish  carefully  between 
them. 

(6)  1.  ^ft  S'fjre  ^fyotograpljte  Don  btefem  engen  gtnffe  beffer 
ate  bte  meintge?  2.  glteftt  btefer  furje  g(n§  jtmfdjen  bte 
I)ol)en  33aume?  3.  @tnb  bte  engen  ©cljnfye  be$  aftabcfyenS  fo 
fnrj  ime  Qfye?  4.  (ginb  feine  ^fyotograpljten  fo  f(i)5n  ttrie 
%e?  5.  §aben  @te  Qfye  engen  ©c^n^e  felbft  madden  laffen? 
6-  §lo£  jener  fnrje  gln$  burrf)  ben  fd^dnen  gritnen  2Ba(b? 


INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUNS.  221 

(c)  Translate  all  possessives  three  ways  wherever  possible.  — 

1.  Does  the  narrow  river  flow  through  the  beautiful  wood? 

2.  My    shoes    are    long,   but    yours    are    short    and    tight. 

3.  Your  photograph  is  not  so  good  as  mine.       4.    His  boat 
was  not  so  beautiful  as  mine ;  he  made  it  himself.       5.    All 
his  clothes  are  better  than  (at$)  mine ;  even  my  shoes  are  not 
so  good  as  his.       6.    My  hat  is  white  and  hers  is  green ;  mine 
is  better  than  hers. 

(d)  "  Where  are  my  shoes  ?     I  see  yours,  but  I  can't  find 
mine." 

"  Have  you  looked  for  yours  under  the  bed  ?  I  found  mine 
there." 

"  I  have  lost  even  my  hat.  Will  you  please  give  me 
yours  ?  " 

"Mine  is  too  small  for  you.  Let's  look  for  yours.  Don't 
you  know  where  it  (§  106)  is  ?  " 

"  No,  I  left  it  there  beside  yours." 

"  That's  queer  !     I  will  look  for  it.     Here  it  is  ! " 

"  I  thank  you !     Now  we  can  go  to  town." 


LESSON  XXXII. 
Interrogative  Pronouns. 


IDenige  tmffen,  tmemel  man  tmffen  mug,  um  311  rotffen,  tme  tr>enig 
man  u>et§.  — 


184.   The  Interrogative  Pronouns  are:  toer,  ivho;  om$,  what; 
:),  which,  what;  and  ft)a$  fttr  eitt,  what  kind  of  (a),  what. 
SBer  and  n)d§  can  never  be  used  as  adjectives. 


222  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

(a)  Declension  of  toer  and  lt)a$. 

Masc.  and  Fein.  Neut. 

N.  mer,  who.  ttw3,  what. 

G.   tteffett,  whose,  of  whom.  lueffeu,  of  what. 

D.  ttiettt,  to  whom. 

A.  men,  whom.  ttwS,  t0/*a£. 

As  in  English,  the  plural  is  the  same. 

(6)  SBetdfjer,   which  ?    what  f    has   the   endings   of   a   ,,ber" 

word  :  — 

Singular.  Plural. 

Masc.  Fern.  Neut.  For  all  genders. 

niclrfjcr  wetrfje  wefrfM  U)dd)c 

weldjeS  tucidjcr  rocld)e3  ludrtjcr 

tt)ctri)cm  tuelrfjcr  tteldjem  njcldjcn 

tuclrijcn  welrtjc  roeldjeS  n>dd)e 

(c)  In  tt)a^  fiir  ein,  the  etn  is  of  course  omitted  in  the  plural. 
The  following  noun  depends,  not  upon  fitr,  but  upon  its  natu- 
ral construction  in  the  sentence. 

2Ba3  fiir  eitt  alter  4>ut  ift  ba3  ?     What  kind  of  an  old  hat  is  that  f 

fiir  eaten  dorf  laufen  6te  ?     What  sort  of  a  coat  are  you  buying? 
fiir  23iirf)er  Ijat  er  ?     What  sort  of  books  has  he? 


185.  Combination   of  Interrogative   and   Preposition.  —  When 
referring  to  an  inanimate  object,  tt)o(r)-  is  used  with  preposi- 
tions, instead  of  tt>a§:  tt)0t>0tl,  of  what;  iDOtttit,  with  what;  toorin, 
in  what.     (See  §  112.)     Compare  whereof,  wherewith,  ivherein. 

186.  Use  of  bd$,  Me$,  and  e$  with  [etn.  —  In  speaking  of  they, 
these,  or  those,  with  to  be,  German  generally  uses  the  neuter 
singular  with  a  plural  verb,  where  English  has  the  demonstra- 
tive or  pronoun  in  the  plural. 

What  kind  of  books  are  those  9    28a3  fiir  Siirfjer  ftttb 
Which  children  are  those?    2Belrf)e  $ittt»er  ftttb 


INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUNS.  223 


Those  are  our  trees.    $)a$  ftttb  ttttfere  SBchtme* 
These  are  hard  exercises.    QieS  finb  frfjtoere  9fafgafcetu 
What  boys  are  those  f    Are  they  our  friends  f    2§eldje  ^nabcn  finb 
ba3  ?    3utb  e3  uufcre  Jyrcwtbc  ? 

187.  Vocabulary. 

bie  Seu'te,  pi.,  people.  persons;  compare  ftebeutett,  §  114). 

bie  @ei'be  IV,  silk.  iifceraU',  everywhere,  "  a??  over." 

bic  Xradjt  IV,  costume.  toer  ?  w/io  ? 

mei'nett,  reg.  (fjaften),  to  mean  (of  ttm3  fiit  (eitt)  ?  what  kind  of  (a)? 

188.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  1.  SBeffett  £rad)t  ift  ba§?  2.  2BeIcf)e  Zrad&t  meinen 
@ie?  3.  2Bomtt  fpteltcn  bic  8eute?  4.  2Ba3  fftr  @etbe  ift  ba$? 
5.  SBefc^e  Sud)er  finb  ba$?  6.  Sa^  fftr  §aufer  finb  ba«? 

(6)  1.  To  whom  did  you  give  that?  2.  Which  boy  did 
he  mean  ?  3.  What  kind  of  costumes  are  those  ?  4.  What 
were  the  people  speaking  of  (Dott)  ?  5.  What  kind  of  chil- 
dren are  those  ?  6.  What  kind  of  a  coat  did  you  have  made 
yesterday  ? 

189.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.    Read  $tn  ©preettwtb,  Easy  Reading,  56,  1—57,  7. 

2.  Point  out  illustrations  of  the  interrogative  pronouns  ;  of 
the  combination  of  interrogative  with  a  preposition;  of  the 
use  of  neuter  singular  with  fein  where  English  has  the  plural. 

(6)  1.  Set  ift  ba3,  unb  toeffen  ^Pferb  Ijat  er?  2.  SBooon 
fprecfjen  @ie,  unb  tt)eldf)e$  $ferb  tnemett  ©ic?  3.  2Ba$  fitr 
@eibe  ift  ba$,  unb  ttrietriet  foftet  ba$  @ttt<J?  4.  2lu^  lt)elc^em 
Znfye  ^aben  biefe  geute  i^re  Sracfyten  gemarf)t?  5.  SBa^  fur 
8eute  finb  ba^?  6.  SBelc^e  8eute  meinen  @ie,  bie  8eute  tnit 
ben  Xradj'tcn  au^  fd^tDarjer  @eibe? 


224  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

(c)  1.    To  whom  did  the  people  give  the  costumes  of  (fcott) 
silk  ?       2.1  see  people  everywhere  ;    which   people   do   you 
mean  ?       3.    I  don't  understand  you ;  what  are  you  speaking 
of  ?       4.   What  kind  of  books  are  those  ?     Whose  books  are 
they  ?       5.    Those    are   mine ;    I've   looked   everywhere   for 
them ;   where  did  you  find  them  ?       6.   What  kind   of   cos- 
tumes are  those,  and  out  of  what  do  you  make  them  ? 

(d)  "  Whose  hat  and  coat  are  on  that  chair  ?  " 
"  Do  you  mean  these  ?     They  (e$)  are  mine." 

"  You  leave   your   clothes    everywhere.     What   kind   of  a 
costume  is  that  ?     What  did  you  make  it  out  of  ?  " 
"  These  are  old  German  costumes  of  good  black  cloth." 
"  Which  costume  shall  I  wear  this  morning  (§  175)  ?  " 
"  Why  don't  you  wear  mine  ?  " 
"  Good  !     That  will  .be  beautiful !     I  thank  you  !  " 

LESSON   XXXIII. 
Demonstrative  and  Indeclinable  Indefinite  Pronouns. 


2Ius  ntcfyts  ipirb  ntctyts,  bas  merfe  rooty, 
IPenn  cms  btr  etroas  tperben  foil.  —  <£taubtu3. 


190.   The  Demonstratives  are  btefer,  this;  jener,  that;   ber, 
berjentge,  that,  the  one  (who) ;  berfefbe,  the  same;  foldjer,  such  (a). 
(a)  The  demonstrative  ber  is  declined  as  follows :  — 


Masc. 
N.    ber 
G.    beffcn 
D.    bcm 
A.    bctt 


Singular. 

Plural. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

For  all  genders. 

bte 

ba£ 

bte 

ber  en 

beffeit 

berer 

ber 

bent 

benen 

bte 

ba^ 

bie 

DEMONSTRATIVES   AND   INDEFINITES  225 

Note.  —  It  is  like  the  definite  article  except  throughout  the  genitive 
and  in  the  dative  plural.  It  is  often  written  with  spaces  between  the  let- 
ters :  b  e  r,  b  t  e,  b  a  8.  This  is  the  German  way  of  italicizing. 

(b)  For  btefer  and  jetter  see  §  134  ;  for  f  oldjer,  §  144. 

(c)  J)erjentge  and  berfelbe  are  composed  of  the  article  ber 
and  the  weak  adjectives  jentge  and  felbe,  each  of  which  has  its 
regular  declension  :  berjettige,  be$ientgen,  bemjentgen,  etc. 

(d)  £)erjentge  may  be  used  instead  of  ber  when  the  demon- 
strative is  modified  by  a  phrase  or  clause.     But  ber  is  preferred. 

The  one  on  the  table,  ba^(jcnige)  auf  bent  Stfrfje. 
Those  that  I  saw,  fcie(jemgett),  trie  idj  faty. 

191.    The  Indefinites.  —  The  following  are  indeclinable  :  — 
(a)  @ttt)a$,  something,  some,  anything,  any.      An   adjective 
following  is  strong  and,  except  ember,  begins  with  a  capital. 

($ltte3,  something  good. 
®dfcr  some  (any}  money. 
attfcer(e)3,  something  else  (different). 

(b),  $TQtnb,  used  to  make  another  word  more  general. 


Ctttw3f  anything  at  all. 
$rgenb  jemanbf  irgenb  cuter,  some  one,  any  one. 

(c)  SJtatl,  one,  they,  people.     It  is  used  only  in  the  nominative, 
and  is  often  best  rendered  in  English  by  the  passive  voice. 

SDlan  fagt.     They  or  people  say,  it  is  said. 
9Wan  Bittet*    It  is  requested. 

Note.  —  (SitieS,  einem,  einen  are  used  for  the  gen.,  dat.,  and  ace.  of 
man;  ftrf)  is  its  reflexive,  and  fein  its  possessive. 

(c?)  SDleljr,  more.  SBeniger,  less,  fewer. 

SJieljr  ^Je(br  more  money.  SSeniger  ^elbf  less  money. 

tt,  more  boys.          SSentger  SHitber,  fewer  children. 


226  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 


(e)  yiii)t&,  nothing,  not  anything.  3?t(i)t$  is  always  used  in- 
stead of  a  negative  and  ettt)d$.  A  following  adjective  is  strong 
and,  except  atlber,  always  begins  with  a  capital.  See  (a). 

9liti)t$  <Sdjdtte3,  nothing  beautiful. 
•jRtd)t$  attber(e)3,  nothing  else  (different). 
l£r  fal)  ttid)t3,    He  did  not  see  anything. 

(/)  The  following  generally  have  no  inflection,  except  an  *$ 
in  the  genitive  :  jebertnann,  every  one,  everybody;  jentanb,  some 
one,  somebody;  ntentcmb,  no  one,  nobody,  not  anybody.     After 
Jemanb  and  ntetncmb  adjectives  are  used  as  after  ettDd$. 
$emanb  9Ute3,  some  one  old. 

anber(e)3,  no  one  else. 


192.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  l.  ®eben  @ie  tntr  ettoaS  ®nte$!      2.  Qtf)  fefye  ntd)t^ 
@(f)tt)ere^  in  btefen  Slnfgaben.       3.   Unfer  ©arten  ^at  nte{)r 

nnb  toentger  S3iinnte  al^  3!^rer«      ^*  3tr9en^) 
biefe    @ai^e    itberfe^en,      5,    ^ebertnann    fn($t 

^ter,  abet  man  ftnbet  ntcfytS.      6.  $tf)  ^abe  folc^e 
fdjBnen  9tofen  nte  gefe^en* 

(b)  1.    Are    you    looking    for   something   else   (different)? 
2.   I  don't  see  anything  beautiful  here.        3.    Everybody  was 
looking  for  something  beautiful,  but  nobody  could  find  any- 
thing.      4.   Your   teacher  has   more  boys,   but  fewer   girls. 
5.   Nobody  saw  the  pupils  in  the  school,  but  they  saw  those  on 
the  playground.        6.   We  must  write  more   sentences;   you 
don't  find  anything  hard  in  those  in  this  book. 

193.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.   Bead  SttodS  cmbere$,  Easy  Reading,  57,  8—58,  5. 
2.   Point  out  illustrations  of  the  use  of  etftm$,  ntdjtS,  tnefjr, 
ttjentger,  man,  jebertnann,  ber  (demonstrative),  and  berfelbe. 


DEMONSTRATIVES   AND   INDEFINITES.  227 

(6)  l.  ginbet  man  ettoaS  ©djtoereS  in  irgenb  einem  @a£e  in 
bem  33ud)e?  2.  §at  niemanb  anbereS  ettoa$  9?eue3  jn  fagen? 
3.  §aben  @ie  mefyr  ober  toeniger  SBflrter  in  biefen  @a^en  ge* 
fnnben,  at3  in  benen  im  anberen  93ucf)e?  4.  SBarunt  fyat  ber 
-Sunge  nicf)t3  anbere$  fcerftefyen  Idnnen?  5.  $inbet  irgenb 
jemanb  ettoaS  ®ute^  in  biefem  4Bud)e?  6.  ®ann  man  nic^t^ 
@(^5ne^  im  griinen  SBalbe  fe^en? 

(c)  1.   They  have  fewer  words,  but  more  sentences  in  this 
new  book.       2.    Somebody  has  laid  something  new  on  the  table. 

3.  I  don't  find  anything  hard  in  these  sentences,  but  in  those 
in   that   other    book    nobody    found    anything    easy    (leidjt). 

4.  This  class  has  more  girls  than  boys,  but  in  the  other  Ger- 
man class  (there)  are  fewer  girls.       5.    Has  any  one  else  any- 
thing better  than  this  ?       6.    I  see  nothing  beautiful  in  that 
girl ;    she  has  more  money  than  anybody  else,  but  nobody 
likes  her. 

(d)  "  You  have  more  money  than  I ;  please  give  me  some ; 
I  want  to  buy  something  beautiful." 

"  No,  I  have  less  money  than  you.  Some  one  else  will  give 
you  some." 

"  I  want  to  buy  something  new  for  our  house.  It  mustn't 
be  anything  small." 

"  Every  one  likes  something  large.  Why  don't  you  buy  that 
big  gray  picture  in  the  store  ?  " 

"  Good !     Will  you  go  with  me  ?     I'll  buy  it  (yet)  to-day." 

"  I  had  something  else  to  do,  but  I  will  go  with  you.  Then 
you  will  have  more  money,  for  (benn)  I  will  give  you  mine." 


228  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

LESSON    XXXIV. 
Inflected  Indefinites. 


Was  bu  ntcfyt  unllft,  bag  man  Mr  tu', 
Das  fiig,'  atid?  fetnem  anbern  °3u.  — 


194.  Inflected  Indefinites.  —  The  following  indefinites  usually 
take  the  regular  inflection  of  adjectives  :  — 

(a)  21K  is  usually  uninflected  before  ber  (demonstrative  or 
article)  or  before  a  possessive  pronoun.  See  §  144,  c, 

(1)  The  neuter  alte$,  used  alone,  means  everything,  all. 

(2)  21K  is  never  inflected  weak. 

All  that,  ba£  allt$. 

(3)  When  all  is  used  for  whole,  German  uses  gang. 

All  day,  ben  gatt^en  Sag* 
All  the  year,  ba3  gattse  3aljr, 

(&)  2ltlber,  o^er,  different.     Another  (one  more)  is  nod)  etTU 

#owe  other  day,  tin  anfoerer  Sag* 
One  more  day,  ttorf)  citt  £ag» 

(c)  53cibe,  6o^?  ^o,  is  preceded,  not  followed,  by  the  article. 

Both  the  girls,  tue  fceifcett  !Jfta&djetu 
T/ie  ^K?O  friends,  t»ic  fietbcn  ^vettttbe* 

(c^)  Sintge  .  *  *  ,  some;  me^rere  .  .  .  f  several. 
Some  pens,  ettttgc  ^cbcrn* 
Several  boys,  meljrere  ^naben* 

(e)  33ielr  mwc^,  many,  and  toettig,  ^'^e,  /eio,  are  usually  un- 
inflected in  the  singular ;  in  the  plural  they  are  inflected  like 
other  adjectives.  A  following  adjective  without  its  noun  is 
capitalized  and  takes  strong  neuter  endings.  (§  191,  a  and  e.) 


INFLECTED   INDEFINITES.  229 

(Ue(b,  much  money  ;  triefe  SBitdjer,  many  books. 
($itt  ttcnig,  a  little  ;  ttenige  £age,  /eie  days. 

gute3  $rot,  ra?*c&  good  bread.     $iel  ($ute£,  WMC/&  good. 


195.  Vocabulary. 

ber  $>om,  bic  ^omc  II,  cathedral.  fcei'be,  60^;  Zwo. 

bic  ^Bo'rfje  IV,  week.  ei'tttge,  some. 

ba3  @^(0£,  bic  <5rf)UJffer  III,  castfe.  ntelj'me,  several. 

entljartett,  etttfjtelt',  cnt^aFten  (^a=  toc'ing,  little  (in  the  sense  of  not 

Ben)f  c^  Cttt^d(tr  to  contain,  hold.  much,     as     distinguished     from 

gefaHett,  geftd',  gcfal'fcn  (fjafcett),  Kein,  ZiWZe,  in  the  sense  of  not 

e3  gefdtttf  with  dat.,  to  please.  large)]  pi,  /ew?. 

196.  Oral  Drill. 


(a)  1.  8e£te  aSodje  ^aben  tDtr  etnige  3)ome  unb  me^rere 
©c^toffer  gefe^en.  2.  2fttr  gefctllt  biefe^  Heine  33ud)  ;  e^  ent- 
^aft  iDenige  f^mere  @a^e.  3.  35a^  atteS  gefattt  ben  betben 
Sriibern  nidjt  4.  (Sin  anbere^  3KaI  toerben  @te  noc^  me^rere 
©c^toffer  fefyen.  5«  ginben  @te  Dtel  ®itte$  in  jenent  an^ 
beren  93ud)e?  6«  Sen  ganjen  Sag  fjabe  i(^  bie  betben  Srtefe 
gefurfjt 

(6)  1.  Another  day  (§  194,  6)  the  exercise  will  not  contain 
so  many  hard  sentences.  2.  The  two  friends  saw  several 
castles  last  week,  but  few  cathedrals.  3.  He  speaks  little, 
but  he  reads  much.  4.  All  that  pleases  me  ;  will  you  give 
me  some  more  ?  5.  All  day  they  played  with  the  two  girls. 
6.  We  have  many  more  pictures,  and  some  of  them  (bdtion) 
will  please  you. 

197.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.   Bead  £)entfdje  £rad)ten,  Easy  Reading,  58,  6—59,  6. 
2.   Point  out  illustrations  of  the  use  of  aff,  ganj,  anber,  nod) 
em,  etnige,  ntefyrere,  triel,  and  toentg. 


230  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

(6)  l.  ©efaften  ^fynen  Me  beiben  ©amen  trie!  ober  toenig? 
2.  §aben  bie  beiben  greunbe  le^te  SBodje  mefjrere  ©djldffer 
gefefyen?  3.  Sntljatt  ba$  anbere  33ncf)  nocf)  eintge  fdjone  33U- 
ber?  4.  ©rfjeint  ba$  ganje  33nd)  toenige  frfjtoere  @ii^e  ju 
entfyaften?  5.  SBerben  tt)tr  nat^fte  SBot^e  me^rere  Some 
unb  etnige  ©cfyloffer  fe^en  fonnen?  6.  ©efaften  ben  beiben 
33ritbern  bte  fcfyonen  Some  in  9lmerifa? 

(c)  1.   Last  week  both  the  brothers  saw  several  castles,  and 
some  of  these  pleased  them.       2.   Next  week  all  the  cathedrals 
will  contain  many  beautiful  flowers.       3.    The  basket  contains 
another  piece  of  cloth,  but  it  pleases  me  little.       4.    Several 
castles  were  interesting  and  some  were  beautiful,  but  they 
did  not  please  both  the  men.       5.    All  day  we  were  looking 
for  another  piece  of  cloth.       6.    All  the  year  that  book  pleased 
both  the  pupils,  but  now  they  want  to  read  another  book. 

(d)  "  Did  both  your  brothers  see  some  castles  last  week  ?  " 

"  Yes,  they  saw  some  castles  and  several  cathedrals,  and  all 
that  pleased  them." 

"  All  the  year  I  have  wanted  to  see  some  cathedrals,  but  I 
had  to  stay  at  home." 

"  My  two  brothers  stay  at  home  very  little.  They  go  every- 
where." 

"  That  must  please  them.  I  have  seen  few  castles,  and  they 
were  all  small.  They  didn't  please  me." 

"  Next  week  both  the  boys  are  going  to  the  country  to  see 
some  more  castles.  Don't  you  want  to  go  with  them  ?  " 

"  Gladly  !     I  thank  you  ! " 


REVIEW   OF   PRONOUNS.  231 

LESSON   XXXV. 

Review  of  Pronouns. 


IX)er  meles  brtngt,  unrb  mandpem  etwas  brtngen.  — 


198.  Review  Questions. 

(a)  1.  Give  all  the  German  translations  of  mine,  yours, 
hers,  theirs.  2.  How  do  these  differ  in  English  from  my, 
your,  her,  their  ?  3.  Give  and  illustrate  the  rule  for  the 
independent  use  of  ettl  and  fettl.  4.  Illustrate  the  two  uses 
of  fcttft. 

(6)  1.  Explain  the  use  of  bd$,  bie$,  and  e$  with  plural 
forms  of  fettt.  2.  Name  the  German  interrogative  pronouns. 
3.  How  do  they  combine  with  prepositions  ?  4.  What  other 
combination  with  prepositions  have  you  learned  ? 

(c)  1.  What  peculiarities  has  an  adjective  after  ettt)a$  or 
TttdjtS?  after  afte$?  after  tnel?  2.  Give  two  translations  for 
the  two  brothers.  3.  How  are  other  and  another  expressed 
in  German  ?  4.  How  do  you  say  in  German  with  something 
good,  with  everything  good  ? 

199.  Oral  Drill. 


(a)  1.  £)te$  33ud)  ift  metneS;  too  ift  ba$  3ff)te?  2. 
fitr  $rauen  [tub  ba$?  3.  9Ber  Ijat  ba$  gefagt,  unb  too&on  fyat 
er  gefprorf)en?  4.  $fy  ^abe  tnemett  9tocE  [elbft  gemac^t.  Set 
toem  ^at  er  ben  feinigen  tnadjen  (affen?  5.  §aben  bte  beiben 
©c^UIer  ettoa^  @c^one^  gefe^en?  6.  (Selbft  fein  Sruber  fie^t 
ntd)t  Diet  ®ute^  in  i^m. 


232  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

(6)  1.  Here  is  my  exercise;  who  has  yours?  2.  What 
kind  of  books  are  those?  3.  Even  the  teacher  could  not 
translate  the  sentence  himself.  4.  I  wish  another  piece  of 
paper.  5.  We  don't  see  much  good  in  that  other  book. 
6.  From  whom  did  you  buy  those  pens  ?  We  haven't  any. 

200.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.   Bead  £)eutftf)e  £rad)ten,  Easy  Reading,  59,  7  —  60,  13. 

2.  Point  out  illustrations  of  the  use  of  ember,  nod)  em, 
ettna$,  ntd)t§,  gcmj,  atfe$,  berfenige,  berfelbe,  Jebermcmn,  nte- 
manb,  fetbft,  Diet,  mefjr,  toeniger,  beibe,  mefyrere,  the  interroga- 
tives,  possessive  pronouns,  and  combination  of  preposition 
with  interrogative. 

(6)  1.  |)aben@ie  etttmS  fo  @cf)tt)ere3  je  gefefen?  2.  SUicmen 
ttrir  betbe  ba^[e(be  Znfy?  3.  2Ber  l^at  3^nen  n01^  e^n  ®U(f) 
gegeben?  4.  ^ft  e$  ba^  3!^ige  °^er  ^^  meintge?  5.  (Stub 
ba^  unfere  greunbe?  6.  £)te3  tft  ntc^t  ba^felbe  £u<i);  tDotfen 
@te  mtr  ein  cmbereS  @tii(J  geben? 

(c)  1.   What  kind  of   pictures   are  those  ?       2.    I  see  sev- 
eral books  on  the  table.       3.    Some  boys  played  all  day ;  the 
others  studied.       4.    Both  the  girls  want  another  piece  of  silk. 
5.   All  these  games  please  even  the  children.       6.   Did  you  do 
that  yourself  ?     What  did  you  do  it  with  ? 

(d)  "  Did  that  book  about  German  costumes  please  you  ?  " 
"  Yes,  the  book  contained  nothing  hard." 

"  I  read  it  all  the  morning,  and  I  found  something  hard  in 
every  sentence." 

"  That  cannot  be  the  same  book.  I  mean  the  one  on  the 
table  there." 

"  The  gray  one  ?   No,  I  didn't  find  anything  hard  in  that  one." 


REVIEW   OF   PRONOUNS.  233 

"  All  the  books  contain  something  hard,  but  this  pleases  me 
better  than  the  others." 
"  Yes,  that  is  true." 

201.  Review  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  ©inb   btefe    beiben    $f)otograj)l)ien   t)on    bent    engen 
gluffe  beffer  al3  bte  (Jljrtgett?      2.  3Baren  bte  neuen  ©c^u^e 
be$  ftetnen  9JZabcf)en3  fo  furj  tme  bte  metnen?      3.  2Ba$  fitr 
Settle  finb  ba$?    2Ber  !ennt  fie?      4.   3$  toet£  ntc^t ;  lt)etd)e 
Settle  metnen  @te?      5.  !g>at  Jetnanb  anbere^  nodj  eltt)a^  5U 
fragen?      6.  gtnben  ©te  nte^r  lange  9Borter  in  btefent  53u^e 
al^  in  benen  auf  bent  Jifcf)e? 

(b)  1.    My  hat  is  not  so  good  as  yours ;  I  made  mine  my- 
self.      2.  What  kind  of  costumes  do  you  mean?       3.    I  see 
people   everywhere   with   beautiful    costumes    of    (t)0n)    silk. 
~4.   We   didn't  find   anything    hard   in   those   last   sentences. 

5.  Both  the  pupils  had  to  translate  another  long   sentence. 

6.  The  other  castle  pleases  me  better  than  that  one  by  (an) 
the  river. 

(c)  In  the  Country.  —  In  the  country  we  see  something  inter- 
esting every  day.     Even  the  funny  costumes  please  us.     Some 
of  (t)0n)   these  are  better  than  the  ones  in  the  city.     They 
(man)  never  wear  the  same  shoes  in  the  country  as  in  the  city0 
All  day  the  men  work  in  (attf)  the  field,  and  the  children  can 
play  beside  the  river  or  in  the  wood.     Everybody  likes  the 
country. 


234  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

LESSON  XXXVI. 
Relative  Pronouns.    Dependent  Order. 


IPatjre  (Sro§e  fyat  alletn, 

IDer  Me  <Sro§e  meffen  farm — 

IDer's  t>erftetjt,  em  grower  ITtann 

llnb  etn  fd?Itd?ter  IHertfd?  311  fetn.  —  ©iefcel. 


202.  The  Relative  Pronouns  are  ber  and  tt)e(d)er,  meaning 
who,  which,  that. 

(a)  The  relative  ber  is  declined  like  the  demonstrative  ber, 
but   the   genitive   plural   is   always    berett    instead    of    berer 
(§  190,  a). 

The  relative  toeldjer  is  declined  like  the  interrogative  toelcfyer 
(§  184/  b),  but  is  not  used  in  the  genitive.  The  genitive  of 
the  relative  ber  (beffen,  beren)  must  be  used  instead. 

(b)  The  relative  must  agree  with  its  antecedent  in  gender 
and  number,  but  its  case  depends  on  its  construction  in  the 
clause  it  introduces. 


$an$f  ba3  (toeldje^)  trf)  fnl)r  the  house  which  I  saw. 

Dlofe,  Me  (toefdje)  trfj  falj,  the  rose  tohich  I  saw. 

9Jlattttf  beffett  ^ut  tt^  fanb,  the  man  whose  hat  I  found. 
^)er  SDfauut,  6ei  bent  (toeltfjem)  ic^  ttiD§ner  the  man  with  whom  I  live. 
T)er  -SJlamt,  ben  (tuele^en)  ii^  lenne,  the  man  whom  I  knoic. 

203.  Compound  Relatives.  —  3Ber  and  ttm$  (§  184,  a)  are  doth 
used  as  compound  relatives,  meaning  he  who,  whoever,  that 
which,  whatever,  what. 

leine  gfreunbe  !jat,  ift  arm.    He  who  has  no  friends  is  poor. 
Jja&e  getan,  ttw£  it^  (tun)  fonnte,    /  have  done  what  I  could. 


RELATIVE  PRONOUNS.  DEPENDENT  ORDER.     235 

(a)  2Ba$  is  also  generally  used  as  a  relative  after  neuter 
adjectives  and  neuter  pronouns. 


$dj  gefce  bir  ba3  fceftc,  ttw3  id)  fya&e*    /#we  to  you  the  best  that  I  have. 
<£r  fyatte  nidjt3,  tt»a3  id)  Jjafcen  tooflte,    //e  ftad  nothing  that  I  wanted. 

(7>)  When  referring  to  an  inanimate  object,  too(r)*  is  gen- 
erally used  with  prepositions  instead  of  a  relative  pronoun  : 
ftODOtt,  of  which;  tooritt,  in  ivhich;  toomtt,  with  which;  tooftir, 
for  which;  etc.  Compare  §  112  and  §  185. 

204.   The  Use  of  Relatives  differs  from  the  English  use. 
(a)  The  relative  is  never  omitted  in  German,  as  it  often  is  in 
English. 

The  house  I  bought,  ba3  $au3,  bag  idj  gefauft  Ija&e, 
The  man  you  saw,  bcr  SDlann,  ben  @ie  gefeljen  ^aben* 

(6)  When  the  antecedent  is  first  or  second  person,  (1)  it 
may  be  repeated  after  the  relative,  the  verb  agreeing  with  it. 


I  who  did  this,  idj,  ber  idj  bie3  gctau 
You  who  know  that,  bu,  bcr  bit  ba3  toeifft, 

(2)  If  it  is  not  repeated,  the  verb  is  third  person. 

Sdj,  bet  bie3  gctan  Ijat,  I  who  did  this. 
2)ttf  bcr  ba3  ttici§f  you  who  know  that. 


(c)  Commas  always  set  off  the  relative  clause  in  German. 

205.  Dependent  Order.  —  In  the  dependent  order,  the  per- 
sonal part  of  the  verb  (in  compound  tenses,  the  auxiliary) 
stands  at  the  end  of  the  clause.  This  order  is  used  in  all 
dependent  clauses.  These  are  introduced  either  by  a  relative 
pronoun,  or  by  a  subordinating  conjunction  (ba,  bdf$,  toeif,  ft)0, 
etc.).  They  are  set  off  from  the  main  clause  by  commas. 
Illustrations  :  All  the  preceding  examples  in  this  lesson. 


236  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

206.  Vocabulary. 

fcer  9$e'gett  I,  rain.  ftet'fjtjjf  industriously'),  hard  (adv. 
bic  ,3ci'tWt0  IV,  newspaper.  as  in  study  hard). 

Ite'&Ctt,  reg.  (tynben),  to  love.  flUicf  ftrf),  happy,  happily. 

toerfrw'fett,     fcerfaufte,     toerfauft'  getoijfjtt'ftrf),  usually. 

(Ijafcett),  to  sell.  e'Ben,  just  (as  used  in  just  so,  just 
totttt'fdjen,  reg.  (Jja&en),  to  wish.  now). 

207.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  1.  9Bir  lieben  getoofynlicf)  Me  8eute,  bie  gtiicflid)  finb. 
2.  @r  toimfdjt  bie  ^eitung,  bie  id)  eben  tierlanft  fyabe.      3.  @ie 
^at  leine  greunbe,  bie  ben  9tegen  tndgen,      4.  3Ber  flei^ig  at- 
beitet,  tt)irb  getoofynlici)  gut  ternen*     5.  2Bo  ift  ber  ^u^9er  beffen 
$8nfy  @ie  eben  ccrfauft  ^aben?      6.  £)a§  ift  atte^,  tt)a^  tt)ir 
gelefen  ^aben* 

(b)  1.    Here  is  the  newspaper  I  just  sold.       2.   Who  wishes 
little  and  works  hard  is  usually  happy.       3.   We  don't  know 
anybody  who  loves  the  rain.       4.    The  house  in  which  (write 
three  ways)  I  live  is  large.       5.    Is  that  the  old  man  to  whom 
you  just  gave  a  newspaper  ?       6.   No,  it  is  the  happy  old  man 
we  usually  see  here  in  (auf)  the  street. 

208.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.    Eead  2luf  ben  (Strain,  Easy  Reading,  62,  1—63,  4. 

2.  Point  out  illustrations  of  all  four  cases  of  the  relative ; 
of  the  use  of  ft)a$  as  a  relative ;  of  the  combination  of  tt)O(t)- 
with  a  preposition. 

(6)  1.  3ft  ba$  ber  2llte,  ber  bie  3e^un9  e&en  Ccrfauft  fyat? 
2.  £wt  er  getoofynlid)  atteS,  tt>a$  er  toimfdjt?  3.  ©efyen  @ie 
ben  glMHcfyen  2Hten,  beffen  ©ofyne  nat^  bent  9?egen  fleiftig 
ten?  4.  gieben  bie  $inber  bie  2llten,  bei  benen  fie 


INDIRECT   QUESTIONS.  237 

5.  (gtnb  Me  (Strain  fefyr  brett,  auf  toefdjen  bie 
©ofyne  ftei^ig  arbeiten?  6.  $ft  bte$  bet  8aben,  toorin  @ie 
.^Ijre  Sitter  eben  fcerfauft  fyaben? 

(c)  1.    This  is  the  old  man  we  usually  see  on  the  streets. 

2.  He  has  just  sold  the  papers   he   had  bought  yesterday. 

3.  I  sold  the  paper  in  which  I  had  read  everything  I  wished. 

4.  The  old  man,  whose  children  loved  him,  was  very  happy. 

5.  Whoever  wishes  much  must  usually  work  hard  to  (§  97) 
get  it.       6.   I  love  the  old  woman  to  whom  you  just  gave  that 
cloth. 

(d)  "Was   that   the   man  who  was  selling  papers   in   the 
rain?" 

"  Yes,  he  usually  works  very  hard.     Did  you  see  the  coat 

he  wore  ?  " 

"  No,  but  I  know  his  son,  who  played  with  us  yesterday." 

"  Do  you  mean  the  boy  whose  clothes  are  so  old  ?  " 

"  Yes,  the  one  who  just  went  across  the  street.     He  is  poor, 

but  he  is  always  happy." 

"Who  is  happy  is  never  very  poor." 


LESSON  XXXVII. 
Indirect  Questions. 


XPtr  tmffen,  was  unr  geben  fonnen  itnb  n?en  u>tr  cor  uns  fyaben. 


209.    Indirect   Questions.  —  When   a   direct  question  is  put 
into  a  subordinate  clause,  it  follows  the  dependent  order. 


238  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

(Direct)    Where  did  you  buy  your  book  $    280  Ijafcett  Sic  $ljr  SBurf)  <JC= 

lauft? 
(Indirect)    I  do  not  know  where  you  bought  your  book.     $rf)  tueifj  ttidjt, 

too  Sic  $ljr  23urfj  gclauft  Ijafcctu 

(Direct)    TFft*/  did  he  do  that  f    SBantm  Ijat  er  ba3  getan? 
(Indirect)    We  do  not  understand  why  he  did  that.    %8iv  ucrftcljcu  ttid)t, 

nwrum  er  bn$  getatt  Jjat 

210.  The  Article  with  Parts  of  the  Body.  —  When  words  for 
parts  of  the  body  are  used  in  the  predicate,  German  generally 
has   the  definite  article,  often  with  the  dative  of  a  personal 
or  reflexive  pronoun  (fief))  where  English  has  the  possessive. 
In  a  prepositional  phrase  the  article  alone  is  usually  sufficient. 

/  broke  my  hand.    3d)  Ijafcc  tnir  bte  ^anb 

He  hurt  his  foot.    (£r  Ijat  ftdj  ben  $ 

He  had  some  paper  in  his  hand.    (£r  fyatte  etttaS  papier  in  ber  , 

211.  Vocabulary. 


ber  Stfadj'mittag,  bic  ^ac^mittagc  believe;   with  dative  of  person 

II,     afternoon  ;     written    small  believed,  but  accusative  of  thing. 

with  adverbs  :   geftew  tmdjmit=  /  believe  you,  irfj  rjIauBc  S^ncn* 

tagf  Ijeute  nar^mittag.  'I  believe  it,  itf)  glaufce  e§. 

bet    @trunt^fr    bic   Strihttpfe    II,  bortf  ^ere,  yonder. 

stocking.  nad)'mtttag§,  adv.,  afternoons,  in 

ber  235egf  bic  SScgc  II,  toay,  roa^.  ^e  afternoon. 

reg.    (^aBcn)f    ^o    ^mA;,  pitJci'lcn,  sometimes. 


212.  Oral  Drill. 


(a)  1.  3d)  toetft  ntd^t,  tDarum  er  feme  ©triimpfe  an  ben 
gn^en  ^atte»  2.  (ga^en  ©ter  too  bte  Snaben  geftern  na^mtt> 
tag  nwren?  3.  @r  tierfte^t  ntcfjt,  toarnm  icf)  i^m  sntoeifen  ntdjt 
gtaube.  4.  3Btffen  @te,  too  toir  ben  SBeg  nac^  ber  @tabt  finben 
f  dnnen  ?  5.  ^eben  sJfa^mittag  fragen  fie,  toie  fie  nac^  §aufe 


INDIRECT   QUESTIONS.  239 

fonttnen.      6.  Qtf)  fefje  ntdjt,  ttrie  ba$  Sinb  nacfymittagS  ben 
2Beg  bort  bnrrf)  ben  SBalb  finbet. 

(b)  1.   Do   you   know   where   I   lost   my    other    stocking? 
2.    He  asked  why  we  didn't  believe  him.       3.    I  don't  under- 
stand why  you   sometimes  cannot  find  your  way.       4.   We 
wanted  to  know  who  was  there.       5.    She  doesn't  know  why 
she  has  to  stay  at  home  afternoons.       6.   They  don't  under- 
stand where  we  were  yesterday  afternoon. 

213.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.   Eead  2luf  ben  ©traften,  Easy  Reading,  63,  5—64,  14. 
2.   Point  out  illustrations  of  indirect  questions ;  of  the  use 
of  the  article  with  parts  of  the  body. 

(&)  1.  3Btffen  @te,  ttrie  bte  beiben  Snaben  nadjmtttagS  ben 
9Beg  ftnben?  2.  23erftel)t  ber  grennb,  nrnrum  man  ifjm  gn> 
toetfen  ntdjt  gtcmbt?  3.  gragt  ber  -3u^9er  toa$  @i^  in  ber 
§anb  ^aben?  4.  SBetp  ber  etne  Snaber  ttmrnm  ber  anbere 
letne  ©triimpfe  an  ben  gitften  ^at?  5.  §aben  @te  gefe^en, 
lute  »ir  geftern  na^mittag  SSaU  fptcftcn?  6.  2Bet£  ba^  2)?ab- 
(^enr  tDarnm  bte  anberen  @(^uler  bort  finb? 

(c)  1.   I  don't  know  why  you  don't  sometimes  study  after- 
noons.      2.   We  can't  understand  how  the  boy  lost  his  stock- 
ing.      3.   They  don't  see  where  the  way  through  the  wood 
lies.       4.   I  do  not  know  what  that  boy  has   in  his   hand. 
5.   We  knew  where  you  were  yesterday  afternoon.       6.   He 
can't  understand  why  we  never  believe  him. 

(c?)  "Do  you  know  where  those  two  boys  were  yesterday 
afternoon  ?  " 

"No,  I  don't  know,  but  they  are  usually  on  the  streets 
afternoons." 


240  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

"I  believe  you.  I  don't  see  why  they  run  on  the  street 
with  no  stockings  on  their  feet ! " 

"  What  a  shame  !  But  look !  What  kind  of  boys  are  those 
yonder  ?  Shall  I  ask  why  they  aren't  at  home  ?  " 

"  Wait !  We  can  see  what  they  do  there.  Sometimes  these 
children  know  the  way  better  than  we  think." 

"  Yes,  do  you  see  how  well  they  know  the  way  ?  " 

LESSON  XXXVIII. 
Conjunctions. 


IDenn  UTenfcfyen  ausehtanbergefytt, 
So  fagen  fie:  2Juf  XPieberfebn.  — 


214.  The  Coordinating  Conjunctions,  unb,  and;  abet  and  [on* 
bent,  but;  bentt,  for;  and  ober,  or,  do  not  affect  the  order. 
They  are  used  in  compound  sentences. 

3d)  fam,  ft&e*  cr  fling  nadj  ^a«f e.    /  came,  but  he  went  home. 
(£r  ttiufj  bidden,  bemt  id)  jmtft  nadj  ^anfc  gelftctt*    He  must  stay,  for  I 
have  to  go  home. 

(a)  When  but  in  English  introduces  a  contrast  with  a  pre- 
ceding negative  —  that  is,  when  you  can  say  "  but  on  the  con- 
trary," or  "  but  instead  "  —  German  uses  f onbent,  not  abet* 

(£t  ift  ttidjt  wein  ^teunbf  fonbern  mein  ^cinb*    He  is  not  my  friend,  but 
my  enemy. 

<3ie  ift  mityt  fr^on,  fottbent  fyti%litf)f  abcr  ftc  ift  rciscnb.    She  is  not  beau- 
tiful, but  homely,  but  she  is  charming. 

(1)  @onbern  is  always  used  in  the  correlative,  not  only  .  .  »  but 

also.    35ttr  ttmrett  nid^t  nur  arm,  fonbern  aud)  fran!.     We  were  not  only 

poor,  but  also  sick. 


CONJUNCTIONS.  241 

215.  Subordinating  Conjunctions  are  used  in  complex  sen- 
tences and  are  followed  by  the  dependent  order  (§  205).  The 
commonest  ones  are  al$,  ba,  baft,  efye,  uadjjbem,  ob,  fobalb,  toal)* 
renb,  toett,  and  toenn. 

3dj  fam,  cljc  cr  ttadj  §aufe  gtitg,     /  came  before  he  went  home. 
($r  rnufj  foramen,  tticil  id)  twdj  §aufe  gcljc.    .He  rawsz  come,  because  I  am 
going  home. 

(a)  Eemember  that  the  main  clause  is  inverted  when  the 
dependent  clause  precedes.  See  §  113,  b. 


When  he  saw  me,  he  went  home.    WW  cr  ttttd)  falj,  gtttg  cr  ttarf) 
As  you  have  no  book,  I  shall  give  you  mine.    $)a  8tc  feitt  S3ttt^  Ijabcn, 
itf)  Shucn  ba^  mcinc  (jcbeu. 


216.  Vocabulary. 

ber  4>wtb,  bic  $unbe  II,  c?o^.  jung,  young. 

bet  SJlatft,  bie  $tarfte  II,  market  ;  al$f    conjunc.,  when;   used   with 

auf  bcm  or  ben  9Warftf  a«  or  to  past  time. 

^e  market.  ba,  conjunc.,  as,  giving  a  reason, 

bcr  SBa'gCtt,  bic  23agcn  I,  wagon;  not  referring  to  time. 

cart  ;  carriage.  f  ptt'bcrrt,  &?^. 

ba§  S5rcttf  bic  SBrcttcr  III,  &oard.  ttici(f  conjunc.,  because. 

ba£  (5JcmU'fcf  gen.,  bc3  ©cmitfc^  I,  njcmt,  conjunc.,  when,  used  gener- 

collective,  vegetables.  ally  with  present  time  ;  whenever. 

217.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  1.  2lte  id)  auf  ben  SKarft  ging,  faf)  td^  ben  @unb.  2.  @r 
tag  nt(^t  auf  ber  @tra§er  fonbern  auf  etuem  Srett  unter  bem 
SCBageu.  3.  ©a  e$  fo  fpctt  ttrirb,  miiffeu  tt)ir  uad^  §aufe  gefyen. 
4.  9Beuu  mir  unfereu  §uub  finbeu,  miiffeu  tt)tr  auf  bett  SKarft 
ge^eu,  n)ei(  uufer  SBageu  bort  ift*  5.  ©ie  jutige  grau  ^at  leiu 
©emiife  gefauft,  met!  fie  e§  utd^t  mag.  6.  211$  tdj  in  ber  @tabt 
tt)arr  ^abe  id)  Diet  3fntereffattte$  fl^f^^ti. 


242  NEW  GERMAN  GRAMMAR. 

(6)  1.  When  it  is  cold,  the  dog  lies  on  a  board.  2.  When 
we  went  to  the  market,  we  bought  vegetables  out  of  a  wagon. 
3.  As  the  dog  has  no  board  on  which  he  can  lie,  he  will  get 
very  tired.  4.  They  didn't  go  to  the  market,  but  into  the 
wood,  because  it  was  so  warm.  5.  It  wasn't  cold,  but  very 
warm,  when  we  drove  in  (mtt)  the  carriage  to  the  market. 
6.  He  didn't  buy  any  vegetables,  but  went  home  with  his  dog. 

218.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  Read  2luf  bem  3Karft,  Easy  Reading,  65,  1-29. 

2.  Point  out  illustrations  of  coordinating  conjunctions  ;  of 
the  use  of  fonbern  ;  of  subordinating  conjunctions  ;  of  the 
inversion  of  the  main  clause. 


(&)  1.  @al)en  @te  Me  afte  $rau,  ate  fie  auf  bem  2ftar!t  tl)r 
®emiife  fcerfaufte?  2.  gat  il)r  gunb  em  33rett,  toenn  er 
unter  bem  SBagen  (tegt?  3.  SJhtft  fie  tmmer  auf  ben  2ftarft 
gefyen,  tflett  fie  fo  alt  ift?  4.  $Bo  I)abe  ii)  {ene  grau  gefefyen, 
bie  ntd)t  ttur  attr  fonbern  fefyr  arm  ift?  5.  §aben  bte  Sinber 
ben  §nnb  gefefjen,  ate  er  anf  einem  53rett  unter  bem  SBagen 
lag?  6.  SSerfauft  bte  gran  fciel  ©emitfe,  lt)enn  fie  mtt  ifjrem 
§unb  auf  ben  9J?arIt  ge^t? 

(c)  1.  As  the  dog  was  lying  on  the  board,  the  old  woman 
did  not  go  to  market,  but  waited  beside  her  cart.  2.  When 
she  went  to  market,  the  dog  lay  on  a  board  under  the  cart. 
3.  When  it  is  very  warm,  she  does  not  sell  many  (singular) 
vegetables.  4.  We  did  not  buy  our  vegetables  of  (turn) 
the  young  woman,  but  of  this  one,  because  she  was  old. 
5.  Whenever  we  read  an  exercise  we  find  new  words.  6.  The 
old  woman  did  not  go  home,  but  she  stayed  at  the  market, 
because  she  wanted  to  sell  her  vegetables. 


DEPENDENT   ORDER   FOR   MODALS.  243 

(d)  "  Was  that  old  woman's  dog  lying  under  her  cart  when 
you  were  going  to  the  market  this  morning  ?  " 

"  Yes,  when  she  goes  to  the  market  to  sell  her  vegetables, 
he  lies  on  a  board  and  waits." 

"  As  it  is  usually  so  cold  at  the  market,  he  ought  to  have 
not  only  a  board,  but  also  a  warm  cloth." 

"  He  cannot  have  everything  he  wishes,  because  the  old 
woman  is  so  poor." 

"It  is  funny!  He  does  not  go  home,  but  waits  all  day 
under  the  cart." 

"  The  poor  dog  !     What  a  shame  !  " 

LESSON  XXXIX. 
Dependent  Order  for  Modals. 


Drum  frofyltd?  in  ben  Kampf  fytneml 
IDer  fiegen  null,  mug  fterben  fonnen. 

3a,  foil  bas  £eben  rectyt  gebettm, 
IHu§  man  bem  Cobe  aud?  was  gonnen.  — 


219.  Modals  in  Dependent  Sentences.  —  In  the  dependent 
order  in  simple  tenses,  the  auxiliaries  of  mode  stand  at  the 
end  of  the  clause,  just  like  auxiliaries  of  tense. 

I  knew  why  he  had  to  go.    Qdj  ttwfjte,  ttwrwtt  cr  gdjen  mu|te, 

(a)  In  a  compound  tense  of  the  modal,  when  there  is  a  de- 
pendent infinitive,  the  tense  auxiliary  (fjabetl  or  fterbett)  stands 
just  before  the  rest  of  the  verb  phrase  ("two  infinitives"). 
This  same  rule  applies  to  the  verbs  fefyen,  fyoren,  etc.,  men- 
tioned  in  §  166. 


244  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

Here  is  an  exercise  you  will  have  to  write.    $m  ift  cine  5tttfgafief  bie  btt 

unrft  fdjreifcen  mitff  cm 
That  is  the  man  who  wanted  to  buy  my  horse.    $a3  ift  bcr  Sftatttt,  bet 

ttteitt  $ferb  Ijat  faufett  foollem 

Note.  —  In  translating  two  or  more  German  infinitives  at  the  end  of  a 
clause,  always  begin  at  the  end,  then  take  the  one  next  to  the  end,  then 
the  third  from  the  end. 

3d)  fyabe  eud)  tyieten  fybren  fonnen.    Iivas  able  to  hear  you  play. 

220.  The   Use  of   bdj}*  —  The   conjunction   baJ3,  that,  intro- 
duces dependent  clauses.     It  must  not  be  confused  with  the 
demonstrative    or    relative    bd$*     Remember    that   a    comma 
precedes  bctf;. 

He  knows  that  I  shall  come.    (£r  toci$,  ba$  id)  fommen  ttierbc* 

I  saw  that  you  were  tired.    $tf)  fiabe  gcfc^en,  ba^  6ic  miibc  ttiarcn* 

221.  Vocabulary. 

bcr  £opff  bic  Xb^fe  II,  jar,  pot.          baff,  conjunc.,  that. 

^df'fcnf  reg.  (Jjafcett)f  to  hope.  .    C^ef  conjunc.,  before. 
al'ledei,      indeclinable     adj.,    all      Itatfjbem',  conjunc.,  after. 

kinds  of.  fo&afb',  conjunc.,  as  soon  as. 

frill),  early  ;  ntorgen  frii^f  to-mor-      ta)d^renbf  conjunc.,  while,  indicat- 

row  morning.  ing  duration  of  time. 

222.  Oral  Drill. 


(a)  l.  Qfy  fyoffe,  ba^  @te  morgen  frit^  tDerben  fotnmen 
lt)oflen»  2.  ^arfjbem  fie  atterlet  £opfe  ^atte  t)erfaufen  fbn- 
nen,  gtng  fie  urn  bte  @(fe.  3,  SBafyrenb  tt)ir  arbetten  tnitf^ 
fen,  bitrfen  bte  anberen  ^inber  fptelen.  4,  @^e  bte  ^^^9e^ 
urn  bte  @dfe  tt)erben  ge^en  fonnen,  rt)trb  tf)r  93ater  fie  fefyen, 
5.  @obalb  er  bte  Slftttbcfyen  in  bie  ©c^nle  ^at  fommen  fefyen, 
Ia^  er  bte  2lufgabe.  6.  SBir  ^offen,  ba^  ba$  ^inb  nid)t  ju 
(ange  ttrirb  arbeiten  mitffen* 


DEPENDENT   ORDER   FOR   MODALS.  245 

(6)  1.  He  hopes  that  he  will  not  have  to  translate  the  sen- 
tence while  the  teacher  is  there.  2.  As  soon  as  they  have 
been  able  to  sell  all  kinds  of  jars,  they  will  go  home.  3.  To- 
morrow morning  I  shall  go  to  school  after  I  have  been  per- 
mitted to  play.  4.  Her  mother  had  called  her  before  she  had 
wanted  to  go.  5.  I  hope  that  you  will  not  have  to  go  to- 
morrow morning.  6.  We  know  that  the  young  woman  at 
(an)  the  corner  sells  all  kinds  of  jars. 

223.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.   Read  2luf  bem  3ftarft,  Easy  Reading,  66,  1—68,  3. 
2.   Point  out  examples  of  the  modals  in  dependent  sentences, 
and  of  the  use  of  ba. 


(b)  L  $ennen  @ie  Me  gran,  Me  tfyren  ^u^S6*1  3U  §aufe 
fjat  faffen  muff  en?      2.  SBtffen  @ie,  toarnm  fie  tfyn  fyat  laffen 
tooffen?      3.  3ft  ba$  Me  gran,  Me  an  ber  (5<fe  fyat  ftefyen 
biirfen  ?      4.  3Ba$  tat  fie,  nacfybem  fie  atterfet  £dpf  e  fyatte  fcer* 
!anfen  !dnnen?      5.  §offt  fie,  ba£  fie  morgen  fritf)  ttrirb  !om- 
men  lonnen,  ef)e  fie  jn  miibe  tDtrb?      6.  3Bet§  fie,  ba^  fie  n?trb 
gefyen  miiffen,  fobalb  fie  all  Me  £opfe  ^at  t)erfanfen  li)nnen? 

(c)  1.   I  hope  that  the  young  woman  has  been  able  to  sell 
all  those  jars.       2.    She  will  come  to-morrow  morning,  before 
we  shall  want  to  see  her.       3.    After  she  had  had  to  stand  at 
the  corner  all  the  afternoon,  she  was  very  tired,       4.   Her  boy 
will   be  happy   as    soon  as  he  has  been  permitted  to  play. 
5.    She  had  stayed  at  the  corner  while  she  had  been  able  to 
sell  all  kinds  of  jars.       6.  I  saw  him  before  he  was  able  to  run 
across  the  street. 

(d)  "  We  all  hope  that  you  will  be  able  to  come  to-morrow 
morning." 


246  NEW   GERMAN   GRA     MAR. 

"  Thank  you,  I  shall  come  as  soon  a  I  have  seen  my  little 
brother  go  to  school." 

"  After  you  have  done  that,  where  shall  we  play  ?  " 

"  I  hope  that  you  will  want  to  play  here." 

"  I  like  to  play  ball.  But  before  we  shall  be  permitted  to 
play,  we  shall  have  to  write  our  exercises.'7 

"  What  a  shame  !    I  don't  see  why  we  always  have  to  work." 

LESSON    XL. 
Review. 


Die  UTenfcfyen,  bie  bie  Hut^e  fucfyett,  bie  ftnben  Kufye  mmmermetjr, 
ZDeil  fie  bie  Bufye,  bie  fie  fuctyen,  in  (Eile  jagen  t?or  fid?  °fyer. 

-Gutter. 

224.  The  Modified  Demonstrative.  —  In  conversation  German 
generally  uses  ber  for  the  demonstrative,  when  this  is  modified 
by  a  phrase  or  clause  (§  190,  d).     In  more  formal  language 
berjetlige  may  be  used.     Remember  that  this  is  the  regular 
translation  for  the  one,  the  ones.     See  §§  149,  d  and  204,  a. 

Where  are  those  (the  ones)  I  gave  you  f    280  fittb  bte,  bie  id)  Qljttett  gafc  ? 
Is  he  the  one  (whom)  you  saw?    $ft  er   ber,  ben  (berjenige,   ben  or 

ttelrfjen)  Ste  fallen? 
She  is  not  the  one  who  came.    Sie  ift  tttdjt  bte,  bie  (biejeuige,  bie  or 

tuefrfje)  fam. 

225.  Vocabulary. 

ber  ^fen'itig,  5tuet  pfennig  H,pfen-  ba§  $fmtb,  jttiet  ^fimb  II,  pound. 

nig,  a  German  coin  worth  about  fitttf'^ig,  fifty. 

a  quarter  of  a  cent.  tttBg'lidj,  possible. 

ber  $ret3,  bte  ^reife  II,  price.  uofl,  full,   usually  followed  by  a 

bie  $artof'fef  IV,  potato.  noun  without  a  preposition  :  full 

bie  28a're  IV,  commodity ;  ware.  of  potatoes,  Hull  $artoffeltt. 


REVIEW.  247 

226.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  1,  @tnb  ba$  Me,  Me  Dott  Sartoffefn  toaren?  2.  ZBaren 
{ene  SBaren  Mejentgen,  toetdje  ttrir  geftern  fanften?  3,  (£$  tft 
ntijgttct),  baf;  er  berjentge  tft,  ber  mir  Me  Sartoffetn  ju  fnnfjtg 
pfennig  aerfauft  t)afc  4.  2Ba3  tft  ber  $reis?  23a3  f often  bte 
auf  bem  Sgrette  baf  ^funb?  5,  Siefer  ©met  tft  ber,  ber 
t)ott  2Bitrfte  war.  6,  3)te,  bte  bte,  bte  bte  Slufgabe  fafen,  fcer* 
ftanben,  bitrfen  narf)  §aufe  gefyen.  ( Word  order  for  translating  : 
1.2-8-3-4-7-5-6-9-12-10-11.) 

(&)  1.  Is  this  pfennig  the  one  you  lost?  2.  Those  wares 
are  the  ones  we  saw  at  the  market  yesterday.  3.  These  po- 
tatoes are  the  ones  the  woman  had  wanted  to  sell  at  (ju)  fifty 
pfennigs  the  pound.  4.  That  book  is  the  one  my  brother  lost 
at  school  yesterday.  5.  Is  it  possible  that  the  basket  can  be 
full  of  potatoes  ?  6.  That  jar  is  the  one  she  sold  yesterday 
at  (gu)  a  good  price. 

227.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.   Bead  gfof  bem  Sftarft,  Easy  Reading,  68,  4  —  69,  10. 

2.  Point  out  illustrations  of  the  modified  demonstrative ; 
of  dependent  clauses  with  relatives  and  subordinating  conjunc- 
tions ;  of  modals  in  dependent  clauses. 

(6)  1*  ^ft  btefe  alte  grau  bte,  bte  etn  ^funb  $artoffetn 
laufte?  2.  SBar  btefer  Sftann  ber,  roeldjer  einen  fyofyen  ^rete 
fitr  bte  SBaren  gab?  3.  @tnb  bte  Sartoffeln  bte,  bte  bte  alte 
gratt  511  fihifgtfl  pfennig  ba3  $funb  •  toerfauf te  ?  4.  3ft  e$ 
mogttd),  baft  ber  SBagen  tool!  SBaren  tft?  5.  SBar  Jener  Sorb 
berjentge,  lt)el(^er  stDet  Sftarf  fitnfjtg  pfennig  loftete  ?  6.  3ft 
ber,  ben  id)  laufe,  beffer  al^  berjenige,  melc^er  bte  anbere  gran 
gelanft 


248  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

(c)  Write  the  demonstratives  and  relatives  two  ways. — 1.   Is 
that  basket  the  one  that  is  full  of   potatoes?       2.   No,  it's 
the  one  that  cost  fifty  pfennigs.       3.    What  is  the  price  of 
these  potatoes  the  pound?       4.    It  is  possible  that  that  old 
woman  is  the  one  who  was  carrying  a  basket  full  of  pota- 
toes.      5.  That  boy  is  the  one  she  has  had  to  leave  at  home. 
6.    This  old  woman   is   the   one   who   had  wanted   to  go  to 
market  so  early  this  morning. 

(d)  "  Is  that  boy  the  one  whom  the  old  woman  had  to  leave 
at  home  yesterday  ?  " 

"  Yes,  his  mother  is  the  one  who  wanted  to  take  her  wares 

to  market." 

"  Were  the  wares  the  ones  that  cost  fifty  pfennigs  ?  " 

"  Yes,  that  was  the  price,  I  think,  but  it  is  possible  that  she 

wanted  to  get  more." 

"  She  also  had  a  basket  full  of  potatoes,  didn't  she  ?  " 

"  Yes,  she  is  the  one  who  had  the  basket  full  of  potatoes." 

228.  Review  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  3Bo  ift  bet  2ttte,  beffen  @of)ti  ^eitnngen  aerfauft? 
2*  ©tub  bie  Sftcmner  gtittfiid),  toetdje  nac!)  bent  3tegen  fo  fleifsig 
arbeiten?  3.  SBtffen  @te,  ttwrnm  Jener  Heine  3?ttttge  leine 
©triimpfe  an  ben  gii^en  I)at?  4*  §at  ber  Secret  gefefyen,  itrie 
fleifjig  ttrir  geftern  narfjmittag  ternten?  5,  §aben  bie  $naben 
ben  §nnb  gefe^en,  al$  er  anf  einem  33rette  unter  ben  9Bagen  ^at 
Hegen  miiffen?  6.  §offt  ber  @d^uferr  ba£  er  att  bie  @a^e  in 
biefer  2lnfgabe  tt)irb  iiberfe^en  fonnen  ? 

(5)  1.  That  is  the  old  man  who  sells  newspapers  on  the 
street  afternoons.  2.  Whoever  works  hard  is  usually  happy. 
3.  I  cannot  see  what  you  have  in  your  hand.  4.  She  doesn't 


SEPARABLE  AND  INSEPARABLE  VERBS.      249 

understand  why  they  never  believe  her.  5.  The  old  woman 
with  the  dog  went  tq  the  market  because  she  had  to  buy  a  bas- 
ket full  of  potatoes.  6.  I  hope  that  you  will  want  to  come 
to-morrow  morning  as  soon  as  you  have  been  able  to  translate 
this  exercise. 

(c)  At  the  Market.  —  This  morning  I  saw  an  old  woman 
who  was  going  to  the  market.  She  was  carrying  a  basket  on 
her  arm.  It  was  not  the  one  she  had  had  at  the  market  yes- 
terday ;  she  had  had  to  leave  that  at  home  with  her  little  boy ; 
but  it  was  one  which  she  had  just  been  able  to  buy.  After  she 
had  gone  around  the  market,  she  found  the  wares  which  she 
had  wanted  to  buy.  Another  old  woman  sold  her  two  pounds 
of  potatoes  at  fifty  pfennigs.  She  did  not  understand  why 
they  cost  so  much.  As  soon  as  she  had  been  able  to  buy 
everything  she  wished,  she  went  home. 

LESSON  XLI. 
Separable  and  Inseparable  Verbs. 


Das  fommt  barauf  °an.     That  depends. 


229.  Inseparable  Verbs  differ  from  simple  verbs  in  only  one 
way :  they  never  take  the  prefix  ge-  for  the  past  participle. 
The  inseparable  prefix  is  always  directly  before  the  verb, 
attached  to  it,  and  (except  mifc)  is  never  accented.  The  in- 
separable prefixes  are  be-,  ettip*,  ettt-,  er*,  ge=,  mifc,  tier*,  jet-. 

Synopsis  of  Inseparable  Verbs. 

WEAK,  STRONG. 

Pres.   id)  ersfityfe,  /  tell.  idj  Uerftefjc,  I  understand. 

Past,  irf)  ersfifjfte,  I  told.  irfj  toerftmtb,  I  understood. 


250  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

Synopsis  of  Inseparable  Verbs  (Continued). 

WEAK.  STRONG. 

Fut.          idj    toerfce    er$ftf}(en,    /  id)  toerbe  toerfteljett,  /  shall  under- 

shall  tell.  stand. 

Perf.          id)  Ijabe  erpljft,  /  have  id)  Ijafee  toerftattbett,  /  have  under- 
told,  stood. 

Past  Perf.  id)  fjatte  ersafjlt,  /  had  id)  fjatte  fcerftattbett,  /  had  under- 
told,  stood. 

Fut.  Perf.  id)  werbe  eraafjlt  Jjaben,  idj  foerbe  fcerftanbett  Ijaben,  /  shall 

I  shall  have  told.  have  understood. 

(a)  Conjugate  each  tense  in  full. 

230.  Separable  Verbs.  —  All  other  prefixes  are  separable. 
In  the  Easy  Beading  they  are  marked  with  a  degree  sign, 
thus:  °. 

Separable  verbs  have  the  following  peculiarities  :  — 

(a)  The  prefix  always  takes  the  accent,  as  in  English :  pick 
up',  take  down'. 

tm'fattjjett,  fmg  tut',  an'gcfangen,  to  begin. 

(6)  With  simple  tenses  in  independent  clauses  the  prefix  is 
put  at  the  end  of  the  clause. 

$dj  fange  fjeute  fciefe  $rfieit  mt»    /  begin  this  work  to-day. 

$11  ftttgft  geftertt  bcinc  5htfgafce  an.     You  began  your  exercise  yesterday. 

(c)  In  compound  tenses  and  in  dependent  clauses  the  prefix 
is  attached  to  the  verb. 

ttrirb  cr  an'fangen*     To-morrow  he  will  begin. 
iwf  too  ttrir  an'ftngen  ?    Did  you  see  where  we  began  ? 

(d)  The  signs  ju  of  the  infinitive  and  ge-  of  the  past  parti- 
ciple are  put  between  prefix  and  verb. 

<Sie  fjafcen  feljr  gut  an'fjefattfletu     They  have  begun  very  well. 

SSarum  wiiuf d)t  i^r  nidjt  an^ufangctt  ?    Why  don't  you  wish  to  begin  ? 


SEPARABLE  AND  INSEPARABLE  VERBS.    251 

231.  Conjugation  of  Separable  Verbs. 

anfangen,  to  begin. 

PRESENT  TENSE.  SYNOPSIS. 

irf>  fange  an  .  Pres.  id)  fange  an 

tut  fangft  an  Past.  id)  fing  an 

cr  fangt  an  Fut.  itty  toerbe  anfangen 

ton*  fangen  an  Perf.  id)  Ijafce  angefangcn 

if)*  fangt  an  Past  Perf.  id)  f)atte  angefangen 

fie  fangcn  an  Fat.  Perf.  id)  tuerbe  angefangcn  fjafcen 

Formal  Imperative,   fangen  Sic  an. 

(a)  Conjugate  each  tense  throughout  in  full.  In  like  manner  conju- 
gate cmffyoren,  fortfafyren,  and  ftattfinben  (§  234). 

232.  Use   of    Separable    Verbs.  —  In    translating    a   printed 
or   written  sentence   from  the  German,  always  look  toward 
the  end  for  a  separable  prefix,  as  separable  verbs  are  very 
common. 

When  two  verbs  mean  the  same  in  German  and  one  is  sepa- 
rable, Germans  usually  prefer  to  use  this.  Thus,  while  Qd) 
fyabe  bte  Slufgabe  begonnen,  and  33ttte,  tooften  @te  ba$  genfter 
off  Tien?  are  perfectly  correct,  a  German  is  more  likely  to  say, 
Qd)  fyabe  bte  3Iufgabe  an'gefcmgen,  and  4Bttte,  tooden  ©ie  ba£ 
genfter  auf 'tnadjen  ? 

233.  The  Complementary  Infinitive  usually  follows  the  sepa- 
rable prefix.     A  modified  infinitive  phrase  is  generally  pre- 
ceded by  a  comma. 

Please  begin  to  work.    SBitte,  fangen  <Sie  an  511  ar&eiten ! 

He  began  to  read  the  sentence.    (£r  fjat  angefangen,  ben  Sai?  $n  fefen, 

(a)  In  a  subordinate  clause  the  complementary  infinitive 
usually  follows  the  verb. 

Before  you  begin  to  read.    (£lje  <5ie  anfangen  $n  lefen. 


252  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

234.  Vocabulary. 

ber  <5tttbCttt',   be3  (Stttbettteit,   bie  tive  where  English  has  the  verbal 

©tttbetttett  IV,  student.  in  -ing. 

bte  Sftenfitr'  IV,  student's  duel.  fort'fafjrett,    fufjr    fort',    fort'ge= 

bic  ttttttoerfitat'  IV,  university;  auf  fasten  (fjafcen),  cr  faf>rt  fort',  to 

bcr  tltti&erfitat,   a£    ^e    univer-  continue,  keep  on;  with  the  in- 

sity.  finitive  where   English  has  the 

bte  $erfcitt'bttttg  IV,  fraternity.  verbal  in  -ing. 

att'fattgen,  fmg  an',    an'gefmtgett  ftatt'fmben,    fanb    ftatt',    ftatt'ge= 

)f  er  fattgt  an'f  to  begin.  funben  (fjabett),  to  take  place. 

auf,    auf'ge^ilrt  fe^(tenf  fo^tf  gefo^ten 

with  the  infini-  er  fidjt,  to  fence,  fight. 


235.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  1.  2Bcmn  fcmgen  bte  ©tubenten  ber  beutft^en  Unifcerfi- 
taten  an  ju  f  etfjten  ?      2.  ®te  SJienfuren  ber  SSerMnbung  finben 
jeben  Sag  ftatt      3.  §aben  @te  fortgefa^ren,  ^fyr  S3u(^  ju 
fefen?     4.  §urte  bte  3)?enfur  geftern  nac^mittag  auf?      5. 
tt)itnf(^er  etne  neue  3lufgabe  anjufangen.      6.  (Sine  lange 

fnr  ^at  geftern  anf  ber  Untfcerfitat  ftattgefunben, 

(b)  1.   How  long  do  the  students  of  the  fraternities  keep  on 
fighting  ?       2.  A  duel  is  taking  place  now.       3.  It  has  begun, 
but  it  has  not  yet  stopped.       4.    The  students  at  the  univer- 
sity do  not  wish  to  stop  ;   they  wish  to  continue.        5.    In 
which  fraternity  at  the  university  did  the  duel  take  place? 
6.   I  had  stopped  when  he  had  just  begun. 

236.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  Bead  Unter  ben  &tnbenten,  Easy  Reading,  71,1  —  72,  7. 

2.  Point  out  illustrations  of  the  use  of  separable  verbs. 
Separable  prefixes  in  the  Easy  Reading  are  marked  with  a 
degree  sign,  thus  :  °. 


SEPARABLE  AND  INSEPARABLE  VERBS.      253 

(6)  1.  ginben  triefe  3ftenfuren  auf  beutfdjeu  Untoerfitaten  ftatt? 
2.  SBatm  fyoren  bte  ©tubenteu  auf  ju  fecfyteu?  3.  gaugen  nur 
bie  ©tubenten  ber  SSerbinbungen  mtt  btefen  SSfteufureu  an? 
4.  galjren  fie  fort  ju  fedjteu,  ober  fyoren  fie  auf?  5.  23er* 
ftefyeti  @te,  ttwrum  fie  je  angefaugen  ^aben?  6.  2BUuf(^t  ein 
©tubent  anjufangen,  na^bem  bie  SJfenfur  aufgefyijrt  f)at  ? 

(c)  1.   At  German  universities  many  duels  take  place  in  the 
fraternities.       2.   When  the  students  begin  to  fight,  they  con- 
tinue a  long  time.       3.    As  soon  as  they  stop  fighting,  they 
all  go  home.       4.    Sometimes   the   students   do   not  wish  to 
continue,  but  they  are  not  permitted  to  stop.       5.    After  they 
have  begun  to  fight,  they  have  to  keep  on.       6.    It  is  hard  to 
stop  when  they  have  begun  to  fight. 

(d)  "  Do  the  students  at  German  universities  begin  to  fight 
as  soon  as  they  come  to  the  (auf  bte)  university  ?  " 

"  No,  they  wait  a  long  time  before  they  begin  to  fight." 

"  But  after  they  have  begun  to  fight,  they  usually  continue, 
don't  they?'" 

"  Yes,  the  duels  take  place  every  day,  and  when  they  have 
begun  it  is  usually  hard  to  stop  fighting." 

"  I  don't  see  why  they  have  to  keep  on  fighting  after  they 
have  begun." 

"  They  like  to  (§  161).  The  brave  ones  keep  on  fighting. 
The  others  sometimes  have  to  stop." 


254  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

LESSON  XLII. 
Separable  and  Inseparable  Verbs. 


gefyt  es  los.     (Familiar  for)  Now  it  is  going  to  begin. 
Das  falit  mtr  gar  ntcfyt  em.    /  haven't  the  least  idea  (of  doing  that). 

237.  Meaning  of  Prefixes.  —  The  meaning  of  many  insepa- 
rable prefixes  is  hard  to  define.     In  general  trtip-  equals  mis-y 
jer-  means  to  pieces,  and  ettt-  denotes  separation. 

fottfeit,  to  run;  entfattfett,  to  run  away. 

toerftdjett,  to  understand;  miff'&erfteljett,  to  misunderstand. 

fcredjett,  to  break;  serfcredjett,  to  smash,  to  break  to  pieces. 

(a)  The  separable  prefixes  usually  have  their  literal  meaning : 

fteI)Cttf  to  stand;  (Utf  ftdjett,  to  stand  up,  get  up. 
fcredjett,  to  break;  nfc'&redjett,  to  break  off. 
(aufett,  to  run  ;  roeg'laufett,  to  run  away,  to  escape. 

238.  Common  Prefixes.  —  The  four  prepositions,  bttrdj,  U&er, 
Utn,  and  tmter,  are  sometimes  separable,  sometimes  inseparable. 

(a)  They  are  inseparable  when  used  in  a  figurative  meaning, 
or  one  not  exactly  literal.  The  verbs  are  usually  transitive, 
have  fyaben  as  auxiliary,  take  the  accent  on  the  root  of  the 
verb,  not  on  the  prefix,  and  do  not  take  ge-  in  the  past  par- 
ticiple. The  inseparable  use  is  much  commoner  than  the 
separable. 

burdjrei'fett,  iwrdjrei'fte,  imrdjmft'  (fyabett),  to  travel  over,  to  udo." 

$dj  burdjrei'fe  $>eittfd)(attb  jefcen  Sommer.    I  travel  all  over  ("do") 

Germany  every  summer. 
3?d)  Ijafce  $>eutfdjtottb  le^tett  Summer  bur^mft'.    /  "did"  Germany 

last  summer. 


SEPARABLE   AND   INSEPARABLE   VERBS.  255 

ii&erge'ijett,  ii&ergittg',  itfcergatt'gett  (fyaben),  to  omit,  skip. 

ir  foerben  biefe  Seite  ii&erge'ljetu     We  shall  skip  this  page. 
2Bir  fjafcen  biefc  Seite  ii&ergatt'getu     We  have  skipped  this  page. 

umge'ljett,  umgtng'f  ttmgan'gctt  (fyaben),  to  avoid,  to  evade. 


<3ie  untge'Ijett  biefe3  ®efei^     They  evade  this  law. 

<Ste  Ija&ett  biefe3  ($efe^  umgan'gem     tfhey  evaded  this  law. 

ttttterfjal'teu,  nnterljieft',  mtterijaCten  (fyaben),  to  entertain. 

<3tc  Utttct^alt'  Urc  ^reunfce,     She  is  entertaining  her  friends. 
<3te  ^at  i^te  ^rcunbc  untcrl)artett»     She  entertained  her  friends. 

(b)  They  are  separable  when  both  prefix  and  verb  are  used 
in  their  natural  meaning.  The  verbs  are  often  intransitive, 
take  the  auxiliary  of  the  simple  verb,  and  have  the  accent 
upon  the  prefix,  as  in  the  case  of  all  separable  verbs. 

$d)  fe^e  meinen  SBtflen  iwrdj*    /  carry  out  my  will. 

<$r  ift  ii'bergefaljretu    He  crossed  over. 

$10  3mtne  ift  mt'tergcgangctt*    The  sun  has  set. 

ewer  SBeife  fe^rten  ttiir  nm.    After  a  while  we  turned  round. 


(c)  When  used  regularly  with  a  simple  verb,  these  four  prepo- 
sitions look  like  separable  prefixes.  Hence  they  are  sometimes 
so  called,  and  the  principal  parts  of  the  verbs  are  so  given. 
But  really  they  are  simple  verbs  used  with  a  preposition. 
Compare  the  examples  below  with  those  under  (a)  above. 

burdj'mfen,  reifte  burdj'f  burdj'geretft  (fein),  to  travel  through. 

$Mr  reifeit  burdj*     We  travel  through  (separable). 

2Btr  reifen  btttdj  $eittfrf)fattb*     We  travel  through  Germany  (simple  verb). 

it'fcergeljett,  gtng  il'Berf  it'&ergegattgett  (fein),  to  go  across. 

%tf)  gefje  iiBer,    I  go  across  (separable). 

$dj  gefje  iiber  ba^  $elb.    /  go  across  the  field  (simple  verb). 


256  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

urn  gdjeit,  gittg  um'f  ntn'oerjangcn  (fein),  to  go  around. 
@ie  geljett  tint*     JOM  #o  around  (separable). 
@ie  jjcfjcn  Uttt  bett  28alb,     You  are  going  around  the  wood  (simple  verb). 

Utt'terljaltett,  Ijtelt  tttt'ter,  tttt'tergefjalteit  (fyabett),  to  hold  under. 
(£r  fyfift  bte  $a^e  ttttter.     He  holds  the  cat  under  (separable) . 
(£r  pit  bie  $ai?e  untcr  bent  £if(Jje,    He  holds  the  cat  under  the  table 

(simple  verb). 

239.  §tn   and  ^)er*  —  All  verbs  of   motion  are  commonly 
compounded  with  fym  or  fyer  to  denote  direction  of  motion. 
§tn   always   means   away  from  the   speaker,  fyer,  toward  the 
speaker,  but  they  are  not  always  translated. 

$>ft  gdjt  cr  IjttU     There  he  goes  {away  from  here}. 

25oHcn  <Ste  ^cr  (or  Jjierfjer)  lommen?     Will  you  come  here? 

$dj  fatttt  ttir^t  ^inaufgc^ett*     I  can't  go  up  (there). 

(d)  §in  Uttb  ^er  means  here  and  there,  hither  and  thither. 
(£r  (icf  ^itt  Uttb  ^Ct»     He  ran  hither  and  thither. 

(6)  2Bo  means  where  (rest)  ;  toofyttt'  means  where  to,  whither ; 
tDOfyer'  means  where  from,  whence.  The  two  parts  may  be  sep- 
arated. Where  meaning  whither  is  always  tDofyitt. 

Where  are  you  going?    SBoljttt  Qeljett  @ic  ?  or  28o  jjefjett  <Sie  ^ttt  ? 
Where  did  you  come  from  f    SBofjer  fatttctt  Sie  ?  or  295p  fa  men  @te  fter  ? 

240.  Vocabulary. 

bie  SSittt'bc  IV,  wound.  iiftcrtrci'tictt,  iifcertrtefe',  iiftertvie^ 

t'f  btc  ^efir^tcr  III,  face.  bett  (^abett),  to  exaggerate. 

rf  bie  ^aare  II,  Aafr,  used  uttter^aFtettf    ttttterljteft'f     nnter- 

in  both  singular  and  plural  for  IjaCtett   (^abett),    et    ttttter^a(t'f 

hair.  to  entertain. 

<w3'fefjettf   fa^  an§'f    att^'gefe^ew  tter^ie'tett,      toerfot',       tieriio'tett 

(I|aBett)f  er  fie^t  an$'f  to  look,  (^aBe«)f  to  forbid, 

appear.  ftttdjt'fcar,     fearfully),     terrible, 

bttr^ret/fettr  bttrdjreif'te,  btttr^jteift'  terribly. 

)  t  to  travel  through,  ado."  natiiv'ttd),  adv.,  of  course. 


SEPARABLE   AND   INSEPARABLE   VERBS.  257 

241.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  1.  gr  Ijat  midj  Don  feinen  SBnnben  am  ©eftd^t  unb  unter 
ben  gaaren  nnterfyatten.  2.  5ftaturltd)  ift  e$  fcerboten  gu  liber* 
tretben.  3.  @ein  ©efic^t  unb  fetn  §aar  faljen  fnrdjtbar  an$. 
4.  Qtf)  Ijabe  Slmerila  etnmal  bnrdjreift  5.  2Bo  gel)en  @te 
fytn?  6.  ©ie  ^at  nt(^t  ubertneben,  at$  fie  un$  fo  gnt  nnter* 


(6)  1.  Of  course  you  have  traveled  through  America  once, 
haven't  you  ?  2.  The  student  with  all  those  wounds  on  his 
(§  210)  face  and  under  his  hair  looked  terrible.  3.  Where 
are  those  two  boys  going  ?  4.  When  he  has  entertained  us, 
he  has  never  exaggerated.  5.  We  have  translated  that  sen- 
tence more  than  once.  6.  The  boy's  mother  forbade  him  to 
exaggerate. 

242.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  Bead  Unter  ben  ©tnbenten,  Easy  Reading,  72,  8—73,  31. 

2.  Point  out  illustrations  of  the  use  of  separable,  insepa- 
rable, and  common  prefixes  ;  of  a  simple  verb  with  preposition 
resembling  an  inseparable  verb  ;  of  J)tn  and  l)er(unt). 

(6)  1.  @atj  ber  @tnbent  nut  fetnen  SBnnben  fnrdjtbar  an$,  ate 
er  fortfnfyr  jn  fedjten?  2.  gatten  @ie  triete  8imber  bnrdjretft, 
too  man  @te  feljr  gnt  nnterfyalten  fyatte  ?  3.  3Bie  tt>etf$  man, 
ba£  ber  (Stnbent  ntd)t  nbertrteben  Ijat?  4.  2Ber  ^at  nn§  tier- 
boten  jn  nbertreiben?  5.  ©aljen  be§  ©tnbenten  ®efi(^t  nnb 
§aar  fnrc^tbar  an^?  6.  SBofjer  totffen  @te  ba$  atte^? 

(c)  1.  Once  I  traveled  through  many  cities  and  saw  many 
universities.  2.  Of  course  they  entertained  me  well  after 
they  had  once  begun.  3.  He  was  not  exaggerating  ;  the 
students  with  the  wounds  on  their  (§  210)  faces  and  under 


258  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

their  hair  looked  terrible.  4.  How  (whence)  do  you  know 
that  they  forbade  us  to  do  that?  5.  Of  course  we  enter- 
tained those  students  at  the  university.  6.  After  he  had 
begun  to  exaggerate,  his  father  forbade  him  to  speak. 

(d)  "  You  have  traveled  through  many  lands,  haven't  you  ?  " 

"  Of  course !  I  am  not  exaggerating ;  I  have  traveled 
through  many  interesting  countries." 

"  Won't  you  tell  me  how  the  students  at  the  German  uni- 
versities looked  ?  " 

"  The  ones  in  the  fraternities,  who  had  fought  in  duels, 
looked  terrible." 

"  Did  you  see  these  duels  ?  " 

"  Yes,  once  ;  but  it  did  not  entertain  me.  So  many  students 
had  big  wounds  on  their  faces  and  under  their  hair.  It  was 
terrible."' 

LESSON  XLIII. 
Imperative. 


Set  bnlbfam  gegett  alles  2Inbersfetn, 

Urtb  Ia§  bid?  fetnen  IPtberfprucfy  r>erbrte§en; 

Hur  tmmer  ftefy'  auf  betnen  eignen  ^iigen, 

Hub  fprid?  3ur  recfyten  §ett  entfdplognes  Hein  !  —  2Btdjert 


243.  The  Imperative  for  formal  address  is  like  the  inverted 
indicative  (except  feten  @te,  be):  tobeti  @ter  praise;  fefjen 
@ie,  look;  fangen  @ie  an,  begin;  uberfe^en  ©ter  translate. 

(a)  The  second  singular  imperative  adds  ^e  to  the  stem. 
This  =e  may  be  dropped  in  conversation:  lobe,  praise;  fyore, 
listen;  fcmge  an,  begin;  ftefye  auf,  stand  up;  itberfe^e,  translate. 


IMPERATIVE.  259 

(b)  When  the  root  vowel  e  changes  to  te  or  t  in  the  second 
singular  indicative,  the  same  vowel  change  occurs  in  the  im- 
perative and  *e  is  not  added  (except  toerbe,  become).     Strong 
verbs  in  a  do  not  take  umlaut,     fief),  see;  gib,  give;  Ijalt,  stop. 

(c)  The  second  plural  imperative  is  like  the  indicative  with- 
out the  pronoun.     The  connecting  vowel  *e-  may  be  inserted 
for  euphony.     See  §  16,  a. 

244.                   Conjugation  of  the  Imperative. 

Second  Singular.  Second  Plural.  Formal. 

fofce  loBt  (often  Sic,  praise. 

ftelj  fefyt  feljen  <3ie,  see. 

lomm  fommt  lommen  Sie,  come. 

fange  an  fattgt  an  fangen  Sie  an,  begin. 

ii&erfe^e  iifcerfe^t  iifcerfe^en  Sie,  translate. 

Ijabc  (jabt  Ijabcn  3ic,  have. 

fei  feib  feien  Sief  be. 

toerbe  werbet  toerben  3ief  become. 

(a)  The  only  imperatives  offering  any  difficulty  are  those  of  verbs 
having  the  root  vowel  e,  which  changes  to  te  or  i  in  the  second  singular. 
These  form  the  imperative  simply  by  dropping  the  (e)ft  of  the  second 
person  singular  present  indicative  active  :  toerfen,  bit  ttnrfft,  nnrf ;  geben, 
bix  gibft,  gib ;  lefen,  bu  Itef(ef)t,  Ue§ ;  ^rerfjen,  bu  frrid^fl, ' 


245.  Vocabulary. 

ber  ^rofef'forf  bie  ^Srofejfo'ren  v,  fcefn'djen,    befnt^'te, 
professor.  ften)f  to  visit;  to  attend. 

bie    (SJefdjidj'te    IV,     story ;    his-  fcan'tfjen,  reg.  (^aBen)f  to  need, 

tory.  et^a^'len,  er^a^Cte,   er^a^tt'   (^a= 

bie  $or'(efnng  IV,  lecture.  Ben)f  to  relate,  tell. 

bie  3*tt  IV,  time;  extent  of  time,  ftnbie'ren,       ftnbier'tef       ftubiert' 
as  distinguished  from  ba3  9Jlalr  (^aBen)f  to  study,  at  a  univer= 

which  implies  repetition.  sity  or  in  advanced  work. 

ba3  fie7Ben  I,  life.  feirfjt,  easy. 


260  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

246.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  1.  Sefndje  bte  SSorlefnngen  btefe§  $rof  efforS !  @te  finb 
fef)r  intereffant*  2.  $Bttte,  erjaljte  mtr  bte  ©efdjtcfjte  t>ott 
beinem  geben !  3.  gange  an  jn  ftnbteren !  £)te  23orlefnngen 
finb  fefyr  tetdjt  4.  ©ebrandje  fo  trie!  $ett,  twe  bn  ttriflft!  £)n 
brandjft  ntdjt  fdjnett  ju  lommen.  5.  @tel)  bte  ©tnbenten,  bie 
bte  SSortefnngen  be^  ^rofeffor^  befnd^en !  6.  £Htte,  fangen  @te 
jefet  an,  nn$  jene  (®ef pittite  t)on  atten  3d*en  ju  er^a^Ien ! 

(6)  TFnte  aZ?  imperatives  three  ways.  —  1.  Study  hard 
(fletfug) ;  you  need  to  attend  all  the  lectures  of  that  pro- 
fessor. 2.  Stop  telling  that  story !  I  haven't  time  to  hear 
it !  3.  You  need  to  study ;  use  these  books.  4.  Please 
tell  me  the  story  of  the  professor's  life.  5.  Attend  those 
lectures;  they  are  very  easy.  6.  Please  stop  reading  and 
begin  to  translate. 

247.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.   Bead  Unter  ben  @tubenten,  Easy  Reading,  74, 1—75, 8. 
2.   Point  out  illustrations  of  imperatives,  especially  of  sepa- 
rable and  inseparable  verbs. 

(6)  1.  33ttte,  eqcifjfe  mtr  Don  bem  Seben  anf  enter  bentfrfjen 
llntfcer fttcit !  2.  @ebraud)e  betne  $tit  fo  gut  ttrie  mogltci),  benn 
ba$  8eben  tft  fnr j !  3.  ©tubtere  flei^tg !  3)ann  totrft  bn  atte^ 
teic^t  ftnben!  4.  -SQefndje  bte  SSortefnngen  btefe^  ^5rofeffor§, 
nnb  bn  tr>irft  Diet  ternen !  5.  gange  frit^  an  jn  ftnbieren,  nnb 
bn  brandjft  ntcf)t  fo  (ange  gn  arbetten !  6.  53ttte,  fa^ren  @te 
fort  gn  itberfe^en;  ^5ren  @te  notf)  ntt^t  anf! 

(c)  Write  all  imperatives  three  ways.  —  1.  Use  this  pen  and 
write  your  exercise ;  you  need  not  translate.  2.  Please 
tell  us  a  story  of  that  professor's  life.  3.  Attend  the  uni- 


INFINITIVES   AND   PARTICIPLES.  261 

versity  every  day,  and  you  will  hear  many  interesting  lec- 
tures. 4.  Study  hard  (fleifjtg),  and  you  don't  need  to  work 
so  late.  5.  Please  begin  to  translate,  and  do  not  stop  as  soon 
as  it  gets  hard.  6.  Please  keep  on  using  the  same  book  in 
which  we  read  that  story. 

(d)  "  Please  tell  me  the  story  of  that  old  man's  life." 

"  It  is  too  long.  I  haven't  time.  Study  hard,  and  you  do 
not  need  to  hear  that  story." 

"  Why  must  I  always  work  ?     What  shall  I  do  ?  " 

"Attend  the  lectures  of  that  professor  and  write  what  he 
relates." 

"When  shall  I  begin?  Does  a  lecture  take  place  every 
day?" 

"Begin  to-morrow,  and  keep  on  attending  the  lectures  as 
long  as  they  take  place." 

"  Good !  Then  I  shall  not  need  to  study  so  hard.  Every- 
thing will  be  easy." 

LESSON  XLIV. 
Infinitives  and  Participles. 


IDer  ^reunbe  fiicfyt,  tft  fie  311  ftnben  tuert ; 

IDer  f etnen  fyat,  tjat  f  etnett  nod?  begetjrt.  —  geffmg. 

248.  The  Infinitives.  —  There  are  two  infinitives  in  German : 
present,  (obett,  to  praise  ;  geljett,  to  go  ;  and  perfect,  getobt  JU 
Ijaben,  to  have  praised  ;  gegcmgen  jU  fein,  to  have  gone. 

(a)  The  infinitive  without  the  sign  ju  is  used  after  modal 
auxiliaries  and  after  finben,  fiifylett,  fyetftett,  Ijelfen,  f)8ren,  taffen, 
fefyren,  fernen,  madjen,  fefyetL  See  §  166. 


262  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

3d)  faf)  tljtt  am  gettfter  ftetyeiu    /  saw  him  stand  at  the  window. 
(£r  letttte  gut  lefeiu     He  learned  to  read  well. 
3>dj  ffiJrte  iljtt  fommeit*     /  heard  him  come. 

(6)  In  most  other  cases  jU  is  used  when  the  English  infini- 
tive has  to. 

(£r  ftttg  em,  emeu  SBrief  $tt  frfjretben*    He  began  to  write  a  letter. 

$)ie  5tufgaBc  ift  fdjtoer  §u  itberfe^etu     The  exercise  is  hard  to  translate. 

(c)  The  infinitive  may  be  used  as  a  noun.     It  is  neuter  and 
of  the  first  class. 

$>a3  SdJCtt  ift  feljr  fdjott*     Life  (to  live}  is  very  beautiful. 

(d)  Besides  its  use  after  uttt,  denoting  purpose  (§  97),  the 
infinitive  is  also  used  after  cmftdtt,  instead  of,  and  ofyne,  without, 
where  English  employs  a  verbal. 

Instead  of  going,  he  came.    Slttftatt  511  ftcfjctt,  ift  ct  (jcfommcit. 
Without  asking  me,  she  went  away.     D^ne  mit^  511  fracjen,  cjing  fie  toecj* 


249.   Position  of  the  Infinitive.  —  An  infinitive  with  ju  usu- 
ally comes  outside  the  clause.     See  §  233. 

He  began  to  write.    (£r  ftttg  an  511  fdjrei&eit, 

We  continued  to  translate.    2Bir  fttffrett  fort  $u  ufictfe^cn* 

(a)  An   infinitive   is   always  preceded  by  its   objects   and 
modifiers.     When  so  preceded  it  may  be  treated  as  a  separate 
clause  and  set  off  by  commas  (§  233). 
He  began  to  write  'a  long  letter.     (£r  ftng  att,    eittett   faitgctt   23mf  Stt 


We  continued  to  translate  these  sentences  without  a  mistake.     295it  fufyrcit 
fortf  ol|ttc  cmett  ^e^tcr  biefe 


250.  The  Participles.  —  There  are  two  participles  in  Ger- 
man: present,  (obettb,  praising  ;  gefjenb,  going  ;  past  (also  called 
perfect),  getobt,  praised;  gegcmgen,  gone. 


INFINITIVES   AND  PARTICIPLES.  263 

(a)  The  participle  may  be  used  as  an  adjective  or  as  a 
noun,  but  it  is  declined  like  an  adjective.  Unlike  the  Eng- 
lish, it  is  preceded  by  its  modifiers,  and  as  an  adjective  it 
stands  before  its  noun.  It  is  not  common  in  conversation. 


Silt  Heitter  8tfu$,  a  little  river. 

Sitt  burd)  bic  Stabt  ftte^ettber  $ln$f  a  river  flowing  through  the  city. 
gut  nun  cincm  gelefjrtcu  Scorer  gefdjrtefteneS  SBudj,  a  book  written  by 
a  learned  teacher. 

251.  The  Use  of  Infinitives  and  Participles  is  not  so  common 
La  German  as  in  English. 

(a)  German  does  not  possess  the  progressive  and  emphatic 
forms  of  the  verb  (§  18).     For  he  praises,  he  is  praising,  and 
he  does  praise,  the  German  has  but  one  form :  er  tobt. 

(b)  Often   where  English  has   an   infinitive   or   participial 
phrase,  German  uses  a  finite  clause,  commonly  introduced  by 
)ai^To  avoid  errors,  change  the  English  phrase  to  an  English 
3lause  with  when,  as,  or  that,  and  then  translate. 

Not  finding  him  in  the  house,  Hooked  for  him  in  the  garden,     ^ft  id)  il)tt 

nidjt  im  §aufe  fanb,  fudjte  idj  iijtt  im  ($artetu 
Coming  home,  he  found  the  letter  on  his  table.     2tt3  er  nadj  ^paufe  famf 

fattb  er  ben  Srief  auf  feittem  Xifr^e* 
I  knew  him  to  be  my  friend.    $dj  ttmffte,  bafj  er  mem  gfreutib  toar» 

252.  Vocabulary. 

)er  $ar;$er,  bie  Parser  I,  (univer-  accusative ;    ba§   fommt   baraitf 

sity)  lockup.  anff  that  depends. 

)ie  Sam^e  IV,  lamp.  tjpr'lommen,    fam    tior'f    tjor'ge= 

ne  ^on^ei'  IV,  the  police.  fommett  (feitt),   to   occur,  hap- 

Die  SSanb,  bie  393anbe  II,  wall  (of  pen. 

a  room).  attftatt',  instead  of,  with  infinitive 

in'lommen,  lam  an1,  att'gefomntett  where  English  has  a  verbal  noun 

(feitt),    to    arrive;    at,    usually  in  -ing. 

dtt  or  in  with  the  dative,  not  the  oftr  often. 


264  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

253.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  1.  £)a  er  Me  Sampe  nidjt  fcmb,  fonnte  er  nidjt  tefen. 
2.  Slnftatt  oft  Dorjnfommen,  lommt  ba$  nte  tior.  3.  Ofyne  in 
ben  Parser  jn  gefyen,  fieljt  man  feine  ©ebtdjte  an  ber  SBanb, 
4.  J)te$  tft  ein  Diet  gelefeneS  33ncl),  5.  §ter  tft  etne  son  einent 
Ketnen  ©djitler  gefcfjrtebene  Slnfgabe.  6.  2lnftatt  fort^nfafyren, 
foKten  @ie  anf^oren,  o^ne  ben  33rief  jn  lefen. 

(6)  1.  Being  in  the  (university)  lockup,  lie  wrote  poems 
on  the  wall.  2.  It  often  occurs  that  the  police  use  these 
lamps.  3.  Arriving  late,  he  had  to  wait,  instead  of  being 
able  to  go  home.  4.  Not  having  any  lamp,  we  could  not 
see  the  walls  of  the  (university)  lockup.  5.  Instead  of 
waiting,  he  went  to  the  city  without  saying  anything  about 
it  to  his  father.  6.  Not  having  heard  that  poem  very  often, 
I  have  not  learned  it. 

254.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  Bead  Unter  ben  ©tubenten,  Easy  Reading,  75, 9—76, 13. 

2.  Point  out  illustrations  of  the  infinitive  with  and  without 
gu ;  of  the  infinitive  with  ofyne  and  anftatt ;    of  a  participle 
preceding  its  noun  in  German,  but  following  in  English;  of 
clauses  introduced  by  ba  where  the  verb  may  be  rendered  in 
English  by  a  verbal  in  -ing. 

(6)  1.  §aben  @ic  fciet  bom  Saqer  erja^fen  l)8ren,  ofyne  e£ 
afte$  ju  t)erftef)en?  2.  Sommt  ba$  oft  in  ber  @d)ute  t)or? 

3.  gwben    Me    ©tubenten    aufgetjtfrt,    anftatt    f ortgnf afjren  ? 

4.  ®ant  ber  ©tnbent  an,  ofjne  bie  ^oltjet  e§  ftriffen  gn  laffen? 

5.  J)a  @tc  letne  8ampe  fatten,  lonnten  @ie  bte  Sttber  an  ber 
SBanb  fe^en?      6.   ^ontntt  e^  oft  t>or,  bag  mir  tefen,  ofyne  ju 
itberfei^en? 


REVIEW.  265 

(c)  1.   Not  having  a  lamp,  I  didn't  see  the  wall.       2.   In- 
stead of  arriving  early,  they  came  very  late.       3.    They  often 
arrive  without  letting  us  know.       4.    It  often  occurs  that  the 
students  arrive  at  the  (university)  lockup  without  letting  the 
police  know.       5.   Not  finding  a  lamp  in  the  lockup,  the  stu- 
dent couldn't  study.      6.  Seeing  him  in  the  garden,  we  waited 
instead  of  going  home. 

(d)  "Does  it  often  occur  that  the  students  at  German  uni- 
versities have  to  go  with  the  police  ?  " 

"  No.  Instead  of  going  with  the  police,  they  have  to  go  to 
(in)  the  lockup." 

"  Did  you  ever  see  a  student  arrive  at  the  lockup  ?  " 

"  Yes,  once  I  saw  one  arrive  late  in  the  (am)  evening.  He 
looked  very  tired.  Of  course  he  arrived  without  letting  his 
friends  know  of  it." 

"  (On)  arriving  there,  what  did  he  do  ?  " 

"  He  studied.  He  took  an  old  lamp  from  the  wall,  set  it  on 
the  table,  and  began  to  read.  But  the  students  don't  often 
study  in  the  lockup." 

LESSON   XLV. 
Review. 


3n  fjoctymut  iibertjeb'  bid?  ntctyt, 
Unb  lag  ben  ltTut  ntcfyt  finfen, 

Xlttt  betnem  IDtpfel  reid?'  ins  £tdjt 
Unb  lag  bte  IDur3el  trtnf en  I  — 


255.  Review  Questions. 

(a)  1.   Name  the  inseparable  prefixes.       2.   Where  do  the 
separable  prefixes  stand  in  simple  tenses  (a)  in  independent 


266  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

clauses  ?  (&)  in  dependent  clauses  ?  3.  In  compound  tenses 
(a)  in  independent  clauses  ?  (ft)  in  dependent  clauses  ?  (c)  with 
the  infinitive  ?  4.  What  prefixes  are  sometimes  separable 
and  sometimes  inseparable?  5.  Give  the  rule  for  distin- 
guishing these  by  their  accent.  6.  Explain  the  distinction 
in  the  use  of  I)in  and  fyer. 

(6)  1.  Give  the  rule  for  the  regular  formation  of  the  im- 
perative second  singular.  2.  Give  the  rule  for  the  second 
singular  imperative  of  verbs  whose  root  vowel  is  e,  which 
change  e  to  te  or  t  in  the  second  singular  indicative.  3.  Is 
,,bttte"  an  imperative?  Might  it  be? 

(c)  1.    Give  the  cases  where  English  to  with  the  infinitive 
is  not  rendered  by  ju  in  German.       2.   What  is  the  position 
of  the  infinitive  with  reference  to  its  modifiers  ?       3.    What 
is  the  force  of  uttt  with  the  infinitive  ?       4.  W^hat  other  prepo- 
sitions are  regularly  used  with  the  infinitive  ? 

(d)  1.    Give  the  two  chief  uses  of  the  participle  in  German. 
2.   What  is  the  position  of  the  participle  with  reference  to  its 
modifiers?   .     3.   Which  language  uses  participles  more  fre- 
quently, German  or  English  ?       4.   What  is  the  easiest  way  to 
avoid  mistakes  in  translating  English  verbals  in  -ing  ? 

256.  Review  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  Bead  Uttter  betl  ©tubenten,  Easy  Reading,  76, 14—77, 31. 

2.  Point  out  illustrations  of  separable,  inseparable,  and  com- 
mon prefixes ;  of  the  infinitive  used  with  and  without  ju,  and 
used  as  a  noun ;  of  a  participle  preceded  by  its  modifiers ;  of 
infinitives  with  ofytte  and  cntftdtt. 

(6)  1.  §dren  Me  ©tubenten  aitf  beutfcfyen  ttntoerfttaten  ju* 
toeifen  auf  ju  fecfyten,  fobatb  fie  tntibe  merben?  2.  galjren  fie 


REVIEW.  26T 


fort,  cmftatt  aufjufyoren?      3.  §aben  <Ste  triete  ganber  bnrdjreiftr 
unb  Ijat  man  ©te  gut  itnterfjatten?      4.  Hotntn,  fange  an,  ties! 

5.  £)a  idj  bte  (Stubenten  auf  bet  Untoerfitat  nid^t  fanb,  gmg  idfy 
nacfj  §aufe,  ofyne  511  toarten.      6.  Slnftatt  aufpfjdren,  fu^r  id^ 
fort. 

(c)  1.  When  do  the  duels  at  German  universities  take  place  ? 
2.   Instead  of  stopping,  the  students  of  the  fraternities  usually 
continue  to  fight.        3.    You  have  entertained  me  very  well 
with  that  story,  and  you  did  not  exaggerate.     4.  Arriving  late 
at  (auf)  the  station,  I  went  home  without  waiting.       5.  Seeing 
the  police   coming,  we  stopped   playing   and  began   to   run.. 

6.  Not  knowing  what  she  ought  to  say,  the  girl  stopped  writ- 
ing her  exercise. 

(d)  At  the  University.  —  The  life  at  a  German  university  is 
very  interesting.     The  students  of  the  fraternities  fight  often, 
and  the  duels  take  place  every  day.     Sometimes  they  keep  on 
fighting  after  they  have  got  several  wounds.     They  never  like 
to  stop  without  giving  the  other  student  two  or  three  wounds. 

These  duels  are  not  possible  in  America.  Here  the  students 
play  ball  and  other  games  instead  of  fighting.  But  the  Ger- 
man students  like  to  fight.  And  when  they  have  once  begun, 
it  is  hard  to  stop.  Therefore  (baljer)  the  duels  take  place 
every  day. 


268  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

LESSON    XL VI. 
Comparison  of  Adjectives  and  Adverbs. 


<£tn  ebler    £?elb  tft,  ber  flits   Daterlcmb,  cm  eblerer,  ber   fiir  t>es 
£anbes  Woty,  ber  ebelfte,  ber  fiir  bte  tftenfctybett  fampft. —  Berber, 


257.  Comparison  of  Adjectives  and  Adverbs.  —  Adjectives  and 
adverbs  are  compared  by  adding  =er  and  *(e)ft.  Monosyllabic 
stems  in  a,  0,  or  u  usually  take  umlaut.  Euphony  requires 
the  use  of  the  vowel  =e-  before  (t  in  the  superlative  when  the 
positive  ends  in  a  diphthong  or  a  sound  like  $  or  t  ($,  f$, 3,  b,  t) : 
freteft,  ttlteft,  liirjeft*  Some  adjectives  are  irregularly  compared. 

(a)  The  comparative  and  superlative  are  declined  like  other 
adjectives.  The  uninflected  superlative  is  very  rare. 

<$itt  fceffere^  SBttd),  a  better  book. 

$er  prfjfte  S3aum,  the  highest  tree. 

@djiwere3  SBcttcr,  fr^oneren  295ctter^f  more  beautiful  weather. 

(6)  For  the  English  superlative  in  the  predicate,  when  not 
modified  by  a  phrase  or  clause,  the  German  uses  am  with  the 
superlative  ending  in  ?etl  for  both  numbers  and  all  genders. 

This  tree  is  the  highest,    liefer  gtaum  ift  ant  prfjftem 

The  tree  is  the  highest  in  the  wood.    $er  S3aum  tft  ber  Ijodjfte  im  298afoe, 

(c)  For  the  adverbial  superlative  absolute,  in  the  — est  possible 
way,  German  uses  the  phrase  auf$  —  fte. 

He  spoke  in  the  clearest  possible  way.    ($r  tyradj  auf3  beuttidjfte* 

She  gave  you  the  highest  praise  possible.    @ic  Ijat  tiie^  ouf^  pr^fte  gefofct. 

(d)  Unlike  English,  German  compares  long  words  regularly, 
mefyr  being  used  only  to  compare  two  adjectives. 

/  know  nothing  more  disagreeable.    $dj  femtc  ttit^t^  UttcntgetteljmereS, 
He  is  more  lazy  than  sick.    @*  ift  mc^t  fauf  al^  Irani* 


COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES  AND  ADVERBS.        269 

258.  Table  of  Comparisons. 
POSITIVE.                   COMPARATIVE.  SUPERLATIVE. 

(a)  Regular. 

Adj.  and  Adv.  Adj.  and  Adv.  Adj.        Adv.  and  Pred.  Adj. 

ticf,  deep.  ttefer,  deeper.  ber  tieffte,  am  ticfftcnr  deepest. 

alt,  old.  after,  older.  ber  altefte,  am  alteften,  oldest. 

frffiw,  beautiful.         fcfjouer,  more  ber  fdjiwfte,  am  fdjiwftett,  most 
beautiful.  beautiful. 

(b)  Irregular. 

Adj.  and  Adv.  Adj.  and  Adv.  Adj.        Adv.  and  Pred.  Adj. 

gut,  good(&dv.well).  fceffer,  better.  ber  befte,  am  fcefteit,  best. 

Die!,  much.  mefyr,  more.  ber  metfte,  am  metftett,  most. 

Ijod),  high.  pfjcr,  higher.  ber  Ijodjfte,  am  prfjftett,  highest. 

ttal),  near.  italjer,  nearer.  bet  nadjfte,  am  na^ftenf  nearest. 

gtofe  #rea£.  9^5^crf  greater.  ber  0ri)^tcr  am  grtigtett,  greatest. 

bcr  crfteref  former,  ber  erftc,  sucrft  (adv.),  ./zrsz. 

bcr  (c^tcrc,  Za«er.  bcr  Ic#e,  5tt(c^t  (adv.),  to^. 

ttictttgcr  1  _  am  ttJcnigftctt  1  , 

tuctttg.  ?i«?e.  Zess.  wa'       [  least. 

mtnbcr  J  am  mwbeftett  J 

gcrtt  (adv.),  gladly.    Itcfcer,  rather.  am  (tcbftcn,  («o  like)  best. 

(c)  Learn  the  above  comparisons. 

259.  Particles  of  Comparison. 

(a)  As  is  translated  by  ftrie  ;  than  usually  by  at$* 

He  is  not  so  large  as  you.    ($r  tft  tttdjt  fo  gro^  wic  btt. 
He  is  larger  than  I.     ($r  ift  grii^cr  a(§  irf}. 

(6)  As  ...  as  is  translated  ebettfo  .  .  .  tt)ie  (or  a(^). 

She  is  as  pretty  as  you.    @ic  ift  cBcnfo  ft^iin  ttitc  (or  a(3)  3ic» 
(c)  T7ie  ...  the  is  translated  by  Je  .  »  .  be  [to. 

TAe  longer  the  sentence,  the  harder  it  is  to  write.     $c  (anger  bcr 
bcfto  ft^tticrcr  ift  cr  54 


270  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

260.  Vocabulary. 

ber  SBerg,  bie  Serge  II,  mountain.  bn3  ^ergttit'gett  I,  pleasure. 

ber  Storf,  bie  ©tMe  II,  cane,  stick,  foatt'bern,  reg.  (fein,  §  76,  Note), 

s£o/f.  to  wander,  walk,  tramp. 

bet  SBtm'berer,  bic  SBtmberer  I,  toei'tergeljeu,  gittg  toei'ter,  toei'ter= 

wanderer.  gegattgett  (fettt),    to   go  on,   go 

bic  9Jarf)t,  bic  Stfadjte  II,  night.  farther. 

ba3  Setttfdj'Iattb,  Germany.  att'getteljm,  pleasant,  agreeable. 

261.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  1,  £)tefer  ©tod:  ift  ber  Icingfte,  ben  id)  Ijabe,       2.  ^e 
me^r  tDtr  arbetten,  befto  beffer  lernen  iDtr,      3,  3JJtt  bent  gr(5§ten 
SSergniigen  ging  ber  SBanberer  metter*      4.  Qn  ben  33ergen  in 
®eutf(^Ianb   fyat  man   angene^ntere   ^cirfite  al§   in   Slnterifcu 
5,  S)er  3Banberer  ttmnberte  ebenfo  f)ot^  ft)ie  tt)ir.      6.  Qtnw 
53erg  tt)ar  ^od) ;  bie  33erge  in  ®eutf djlanb  jinb  ^5^er ;  bie  in 
2ltnerifa  finb  ant  ^t^ften, 

(b)  1.   That  mountain  is  the  highest  in  Germany.       2.  With 
such  a  pleasant  wanderer  I  shall  go  on  with  the  greatest  pleas- 
ure.      3.   My  cane  is  longer  than  yours,  but  his  is  the  longest. 
4.   I  know  nothing  more  agreeable   than  to  wander  in  the 
mountains  in  the  night.       5.    She  is  as  tall  (fyorf))  as  I,  and 
she  is  more  beautiful  than  her  sister.       6.    The  earlier  we 
arrive,  the  more  agreeable  it  is  for  the  others. 

262.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.   Bead  £)a$  SBanbern,  Easy  Reading,  79,  1  —  80,  15. 

2.  Point  out  illustrations  of  regular  and  irregular  compara- 
tives and  superlatives  ;  of  the  phrase  ant  — en ;  of  the  use  of 
ebenfo  .  .  .  tote;  of  je  .  .  .  befto. 


COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES   AND   ADVERBS.        271 

(b)  1.  SBo  ftnb  Me  $erge  am  fyodjften  nnb  Me  91tid)te  am 
frfjonften?      2.   $ft  ba$  SBanbern  ba$  groftte  33ergniigen  ber 
SBanberer?       3,  2Bo  tft  e$  angenefymer  ju  ftmnbern,  af$  in 
ben  33ergen  in  £)entf djlanb  ?      4.  .$[*  e$  e&enfo  tetdjt  toeiter* 
gugef)en,  ttrie  ^ier  ju  bleiben?      5,  Qft  biefer  @tod  ber  befte, 
ben  ber  SBanberer  ^at?      6,  SBerben  bie  53erge  angene^mer,  je 
fyofyer  mir  ge^en? 

(c)  1.   A   wanderer  wandered  through.  Germany  with   the 
greatest  (of)  pleasure.       2.   Do  you  know  anything  pleasanter 
than  to  wander  in  the  mountains  when  the  nights  are  shortest  ? 

3.  This  cane  is  shorter  than  mine,  but  yours  is  the  shortest. 

4.  These  mountains  are  the  highest  in   America ;    they  are 
higher  than  those  in  Germany.       5.   It  is  just  as  pleasant  to 
stay  here  as  to  go  on.       6.   The  longer  I  write,  the  easier  the 
sentences  become. 

(d)  "  I  am  a  wanderer.    I  know  nothing  more  agreeable  than 
to  wander  in  the  mountains  with  my  stick  in  my  hand  and  a 
feather  in  my  (am)  hat." 

"  Do  you  like  to  tramp  in  the  night,  too  ?  " 

"  Yes,  I  like  to  go  on  in  the  night,  when  I  am  not  too  tired. 
It  is  just  as  pleasant  at  (in  ber)  night  as  in  the  daytime  (am 
Sage)." 

"  Do  you  always  go  where  the  mountains  are  highest  and  the 
woods  are  most  beautiful  ?  " 

"  Yes,  that  gives  me  the  greatest  pleasure.  Last  year  the 
mountains  where  I  tramped  were  the  highest  in  Germany." 

"  That  must  be  interesting !  "• 


272  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

LESSON  XL VII. 
Numerals. 


§u>ei  ^Slften  madden  $wav  etn  (Sar^es,  abcr  merf : 

fyalb  unb  tjalb  getan  entftefyt  fetn  Qan^es  XPerf.  —  Sftiirfert 


263.   The  Cardinal  Numerals  are  indeclinable,  except  eitt$  (see 
§  25)  and  eitte  aKtttion,  gtoet 


14  trierjeI)TL  60 

2  gtDet.  15  fimfjefyn*  70  fiebjig. 

3  brei,  16  fe^je^n.  80  at^tjtg. 

4  t>ier,  17  fieb(en)se^n»  90  neungig. 

5  fftnf*  18  afytttfn.  100  l)unbert 

6  fec^^.  19  neunjeljTL  200 

7  fieben,  20  jroangtg.  225 

8  adjt  21  ein'unbjtDanjig, 

9  newt.  22  jtDei'unbjtDanjtg,    1000  taufenb, 

10  gel)n.  30  brei^tg  (not         •  1901  taufenb 

11  elf.  breigig). 

12  g»eif.  40  triergig.  1,000,000     erne 

13  breije^n.  50  fftnfgtg*  lion'* 

(a)  Numbers  of  the  same  group  are  usually  written  together. 

56  fedjSuttbfiinfjtg. 
147  Ijunbertftebenunb&terjtg. 
329,564  brei^unbertneununbjtDanjtgtaufenb  fiinffyunberttrier* 


3,784,632  bret   Sftitttonen   fieben^unbertt)ierunbac^tjigtaufenb 


NUMERALS.  273 


(6)  Cardinal  adverbs  are  formed  by  adding  midl  (bdS 
the  time)  to  the  cardinal  :  einmal,  once;  gtoeitnat,  twice,  etc. 

(c)  In  German  a  hundred  is  fjuttbert,  a  thousand,  taufenb  ; 
em  fyunbert  and  ein  taufenb  mean  one  hundred  and  one  thousand. 

264.  The  Ordinal  Numerals  are  formed  from  the  cardinals  by 
adding  *t  up  to  20,  and  *ft,  from  20  up.    Exceptions  :  ber  erfte, 
ber  brttte,  ber  adjte.    They  are  declined  like  other  adjectives, 
and  their  uninflected  use  is  rare. 

ber  erfte,  1st.  ber  jnxmsigfte,  20th. 

ber  jiflette,  2d.  ber  fyunbertfte,  100th. 

ber  brttte,  3d.  ber  taufenbfte,  1000th. 

ber  t)terte,  4th.  ber  taufenb   acfjtfyunbertfedjSunb' 

ber  fiinfte,  5th.  neunjigfte,  1896th. 

(a)  Ordinal  adverbs  are  formed  by  adding  ?en$  to  the  ordinal 
stem:  erften$,  first,  in  the  first  place  ;  £tt)eiten3,  secondly,  in  the 
second  place,  etc. 

265.  Fractions  (except  bie  §alfte,  the  half,  and  etn  £)rtttet,  a 
third)  are  formed  by  adding  -tel  (a  softening  of  £etl,  part) 
to  the  ordinal  stem  up  to  20,  and  ^ftel  from  20  on.     They  are 
all  neuter  nouns  of  the  first  class. 


SHertef  f  three  fourths  ;  etn  BtiHMStoftef  r  a,  twentieth  ;  fte&Ctt  £tttt= 

bcttftelf  seven  hundredths. 

(a)  To  express  and  a  half  with  small  numbers,  besides  the 
regular  expression,  German  may  add  *(e)l)alb  to  the  ordinal 
stem  of  the  number  next  larger  than  the  one  to  be  expressed. 
Thus  brtttefyatb  really  means  two  whole  ones  (understood)  and 
half  the  third;  anbertfyalb  means  one  whole  one  (understood)  and 
half  another.  They  are  indeclinable. 


274  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

One  and  a  half,  ctmutbctuf)att,  anbertfjalfc, 
Two  and  a  half,  ^toehtttbeittljanJ,  britteljaHi* 
Three  and  a  half,  brctmtbctnf)a(t),  tiicrte^alb, 


Half  (o/)  the  book,  bic  £alfte  be3 

(c)  The  adjectives  ifdb,  half;  and  gan^,  all,  whole,  are  de- 
clined regularly  following  the  article  (§  194,  a,  3). 

e,  eitte  Ijattie  (Seite  ;  a/?  the  sentence,  bctt  garden  < 


266.  Vocabulary. 

bcr  ®aft'ijof,  bie  ®aftpfe  II,  inn,  cffcnf  afj,  gegeffett  (Jjafcen),  bu  iffcft 

AoteZ.  or  i^t,    er  i^tf  ^o  eat;  used  of 

bic  3)leHe  IV,  mile.  people,  not  of  animals. 

bie  6tttu'bc  IV,  hour;  lesson.  fdjei'nen,  f  djiett,  geft^ienen  (Jjaben), 

ff  bie  ^>brf  er  III,  village.  to  shine  ;  to  appear,  seem. 

ef  bie  ®ebaitbe  I,  build-  oettJt^'f  certain(iy). 

ing,  edifice.  UteUei(^t'f  perhaps. 

267.  Oral  Drill. 


(a)  1.  @^  tft  t)iel(et(f)t  eine  ^atbe  3J?eife  na(^  bem 

2.  SBtr  gingen  anbert^atb  @tunben  na(^  bem  nadjften  ©ebctube, 
unb  brtttef)aI6  ©tunbett,  e^e  tt)ir  etnen  ©aft^of  fcmben,  3.  @r^ 
ften^  tt)ar  e$  fpat  ;  gtDeiten^  fd)ten  metne  @d)tt)efter  fe^r  mitbe 
ju  fein  ;  brttten^  fatten  lutr  tiicfyts  511  effen.  4.  J)er  ©aftfjof 
tft  getDtfe  gtDeimal  fo  groft  tDte  ba^  anbere  ©ebaube,  aber  nur 
bret  SStertel  fo  groft  lt)te  bie  (St^ute*  5.  SBefdje^  tft  tua^r  : 
man  i^t,  tt)a^  man  tftr  ober,  man  tft,  ttm$  man  t^t?  6.  @te 
fcfjetnen,  in  btefem  ©orfe  jiDeimaf  ober  bretmat  effen  gu  Pollen. 

(b)  1.  It  was  (§  186)  an  hour  and  a  half  to  the  inn  where 
we  wanted  to  eat.       2.   We  waited  two  hours  and  three  quar- 
ters  in   that  building,  and  then  we   went   three  and  a  half 


NUMERALS.  275 

miles  to  the  next  village.       3.   In  the  first  place  those  sau- 
sages aren't  good ;   in  the  second  place  we  never  eat  them. 

4.  We  went  more  than  half  a  mile  to  the  inn.       5.    Once  I 
saw  a  hundred  boys  on  the   playground.       6.    They  seemed 
to  be   playing    soldiers ;    the    twenty-fifth,   the    fiftieth,   the 
seventy-fifth,  and  the  hundredth  stood  in  front  of  the  others ; 
these  were  the  officers. 

268.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.   Bead  £)a$  SBanbern,  Easy  Reading,  80,  16  —  81,  15. 
2.   Point  out  illustrations  of  cardinals  and  ordinals  ;  of  car- 
dinal and  ordinal  adverbs ;  of  various  expressions  for  fractions. 

(&)  1.  SBar  ber  SSanberer  tnelletcfjt  anbertfyatb  OJJetfen  t>om 
ghtffe  uiib  nur  erne  fyalbe  2ftette  t)om  £)orf e  ?  2.  2Ba$  fyat  er 
erftenS,  sroettenS  unb  brtttenS  gefragt?  3.  (gcfjtenen  bte  gatfte 
ber  ©ebaube  ganj  neu  311  fetn?  4.  §at  ber  SBanberer  einmal 
brittetjatb  (Stunben  tm  ©aft^ofe  getDartet,  efye  er  effen  lonnte? 

5.  2Bar    e^    gei^t^    bret   33iertel   9ftet(en  nad)    bem    ©orfe? 

6.  aJhxft  trf)  breimat  fragen,  tDarutn  @tc  nur  eine  ^albe  ©eite 
gelefen  t)aben? 

(c)  1.   In  two  hours  and  a  half  we  shall  be  in  the  inn,  where 
we  want  to  eat.       2.   It  seems  certainly  more  than  half  a  mile 
to  that  big  building  in  the  village.       3.    In  the  first  place,  I 
have  translated  half  the  exercise ;  in  the  second  place,  I  have 
already   read   twice.       4.    Half  the  buildings    in   the  village 
seem  new.       5.    It  is  more  than  three  thousand  miles  from 
America  to  Germany.       6.    It  is  perhaps  three  quarters  of  a 
mile  (miles)  from  the  inn  to  the  village. 

(d)  "  I  have  been  wandering  (§  83)  four  hours  and  a  half 
without  eating  anything.     Where  can  I  find  a  good  inn  ?  " 


276  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

"  You  certainly  seem  tired.  It  is  two  and  a  half  miles  to 
the  village.  You  will  find  a  good  inn  there ;  it  is  the  first 
•  building  you  see." 

"  Thank  you !  I  have  (already)  asked  twice  or  three  times 
without  learning  how  far  it  is." 

"  Do  you  want  to  eat  now  ?  Perhaps  I  can  find  something 
for  you." 

"  No,  thank  you.  I  can  wait  half  an  hour  or  even  a  whole 
hour." 

"  Good !     I  hope  that  you  will  not  get  too  tired." 

LESSON   XL VIII. 
Time,  Days,  Months,  Dates. 


3m  nwnberfcfyorten  Utonat  ITtat,  als  alle  Knofpen  fprattgen, 
Da  tft  in  metnem  fyr$en  Me  £tebe  aufgcgangen.  —  £eine. 


269.  Telling  Time  of  Day.  —  German  uses  Uljr  for  English 
o'clock.  As  in  English,  it  is  usually  expressed  only  on  the 
completed  hours. 

What  time  is  it  f    SBtCtltel  Uf)r  tft  e3  ? 

It  is  ten  o'clock.     ($3  ift  jeljtt  Uljr* 

It  is  half  past  eight.    (£§  tft  IjaflJ  newt* 

(a)  German  usually  reckons  ahead  to  the  following  hour, 
and  instead  of  saying  quarter  past  any  hour,  it  says  one  quar- 
ter towards  the  succeeding  hour. 

It  is  quarter  past  Jive.     (£$  tft  Cttt  $iertd  fedjS* 
At  half  past  five.    Urn  fyaHi  f  edjS. 
It  is  quarter  of  six.    &8  tft  bm  $tertel  fedj& 
At  quarter  to  eight.    Urn  fcret  $iertel  adjt 


TIME,  DAYS,  MONTHS,  DATES.  277 

(b)  Minutes  are  reckoned  as  in  English,  before  (toot)  and 
after  (nad))  the  hour. 

It  is  ten  minutes  to  nine.     (£3  tft  5d)tt  SJitmttCtt  toot  ttCtttU 
At  twenty-three  minutes  past  seven.    Uttt  bretunb5ttatt$tg  dJtimttcn  ttadj 
fteben, 

270.  Other  Time.  —  Days  of  the  week  are  put  in  the  accusa- 
tive of  time  (§  135)  or  in  the  dative  with  am. 

What  day  (of  the  week)  is  to-day  ?    SBelt^en  £ag  fafcett  toir  Ijeute  ? 

To-day  is  Monday.    £eute  tft  Sttimtag, 

Monday  we  went  home.    Sftontag  (ant  SDtontag)  gtngen  ttrir  ttarf)  Jpaufe. 

(a)  Days  of  the  month  are  put  in  the  accusative  of  time 
(§  135)  or  in  the  dative  with  atn.     In   dating  a   letter  use 
ben.     Notice   the   idiomatic   German   expression  for  day   of 
the  month. 

What  day  of  the  month  is  to-day?    $en  ttrietotelten  fjnfceu  ttrir  tyeute  ? 
To-day  is  the  thirteenth,     ^cutc  tft  bet  bret^e^ttte. 
We  arrive  (on)  the  eighth.    2Bir  fumntcn  ben  urfjtett  (or  am  ad]ten)  atu 
Chicago,  June  7,  S^icagof  ben  7tc«  (b»  7.)  ^uni* 

(b)  The  name  of  the  month  follows  the  date  without  article 
or  preposition.     Qm  Qafye  usually  precedes  the  year  date. 

Fourth  of  July,  ben  4tcn  $ufi* 
(On)  the  first  of  January,  belt  (am)  crftctt  ^anuat* 
In  1492,  im  $a!jre  taufenb  trierfjuttbertsweiuttbtteuttstg,  or  simply  1492, 
u  t  c  r  ;*,  c  fl  n  ^  tut  b  c  r  t^w  c  hut  b  it  cu  u$  i  g . 

271.  Names  of  Days  and  Months. 

(a)  The  days  of  the  week  (all  masculine)  are  :  — 

be*  Somt'tag  bet  $>tettS'tag  bcr  ^)o 

berSJtoit'tag  ber  SKttt'ttio^  ber^reirtag 

bcr  S^ntt'aBcttb,  be*  6am3'tag  (South  Germany) 

(b)  The  names  of  the  months  (all  masculine)  are :  — 


278  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

ber  Satt'uar  ber  9Jtat  tier 

ber  ge'fcruar  ber  Su'tti  &er  Dfto'&er 

ber  SHars  ber  Su'K  &er 

ber  5tyrtl'  ber  $uguft'  ber 


(c)  Learn  the  names  of  the  days  and  months. 

272.  Vocabulary. 

ber  $tit'tag,  bte  SJlittage  II,  noon  ;  bte  Wlinn'te  IV,  minute. 

$u  9tttttag  effen,  to  have  (noon)  bte  Uljr  IV,  toa^c/i,  c^ocA;;    (urn) 

dinner,  dine  (at  noon).  nncuid  U^r  ?    (at)   what  time? 

ber  Xurmf  bte  Xitrme  II,  tower,  $t$n  ttfjrf  ten  o'clock. 

turret.  bte  ge'rten  (three  syllables,  pi.), 

ber  Wlo'natf  bte  donate  II,  month.  vacation,  holidays. 

bte  Sfln'tte  IV,  sun.  fia'bett,  reg.  (^aBen)f  ^o  bathe. 

bte  Sru'rfe  IV,  6r%e.  gera'be,  just  (exactly). 

273.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  1.  SBteDtet  U^r  tft  e^?  2.  S)en  tDteDtelten  f)aben  tt)ir 
f)eute?  3.  @^  ift  gerabe  brei  SSiertet  fec^^.  4.  SBelcfjen  Sag 
^aben  iDtr  fyeute?  5,  3lm  britten  le^ten  3ftonat$  babeten  tt)ir 
in  ber  @onne  neben  bem  Zwcm  ber  grofeen  33rucfe.  6.  Sir 
effen  um  ^a(b  ein§  ju  SKittag,  toenn  tt)ir  gerien  tjaben. 

(6)  1.  What  time  was  it  when  we  saw  the  sun  over  the 
bridge  ?  2.  On  what  day  (of  the  month)  does  your  vacation 
begin  ?  3.  He  was  bathing  under  the  bridge  at  ten  minutes 
to  (t)or)  three.  4.  We  dine  at  just  half  past  one.  5.  What 
day  (of  the  week)  is  to-day?  6.  On  the  third  of  January, 
(in  the  year)  1896  our  vacation  ended  (stopped). 

274.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.   Bead  J)a$  SBcmbern,  Easy  Reading,  81,  16  —  83,  7. 

2.   Point  out  illustrations  of  half  past,  quarter  past,  quarter 


TIME,  DAYS,  MONTHS,  DATES.  279 

to,  and  some  minutes  before  and  after  the  hour ;  of  days  of  the 
week  and  of  the  month ;  of  dates. 

(6)  1.  3ln  toetdjem  £age  gotten  be$  3Bcmberer§  geriett  auf  ? 
2.  2lm  ttrietrielten  fingen  fie  an?  3.  Urn  ttrietriel  Ufyr  fyat  er 
unter  ber  33ru<fe  baben  moften?  4.  Sift  er  urn  gerabe  fyalb  ein$ 
3U  Sfttttag?  5.  Urn  tmetriele  3ftinnten  nadj  jeljn  fafyen  ttrir  bte 
@onne  uber  bem  fyoljen  Surtne?  6.  SSarum  bitrfen  ttrir  ntd)t 
urn  brei  SStertet  ein$  ju  3JJtttag  effen? 

(c)  1.   At  what  time  do  they  usually  dine  ?      2.  It  was  just 
four  minutes  to  three  when  we  arrived  at  (an)  that  high  tower 
beside  the  bridge.       3.   On  what  day  of  the  week  and  of  the 
month  did  your  vacation  begin  ?       4.   Did  they  bathe  at  quar- 
ter to  three  or  at  quarter  past  three  ?       5.  Last  month  the  sun 
didn't  shine  once.       6.   You  ought  to  be  at  home  at  half  past 
two  or  quarter  to  three. 

(d)  "  Will  you  dine  with  me  to-morrow  ?  " 

"  With  the  greatest  pleasure.  At  what  time  do  you  usually 
dine  ?  " 

"  I  usually  dine  at  just  quarter  to  one,  or  at  the  latest  (fpixte- 
ften$)  at  ten  minutes  to  one;  but  when  I'm  having  vacation,  it 
makes  no  difference." 

"  Shall  we  dine  at  quarter  past  one  ?  That  will  be  more 
agreeable  to  me  (dative)." 

"  Good  !  That  pleases  me,  too.  To-morrow  at  quarter  past 
one  we'll  dine  in  that  little  inn  beside  the  bridge." 

"  Thank  you !     Till  we  meet  again ! " 


280  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

LESSON    XLIX. 
Proper  Nouns. 


2Jlt  Irjetbelberg,  bu  feme, 
Du  Stabt  an  (Etjren  reid?; 
21m  Hecfar  unb  am  Htjetne 
Ketn'  anbre  fommt  bir  gletd?.  — 


275.  Proper  Names.  —  Names  of  persons  or  places  usually 
have  no  inflection  except  an  *&  in  the  genitive  singular. 

gBiOjelmS  23itrf)er,  William's  books. 
£errtt  9MUer£  §au3,  Mr.  Miller's  house. 
$ie  Strain  SBerlinS,  the  streets  of  Berlin. 
$>ie  gliiffc  D^u^anb^,  ^e  nvers  of  Eussia. 

(a)  Names  of  persons  ending  in  an  s  sound  take  an  apos- 
trophe in  the  genitive ;  names  of  places  ending  in  an  s  sound 
substitute  the  dative  with  Don. 

8rH?T  9Kitye,  Fritz's  cap. 

$>te  StraffCtt  toon  ^ariS,  the  streets  of  Paris. 

(6)  When  modified  by  the  definite  article,  proper  nouns  are 
uninflected.  When  they  are  modified  by  an  adjective,  this 
must  be  preceded  by  the  definite  article. 

$>a3  £au$  be3  £errn  $litllerf  the  house  of  Mr.  Miller. 
$>te  Gutter  bet  gutcn  9hma,  good  Anna's  mother. 
(£r  gafc  c^  bcm  ffeitteu  SBil^clm*    He  gave  it  to  little  William. 
$>ie  SBalbcr  be£  fito^en  Olttpanbf  the  forests  of  vast  Bussia. 

(c)  German  often  uses  the  article  with  a  proper  noun  where 
English  does  not. 

That's  Charles.    $>a3  tft  (bet) 
Give  it  to  Mary.     ®i&  e3 


PROPER   NOUNS.  281 

276.  Vocabulary. 

(ber)  $an§,  Johnny,  Jack.  ber  Crf)3  or  £)rf)'fe,  be3  Deafen,  btc 

ber  £err,  be3  $crrnf  bie  ^erreit,  Drfjfen  IV,  oz. 

gentleman;  sir;  Mr.  bte  5fafnal)me  IV,  (photographic) 

£err  SBratttt,  ^perrn  23raun3,  Mr.  exposure;  picture,  photograph; 

Brown.  etite  2lttfttafjme  nta^eit,  to  take 

£err  Wlul'lev,  £errtt  WIMtvS,  Mr.  a  picture. 

Miller.  bag  £ier,  btc  Xicrc  II,  animal. 

277.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  1*  grtfe'  Drf)fen  toarcn  in  §errn  9ftittfer§  gclb.  2. 
finb  bie  £tere  be^  guten  alten  §errn  33raun.  3,  §a 
@cf)tt)efter  eine  [c^dne  2lufna^me  getnac^t?  4.  £)te  glitffe 
®eut((^fanb^  finb  litrger  at^  bie  be^  gro^en  2lmeri!a$.  5.  ®e* 
[tern  ^aben  @an3  nnb  gri^  in  §errn  9ftittter3  ©arten  jttjet  §er- 
ten  gefefyen.  6.  gri^'  fteiner  33ruber  tjat  eine  2lnfna^nte  t)on 
ben  Ocfyfen  ber  §errn  53rann  gemarf)t» 

(6)  1.   Fred's    father    knows    those    two    gentlemen    well. 

2.  I  took  a  picture  of  Johnny's  oxen  in  Mr.  Brown's  field. 

3.  Good  old  Mr.  Miller's  oxen  are  beautiful  animals.      4.  Beau- 
tiful America  is  much  larger  than  old  Germany.       5.   But  life 
in  old  Germany  is  very  interesting.        6.    Johnny's  brother 
Fred  saw  Mr.  Miller's  oxen  in  Mr.  Brown's  field. 

278.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.   Bead  5Dd$  SBanbern,  Easy  Reading,  83,  8  —  85,  9. 

2.  Point  out  illustrations  of  modified  and  unmodified  proper 
names  ;  of  the  genitive  of  names  ending  in  an  s  sound ;  of  the 
German  use  of  the  article  with  a  proper  name,  where  it  is 
omitted  in  English. 

(6)  1*  @a§  ber  SBanberer  ne&en  §errn  4Sraun  ober  neben 
(bem)  grifc?  2.  £at  £an3'  ©djmefter  §errn  aftntferS  £5cf)fen 


282  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 


gefefyen?  3,  SBaren  e$  gfrtfc'  Odjfeti  ober  Me  Xiere  beS  §errn 
DJJitller?  4.  §at  §an3'  33ruber  etne  3lufna^me  t)on  biefen 
Jieren  gemadjt?  5.  @inb  bte  fyorfjften  33erge  be3  fdjBnen 
£)eutfcl)lanb  Ijityer  ate-bte  tyiidjfteti  «erge  Slmerifa^?  6.  §aben 
bte  §erren  fitr  ben  §cm$  eine  2lufna^tne  gemad^t? 

(c)  1.    Those    beautiful    animals    are    Mr.    Miller's    oxen. 
2.  Fred's  brother  Jack  took  a  picture  of  Mr.  Brown.     3.  Jack's 
sister  has    seen  the  interesting  cities  of  beautiful  Germany. 
4.  Mr.  Brown's  boy  Fred  took  a  picture  of  little  Jack.     5.  Jack's 
friend  could  not  find  poor  old  Mr.  Miller's  book.       6.    Those 
two  gentlemen  saw  Mr.  Brown's  oxen  in  Mr.  Miller's  field. 

(d)  "  Do  you  know  Mr.  Miller's  boy  Jack  ?  " 

"Yes,  he  is  an  industrious  boy,  more  industrious  than  his 
brother." 

"  What  is  Jack's  brother's  name  ?  " 

"  His  name  is  Fred,  and  he  has  many  friends." 

"  Do  Fred's  friends  go  to  school  ?  " 

"  Yes,  and  after  (the)  school  they  all  play  in  (auf)  the  big 
field  behind  old  Mr.  Miller's  house." 

LESSON  L. 
Review. 


'Das  Heine  IDortcfyen 
3ft  bod?  r>on  alien  Hiiffen, 
Die  UTenfcfyen  htacfen  miiffen, 
Die  aUerfyartfte  Hug.  —  33ed?ftetm 


279.  Review  Questions. 

(a)  1.  How  are  adjectives  and  adverbs  compared  ?      2.  How 
many  forms  do  adverbs  or  adjectives  have  in  the  superlative? 


REVIEW.  283 

3.  Explain  the  uses  of  these  two  forms.  4.  Give  six 
irregular  comparisons.  5.  How  is  than  following  a  com- 
parative expressed  in  German?  6.  Give  the  German  for 
as  ...  as  and  the  .  .  .  the. 

(b*)  1.  Count  from  one  to  one  hundred  in  German.  2.  How 
does  German  distinguish  a  hundred  and  one  hundred  ? 
3.  Give  the  rule  for  forming  ordinals.  4.  What  are  the 
various  German  equivalents  for  half? 

(c)  1.   Name    the    months    and    the    days    of    the    week. 
2.    Give  all  the  rules  for  telling  the  time  of  day.       3.   Illus- 
trate each.       4.   How  does  German  ask  the  day  of  the  week  ? 
5.    Of  the   month?       6.    Give   the   rule  for  dating  a  letter. 
7.   What  expression  usually  precedes  the  year  date? 

(d)  1.   What  is  the  difference  between  German  and  English 
use   of  proper  nouns  ?       2.   What   is  the  distinction   in  use 
between  names  of  persons  ending  in  an  s  sound  and  names 
of  places  ending  in  an  s  sound  ?       3.    Comment  on  the  use  of 
the  article  with  German  proper  names. 

280.  Vocabulary. 

ber  4>of,  trie  £ijfe  II,  yard,  court.  &erfaf  fcnf   toerltefj,  Derlaffen  (lja= 

ber  SBtrt,  Me  SBirte  II,  landlord,  fcen),  er  Derlafct,  to  leave. 

host.  cub '(id),  finally. 

bte  ®e'gettb  IV,  region,  place.  etttfang',  preposition  following  the 

bte  (Sdjett'tte  IV,  barn.  accusative,  along. 

ba£  @totf  bie  fitter  III,  estate.  un'gefafjr,  about,  approximately. 

281.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.    Bead  T)a3  SBanbertl,  Easy  Reading,  85,  10  —  87,  15. 
2.   Point  out  illustrations  of  numerals,  time  of  day,  and 
proper  names. 


284  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

(6)  1.  Urn  ttrietrief  llfyr  Derttej}  ber  2Btrt  ben  ©of?  2.  ©ing 
grt^  Ifeiner  grennb  Me  @tra§e  entfang  nadj  ber  @d)eune? 
3.  $amen  tirir  enbltd)  in  @errn  9JiiiCer$  @ut  nm  nngefafyr 
bret  33tertel  t)ier  an?  4.  ©aben  alt  Me  ©liter  in  biefer  ©egenb 
fdjbnere  ©djennen  als  nnfere?  5.  3ft  Jene  toetfte  ©cfyenne  in 
bent  £>ofe  am  Ijflcfyften?  6.  2Bar  e$  nngefafyr  anbertfyalb  aJJei- 
ten  Don  §errn  3)iiiHer^  ®ut  na^  ber  @tabt? 
.  (c)  1.  Finally  the  wanderer  saw  a  barn  in  the  court  of 
a  large  estate.  2.  At  about  what  time  did  the  landlord  leave 
Mr.  Brown's  estate?  3.  The  barns  of  the  estates  in  this 
region  are  the  largest.  4.  Fred's  little  brother  Jack  was 
coming  along  the  way  at  about  quarter  to  three.  5.  That 
bush  in  our  yard  is  about  a  foot  and  a  half  (§  265,  a)  higher 
than  the  one  beside  the  barn.  6.  When  the  landlord  left  the 
barn,  he  went  along  the  street  to  Mr.  Miller's  estate. 

(cT)  "Well  (nnn),  at  last  you  have  come  to  my  estate  here 
in  the  country.  That  is  fine  (fcfyon)  !  At  about  what  time  did 
you  leave  the  city  ?  " 

"  I  don't  know.  At  about  quarter  past  two,  I  think.  The 
landlord  will  send  my  baggage  from  the  inn." 

"  Good !  Shall  I  show  you  the  estate  ?  Here  is  the  big 
yard  behind  the  house,  and  there  are  the  barns.  The  one 
beside  the  tree  is  the  largest.  It  is  the  largest  in  this  region." 

"  How  many  horses  have  you  ?  " 

"  Ten  horses  and  I  have  also  six  oxen.  Shall  I  show  them 
to  you  ?  Shall  we  go  into  the  barn  ?  " 

"  Yes ;  please  let  me  see  the  animals." 

282.  Review  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  £)tefer  S3erg  ift  am  pdjften ;  er  ift  ber  fytfcfjfte,  ben  id) 
je  gefejjen  Ijabe.  2.  gjftt  bem  grijftten  33ergnitgen  gtng  ber 


THE   PASSIVE   VOICE.  285 

• 

SBanberer  in  ber  angenefymen  ^adjt  toetter,  3.  @$  frfjten  meljr 
al$  cmbertfyalb  2fteifen  nadj  bem  ©aftfyof  tm  nadjften  £)orfe. 
4.  $  ft  e$  fcfyon  Ijalb  brei  ober  nur  em  astertet  bret?  5.  9Bie- 
triel  Ufyr  ift  e$,  unb  ben  nrietnelten  fyaben  ttrir  fyente?  6.  @cm3' 
4Bruber  gri£  mo^nte  tm  @aufe  be§  guten  atten  §errn  Gutter, 

(&)  1.  The  older  we  get,  the  more  we  learn.  2.  I  know 
nothing  more  agreeable  than  to  read  the  best  books.  3.  In 
the  first  place,  the  teacher  asked  us  twice  or  three  times  why 
we  had  read  only  half  a  page.  4.  At  half  past  three  or  quar- 
ter to  four  we  had  gone  only  a  mile  and  a  half.  5.  To-day  is 
Monday,  the  tenth  of  April.  6.  On  Tuesday,  the  third  of 
February,  I  took  a  picture  of  Fred's  oxen. 

(c)  TJie  Wanderer.  —  On  Wednesday,  the  fifth  of  July,  at 
about  quarter  to  two  I  saw  a  man  wandering  along  the  street. 
He  was  older  than  I,  and  he  wore  the  funniest  coat  I  have  ever 
seen.  This  was  short  and  of  green  cloth.  The  man  spoke  to 
me ;  he  did  not  know  what  time  it  was.  He  had  gone  ten 
miles,  and  it  was  an  hour  and  a  half  to  the  next  village. 
The  poor  man  had  had  nothing  to  eat  since  morning. 

LESSON  LI. 
The  Passive  Voice. 


(Sliic!  Idgt  fid?  nid?t  t?on  (Sott  erbttten 
Unb  ntcfyt  r>om  ^tmmel  fid?  erffefyn, 

(Es  imrb  erfdmpft  nid?t,  nicfyt  erftntten, 
ttnb  me  crrungen  Farm  man's  fet>n.  — 


283.  The  Passive  Voice  of  transitive  verbs  is  formed  by  con- 
jugating metben  with  the  past  participle.  In  the  perfect 
tenses  the  form  toorben  is  used  for  getoorben. 


286  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

(a)  SBetben  thus  has  two  meanings  in  English  besides  its 
regular  meaning,  to  become.  In  the  future  it  means  shall  or 
will  ;  in  the  passive,  am,  is,  or  are.  •  Distinguish  carefully  :  id) 
roerbe,  /  become;  idf)  toerbe  loben,  /  shall  praise;  id)  toerbe 
getobt,  /  am  praised. 

When  you  see  a  form  of  iperbetl,  look  carefully  to  see 
whether  it  is  used  independently,  or  is  followed  by  a  simple 
infinitive,  or  by  a  past  participle,  and  then  translate  accord- 
ingly. Except  in  the  future,  it  may  often  be  translated  by  get. 
tmtrbe  franl,  I  got  sick.  $§  ttmrbe  gefcfytagen,  I  got  hit. 


284.                      Conjugation  of  the  Passive. 

PRESENT  INDICATIVE. 

idj  toerbe  gefofct,  gcfe^cn  tour  toerben  gefofct,  gefdjett 

/  am  praised,  seen.  we  are  praised,  seen. 

bit  uurft  gclubt,  gcfcficn  il)r  jucrbct  gclobtf  gcfctjcu 

thou  art  praised,  seen  you  are  praised,  seen. 

cr  tufrb  gclobt,  gefe^en  fie  fterben  getoBtf  gcfct)ctt 

he  is  praised,  seen.  they  are  praised,  seen. 

SYNOPSIS. 

Pres.    tdj  toerbe   gelofct,  I  am        Perf.  idj  Bin  ge(obt  tuorbcn,  / 

praised.  have  been  praised. 

Past,    idj  ttmrbe  getofctf  7  ioas         P.  Perf.  idj   war   gefofct    ttwrbett, 

praised.  I  had  been  praised. 

Fut.     it^  tucrbe  gelobt  toert>ett,         F.  Perf.  i(^  tticrbc  gdoBt  ttiorbcn 

/  s^a?Z  6e  praised.  feitt,  J  5^aZ?  /tave  been 

praised. 

IMPERATIVE.  —  toctbc  gdo&t  (rare),  nJCtbet  gelobt  (rare),  be  praised. 
Note.  —  The  passive  imperative  is  usually  formed  with  feilt  :  — 

fci  gelofct,  feib  gc(oBtf  fcien  8ic  gefoftt,  be  praised. 

INFINITIVE.  —  Pres.,  gefofct   (jtt).  ttictbctt,   ^o  6e  praised.      Perf.,   gelobt 
ttiorbctt  (jtt)  fcinf  ^o  Tiave  6cew  praised. 


THE   PASSIVE   VOICE.  287 

PARTICIPLE.  — Pres.,  $tt  fafccttb,  to  be  praised  (used  only  as  a  declinable 
adjective  preceding  its  noun  :  citt  §tt  to&Cttbcr  9ftamt,  a  man  to  be 
praised}.  Past,  gelofct,  praised. 

(a)  Conjugate  each  tense  of  the  indicative  in  full,  and  give  complete 
synopses  in  the  other  persons  and  numbers. 

285.  Dative  of  Agent.  —  The  agent  is  put  in  the  dative  after 
Don.     (The  English  by  with  the  agent  is  never  German  bet.) 

$dj  tocrbc  ttim  bcm  ficfjrcr  gehrft.    lam  praised  by  the  teacher. 
$tt  Mft  toon  bciitcr  9Jhtttcr  gctofct  toorbctu     You  have  been. praised  by 
your  mother. 

286.  Vocabulary. 

bcr  $el3  or  gdfcn,  bc3  gclfcttS,         distinguished  from   bic 
bic  ^cffctt  I,  rock.  wall  of  a  room. 

bcr  $ttcdjt,  bic  ®tted)te  II,  serf;  bag  atttt'telafter  I,  mzddZe  ages, 

servant.  fcatt'ett,  reg.  (t)a6cu)r  to  6wi7fL 

bcr  OWtcr  I,  knight.  ftalj'tcn,  reg.  (^abcn)f  to  choose 

bcr  Stein,  bie  <3tcinc  II,  stone.  bitf,  ^i'cA;;  (of  persons),  fat. 

bic  Sftau'cr  IV,  (outside)  wall,  as  ftarf,  strong. 

287.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  1.  SBurben  fjofye  gelfen  t)on  ben  bittern  gett)a^It?  2. 
ftarlen  Oftauern  tpurben  t)on  ben  Sne^ten  gebaut  3. 
9Kitte(aIter  tDiirben  bie  @d)toffer  auf  ^o^en  gelfen  toon  ben 
®necf)ten  gebaut.  4.  2Btrb  bie  Sftaner  bicE  gemac^t?  5.  £)iefer 
geB  tft  t>on  etnem  fitter  fitr  fein  @d)IoB  gemtiljlt  tt)orben. 
6.  !l)ie  Sftauern  nwren  t)on  ben  Snecf)ten  fe^r  bid  nnb  ftarf 
gentad^t  tDorben. 

(ft)  1.    These  strong  walls  have  been  built   by   the   serfs. 

2.  That  high  rock  was    chosen  by  a   knight  for  his  castle. 

3.  In  the  middle  ages  the  thick  walls  of  the  strong  castles 
were  made  of  (an$)  large  stones.       4.   Many  castles  had  been 


288  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

built  on  high  rocks  by  the  servants  of  the  knights.  5.  The 
stones  for  the  walls  were  carried  by  the  serfs.  6.  In  the 
middle  ages  many  a  high  rock  was  chosen  by  knights,  who 
had  their  castles  built  there. 

288.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.   Bead  ©eutfdje  @d)lt)ffer,  Easy  Reading,  89,  1—90,  31. 
2.   Point  out  illustrations  of  the  passive  voice  and  of  the 

dative  of  agent. 

(b)  1.  Serben  triele  ©goffer  Je^t  in  £)entfcl)fanb  gefeljen? 
2.  SBnrben  biefe  ©differ  tnt  3fttttefatter  cwf  ben  pcfjften  getfen 
gebant?      3.  SBurben  biefe  fyofyen  gelfen  getotiljnlid;)  Don  ben 
bittern  getoaljtt,  nm  ifyre  ©differ  baranf  banen  jn  faffen? 
4.  @tnb  bie  btcfen  3J?auern   an^  frf)iDeren  @teinen  Don  ben 
$necf)ten  genta^t  tDorben?      5.  SBte  finb  bie  ftarfen  sDfamern 
Don  ben  ^neif)ten  gebant  toorben?      6.   SBarnnt  iDnrben  ^o^e 
getfen  ober  4Berge  Don  ben  bittern  getr)ii^It? 

(c)  1.   Were  the  castles  in  Germany  built  by  knights  in  the 
middle  ages  ?       2.  Here  is  a  high  rock  which  had  been  chosen 
by  a  knight  for  his  strong  castle.       3.    The  thick  walls  are 
being  made  (out)  of  large  stones.       4.  These  stones  have  been 
carried  onto  the  rock  by  the  serfs  of  the  knights.       5.    In  the 
middle  ages  many  strong  castles  were  built  on  the  highest 
rocks.     6.    The  stones  of  the  thick  walls  can  be  seen  to-day 
on  many  of  these  high  rocks. 

(d)  "  By  whom  were  all  these  castles  built,  that  are  seen 
everywhere  in  Germany  to-day  ?  " 

"  They  were  built  in  the  middle  ages  by  the  serfs  of  the  old 
knights." 


THE   PASSIVE   VOICE.  289 

"  And  were  all  those  stones  for  the  thick  walls  carried  up 
(Ijmaufgetragen)  by  the  poor  serfs  ?  " 

"  Yes,  after  a  high  rock  had  been  chosen  by  the  knight,  the 
walls  were  built  (out)  of  stones  which  were  carried  up  by  the 
serfs." 

"  What  a  shame !  And  so  many  castles  were  built !  The 
stones  of  the  walls  are  seen  on  so  many  high  rocks." 

"  Yes,  it  is  very  interesting." 

LESSON  LII. 
The  Passive  Voice. 


Was  tttcfyt  nerboten  tft,  tft  erlaubt.  — 


289.  Use  of  Past  Participle.  —  When  a  past  participle  is 
used  as  an  adjective  in  English,  German  uses  feitt  as  copula. 

The  castle  is  built.     $>a3  @rf)fofj  tft  gefcaut 
The  wood  was  split.    $a3  ^>of$  ttwr  gcfpaltcu, 

(a)  This  must  not  be  confused  with  the  passive  construc- 
tion, often  expressed  the  same  way  in  English  (because  in 
English  to  be  is  both  the  copula  and  the  sign  of  the  passive). 

The  castle  is  (being)  built.    QaS  <3rfjfo$  ttrirb  gdwut* 
The  wood  was  (being)  split.     ^a§  $0(5  ttmrbe  geftwltett* 

(&)  SBerben  is  used  when  verbal  action  is  asserted;  fetn 
when  the  participle  is  really  an  adjective,  telling  a  condition 
of  the  subject. 

The  castle  is  built  by  the  serfs.    &&§  Srfjfofj  totrt)  tJOtt  ben  $ned)tett  ge= 

foaut  (verbal  action). 
The  castle  is  built  on  a  rock.    $a£  Sdjtof?  iff  auf  eincm  $effen 

(condition). 


290  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 


The  wood  was  split  by  the  girls.    $a3  £0(5  umrbe  turn  ben  $Uat)rfjnt 

gcfpaltcn  (verbal  action). 
The  wood  was  split.    $>a3  ^olj  mar  gcfpaltcu  (condition). 


Note.  —  A  simple  way  to  distinguish  the  two  constructions  is  to  make 
the  verb  active.  If  the  tense  stays  the  same  without  changing  the  mean- 
ing of  the  original  sentence,  use  toerben.  But  if,  in  order  to  keep  the 
original  meaning,  you  have  to  change  the  tense,  use  feitu  Try  this  with 
the  examples  above. 

(c)  Always  use  toerben  when  the  agent  is  expressed.  The 
wood  was  split  may  be  translated  correctly,  £)d$  §ofj  ttwr 
geftwtten  or  £)a$  §olj  tmxrbe  gefpalten,  depending  on  the 
meaning  ;  but  The  wood  was  split  by  the  man  can  be  trans- 
lated correctly  only  by  3)a$  ©^3  ttntrbe  fcott  bem  2ftcmne 


/  290.  Passive  of  Verbs  governing  the  Dative.  —  Verbs  followed 
by  the  dative  are  used  only  impersonally  (that  is,  with  e$  as 
subject)  in  the  passive,  the  subject  being  put  in  the  dative 
of  indirect  object.  In  dependent  or  inverted  clauses  e$  is 
omitted. 

I  am  thanked.    ®$  tomb  mir  gebanft  (lit.,  it  is  thanked  to  me). 
You  were  helped  by  a  man.    $tr  ttmrbe  turn  eincm  Semite  geljolfen. 

Note.  —  This  is  not  so  common  as  the  constructions  in  §  291. 

291.  Substitutes  for  the  Passive.  —  German  uses  the  passive 
less  than  English. 

(a)  When  the  agent  is  not  expressed,  man  with  the  active 
may  be  used. 

It  is  said.    Wlan  fagt 

I  am  thanked.    Wlan  battft  mir* 

You  were  asked.    Wlan  fragtc  bid)  (eudj,  Ste). 

We  shall  be  entertained.     -Jftatt  toirb  Wt3  ttttterfjaftetu 


THE   PASSIVE   VOICE.  291 

(6)  When  the  agent  is  expressed,  we  may  invert,  making 
the  agent  the  subject,  and  the  subject,  the  object. 

You  were  helped  by  a  man.    (£ht  SJlatttt  ljat  bir  gcljotfciu 

The  ivood  was  split  by  the  man.    $>cr  Wlann  Ijat  ba3  £of$  gcf  paftcn. 


292.  Vocabulary. 

ber  ®ra'&ctt,  bic  ®rafcctt  I,  ditch,  fjcf'fcn,  Ijatf,  gcfjoffcn  (fjafccn),  cr 

moat.  fjttftf  with  dative,  to  help. 

bet  ^fl'itig,  bic  $iwigc  II,  king.  fpren'gen,  reg.  (Ijafccn),   to  burst 

bcr  ^alaft',   bic    ^alaftc  II,  pal-  (active),  blow  up  (active). 

ace.  crfjt,  genuine,  real,  "regular." 

crfnu'bcn,      reg.      (Ijafcctt),     with  un'tcn,  below;  down;  downstairs. 

dative,  to  allow.  ttitttt'bcrtujfl,  wonderful. 

293.  Oral  Drill. 


(a)  1.  2Bar  ber  'pataft  be^  ^ontg^  gefprengt?  2.  3Son 
»urbc  ber  ^ataft  gefprengt?  3.  grlauben  @ie  mtr, 
311  ^elfen!  4.  itnten  tm  ©raben  finbet  man  bte  H)iinbert)oH(ten 
ggiumen,  5.  J)a^  ©d)IoB  be^  S'ontg^  tt)ar  tt)unbert)ol(  ;  e^  tt)ar 
etn  e^ter  ^alaft.  6.  23on  lt)em  tDitrbe  3^cn  ge^otfen? 

(6)  1.  A  ditch  was  found  beside  the  king's  palace.  2.  I 
always  help  the  teacher,  when  he  allows  me.  3.  The  largest 
tower  in  the  king's  palace  is  blown  up.  4.  It  will  be  found 
down  in  the  moat.  5.  That  new  house  is  wonderful  ;  it  is 
a  regular  palace,  they  say.  6.  When  the  king's  palace  was 
blown  up,  the  soldiers  were  helped  by  their  friends. 

294.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.   Bead  £)eutfd)e  ©cfytoffer,  Easy  Reading,  91,  1—92,  21. 

2.  Point  out  illustrations  of  the  past  participle  denoting 
(1)  action,  (2)  condition  ;  of  the  passive  of  a  verb  governing 
the  dative  ;  of  substitutes  for  the  passive. 


292  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 


(&)  1.  £etfct  ber  £nrm  ,,ber  gefyrengte  £nrm"?  2.  $ft 
ber  £nrm  gefprengt?  3.  23on  toem  tmtrbe  ben  ©olbaten  ge* 
fyolfen?  4.  23ielteid)t  erlaubt  man  nn$,  bie  ttmnberttolten 
^alafte  be$  SonigS  ju  befurfjen.  5.  SBurbe  bie  ©Wftc  bes 
gefprengten  £nrm$  unten  tm  ©raben  gefunben?  6.  @ie^t 
man  in  £)entfdjtanb  ©(^toffer,  bie  erf)te  ^alafte  finb? 

(c)  1.   Why  is  the  tower   called   the  "  blown-up  tower  "  ? 
2.   It  was  blown  up  by  the  king's   soldiers,  and  they  were 
helped  by  others.       3.   We  shall  be  allowed  to  see  the  won- 
derful castles  in  Germany  ;  they  (§  186)  are  regular  palaces. 
4.    The  tower  is  blown  up  ;  (the)  half  of  it  lies  below  in  the 
moat.       5.    The  most  wonderful  flowers  are  found  down  in 
the  ditch,  it  is  said.       6.    They  were  allowed  to  visit  the  pal- 
ace, but  they  were  not  helped  to  go  across  the  moat. 

(d)  "  Is  that  tower  blown  up  ?  " 

"  Yes,  it  was  blown  up  by  soldiers.     (The)  half  of  it  can  be 

seen  below  in  the  moat." 

"It  is  a  wonderful  tower.     Were  the  soldiers  helped  by 

any  one,  when  it  was  blown  up  ?  " 

"  Certainly  they  were  helped.  Shall  we  visit  the  castle  ?  " 
"  Yes.  Isn't  it  wonderful  !  It  looks  like  a  king's  palace." 
"  It  is  visited  by  many  people  every  day.  At  half  past  two 

we  shall  be  allowed  to  visit  it." 


REFLEXIVE   VERBS.  293 

LESSON  LIII. 
Reflexive  Verbs. 


<£s  bilbet  etn  (Talent  fid?  in  ber  Stifle, 

Sid?  ein  (Efyarafter  in  bent  Strom  ber  IPelt.  —  ©oetfye. 


295.  Reflexive  Verbs.  —  A  reflexive  verb  is  one  whose  object 
is  a  pronoun  referring  to  the  subject. 

(a)  The  reflexive  pronoun  for  the  first  or  second  person 
is  the  same  as  the  personal  one,  except  in  the  case  of  @ie 
(formal  address).  For  the  third  person,  for  matt,  and  for 
(gie,  it  is  fid)  in  both  numbers  and  cases  (dat.  and  ace.). 

(6)  As  the  reflexive  verb  always  has  an  object  (the  pro- 
noun), the  auxiliary  is  always  Ijabett. 

296.  Conjugation  of  Reflexives.  —  Learn   the  conjugation  of 
fid)  f reuett,  pages  359  and  360,  §  384,  a,  6,  c,  d,  e,  and  /.     Notice 
that  the  reflexive  pronoun  must  change  to  agree  with  the  sub- 
ject ;  just  as  in  English :  I  hurt  myself,  you  hurt  yourself,  etc. 

297.  Use  of  Reflexives.  —  German  uses   the   reflexive   more 
than  English. 

(a)  In  German  intransitives  may  be  used  reflexively.  This 
is  an  impersonal  idiom,  used  only  with  e$. 

§icr  tangt  e£  fid)  f djr  fdjiw.     The  dancing  here  is  very  fine. 

(£3  gefjt  fid)  fdjtoer  im  SBalbe.     The  walking  is  hard  in  the  wood. 

(&)  Reflexives  are  often  used  as  substitutes  for  the  passive. 

The  door  is  opened  (opens') .    ^ic  Xiir  offttet  fid)* 
The  book  has  been  lost.    $113  Shtdj  Ijat  fid)  toerforett* 


294  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

298.  Vocabulary. 

iwS  8d)tof'5ttttmer  I,  bedroom.  fid)   freu'ett,   reg.   (Jjafcett),   to   be 
fid)  au^'rttJjett,  reg.  sep.  (Kjafcett),         #Za<2. 

to  r<?s£  (wp),  get  rested.  fid)    fitm'meru,   reg.    (Ijafcett),    to 
fid)  befitt'bett,   feefattb  fidjf   fid)  fce=  bother,  care,  worry;  about,  um 

fttttbeit  (Jjafcett),  to  be,  (find  one's          with  the  accusative. 

self) ;  to  do;  How  do  you  do  ?  fd)to'fen,  fdjlief,  gefdjfafett  (Ijafien), 

$3ie  Befinben  6ie  fit^  ?  e*  fc^(aftf  to  sZeep. 

fit^  erlje'&ett,  er^oB  ftd|r  fit^i  erfjoBcu  fret,  /ree ;  unoccupied. 

(fyaberi),  to  rise,  to  get  up  (from  gemtit'lidjf  cozy,  comfortable. 

a  seat).  gfcidj,  at  once,  immediately. 

299.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  1.   gs  fdjtcift  fid)  fefyr  gut  in  biefem  gemittli(f)en  @(^taf^ 
Dimmer.      2.  9Bir  ru^ten  un^  aMr  aber  tt)ir  er^oben  un^  gleic^, 
a(3  tuir  bie  anberen  fa^en.      3.   SBie  befinben  @ie  firf)?    §abett 
@ie  fid)  gut  au^geru^t?      4.  §aft  bu  bi(^  gefreut,  baft  bu  eiu 
freie^  Sc^Iaf simmer  gefunben  l^aft?      5.    ^f)r  Wmmert  eurf) 
iDenig,  IDO  i^r  f(f)(aft*      6.  ^^  'fteue  midf),  ba^  idj  mic^  fo  gut 
befiube. 

(b)  Remember  to  make  the  pronoun  object  of  the  reflexive  agree 
with  the  subject.  —  1.    How  do  you  do  ?       2.    I  am  glad  that 
you  have  rested  so  well.       3.  He  got  up  at  once  and  went  into 
the  unoccupied  bedroom.       4.    I  don't  care  about  a  cozy  bed- 
room;  the  sleeping  is  good  on  this  bench.       5.    She  is  glad 
that  she  can   rest.        6.    They  don't   worry   about   anything 
(not  anything  =  ?). 

300.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.    Bead  J)eutf(^e  @cf)fciffer,  Easy  Reading,  92,  22  —  95,  3. 
2.   Point  out  illustrations  of  the  various  uses  of  reflexive 
verbs. 


REFLEXIVE   VERBS.  295 


(6)  1.  2Bo  befanben  fid)  Me  beiben  greunbe  fpater  am 
mittag?      2.  ®ihnmerten  fie  fid)  um  ein  freies  Sdjlaf  Dimmer? 

3.  greute  fid)  ber  eine  greunb,  ba£  er  gleid)  eineti  gemutttcfjen 
©aftfjof  fanb?      4.  SBarum  erfyob  fid)  ber  SBirt,  ber  fid)  aitf 
ber  33cmf  auSruljte?      5.  @d)laft  e$  fid)  gemittltd)  in  biefem 
freiett  Sdjlafjimmer?      6.  Sr^ob  fic^  ber  2Birt  gfei(^r  nad)bem 
er  fid)  au$gentl)t  ^atte  ? 

(c)  1.    The  landlord  got  up  at  once  from  the  bench  on  which 
he  had  been  resting.       2.    Is  the  walking  (going)  good  in  the 
wood  ?       3.   How  does  your  sister  do  ?     Did  she  rest  well  ? 

4.  The  two  friends  did  not  worry  about  an  unoccupied  bed- 
room.      5.    They  were  glad  that  they  were  allowed  to  rest  in 
those  cozy  chairs.      6.  How  do  you  do  this  morning  ?     I  hope 
that  you  (have)  slept  well. 

(d)  "  Good  morning  !       How  are  you  this  morning  ?  " 

"  Well,  thank  you  !  I  (have)  slept  ten  hours.  This  is  a 
very  cozy  inn." 

"  I  am  glad  that  you  rested  well.  I  didn't  bother  about  a 
room,  and  when  I  arrived  late  the  landlord  had  no  bedroom 
free." 

"  What  a  shame  !     Where  did  you  sleep  ?  " 

"  Here  on  this  bench.  It  wasn't  very  cozy.  I'm  glad  it's 
morning." 

"  I  have  room  (^)3ta^)  for  two  beds  in  my  bedroom.  I  will 
show  it  to  you.  You  can  rest  better  there." 

"  Thank  you  !     That  will  be  very  cozy." 


296  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

LESSON    LIV. 
Impersonal  Verbs. 


Sctyon  fdngt  es  an  311  bdmmern. 
Per  Utonb  als  f^trt  erroacfyt 
Unb  fingt  ben  IDoIfenldmmern 
€tn  £teb  3iir  guten  Had?t.  —  ©etfcet. 


301.  Impersonal  Verbs.  —  Impersonal  verbs  are  of  four  kinds 
or   classes :    pure   impersonals,   reflexive  impersonals,  imper- 
sonals  with  the  accusative,  and  impersonals  with  the  dative. 

(a)  Impersonals  occur  only  in  the  third  person  singular, 
and  are  conjugated  only  with  e$.  They  are  usually  weak 
and  take  I)aben  as  auxiliary,  except  gefd)ef)en,  getingen,  and 
einfaften. 

302.  Pure  Impersonals  usually  denote  states  of  the  weather : 
e$  regnet,  it  rains;  e$  frfjnett,  it  snows. 

Conjugation  of  e$  regnet,  it  rains. 

Pres.  e3  regnet,  it  rains. 

Past.  e3  regnete,  it  rained. 

Fut.  t%  ttrirb  regnenf  it  will  rain. 

Perf .  e3  ^at  getegnet,  it  has  rained. 

P.  Perf.  e£  Ijatte  geregnet,  it  had  rained. 

F.  Perf.  e3  tt»trb  geregnet  fjafccu,  it  will  have  rained. 

INFINITIVE. — Pres.,  (§u)  regnett,  to  rain.    Perf.,  gcrcgnct  (511)  fjabcnf  to 
have  rained. 

303.  Reflexive  Impersonals  include  such  as  e$  [deleft  ftd^,  it  is 
proper;  e$  Derfte^t  fid^r  it  is  a  matter  of  course. 


IMPERSONAL   VERBS.  297 

Conjugation  of  e3  [c^i(Jt  fid),  it  is  proper. 

Pies.  e3  fd)td:t  fid),  it  is  proper. 

Past.  e3  fdjirfte  fid),  it  was  proper. 

Fut.  e3  ttrirb  fid)  f  djtrf  cnf  ^  wi'M  6e  proper. 

Perf  .  e3  Ijat  fid)  gefdjirft,  ft  ftas  been  proper. 

P.  Perf.  e3  Ijatte  fidj  gefdjtrft,  it  had  been  proper. 

F.  Perf.  e£  toirb  fidj  gefdjid;t  fyaften,  ?7  will  have  been  proper. 


INFINITIVE.  —  Pres.,  fid)  (p)  f^trfett,  to  be  proper.     Perf.,  fir^  gcf^trft 
(p)  fjaftctt,  ^o  Aave  6een  proper. 

304.    Impersonate  with  the  Accusative  include  such,  as  e$  freut 
r  lam  glad;  e^  tDUnbert  mt(^,  I  wonder.  • 

Conjugation  of  e$  freut  mt(^r  7  am  glad. 

PRESENT. 

frcut  midjf  /  am  glad.  c§  frcttt  uu^f  we  are  glad. 

frcut  bic^f  thou  art  glad.  e3  frent  cut^f  yow  are  glad. 

frcttt  i^tt  (fie,  e3),  /^6  (s^e,  iY)  is  glad.  t§  freut  fief  they  are  glad. 

SYNOPSIS. 

Pres.  e3  freut  mtd)f  /  am  glad. 

Past.  e3  freute  bic^|f  thou  wast  glad. 

Fut.  e3  ttrirb  i^u  freueur  he  will  be  glad. 

Perf.  e3  ^at  ittt£  gefreitt,  ^e  /iaue  6eew  (were)  glad. 

P.  Perf.  e§  Ijatte  eudj  gefreutf  you  had  been  glad. 

F.  Perf.  e£  ttrirb  fie  gefreut 


INFINITIVE.  —  Pres.,  mit^f  bir^f  etc.,  (ju)  freueu*     Perf.,  tmdjf  btc^r  etc., 
gefreut 


305.  Impersonals  with  the  Dative  include  such  as  e$  tut  ttttr 
tetb,  Jam  sorry;  e§  f  ft  tit  tntr  etn,  it  occurs  to  me;  e$  geltttgt  tnit, 
I  succeed;  e^  gefc^te^t  mtr,  it  happens  to  me. 


298  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

Conjugation  of  e$  tut  mtr  letb,  I  am  sorry. 
PRESENT. 

e£  tut  tttir  feib,  lam  sorry.  e3  tut  tttt3  leib,  we  are  sorry. 

e3  tut  bir  leib,  thou  art  sorry.  t§  tttt  eurf)  tetb,  you  are  sorry. 

e3  tilt  itym  (iljr,  tfym)  leib,  he  (she,         t§  tttt  iljltett  leib,  they  are  sorry 
it)  is  sorry. 

SYNOPSIS. 

Pres.  e3  tut  tttit  leib,  /  am  sorry. 

Past.  e3  tat  bit  letb,  thou  wast  sorry. 

Fut.  e3  ttrirb  ttjm  feib  tuur  he  will  be  sorry. 

Perf  .  e3  Ijat  uu§  letb  getatt,  we  have  been  sorry. 

P.  Perf»  c^  ^attc  eut^  feib  getau,  you  had  been  sorry. 

E.  Perf.  e3  mirb  tljueu  leib  gctau  f|a6cnf  ^ey  will  have  been  sorry. 

INFINITIVE.  —  Pres.,  mtrf  bir,  etc.,  feib  ($tt)  tuit»     Perf.,  utirf  bir,  etc., 
(eib  getatt  (511)  Ijafcen. 

306.  (§£  gibt  ;  e$  tft*  —  There  is  (there  are)  is  expressed  in 
two  ways  in  German  :  e$  gtbt  and  e§  tft« 

(a)  To  express  general  existence  without  naming  a  limited, 
definite  place,  use  e$  gibt.  It  is  always  impersonal,  singular, 
takes  the  accusative,  and  e$  is  never  omitted. 

(&§  gifct  toiele  arme  Scute*     There  are  many  poor  people. 

2$a3  gi&t  e^  SReueS  ?     Wliat  is  there  new?    (  What's  the  news?} 

(&)  To  express  particular  existence  in  a  limited,  definite 
place  use  e$  tft  or  e^  ftttb.  It  is  personal,  the  verb  agreeing  in 
person  and  number  not  with  e$,  but  with  the  real  subject, 
which  is  always  in  the  nominative  case.  (§;$  is  omitted  in  an 
inverted  or  subordinate  clause. 


tft  lent  tylafy  meljr  im  ^paufe*     There  is  no  more  room  in  the  house. 
ftttb  Sttiei  @Hafer  auf  bem  Xtftfje.     There  are  two  glasses  on  the  table. 


IMPERSONAL   VERBS.  299 

ift  feitt  $fa^  tm  ^paufe.     Now  there  is  no  room  in  the  house. 
Sdj  felje,  baf;  $tt)ei  ®lafer  auf  bem  Xifdje  fittb.    /  see  that  there  are  two 
glasses  on  the  table. 

307.  Vocabulary. 

ber  $af'fee,  beg  $affeeg,  bie  $af=  lowed  in  German  by  the  infini- 

feeg,  coffee.  tive,  where  English  has  in  and  a 

bag  SBrfit'djett  I,  roll.  verbal  in  -ing. 

bag  (£|'5immer  I,  dining-room.  eg  gefdjieljt',  eg  geftfjafj',  eg  ift  ge= 

eg  fattt  mir  eitt',  eg  fiel  mir  eitt',  eg  fdje'Ijen,  with  dative,  it  happens. 

ift  mir  eiit'gefattett,  it  occurs  to  eg  reg'itet,  reg.  (fjafcett),  it's  rain- 

me,  I  have  an  idea ;  eg  fattt  mir  ing. 

ttidjt  eitt,  bag  jtt  tint,  /  haven't  tritt'fett,  trawl,  getriurfett  (Ijafiett), 

the  least  idea  (shouldn't  'think)  to  drink. 

of  doing  that.  eg  titt  mir  leib',  eg  tat  mir  leib',  eg 

eg  frettt  midj,  reg.  ((jaBett),  I  am  fjat  mir  leib'  getatt,  I  am  sorry. 

glad.  eg  Derftefjt'  fi^,  eg  tierftawb'  firf),  eg 

eg  geUitgt'  mir,  eg  gelaitg'  mir,  eg  ^at  fidj  tierftatt'bett,  it  is  a  matter 

ift  mir  gehmrgett,  I  succeed,  fol-  of  course. 

308.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  i.  @$  fallt  mir  nid)t  einr  Saffee  ju  trtnfen,  oljne  53rotrf)en 
gu  effen*  2.  $[*  e^  S^tien  getungen,  ba^  Shimmer  ju  finben? 
3.  @^  tut  tfjm  Ietbr  ba^  e§  regnet.  4.  S^  t)erfte^t  fi^r  baj$  ba^ 
ntc^t  fe^r  oft  gefdjeljen  ift.  5.  @^  ftnb  triete  ®rot($en  auf  bem 
Stfc^e  im  glimmer*  6.  g^  gibt  utd)t£  ®effere^  at^  guten 
taffee. 

(6)  1.  It  has  just  occurred  to  me  that  we  can't  play  when 
it's  raining.  2.  Are  you  glad  that  it  didn't  happen  yesterday? 
3.  We  are  sorry  that  you  didn't  drink  your  coffee  and  eat  your 
rolls.  4.  It  is  a  matter  of  course  that  they  will  succeed. 
5.  There  were  several  rolls  on  the  table  in  the  dining-room, 
but  there  was  no  coffee  there.  6.  I  am  sorry  that  there  are 


300  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

no  better   seats   than   these ;    perhaps   we   shall   succeed   to- 
morrow in  getting  better  ones. 

309.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  Bead  £)eutfd)e  ©differ,  Easy  Reading,  95,  4—97,  4. 
2.   Point  out  illustrations  of  all  four  classes  of  impersonals, 
and  of  e$  ift  and  e$  gibt 

(6)  I/  Sftegnete  e$  am  nadjften  9ftorgen,  al$  Me  betben  $reunbe 
tfyren  fiaffce  tranfen?  2.  SBaren  Saffee  unb  33rtfttf)en  im  gfc 
jtntmer?  3.  23erftanb  e§  fid),  ba£  e$  3<f)nen  leib  tat,  baft  e3 
regnete?  4»  3ft  e$  Sfynen  etngef alien,  ba^  ba§  ntcfyt  [e^r  oft 
gef^e^en  ift?  5.  Sftadjbem  e^  ^^e^  gelungen  umr,  ba§ 
ju  befu^en,  gab  e$  nod)  t)ie(  ^ntereffante^  ju  fefjen. 
e^  $I)nen  leib,  ba§  e^  ^^nen  ntcfjt  fritter  etngef alien  lt)ar? 

(c)  1.   They  were  sorry  that  they  hadn't  succeeded  in  visiting 
the  castle.       2.   It  is  a  matter  of  course  that  we  stay  at  home 
when  it  rains.        3.    It  occurs  to  me  that  that  hasn't  happened 
very  often.        4.    Did  you  succeed  in  drinking  that  cold,  black 
coffee  ?        5.    I  am  sorry,  but  there  aren't  any  rolls  in  the 
dining-room.       6.    There  are  many  poor  people  in  the  city,  but 
he  hasn't  the  least  idea  of  helping  them. 

(d)  "I  am  sorry  that  it's  raining.     It  often  happens  here.'* 
"  It's   a  matter    of   course   that   we   must    stay   at    home. 

We  can  drink  our  coffee  and  eat  our  rolls  in  the  dining-room." 
"  This  afternoon  when  it  has  stopped  raining,  we  shall  suc- 
ceed in  visiting  the  castle." 

"  There  are  many  castles  in  Germany  which  I  want  to  visit." 
"  I  shouldn't  think  of  going  home  without  seeing  several." 
"  I  am  glad  that  you  will  go  with  me.     I  hope  that  we  shall 
succeed  in  visiting  the  most  interesting  ones." 


REVIEW.  301 

LESSON  LV. 
Review. 


unb  Ietbt>oll,  gebanfent>oll  fetn ; 
£angen  unb  bangcn  in  fcfytDebenber  petn ; 
tymmelfyod?  jaud^enb,  3tim  £obe  betriibt, 
(SIMIid?  alletn  tft  bte  Seele,  bie  liebt. — 


310.  Review  Questions. 

(a)  1.  Give  the  rule  for  forming  the  passive  in  German. 
2.  How  many  meanings  may  toerben  have  in  English  ?  3.  Il- 
lustrate each.  4.  How  is  the  agent  expressed  in  German? 
5.  What  is  the  best  way  to  tell  when  to  use  toerben  and  when 
fetn,  with  the  past  participle  ?  6.  How  do  you  express  the 
passive  of  German  verbs  that  take  the  dative?  7.  Give 
two  examples.  8.  Which  language  uses  the  passive  more 
frequently?  9.  Give  the  common  German  substitutes  for 
the  passive.  10.  When  may  they  be  used  ? 

(6)  1.  Give  the  reflexive  pronouns  for  each  person. 
2.  Which  language  uses  the  reflexive  more  often  ?  3.  What 
special  use  have  intransitives  in  German  which  they  have  not 
in  English  ?  4.  What  is  the  English  equivalent  of  this  use  ? 
5.  Give  an  illustration  of  the  German  reflexive  used  for  the 
English  passive. 

(c)  1.  Name  the  four  kinds  of  impersonal  verbs.  2.  State 
two  peculiarities  of  impersonals.  3.  Which  impersonals  cor- 
respond exactly  to  the  English  usage  ?  4.  Give  and  illustrate 
the  distinction  between  the  use  of  e$  gibt  and  that  of  e$  tft 


302  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

311.  Review  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  Read  £)entfdje  @d)Wffer,  Easy  Reading,  98,  1—99,  8. 
2.   Point  out  illustrations  of  the  passive,  man,  e$  gtbt,  and 

impersonals  with  dative  and  accusative. 

(b)  i.  33on  toem  ttwrben  Me  ^tmmer  be$  ©djIoffeS  gesetgt? 
2.  SBarnm    ttwrben  fyofye   gelfen   t>on   ben   bittern   fiir    tfyre 
©djloffer  gettaljlt?      3.  SBurbe  bem  ®ontg  Don  etntgen  9ttt* 
tern  gefyoffen?     4*  SBarum  lihnmern  @te  fid^  nm  ba$  S3nrf)? 
©  ^at  ftd^  gefunben.      '5*  grent  e^  bic^,  baft  e$  bit  fo  gnt 
gelungen  ift?     6.  Znt  e^  ^^rer  Butter  tetb,  baft  e^  fo  triete 
arme  8eute  gtbt? 

(c)  1.   Large  stones  had  been  carried  onto  the  high  rock  by 
the  serfs.      2.  They  were  helped  by  others,  they  say.      3.  How 
do  you  do  to-day  ?     I  am  glad  that  you  have  come.       4.  He  is 
sorry  that  this  has  happened  so  often.       5.   I  shouldn't  think 
(§  307)  of  going  when  it's  raining.        6.    I  am  sorry  that  there 
are  no  rolls  on  the  table. 

(d)  "  Good  morning  !     How  do  you  do  ?  " 

"  Well,  thank  you !  Did  you  succeed  in  visiting  the  castle 
yesterday  ?  " 

"  No  ;  it  was  raining,  as  (it)  so  often  happens  when  you  (man) 
want  to  do  anything." 

"  I  am  sorry  that  you  didn't  see  it.  It  is  said  to  be  wonder- 
ful. It  was  built  in  the  middle  ages  by  a  knight." 

"I  am  sorry,  too,  but  I  haven't  the  least  idea  of  visiting 
castles  when  it's  raining." 

"There  are  so  many  castles  in  Gefmany.  You  will  cer- 
tainly succeed  in  seeing  several  before  you  go  (fafyren)  to 
America." 


SUBJUNCTIVE   OF  AUXILIARIES.  303 

(e)  German  Castles.  —  In  the  middle  ages  there  were  many 
castles  in  Germany.  They  were  built  by  the  knights.  Usually 
a  high  rock  was  chosen  by  the  knight,  and  the  stones  for  the 
castle  were  carried  up  (Ijinaufgetrcigen)  by  his  serfs.  Later  it 
often  happened  that  soldiers  succeeded  in  blowing  up  these 
castles.  It  is  a  matter  of  course  that  this  happened  when 
they  were  fighting.  When  we  go  (fasten)  to  Germany,  we  are 
glad  to  see  these  old  castles,  and  usually  we  are  sorry  that 
there  are  not  more  of  them. 

LESSON  LVI. 
The  Subjunctive.    The  Auxiliaries. 


(Eines  fcfytcf t  fid?  ntcfyt  f iir  alle, 

Setje  jeber,  une  er's  tretbe, 

Setje  jeber,  wo  er  bletbe, 

Hub  n>er  ftefyt,  bag  er  ntctyt  faHe.  —  ©oetije. 


312.  The  Subjunctive  Mode  is  formed  regularly  from  the  cor- 
responding tense  of  the  indicative.  Its  endings  are  :  — 

Singular.  Plural. 
1st  person        =c  -tn 

2d  person        =cft  -tt 

3d  person        *c  =Ctt 

(a)  The  present  subjunctive  is  formed  by  adding  these  end- 
ings to  the  present  stem,  except  in  the  case  of  fettt,  to  be,  which 
does  not  add  *e  in  the  first  and  third  persons  singular. 

(6)  The  past  subjunctive  of  weak  verbs  is  the  same  as  the 
indicative ;  strong  verbs  add  the  regular  endings  above,  and 
the  root  vowel  takes  umlaut  when  possible. 


304  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

(c)  The  future,  perfect,  past  perfect,  and  future  perfect  sub- 
junctives are  like  the  corresponding  tenses  of  the  indicative,  ex- 
cept that  the  subjunctive  forms  of  the  auxiliaries  fjabett  (feitt) 
and  tDerben  are  used  instead  of  the  indicative. 

(d)  In  German,  as  in  English,  there  is  a  tendency  to  use  the 
indicative,  especially  in  conversation,  even  when  the  rule  calls 
for  the  subjunctive.     In  learning  the  language,  however,  it  is 
best  to  conform  to  the  usage  which  is  generally  accepted  as 
correct. 

313.  Subjunctive  of  the  Auxiliaries.  —  Learn  the  subjunctive 
of  fjaben,  pages  348  and  349,  §  376,  a,  b,  c,  and  d-,   of  fein, 
pages  349  and  350,  §  377,  a,  6,  c,  and  d ;  and  of  toerben,  page 
351,  §  378,  a,  b,  c,  and  d. 

314.  Uses  of  the  Subjunctive  Mode.  —  The  German  subjunc- 
tive is  used :  (1)  in  indirect  discourse  (dependent  subjunctive)  ; 
(2)  to  express  possibility  (potential  subjunctive) ;  (3)  to  express 
a  wish   or  command   (optative  or   hortative  subjunctive) ;   and 
(4)  in  some  conditional  sentences  (conditional  subjunctive).  The 
dependent  subjunctive  is  treated  in  this  lesson ;  (2)  and  (3)  in 
Lesson  LVII ;  (4)  in  Lesson  LIX.     Except  in  indirect  dis- 
course, the  use  of  the  subjunctive  is  very  much  alike  in  Ger- 
man and  English. 

315.  The  Dependent  Subjunctive  is  used  in  indirect  discourse 
after  verbs  of  saying,  thinking,  asking,  etc. 

($r  glnufcte,  baff  irf)  Iran!  feu    He  thought  that  I  was  sick. 

@r  fagte,  bcr  ®na&e  fci  im  §aufe.    He  said  the  boy  was  in  the  house. 

(a)  In  indirect  discourse  English  changes  the  present  tense  to 
past,  if  the  verb  of  the  main  clause  is  past.  German  may  make 
this  change,  but  usually  it  keeps  the  tense  of  direct  discourse. 


SUBJUNCTIVE   OF   AUXILIARIES.  305 

He  said,  u  /  am  -ill."    ($r  fagte  :  ,,Srf)  Bin  Irani." 

He  said  that  he  was  ill.    ($r  fagte,  baft  er  front  feu 

He  said,  "  /  have  a  book."    <$r  fogtc  :  „$$)  fjafce  ein  Sitd)." 

He  said  that  he  had  a  book.    (£r  fagte,  baft  cr  etn  $nd)  Ijafce. 

(6)  When  the  form  of  the  present  subjunctive  is  the  same 
as  the  indicative,  German  often  changes  the  tense  of  the 
indirect  discourse,  in  order  to  use  a  form  distinctively 
subjunctive. 

He  said  that  I  had  money.     (£r  fagte,  baft  id)  ®elb  Ijatte, 
They  said  they  had  no  time.    Sic  fagten,  fie  fatten  feine  $t\t. 

(c)  The  indicative  should  be  used  if  the  speaker  wishes  to 
emphasize  his  belief  in  the  truth  of  what  he  reports. 

(£r  fagte,  ba|  er  e3  nidjt  getan  Ijat*    He  said  that  he  didn't  do  it. 
$dj  glanfcef  ba^  bn  re^t  ^aft*     I  think  (am  sure}  that  you  are  right. 

316.  Vocabulary. 

(bet)  Siib'ttrig,  Louis,  Lewis.  Brin'gen,  brarfjte,  geBraf^t  (^aben)f 

bie  SBnrg  IV,  fortress.  to  bring. 

bie  $hn'ne  IV,  ruin.  entlom'nten,    entfam,    entfommen 

bie  ^Bart'bnrg,  the  Wartburg,  one  (fein)f  to  escape. 

of  the  finest  and  most  famous  fdjtwm'men,   fd)tuamntf    gef^ttinm- 

castles  of  Germany.  men   (fyafcen  or  fein  ;  see  §  76, 

ba3  U'ferf  bie  Ufer  I,  bank,  shore  Note),  to  swim. 

(of  a  river).  Bf'fcttr  a^J-?  open. 


317.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  1.  Qtf)  gfcmbte,  ba^  8ubtDtg  entfotntnen  [et.  2.  gr  fagt, 
bie  SBartburg  fet  em  fc^i)ne^  @cf)Io^  3.  gubttrig  fagte,  ba^  bie 
®urg  etne  9tume  tt)erbe»  4.  2Bir  gfaubtett,  ba§  er  na^  bent 
Ufer  gefdjmomtnen  fet.  5.  &  fagte,  baft  er  ba$  ^olj  bnrd)  bie 
offene  Jitr  ber  33nrg  gebrat^t  ^abe.  6.  ^c^  glanbe,  baft  er 
entfomnten  tft. 


306  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

(6)  1.  He  told  me  that  the  Wartburg  was  a  fortress,  but 
not  a  ruin.  2.  I  think  the  door  is  open.  3.  We  related 
how  Louis  had  swum  to  the  shore.  4.  They  think  that  he 
will  escape.  5.  He  said  he  had  brought  his  books  home. 
6.  I  related  that  I  had  seen  an  old  ruin. 

318.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.   Read  £)te  SBartbnrg,  Easy  Reading,  101,  1  —  103,  30. 
2.   Point  out  illustrations  of  the  subjunctive  of  the  auxil- 
iaries. 

(&)  1.  @agt  man,  ba§  Me  SBartburg  etne  intereffante  33urg 
fet?  2.  Srjaljtt  etne  ©efcfyttfjte,  baft  8ubftrig  nad)  bent  cmberen 
lifer  gefdjtoommen  fei?  3.  ©faitben  @te,  ba£  man  Snbnrig  auf 
bie  atte  SRutne  gebradjt  Ijabe?  4.  ®(aubt  er,  ba^  er  entfom* 
men  merbe?  5.  (Sagten  @te,  bie  5Tur  ber  atten  9hrine  ^abe 
offen  geftanben?  6.  (grjaljtte  Snbtutg,  ba^  bie  S3nrg  etne 
SRntne  fei? 

(c)  1.   Does  the  story  tell  how  Louis  swam  (use  perfect  tense) 
to  the  shore  ?      2.    I  do  not  think  that  he  will  bring  his  friend 
to   (auf)  the   fortress.       3.    Louis    said   that   the   Wartburg 
was  not  a  ruin.       4.    He  thinks  he  will  swim  to  the  shore. 
5.    The  story  tells  that  Louis  (has)  escaped  from  the  fortress 
through  an  open  window.       6.    They  thought  the  Wartburg 
was  a  ruin. 

(d)  "  Did  you  say  that  you  had  seen  the  Wartburg  ?  " 
"Yes,  it  is  a  wonderful  castle.     The  fortress  stands  on  a 

high  rock  in  a  beautiful  forest." 

"  I  thought  that  it  was  a  ruin." 

"  Oh,  no  5  they  say  it  is  the  fortress  that  Louis  (has) 
built." 


SUBJUNCTIVE   OF  WEAK  AND   STRONG  VERBS.       307 

"  There  is  a  story,  isn't  there,  that  tells  how  Louis  (has) 
escaped  from  another  fortress  ?  " 

"  Yes,  and  they  say  that  many  years  later  he  (has)  built  the 
Wartburg." 

LESSON  LVII. 
The  Subjunctive.    Weak  and  Strong  Verbs. 


Uttfer  Pater  in  bent  ^immel.  Dein  Hame  u>erbe  gefyeiliget.  Dein 
Hetd?  fomme.  Detn  IPille  gefcfyefye  auf  <£rben,  rote  im  ^immel.  Unfer 
tdglicty  23rot  gib  uns  petite.  Unb  r>ergib  uns  unfere  Scfyulben,  n>ie  nnr 
unfern  Scfyulbigern  rergeben.  llnb  fiifyre  uns  nid?t  in  Derfucfyung, 
fonbern  erlofe  uns  t>on  bem  libel.  Denn  Dein  ift  bas  Heici?  unb  bie 
ftraf t  unb  bie  {^errlicfyfeit  in  (Emigfeit.  2Imen.  —  (g&cmgelmm  @.  9Kattpi, 
vi.  9-13.  

319.  Subjunctive  of  Weak  Verbs.  —  Learn  the  subjunctive  of 
lob  en  on  pages  352  and  353,  §  379,  a,  6,  c,  and  d.     Notice  that 
the  past  subjunctive  is  like  the  indicative,  as  are  also  three 
forms  of  the  present*  subjunctive. 

320.  Subjunctive  of  Strong  Verbs.  —  Learn  the  subjunctive 
of  fefyett  on  pages  355  and  356,  §  381,  a  and  b.     Notice  that 
the  present  subjunctive  of  strong  verbs  has  the  same  vowel 
throughout,  and  that  the   past   subjunctive   takes  umlaut  on 
the  vowel  of  the  past  indicative  when  this  is  possible. 

321.  The  Subjunctive  of  Intransitives  is  like  that  of  transi- 
tives,  except  in  the  perfect  tenses,  which  are  conjugated  with 
the  subjunctive  of  jettl,  not  with  that  of  fyaben. 

322.  The  Conditional  is  formed  by  prefixing  the  forms  of 
ftmrbe  to  the  present  and  perfect  infinitives.    Its  use  is  exactly 
like  that  of  the  English  with  should  and  would. 


308  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

PRESENT.  PERFECT. 

I  should  praise.  I  should  have  praised. 

id)  toiirbe  lobeu  irij  uriirbe  fldubt  linbcu 

btt  uriir&cft  lobcu  bu  urn  rb  eft  fldubt  Ijnlicu 

er  ttwrbc  fo&en,  etc.  cr  ttmrbe  gefofct  Jjafcett,  etc. 

323.  The  Potential  Subjunctive,  as  in  English,  expresses  a 
possibility  or  a  contingency.     It  is  like  the  conclusion  of  a 
condition,  and  is  usually  translated  by  should  or  would.     The 
use  of  tenses  is  like  the  English. 

(£r  fjatte  anber3  getam    He  would  have  done  otherwise. 
®3  ttwre  faum  mijgltdj*    It  would  scarcely  be  possible. 
$a3  gingc  ntdjt  fo  gut     That  would  not  do  (go)  so  well. 

(a)  The  conditional  and  the  potential  subjunctive  are  interchange- 
able. The  conditional  might  be  used  in  all  the  above  cases.  (£r  ttmrbe 
anberS  getcm  fyaberu  (£$  nnirbe  faum  mbgfid)  feitu  3)a3  miirbe  nid)t 
fo  gut  ge^eu* 

324.  The  Optative  Subjunctive  is  used  to  denote  a  wish.     As 
in  English,  the   verb  precedes  the  subject,  unless   the  wish 
is  introduced  by  baJ3,     The  use  of   tenses  is   also  the   same 
as   in  English,     ^ftur    or    boc^   is    often   used    to    strengthen 
the  wish. 

irf)  mtt  511  ^paufc  !     Were  I  only  at  home  I 
,  baff  irf)  bud)  ittefyr  ®db  fjatte  !     Oh,  that  I  had  more  money  ! 
<5ie  nur  jcbeu  £ag  !     Would  that  you  came  every  day  ! 

(a)  TJie  Hortative  Subjunctive  is  the  present  tense  of 
the  subjunctive  used  in  the  first  and  third  persons  for  the 
imperative. 

£oBen  ttrir.    Let  us  praise. 

1>eut  SBiUc  gefrfjelje.     Thy  will  be  done. 

(SctCtt  fie  fteifttg*     Let  them  be  industrious. 


SUBJUNCTIVE   OF   WEAK   AND   STRONG   VERBS.         309 

325.  Vocabulary. 

bcr  Sitty'tcr  I,  poet.  btc  233affc  IV,  arm,  weapon. 

bcr  <SaaJ,   btc   <5alc,   hall,   large  ba3  Sicb,  btc  Sicbcr  III,  song. 

room.  bcriUjmt',  famous. 

bcr  San'gcr  I,  singer ;  minstrel.  frol),  glad,  happy,  pleased. 

bcr  £ctl,  bic  Xeilc  II,  part.      •  !attm,  hardly,  scarcely. 

326.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  1.  2lrf),  ba£  bte  ©anger  ifyre  8teber  ijfter  fangen!  2.  $n 
ber  5ftad)t  ttmrben  @te  bte  SBaffen  in  bie[em  ©aale  fanm 
3.  9Btr  tDnrben  fro^  fetn,  ba^  beritfjtnte  8ieb  ju  ^oren.  4. 
ten  n?tr  nur  einen  Jet!  bat)on  ge^ort!  5.  Sie  ©anger  nnb 
3)ic^ter  tDitrben  fanm  in  bent  ©aate  fingen,  tuo  all  bie  SBaffen 
iraren,  6.  SDaS  irare  nicf)t  fo  fd^on! 

(6)  1.  The  singers  would  sing  their  songs  better  in  the 
famous  hall.  2.  Oh,  that  I  had  learned  a  part  of  the  song  ! 
3.  Then  I  should  be  glad.  4.  A  poet  would  hardly  want  to 
use  those  weapons.  5.  Such  a  poet  would  hardly  be  famous. 
6.  Oh,  that  the  minstrel  had  sung  that  beautiful  old  song ! 

327.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  Read  £)te  2Bartbnrg,  Easy  Beading,  103,  31— 105,  31. 
2.   Point   out  illustrations  of   the   conditional,  and  of   the 
potential  and  optative  subjunctives. 

(5)  1.  SBitrben  @te  frol)  fein,  bte  SBartbnrg  fefyen  $n  fftnnen? 
2.  SBarunt  ttare  e$  fanm  mogltd:),  all  bie  SOBaffen  im  groften 
@aale  gn  fefyen?  3.  2ld),  ba§  urir  bte  ?teber  be§  beritfymten 
©angers  get)i)rt  fatten!  4.  SBitrbe  e^  fe^r  f^tuer  fetn,  einen 
£etl  be^  ©ebt^t^  Jene^  gro^en  £)td)ter3  jn  lernen?  5.  SBare 
e$  ntdf)t  beffer,  ben  ©aat  mit  ben  SBaffen  jn  befnd^en,  elje  lt)ir 


310  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

bie  Sieber  be3  ©angers  Ijoren?     6.   Slcl),  ba£  ttrir  etnen  £eif  be$ 
fdjonen  8iebS  gelernt  fatten! 

(c)  1.  Oh,  that  we  had  seen  the  famous  hall  with  the  weap- 
ons !  2.  These  poets  and  minstrels  would  sing  their  songs 
better  in  a  larger  hall.  3.  It  would  hardly  be  possible  to 
find  a  more  famous  song  than  that."  4.  They  would  be  glad 
to  see  the  famous  weapons  at  (auf)  the  Wartburg.  5.  Oh, 
that  the  singer  had  sung  that  other  song !  6.  This  part  of 
the  hall  would  look  better  without  all  those  weapons. 

(cT)  "  Had  I  but  (nut)  known  how  interesting  the  Wartburg 
is !  We  should  have  visited  it." 

"  Then  you  would  have  seen  the  famous  hall  where  the  min- 
strels and  poets  sang  their  songs." 

"  Yes,  and  we  should  have  visited  the  large  hall  with  the 
famous  weapons." 

"Would  it  not  be  possible  to  see  a  part  of  the  Wartburg 
now  ?  It  is  not  very  late." 

"  I  should  be  very  glad,  but  I  hardly  think  that  we  can." 

"  Oh,  had  it  only  occurred  to  us  sooner  (f  riifjer) !  " 

LESSON   LVIII. 
Subjunctive  of  Modals.     Conditions  of  Fact. 


EDenn  es  Mr  iibel  getjt, 

Httnm  es  fiir  gut  rmr  immer  1 

IDenn  bu  es  iibel  ntmmft, 

So  gefyt  es  Mr  nod?  fcfyltmmer.  —  Sftiirfert. 


328.    Subjunctive  of  Modals.  —  Learn  the  subjunctive  of  the 
modal  auxiliaries  on  pages  360-362,  §  385,  6,  d,  e,  /,  h,  and  i. 


SUBJUNCTIVE    OF   MODALS.     CONDITIONS.  311 

Notice  especially  the  use  of  compound  tenses  with  a  depend- 
ent infinitive,  §  385,  h  and  i. 

In  a  subordinate  clause  the  position  of  the  subjunctive  auxil- 
iary is  like  that  of  the  indicative  (§  219,  a). 

329.  Conditions    of    Fact.  —  German    conditions    correspond 
very  closely  to  those  in  English.     As  in  English,  when  the 
"  if  "  clause  of  a  conditional  sentence  assumes  something  as  an 
actual  fact,  both  clauses  are  in  the  indicative. 

SBctttt  er  fummt,  fcrirft  bit  bid)  frcuctt*    If  he  comes,  you  will  be  glad. 
SScittt  c3  rcgttct,  Het&etuw*  511  $<mf  e»    If  it  rains,  we  stay  at  home. 

330.  Use  and  Omission  of  SBetUU  —  The  condition  is  usually 
introduced  by   toentt,  if.      As  in  English,  either  clause  may 
precede.      Also,  as  in  English,  the  verb  stands  first  if  toetm 
is  omitted.     @o   (compare  English  then)  often  sums  up  the 
condition  and  introduces  the  conclusion. 

SBctttt  Sic  meitt  $rcuitb  ftitb,  (fo)  tocrbcit  Sic  ba3  tun.    If  you  are  my 

friend,  (then)  you  will  do  that. 
Sic  tticrbett  ba3  tmt,  fectm  Sic  meitt  gfreimb  fittb*    You  will  do  that,  if 

you  are  my  friend. 

(a)  Contrary  to  English  usage,  German  may  omit  toentl  in  a 
condition  expressing  a  fact. 

@ittb  Sic  nteitt  gfreimb,  fo  tocrbctt  Sic  ba3  tttiu    If  you  are  my  friend, 
(then)  you  will  do  that. 

331.  Vocabulary. 

bet  $f ab,  bic  $f abc  II,  path.  have  an  opinion) ;  of,  em  with 

bic  WfidjtSfar'te  IV,  picture  post-         the  accusative. 

card.  f0l'0ettf  reg.  (fcitt)f  with  dative,  to 
bic  (£rfri'fdjttttg  IV,  refreshment.  follow. 

bett'fett,  bat^tc,  gcbat^t  (fjafcen),  to  fit^rcttf  reg.  (l^aBctt),  to  lead. 

think  (denoting  mental  activity,  fdjt'efettr  reg.  (Ijafcett),  to  send. 

as  contrasted  with   cjtott&en,   to  5tcttt/ltrf|f   rather;  pretty  (adv.). 


312  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

332.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  i.  SBenn  @ie  mid)  fitfyren  mollen,  fo  fofge  idj  Qfyntn  9ent. 
2.  @dji<ft  mir  mein  grennb  eine  2lnfid)t$!arte,  fo  benfe  id)  an 
ifyn.  3,  Qft  e$  jtemltcf)  tearm,  fo  mtfgen  ttrir  afterlei  (£r* 
frifdumgen.  4.  SBenn  biefer  ^fab  nad)  ber  S3urg  fnfjrt,  fo 
fotgen  tt)ir  i^m,  5.  SBenn  @ie  jtemltc^  oft  an  mtdj  benfen, 
bttte,  fd^icfen  ©te  mir  gumeilen  eine  3lnft(^t^farte  !  6.  SBenn 
id)  biefem  ^fabe  folge,  fo  fomme  id)  genrift  na^  einem  ®aftljof, 
tt)o  toir  atterlei  Srfrifdjungen  belommen  f5nnen. 

(6)  1.  If  you  send  me  a  picture  postcard,  I  shall  think  of 
you  oftener.  2.  If  the  path  leads  to  the  Wartburg,  we  must 
follow  it.  3.  If  you  wish  refreshments,  you  will  have  to 
wait  pretty  long.  4.  If  they  follow  the  path,  it  will  lead 
them  to  the  castle.  5.  If  I  think  of  it,  I  shall  send  you  a 
picture  postcard.  6.  She  will  give  you  refreshments,  if  you 
are  pretty  tired. 

333.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.   Bead  £)ie  2Bartburg,  Easy  Reading,  106,  1  —  107,  2. 
2.   Point  out  illustrations  of  .conditions  of  fact,  and  of  the 
omission  of 


(6)  1.  Sftuft  man  immer  toarten,  toenn  man  jiemtid)  fpat  an* 
fommt?  2.  ®onnten  Me  beiben  ©tubenten  2lnfirf)t3farten  unb 
(Srfrifdjungen  fanfen,  toenn  fie  toottten?  3.  SBirb  ber  $fab 
nad)  ber  SBartbnrg  fnljren,  toenn  fie  iljm  folgen?  4.  SBenn 
@ie  baran  benfen,  tooffen  @ie  mir  eine  3lnfi(^t^larte  fcfyiden? 
5.  SBotten  mir  Jenem  ^fabe  fofgen,  tt)enn  er  nad^  ber  33urg 
fii{)rt?  6.  SSBa^  loftet  e$,  menn  man  Srfrifc^nngen  fanfen  will? 

(c)  1.  If  the  two  students  follow  that  other  path,  it  will 
lead  them  to  the  Wartburg.  2.  They  cannot  buy  picture 


CONDITIONS   CONTRARY   TO   FACT.  313 

postcards  and  refreshments,  if  they  arrive  pretty  late.  3.  If 
they  think  of  their  friends,  they  will  send  them  some  picture 
postcards.  4.  I  will  lead  you  along  that  path,  if  you  will  send 
your  dog  home.  5.  If  we  can't  think  of  the  German  words, 
how  can  we  translate  this  exercise  ?  6.  If  you  know  where 
(§  239,  b)  the  path  leads,  why  don't  you  follow  it  ? 

(c?)  "  If  we  follow  this  path,  it  will  lead  us  to  the  Wartburg, 
I  think  (gfollbe)." 

"  Yes,  and  if  we  go  rather  fast,  we  can  get  refreshments." 

"  I  shall  send  my  brother  a  picture  postcard,  if  they  have 
good  ones." 

"  I  hadn't  thought  of  that ! " 

"  I  always  send  my  brother  a  picture  postcard,  if  I  think 
of  it." 

"If  you  send  him  a  beautiful  one,  he  will  certainly  think 
of  you." 

LESSON   LIX. 
Conditions  Contrary  to  Fact. 


IDenn  manner  Ittann  umgte, 
IDer  manner  ITtann  war', 

Caf  mancfyer  ITtann  mancfyem  HTantt 
HTancfytnal  metjr  (£fyr\  —  @ 


334.  Conditions  Contrary  to  Fact.  —  The  subjunctive  is  used 
in  the  condition  and  conclusion  of  contrary-to-fact  conditions. 
The  conclusion  may  be  in  the  conditional,  rendered  in  English 
by  should  or  ivould.  The  use  of  tenses  corresponds  to  that  in 
English. 


314  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

$dj  lame,  or  idj  nriirbc  lommen,  toeim  id)  fwuttc,    /  should  come,  if  1 

could  (present  inability)  . 
£attc  id)  3ctt,  or  menu  id)  3cit  Jjattc,  fo  tate  idj  c$  gent,  or  fo  ttuirbc  id)  c£ 

gcrtt  tlltt»     If  I  had  time,  I  should  gladly  do  it  (present  inability). 
3d)  ttwrc  gcfommctt,  focmt  id)  gclomtt  pttc,  /  sftcmZd  7i«t?e  come,  if  I  had 

been  able  (past  inability). 
3dj  Ijatte  c3  gctan,  or  ttmrbe  c3  getatt  ^aBcnf  tt>eim  i(^  3^tt  gc^abt  ptte. 

I  should  have  done  it,  if  I  had  had  time  (past  inability). 

(a)  The  contrary-to-fact  subjunctive  is  also  used  after  a(& 
ob  and  af$  toetm*  Ob  or  tt)enn  may  be  omitted,  and  then  the 
clause  is  inverted  and  the  personal  part  of  the  verb  stands  first. 

@r  foridjt,  aI3  oB  cr  Uiel  OJclb  Ijatte,  or  a(§  ^attc  er  tiief  ^clb.    He  speaks 

as  if  he  had  much  money. 
(£r  fieljt  au§f  a(^  oB  cr  Iron!  ttwre,  or  a(§  foare  cr  franf*    ife  ZooA:s  as  if 

he  were  sick. 

335.   Difference  between   German  and  English  Conditions.  — 

There  are  two  chief  differences  between  English  and  German 
conditional  sentences. 

(a)  English  never  omits  if  in  a  present  condition,  nor  if  or 
though  in  the  expressions  as  if,  as  though,  while  German  may 
omit  toetltt  or  ob  and  invert.     See  §  330,  a. 

(b)  English  has  only  the  form  with  would  and  should,  both 
for  the  German  regular  subjunctive  and  for  the  conditional. 
See  §  323,  a. 

That  would  not  go  so  well.    $>a3  gtngc  ttidjt  fa  gntr  or  ba3  twirfcc  nidjt  fo 

gut  gcljctu 
It  would  scarcely  be  possible.     (£$  toorc  fcwttt  inog(idjr  or  c3  tuitrbc  faum 

fcuu 


336.  Use  of  Modals.  —  The  German  modals  occur  frequently 
in  conclusions  contrary  to  fact,  with  or  without  the  condition 
expressed.  The  English  expressions  ought  to  have  (gone),  could 


CONDITIONS    CONTRARY   TO   FACT.  315 

have  (gone),  and  so  on,  are  then  translated  in  German  by  the 
past  perfect  subjunctive  of  the  modals,  not  by  the  conditional. 
In  the  dependent  order  the  personal  auxiliary  (fyatte)  precedes 
the  "  two  infinitives  "  (§  219,  a). 

$dj  fyfitte  gdjett  fcitrf en*    /  should  have  been  permitted  to  go. 

^u  Ijatteft  gefyett  fimnett*     You  would  have  been  able  to  go. 

(£r  Ijatte  gc^cn  ntijgeit.    He  would  have  liked  to  go. 

9Sir  fatten  gefjen  mitffeiu     We  should  have  been  obliged  to  go. 

31jr  Ijatfet  gefjen  fallen.     You  ought  to  have  gone. 

<3te  gotten  gdjett  tootten*     They  would  have  wanted  to  go. 

(a)  The  expression,  He  ought  to  have  done  it,  or  should  have 
in  the  meaning  of  ought  to  have,  is  ($r  f)Citte  e$  ttttt  folten,  be- 
cause it  was  not  done,  and  so  is  contrary  to  fact.  On  the  other 
hand,  He  must  have  done  it,  is  ($r  tmt£  e$  getdtt  Ijdben,  because 
it  was  done,  and  so  is  a  fact. 

Note.  —  English  could  may  be  indicative  or  subjunctive.  He  could 
(was  able  to)  do  it  yesterday,  but  he  can't  to-day,  is  a  present  fact,  and 
so  is  expressed  by  the  indicative  :  (Sr  fottnte  e§  tun.  He  could  (would  be 
able  to)  do  it,  if  he  had  time,  is  contrary  to  fact  in  the  present,  and  so 
is  in  the  past  subjunctive  :  (§r  fonnte  e§  tun. 

There  is  the  same  difference  in  referring  to  past  time.  He  could  (was 
able  to)  have  done  it,  for  he  had  time,  is  a  past  fact,  and  so  is  indicative  : 
(£r  fonnte  e§  getan  fyaben.  He  could  (would  be  able  to)  have  done  it,  if  he 
had  had  time,  is  contrary  to  fact  in  past  time,  and  so  is  past  perfect  sub- 
junctive :  (Sr  fytitte  e§  tnn  fonnen. 

The  difficulty  is  not  with  the  German,  but  with  the  English,  which  has 
only  one  form  for  two  meanings  which  in  German  are  expressed  by  two 
forms.  Pupils  should  learn  to  analyze  the  exact  English  meaning. 

(6)  Should  like  and  would  like  are  always  forms  of  Ttt5cf)te 
(past  subjunctive),  often  accompanied  by  gent. 

Would  you  like  to  go  ?    $iiirf)tcu  @ic  (gcrn)  geljett  ? 
Yes,  I  should.    $af  irf)  tttiidjte. 


316  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

337.  Vocabulary. 

frer  SKe'gett  I,  rain.  ertm'tiertt,  reg.  (Ijafcett),  to  answer, 

fote  SBu'be  IV,  booth.  respond. 

btc  ($ht'tritt$farte  IV,  ticket  (of  ad-      Ijinein'geijcn,  gutg  Jjineut',  I)ittein's 

mission).  gcgangett  (fein)f  to  go  in(to). 

t»te  2801'Ie  IV,  cloud.  lirit$r  adv.,  at  the  left,  to  the  left. 

ei'len,  reg.  (fern,    §  76,  Note),  to      gritnb'lidj,  thoroughly. 

hurry,  hasten.  flfc,  whether;  al£  0b',  asif. 

338.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  i.  $n  biefem  Stegen  modjte  id)  in  ber  fie  men  33ube  bfei= 
ben.  2.  SBaren  tirir  nad)  ber  ®ube  geetlt,  fo  fatten  »ir  gtn^ 
tritwfartcn  belommen  I5nnen.  3,  SBenn  fie  fatten  ^ineinge^en 
biirfen,  fo  fatten  fie  Me  SBartburg  gritnbli^  gefe^en.  4.  §atte 
er  ni^t^  ertt)ibertr  fo  tocire  er  o^ne  eine  (5intritt3farte  ^ineinge- 
gangen  fctn.  5,  SBenn  tt)ir  ba^  getuu^t  fatten,  fo  toaren  H)ir 
lin!^  nac^  ber  33ube  geeilt*  6.  @ie  fatten  ^ineinge^en  folten^ 
tuenn  @te  bie  SBartbnrg  fe^en  tDottten, 

(ft)  1.  If  we  had  had  tickets,  we  should  have  hurried  to  the 
little  booth.  2.  You  ought  to  have  seen  the  clouds  and  the 
rain.  3.  If  she  had  not  spoken  with  them,  they  would  have 
gone  in  without  answering  anything.  4.  If  you  would  like 
to  see  the  Wartburg  thoroughly,  you  ought  to  hurry  to  that 
booth  to  get  tickets.  5.  If  you  could  have  gone  in  at  the  left, 
you  would  have  seen  everything.  6.  If  he  had  wanted  to  hurry 
to  the  castle,  he  could  have  seen  everything  thoroughly. 

339.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.   Bead  £)ie  SBartburg,  Easy  Reading,  107,  3—108,  19. 

2.  Point  out  illustrations  of  contrary-to-fact  conditions;  of 
the  use  of  al$  ob  and  mdd)te  ;  and  of  the  German  equivalent  of 
ought  to  have,  could  have,  and  so  on. 


CONDITIONS   CONTRARY   TO  FACT.  317 

(6)  1.  SBaren  Me  betben  ©tubenten  fritter  Ijtneingegangen, 
toenn  fie  fcfynelter  gegangen  (walked)  toaren?  2.  fatten  fie 
ifyre  (Srfrifdjungen  fpater  fyaben  fonnen,  toenn  fie  ntrfjt  nadj  ber 
SBartburg  geettt  ttwren?  3.  §ixtten  fie  in  ber  33ube  Sintrttt^- 
fatten  befommen  fatten,  menn  fie  atte$  griinbtid)  fatten  fefyen 
tootten?  4,  9Ko(^ten  ©ie  Hnf$  f)ineinge^en?  5.  @e^en  bie 
SSotfen  an%,  at^  ob  man  9tegen  ^aben  tDiirbe?  6.  SBa^  fatten 
@ie  ermibern  tt)o(Ien,  tuenn  @ie  ba^  getDU^t  fatten? 

(c)  1.   The  two  students  ought  to  have  gone  in  at  once  ;  then 
they  could  have  seen  everything  thoroughly.      2.  What  would 
he  have  answered,  if  we  had  asked  him  where  the  tickets  were  ? 
3.    Those  clouds  looked  as  if  it  would  rain.       4.    If  you  had 
wanted  to  hurry  to  the  little  booth  on  the  left,  you  could  have 
got  your  tickets  there.        5.    I  should  like  to  learn  this  book 
thoroughly.        6.    He  couldn't  have  known  that  he  ought  to 
have  gone  to  the  left. 

(d)  "You  ought  to  have  bought  your  tickets  at  that  little 
booth  on  the  left." 

"  Yes,  but  those  clouds  looked  as  if  we  should  have  rain." 
"Wouldn't  you  like  to  go  in  and  see  everything  thoroughly? 

You  could  have  done  that,  whether  it  was  raining  or  not." 
"  Yes,  I  ought  to  have  hurried  to  the  booth  while  it  was 

still  open.     Then  I  should  not  have  had  to  wait." 

"  Yes,  it  would  have  been  better,  if  you  had  done  that." 

"  Then  I  could  have  gone  in  at  once.     Now  I  shall  have  to 

stay  here.     What  a  shame  ! " 


318  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

LESSON  LX. 
Review. 


£tegt  Mr  (Seftern  flar  unb  offen, 
IDirfft  bu  tjeute  frafttg  fret, 
Kannft  arid?  cmf  ein  ITTorgen  fyof  en, 
Das  ntcfyt  minber  gliicfltd?  feu  — 


340.  Review  Questions. 

(a)  1.  Give  the  rules  for  forming  the  different  tenses  of  the 
subjunctive.  2.  Name  the  four  chief  uses  of  the  subjunc- 
tive. 3.  In  which  use  does  German  differ  most  widely  from 
English  ?  4.  Give  in  detail  the  rules  for  this  use,  and  illus- 
trate each  by  two  examples.  5.  Name  and  illustrate  the 
subjunctives  whose  use  is  just  like  the  English. 

(6)  1.  How  is  the  conditional  formed  ?  2.  Give  the  rules 
for  conditions.  3.  Are  conditional  sentences  always  in  the 
subjunctive  or  conditional  ?  Illustrate.  4.  How  do  German 
conditional  sentences  differ  from  English  ones  ?  5.  Give  the 
rule  for  the  use  of  the  past  perfect  subjunctive  of  the  modals. 
Illustrate  fully. 

341.  Review  Exercise. 

(a)  1.  Read  £)er  SBtnterfyort,  Easy  Eeading,  no,  1  —  112,  4. 

2.  Point  out  illustrations  of  subjunctives  in  indirect  dis- 
course ;  of  conditions ;  of  the  use  of  miJrfjte ;  and  of  the  past 
perfect  subjunctive  of  modals. 

(6)  1.  Sr  gtaubte,  ba$  Me  atte  Surg  erne  SRutne  feu  2.  2Bir 
fagten,  baft  tint  e$  burcf)  Me  offene  £itr  gebradjt  fatten.  3.  2ld), 


REVIEW.  319 

ba£  bte  beriifytntett  ©anger  tfyre  Steber  ofter  fingett  ttwrben! 

4.  §atten  ttrir  nur  etnen  JEeil  bet  SBaffen  tm  groften  @aale  ge- 
fefyen,  fo  toarett  ttrir  frol).      5.  SBenn  @ie  biefem  ^fabe  fatten 
fotgen  tootten,  fo  pttett  @ie  atterfet  grfrtfdjungen  befommett 
Written.      6.  gr  fytitte  fritter  311  33ett  ge^en  f otten ;  bann  tt)Urbe 
er  nirfjt  au^fe^en,  ate  ^atte  er  ntd)t  gut  gef^tafen. 

(c)  1.   We    thought   that  Louis    had   escaped    through  an 
open  window  and  had  swum  to  the  other  shore  of  the  river. 
2.   If  that  singer  sings  only  a  part  of  that  famous  song,  we 
shall  hardly  understand  him.       3.    If  I  had  thought  of  it,  I 
should  certainly  have  sent  you  a  picture  postcard.       4.    She 
would  like  to  speak  as  if  she  had  learned  German  thoroughly. 

5.  You  ought  to  have  gone  in  to  the  left,  then  you  could  have 
seen  everything  thoroughly.       6.   We  ought  to  have  followed 
that  other  path ;  it  would  have  led  us  to  the  Wartburg. 

(d)  "  It  is  very  beautiful  here  ;  I  should  like  to  stay  all  day." 
"  It  looks  as  if  it  would  rain ;  I  shouldn't  like  to  stay  here 

in  the  rain." 

"  Perhaps  we  ought  not  to  have  come  so  far.  But  if  it 
rains,  we  can  go  into  that  little  booth." 

"Yes,  we  could  have  stayed  there  till  it  stopped  raining. 
It  would  be  very  cozy." 

"  If  we  only  had  (some)  refreshments  ! " 

"  Shall  we  go  in  and  ask  if  (ob)  we  can  get  refreshments  ?  " 

"  Yes,  I  should  like  to  go  in.  We  ought  to  have  thought  of 
that  sooner." 

(e)  The  Wartburg.  —  They  say  that  the  Wartburg  is  the  most 
interesting  castle  in  Germany.     If  you  go  (fasten)  to  Germany, 
you  ought  to  see  it.     Oh,  if  we  only  had  such  castles  in  Amer- 
ica !    When  I  was  in  Germany,  I  could  have  stayed  the  whole 


320  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

summer  at  (aitf )  the  Wartburg.  You  ought  to  have  seen  those 
beautiful  woods.  I  felt  (e$  tt)ar  mtr)  as  if  I  never  wanted  to 
come  home.  And  I  should  have  stayed,  if  my  father  had  not 
sent  me  a  letter  that  told  me  I  had  to  come  home. 

LESSON  LXI. 
Genitive  and  Dative  Cases. 


(Sletd?  fet  fetner  bem.anberett,  bod?  gletd?  fet  jeber  bent  £jod?ften.  —  ©oetfye. 


342.  The  Genitive  Case.  —  Besides   its  use  denoting  posses- 
sion (Lesson  VII),  the  genitive  is  also  used  (a)   to  designate 
indefinite  time  and  (6)  with  certain  prepositions. 

(a)  In  contrast  with  the  accusative  of  definite  time  (Lesson 
XXII),  the  genitive  is  used  (1)  with  the  indefinite  article  to 
express  indefinite  time ;  (2)  with  the  definite  article  to  denote 
regularly  recurring  time. 

(1)  (£ine3  £age3,  one  day.  (£itte3  5l&ettt>3,  one  evening. 

(2)  $>e3  5T6ett&3,  in  the  evening  (regularly),  every  evening. 
£>03  SDforgCtt^,  every  morning,  mornings. 

(b)  The  genitive  is  used  with  irtifjrenb,  during,  and  many 
other  prepositions,  most  of  which  may  be  translated  into  Eng- 
lish by  a  phrase  with  of  (instead  of,  in  spite  of,  in  the  midst  of, 
etc.).    The  most  common  are :  cmftatt,  cmfterfycilb,  mnerfyalb, 
bie$fett$,  iettfeitS,  tnmttten,  tro£,  toafyrenb,  and  tt)e<jen. 

SBaljrettfc  be3  3ftmtat3,  during  the  month. 

Xvofy  fce3  28etter3,  in  spite  oftfye  weather. 

3ettfeit3  be3  $faffe3,  (on)  the  other  side  of  the  river. 

343.  The  Dative  Case.  —  Besides  its  use  as  indirect  object 
(Lesson    VIII)    and    with    prepositions    (Lesson    XVI    and 


GENITIVE   AND   DATIVE   CASES.  321 

XVIII)  the  dative  is  also  used  (a)  with  a  few  adjectives  and 
(b)  with  certain  verbs. 

(a)  The  dative  is  used  with  some  adjectives,  most  of  which 
are  followed  by  to  in  English.  Unlike  English  usage,  the 
dative  usually  precedes  the  adjective  in  German. 

(£*  ift  mir  licfe*     He  is  dear  to  me. 

ttwr  utt3  frcmb,     That  was  strange  to  us. 

^Better  ift  nttr  angeiteljttU     The  weather  is  agreeable  to  me. 


(6)  The  following  verbs  which  take  the  dative  have  already 
been  given  :  bcm!en,  btenett,  etnfallen,  f  otgen,  gef  alien,  gettngen, 
gefdjefyen,  gtauben,  fyetfen,  Besides  these  the  commonest  are 
begegnen,  broken,  gefyorcfyen,  gefyoren,  paffen,  fdjntetcfjeln. 

finb  i^m  gefofgt*     We  followed  him. 
gefaflt  mtr  md)t     That  doesn't  please  me. 

344.  Vocabulary. 

bcr  Sc^at'tcn  I,  sled;  bob,  double-  ba3  SSet'ter  I,  weather. 

runner;   (ttiit)  Sdjlittctt  fa^rcn,  gcfo^r^idi,  dangerous. 

to  coast,  go  coasting.  geljii'rcn,  reg.  insep.  (lja&ett)f  with 
bcr  2Sin'tcrf^ortf  btc  393intcrf^ort§f  dat.,  to  belong  to. 

winter  sport.  jett'fett3f  prep,  with  gen.,  (on)  the 
btc  (Sjcfftljr'  IV,  danger.  other  side  of,  beyond. 

ba3  Oftd'beftt,  bC)§  Ofabcht^  I,  coast-  Mtyf  prep,  with  gen.,  in  spite  of. 

ing.  tiwlj'rcnb,  prep,  with  gen.,  during. 

345.  Oral  Drill. 


(a)  1.  £ro£  ber  ©efafjr  geftittt  mir  ba3  9tobeln  fe^r  gut* 
2.  gme£  Jage^  noa^renb  be^  SttnterS  fu^ren  tt)ir  3  met  ©tunben 
@cf)(tttett.  3.  @^  ift  ben  @d)tilern  [e^r  angene^m,  Jenfett^  be^ 
groften  gelbe^  ben  SBtnterfport  511  fefyen.  4.  3Bem  ge^orte  ber 
@rf)Htten,  bent  mir  fotgten?  5.  £)a3  9tobe(n 


322  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

gfaffes  tft  gefityrfid)*  6.  £)er  ^nnge,  bem  ba$  SRobeln  fo 
fefyr  gefattt,  ift  etneS  £age$  ben  ganjen  Stactjmtttag  ©cfylitten 
gefafyren. 

(6)  1.  In  spite  of  ray  father  I  went  coasting  the  other  side 
of  the  wood.  2.  The  sled  belonged  to  my  brother,  and  the 
coasting  was  very  agreeable  to  us.  3.  During  the  whole 
winter  we  did  not  find  the  winter  sport  dangerous.  4.  One 
afternoon  I  saw  three  men  who  were  coasting  the  other  side 
of  the  river.  5.  In  spite  of  all  the  danger,  the  coasting 
pleases  many  people.  6.  On  the  other  side  of  the  garden  is 
the  house  that  belongs  to  our  teacher. 

346.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.   Bead  £)er  SBinterfport,  Easy  Reading,  112,  5  —  113,  23. 

2.  Point  out  illustrations  of  the  genitive  of  indefinite  time ; 
of  the  genitive  with  prepositions  ;  of  the  dative  with  verbs ; 
and  of  the  dative  with  adjectives. 

(6)  1.  §aben  @ie  etneS  £age$  jertfett$  be§  2BaIbe§  ben  "SBin* 
terfport  gefefyen  ?  2.  §at  ba§  SRobetn  3^nen  tro£  be$  fatten 
SBetterS  gef alien?  3.  ptyrt  man  toaljrenb  be$  9Bmter3  ©djltt* 
ten,  ober  ift  e$  jn  gef aljritd)  ?  4.  ©eljdrt  $l)rem  Sntbcr  ber 
©cfytitten,  ben  id)  jenf ett^  be§  ©artenS  fanb  ?  5.  SBoKen  ttrir 
ber  Oefa^r  @d)Ittten  fasten?  6.  ^ft  ^^nen  ba^  SRobeln 
be^  fatten  SBetter^  angenefjm? 

(c)  1.  I  think  that  the  coasting  would  be  better  the  other 
side  of  the  river.  2.  One  day  during  the  winter  there  was 
beautiful  coasting  and  all  kinds  of  winter  sport.  3.  In  spite 
of  the  danger  we  all  like  to  go  coasting.  4.  The  coasting 
during  the  cold  weather  is  very  agreeable  to  us.  5.  The 
winter  sport  is  sometimes  very  dangerous.  6.  During  the 


VERBALS.  323 

winter  sport  on  the  other  side  of  the  mountains  I  used  a  sled 
that  belonged  to  my  brother. 

(cf)  "  Don't  you  find  that  winter  sport  is  very  dangerous  ?  " 

"  Yes,  but  the  coasting  is  beautiful  in  spite  of  the  danger. 
Isn't  it  agreeable  to  you  ?  " 

"  Oh  yes  !  One  day  during  the  cold  weather  we  went  coast- 
ing all  day." 

"Beally?  Where  did  you  coast,  and  whose  sled  did  you 
have  ?  " 

"  On  the  other  side  of  the  mountain  it  is  wonderful.  We 
had  a  sled  that  belongs  to  my  uncle." 

"  That  must  have  been  beautiful  (§  336,  a).  I  know  that 
it  would  have  pleased  me,  too." 

LESSON  LXII. 
Verbals. 


Pa  id?  Me  £}erbe  trieb  auf  unfern  fjotjen 
Pa  roar  id?  gliicf lid?  tpie  im  parades.  — 


347.  The  Rendering  of  English  Verbals  in  -ing.  —  When  an 
English  verbal  in  -ing  is  in  a  participial  phrase  of  time  or 
cause,  it  is  rendered  in  German,  not  by  a  participle,  but  by  a 
clause.  This  clause  is  generally  introduced  by  a(8,  when,  ba, 
as,  ittbetn,  at  the  moment  when,  as,  or  toafyrenb,  while.  Thus 
these  participial  phrases  should  be  mentally  changed  to  equiv- 
alent clauses  before  translating  (§  251,  6). 

Seeing  him,  she  waited.     $)a  fie  tfytt  fafj,  ttwrtete  fie* 

While  playing,  I  got  tired.    £3atjrenb  id)  ftrielte,  ttmrbe  trf)  ntiibc, 

Coming  home,  he  found  her.    9U3  er  ttadj  £auf e  f am,  f  anb  er  fie. 


324  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

348.  Modified  Verbals.  —  When  the  English  verbal  is  modi- 
fied by  a  possessive,  German  uses  a  clause  with  baft,  instead  of 
the  infinitive  with  ju.     Compare  §  248,  d. 

He  came  without  seeing  me.     (£r  fam,  oljttC  mid)  $tt  feljen, 
He  came  without  my  seeing  him.     (£r  lam,  uljlte  ba§  id)  tfytt  fafy, 
Instead  of  going,  he  came  home.    5lttftatt  p  cjeljett,  lam  cr  nadj  ^xntfe* 
Instead  of  my  taking  the  book,  you  must.    2lnftatt  berg  id)  ba3  $ttd)  nefjme, 
mu^t  bn  e3, 

349.  Vocabulary. 

bet  23tut,  bie  SBaue  II,  construction.  IjaHett,  Ijielt,  geljalten  (Ijabett),  er 

bcr  ^omr  btc  ^omc  II,  cathedral.  Jjftlt,  ^o  A-o?c?;   fitf  with  ace.,  to 

bet  ^(attr  btc  ^fihte  II,  plan.  take  for,  to  consider. 

bic  28eft  IV,  world.  tujflett'ben,    tipllenbetc,     noUenbet 

ba§    $al)rljn;tt'bertf    bie  3^^«tt=  (^aficn),  to  finish. 

berte  II,  century.  05'tifdj,  Gothic. 

350.  Oral  Drill. 


(a)  1.  £)a  ber  33au  be^  gottfc^en  T)om§  t)ol(enbet  ttJar,  {jorte 
man  cmf.  2.  @r  ^att  bie  ^fane  fitr  bie  beften  in  ber  SBett, 
o^ne  ba§  tt)tr  fie  loben.  3.  3lnftatt  ba^  man  ben  33au  be^ 
im  le^ten  3ia^r^un^ert  tJoQenbete,  fufjr  man  nod)  tnele 
fort  ^n  bauen.  4.  SBa^renb  tt)ir  im  ®arten  fptetten, 
fanben  it)ir  ein  alteS  St(b.  5.  @ie  gtngen  na(^  §anfe,  o^ne 
ba^  ber  8ef)rer  fie  fa^.  6.  2lnftatt  ba§  man  bie  ^(ane  fur  ben 
48au  be^  gotifc^en  £)ome$  gfeic^  oofienbete,  ^ie(t  man  e3  fitr 
beffer,  ^u  Garten. 

(6)  1.  Instead  of  his  finishing  the  plan,  you  will  have  to  do 
it.  2.  Not  having  finished  the  construction  of  the  cathedral, 
they  considered  it  better  to  continue  at  once.  3.  Without 
your  telling  me  anything  about  it,  I  consider  these  plans  the 
best  in  the  world  for  a  Gothic  cathedral.  4,  Not  being  able 


VERBALS.  325 

to  finish  the  construction,  they  waited  about  three  centuries. 

5.  Coming  home  at  five  o'clock,  I  finished  my  G-erman  exer- 
cise.      6.   Without  his  asking  us,  we  told  him  that  it  was  the 
most  beautiful  cathedral  in  the  world. 

351.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.   Kead  J)entfcl)e  Some,  Easy  Reading,  113,  24—115, 14. 

2.  Point  out  illustrations  of  German  clauses  that  can  be 
translated  by  English  verbals,  and  of  the  use  of  of)tie  bd$  and 
of  anftatt  baft. 

(6)  1.  §at  man  jtoet  ^f^fjunberte  gearbettet,  ofyne  ba£  man 
ben  33an  be3  £)om$  fcottenbete  ?  2.  £)a  fie  fein  ©elb  fatten, 
mn^ten  fie  nut  bem  33an  anffyoren?  3.  2Ba3  tat  man,  anftatt 
ba£  man  Me  ^(ane  DoIIenbete?  4.  S)a  i^ir  ben  £)om  fitr  ba§ 
fc^onfte  gottfcfje  ©ebanbe  ber  2BeIt  fatten,  fottten  totr  t^n  nic^t 
befucf)en?  5.  2al)en  @te  nn§,  o^ne  ba^  nrir  @te  fa^en? 

6.  SJfuB  ber  Server  ben  @a^  iiberfe^en,  anftatt  baft  ber  Stiller 
e^  tnt  ? 

(c)  1.    Instead  of  our  finishing  the  plan  for  the  construction, 
he  wanted  to  do  it  himself.       2.   Having  seen  all   the   best 
Gothic  cathedrals,  I  consider  this  one  the  most  beautiful  in 
the  world.        3.    Instead  of   their    (use  man)    waiting   three 
centuries,  they  ought  to  have  finished  the  cathedral  sooner. 
4.   Did  you  write   your  exercise  without  anybody's  helping 
you?       5.   Finding  no  one  at  school,  I  went  home  at  once. 
6.   Having  finished  their  sentences,  the  pupils  wanted  to  play. 

(d)  "  Having  seen  many  Gothic  cathedrals,  which  one  do 
you  consider  the  most  beautiful  ?  " 

"  I  consider  this  one  the  most  beautiful  in  the  world." 


326  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAK. 

"Without  my  telling  you  (it),  do  you  know  when  it  was 
finished  ?  " 

"  Instead  of  their  (use  matt)  finishing  it  at  once,  they  worked 
about  three  centuries  without  finishing  it." 

"  Coming  home  from  the  store  I  see  it  every  day.  I  con- 
sider it  wonderful." 

"  Yes,  the  construction  of  the  cathedral  is  the  most  beauti- 
ful in  the  world." 

LESSON  LXIII. 
Word  Order.    Review. 


Der  fjerr  ift  mem  tyrte ;  mir  urirb  nid?ts  mangeln.  (£r  roeibet  mid? 
auf  enter  griinen  2Jue  unb  fiitjret  mid?  3tim  frifd?en  IDaffer;  er  erquicfet 
meine  Seele;  er  fiitjret  mid?  auf  red?ter  Strage  tint  feines  Hamens 
tpiflen.  Unb  ob  id?  fd?on  tuanberte  im  ffnftern  Cal,  fiird?te  id?  Fein 
Ungliicf;  benn  Dti  bift  bei  mir;  Dein  Stecfen  ttnb  Stab  troften  mid?. 
Dti  bereiteft  r>or  mir  einen  Cifd?  gegen  meine  (Jeinbe.  Du  falbeft  mein 
fjatipt  mit  (&l  tinb  fd?enfeft  mir  roll  °ein.  (Stttes  tinb  Barml]er3igfeit 
tperben  mir  folgen  mein  £eben  lang,  unb  id?  n>erbe  bleiben  im  {^atife  bes 
immerbar.  —  2>er  23. 


352.  Word  Order.  —  (a)  Eeview  Inverted  Order,  §  113;  in 
questions,  §  3  ;  in  the  formal  imperative,  §§78  and  243;  in 
the  main  clause,  §  215,  a ;  in  conditions,  §  330,  a ;  after  at$, 
§  334,  a;  the  omission  of  e$  in,  §  306,  b. 

(b)  Eeview  Dependent  Order,  §  205;  with  relatives,  §  202; 
in  indirect  questions,  §  209 ;  with  subordinating  conjunctions, 
§  215 ;  with  bdfc,  §  220 ;  the  modals  in,  §§  219  and  336. 

(c)  Eeview  Normal  Order;  position  of  tlicf)t,  §  26 ;  of  ttte, 
§  140 ;  of  a  single  adverb,  §  145 ;  of  objects,  §  107  ;  of  the  pos- 


WORD   ORDER.     REVIEW.  327 

sessive  genitive,  §  46 ;  of  the  indirect  object,  §  52 ;  of  the 
dative  with  an  adjective,  §  343,  a  ;  of  the  past  participle,  §  70 ; 
of  the  participle  as  an  adjective,  §  250,  a ;  of  infinitives,  §§  58, 
233,  and  249 ;  of  ju  with  separable  prefixes,  §  230,  d ;  of  ju 
with  modals,  §  161,  b ;  of  "  two  infinitives,"  §  166 ;  of  separ- 
able prefixes,  §  230 ;  after  coordinating  conjunctions,  §  214. 

353.  General  Rule  for  Word  Order.  —  In  general,  the  more 
emphatic  parts  of  a  German  sentence  come  nearest  the  end. 
Thus,  if  whom  is  emphasized  when  the  question  is  asked :  To 
whom  did  you  give  your  book  ?  then  in  the  answer,  to  the  teacher 
is  the  emphatic  part,  and  German  does  not  follow  the  rule  in 
§  94,  c,  but  says  Qfy  lja.be  mem  33ud)  bem  Setter  gegeben. 

(a)  In  independent  clauses  the  verb  (the  auxiliary  in  com- 
pound tenses)  is  the  second  jlement  in  the  sentence,  except 
that  particles  (dber,  jebod),  e*c-)  ma7  Precede  it. 

But  Isharit  do  it.    $dj,  after,  tue  e3  tttrfjt 

Still,  I  shall  do  it  to-morrow.    Sftorgen,  jcbodj,  hie  id)  e£* 

(fr)  Adverbs  and  adverbial  phrases  stand  in  the  following 
order :  (1)  time,  (2)  place,  (3)  manner. 

2Btr  Jjafcen  tJjtt  fjeute  itfceratt  fleifjtg  gefudjt.     We  have  hunted  for  him 

to-day  diligently  everywhere. 
$>te  ®mber  ftrielett  fjeute  braufjen  tm  6onnenf^ein,     The  children  are 

playing  out  of  doors  to-day  in  the  sunshine. 

(1)  Adverbs  of  time  usually  precede   objects,  except 
pronouns. 

3[d)-l)a&e  tljm  geftcrn  cinen  9torf  gefrwft.     7  bought  him  a  coat  yesterday. 
(£r  ttrirb  Q^nen  Balb  ba^  S5ut^  geben*    He  will  soon  give  you  the  book. 

(2)  In  main  clauses  adverbs  must  never  be  placed  be- 
tween subject  and  verb. 

/  never  go  to  the  city.    $dj  fldje  ttic  in  btc  Stabt, 


328  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

354.  Vocabulary. 

bcr  §U'gc(f  Me  ^iigcl  I,  hill.  iwn'fel,  dark ;  inflected :  bunl(c)Icrr 

tier  (Sdjttmt^'ttmU)    III,  the  Black  bim!(e)le,  &ttnf(e)le3, 

Forest.  tettt,  clean. 

bcr   Xatt'itett&aitm,    Me    £amtett=  ttnut'&erfdjiw,  wonderfully  beauti- 

baume    II,   fir-tree,    Christmas  ful. 

tree.  behalf),  therefore  ;  that  is  why. 

ba3  £a(,  Me  £aler  III,  vaZZe?/.  faft,  almost. 

355.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  1.  2Btr  faljen  bie  bunften  Sannenbaitme  aitf  faft  aden 
d)tt)ar3tt)afb$*  2.  Bergen,  aberr  lt)erben  ttnr  bie 
Xciler  fe^en.  3.  §aben  @ie  ^eute  in  ber 
flei^ig  gearbeitet?  4.  £)ie  ^inber  fpieften  faft  ben 
?fa(^ntittag  im  reinen  SSaffer  mit  einem  -Soote.  5.  ®e^en  @ie 
nie  in  foment  9?egen  au$  bent  §aufe?  6.  S5e^^alb  ift  ba$ 
fleine  Sat  jtt)ifd)en  ben  bnnlten  §ngetn  im  ©rfjmarjtDalb  fo 
it)unberf(f)5n. 

(6)  1.  The  Mils  in  the  Black  Forest  are  almost  always  won- 
derfully beautiful.  2.  They  worked  hard  here  yesterday. 
3.  The  streets  in  the  little  city  in  the  valley  are  never  very 
clean.  4.  That  is  why  we  went  into  the  house  at  once  yes- 
terday. 5.  There  are  many  beautiful  trees,  but  that  fir-tree 
is  wonderfully  beautiful.  6.  I  (have)  learned  a  new  song 
yesterday. 

356.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.   Eead  S)eutf(^e  Some,  Easy  Reading,  116,  1  —  118,  6. 

2.  •  Point  out  illustrations  of  normal,  inverted,  and  dependent 
order. 

(6)  1.  @inb  faft  all  bie  T)ome  in  £)eutfct)tanb  ttmnberfcfytfn? 
2.  @iet)t  man  triete  buntte  Xannenbaume  in  ben  £alern  nnb 


WORD   ORDER.     REVIEW.  329 

auf  ben  §ugetn  be$  SdjtoaqttwtbS?  3.  (Stub  bie  @tabte  tm 
©djuxiqtoatb  faft  itntner  rein?  4.  §ier  gibt  e$  tnel  SBaffer; 
finb  bte  ©traften  be3f)alb  [o  rein?  5.  §aben  @ie  geftern 
bort  ffeijHg  gearbeitet?  6.  SBoflen  ttrir  nacfyften  ©ommer  mit 
einigen  greunben  burcl)  ben  @tf)n)ar3tt)a(b  ge^en? 

(c)  1.    The  fir-trees  on   the  hills   of  the   Black  Forest  are 
almost  all  Tery  dark.       2.    That  is  why  this  wonderfully  beau- 
tiful region  is  called  the  Black  Forest.       3.    The  little  villages 
in  the  valleys  are  almost  always  very  clean.       4.    My  father 
gave  me  a  ball  yesterday,  and  I  lost  it.       5.    That  is  why  I 
looked  industriously  for  it  everywhere  this  morning.       6.    Al- 
most all  the  fir-trees  in  the  valleys  and  on  the  hills  of  the 
Black  Forest  are  very  dark. 

(d)  "  Were  you  ever  in  the  Black  Forest  ?  " 

"No,  I  have  never  been  there,  but  I  have  heard  a  great  deal 
(fciel)  about  it.  It  must  be  wonderfully  beautiful." 

"  Yes,  there  are  dark  fir-trees  on  the  hills  and  in  the  val- 
leys. That  is  why  it  is  called  the  Black  Forest." 

"  And  are  there  little  villages  with  clean,  narrow  streets 
there,  too  ?  " 

"  Yes,  and  the  villages  are  almost  always  very  clean." 

"It  must  be  very  interesting.  I  should  like  to  travel 
through  the  Black  Forest  next  summer." 


330  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 


LESSON    LXIV. 
Idiomatic  Particles.    £>enn,  £odj,  $a,  9loi),  ©djmt, 

( This  lesson  may  be  omitted  at  the  discretion  of  the  teacher,  or  post- 
poned till  later  in  the  course. ) 


ITttr  unrb  r»ort  allebem  fo  brimm, 

2JIs  cjtng'  mtr  ein  Utiifylrab  tm  Kopf  fyerum,.  — 


357.  Idiomatic  Particles.  —  The  use  of  the  German  expletives 
betm,  bod),  ja,  nod),  fd)0n,  and  tool)!  is  important  for  Americans. 
It  constitutes  one  of  the  chief  differences  between  idiomatic 
German  and  German  that  is  merely  grammatically  correct. 
Of  course  no  pupil  is  expected  to  speak  idiomatic  German 
after  but  one  year's  study,  but  many  may  wish  to  try. 

(a)  The  chief  difficulty  arises   from   the   impossibility   of 
translating  these  particles  literally  into  English.     Good  illus- 
tration of  this  is  found  in  the  "  already "  and  "  yet "  of  Ger- 
mans who  have  but  partly  mastered  English.      They  know 
already  and  yet  are  the  English  equivalents  for  fd)0tt  and  bod); 
so  they  translate  them  —  with  comical  results. 

(b)  The  use  of  these  expletives  can  be  learned  only  by  hear- 
ing, studying,  and  memorizing  good,  idiomatic  German.     As  it 
is  largely  a  question  of  feeling,  no  set  of  rules  will  wholly 
suffice,  but  the  following  hints  may  help. 

358.  ^etltt  may  be  used  in  almost  every  spoken  German 
question.     It  adds  an  almost  imperceptible  note  of  surprise 
or  curiosity.     It  is  not  translated  in  English. 

ift  bctttt  bag  ?     What  is  that  f 

ift  bCtttt  fo3  ?     Whafs  the  matter  ? 


IDIOMATIC   PARTICLES.  331 

359.  3<**  —  Besides  its  regular  meaning  of  yes  in  answering 
questions  affirmatively,  ja  is  used  to  strengthen  an  imperative 
Here  it  is  emphasized  and  may  be  translated  by  all  means. 

£ttr  e£  ja*     Do  it  by  all  means  I 

(a)  It  adds  a  tone  of  assurance  or  surprise  to  any  sentence 
Here  it  is  not  emphasized  and  may  usually  be  translated  by 
why  at  the  beginning. 

$>a3  ift  ja  fdjiitt*     Why,  that  is  fine. 

(£r  fagtc  ja  nidjtg*     Why,  he  didn't  say  anything. 

360.  5£>odj  has  three  uses  besides  that  of  an  adversative  con- 
junction, yet.     They  are  like  the  corresponding  uses  of  ja,  but 
there  is  always  a  suggestion  of  but  or  yet  about  them. 

(a)  It  means  yes  in  answering  negative  sentences. 

^pafcctt  <3ic  feitt  ®e(b  ?     Have  you  no  money?    $0dj*     Yes  (but  I  have}. 
$>u  ttrirft  Ijeute  to0l)l  ntd)t  lommen*     You  wont  come  to-day,  will  you  ? 
$)odj*     Yes  (oh,  but  I  shall}. 

(b)  It  means  pray  or  do  (emphatic)  in  strengthening  an  im- 
perative and  but  in  strengthening  a  negative.     It  may  also  be 
translated  in  the  latter  case  (with  the  negative)  by  repeating 
the  subject  and  auxiliary  as  a  question.     Here  it  is  the  affirm- 
ative equivalent  of  nidjt  toafyr* 

^ommctt  <Sie  bod)*     Pray  come,  or  do  come. 

<3e^e  turf)  bod).    Pray  be  seated,  or  do  sit  down. 

(£r  fagte  food)  nidjt3*     But  he  didn't  say  anything. 

&U  tummft  bod)  ttidjt  Ijettte ?     You  aren't  coming  to-day,  are  you? 

(c)  It  adds  a  note  of  surprise  to  an  affirmative  sentence. 
Here  it  is  stronger  than  ja,  and  may  be  translated  by  why  or 
some  stronger  exclamation. 

ift  bod)  fefyiw.    My,  but  that  is  fine  ! 

fjaft  bodj  eincn  langen  Dfarf .     Why,  what  a  long  coat  you  have  !  or 
well,  you  have  a  long  coat. 


332  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

361.  Sftod)  is  used  (besides  its  regular  meaning  of  still,  more, 
yet)  whenever  the  idea  of  yet  or  more  enters  into  an  English 
sentence.     It  is  not  expressed  in  English. 

293er  fonft  nod)  ?     Who  else  ? 

8old)e  SSfamen  ijafce  id)  nod)  nie  gefdjem    I  never  saw  such  flowers. 

362.  ©djrnt  is  used  whenever  the  idea  of  already  or  of  all 
right  enters  into  an  English  sentence. 

3>dj  &ttt  fdjott  ba  getoefeiu     Pve  been  there. 

S>a  fommt  er  fdjoiu     There  he  comes  (now). 

3d)  toerbe  e3  fdjon  tun  fimnen*    /'W  &e  a&Ze  «o  do  it,  all  right. 

363.  280IJI  is  used  whenever  the  idea  of  probability  enters 
an  English  sentence.     It  may  be  translated  perhaps,  probably, 
I  think,  or  by  any  phrase  showing  lack  of  certainty. 

(£r  ift  tt»ol)f  frattf ,     He  is  sick,  I  think. 

$>tt  ttrirft  Ijeute  ttwfjl  nidjt  fommcn*     I'bw  (probably)  won't  come  to-day, 
will  you  f 

(a)  2Bof)t  is  generally  not  rendered  by  English  well,  except 
sometimes  in  speaking  of  health. 

$a£  Ijaft  &u  gut  getaiu     You  did  that  well. 

$)a3  ^aft  btt  ttio^l  getan.    You  did  that,  didn't  you?    You  probably  did  that. 

(b)  Well  in  English  is  gut  for  the  adverb  of  manner ;  nun 
for  the  exclamation. 

•Wttttf  ba3  Ijaft  bll  gilt  getatt !     Well,  you  did  that  well ! 

364.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  l.  @ie  tooflen  boc^  nod)  ntdjt  ge^en!    Sletben  @ie  bod)! 

2.  2Ba$  ift  benn  ba$?    $&)  ^abe  fo  ettDa^  nod)  nie  gefe^en. 

3.  35a^  ift  bod)  em  n)unbert)otter  §ut!      4.  3d)  toerbe  bte 
lt)ot)I  f^on  itberfe^en  fonnen.     5.  2ld),  @ie  tt)ot(en  ben  alten 

tt)o^f  ntd)t  lanfen!      6.  2Barte  bod)!    3^)  Jomme  fcfyon! 


IDIOMATIC   PARTICLES.  333 

(6)  Use  idiomatic  particles  wherever  possible.  —  1.  You 
haven't  read  this  book,  have  you?  2.  What  did  she  say? 
She  isn't  going  home  yet,  is  she  ?  3.  This  book  (probably) 
doesn't  please  you,  does  it  ?  4.  Just  wait  ;  I  can  do  it  (all 
right).  5.  Come,  by  all  means  ;  we  shall  have  beautiful 
weather,  I  think.  6.  Why,  this  isn't  a  good  book  !  Why  did 
you  buy  it  ? 

365.  Exercise. 

(a)  1.    Read  gnbltrf),  Easy  Reading,  118,  7  —  119,  3. 
2.   Point  out  illustrations  of  the  use  of  betttt,  bod),  jd,  nod), 
f(J)on,  and  ft)ol)L 


(&)  1,  @ie  mogen  ba$  33urf)  tool)!  nt(^tr  aber  ttwrum  benn? 
2.  g$  ift  Ja  em  ttmnbert)otte3  33uc(),  nidjt  ttmfyr?  3.  @ie  fyaben 
e$  bodj  ntdjt  mtereffcmt  gefunben?  4»  £)odj!  @^  ift  tDo^I  inte- 
reffant,  aber  iDaritm  follte  e^  benn  fo  fc^tDer  [ein?  5,  2Berben 
@tc  bie  3lufgabe  fc^on  lefen  ftinnen?  6»  ©a^  ^aben  @te  tt)o^( 
bo(^  nod)  ntrf)t  getan? 

(c)  1.   Where  were  you  yesterday  ?       2.   Why,-  this  is  an 
interesting  book.        3.    You  don't  consider  it  hard,  do  you? 

4.  You    (probably)    haven't    read    all    the    sentences    (yet). 

5.  Oh,  yes  I  did  ;  I  can  translate  them  (all  right).       6.    She 
isn't  here  to-day,  is  she  ? 

(d)  "  Why  don't  you  like  this  book  ?     It  isn't  hard,  is  it  ?  " 
"  Yes  (it  is)  !    You  (probably)  don't  consider  it  hard,  because 

you  are  older  than  I." 

"  Why,  it  is  very  interesting." 

"  The  stories  are  (perhaps)  interesting,  but  you  don't  find 
these  exercises  interesting,  do  you  ?  " 


334  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

"  Yes  (I  do)  !  I  can  translate  them  (already)  very  well,  and 
everything  that  one  does  well,  is  interesting." 

"  Oh,  you  want  to  get  praised  by  the  teacher.  Why,  that's 
all  you  think  of!" 

LESSON  LXV. 
Review. 


(Ettbe  gut,  alles  gut.  — 


366.  Review  Questions. 

(a)  1.  What  kind  of  prepositions  govern  the  genitive? 
2.  Name  the  commonest  ones.  3.  Give  two  other  important 
uses  of  the  genitive,  and  illustrate  each.  4.  Distinguish  be- 
tween the  German  ways  of  telling  definite,  indefinite,  and 
recurring  time.  5.  Illustrate  each. 

(6)  1.  Give  the  rules  for  the  four  chief  uses  of  the  dative 
case.  2.  Name  ten  verbs  that  govern  the  dative.  3.  What 
kind  of  adjectives  take  the  dative  in  German?  4.  What 
should  be  done  to  English  verbals  before  they  are  translated 
into  German  ?  5.  Distinguish  between  modified  verbals  and 
similar  unmodified  uses.  6.  Illustrate  both  uses  by  original 
sentences. 

367.  Oral  Drill. 

(a)  1.  (ginb  @te  betm  frof),  baft  ttrir  MefeS  $8nd)  toottenbet 
fyaben?  2.  gs  nrirb  bte  cmberen  freuen,  ntdjt  toafyr,  ba£  fie 
ntcfyt  meljr  arbetten  tniiffen?  3.  gme3  £age$  bin  id)  tym  cine 
gcmje  ©tunbe  gefotgt  4.  SBenn  e$  Qfynen  angeneljm  tft,  fo 
fptelcn  tDtr  ma^renb  be^  9facl)tnittag3  ienfett^  be§  g 


REVIEW.  335 

5.  @te  tootten  bod)  nod)  ntcfjt  cmf  fyoren  ?    @te  finb  too!)!  tniibe  ? 

6.  ©tanben  @ie  mir,  ba3  33udj  gefattt  tljm  fefyr. 

(6)  1.  Having  finished  this  book,  must  we  begin  another? 
2.  During  the  German  lesson  the  teacher  read  without  the 
pupils  understanding  him.  3.  I  shall  come  in  spite  of  the 
weather,  if  it  is  agreeable  to  you.  4.  One  day  during  the 
rain  we  (have)  followed  a  boy  a  whole  hour  without  his  seeing 
us.  5.  Arriving  so  early  at  school,  she  succeeded  in  trans- 
lating all  the  sentences  without  the  teacher's  helping  her. 
6.  Pray  wait ;  you  don't  want  to  go  home  yet,  do  you  ? 

368.  Review  Exercise. 

(a)  1.   Bead  (gnbttd:),  Easy  Reading,  119,  4-31. 

2.   Point  out  illustrations  of  idiomatic  particles. 

(&)  1.  3)a  ee  utiS  enbltcf)  getmtgen  tft,  ba$  33ud)  ju  fcoflenben, 
miiffen  ttrir  gtetd)  mtt  einem  cmberen  cmfangett.  2.  (£$  {ft  ben 
©Bittern  fefyr  cmgeneljm,  toenn  ber  Setter  tfynen  ^tlft.  3. 
be^  fatten  Setters  ftrielten  tt)tr  etneS  £age$  jenfett^  beS 
4.  (£$  tft  mir  getnngen,  ba^  gan^e  Snrf)  jn  lefen,  o^ne  ba§ 
jemanb  nttr  geljolfen  ^at*  5.  ?efen  @te  bod^  better!  SBtr 
tt)oHen  bod)  nod^  ntd^t  anf^oren !  6.  @r  tft  tool)!  miibe ;  tDarnm 
mn§  er  benn  fortfa^ren? 

(c)  1.  Finding  the  exercise  so  hard,  we  all  stopped  trans- 
lating, instead  of  continuing  to  read.  2.  Why,  that  is  beau- 
tiful !  How  did  you  succeed  in  doing  it  ?  3.  You  haven't 
read  all  the  sentences  in  this  book,  have  you  ?  4.  In  spite 
of  the  hard  exercises  this  book  has  pleased  the  pupils.  5.  In 
spite  of  the  rain  we  succeeded  in  following  him  the  other  side 
of  the  river  without  his  seeing  us.  6.  Not  knowing  what  to 
do  (we  should  do),  we  finished  our  work  and  went  home. 


336  NEW  GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

(d)  "  Did  you  succeed  in  finishing  this  book  without  finding 
.it  too  hard  ?  " 

"  Oh,  but  (§  360,  b)  I  don't  consider  it  too  hard.  Sometimes 
while  writing  an  exercise  I  found  perhaps  one  hard  sentence. 
You  found  it  (tool)!)  hard,  didn't  you  ?  " 

"Yes,  I  never  could  have  translated  it  all  without  the 
teacher's  helping  me." 

"  Oh  yes,  you  could  (§  360,  a).  The  book  contains  many 
sentences,  but  they  are  not  hard." 

"  What  are  we  to  read  now  after  having  finished  this  ?  " 

"I  don't  know.  The  same  man  who  wrote  this  book  has 
written  other  interesting  ones.  I  hope  we  shall  read  one  of 
his." 


369.       LIST   OF   STRONG   AND   IRREGULAR   VERBS. 

The  principal  parts  are  in  heavy  type.  The  second  and  third  persons 
singular  of  the  present  indicative  are  given  when  the  vowel  differs  from 
that  of  the  infinitive ;  also  when  the  connecting  vowel  =e=  is  required 
in  verbs  whose  stem  ends  in  b,  t,  ft,  ff,  f,  ft.  The  second  person  singular 
of  the  imperative  is  given  when  it  has  the  vowel-change  i,  or  the  short 
form  without  c;  also  when  the  e  is  optional.  A  dash  indicates  regular 
forms.  Compound  verbs  are  given  only  when  the  simple  verb  has  passed 
from  use,  e.g.,  befefylen,  gebdren.  Cognates  are  in  small  capitals. 


Pres.  Ind.,           Imperative, 

P_ 

Infinitive. 

2d  and  3d 

•2d  Per. 

& 

st. 

Past  Part. 

Per.  Sing. 

Sing. 

Ind. 

Subj. 

SSarfen,1  BAKE 

bdcfft,  bdtft 

— 

bit! 

bflfc 

gebacfctt 

^rS3efef)lett,  com- 

befiefjlft, befleljft 

befiefyf 

Mal)( 

befd^Ie 

bcful)(cn 

mand 

SBegittttCtt,  BEGIN 

— 

— 

bcgaini 

begdnne 

begonncn 

-~-S3ei$e«,  BITE 

betgcfl,  betfit 

beiJ3(e) 

K% 

biffe 

gebiffen 

^Bergen,  hide 

birgft,  btrgt 

birg 

barg 

biirge 

gcborgen 

\23erfteit,1  BURST 

btrfteft,  birft 

birft 

bnrft 

bdrfte 

gcburftcu 

-  SSiegeit,  bend 

— 

— 

bug 

boge 

gcbogcn 

^Bietett,  offer 

— 

— 

bot 

bote 

geboten 

SBittben,  BIND 

btnbeft,  binbet 

— 

1)  a  ut> 

bdnbe 

gebunben 

^J&itttn,  beg 

bitteft,  bittet 

— 

bat 

bate 

gebeten 

Stofen,  blow 

blajeft,  blaft 

— 

bHe^ 

bltefe 

geblafen 

SBletben,  remain 

— 

— 

blieb 

bUebc 

gebliebcn 

SSraten,  roast 

bratft,  brat 

— 

briet 

briete 

gebrateat 

SSredjeit,  BREAK 

bricfyft,  bri(f)t 

brirf) 

brnrf) 

brdrfje 

gcbruriicu 

•  S3rcuncttf  BURN 

— 

— 

brannte 

brennte 

gebrannt 

SBrhtgen,  BRING 

— 

— 

brarf)tc 

brddf)te 

nctirarfit 

$>Cttfett,   THINK 

— 

— 

bariitc 

bac^te 

gcbiitf)t 

.  $>refd)Ctt,  THRESH 

brifcfyeft,  brifd^t 

brifcf) 

brofrii 

brofd^e 

jicbrofrficu 

VQringen,  urge 

— 

— 

brang 

brange 

gebntngen 

1  Sometimes  weak,  except  in  the  past  participle. 
337 


338 


NEW  GERMAN  GRAMMAR. 


Pres.  Ind., 

Imperative, 

Infinitive. 

2d  and  3d 
Per.  Sing. 

2d  Per. 
Sing. 

Past. 
Ind.          Subj. 

Past  Part. 

$>iirfett,  be  al- 

barf, barfft, 

(wanting) 

iwrfte 

biirfte 

geiwrft 

lowed 

barf,  biirfen 

,^JM£mpfeljIett,  rec- 
ommend 

empfiefylft,  em= 

empfieljt    cmpfatjl  em^fa^Ie 
.empfo^te 

cmpfoljlcn 

Qpffett,  EAT 

iffeft,  igt 

ig 

<*f? 

age 

gegcffen 

gfttljrett,  go,  FARE 

fdtirft,  ftfyrt 

fa^r(e) 

ftt^r 

fiiijre 

gefa^rcn 

fatten,  FALL 

faEft,  ffittt 

— 

fici 

fiere 

gcfatten 

gangett,  catch 

fangft,  fangt 

— 

ftofl 

flnge 

gcfangen 

^^fC(JjtCttf   FIGHT 

firf)teft,  fidit 

fidftt 

fot^t 

fodite 

gcfor^tett 

Sfittben,  FIND 

ftnbeft,  finbet 

— 

fanb 

fanbe 

gefunbcii 

^gffedjtett,  twine 
gfftegcn,  FLY 

Pid^ft,  flidjt 

m 

flurtjt 

flot^te 
pge 

ncfiurijtcu 
geflogcn 

gfltdjen,  FLEE 

— 

— 

flol) 

fCS^e 

flcftol)cu 

^ttefjett,  flow 

— 

— 

f(0ff 

Pffe 

geflojfctt 

gfreffen,  EAT  (of 

friffeft,  frigt 

frig 

ftfl^ 

frage 

gefreffcn 

animals) 

JJfnetett,  FREEZE 

— 

— 

ftor 

frore 

gefrorctt 

^©dwren,  BEAR 

— 

— 

gcBar 

gebare 

gcborcu 

©e&en,  GIVE 

gibft,  gtbt, 

gib 

gab 

gabe 

gegc^en 

^A($ebeiljett,  thrive 

— 

— 

gcbie^ 

gebie^e 

gebte^en 

©elicit,  GO 

— 

— 

ging 

ginge 

gcgangcn 

\(&  ettngett,  succeed 

— 

— 

gelang 

gelange 

gehmgen 

^©eltett,  be  worth 

giltft,  gilt 

gift 

gait 

garte 

gcgottctt 

4©Cttefett,  recover 
*  ©etttefjett,  enjoy 

genefeft,  geneft 

I 

genaS 
gcnog 

genafe 
genoffe 

gcnefcn 
gcnoffcn 

©efdjeljett,  happen 

gefc^ietjft,  gefd^ie^t  (wanting)  gefdjalj   gefdjci^e 

gcft^c^ctt 

©etfrinnett,  WIN 

— 

— 

gcttiann 

geiua'nne 

gctuotntcu 

..^-"^"^©iefjett,  pour 

— 

— 

$tfl 

goffe 

gcgoffcn 

^©leidjett,  resemble 

— 

— 

gltrf) 

gU(f)e 

gegftrfjett 

_^-—  ©lettett,    GLIDE 

gfetteft,  gleitet 

— 

gutt 

glitte 

geglitten 

©ra&eit,  dig 

grcibft,  grcibt 

— 

gtuB 

griibe 

gegrabctt 

--^-©tcifett,  GRIP 

— 

— 

griff 

griffe 

gegrtffcn 

^wben,  HAVE 

fyaft,  ^at 

— 

Tiattc 

ptte 

ge^aBt 

gotten,  HOLD 

pltft,  fycilt 

^aft(e) 

fticlt 

Alette 

fldjaften 

LIST   OK   STRONG   AND   IRREGULAR   VERBS. 


339 


Infinitive. 

Pres.  Ind., 
2d  and  3d 

Imperative,              p    . 
2d  Per.          T    ,  Fasto._,. 

Past  Part. 

Per.  Sing. 

Sing. 

OUDJ. 

^pangen,  HANG 

fjangft,  pngt 

—       ijtitg 

f)inge 

gefjaitgett 

—  4>auenf  HEW 

— 

l)tcb 

^iebe 

gcliaucn 

£e&Ctt,  raise 

.     — 

l|Ut) 

^obe 

gc()o6cu 

^peiffen,  cajll 

fyeigeft,  Ijeigt 

^^^ 

fttege 

geljeifcett 

Jpelfen,  HELP 

f)ilfft,  Ijilft 

t)iif           ^alf 

^a(fe 

ge^olfen 

^CtUtett,   KNOW 

— 

fannte 

fennte 

gefannt 

^Htmntett,  CLIMB 

— 

—       Komm 

f(omme 

ge!(ontmen 

IHtngen,  sound 

— 

—       flang 

flange 

gcflungcn 

^>^ttctfcnf  pinch 

— 

Iniff 

fniffe 

gcfttiffen 

$ommen,  COME 

— 

fomm(e)   fam 

fame 

gcfommcu 

$omtett,  CAN 

fann,  fannft, 

(wanting)     foittttC 

fonnte 

gclonnt 

fann,  fonnen 

J^rierfjen,  creep 

— 

—       frudj 

frod^e 

gefro^cn 

^fiabett,1  LOAD;  invite 

labft,  labt 

lub 

tube 

gelabcn 

Saffett,  LET 

laffeft,  lagt 

Iag(e)       lie^ 

liege 

gelaffcn] 

^-SaufCtt,  run 

laufft,  Iciuft 

Hef 

Uefe 

gclaufcn 

^fietbett,  suffer 

leibeft,  leibet 

—       Ktf 

litte 

gcHttctt 

/^fieiljen,  LEND 

— 

lici) 

Uefye 

gclicljcit 

£efettf  read 

liefeft,  Heft 

Ue«           la$ 

fa'fe 

gclefctt 

fitegett,  LIE 

— 

—       (ag 

lage 

gclcgcn 

.  Mtffdjen,2  go  out 

(if  (^  eft,  (ijcf)t 

lifct)          Iof(^ 

lofclje 

getof^'cn 

\2iigen,  tell  a  LIE 

— 

log 

loge 

gclogcn 

VtXJleibett,  shun 

metbeft,  meibet 

—       micb 

miebe 

gemteben 

Mjfteffeit,  measure 

miffeft,  migt 

mig          mag 

mage 

gentcffcn 

TO  gen,  MAY 

mag,  magft, 

(wanting)     IttodjtC 

mocf)te 

gemorfjf 

mag,  mogen 

9ttitffett,  MUST 

mng,  mngt, 

(wanting)     ttttt^tC 

miigte 

gemu^t 

mng,  miiffen 

Stfeljmett,  take- 

nimmft,  nimmt 

nimm       italint 

naljme 

genommcn 

^cnncn,  NAME 

— 

—       nanntc 

nennte 

genanut 

1  Also  weak.     Two  verbs  are  confounded  in  this  one:    labett,  LOAD,  once 
always  strong,  and  Idben,  invite,  once  always  weak. 

2  When  transitive,  quench,  weak. 


340 


NEW   GERMAN  GRAMMAR. 


Infinitive. 

irrca.  iiiu., 

2d  and  3d 

Alliterative,               /^     -n 

2dPer.            T    ,    F 

'ast. 

Past  Part. 

Per.  Sing. 

Sing.             TJld;. 

Subj. 

^feifen,  whistle 

— 

Vfiff 

pjtffe 

ge^fiffcn 

^ffegen,1  cherish 

— 

WN 

^(oge 

ge^ogen 

*$reifen,  PRAISE 

preifeft,  preift 

^trie^ 

^riefe 

gc^ricfett 

^^rdneflen,  gush 

qutllft,  quittt 

quilt            quult 

qublle 

ncqitoltcu 

Staten,  advise 

rdtft  rdt 

rtct 

riete 

gcratcn 

N)  Ofeifcen,  rub 

— 

rtcb 

riebe 

gcriebcn 

Oteifien,  tear 

reifteft,  reigt 

rcig(c)       rig 

rifle 

gcriffcn 

DReiten,  RIDE 

reiteft,  reitet 

ritt 

ritte 

geritten 

SRennen,  RUN 

— 

rannte 

rennte 

gerannt 

Oliedjen,  smell 
.^Itngctt,  wrestle 
Sftinnen,  RUN 

— 

rod) 
rang 
rann 

rodje 
rduge 
rciuue 

geroc^en 
gcrnngcn 
gcronnen 

Dtnfen,  call 

— 

rief 

riefe 

gcrnfen 

^^Sanf  en,  'drink 

jdufft,  fauft 

fauf(e)       foff 

foffe 

gefoffen 

^Sangen,rsucK 

— 

f«>9 

foge 

gefogcn 

(Sdjaffen,2  create 

— 

fdjuf 

ft^ilfe 

gcf^affen 

^<5dj  alien,1  sound 

— 

fd)iil( 

fdjotte 

gcf^ullcn 

\Sdjeiben,  part 

f^eibeft,  fd)eibet 

ft^ieb 

fc^iebe 

gefdjieben 

(5rf)eitten,  appear 

— 

fc^tcn 

ft^ieue 

gefcJficncn 

/V€>d)elten,  SCOLD 

frf)Utft,  frf)tlt 

j^ttt          fdjalt 

fdjcitte 

gcft^olten 

<Sdjieben,  SHOVE 

— 

fd)ub 

jd)5be 

gcfri)oben 

//€>djieften,  SHOOT 

— 

frijiif; 

fd)bffe 

gcf^offcn 

Srfjtofen,  SLEEP 

fdpfft,  frf)(dft 

fd)taf(e)      ft^Hef 

Wlicfc 

gefrfjtofen 

Sdjlagen,  strike 

fd)(dgft,fcf)(dgt 

frfjhtg 

fdjliige 

gcf^tagen 

^^^&tf)ltiifyenf  sneak 

_         — 

f^Odj 

jrf)fid)e 

gcfri)ltri)cn 

""\§>djfetfen,  whet 

— 

fr^Uff 

fditiff  e 

geft^Uffcn 

@^Hc^enf  shut 

— 

fdllOn 

Jen  toff  c 

gcf(^(offcn 

Srfjftngen,  SLING 

— 

f  rtilrtttji 

f^tduge 

geft^fnngen 

(5^mct^cnf 

fdjmeifteft, 

fd)meig(e)  frijmi^ 

fd)miffe 

gcf^miffen 

SMITE 

fdjmeigt 

^-^(iimclscn,1 

fdimt^eft, 

fc^mitj        Wmol5 

f^mbtge 

gefr^molsen 

MELT 

^mitgt 

1  Also  weak  throughout. 


2  In  other  senses  weak. 


LIST   OF   STRONG  AND   IRREGULAR   VERBS. 


341 


Infinitive. 


Pres.  Ind., 
2d  and  3d 
Per.  Sing.  Sing. 


Imperative,  p    , 

2dPer-         Ind.  Subj. 


~l5rfjneiben,  cut      fd)netbejt,fd)neibet—    'fdjnitt      fcfynitte 

fdjrofc      fcfyrobe 
fcfyricf     ftfjral       jdjrafe 


t,1  SCREW 
t,  be         frfjricfft, 
afraid  fcfyricft 

\r  write 
cry 

,  fd)retteft, 

stride  fcfyreitet 

<3rfjmeigen,  be  silent       — 
xSetyweflen,  fdjunllft, 

SWELL 


Past  Part. 

gefrfjmtten 
gcft^robctt 


fc^ricb      fd)riebe 
fd^rei(e)  frfjrie       jcfjriec 
—     fe^rttt      Critic 


frfjnriege 


fdjmitt  . 


fdjttrinbeft, 
vanish  fd)nnnbet 

SWING 


geftffrictt 
gef  Britten 

geftJittitegen 
gef^njoUen 

;  gefrijiuummcn 
gcfrfjiuunbcn 


—    fdjnmng 


fd^tubre 


(5e^cnf  SEE 

ftel)ft,  ftc^t 

fte^(e)    fa^ 

ffil)C 

gefetyen 

(5ctnf  be 

bin,  bift,  ijlt 

fei          ttiar 

toftre 

getuefcn 

(Benbett,  SEND 

fenbeft,  fenbet 

fanbtc 

fenbete 

gcfanbt 

Siugcn,  SING 

— 

fang 

fange 

gefnngen 

5@tttfCttf   SINK 

— 

fanf 

fcinfe 

gcfnnlcn 

-Sinnen,  think 

— 

fann 

fanne 

gcfunncn 

Si^cttf  SIT 

fi^eft,  ft^t 

—     fa| 

fage 

gefcffcn 

@oflett,  should 

toH,  fottft,  fott 

(wanting-)  foUtC 

foUte 

gcfottt 

(5^ttt1tCltr   SPIN 

— 

fpaun 

fpanne 

gcfpuuncn 

<S^rct^Cttr  speak 

f|)ri(i)ft,  tyricfjt 

fprid)      f^rac^ 

fprac^e 

gcfproi^cu 

*S$mef?ettr  SPROUT 

— 

—     tyrofc 

fproffe 

geftroffen 

6^ringettf  SPRING 

— 

fprang 

grange 

gcf^rnngen 

<3tedjenf  prick 

WW,  fttcflt 

fttt^        ftat^ 

ftadtje 

gcftori)cn 

Stc^enf  STAND 

— 

fte^(e)    ftanb 

ftanbe 

geftanbcn 

k3tC^(ettr    STEAL 

ftteljlfi,  ftie^rt 

ftiel)!      fta^I 

(taf)te 

gcfto^cn 

Stcigen,  ascend 

— 

f«eg 

ftiege 

gcfttegen 

1  Weak  when  transitive. 


342 

NEW   GEEMAN  GRAMMAR. 

Pres.  Ind., 

Imperative.                T.    , 

Infinitive. 

2d  and  3d 

2d  Per. 

r&si. 
Ind              o.iK4 

Past  Part. 

Per.  Sing. 

Sing. 

©terbett,  die 

fttrbft,  fttrbt 

fttrb 

ftarb 

fturbe 

geftorbett 

Stolen,  push 

ftbgeft,  ftogt 

fiog(e) 

ftiefe 

ftiege 

gefto^en 

*  (Stteidjett,  STROKE 

ftrit^ 

(tric^e 

gcftric^en 

.  -<Stmtett,  strive 

ftreiteft,  ftrettet 

— 

ftritt 

ftritte 

gcftritten 

£tttt,   DO 

— 

tu(e) 

tat 

tate 

getan 

£ragett,  carry 

tragft,  tragt 

— 

trug 

triige 

gctragcn 

^Xreffen,  hit 

triffft,  trifft 

triff 

traf 

trafe 

getroffcn 

Xretbett,  DRIVE 

— 

— 

tricb 

triebe 

getrieben 

£retCtt,   TREAD 

trittfl,  tritt 

tritt 

trat 

trate 

gctrcten 

Srinlen,  DRINK 

— 

— 

tranf 

tranle 

gctrunlctt 

*  Xritgett,  deceive 

— 

— 

trog 

troge 

getrogcn 

i^erberbett,1  spoil 

tterbirbft,  uerbirbt 

Derbirb 

berbari 

i  t>erbiirbe 

ucrburbcn 

*$erbriefiett,  vex 

— 

— 

uerbrof 

f  tjerbroffe 

ncrbroffen 

$ergeffen,  FORGET  fcergiffeft,  fcergiftt   toergifj     toergaff 

oergaffe 

bcrgeffcn 

^erUerett,  LOSE 

— 

— 

Dcrlur 

Derlore 

tier(orcn 

SBadjfen,  grow 

tDdcfjfeft,  toad^ft 

— 

tuurljv 

tt)iirf)f6 

gctuartjfcit 

••6  SBagett,2  WEIGH 

— 

— 

toog 

tooge 

gettiogen 

SBtffett,  know 

tt)ei§,  toeifjt,  ft)ei§ 

wtffe 

ttmfjte 

tt)ii§te 

gcwitftt 

SBafdJett,  WASH 

tt)afd)eft,  tDafd^t 

— 

juitfri) 

iDiifd^e 

nciuafrf)cn 

,  ^SSebett,  WEAVE 

— 

— 

mob 

tDbbe 

gciuubcn 

x>235etdjett,  yield 

— 

— 

lUlfl) 

luid^c 

getutd)cn 

>2Beifett,  show 

toeifeft,  rtetft 

— 

tuiCv 

lt)iefe 

gctuiefen 

28enbett,  turn 

menbeft,  tuenbet 

— 

nwubtc 

trenbete 

gouanbt 

^SBerben,  sue 

toirbft,  tt)irbt 

tt)irb 

luarb 

tDiirbc 

gewDrbeu 

SBerben,  become 

ttJtrft,  rt)irb 

tuerbe 

ttiurbe 

ttnirbe 

gettiorben 

"^UBiegett,3  WEIGH 

— 

— 

teiog 

tuoge 

getoogen 

233tnbcnf  WIND 

toinbeft,  tt)inbet- 

— 

nianb 

ttjanbe 

gcumnbcn 

SBerfen,  throw 

toirfft,  tt)irf-t 

tturf 

toarf 

tt)itrfe 

gettiorfcn 

293ottenf  WILL 

it)  IE,  ttnllft,  t^iE 

n)otte 

juuiltc 

tDOlltC 

ncjuuiu 

3tcl)Cttf  draw 

— 

— 

;tO(t 

gogc 

gcpgcn  , 

*  3ttJ^tt8ettf  force 

•  —  ' 

— 

AJiifinn 

juiange 

gc^ttJungctt 

1  Weak  when  transitive. 

a  SSiigen  and  totegen  are  really  identical. 


3  SBtegen,  rocA:,  is  always  weak. 


SUMMARY  OP  INFLECTIONS. 


343 


370.   Noun  Declension.  —  There  are  five  classes  of  nouns. 


SING.       1st  class. 

N.  betSBtnbet 
G.  be3  StnbetS 
D.  bem  $tnbet 
A.  ben  SBtnbet 

PLURAL. 
N.  bie  23titbet 
G.  bet  SBtiibet 
D.  ben  SBtitbetn 
A.  bie  Stitbet 

SING.       1st  class. 

N.  bie  £od)tet 
G.  bet  Xadjtet 
D.  bet  Soviet 
A.  bie  £od)tet 

PLURAL. 
N.  bie  XBdjtet 
G.  bet  Xodjtet 
D.  ben  Xorfjtetn 
A.  bie  XiJ^tet 

SING.       1st  class. 

N.  ba£  TObcfjen 

G. 

D.  bem  { 

A. 
PLURAL. 

N.  bie ! 

G.  betSRab^en 

D.  ben  SJlftbt^en 

A.  bie  3Rabcf)en 


(a)   Masculine  Nouns. 

3d  class.  3d  class.  Uth  class. 


bet 

bem 
ben 


bet  SPtann       bet 


5th  . 

bet  <Staat 
beS  3tootc^ 
bem  9Rann(e)  bem  $naben  bem  <3taat(e) 
ben^onn       ben^naben  benStaat 


bie  6a^e  bie  TOnnet     bie  ^naben  bie  Staaten 

bet  @a^e  bet  SJlannet    bet  ®naben  bet  (Staaten 

ben  So^en  ben  TOnnetn  ben  ^naben  ben  Staaten 

bie  6a^e  bie  bonnet     bie  $naben  bie  Staaten 


(6)  Feminine  Nouns. 

%d  class.  kth  class. 

bie  £Banf  bie  JVtou 

bet  23anf  bet  ^tan 

bet  23anf  bet  gtan 

bie  S5anl  bie  $tmt 


bie  Sonic 
bet  23anle 
ben  ^Banlen 
bie 


bie  §tanen 
bet  'Stanen 
ben  Jytanen 
bie  gftanen 


(c)  Neuter  Nouns. 

2d  class.         3d  class. 


5th  class. 


bent  S5oot(e)  bent 


bem  S5ett(e) 


bie  SBoote    bie 
bet  S3oote    bet  SBiidjet 
ben  23ootett  ben 
bie  s^outc    bie 


bie  Setten 
bet  S5etten 
ben  Gotten 
bie  ^etten 


344  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

(d)  A  few  nouns  differ  slightly  from  Class  I,  seeming  to 
drop  the  last  letter  in  the  nominative. 

£)er  9famte(n),  name.  £)a$  §erg,  heart. 

SING.  PLU.  SING.  PLU. 

Nom.    bcr  ^atnc(tt)         bic  -Wamctt  ba3  §cr$          bic 

Gen.     bc3  9?amctt^          bcr  ^amcn  bc3  ^cr^cn^     bcr 

Dat.      bctn  Sftamcn          ben  ^antcu  bcm  ^cr^cn     ben 

Ace.     ben  Xiamen  bic  tauten  ba§  6cn         bic 


(e)  Other  nouns  declined  like  ber  battle  are  : 

bcr  ^rtcbc(tt)f  peace.  bcr  ^pattfc(tt),  heap. 

bcr  ^unfc(tt)r  spark.  bcr  Samc(tt),  seed. 

bcr  @cbanfc(n)f  thought.  bcr  <3d)abc(n),  injury. 
bcr  ®fattfcc(tt)f 


371.    Adjective  Declension.  —  There  are  three  declensions  of 
adjectives  :  strong,  weak,  and  mixed. 

(a)  Strong  adjectives  —  without  article;  declined  with  typical 
strong  endings. 

SINGULAR. 

Nom.         Qtitcr  -Jftaittt  gutc  gfrau  gutc$  ®wb 

Gen.          flittcu  Cannes          gutcr  ^-rau          gutcn  ^inbc^ 
Dat.          gutcm^ann(c)         gutcr  JJrau         gutcm  $tnb(c) 
Ace.  gutcn  ^Jtauu  gutc  Jyvau  gutc^ 

PLURAL. 


Nom.  gutc  9)lanttcrf  ^raucnf  ^inbcr 

Gen.  gutcr  3Jlanncrf  §raucnr  ^inbcr 

Dat.  gutcn  SOlattttcrtt,  ^raucnf 

Ace.  gate  9Jiamtcrf  ^raucnf  ^inbcr 


(6)  When  mcmdjer,  tDetcfjer,  folder  are  used  without  the  end- 
ing (mcmd),  ttelcf),  fotdf)),  the  adjective  following  is  strong. 


SUMMARY   OF   INFLECTIONS.  345 

SINGULAR. 

Nom.  ma nt()  gtttcr  sJJtatttt 

Gen.  ma uri)  giitcn  (c3)  s)Jtattttc3 

Dat.  mnitrfj  gtttcm  $lantt(c) 

Ace.  mauri)  gttten  Watt  it 

(c)  Weak  adjectives  —  after  definite   article   or   ,,ber"  word; 
declined  with  typical  iveaJc  endings. 

SINGULAR. 

Nom.  bcr  gutc  $iatttt  btc  gutc  $ratt  ba£  gtttc  ®mb 

Gen.  bc3  gutcn  $lattttc3  bcr  gittcn  $ratt  bc3  gttten  SKttbcS 

Dat.  bcm  gutcn  $tatttt(e)  bcr  gtttctt  ^ratt  bcm  gtttcn  ^tnb(c) 

Ace.  ben  gtttcn  Wlami  btc  gtttc  ^ratt  ba§  gutc  $Httb 

PLURAL. 

Nom.  btc  gittcn  Sttawttcr,  ^rattett,  ^ittbcr 

Gen.  bcr  gtttctt  Sautter,  ^rauenf  ^tttbcr 

Dat.  bctt  gtttctt  SDlatwcrtt,  ^ttM^tt,  ^utbcrtt 

Ace.  bic  gtttctt  SOlattttcr,  8*auctt,  ^tttbcr 

(d)  Mixed  adjectives  —  after  indefinite  article  or  ,,ettt"  word; 
weak  when  the  article  or  ,,em"  word  is  inflected,  strong  when 
the  article  or  ,fettl"  word  is  not  inflected. 

SINGULAR. 

Nom.  cttt  gtttcr  SJlatttt  ctttc  gtttc  ftvan  tin  gtttc^ 

Gen.  cittc3  gtttctt  9Jlattttc§  ctttcr  gtttctt  ^ratt  ci«c^  gtttctt 

Dat.  cittern  gtttctt  $tatttt(c)  ctttcr  gtttett  $tau  cittern  gtttctt 

Ace.  cittCtt  gtttctt  ^latttt  citte  gttte  fjrau  cm  gwtc^ 

PLURAL. 

Nom.  feme  gtttctt  9Wattncrf  ^«wc«f  ^tttbcr 

Gen.  fctttcr  gtttctt  Gamier,  JJrattctt,  ^tttbcr 

Dat.  fcittCtt  gtttctt  sJ91fittttcrttr  ^rattcttf  ^tttbcrn 

Ace.  fcittc  gtttctt  9Jlattncrr 


346  NEW   GERMAN  GRAMMAR. 

< 
372.  Personal  Pronouns. 

idj,  I;  bu,  thou;  @ie,  you;  er,  he;  fie,  she;  e§,  it. 

(a)  FIRST  PERSON  :  SING.  SECOND  PERSON  :  SING. 
Nom.  id),  /.  bn,  tfiow,  2/ow.  <3te,  2/ow. 
Gen.  nteiner,  o/me.  beiner,  ofthee.  3»ljrer,  of  you. 
Dat.  tttir,  £o  or  /or  me.  bit,  to  or  for  thee.        %$ntn,  £o  or  for  you. 
Ace.  ntidj,  me.  bid),  Zftee,  ?/ow.              Sie,  you. 

(b)  FIRST  PERSON  :  PLU.  SECOND  PERSON  :  PLU. 
Nom.  tt)trf  we.  i^tf  you.  ®te,  you. 
Gen.  ttttfer,  o/ws.  cuerf  of  you.                3^tctf  of  you. 
Dat.  Utt3f  ^o  or  /or  ws.  eilt^f  to  or  /or  ?/ow.       S^wcn,  ^o  or  for  you. 
Ace.  utt3,  ws.  cur^r  you.                    (5t 


(c)  THIRD  PERSON  SINGULAR. 

Masc.  Fern.  Neut. 

Nom.    erf  ^e,  it.  ftcf  she,  it.  e£,  lY. 

Gen.     f  enter,  of  him,  of  it.         t^rer,  of  her,  of  it.  feitterr  o/tY. 

Dat.     i^mf  to  or  /or  Mm  or  it.    ttyr,  £o  or  /or  her  or  ft.  ttym,  «o  or  for  it. 

Ace.     iljtt,  him,  it.  fief  ^er,  ft.  e3f  ft. 

THIRD  PERSON  PLURAL  :   M.  F.  N. 

Nom.  fte,  they. 

Gen.  tljrerr  of  them. 

Dat.  tljuett,  to  or  for  them. 

Ace.  ftef  them. 

373.  Relative  and  Interrogative  Pronouns. 

(a)  The  relative  bet,  who,  which,  that. 


Singular. 

Plural. 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

M.  F.  N. 

Nom. 

bet 

bie 

bag 

bie 

Gen, 

beffen 

beren 

beffett 

beren 

Dat. 

bent 

ber 

bent 

benen 

Ace. 

ben 

bie 

bag 

bie 

SUMMARY  OF  INFLECTIONS.  347 

The  relative  toeWjet,  who,  which,  that. 

Singular.  Plural. 


MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

M.  F.  N. 

Nom. 

toefdjer 

U)dtf)C 

lUCldjC* 

tteldje 

Gen. 

beffen 

bet  en 

bcffen 

beren 

Dat. 

toelrfjent 

tuelrfjcr 

welrtiem 

Welrfien 

Ace. 

roelrfien 

mddjc 

WClcfte* 

UJClfijC 

(c)  The  interrogative  and  compound  relative  toet,  who. 

Singular  (plural  wanting). 

MASC.  AND  FEM.  NEUT. 

Nom.  mer  ttwS 

Gen.  toeffen  tticffen 

Dat.  tticm 

Ace.  lucn 


(d)  The  interrogative  toetcf)er  is  declined  like  ,,ber"  words. 

374.  Demonstrative  Pronouns. 

(a)  The  demonstratives  are  bet,  that;  btefer,  this;  jetter, 
that;  fofdjer,  such  (a)  ;  berjentge,  that,  the  one;  berfefbe,  the 
same. 

(6)  The  demonstrative  ber,  that,  is  declined  like  the  relative 
ber,  except  the  genitive  plural,  berer  ;  btefer,  jener,  and  fotdjer 
are  ffber"  words.  In  berjenige  and  berfelbe,  the  first  part  is  de- 
clined like  the  definite  article,  the  last  part,  weak. 


Singular. 

Plural. 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

M.F.  N. 

Nom.    berjentge 
Gen.     be^jenigen 
Dat.     bemjenigen 
Ace.     benjenigen 

biejenige 
berjenigen 
berjenigen 
biejentge 

ba£jenige 
benjenigen 
bentjenigen 
ba£jenige 

biejenigen 
berjenigen 
benjenigen 
biejenigen 

348 


NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 


375. 


Indefinites  and  Reflexives. 


(a)  Most  indefinites  and  the  reflexive  fief)  for  the  third  per 
son  (er,  fie,  e$  ;  fie)  are  indeclinable.     The  declinable  ones  are 
(&)  The  indefinites  Jemcmb,  some  one;  niemcmb,  no  one;  je 
bermatm,  every  one;  matt,  one,  they. 

Singular  (  plural  wanting) . 

jcmanb  niemanb  jebermann 

jemanb(e)3  niemanb(e)3  jebermann^ 

jemanb(em  or  en)       niemanb(em  or  en)       jeberntann 
jemanb(en)  niemattb(en)  jebermann 


Nom 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 

The  reflexives : 

Subject. 
NOM. 

id) 
bit 
wir 
t|r 


mojt 


etnem 
einen 


Reflexive. 
DAT.  Ace. 

mir  mid) 

bir  bitty 

into  into 

end)  cud) 


376. 

(a)  Pres.  I 
I  have,  etc. 
id)  Ijabc 
bit  fia  ft 
cr  tyat 

ttrir 

iljr 


Conjugation  of  fjabctt,  to  have. 


en 


;.  Pres.  Subj. 

Per/  7ra<fo'c. 

Per/.  Subj. 

I  have,  etc. 

I  have  had,  etc. 

I  have  had,  etc. 

id)  Ijab  e 

id)  Ijab  e  a.djabr 

id)  I)nb  e  geljabt 

bn  Ijab  eft 

bn  I)  a  ft  fldjabt 

bn  I)ab  eft  geljabt 

er  Ijab  e 

er  I)at  fldjabt 

er  [jab  e  gctyabt 

ttrir  IjaB  en 

tuir  Ijab  en  gdjabt 

tuir  I)ab  en  a,d)abr 

Ujr  fjabct 

iljr  Ijab  t  geljafct 

iljr  Ijab  et  gelialu 

fie  tyai  en         .fie  tyab  en  fte  tyafc  en  getyaBt  fie  Ijafc  en  gctyabt 

(6)  Past  Indie.    Past  Subj.           Past  Perf.  Indie.  Past  Perf.  Subj. 

I  had,  etc.          I  had,  etc.             I  had  had,  etc.  I  had  had,  etc. 

id)  fjatt  e           id)  fjtitt  e  id)  Ijatt  e  geljafet  id)  Ijatt  e 

bn  Ijatt  eft         bu  Ijatt  eft  bn  Ijatt  eft  fldjabr  bu  Ijatt  eft 

er  tyatte.          er  tyatte  er  Ijatte  geljafct  er  ptte  ge^abt 


SUMMARY   OF   INFLECTIONS. 


349 


nrir  linn  en        tntr  lidtt  en       mir  f)nrt  en  geljabt 
tyr  Ijatt  et         iljr  fjatt  et        ifjr  Ijatt  et  geijabt 
fie  Ijatt  en         fie  Ijatt  en         fie  Ijatt  en  gefjabt 

(c)  Future  Indicative.       Future  Subjunctive. 
I  should  have,  etc. 
irf)  inert)  e  Ijaben 
bit  incrb  eft  Imbeit 
er  roerb  e  Jjaben 

mir  inert)  en  Ijabcit 
tljr  inert)  et  Ijnbeu 
fie  inert)  en  Ijabcit 


I  shall  have,  etc. 
id]  inert)  e  iiabcit 
bit  mir  ft  fjabcn 
er  mirb  Ijaben 

mir  inert)  en  bnbcu 
itir  inert)  et  tjnbcit 
fie  inert)  en  ijabcn 

(d)  .FW.  Perf.  Indie. 


inir  [jatt  en  ge^abt 
tl)r  l)tittet 
fie  fatten 

Present  Conditional. 
I  should  have,  etc. 
id)  ttwrb  e  Ijaben 
tut  initrt)  eft  Ijaben 
er  initrt)  e  liabcn 

intr  initrt)  en  baben 
i^r  foiirb  et  ^abcn 
fie  initrt)  en  Ijabcn 

Perf.  Cond. 


Put.  Perf.  Subj. 

I  shall  have  had,  etc.     I  should  have  had,  etc.     I  should  have  had,  etc. 
id)  merb  e  geljabt  liabcn  id)  merb  e  geljabt  liaben  id)  mitrb  e  geljabt  tjabcu 

—  bn  mitrb  eft 

—  er  mitrb  e 

mir  mitrb  en  — 

—  iljr  miirb  et 

—  fie  mitrb  en    —      — 

Participles. 

PRESENT  :  Ijab  enb,  having. 
PERFECT  :  geljabt,  had. 


bit  mir  ft  —  — 
er  mirb  —  — 

mir  merb  en  —  — 
iljr  merb  et  —  — 
fie  merb  en  —  — 

W 

SING. 

PLUR. 


bn  merb  eft    — 
er  merb  e      — 

mir  merb  en  - 
iljr  merb  et 
fie  merb  en    — 

Imperative. 
Ijab  e  (bn)f  have  ! 
Ijab  t  (iljr),  have  ! 
fjab  en  <3ie,  have ! 

Infinitives. 
(p)  Ijaben,  to  have.       geljabt  Q 


^aben,  to  have  had. 


377.   Conjugation   of  fettt,  to   be}  and  (as  tense  auxiliary  for 
intransitives),  to  have. 


(a)Pres.  Indie. 

Pres.  Subj. 

Perf.  Ind. 

Perf.  Subj. 

I  am,  etc. 

I  am,  etc. 

I  have  been,  etc. 

I  have  been,  etc. 

iff)  bin 

trf)  fei 

tdj  bin  gemefen 

id)  f^i  gemefen 

bn  btft 

bn  fei  eft 

bit  btft  gemefen 

bn  fei  eft  gemefen 

er  ift 

er  fei 

er  ift  gemefen 

er  fei  gemefen 

350 


NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 


mir  finb          mir  f ei  en 
ityr  f  eib  iljr  f  ci  et 

fie  finb  fie  fei  en 

(b)  Past  Indie.   Past  Subj. 
I  was,  etc.        I  were,  etc. 
id)  mar  id)  marc 

bit  mar  ft  bit  mar  eft 

er  mar  er  mare 

mir  mar  en  mir  mar  en 

iljr  mar  t  iljr  mar  et 

fie  mar  en  fie  mar  en 

(c)  future  Indicative. 
I  shall  be,  etc. 

id)  merb  e  fein 
bu  mir  ft  fein 
er  mirb  fein 
mir  merb  en  fein 
iljr  merb  et  fein 
fie  merb  en  fein 


mir  finb  gemefen 
tljr  feib  gemefen 
fie  finb  gemefen 

Past  Perf.  Ind. 
I  had  been,  etc. 
idi  mar  gemefen 
bn  mar  ft  gemefen 
er  mar  gemefen 
mir  mar  en  gemefen 
iljr  mart  gemefen 
fie  mar  en  gemefen 

Future  Subjunctive. 

I  should  be,  etc. 
id)  merb  e  fein 
bn  merb  eft  fein 
er  merb  e  fein 
mir  merb  en  fein 
iljr  merb  et  fein 
fie  merb  en  fein 


mir  fei  en  gemefen 
iljr  feiet  gemefen 
fie  fei  en  gemefen 

Past  Perf.  Subj. 

I  had  been,  etc. 
id)  mare  gemefen 
bn  mar  eft  gemefen 
er  mare  gemefen 
mir  mar  en  gemefen 
tljr  maret  gemefen 
fie  mar  en  gemefen 

Present  Conditional. 

I  should  be,  etc. 
idi  mitrb  e  fein 
bn  mitrb  eft  fein 
er  mitrb  e  fein 
mir  mitrb  en  fein 
iljr  mitrb  et  fein 
fie  mitrb  en  fein 

Perf.  Cond. 


(d)  Put.  Perf.  Indie.  Fut.  Perf.  Subj. 

I  shall  have  been,  etc.    I  should  have  been,  etc.  I  should  have  been,  etc. 
id)  merb  e  gemefen  fein  idj  merb  e  gemefen  fein  id)  mitrb  e  gemefen  fein 


bn  mir  ft 
er  mirb 
mir  merb  en 
Ujr  merb  et 
fie  merb  en 

(e) 

SING. 


—  bn  merb  eft 

—  er  merb  e 

—  mir  merb  en 
iljr  merb  et 

—  fte  merb  en 

Imperative. 
fei    (tot),  be  ! 


PLUR. 


rfeib(%),be! 
\  fei  en  <5ie,  be ! 

fein,  to  be. 


bn  miirb  eft 

—  er  mitrb  e 

—  mir  mitrb  en  — 

—  iljr  mitrb  et 

fie  mitrb  en     — 

Participles. 

PRESENT  :  fei  enb,  being. 
PERFECT  :  gemefen,  been. 


gemefen  (sn)  fein,  to  have  been. 


SUMMARY   OF   INFLECTIONS. 


351 


378.  Conjugation  of  the  verb  toerbett,  (1)  to  become,  when  used 
alone,  (2)  auxiliary  for  the  future,  when  used  with  infinitive ; 
(3)  sign  of  the  passive,  when  used  with  the  perfect  participle. 


(a)  Pres.  Indie.      Pres.  Subj.  Perf.  Indie. 

I  become,  etc.,  I  become,  etc.,  or    I  have  become, 

or  I  shall,  etc.  I  shall  (will),  etc.            etc. 

id)  inert*  e  id)  ttierb  e       id)  &in  gettiorben 

bu  lutr  ft  bit  ttierb  eft     bu  bift  gettiorben 

er  ttiirb  er  ttierb  e                   etc. 

ttrir  ttierb  en  ttir  ttierb  en 

ityr  ttierb  et  iljr  ttierb  et 

fie  ttierb  en  fie  ttierb  en 

(6)  Past  Indie.  Past  Subj.  Past  Perf.  Indie. 
I  became,  etc.  I  became,  etc.1  I  had  become,  etc. 
id)  ttmrb  e,  ttmrb  id)  uritrbe  tdi  war  gemorben 


Perf.  Subj. 
I  have  become, 

etc. 

id]  fei  getttorben 
bn  fei  eft  geniorben 
etc. 


Past  Perf.  Subj. 
I  had  become,  etc. 
id)  war  e  gettorben 


bn  ttmrb  eft,  ttmrb  ft  bu  ttmrb  eft    bu  war  ft  gettiorben  bu  ttmr  eft  gettiorben 


er  ttmrb  e,  ttmrb 
tttir  ttmrb  en 
ifjr  ttmrb  et 
fie  ttmrb  en 


er  ttmrb  e 
wiv  ttmrb  en 
ifjr  ttmrb  et 
fie  ttmrb  en 


etc. 


etc. 


(c)  Future  Indicative. 

I  shall  become,  etc. 
id)  ttierb  e  ttterben 
bn  ttrirft  tnerben 

etc. 


Future  Subjunctive. 
I  shall  become,  etc. 
id)  ttierb  e  roerben 
bu  ttierb  eft  ttierb  en 

etc. 


(d)         Fut.  Perf.  Indie. 
I  shall  have  become,  etc. 
id)  ttierb  e  gettiorben  fein 
bu  ttiirft  gettiorben  fein 

etc. 


Present  Conditional. 
I  should  become,  etc. 
id)  ttnirb  e  ttierb  en 
bu  ttmrb  eft  ttierben 

etc. 

Fut.  Perf.  Subj. 
I  should  have  become,  etc. 
id)  ttierb  e  gettiorben  fein 
bu  ttierb  eft  gettiorben  fein 

etc. 


1  This  form,  toiirbe,  is  used  regularly  for  the  auxiliary  of  the  conditional 
mode,  should,  would.    See  any  complete  verb  conjugation. 


352 


NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 


Perfect  Conditional. 
I  should  have  become,  etc. 
id)  uwrb  e  getoorbeu  feiu 
bu  ftiirb  eft  gettorbeu  feiu 

etc. 
Imperative.  Participles. 

(blt)f  become!         PRESENT:  toerb  ettb,  becoming, 
r  ttierb  et  (iljr) ,  become  !      PERFECT:    gettorbeu    (in   the  passive, 
'  \  toerb  eu  @ie,  become !  toorbeu),  become. 


(6) 
SING, 


Infinitives. 
geftorbeu  (p)  few, 


(5tt)  toerbeu,  to  become. 

379.       Conjugation  of  toften,  to  prai 
ACTIVE  VOICE. 


become. 


(a)  Pres.  Ind. 

Pres.  Subj. 

Per/.  Ind.1 

Per/.  Subj. 

I  praise,  etc. 
id)  lobe 
bu  lobft 
er<JobJlLs^ 

I  praise,  etc. 
id)  lobe 
bu  lobeft 
er  lobe 

I  have  praised,  etc. 
id)  l)ttbc  gelobt 
bu  l)uft  gelobt 
er  I)nt  gelobt 

I  have  praised,  etc. 
id)  Ijabc  gelobt 
bu  Ijabeft  gelobt 
er  ijabc  gelobt 

unr  loBeu   j 
fie  lobeu 

urn-  lobeu 
Hjr  lobet 
fie  lobeu 

nnr  I)alicu  gelobt 
iljr  Ijabt  gelobt 
fie  Ijabeu  gelobt 

luiv  Ijabcu  gelobt 
iljr  Ijabet  gelobt 
fie  l)abcu  gelobt 

(b)  Past  Ind. 

Past  Subj. 

Past  Per/.  Indie. 

Past  Per/  Subj. 

I  praised,  etc. 

I  praised,  etc. 

I  had  praised,  etc. 

I  had  praised,  etc. 

id)  lofcte 
bu  lobteft 
er  lobte 

id)  lobte 
bu  lobteft 
er  lobte 

bu  Ijatteft  gelobt 
er  Ijattc  gelobt 

id)  Ijtittc  gelobt 
bu  Ijfittcft  gelobt 
er  ptte  gelobt 

nrir  lobteu 
if)r  lobtet 
fie  lobteu 

urn-  lobteu 
iljr  lobtet 
fie  lobteu 

uiir  ^atteu  gelobt 
i^r  ^attet  gelobt 
fie  ^atteu  gelobt 

luir  Ijatteu  gelobt 
tl)r  pttet  gelobt 
fie  ptteu  gelobt 

1  For  the  conjugation  of  an  intransitive  verb  with  fetn  as  auxiliary,  see 
fern,  §  377,  or  toerben,  §  378. 


SUMMARY   OF  INFLECTIONS. 


353 


(c)  Future  Indicative. 
I  shall  praise,  etc. 

id)  toerbe  (often 
bu  toirft  (often 
er  toirb  (often 

toir  toerben  iouen 
iljr  toerbet  (often 
fie  toerben  (often 

(d}  Fut.  Per/.  Indie. 

I  shall  have  praised, 

etc. 

id)  toerbe  ge(oftt  (jaften 
bn  toirft       —      — 
er  toirb 

toir  toerben  - 
tljr  toerbet   - 
fie  toerben 

(e)  Imperative. 

SING,  (ofte  (bn)f  praise! 
PLUR.  (oftt  (iljr)f  praise  ! 
(often  Sie,  praise ! 


Future  Subjunctive. 
I  should  praise,  etc. 

id]  merbe  (often 
bn  lucrbcft  (often 
et  toerbe  (often 

luir  ntetben  (often 
iljr  iiicrbet  (often 
fie  ttierben  (often 

Fut.  Per/.  Subj. 

I  should  have  praised, 

etc. 

itfi  nierbe  ge(oftt  iiabcn 
bn  ttierbeft   - 
er  toerbe      — 

mir  merben  - 
ifjr  ttierbet   - 
fie  toerben   — 

Participles. 

PRES.   (oftenbf  praising. 
PERF.  ge(ofttf  praised. 


Present  Cond. 
I  should  praise,  etc. 

id)  miirbc  (often 
bn  tuiirbcft  (often 
er  miirbe  (often 

juir  roiirben  (often 
t^r  tuitrbet  (often 
fie  ttmrben  (often 

Per/.  Conditional. 

I  should  have  praised, 

etc. 

id)  tmirbe  ge(oftt  I)nuen 
bu  toiirbeft  - 
er  ttiiirbe 

ttiir  ttwrben  — 

i^r  wiirbet   - 

fie  nwrben  —     ^r- 

Iiifinitives. 
(Stt)  (often/to^jpraise. 
ge(oftt  (511)  ^aftenf  to 
have  praised. 


380. 


PASSIVE  VOICE. 


Pres.  Indie. 
I  am  praised,  etc. 

id)  werbc  ge(oftt 
bn  wirft  gclobt 
er  ttiirb  ge(oftt 

luir  locrben  ge(oftt 
t^r  ttierbet  gc(oftt 
fie  ttierben  ge(oftt 


Pres.  Subj. 
I  am  praised,  etc. 

id)  lucrbe  ge(oftt 
bn  nierbeft  ge(oftt 
er  ttierbe  ge(oftt 

ttitr  toerben  ge(oftt 
ii)r  toerbet  ge(oftt 
fie  toerben  ge(oftt 


354 


NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 


Per/.  Indie. 

I  have  been  praised,  etc. 
id)  (in  gelobt  niorben 
bn  Btft  gelobt  morben 
cr  ift  gelobt  morben 

mir  finb  gelobt  morben 
iljr  feib  gelobt  morben 
fie  finb  gelobt  morben 


(c) 


Indie. 
I  was  praised,  etc. 
irf)  nmrbe  gelobt 
bn  mnrbeft  gelobt 
cr  iDitvbc  fldulit 

ttiir  luurbcn  gelobt 
t^r  ttiurbct  gelobt 
fie  ttiurbctt  gclobt 

Past  Perf.  Indie. 
I  had  been  praised,  etc. 
irf)  mar  gehrtt  ttorbeu 
bu  toarft  gctoBt  ttmrbett 
cr  ttiar  gctuBt  ttiorbcn 

n>ir  warcu  gclubt  juorbcn 
t^r  wart  gcloBt  morben 
fie  ttiaren  gelofct  morben 

Pw^.  Indie. 

I  shall  be  praised,  etc. 
id)  werbc  gclubt  mcrbeu 
bu  ttjirft  getobt  werben 
er  ttiirb  geloBt  ttierben 

iuir  luerbeu  geloBt  tuerben 
il)r  tuerbet  gelobt  ttierben 
fie  ttierben  geloBt  luerbcn 


Per/. 

I  have  been  praised,  etc. 
id)  fei  gelobt  morben 
bn  feieft  gelobt  tuorben 
er  fei  gelobt  morben 

ttiir  feien  getubt  itJorben 
ifjr  feiet  gelobt  ttorben 
fie  feien  gelobt  niorben 

Past  Subj. 
I  was  praised,  etc. 
irf)  ttmrbe  gc(obt 
bn  nwrbeft'geMt 
er  niitrbe  gelobt 

mir  toitrben  gelobt 
i^r  mitrbet  gelobt 
fie  nmrben  gelobt 

Past  Perf.  8ubj. 
I  had  been  praised,  etc. 
tr^  ttjftre  gelobt  morben 
bn  uwreft  gelobt  worben 
er  tuiire  gelobt  niorben 

mir  ttiaren  gelobt  morben 
il)r  nidret  gelobt  niorben 
fie  nwren  gelobt  niorben 

Put.  Subj. 

I  should  be  praised,  etc. 
idj  merbe  gelobt  merben 
bn  merbeft  gelobt  merben 
er  merbe  gelobt  ttierben 

ttrir  merben  gelobt  merben 
tfyr  merbet  gelobt  merben 
fie  merben  gelobt  merben 


SUMMARY   OF   INFLECTIONS. 


355 


(d)  Put.  Per/.  Indie. 

I  shall  have  been  praised,  etc. 
id)  werbe  fldobt  worben  fein 
bit  luirft  gelobt  worben  fetn 
cr  wirb  gefobt  worben  fetn 

wir  werben  gelobt  worbcn  fetn 
HIT  werbet  gelobt  worben  fetn 
fie  werben  ijclobr  worben  fein 

(e)  Present  Conditional. 

I  should  be  praised,  etc. 
id)  nritrbe  fldobt  werbcn 
bn  wiirbeft  fldubt  werben 
er  witrbe  gelobt  werben 

lutr  miirben  getoBt  luerben 
tlir  luitrbct  gelofct  werben 
fie  luitrben  gelobt  tuerben 


Put.  Perf.  Subj. 
I  should  have  been  praised,  etc. 
tt^  werbe  ge(obt  ttiorben  fein 
bn  toerbeft  geloBt  ttiorben  fein 
er  toerbe  geioBt  ttiorben  fein 

ttrir  ttietben  geloBt  morben  fein 
tljr  merbet  gelubt  tuorben  fein 
fie  merben  gelobt  ttiorben  fein 

Perfect  Conditional. 
I  should  have  been  praised,  etc. 
id)  win-be  gelubt  worben  fein 
bn  witrbeft  gelobt  worben  fein 
er  wttrbe  gelobt  worben  fein 

wir  witrben  getobt  worben  fein 
ilir  witrbet  gelobt  worben  fetn 
fie  witrben  gelobt  worben  fein 


(/)  Imperative. 

2o  SING,    werbe  (bu)  gelobt     or  fei  (bn)  gelobtf  be  praised ! 

(  werbet  (i^r)  gelobt  or  feib  (i^r)  gelobt,  be  praised  I 
1  (  werben  6ie  gelobt    or  feien  Ste  gelobt,  be  praised ! 


Participles. 

PRESENT  :  (^n  lobenbf  used  only  as  adj.) 
PERFECT  :  gelobt  worben 


Infinitives. 
gelobt  (§u)  werben 
gelobt  worben  (p)  fein 


381.   Conjugation  of  feljett,  to  sge,  a  strong  verBi    This  differs 
from  the  conjugation  of  loben  only  in  tne  present,  past,  and 


imperative. 

(a)  Pres.  Indie. 
I  see,  etc. 
id)  fe^e 
bn  ficftft 
er  fteljt 


Pres.  Subj. 
I  see,  etc. 
id)  fe^e 
bn  fcljcft 
er  felje 


(6)  Pastlnd. 
i  saw,  etc. 


Past  Subj. 
I  saw,  etc. 


bu 
erfaJ) 


bn  f  riftcft 
er  f  oftc 


356 


ttrir  fefjen 
fte  feljen 

NEW  GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

tmr  fetyen               ttnr  faljen 
ttjr  feljet                 %  fafjt 
fie  fetyen                fie  fa^en 

Imperatives. 
ftelj(e)  btt,  see  1                  PLU.  \  JJ 

unr  fallen 
tijr  faljet 
fie  f til) en 


fe^en  @ief  see ! 

(d)  The  Passive  Voice  of  f  el)  en  is  formed  exactly  like  that 
of  toben,  by  substituting  the  form  gefeljen  for  the  form  getobt 
in  the  paradigms  in  §  380. 

382.   Conjugation  of  attf  dttcjen,  to  begin^  a  separable  strong  verb. 


(a)  Pres.  Ind.  Pres.  Subj. 

I  begin,  etc.  I  begin,  etc. 

irf)  fange  an  iri)  fange  an 

bn  fangft  an  bit  f angeft  an 

er  fangt  an  er  fangct  an 

iuir  fangen  an  urn-  fangen  an 

tl)r  fangt  an  tljr  fanget  an 

fie  fangen  an  fie  fangen  an 


Perf.  Indie.  Perf.  Subj. 

I  have  begun,  etc.       I  have  begun,  etc. 
it!)  Ijabc  angefangen    iff)  ijabe  angefangen 


etc. 


etc. 


(6)  Past  Ind. 
I  began,  etc. 
irf)  fing  an 
bn  fingft  an 
er  fing  an 

nitr  fingen  an 
i^r  fingt  an 
fie  fingen  an 


Past  Subj. 
I  began,  etc. 

trf)  finge  an 
bn  fingeft  an 
er  finge  an 

ttrir  fingen  an 

iljr  fingct  an 
fie  fingen  an 


Past  Perf.  Indie.         Past  Perf.  Subj. 

I  had  begun,  etc.          I  had  begun,  etc. 

id)  Ijattc  angefangen    id)  Ijtitte  angefangen 


etc. 


etc. 


(c)        Put.  Indie.  Put.  Subj.  Pres.  Cond. 

I  shall  begin,  etc.          I  should  begin,  etc.  I  should  begin,  etc. 

id)  tuerbe  anfangen,  etc.   ic^  merbe  anfangen,  etc.   id)  tuitrbc  anfangen,  etc. 


SUMMARY   OF   INFLECTIONS.  357 

(d)  Fut.  Per/.  Indie.  Fut.  Per/  Subj. 

I  shall  have  begun,  etc.  I  should  have  begun,  etc. 

id)  merbe  angefangen  Ijafcen,  etc.  tdj  merbe  angefangen  tya&en,  etc. 

Perfect  Conditional. 

I  should  have  begun,  etc. 

id)  mitrbe  angefangen  tyafcen,  etc. 

(e)  Imperative.  Participles. 

SING,    fange  (bit)  an,  begin !  PRES.  anfangenb,  beginning. 

J  fanget  (ifjr)  an,  begin  i          PERF.  angefangen,  begun. 
.  (  f angen  Sie  an,  begin  I 

Infinitives. 
an(5n)fangen,  to  begin.         angefangen  (jit)  Ijafcen,  to  have  begun. 

(/)  The  Passive  Voice  of  separable  verbs  is  perfectly  regu- 
lar.    See  §  380. 
Synopsis  of  aufgefyalten  toerbett,  to  be  stopped. 

Pres.    id)  merbe  anf gefjaltcn  Per/.  id)  .Bin  anf gefjaften  morben 

Past,    ic^  mnrbe  anfgefjaften  Past  Per/,  ir^  mar  anfgetyaften  murben 

Fut.     id)  merbe  anfgeljalten  'Fut.  Per/.  i(^  merbe  anfgef)aften  mor- 
merben                                             ben  fein 

383.    Conjugation  of  ^erfcredjett,  to  break  (to  pieces),  an  insep- 
arable strong  verb. 

(a)  Pres.  Ind.        Pres.  Subj.  Per/.  Indie.  Per/.  Subj. 

I  break,  etc.        I  break,  etc.  I  have  broken,  etc.  I  have  broken,  etc. 

id)  ^er&redje  idj  ^erbredje  idj  Ijafcc  ^erftrodjen  tdj  fja&e  serbrodjett 

bn  ger&ridjft  bn  jerbreAeft  etc.  etc. 


mtr  • 

t^r  serfcredjt       il 
fie  ^erbrer^en      fte  serbredjen 


358 


NEW   GERMAN  GRAMMAR. 


(5)  Past  Ind. 
I  broke,  etc. 
idj  serBradj 
bit  5crlu*adjft 


I  broke,  etc. 
id)  serBradje 
bit  serBrddjeft 
er 


!  Per/  Indie.  Past  Perf.  Subj. 

I  had  broken,  etc.  I  had  broken,  etc. 

id)  fyatte  5erBrodjeit  id)  Jjotte  ^erBrodjeit 

etc.  etc. 


ton:  serBradjett 


djt       iljr 
fie  serBradjett     fie  §erBradjen 


(c)  Put.  Indie. 
I  shall  break,  etc. 
idj  ttierbe  serfcredjett 
bu  mirft  aerbre^en 

etc. 


Put.  Subj. 
I  should  break,  etc. 
idj  toerbe  serbredjen 
bit  tterbeft  ^crbtcdjcn 


etc. 


I  should  break,  etc. 
idj  tuitrbe  5crbred)en 
bit 

etc. 


(d)         Put.  Perf.  Indie. 

I  shall  have  broken,  etc. 
id)  wcrbe  ^crdrorijcn  t)abcu 
bit  ttiirft  aerBro^en  ^abenf  etc. 


Pw^.  Per/.  Subj. 
I  should  have  broken,  etc. 
idj 
bit  foerbeft 


etc. 


Perfect  Conditional. 
I  should  have  broken,  etc. 
id)  ttmrbe  *,crt)rorf)cn  I)abcu 
bit  ttiitrbeft  serbror^en  ^aBen,  etc. 


(e) 


Imperative. 

SING.    $erBridj  (bit)f  break  ! 
f  ^erBredjet  (i^r)f  break  i 
SerBrec^en  Sie,  break ! 


PLU. 


Participles. 

PRES.    $erBredjettbf  breaking. 
PERF.  3cr(ito^eitf  broken. 


(jit)  aerBret^ettfto  break. 


(511)  ^aBenf  to  have  broken. 


(/)  The  Passive  Voice  of  inseparable  verbs  is  perfectly 
regular :  id)  toerbe  gerbrod)en,  bu  ttrirft  jerbrocfyen,  er  tt)trb  jer^ 
broken,  etc.  See  §  380. 


SUMMAKY   OF   INFLECTIONS.  359 

384.    Conjugation  of  fid)  freuett,  to  be  glad,  a  reflexive  verb. 
(a)  Pres.  Ind.        Pres.  Sub}.  Perf.  Indie.  Perf.  Subj. 

I  ain  glad,  etc.  I  am  glad,  etc.  I  have  been  glad,  etc.  I  have  been  glad,  etc. 

id)  frcue  mid)  tdj  frcuc  mid)     id)  Ijafee  mid)  gefreut  idj  Ija&e  midj  gefreut 

bit  f  rcuft  bid)  bit  freucft  bid)    bit  I)  a  ft  bid)  bit  f)abcft  bid)     — 

er  freitt  fid)  er  freue  fidj       er  fjat  fid)  er  fjafce  fid) 

tuir  frciten  utt3  ttrir  frcitcn  uu3  ttrir  Ijafceit  wt3  —      wit  tya&ett  itu3  - 

iffr  freitt  cud)  i!jr  fteitct  eudj   i^r  ^abt  citr^     —      ttjr  ^aBct  eitr^    — 

fie  fmtett  fit^  fie  freiten  fic^     fie  Ijafcett  fir^     —      fie  fjafceu  fit^ 

(5)  Past  Indie.      Past  Subj.         Past  Perf.  Indie.         Past  Perf.  Subj. 

I  was  glad,  etc.  I  was  glad,  etc.  I  had  been  glad,  etc.  I  had  been  glad,  etc. 

idj  f  rente  mid)  id)  f  rente  mid)    id)  tjattc  mid)  gefreitt  id)  Ijtittc  mid)  gefreut 

bit  f reitteft  bid)  bit  freuteft  bid)  bit  Ijatteft  bid)   -         bit  t)iitrcft  bid) 

er  freitte  fi(^  er  freutc  fic^      er  Ijatte  fir^      —      er  ^atte  fidj 

wir  freitten  itn^  ttiir  fretttett  itn^  tuir  fatten  nn§  —      ttiir  fatten  itit!§  - 

iljr  freittet  eit(^  i^r  freittet  end)  t^r  ^attet  eu^f  -       iljr  pttet  eiif^   — 

fie  freittett  fir^  fie  freitten  fit^    fie  fatten  fi^    —      fie  Jjatten  fir^ 

(c)  Future  Indicative.  Future  Subjunctive. 
I  shall  be  glad,  etc.                                 I  should  be  glad,  etc. 

id)  merbc  midj  freiten  id)  merbc  mid)  frciten 

bit  mirft  btr^  freiten  bit  toerbeft  bi^i  freitett 

er  ttiirb  fid)  freiten  er  roerbe  fit^  freitett 

ttrir  werbett  utt^  freitett  ttrir  ttierbew  tttt§  fre«ett 

i^r  toerbet  eit^  freiten  i^r  toerbet  end)  frettett 

fte  merbett  fit^  freitett  fie  foerbett  fir^  frewew 

(d)  Fut.  Perf.  Indie.  Fut.  Perf.  Subj. 

I  shall  have  been  glad,  etc.  I  should  have  been  glad,  etc. 

id)  tuerbc  midj  gefreut  Ijalicn  id)  merbc  mid)  gefreut  I)alien 

bit  ttrirft  bi^  gefreut  ^aBeit  b«  toerbeft  bir^  gefreut 

er  ttrirb  fi^  gefreut  §aBeu  er  toerbe  fi^  gefreut 

wir  merbett  uw§  gefreut  ^abeu  mir  roerbett  uu§  gefreut 

i^r  merbet  eut^  gefreut  ^abeit  i^r  roerbet  eu^  gefreut 

fte  uicrbeu  fid)  gefreut  i)abcn  fie  merben  fid)  gefreut  ftabcn 


360 


NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 


(e)      Present  Conditional. 
I  should  be  glad,  etc. 
idj  toiirbe  midj  frcucit 
bit  tuitrbeft  bt(ty  frenen 
.  er  roitrbe  fid)  frenen 

iutr  luitrben  m§  frenen 
iljr  luiirbet  end)  frenen 
fie  luitrben  fid)  frenen 

(/)  Imperative. 

SING,    frene  bid),  rejoice  ! 
r  frent  end),  rejoice  ! 


Perfect  Conditional. 
I  should  have  been  glad,  etc. 
id)  luitrbe  mid)  gefrent  I)abcu 
bit  tuitrbcft  biff)  gefrettt  1)  a  tie  it 
cr  luitrbc  ft^  gefrettt 


iutr  luiivbcn  un3  gefreut  ijabcu 
t^t  ttiitrbct  ettdj  gcfrcttt  f)abett 
fie  tuitrben  fid)  gefreut 


PLU. 


Participles. 

PRES.    fid)  freitettb,  rejoicing. 
PERF.     fir^  gefrcttt,  rejoiced. 


A  ftetten  @te  fid),  rejoice  ! 


ftettett,  to  be  glad. 


Infinitives. 

fir^j  gefreitt  (ju)  ^abettf  to  have  been  glad. 


385. 


The  Modal  Auxiliaries. 


(a) 

Present  Indicative  of  Mod 

I  may, 

I  can, 

I  like, 

I  must, 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

id)  barf 
bn  barfft 
er  barf 

id)  fann 
bit  fannft 
er  fann 

id)  mag 
bit  magft 
er  mag 

id)  nutf? 
bit  muf;t 
er  mnf? 

iutr  bitrfen 
tljr  bitrft 
fie  bitrfen 

luir  fbnnen 
iljr  fbnttt 
fie  fbnnen 

iutr  mogen 
tljr  mbgt 
fie  mogen 

luir  mitffen 
tffr  mnfct 
fie  mitffen 

(b)                                       Present  Subjunctive. 

I  may, 

I  can, 

I  like, 

I  must, 

etc. 

etc. 

etc 

etc. 

id)  bitrfe 
bit  bitrfeft 
er  biirfe 

irf)  fbnne 
bn  f  bmteft 
er  fonne 

id)  mbge 
bn  mbgeft 
er  mbge 

id)  mitffe 
bn  mitffeft 
er  mitffe 

I  am  to, 
etc. 

I  want  to, 
etc. 

id)  full 
bn  f  olift 
er  foil 

id)  will 
bn  willft 
er  Witt 

iutr  fotten 
i^r  fottt 
fie  follen 

Wtr  wollen 
tljr  wollt 
fie  wollen 

I  am  to, 
etc. 

I  want  to, 
etc. 

id)  folle 
bn  fotteft 
er  folle 

id)  wolle 
bn  wolleft 
er  wotte 

SUMMARY   OF   INFLECTIONS. 


361 


mir  biitfcn  mir  fiwueu    mir  mogeu    mir  miiffctt    mir  folleit   mir  mofleu 
iljr  bitrfet     ifyr  louuet     iljr  mb'get     iljr  utitffet     iljr  foflet     ifyr  mollet 
fie  bitrfeu     fie  louueu     fie  mogeu     fie  mitffeu     fie  folleu     fie  motfeu 


I  wanted 
to,  etc. 
id)  toollte 
bu  nioUteft 


I  was  to, 

etc. 

id)  folfte 
bu  foUteft 
er  f  ullte 

mir  follten  ttir  uiuUtcn 
i^r  fotttet    i^r  uujlltet 
fie  follten    fie  l 


(c)  Past  Indicative. 

I  was  per-  I  was  able,  I  liked  to,      I  had  to, 
mitted,  etc.         etc.  etc.  etc. 

id)  burfte  id)  fonute  iff)  murijrc     irl)  mufuc 

bu  burfteft  bu  louttteft  bu  morijteft   bu  muf;teft 

er  burfte  er  louute  er  morfjte      er  mufjte 

mir  burfteu  mir  lonuteu  mir  morijtcu  mir  mufncu 
ifjr  burftet  iljr  fouutet  iljr  modjtet  iljr  mufftet 
fie  burfteu  fie  louutett  fie  utodjteu  fie  muftteu 

(d)  Past  Subjunctive. 

I  might,        I  could,  I  should    I  should  have  I  ought  to,     I  should 

etc.  etc.    ,        like,  etc.          to,  etc.  etc.       want  to,  etc. 

id)  burfte  id)  fouute  id)  miirijte     id)  mitf;te  id)  follte      id)  mollte 

bu  burfteft  bu  fonuteft  bu  morijteft   bu  miifucft  bu  follteft    bu  mulltcft 

er  bitrfte  er  fouute  er  modjte      er  utii  fue  er  fottte      er  mollte 

mir  bitrfteu  mir  ffluuteu  mir  moc^teu  mir  ittitfftcu  mir  follteu  mir  mollteu 
i^r  bitrftet   t^r  fouutet    tljr  mot^tet  i^r  mit^tet    i^r  folltet    i^r  molltet 
fie  bitrfteu    fie  fouuteu    fie  mo^teu  fie  miifjteu    fie  follteu    fie  molltett 

(e)  The  Future  Indicative  of  all  modals  is  regular :  id)  toerbe 
bitrf enr  I  shall  be  permitted ;  bu  nrirft  bitrfen,  etc. 

The  Future  Subjunctive  of  all  modals  is  regular:  id)  toerbe 
bitrfen,  I  shall  be  permitted ;  bu  toerbeft  bitrfen,  etc. 

(/)  The  Perfect,  Past  Perfect^  and  Future  Perfect  Indicatives 
without  a  dependent  infinitive  are  regular :  id)  fyabe  geburft ; 
ic^  ^atte  gefonnt ;  id)  toerbe  gemod^t  fjaben,  etc. 

The  Perfect,  Past  Perfect,  and  Future  Perfect  Subjunctives  with- 
out  a  dependent  infinitive  are  regular :  id)  fyabe  geburft,  bu  Ijabeft 
geburft;  id)  fjatte  gefonnt ;  id)  toerbe  gemoc^t  Ijaben,  etc. 


362  NEW   GERMAN  GRAMMAR. 

(#)  Perfect  Tenses  with  a  dependent  infinitive  have  the  past 
participle  with  infinitive  form  ("  two  infinitives  ")  : 

(h)         Perfect  Indicative.  Perfect  Subjunctive. 

I  was  permitted  to  go,  etc.  I  have  been  permitted  to  go,  etc. 

tcfy  ftabe  gdjett  biirfen  id)  Ijafee  gefjett  biirfen 

bu  fjaft  gdjen  biirfen,  etc.  bit  Ijafceft  ge^cn  biirfcnf  etc. 

(i)      Past  Perfect  Indicative.  Past  Perfect  Subjunctive. 

I  had  been  permitted  to  go,  etc.  I  might  have  been  permitted  to  go. 
trf)  ftattc  geljett  bitrfeu  id)  fjatte  gdjett  biirfen 

bu  fjatteft  geljett  bitrfcn,  etc.  bu  ^atteft  getyen  bilrfcn,  etc. 

(f)  The  Future  Perfect  Indicative  and  Subjunctive  of  modals 
are  regular  but  seldom  used. 

(k)  Imperative.  Participles. 

Wanting,  except  PRES.    biiffettb,  fiittttcnb,  etc. 

which  is  rare.  PERF.    gebutft  or  biirfen,  etc. 


Infinitives. 
biirfett,  lijttnctt,  etc.  gcburft  (p)  ^a^enf  gefonnt(5tt)  ^aBcnf  etc. 


PRONUNCIATION.  363 

PRONUNCIATION. 

Introduction. 

386.  A   German   Accent.  —  Most  of  us  can  imitate  German 
brogue  in  telling  a  dialect  story.    We  say :  "  Veil,  vot  iss  it  ?  " 
and  so  on.     To  speak  in  this  way  we  throw  our  organs  of 
speech  by  force  into  the  positions  which  those  of  a  German 
occupy  naturally.     This  is  the  basis  of  what  we  call  a  German 
accent. 

The  easiest  way  to  approach  a  good  German  accent  is  to 
make  believe  we  are  telling  a  German  dialect  story,  and  to  do 
this  when  we  read  or  speak  German.  We  must  also  get  rid 
of  all  false  modesty,  for  trying  to  mimic  German  sounds  is  not 
half  so  ridiculous  as  giving  German  letters  their  American 
sounds. 

387.  The    Main    Difficulties.  —  In    general,   those    German 
sounds  for  which  English  has  nothing  to  correspond  —  like  cfj, 
8,  and  ii  —  are  well  mastered  by  American  pupils.     The  chief 
difficulties  are  with  sounds  like  I,  r,  and  long  e,  because  we 
wrongly  assume  that  these  letters  represent  English  sounds. 
Pupils  prepare  themselves  for  the  difficulties  offered  by  such 
words  as  bd§  33urf),  Me  2ftitlje,  or  frfjott,  and  take  pain's  in  pro- 
nouncing them.     The  result  is  that  they  are  pronounced  much 
nearer  the  true  German  way  than  words  which  are  thought  to 
offer  no  difficulty,  like  alfe,  teljren,  or  Me  ©eete. 

The  things  that  are  most  distinctively  German  —  neglect  of 
which  mar^s  an  American  most  clearly  when  he  speaks  with  a 
German  —  are:  (1)  pure  voivel  sounds,  especially  0  and  e,  §§ 
388  ff. ;  (2)  the  diphthongs,  §§  391-392  ;  (3)  the  glottal  catch,  §§ 
393  ff, ;  (4)  the  consonants  I  and  r,  §§  400-401;  (5)  .length 


364 


NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 


FIG.  1. — The  Tongue-position  for  i. 


Hard  Palate    V^      j  Passage  to  Nose 

Soft  Palate 
Uvula 


FIG.  2.  — The  Tongue -position  for 


of  consonants,  §  402 ; 
and  (6)  the  ending  en  in 
certain  special  cases, 
§404. 

Vowels. 

388.   Quality  of  Sound. 

—  American  vowels  are 
usually  slurred,  but  Ger- 
man vowels  are  simple, 
pure.  There  is  almost 
always  an  tt/i-sound  after 
an  American  vowel. 
This  is  caused  by  the 
moving  of  the  tongue  or 
the  lower  jaw.  We  pro- 
nounce o  as  o-oo,  while  a 
German  keeps  tongue, 
lips,  and  lower  jaw  in 
exactly  the  same  position 
throughout  the  entire 
sound.  We  pronounce 
arty  school,  rose,  a-ert, 
schoo-ul,  ro-ooze,  where  a 
German  makes  pure,  sim- 
ple sounds  of  Me  2lrt,  Me 
@d)ttle,  bie  SRofe.  The 
English  sounds  are  of 
course  exaggerated  here, 
the  better  to  illustrate 
the  tendency.  But  the 


PRONUNCIATION. 


365 


Germans  keep   the  organs   of  speech  in   the   same   position 
throughout  each  sound. 

389.  Tongue  and  Lip  Position.  —  In  order  not  to  move  tongue, 
lips,  and  lower  jaw  dur- 
ing the  sound  of  German 
vowels,  it  is  important 
to  know  the  exact  posi- 
tion of  these  parts  for 
the  making  of  the  vari- 
ous vowel  sounds. 

Articulate  carefully 
the  vowels  in  feed,  far, 
food.  For  the  vowel 
sound  in  feed  the  lips 
are  drawn  back  as  in  a 
smile ;  in  far  they  are  in 
their  normal  position  of 
rest ;  in  food  they  are 


Passage  to  Nose 
Soft  Palate 
Uvula 


FIG.  3.  —  The  Tongue-position  for  tt» 


(or  should  be)  thrust  for- 
ward as  in  a  pout.  And 
the  tongue  is  raised  and  thrown  forward  in  feed,  is  normal  in 
far,  and  is  drawn  back  in  food.  These  positions  are  illustrated 
in  Figures  1,  2,  and  3. 
The  German  vowel 
sounds  form  a  sequence 
t,  e,  a,  O,  U,  beginning 
with  a  sound  in  the  front 
of  the  mouth  and  running 
to  the  back.  Notice  the 


FIG.  4.  —  Diagram  of  the  Tongue-position 
for  German  vowels. 


position  of  the  tongue  for  the  series  as  graphically  shown  in 
Figure  4.     It  must  not  change  position  during  each  sound. 


366  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

A  good  way  to  keep  the  tongue  steady  is  to  rest  its  tip  con- 
sciously against  the  base  of  the  lower  teeth.  A  good  way  to 
keep  the  lower  jaw  steady  is  to  hold  a  lead  pencil  between  the 
teeth. 

390.  Pronunciation. — Except  in  the  case  of  long  e,  German 
vowels  offer  little  difficulty  if  we  remember  not  to  move  tongue 
or  lower  jaw  during  vowel  sounds. 

German  e  has  three  sounds :  short,  obscure,  and  long. 
When  short  it  is  like  e  in  met,  when  obscure  like  e  in  golden. 
But  long  e  makes  trouble,  as  it  has  no  English  equivalent.  It 
is  between  a  in  mate  and  ee  in  meet.  It  is  made  with  the  teeth 
almost  together,  the  lips  drawn  back  as  in  a  smile,  and  the 
tongue  almost  as  high  as  in  the  i-position  (Fig.  1).  It  is  a 
pure  sound  and  has  not  the  slur  usually  following  English 
long  a,  as  when  we  pronounce  name,  na-im.  Pronounce  @l)re 
(not  2il)re),  @eele  (not  (Sale),  mefyren  (not  2ftal)ren),  fefje  (not 
fftfe). 

Note.  For  the  sound  of  e  in  the  unaccented  syllable  er,  see  r,  §  401, 
Note. 

Diphthongs. 

391.  Pronunciation.  —  Properly  speaking,  a  diphthong  is  a 
double  sound.    But  we  often  speak  of  two  vowels  when  written 
together,  as  a  diphthong,  even  when  they  are  spoken  as  a  single 
sound :  each,  heart,  heard.    Below  are  treated  the  three  genuine 
diphthong  sounds :  at  (et),  au,  and  cu  (8tt).     They  differ  from 
the  English  chiefly  in  having  the  main  emphasis  on  the  second 
sound  where  English  has  it  on  the  first.     But  there  are  also 
differences  in  the  quality  of  the  sounds. 

(1)  The  diphthongs  et  and  at  are  pronounced  exactly  alike  in 
German.  Their  sound  is  nearly  like  that  of  English  i  in  mine, 


PRONUNCIATION.  367 

but  English  long  i  is  a  long  aft-sound  followed  by  a  short  ee- 
sound  (ti'-ee),  while  German  at  (ct)  is  a  short  a-sound  followed 
by  a  longer  e-sound  (a=ee').  In  German,  after  the  short  a-sound, 
the  tongue  does  not  bother  to  climb  clear  to  the  t-position 
(Fig.  1),  but  stays  for  the  longer  part  of  the  diphthong  in  the 
c-position  (Fig.  4) :  J)a3  @i,  tneitt,  ber  gain,  Me  @aite. 

(2)  The  diphthong  ait  is  nearly  like  English  ow  in  how,  but 
English  ow  is  a  long  aft-sound  followed  by  a  short  w-sound  (a' do), 
while  German  att  is  a  short  a-sound  followed  by  a  longer  a-sound 
(a-aa')«     In  German,  after  the  short  a-sound,  the  tongue  does 
not  bother  to  go  way  back  into  the  tt-position  (Fig.  3),  but  stays 
for  the  longer  part  of  the  diphthong  in  the  a-position  (Fig.  4) : 
5)a$  £au$,  ber  9toub,  ba$  2ftaitt,  au$. 

(3)  The  diphthongs  eu  and  Stt  are  historically  the  same  sound 
and  are  pronounced  exactly  alike  in  German.     Their  sound  is 
nearly  like  that  of  English  oy  in  boy,  but  English  oy  is  a  short 
aw-sound  followed  by  a  shorter  2-sound  (aw-i)     German  ctt  (Sit) 
is  a  short  a-sound  followed  by  a  longer  3-sound  (0=88').     In 
German,  after  the  short  a-sound  the  lips  keep  the  same  rounded 
position  and  the  tongue  does  not  bother  to  climb  clear  to  the 
t-position  (Fig.  1),  but  stays  for  the  longer  part  of  the  diph- 
thong in  the  e-position  (Fig.  4) :  £)ie  geute,  fyeitte,  bie  §aute, 
Me  ©ante. 

392.  Summary  of  the  Differences.  —  G  erman  diphthong-sounds 
have  the  emphasis  on  the  second  part,  where  English  empha- 
sizes the  first  element.  The  second  (longer)  element  of  the 
German  diphthong  is  not  so  different  from  the  first  (short) 
element  as  in  English.  In  other  words,  both  the  lip-  and  the 
tongue-positions  for  the  second  element  of  the  German  diph- 
thong are  nearer  those  of  the  first  element,  than  in  English. 


368  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

German  diphthongs  are  also  of  shorter  duration  than  English. 
They  are  not  so  long  as  a  long  vowel. 

If  we  want  to  emphasize  a  claim  to  something  we  say: 
"  That's  mine "  (mdddd'eeri),  where  a  German  says :  ,,£)a$  tft 
tnettt"  (tnaeetl').  When  we  are  hurt,  we  say:  "Ow"  (aaaa'oo), 
but  a  German  says:  ,,2lu"  (aoo').  We  also  call:  "Ship  ahoy" 
(aw'i),  but  a  German  in  calling  out  the  word  for  hay,  says : 
,,bd$  §eu"  (8oof).  The  best  way  to  say  this  right  is  to  think 
mainly  of  the  second  sound ;  the  first  will  take  care  of  itself. 

The  Glottal  Catch. 

393.  The  "Catch"   Proper.  —  Germans  usually  speak  with 
the  muscles  of  the  chest  and  diaphragm  tense.     They  seem  to 
be  holding  their  breath,  as  it  were;  there  is  always  pressure 
upon  the  bellows  which  furnishes  the  motive-power  for  speech. 
This  tenseness  or  pressure  accounts  not  only  for  the  staccato 
effect  and  the  impression  of  vigor  and  speed  given  by  most 
spoken  German,  but  also  for  the  greater  explosiveness  of  many 
German  sounds.     It  is  also  the  foundation  of  what  is  called 
the  glottal  catch. 

When  we  say,  "  pooh ! "  the  breath  bursts  through  our  lips 
in  a  little  explosion.  If  we  close  our  vocal  cords,  as  we  do 
our  lips  in  "  pooh,"  and  then  let  the  breath  pop  through  them, 
we  have  what  is  known  as  a  "  glottal  catch."  There  is  noth- 
ing like  it  in  English  ;  the  nearest  approach  is  when  we  whis- 
per "uh-uh"  for  "  no."  It  is  a  little,  jerky  cough. 

394.  Use  of  the  Catch. — In  English  conversation  we  carry 
over  a  consonant  to  a  following  vowel,  even  when  they  are  in 
separate  words :  not  at  all,  odd  or  even.    But  a  German  comes 
to  a  full  stop  —  closing  his  vocal  cords  —  before  words  or  syl- 


PRONUNCIATION.  369 

lables  beginning  with  a  vowel.  The  sound  of  the  vowel  is 
then  preceded  by  the  little,  jerky  cough  —  the  "  glottal  catch  " 
—  caused  by  the  sudden  bursting  open  of  the  vocal  cords: 
odd  |  or  |  even,  not  \  at  \  all. 

Pronounce  the  following  words,  making  a  complete  closure 
of  the  vocal  cords  after  the  prefix,  and  beginning  the  basic 
word  with  a  glottal  catch:  ettt|el)ren,  er|mnent,  tnt£|acf)ten, 
t)er|emen,  ur|att  Also:  (g$  |  ift  |  em  |  auJ3er|orbentttd)  |  unlar- 
tige$  Smb. 

When  in  English  a  vowel  sound  precedes  an  initial  vowel  — 
whether  this  begins  a  word  or  a  syllable  —  we  join  the  two  by 
the  sound  of  iv  (after  o  or  u)  or  of  y  (after  e  or  i).  In  rapid 
speech,  throughout,  see  it,  I  am  are  pronounced  through-wout, 
see  yit,  I  yam.  But  a  German  comes  to  a  full  stop  before  the 
initial  vowel  sound,  which  he  pronounces  with  a  glottal  catch : 
through  \  out,  see  \  it,  I  \  am. 

Pronounce  the  following  words,  making  a  complete  closure 
of  the  vocal  cords  after  the  prefix,  and  beginning  the  basic 
word  with  a  glottal  catch:  &e|ob|adjten,  be|acf)tett,  ge|enbet, 
ge|arbeitet  Also:  Qfy  fyabe  |  cine  |  un|angenef)tne  |  2lnttt)ort 
|  erfjatten. 

395.  Rule  for  the  Glottal  Catch.  —  In  very  rapid  speech, 
especially  in  unaccented  words  and  syllables,  the  glottal  catch 
is  sometimes  omitted.  But  as  such  fluency  is  not  acquired 
till  after  years  of  practice,  it  is  best  to  follow  the  rule.  Except 
after  the  participles  mentioned  below,  a  glottal  catch  should  pre- 
cede every  word  or  root  syllable  beginning  with  a  vowel. 

It  sounds  queer  to  us  when  a  German  speaks  English  with  a 
glottal  catch,  but  no  queerer  than  it  sounds  to  a  German  when 
we  say :  be-yo-bachten,  be-yachten,  ge-yendet,  and  ge-yarbeitet 
instead  of  be|o&|adjten,  be|arf)ten,  gejenbet,  and  ge|arbeitet. 


370  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

Much  of  the  difficulty  Germans  have  in  understanding  our 
pronunciation  of  their  language  is  due  to  our  omission  of  the 
glottal  catch.  An  illustration  of  this  is  the  fact  that  an  Amer- 
ican was  once  obliged  to  pronounce  the  word  ,,erittttem"  five 
times  before  her  German  teacher  could  tell  what  word  she  was 
trying  to  say.  The  difficulty  lay  partly  in  the  drawling  of  the 
American  r,  partly  in  the  omission  of  the  glottal  catch  after 
the  first  et+  The  American  said  e-rinnurn  instead  of  er|tnttenu 

396.  Omission  of  the  Glottal  Catch.  —  In  words  compounded 
with  the  particles  I)ter,  f)ht,  tjer,  bar,  ttar,  toor,  Dor,  ttrieber,  and 
after  H,  there  is  no  glottal  catch.     Thus  f)incm$,  fyereitt,  barwt* 
ter,  tDarutn,  toorcm,  fcoriiber,  ftrieberutn,  fcolfenben,  are  easy  for 
Americans,  as  they  are  pronounced  without  the  glottal  catch. 

Consonants. 

397.  Dissimilar    Consonants.  —  The  consonants  which  have 
sounds  not  found  in  English  are  dj,  (J,  I,  and  r*     Naturally 
they  make  the  most  trouble  for  Americans. 

398.  The  Sound  of  rfj.  —  (1)  When  we  pronounce  d)  after  af 
Of  Uf  or  cut,  the  back  of  the  tongue  is  raised  and  drawn  back 
toward  the  soft  palate  so  that  a  scraping  sound  is  made  as  the 
breath  is  forced  through.    It  is  like  the  Scotch  ch  in  loch.    The 
nearest  equivalent  English  sound  is  the  rasping  we  sometimes 
make  at  the  end  of  a  long  yawn,  or  the  sound  some  people  utter 
when  breathing  on   their   eye-glasses   before   cleaning  them. 
Pronounce :  acl),  bd§  33urf),  bd$  8orf),  aud^» 

(2)  After  all  other  sounds  —  that  is,  after  consonants  or  e,  t, 
CUf  or  the  umlauted  vowels  —  dj  has  a  sound  resembling  the 
noise  made  by  a  spitting  cat.  Raise  the  tongue  to  the  position 
for  long  t  (Fig.  1)  and  holding  it  there,  stop  the  vowel  sound 


PRONUNCIATION.  371 


and   breathe   out.     Pronounce:   bd§  ^Pecf),  bd§  8t(f)t,  end),  bte 
£i)d)ter,  bte  ©cicfyer,  bte  Jitdjer,  bte  ©cfjlaudje,  toetd),  mand), 

The  guttural  dj-sound,  made  in  the  back  of  the  mouth,  goes 
naturally  with  the  vowels  af  0,  and  u,  which  are  formed  in 
the  middle  or  back  of  the  mouth  (see  Fig.  4).  The  palatal 
d)-sound,  made  against  the  front  part  of  the  palate,  goes  natu- 
rally with  the  vowels  formed  in  the  front  of  the  mouth  (Fig.  4) 
or  with  I  or  tt,  both  of  which  are  articulated  with  the  tongue 
against  the  front  of  the  palate  (Fig.  5). 

(3)  At  the  beginning  of  a  syllable,  d)  is  pronounced  as  in  (2) 
before  c  and  t:  Sljemte,  gljhtCU  Before  other  vowels  or  con- 
sonants it  is  pronounced  like  t  :  £l)or,  (Sfyrtft,  Efyarafter,  gud:)3, 
toacfyfen. 

399.  The  Sounds  of  g.  —  (1)  German  g  at  the  beginning  of 
a  word  or  syllable  is  like  English  g  in  go.     (2)  At  the  end  of 
a  syllable  it  is  like  Jc  except  (3)  in  the  ending  tg,  when  it  is 
like  dj  in  id). 

Thus  dj  and  g  in  rtdjttg  are  pronounced  alike.  But  as  soon 
as  inflectional  endings  are  added  to  final  g,  so  that  g  becomes 
the  first  letter  in  the  following  syllable,  g  is  pronounced  like  g 
in  go.  Pronounce  :  (1)  gut,  grim  ;  (2)  ber  Jag,  ber  @teg  ; 
(3)  rufytg,  rtdjttg  ;  but  (1)  bte  £age,  Me  <2tege,  ntljtger,  rt^ttger. 

Note.  'There  is  less  uniformity  in  Germany  for  the  pronunciation  of 
g  than  for  any  other  letter.  Probably  half  the  people  in  Germany  pro- 
nounce final  g  like  final  d),  as  in  §  398,  1  or  2.  But  the  best  authorities 
are  now  agreed  upon  the  pronunciation  as  given  above. 

400.  The  Sound  of   I,  —  German  I  is  pronounced  with  the 
tongue  pressed  against  the  front  of  the  palate,  like  III  in  million 
(Fig.  5).     The  sound  of  y  in  year  seems  interwoven  with  the 
I,  which  is  made  in  the  very  front  of  the  mouth,  not  at  the 


372 


NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 


back  as  English  Z.  One  might  say  that  German  I  has  an 
ee-shade  (Fig.  1),  while  English  I  has  an  oo-shade  (Fig.  3). 
Pronounce :  gtltt  gefjmcnm,  atte§,  ttll. 

401.  The  German  r+  —  There  are  two  distinct  German  r's ; 
the  tongue-tip  (trilled)  r,  and  the  uvula  (rolled)  r*  Both  differ 
from  the  American  slurred  r  of  the  East  and  South,  and  from 

the    drawled    r    of    the 
West. 

(1)  In    the    trilled    r 
(Fig.  6),    the   tongue-tip 
is   vibrated    against   the 
palate   just    behind    the 
front  teeth.     This  is  not 
only   the   easier   of    the 
two,   but   it   is   the   one 
approved  on  the  stage. 

(2)  The  uvula  or  throat 
t  (Fig.  7)  is  made  by  the 
vibrations  of  the  uvula 
upon    the    back    of    the 
tongue.     It  is  more  dis- 
tinctively   German,    but 
it  is  usually  difficult  for 

Americans  to  acquire.  In  a  way  it  resembles  a  gargle,  and  it 
may  best  be  developed  from  the  guttural  dj,  §  398,  1.  In  fact, 
many  Germans  pronounce  r  as  d)  when  speaking  rapidly ;  they 
give  SJJartlja  and  3J?agba  almost  the  same  sound.  The  physio- 
logical explanation  of  this  is  that  in  very  rapid  speech  the 
uvula  fails  to  vibrate  when  the  breath  is  forced  out,  thus 
making  only  the  scraping  sound  of  d),  §  398,  1.  For  this 


FIG.  5.  — The  Tongue-position  for  I, 


PRONUNCIATION. 


373 


FIG.  6. — The  Tongue-position  for  trilled  r. 


uvula  r  the  front  of  the 
tongue  must  never  be 
raised  as  in  the  drawled 
r  of  the  West.  The 
back  of  the  tongue  is 
raised  so  that  the  uvula 
is  forced  to  vibrate  when 
we  breathe  out  (see 
Fig.  7). 

Note.  In  conversation 
the  r  in  the  unaccented  syl- 
lable er  is  not  rolled.  The 
uvula  touches  the  tongue  just 
once,  but  does  not  vibrate. 
This  makes  a  very  short  aw- 
sound,  akin  to  o  in  short. 
Thus  £)er  SBater  fyat  e8  tter* 
geffen  is  spoken  almost  like 
Daw  fahtaw  hat  es  fawges- 
sen.  The  sound  here  repre- 
sented by  aw  is  as  short  as  it 
can  possibly  be.  It  is  not  at 
all  like  the  aw  in  "  See,  saw, 
Marjorie  Daw,"  but  on  the 
contrary  so  brief  as  to  be 
practically  only  a  grace 
note. 

402.  Length  of  Conso- 
nants. -  -  German  has 
long  and  short  conso- 
nants as  well  as  long 
and  short  vowels  A 
long  vowel  followed  by  FIG.  7.— The  Tongue-position  for  uvular. 


374  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

a  short  consonant  offers  no  difficulty,  as  that  is  a  frequent 
combination  in  English.  But  care  must  be  taken  to  prolong 
a  consonant  following  a  short  vowel.  Remember  to  hold 
tongue  and  jaw  still  during  a  German  vowel-sound  and  to 
jump  without  any  slur  from  a  vowel  to  the  following  conso- 
nant, especially  when  the  vowel  is  short.  Compare  ber  Stinig 
and  Itinnen.  Pronounce  $fl  (j  5  tf  nig  and  Ion  nun  nen.  In  the 
same  way  pronounce  Me  @d)ule  and  Me  ©cfjutb  (@C^U  U  U  U  Ie 
and  ©djutlttb),  Also  ber  £)fen  and  offen  (£)  o  o  o  fen  and 
off  f  ffen).  Be  careful  always  to  jump  without  any  slur  from 
the  vowel  to  the  consonant.  Do  not  say  So|w/i|ntg,  lt)|^|nnen, 


This  is  one  of  the  most  characteristic  features  of  German  and 
one  of  the  easiest  to  learn.  Just  remember  to  put  on  extra 
lung-pressure  for  short  vowels  and  then  to  hold  the  following 
consonant.  If  we  admire  something  very  much,  we  say  it  is 
"wo  o  o  nderful";  a  German  says  ,,ttnmnnbert>ott."  The  best 
English  illustration  of  this  is  the  way  ng  is  prolonged  in  the 
American  slang  expression  :  "  Stung  !  "  This  length  of  conso- 
nants is  especially  easy  to  get  with  lt  m,  and  n»  Try  these  first. 

A  few  good  pairs  with  which  to  practice  these  short  vowels 
followed  by  long  consonants  and  to  compare  them  with  similar 
long  vowels  followed  by  short  consonants  are  :  bent  ©ofyne,  Me 
©onne;  fufylen,  fittlen;  lomtfdj,  fontnten;  ber  @tcd)f,  ber  Statf  ; 
tt)of)ltool(en;  ber  33attfaa(;  §al(e  an  ber  (Saale;  ben  ©djafen, 
fcfjaffen;  lam,  ber  $antnt;  tafym,  ba$  Catrnn. 

Pitch. 

403.  Change  of  Pitch.  —  In  English  words  the  vowel  carries 
the  changes  in  pitch.  When  we  say  "  Oh,  come  on  "  in  a  plead- 
ing tone,  the  o  in  on  slides  several  notes  down  the  scale.  If 


PRONUNCIATION.  375 

a  German  were  to  use  the  same  expression  ,,®omm  an"  in  the 
same  tone,  the  n  in  an  would  carry  this  change  in  pitch. 
Graphically  this  may  be  represented  by  English  "Come  cT\  "  ; 

German  ,,$omm  ari"X"  In  German  any  change  in  pitch  is  car- 
ried by  the  long  element  in  the  syllable,  whether  vowel  or  con- 
sonant. Of  course,  to  carry  change  in  pitch  a  consonant  must 
be  voiced,  that  is,  the  vocal  cords  must  vibrate  when  it  is  pro- 
nounced. Thus  change  of  pitch  cannot  be  carried  by  mutes 
like  p,  b,  t 

Assimilation. 

404.  The  Ending  en*  —  Much  of  the  speed  with  which  Ger- 
mans speak  is  due  to  their  clipping  of  the  ending  en*  An  enor- 
mous number  of  German  words  end  in  en,  the  sound  of  which 
is  shortened  in  various  ways.  In  conversation  the  e  in  en  is 
always  silent.  The  n  then  undergoes  various  changes,  called 
assimilation,  depending  upon  the  preceding  or  following  conso- 
nant. Chief  of  these  are  :  (1)  next  to  6  or  p ;  (2)  after  g ;  and 
(3)  after  n  or  ng, 

(1)  When  the  ending  en  comes  just  after  or  just  before  a  6 
or  a  p  sound,  it  is  pronounced  like  m.  The  sentence  2Btr  fyaben 
eben  fieben  Snaben  gefeljen  is  pronounced,  2Btr  fyabm  ebtn  fiebm 
Ihtabm  gefefyn.  (Sfdjenbadj  and  SBoIfenbiittet  are  pronounced 
gfdjmbarf)  and  SBoIfmbiitteL1 

iThis  statement  is  at  variance  with  German  pronunciation  as  formally 
taught,  but  it  is  consistent  with  the  practice,  even  of  teachers.  The  author 
once  heard  a  professor  in  the  University  of  Berlin  —  a  man  well  known  in 
America — say  in  a  lecture  :  2>te  (gnbimg  ,en'  tnufc  immer  fcolln  Son  Jja&tn! 
Advocates  of  stage  German  insist  that  en  should  have  its  regular  sound,  but 
even  on  the  stage  b  and  £  usually  attract  n  to  nt.  For  instance,  ^ie^enbrtn! 
(in  Freytag's  "SQurntiiiften")  is  never  pronounced  according  to  the  stage  rules. 


376  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

If  we  notice  carefully  how  b  and  p  come  to  attract  it  to  m, 
we  shall  see  that  it  is  all  done  by  the  soft  palate.  Tor  the 
sounds  6  and  p  the  lips  are  closed  and  the  soft  palate  cuts  off 
the  nasal  passage.  For  the  following  it-sound  it  is  much  easier 
to  keep  the  lips  closed  and  simply  to  let  the  soft  palate  down, 
thus  opening  the  nasal  passage,  than  it  is  :to  open  the  lips  and 
raise  the  tongue  to  the  n-position.  This  opening  of  the  nasal 
passage  gives  a  nasal  sound,  and  the  only  nasal  sound  possible 
with  the  lips  closed  is  m. 

(2)  A   similar  process  to  that  just  described  takes  place 
when  en  follows  g.     In  the  sound  of  g  in  gefyen  (§  399,  1)  the 
nasal  passage  is  closed  by  the  soft  palate,  and  it  is  easier  to 
lower  the  soft  palate  than  to  raise  the  tongue  to  the  n-position. 
The  result  is  that  the  following  it-sound  becomes  nasal  (like  ng 
in  sing).    2Bir  tragen  Ijolje  ®ragen  is  pronounced  SBir  tragng 
tyofye  Sragng. 

(3)  When  the  ending  eit  follows  it  or  tig  it  is  indicated 
simply  by  a  change  of  pitch.     The  change  may  be  up  or  down. 
In  other  words  the  tongue  remains  in  the  n=  position  while  the 
vocal  cords  alter  the  pitch.     This  may  be  graphically  indi- 
cated thus  :  Sir  f  flnnen  etnen  f  djtfnen  (gpajiergcmg  ntadjen  —  tint 

©pajiergang   madjn  —  or  nrir  Itfnn3  ein3 


u    @te  ftngett  an,  ju  fingen  —  fie  fi 
an,  jn  fin@  or  fie  fing^  an,  jn  fing^ 

Actors  always  say  ^tepmfcrinf  .  This  is  a  practically  universal  law,  which  the 
Greeks  and  Romans  embodied  in  their  written  language:  ev+j3dXXw—  ^SdXXw 
(en  +  bal'io  —  emballo)  ;  con  +  prehendo  —  comprehendo.  In  speaking  hur- 
riedly we  say  "  Opm  the  door,"  for  "  Open  the  door." 


WORD   FORMATION.  377 

WORD   FORMATION. 

405.  Introduction.  -7-  German    is    very    rich    in    compound 
words.     Not  only  does  it  compound  many   words  which  in 
English  are  written  separate,  as  bie  @dUptfaci)e,  the  main  thing, 
bte    8uftfcf)ifffa^rt^afttengefeII[d)aft,  the  airship   passage  stock 
company,  and  so  on,  but  it  is  particularly  varied  in  its  roots, 
prefixes,  and  suffixes. 

406.  Roots.  —  German  roots  often  vary  their  vowel  sounds 
so  that  it  is  hard  to  identify  the  original  root  :  f  cf)ttef$ett,  bd3 
@d)Iof!,  bet  @d){ufc  ;  ber  33unb,  bie  33mbe,  ba$  Sanb.    English 
also  has  this  same  kind  of  change:    sing,  sang,  sung,  song; 
swim,  swam,  swum. 

Nouns  derived  from  verb  roots  are  usually  of  one  of  three 
kinds  :  (a)  an  active  object,  performing  the  action  of  the  verb  ; 
(&)  a  passive  object,  on  which  the  action  of  the  verb  is  per- 
formed; or  (c)  an  abstract  noun,  denoting  the  condition  or 
action  of  the  verb. 


(a)  £>d$  33cmb  (btttben),  something  that  binds. 
©er  33ogett  (btegen),  something  that  bends. 
£)er  gtu£  (fKte^en),  something  that  flows. 

(b)  £)er  33rud)  (brerijen),  something  that  is  broken. 
£)er  33wtb  (bittben),  something  that  is  bound. 
£)er  Stan!  (trinlen),  something  that  is  drunk. 

(c)  £)er  fflttQ  (fltegetl),  action  or  condition  of  flying. 
£)er  ®ang  (gefyett),  action  or  condition  of  going. 
£)er  Jruttf  (trmfett),  action  or  condition  of  drinking. 

407.    On  the  next  page  are  given  some  common  verbal  roots 
from  which  nouns  are  derived  in  the  way  just  shown. 


378  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

33ittbett,  to  bind  ;  ber  33dttb,  bound  volume;  bd$  33cmb,  ribbon*, 

bie  33ittbe,  bandage;  ber  33Uttb,  bond,  union. 
glie^ett,  to  flow;  ber  gluf;,  river;  ba$  gfo£,  ra/L 
©raben,  to  dig  ;  ba$  ©rab,  grave;  bte  ©rube,  grotto;  bie  ©rttft, 

vault;  ber  ©raben,  a^'toft. 

Sttngen,  to  sound;  ber  Slang,  sound;  bte  Slingel,  &e#. 
©djieften,  to  slioot;  ber  ©djuj},  s/io£;  ber  ©cJjofe,  ^oo^ 
strike;  ber  @d)Iag,  stroke;  bte  @d)Iad)t, 
sto^;  ba^  ©d^Io^  ^ocA;;  cas^e;  ber  @d}tu£, 

ber  ©(^(itffef,  fcey. 

©tngen,  to  sing;  ber  @angr  ber  ©efcmg,  song. 
©pred^en,  to  speak;  bie  ©pradje,  language;  ber  ©prucf),  saying; 

ba^  ©efprdc^,  conversation. 
£rin!en,  to  drink;  ber  Sranf  and  ber  £runl,  c?rmfc. 
2Biegen,  (1)  to  we«/ft,  (2)  to  rock;  (1)  bie  3Bager  scaZe;  ba$ 

©ciDtc^t,  weight;  (2)  bie  SBiege,  cradle;  bie  SBoge,  wave. 
,  to  draw  ;  ber  3^9^  train  ;  feature  ;  bie  3U£^)^  breeding). 


408.  German  Prefixes  may  be  divided  into  two  classes,  verbal 
and  general.  The  verbal  prefixes  have  been  treated  under  in- 
separable and  separable  verbs.  Of  the  general  prefixes  the 
most  important  are  :  erj*,  ge=,  UTt',  IttX  They  are  used  chiefly 
with  nouns. 

(a)  (Srj*  (English  arch-)  means  leader,  chief;  ber  Srgbifdfjof, 
archbishop;  ber  Sr^Ijergog,  archduke;  ber  (Sqlitgner,  arch-liar. 

(b)  ©e-  (no  English  equivalent)  forms  (1)  collectives  out  of 
noun  stems,  or  (2)  verbal  nouns  from  verb  stems. 

(1)  £)a$  ©ebirge,  mountain  chain  (ber  Serg)  ;   bie  ©e* 
britber,  brothers  (ber  93ruber);  ba$  ©efieber,  plumage  (geber). 

(2)  ber  ©ebanfe,  thought  (benlen)  ;    ba$  ®ebtcf)t,  poem 
(bttfjten)  ;  ba$  ®ef  cf)enlr  present 


WORD   FORMATION.  379 


(c)  lilt*  (English  im-  or  m-,  sometimes  ?/i£s-)  usually  reverses 
the  meaning  of  a  word  :  uttarttg,  naughty  (artig)  ;  unbefttmmt, 
indefinite  (befttmmt)  ;  bie  llngebulb,  impatience  (Me  ©ebutb)* 

(cT)  Ur*  (no  English  equivalent)  denotes  origin  or  source.  It 
may  also  intensify  the  meaning  of  a  word  :  uralt,  very  old 
(a(t)  ;  urfomtfd),  very  funny  (fomtfdj)  ;  ber  llrfprmtg,  source  (ber 
Sprung)  ;  ba$  Mr  toaib,  primeval  forest  (ber  SBalb). 

409.'  Suffixes.  —  Many  German  words  are  formed  by  adding 
suffixes  to  roots.  The  most  important  groups  of  words  formed 
in  this  way  are:  (1)  nouns,  (2)  adjectives,  and  (3)  verbs 
Nouns  formed  by  suffix  may  be  divided  into  two  classes  :  con- 
crete and  abstract. 

410.  Concrete  Nouns  are  formed  by  the  following  suffixes  : 
cfyen,  letn,  er,  in,  and  [ing. 

(a)  gfyen   and   fein   form  neuter   diminutives   out  of  other 
nouns,    the   root   vowel   taking   Umlaut   when   possible  :    bd$ 
aftabdjen,  little  girl  (bie  SOtagb);  ba3  S3atf)fem,  brooklet  (ber 
33ad))  ;  ba$  grtiuteitt,  Miss,  little  woman  (bie  grau). 

(b)  Sr  forms  masculine  agents,  usually  with  Umlaut,  from  — 

(1)  Nouns  :    ber  gleifdjer,  butcher    (ba§   gtfetfd})  ;    ber 
©tirtner,  gardener  (ber  ©arten)  ;  ber  £ityfer,  potter  (ber  Sopf). 

(2)  Verbs  :  ber  giifjrer,  guide  (f  itfyren)  ;  ber  8ef  er,  reader 
(Icfcn)  ;  ber  @d)reiber,  clerk  ([d^reiben), 

(c)  Qn  forms  feminines  from  masculines  ;  bie  ^ontgtTt,  queen 
(ber  Sflntg)  ;  bie  gefyrertn,  lady  teacher  (ber  8el)rer), 

(d)  8ing  forms  masculines  of  varying  meaning,  having  Um- 
laut when  possible. 

(1)  Nouns  :    ber  ©unftttng,  favorite   (bie    ©ttttft)  ;    ber 
g,  scion  (ber  @^ro^,  sprout). 


380  NEW  GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

(2)  Adjectives:    bet  grembltng,  stranger     (fremb)  ;    bet 
grilling,  spring  (fritl))  ;  ber  ^toflftTiQ/  youth  (jung). 

(3)  Verbs :  ber  Ambling,  foundling  (finben)  ;  ber  8el)rling, 
apprentice  (lefyrett) ;  ber  ©angling,  suckling  (fangen), 

(4)  Numerals :  ber  &tftlin$,  first  fruits  (crft) ;  ber  ^ftrifttng, 
twin  (jtoet)  ;  ber  ©rifting,  triplet  (bret). 

411.  Abstract  Nouns  are  formed  by  the  following  suffixes  :  e, 
et,  fyett,  left,  fcfjaft,  andnng* 

(a)  (g  forms  abstract  f eminines  with  Umlaut  from  — 

(1)  Adjectives  :  bte  §arte,  hardness^  cruelty  (fyart)  ;    Me 
®r5^e,  size  (gro^) ;  bte  8anger  length  (tang). 

(2)  Verb  Eoots :  bte  33ttte,  request  (bitten) ;  bte  8teber  love 
(Itcbcn) ;  bie  8iige,  lie  (Ittgcn). 

(b)  &   forms  feminines   of  various   meanings    (many   have 
become  concrete)  from  — 

(1)  Nouns:  bte  -©ixcferet,  bakery  (ber  33ci(ler);  bte  gtfcfyeret, 
fishery  (ber  gtfdjer) ;  bte  ©tta&eret,  slavery  (ber  @flat)e)* 

(2)  Verbs :    bte   Sftecferet,  chaffing  (nedfen,  to  tease) ;    bte 
^Jtauberet,    chattering    (^i(aubern)  ;    bte    ©cljmetdjelei,  flattery 
(fcf)tnetcf)etn). 

(c)  §ett  forms  abstract  feminines  from  — 

(1)  Nouns :    bte    $tnbf)ett,   childhood    (ba§    Stttb)  ;    bte 
SJienfdjIjett,  humanity  (ber  3J?enfd^)» 

(2)  Adjectives :    bte    £)umml)ett,  stupidity  (bumm)  ;    bte 
Stnljett,  unity  (em) ;  bte  SBet^^ett,  wisdom  (toeife). 

(d)  ^ett   forms   abstract   feminines  from   adjectives   which 
have  endings  like  tg,  litf),  fatn,  bar,  etc. :  bte  £)antbarfett,  grati- 
tude (bcmfbar) ;  bte  greunbltdjfett,  kindness  (freunbltc^)* 

(e)  @(^aft  forms  abstract  feminines,  chiefly  from  nouns  de- 


WORD   FORMATION.  381 

noting  persons  :  bie  33urgerfdjaf  t,  citizens  (ber  33iirger)  ;    bie 
£)ietterfcf)aft,  servants  (ber  £)iener). 

(/)  lltig  forms  abstract  f  eminines,  chiefly  from  verbs  :  bie 
g,  story  (erstifjtett)  ;  bie  $(eibung,  clothing  (fteiben). 


412.  Adjectives  are  formed  by  the  following  suffixes:  bar, 
en,  Ijaft,  ig,  ifct),  lid),  and  fcmu 
(a)  33ar  forms  adjectives  from  — 

(1)  Nouns:    bcmffmr,   grateful   (ber  £)<mf)  ;    ef)rbar,   hon- 
orable (bie  @l)re)  ;  furtfjtbar,  terrible  (bie  gurcfyt). 

(2)  Verbs  :   braudjbar,  usable  (braudjen)  ;   epar,  eatable 
(effcn)  ;  leSbar,  legible  (Icfcn). 

(6)  Stt  forms  adjectives,  usually  of  material,  from  nouns  : 
eidjen,  oaken  (bie  @id)e)  ;  golben,  golden  (ba$  ©olb). 

(c)  §aft  forms  adjectives  from  — 

(1)  Nouns  :   efelljaft,  disgusting  (ber  gfcl)  ;  metfter^aft, 
masterful  (ber  S3fteifter)  ;  fitnb^aft,  sm/wZ  (bie  @imbe). 

(2)  Adjectives  :  bo^^aft,  malicious  (btffe,  &ad)  ;  franf^aft, 
sickly  (frcmf)  ;  lt)a^r^aft,  reaZ  (toafyr,  true). 

(d)  QQ  forms  adjectives,  chiefly  from  nouns  :  ttuttig,  cou- 
rageous (ber  2Jhtt)  ;  fonnig,  sunny  (bie  @onne). 

(e)  3fd)  forms  adjectives,  chiefly  from  proper  nouns  :  cmteri- 
tcmifcf),  American  (ber  3lmerifaner)  ;  frcmsflfifd),  French  (ber 
granjofe)  ;  fyomerifrf),  Homeric  (ber  §omer). 

(/)  8i(f)  forms  adjectives  from  — 

(1)  Nouns  :  gliid  (irf),  happy  (ba$  ®ftt<f)  ;  tnenfc^Hc^,  /mrnan 
(ber  3ftenftf))  ;  taglic^,  cZa.?7y  (ber  Jag). 

(2)  Adjectives  :   frofylid:),  joyous  (frot))  ;   (anglic^,  lengthy 
(lang)  ;  r5tlia^,  reddish  (rot), 


382  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

(3)  Verbs :  begretfUc!),  comprehensible  (begretfen) :  fragltcfy 
questionable  (frageti)  ;  fyaftHd),  hateful,  ugly  (fyaffen). 

(9)  @dttt  forms  adjectives  from  — 

(1)  Nouns :    furdjtfcmt,  timid  (Me   Sutcfjt)  J   getoaltfam, 
violent  (Me  ©eftwft)  ;  fittfam,  modest  (Me  @itte,  usage). 

(2)  Verbs :  btegfam,  pliable  (biegen)  ;  gefyorfant,  obedient 
(geljorcfjen) ;  ftrebfant,  assiduous  (ftreben,  to  strive). 

413.  Verbs  are  formed  by  the  following  suffixes:   en,  em, 
teren,  and  tgett. 

(a)  @n  forms  verbs  from  — 

(1)  Nouns :  bitrften,  to  brush  (Me  33itrfte) ;  ftf d)en,  to  fish 
(ber  gifdj) ;  fiiffen,  to  kiss  (ber  tufe). 

(2)  Adjectives :  ^cirten,  to  harden  (fjart)  ;  flatten,  to  iron 
fiat  (ptatt,  flat);  ftarfen,  to  strengthen  (ftarl). 

(3)  Eoots  of  other  verbs :  brangett,  to  crowd  (bringen,  to 
force  one's  way) ;  (fatten),  to  fell  (fatten). 

(b)  (£rn  forms   verbs,  chiefly  from   adjectives.     With  com- 
paratives it  may  be  considered  as  simply  <tt  added  to  the  com- 
parative  root.     A   prefix  —  commonly   tier-  —  often    precedes 
the  root :  Derbeffern,  to  correct  (beffer)  ;  fcerlcingern,  to  prolong 
((anger)  ;  Dergr5§ern,  to  enlarge  (grofc)* 

(c)  Qeren  forms  verbs,  chiefly  from    foreign  words  :    amit- 
fieren,  to  entertain  (Fr.  amuser) ;  regteren,  to  rule  (Lat.  regere). 

(d)  $$en  forms  verbs  from  — 

(1)  Nouns:    Ijntbigen,   to  do   homage  (Me  §ttlb,  grace); 
Iren^igen,  to  crucify  (ba^  ^rens) ;  fteinigen,  to  stone  (ber  (Stein). 

(2)  Adjectives  (when   an  adjective  has  the  ending  *tg, 
this  class  of  verbs  is  not  to  be  distinguished  from  that  in  (a)): 
befeftigen,  to  fasten  (feft) ;  befdjftntgen,  to  beautify  (fdjtfn)* 


WORD   FORMATION.  383 

German  Compounds  always  have  the  basic  word  last: 
bfdltgrim,  bluish  green;  griinbtdU,  greenish  blue.  They  may  be 
any  part  of  speech  (nouns  take  their  gender  from  the  last  ele- 
ment) :  bdS  Jifdjbein  (noun),  table  leg;  bd$felbe  (pronoun),  the 
same;  fyettbldtt  (adjective),  light  blue;  todfyrfdgen  (verb),  to 
prophesy ;  bergan  (adverb),  up  hill;  dttftdtt  (preposition),  instead 
of;  nadjbem  (conjunction),  after;  poi^tdufettb  (interjection), 
Great  Scott!  But  most  compounds  are  (1)  Nouns,  (2)  Adjec- 
tives, and  (3)  Verbs. 

415.  Compound  Nouns  may  be  formed  from  — 

(a)  Nouns:  bd$  geberbett,  feather  bed;  bet  gtttgerljut,  thim- 
ble; bd$  ©olbftM,  gold  piece;  Me  §dUptftdbt,  capital  city. 

(ft)  Pronouns,  usually  felbft :   ber   (Selbftttiorb,  suicide;  ber 
SelbftfdUt,  vowel;  bie  @e(bftfurf)t,  selfishness. 

(c)  Adjectives:    ber    33Idbfinn,  nonsense;    bd$    ©eutfd)fdttb, 
Germany ;  bie  ©ro^tnutter,  grandmother. 

(d)  Verbs:  bd$  §a^rrcl^r  bicycle;  bie  giittfebet,  fountain  pen. 

(e)  Adverbs:  bie  3lu^enfette,  outside;  bd^  (Sbenbtlb,  image. 
(/)  Prepositions:  bd$  SKitletb,  pity;  bie  9^d(f)tDett,  posterity. 

416.  Compound  Adjectives  may  be  formed  from  — 

(a)  Nouns:    btlbfcfjdtt,  pretty  as  a  picture;  feefrdtlf,  seasick; 
filber^ell,  clear  as  crystal. 

(ft)  Adjectives:    bttterfitj},   bitter  sweet;   gutmuttg,  good  na- 
tured;  gritttbfdU,  greenish  blue. 

(c)  Verbs  :  bemerfenStoert,  worthy  of  note;  fernbegteng,  eager 
to  learn;  merftDitrbtg,  remarkable. 

(d)  Prepositions :      dufrerfjt,    upright;     dufcerorbentttdj,     ex- 
traordinary ;  fcorldUt,  forward,  pert. 


384  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

417.  Compound  Verbs  may  be  formed  from  — 

(a)  Nouns:    I)au3l)attett,  to  keep  house;    ftattfittben,  to   take 
place;  tetlnefjtnen,  to  take  part. 

(b)  Adjectives:     grofttwt,  to  swagger;  Itebaugeln,   to  ogle; 
fcottenben,  to  finish. 

(c)  Adverbs :  fyingefyen,  to  go  away;  tmeberlommen,  to  come 
again;  jurMfcfyren,  to  turn  back. 

(d)  Prepositions  :  attStefyen,  to  put  on;  tmtgeljen,  to  go  along 
ivith;  natf)fii£en,  to  stay  after  school. 

418.  Derivations  through  the  Latin.  — Latin  students  may  like 
to  compare  certain  English  words,  derived  from  Latin,  with 
their  German  synonyms.     German  equivalents  for  many  Eng- 
lish words  may  be  found  by  translating  the  Latin  word,  part 
by  part,  into  German.     A  few  illustrations  are  given  below; 
students  should  be  on  the  watch  for  others. 

(a)  Nouns : 

Attraction,  Me  2lnjief)Uttg  (ad,  an  +  trahere,  jtefyen)* 

Eruption,  ber  §lu$brucf)  (e,  cm$  +  rumpere,  brecfyen). 

(6)  Adjectives  : 

Retrograde,  ritcfgixngig  (retro,  ritcf  -f  gradi,  gefyen), 

Subsequent,  narfjfolgenb  (sub,  nad)  +  sequi,  folgen). 

(c)  Verbs: 

Expel,  au§tretben  (ex,  au$  +  pellere,  treiben)* 
Prescribe,  dorfdjrteben  (prae,  tior  +  scribere,  frfjretben). 
Survive,  iiberleben  (super,  itber  4-  vivere,  (eben)» 

GRIMM'S   LAW 

41.9.    Jacob  Grimm  was  one  of  the  greatest  scholars  Germany 
ever  produced.     He  is- best   known  for  the  discovery  or   the 


GRIMM'S  LAW.  385 

working  out  of  Grimm's  Law.  In  all  its  details  this  law  is  too 
complex  for  any  but  advanced  students,  but  many  parts  of  it 
may  be  readily  understood  by  beginners.  In  brief  it  is  the 
law  of  cognates  or  of  related  words. 

420.  The  German  Language,  as  it  is  spoken  and  written  to-day, 
is  a  growth  or  development  from  an  older  tongue,  commonly 
called  Germanic.     From  the  Germanic  language  grew  in  suc- 
cession Old  High  German  ( 1100),  Middle  High  German 

(1100-1350),  and  New  High  German,  which  is  usually  dated 
from  the  time  of   Martin  Luther  (1483-1546).     During   this 
evolution  certain  changes  of  sounds  took  place,  somewhat  like 
those  that  have  taken  place  in  English  from  the  old  Anglo- 
Saxon  through  Chaucer  and  Shakspere  down  to  the  present 
time. 

421.  Cognates. — English,  as  well  as  German,  comes  from 
the  old  Germanic  language,  so  we  have  many  words  in  English 
like  corresponding  German  words.     These  similar  words  are 
called  cognates,     (a)  Some  are  identical  in  spelling  but  differ- 
ent in  sound ;  (&)  some  are  identical  in  sound  but  different  in 
spelling ;  (c)  others  differ  in  both  sound  and  spelling  and  even 
in  meaning,  but  their  relation  to  each  other  can  easily  be  seen. 

(a)  Similar  spellings  are  seen  in  such  words  as  ber  2(nn,  ber 
Salt,  bte  55ame,  ber  ginger,  ba$  ©olb,  bie  §anb,  ba3  §orn,  baS 
8anb,  ber  Stone,  ber  ^(an,  ber  (Sad,  ber  SBinb.  Most  of  these 
have  been  given  in  the  vocabularies  of  this  book. 

(6)  Similar  sounds,  but  with  different  spelling,  are  seen  in 
such  words  as  ber  33cir,  ba3  33oot,  ber  SBnfd),  ba§  ©3,  ba$  ®ta$, 
ba$  ©cms,  ber  aftann,  bie  2ttau3,  bte  3»ttd),  ber  Antler,  ber 
©onuner,  ber  ©tnljL 


386  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

(c)  Other  cognates,  differing  in  both  sound  and  spelling,  are 
such  words  as  ba$  33rot,  bet4  SJruber,  bie  geber,  ba$  geuer,  ber 
©arten,  ber  |)unb,  ber  §ut,  bie  Gutter,  ba§  papier,  ba$  @alg, 
bie  @d)ute,  ber  @ol)n,  bie  @uppe,  ber  £ee,  ber  23ater,  ber  SBagen. 


422.  Statement  of  the  Law.  —  From  these  examples  we  see 
that  many  consonants  are  just  the  same  in  both  German  and 
English.  These  are  in  general  the  liquids  (I,  nt,  tt,  r),  and  the 
letters  6,  f,  g,  f,  f},  and  f,  when  these  latter  come  at  the  begin- 
ning of  a  word. 

But  many  consonants  are  different  in  English  and  in  German, 
although  certain  ones  in  English  correspond  regularly  to  the 
same  ones  in  German.  Jacob  Grimm  formulated  the  law  } 
showing  just  how  they  correspond.  In  general  :  — 

(1)  English  d  is  German  t:  ber  Stag,  gut,  alt,  ba$  33ett, 


(2)  English  th  is  German  b  :  bd$,  bte$,  bret,  ber  £)ortu 

(3)  English  v  is  German  6  :  fjaben,  teben,  geben,  ba§  @U6cr. 

(4)  English  k  is  German  dj  :  ba^  Slid),  marfjen,  bie  SRUrf). 

(5)  English  p  is  German  pf  or  f  :  ber  $fab,  bie 
^Jfunb,  ^offen,  reif. 

(6)  English  t  is  German  f  or  ff  :  ^ei§,  au^,  cffcn* 


1  Footnote  to  teachers.  The  statements  here  given  make  no  distinction 
between  the  first  and  second  sound-shifts,  nor  between  the  formulations 
of  Grimm,  Verner,  and  other  philologists.  They  merely  attempt  to  give 
pupils  an  idea  of  the  relation  of  the  two  languages,  making  no  pretence  to 
scientific,  philological  completeness. 


GERMAN   RULES. 


423.  $er    @a<?+—  £)a$    @nbje!t    eineS  @a£e$  fteljt  im 
SRommattb.    @3  ftimmt  mit  betn  geittoort  te  &er  ^Perfon  unb 
3a!)l  iiberein. 

(a)  £)a$  ^rabifat  eine$  @a^e$  ift  getoijfynlid)  (1)  ein  fetb- 
ftanbiges  ^eitfoort,  (2)  cm  ©UfS&crb,  ober  (3)  ein  tnobale^  §tlf^^ 
Derb. 

.  (6)  3)a^  Ob  {eft  befteljt  in  einem  Dom  ^riibtlat  abljangen* 
ben  gauptmort  ober  giirmort.  &  fann  tm  ®enttbr  int  £)atto, 
ober  tm  2lffu[attt)  fein, 

(c)  ©te  abt)erbtaten  S3efttmmnngen  gerfatten  in  33e* 
ftimmungen  (1)  ber  ^ett  nnb  be^  Drt^r  (2)  ber  3a^t  unb  be^ 
®rab§,  (3)  ber  2Irt  nnb  SBeife,  (4)  be3  2KitteI^  nnb  ber  Urfacfje, 
(5)  be^  3tt)e^  un^  &er  S^f9e^  ^n^  (6)  ^er  Sebingnng. 

(d)  J)tc     attribntit)e     53eftimmnng     ift    ge 
(1)  ein  3lrtifel,  (2)  ein  9lbjectto,  (3)  ein  ^afjtlDort,  (4)  ein 
tijip,  (5)  ein  gitrtoort,  ober  (6)  ein  §anpttoort  in  2lppofition. 

424.  X>ic  ©aijarten,  —  ^nbifati^e  @a|e  beseic^nen  einen 
3Sorgang  ober  3^ftcinb  al§  toirffirf)  ;  lonjnn!titie  af^  geba^t  ober 
mogtid)  ;  imperative  al^  getootft. 

@a^e  mit  ©a^teilen,  bie  an$  gan^en  @a^en  befte^en,  finb 
pfammengefe^te  @d§e  nnb  ^ei^en  ©a^gefitge, 

bie    nnr    ben    SBert    eineS    ©a^teife    ^abenr  l^ei^en 


Sin  ©a^gefnge  befte^t  an^  einem  §anptfa£  nnb  einem  %lt 
benfa^,  ober  cms  einem  §anptfa^  nnb  mefyreren  9?ebenfa^en. 

425.  2)tc    aBartf  olge.  —  ^n    ber    gen)o^nlirf)en    9Bort- 
folge  (erften  SBortfotge)  fte^t  jnerft  ba^  ©nbjeft,  bann  ba^ 

387 


388  NEW    GERMAN    GRAMMAR. 

bann  fotgen  bie  ab&erbialen  33eftimmungen  unb  bie 


©fcjefte, 

3toeite  SBortfotge:  bte  $nt)erfton,  SBenn  ein  an* 
bre$  SBort  a(3  baS  ©ubjelt  an  ben  2lnfang  tritt,  fo  erfyalt  ba$ 
^eittoort  ftet$  bte  jtoeite  @tetler  unb  btefer  folgt  ba^  @ubje!t. 

Qn  bet  brttten  SBortfotge  fte^t  ba$  ^^^ort  am  (Snbe 
SBortfoIge  t(t  in 


426.  2)ic  SBortarten.  —  £)te  SBiJrter  ber 
gerfatten  in  je^n  SBortarten: 

1.  baS  ®ef(^Ie(f)t^tt)ort,  ber  SlrtileL 

2.  ba$  @igenf(^aft^tt)ort,  ba^  3lbjefttt)(um)» 

3.  ba 


5,  ba3  ^^^^r  ^a^  Numeral* 

6,  ba§  3eittl)or^  ^a^  33^tb(um). 

7,  ba^  Umftanb^tDort,  ba§  9lbt)erb. 

8,  ba$  3?er^a(tni^mort,  bie 
i   9.  ba$  ®inben)ort,  bie 

10.  ba^  (Smpfinbnng^lDort,  bie  $ftter}e!tion. 

gormenle^re  iftbie  Se^re  fcon  ber  SSeranbernng  ber 
SBbrter.  £)ie  beutfrf)en  9B5rter  erteiben  eine  breifadje  SSeranbe- 
rung  :  S5ef(ination,  Conjugation  unb  Som^aration.  ©^  gibt 
ftarfe,  fcfjtoacfye,  gemi[(f)te  unb  unregefnta^ige  £)ef(ination  ;  ftarler 
f(l)tt)a(^e  unb  unregelma^ige  Conjugation  ;  regelma^ige  unb  un* 
regetnta^ige  Sontparation* 

3)ie  §au)3ttt)orter,  gurindrter, 
unb   ©ef(^Ie(f)t^lDi3rter  erteiben   £)eftination. 
erteiben  Conjugation  ;   ©igenf^aft^mdrter  unb  Umftanb^iDorter 
erteiben  Uomparation. 


GERMAN   RULES.  389 

(a)  £)ie  §aupttt)drter  finb  SBorter,  Me  fefbftanbige  ®e* 
genftanbe  bejeicfjnen.  @ie  fyaben  jtoei  ^afylen :  Stitjal)!  unb 
3fteljrgal)l ;  trier  gfttte :  9?otninatit),  ©enitid,  £)atit)  unb  2lllufa* 
tit) ;  brei  ©efdjtecfjter :  ntannlid),  toeiblid)  unb  fcidjHd). 

Die  §aupttt)orter  toerben  belliniert,  ttrie  in  §  370  geseigt  totrb. 

(&)  3)ie  31  r  tile  I  finb  enttueber  beftintntt  ober  unbeftimmt. 
@ie  t^erben  mie  in  §  371,  c  unb  d  beftiniert. 

(c)  S)ic  @igen[c^aft§tt)5rter  merben  beffiniert,  lt)ie  in 
§  371  ge^eigt  tuirb.  ^^  ^Ptabifat  merben  fie  ntdjt  befliniert, 
J)ie  meiften  ^aben  ©teigerung :  ben  ^5ofitit),  Me  ©runbfonn,  ober 
ben  erften  ©rab ;  ben  Somparatit)  ober  ben  jtoetten  ©rab ;  unb 
ben  Superlatit)  ober  ben  britten  ©rab, 

(c?)3)ie  giiriDdrter  jerteilen  fi^  in  perfontidje,  befi^an- 
Seigenbe,  ^innjeifenbe,  begie^enbe,  fragenbe  unb  unbeftimmte,  ©ie 
tt)erben  beffintert  tt)ie  in  §§  372,  373,  374  unb  375  gejeigt  ttrirb. 

(e)  S)a^  3c^toor^*  &n  fcottftanbigeS  3c^tt)or*  ^  3lt)e^ 
©ef(^Ie(i)ter :  Me  JtitigfeitSf ornt  unb  Me  8eibef orm  ;  fedj$  geiten  : 
bie  ©egentoart,  bie  25ergangen^eit,  Me  ^uhntft,  ba^  'perfelt,  ba^ 
^tuSquantperfeft  unb  ba^  jmeite  gutur ;  jtuei  Slu^fagetDeifen : 
ben  (JttMfcitto  unb  ben  ®on}unltit) ;  jtuei  3a^en  :  ©tiga^I  unb 
2ftef)rsafjl ;  brei  ^5erfonen :  bie  erfte,  bie  jnjeite  unb  bie  britte. 
&  gibt  aud^  eine  ^ebenform  be§  ^onjunltit)^  unb  eine  britte 
3lu^fagelpeife,  ben  ^^tp^ttttt). 

jcrfattcn  aud^  in  felbftftimbige  3^tttt)5rtcr  unb 
;  perf onlici)e  unb  unperf online :  fubjeftbe  unb  objel- 
tit>e  ;  tranfitfoe  unb  intranfitiDe. 

3)ie  3^ittt)orter  fyaben  jtt)ei  ^onjugationen  :  ftarl  unb  fcfytoad). 
Qn  §  369  befinbet  fid)  eine  8ifte  ber  ftarlen  geitwtivteic.  $n 
§§  376  bis  385  merben  bie  fc^ma^en,  famt  einigen  ftarlen, 
lonjugiert.  • 


390  NEW    GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

(/)  £)te  UmftanbStoorter  ^erf  alien  ber  33ebeutnng  nadj 
in  bie  (1)  ber  ,3eit,  (2)  be$  DrteS,  (3)  be*  ®rabe$,  (4)  be$ 
®rnnbe$,  (5)  ber  2lrt  unb  SBeife,  (6)  ber  3af)(,  (7)  beS  3ftittel3 
unb  (8)  be$  ^toerf^  ®*e  toerben  ?n  3eittt)5rtern  ober  311  ©gen- 
fdjaftStoortern  Ijinsngefiigt 

(g)  £)te  3Ser^attnt^tDi5rter  t)erbinben  nur  2B5rter,  ntdjt 
@afee,  @ie  ^aben  na^  fid)  (1)  ben  ©enitto,  (2)  ben  £)atto  ober 
(3)  ben  Sttfufatto. 

(1)  ®ie  gebrancf)U(^ften  S5er^altni§it)orterr  bie  ben   ©enitit) 
^aben,  finb:  —  anftatt,  au^er^alb,  inner^alb,  bie^feto,  jenfeto, 
Icings,  ntittel$,  tro^,  ungead)tetr  uniueit,  toafyrenb,  tt)egen,  jnfolge. 

(2)  S)er    ®atto    t?erbinbet    fief)    mit    folgenben    23erl)altni^ 
tDortern :  —  auS,  aufter,  bei,  binnen,  entgegen,  gegenitber,  mit, 
nad),  nebft,  famt,  feit,  Don,  sn. 

(3)  Ser  Sllfufatit)  fcerbinbet  fit^  mit  folgenben  3Ser^aItni^ 
toftrtern  :  —  bte,  bnr^,  fitr,  gegen,  o^ne,  fonber,  nm,  toiber. 

(4)  ®er  ®atit)  ober  SHfnfatto  tierbinbet  fidj  mit  folgenben 
33erl)altni£tt)ortern :  —  an,  anf,  Ijinter,  in,  neben,  itber,  unter, 
t)or,  glDifc^en. 

(7i)©ie    ®inbett)5rter    tjerbinben    Sorter    ober   ©afee. 

(1)  3)ie  loorbinierenbe  33inbeit)tirter  finb  : — nnb,  aber,  allein, 
fonbern,  fotDo^I  „  »  «  afe  ant^,  enttoeber  .  ,  .  ober. 

(2)  £)ie  fnborbinierenbe  SinbetDorter  finb  :  —  al$,  at§  ob,  afe 
menn,  auf  ba^,  bet»or,  bte,  ba,  bamit,  bap,  e^e,  falls,  gteidjttrie, 
inbem,  inbeffen,  nad)bem,  ob,  obgteid),  obft^on,  obtuo^I,  feit, 
fobalb,  fotange,  fotoie,  tDeil,  tDenn,  toenngteid:), 

tuegen,  n)ie,  ttrietoof)!,  mo,  iDofern. 

J)ie  SmpfinbnngStt)5rter  brncfen  2lnfregnng, 
unb  f o  tneiter  anS ;  tt)ie :  —  ad),  an,  toefy,  o,  ei,  pfni,  ^urra. 


PHONETICS. 

427.  Brief  Historical  Survey.  —  The  oldest  writing  with  all 
early  peoples  was  picture-writing.  The  Egyptians  developed 
conventionalized  pictures  to  represent  not  only  a  thing,  but 
ideas  connected  with  this  thing.  Later  their  writing  became 
partly  phonetic,  that  is,  some  symbols  represented  single 
sounds. 

The  Phoenicians  made  the  next  great  advance  and,  discard- 
ing pictures  entirely,  used  a  true  alphabet  of  twenty-two  char- 
acters. From  this  alphabet  all  true  alphabets  in  the  world 
have  ljeen  developed. 

T  lough  the  symbols  remain  the  same,  the  speech  of  peoples 
changes,  and  thus  we  find  in  practically  all  languages  (1)  the 
same  sound  represented  by  different  symbols,  as  in  bluff  and 
rough,  prey  and  pray ;  two,  too,  and  to ;  German  @dtte  and 
@eite  ;  i?eute  and  8ciute  ;  (2)  different  sounds  represented  by 
the  same  symbol,  as  English  gh  in  ghost,  rough  and  though  ;  ea 
in  h ear,  heard,  heart,  and  head  ;  German  g  in  gefyett,  ZttQ,  and 
$ontg  ;  d)  in  gfjor,  id),  and  ad). 

Students  of  language  sounds  have  always  tried  to  simplify 
these  symbols  and  sounds,  but  only  within  the  last  half  cen- 
tury has  any  systematic  international  effort  been  made.  In. 
1867  Alexander  Melville  Bell,  an  American,  father  of  Alex- 
ander Graham  Bell  who  invented  the  telephone,  published  his 
Visible  Speech.  This  work  was  the  starting  point  for  the 
modern  study  of  phonetics.  BelPs  pupil,  the  Englishman 
Sweet,  continued  and  simplified  the  study  in  his  Primer  of 
Phonetics. 

391 


392  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

428.  The  Universal  Phonetic  Alphabet.  —  It  remained,  how- 
ever, for  the  Germans  and  French  to  make  phonetic  study  of 
really  international  importance  and  to  develop  an  international 
system  of  symbols.     This  was  largely  the  work  of  Wilhelm 
Vietor 1  of  Marburg  and  Paul  Passy  of  Neuilly,  the  two  lead- 
ing lights  of  the  present  International  Phonetic  Association. 
This  association  consists  of  scholars  interested  in  studying 
language  sounds,  and  it  has  agreed  upon  certain  characters 
which  always  represent  the  same  sound.     The  characters  of 
this  universal  phonetic  alphabet  are  widely  used  in  language 
study  in  Europe,  and  are  coming  into  more  extended  use  here. 

429.  The   Advantages.  —  In   the  first   place   it   is    a    great 
help  to  a  student  who  is  learning  a  new  language  to  have  the 
same  sound  always  represented  by  the  same  character.     For  in- 
stance, if  a  German  is  learning  English  by  this  phonetic  alpha- 
bet, he  will  not  be  troubled  by  the  pronunciation  of  the  words 
tough,  trough,  though,  and  through,  as  they  would  be  written 
tftf,  trof,  <5o:  and  j>ru:.      Similarly,  the  German  words  @atte 
and  @ette  would  both  be  written  zai:te. 

In  the  second  place  the  foreign  sounds  are  noticed  more  partic- 
ularly if  indicated  by  these  peculiar  signs.  For  instance, 
English  a  in  gate  is  pronounced  like  diphthong  a-ee,  just  as  it 
is  spelled  in  gait.  So,  the  tendency  of  an  English  learner  is  to 
pronounce  German  gef)t,  giving  e  the  nearest  English  equiva- 
lent a.  But  the  German  vowel  c  is  a  single  sound  and  so  is 
represented  by  e\,  thus  ge\t,  the  colon  being  the  phonetic  sign 
that  the  vowel  immediately  preceding  is  long. 

1  While  Vietor  and  Passy  are  the  leading  popularizers  of  modern  phonetics, 
the  leading  scientific  investigators  are  probably  Eduard  Sievers  of  Leipsic 
and  Otto  Jespersen  of  Copenhagen. 


PHONETICS.  393 

Thus  by  the  phonetic  method  an  English  student  of  German 
does  not  make  the  mistake  of  giving  German  long  e  the  nearest 
English  sound,  but  recognizes  at  once  that  English  a  in  gate 
and  German  e  in  gefyt  are  entirely  different  sounds.1 

430.  The  Disadvantages.  —  But  there  are  also  disadvantages 
in  learning  a  new  language   by  the   phonetic  method  only. 
Learners   are  burdened   with  new   symbols   as   well  as  new 
sounds,  when  they  need  all  their  attention  and  time  for  study- 
ing the  language.     Moreover,  distinctions  between  varying  pro- 
nunciations as,  for  instance,  those  of  I  and  r  in  English  and 
German  cannot  be  conveyed  by  symbols ;  they  must  be  taught 
orally  in  addition.     And  these  symbols  do  not  cover  intona- 
tion, which  after   all  is  one  of  the  most  vital,   though  most 
neglected,  phases  of  language  study. 

People  familiar  with  the  several  languages  can  often  tell 
whether  the  speaker  in  an  adjoining  room  is  English,  French, 
Swedish,  or  Chinese  merely  by  the  intonation,  even  if  they  can- 
not distinguish  a  single  word.  And  some  of  us  have  heard 
friends  who  were  clever  imitators  reel  off  lingo  which  to  us 
sounded  like  Chinese  or  French  or  Italian,  when  the  whole 
speech  contained  not  a  single  word  of  any  of  these  languages. 
It  is  all  in  the  intonation,  which  must  be  acquired  by  imita- 
tion, not  by  symbols. 

431.  Simplicity  of  the  Characters.  —  In  the  working  out  of 
these  phonetic  characters  every  effort  was  made  to  keep  them 
as  simple  as  possible.     Thus  the  commonest  sound  of  a  letter 
is  usually  represented  by  the  regular  form  of  the  letter,  while 
the  less  common  sounds  are  shown  by  slight  variations. 

i  gate  =  ge:it ;  gefyt  =  ge:t. 


394 


NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 


Sounds  like  th  in  thin  or  in  this,  which  are  not  found  in  Ger- 
man or  in  French,  are  indicated  by  their  old  Anglo-Saxon  char- 
acters J>  and  S.  So,  too,  the  simple  sound  of  sh  in  shoe,  which 
is  almost  always  represented  by  two  or  more  letters,  is  shown 
by  the  phonetic  character  J.  In  spite  of  the  strange  appear- 
ance of  some  of  these  characters  upon  first  acquaintance,  they 
represent  an  intelligent  effort  to  simplify  the  study  of  sounds. 

432.   The  Characters.  —  The  sounds  of  &,  b,  f ,  J),  I ,  lf  ttt,  n,  p, 

r,  3,  t  are  indicated  simply  by  these  letters.     Sounds  about 
which  less  uniformity  prevails  are  represented  as  follows  : 


LETTER. 


« 

(f 

b 

9 

i) 

fi 

i 

19 


W. 


AS  IN  THE 

EEPRESSNTED 

WORD 

BY 

ab 

P 

id) 

9 

ad) 

X 

(Me 

k 

unb 

t 

£ag 

k  or  x 

rtdjtig 

9 

gefyen 

3 

ia 

i 

ftngen 

q 

Onette 

kv 

fc^on 
ton 

tt)0 


aE 

fant 

benn 


z 

s 

J 
f 

V 

ks 

ts 

a 

a: 

e 


LETTER. 

AS    IN  THE 

WORD 

EEPRESENTED 

BY 

e 

Wr 

e: 

c 

fomtneu 

0 

i 

in 

I 

i 

ifym 

i: 

9 

©omntcr 

o 

0 

@ol)n 

o: 

0 

bort 

0 

It 

imb 

u 

It 

tun 

u: 

a 

banner 

£ 

a 

3d^ne 

c: 

i 

lonncn 

a 

u 

£>of)Ie 

e 

it 

tt)iinf(i)en 

Y 

it 

33iil)ne 

y: 

att 

2fiUt€ 

oy 

eu 

i^ente 

oy 

at 

<3atte 

ai 

ci 

@eite 

ai 

ait 

§au^ 

au 

PHONETICS. 


395 


433.  Phonetic  Transcriptions.  —  The  following  phonetic  tran- 
scriptions of  three  well-known  poems  will  give  a  good  practi- 
cal idea  of  the  appearance  of  a  page  of  phonetic  script.  The 
glottal  catch  (§§  393-396)  is  indicated  by  the  character  ?  ;  the 
main  accent  is  marked  "?  the  secondary  '.  Note  the  difference 
between  i-  in  fie  and  i:  in  tljr. 


Uber  alien  ®ipfe(n 

3ft  JRuk 

$n  alien  SBtyfeln 

©piireft  bit 

Santn  etnen  §and)  ; 

£)ie    338geletn    fdjtuetgen 

SBalbe, 

Sartennr!    33albe 
bu  and). 


tnt 


;?alon  "gipfeln 
ru:  ; 

^m  ^alan  "vipfaln 
'Jpy:rast  du: 

''haux  ; 
"Jvai^fon 


'kaum 
di: 


'varta  mi:r  !   'balda 
"ruiast  'du: 


-ge:ta. 


®n  bift  tt)te  etne 
(So  ^olb  unb  fdjbn  nnb  rein  ; 
fd)cm  bic^  an,  nnb  SBe^ntnt 
mtr  in^  §erj 


ir  tft,  al§  ob  id)  Me  £>anbe 


btr  legen  fofff  , 
Setenb,  bag  ®ott  bic^  erf)alte 
@o  rein  nnb  fd^5n  nnb  Ijolb. 


du:  bist  vi:  ^aina  "blu:m9 
zo:  'holt  ?unt  'Je:n  ?unt  'rain  ; 
^IQ  Jau  diQ  '^an,  ?unt  "ve:mu:t 
Jlaigt  mi:r  ^ins  'herts  hinain. 


?op 


di: 


m:r 

'henda 

^aufs  'haupt  di:r  le:^an  zolt. 
'be:tant,  das  '^ot  die,  "9erhalt9 
zo:  "rain  ?unt  "Je:n  ^unt  "holt. 
—  haina. 


396  NEW   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 

(g$  gogen  brei  33urfd>e  tool)!  itber  ben  9?l)etn, 
ei  einer  gran  SSirtin,  ba  fefyrten  fie  ein  : 


,,$rau  SBirtin!  l)at  fie  gut  33ier  unb  SBein? 
3Bo  Ijat  fie  i^r  f(^one§  SToc^teriem  ?" 


w3Rctn  S3ier  unb  SBetn  tft  frtfd)  unb  liar. 
Sftein  £od)tertein  Hegt  auf  ber 


Unb  af$  fie  traten  jur  hammer  fjinein, 
S)a  tag  fie  in  einem  ftf)tt)arjen  @(i)rein, 


erfte,  ber  f^Iug  ben  ©d^feier  juritd 
llnb  fd)aute  fie  an  ntit  traurigem 

„%$,  Icbtcft  bu  no^r  bu  f^5 
tuiirbe  bid^  lieben  t)on  biefer 


S)er  jtoeite  becfte  ben  @rf)Ieier  ju 
Unb  tefyrte  fit^  ab  unb  toeinte  ba^u  : 

ff5l(f),  ba^  bu  liegft  auf  ber  STotenba^r  ! 
Qtf)  l)ab'  bid^  geliebet  fo  tnancfjeS  Qafy. 

3)er  brttte  fyub  i^n  U)teber  fogleidf) 
Unb  fiifste  fie  an  ben  2Kunb  fo 


tiebf  id)  burner,  bit^  Iieb;  ic^  nod)  fyeut 
Unb  tuerbe  bi(^  lieben  in  Stoigfeit" 


PHONETICS.  397 

on  drai  'burjo  vo:l  ?y:bor  don  'rain, 
bai  ?ainor  frau  'virtm,  da:  ke:rton  zi-  '?ain: 

,,frau  'virtm!   hat  zi-  'gu:t  'birr  ?unt  'vain? 
vo:  hat  zi-  ?i:r  'Je:nos  "taQtorlain  ?" 


,,main  'bi:r  ?unt  'vain  ?ist  'frij  ^unt  'kla:r> 
main  "tatorlain  li:kt  ^auf  der  "to:t0nba:r.^ 


?unt  ^als  zi-  tra:tgn  tsur  'kamor  hinain, 
da:  'la:k  zi-  ?in  ^ainom  Jvartsan  'Jrain. 

dcr  /<?e:rst9,  de:r  Jlu:k  dan  'Jlaior  tsu-ryk 
?unt  Jauta  zi-  '?an  mit  'traurigom  'blik: 

,/?ax,  'Ie:pt9st  du-  nox,  du-  'Je:no  'mait! 
dig  'li:bon  fon  'di:zer  tsait." 


dcr  'tsvaito  dekta  dgn  Jlaior  'tsu: 

?unt  ke:rta  ZIQ  /9ap  9unt  'vainto  da:tsu:  : 


,  das  du-  lirkst  ?auf  dor  'to:tonba:r! 
?IQ  ha:p  diQ  ^o'li^et  zo-  'mangos  'ja:r." 

dcr  'drito  'hu:p  ?i:n  vi:dor  zo-'^laig 
?unt  'kYsto  zi:  ?an  don  'munt  zo-  'blaiQ  : 


iQ  'li:p  ?iq  nox  'hoyt 
've:rdo  dig  'li:bon  ?m  " 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY 


aft,  sep.  prefix,  off,  away  (from); 
see  ab'fallen,  ab'fyalten,  ab'ttefy* 
men,  ab'pfliicfen,  ab'jtefyen. 

91'foettb,  ber,  be§  -$,  bie  -e,  evening ;  | 
311  9lbenb  effen,  to  have  supper ; 
written  without  a  capital  in  ad- 
verbial expressions  like  ge'ftern 
a'benb,  fyeu'te  a'benb,  mor'gen 
a'benb. 

$'&enbrttl)(e),  bte,  evening  rest. 

91'ftettbfiM'ttettfdjettt,  ber,  be§  -8, 
evening  sunshine,  twilight  glow. 

9i'ftettbtt)0lfe,  bte,  bte  -n,  evening 
cloud. 

after,  but. 

aft'faflen,  ftel  ab',  ab'gefatfen  (fein), 
er  fallt  ab',  to  fall  off,  fall  away. 
:,  held ;  see  ab'fyalten. 

plucked,  picked ;  see 
ab'pfliicfen. 

ft  ab',  ab'gefyalten  (fya- 
ben),  er  fyalt  ab',  to  hold  (of  fes- 
tivities) . 

aft'italjm,  took  off ;  see  ab'nefymen. 

afc'ttetymen,  nalntt  ab',  ab'genommen 
(fyaben),  er  nimmt  ab',  to  take 
off. 

aft'$)fttirfett,  reg.  sep.  (fyaben),  to 
pick,  pluck. 


;og  ab',  ab'ge^ogen  (fya= 
ben),  to  draw  off,  take  away. 

adj,  excl.,  ah,  oh;  ba§  5lct),  the 
(crying  out  of)  oh  or  ah. 

adjt,  eight ;  see  also  under  bie  2lcf)t. 

5ld)tf   bte,  care,   attention ;  written' 
small   in    idiomatic    expressions 
like  in  ad)t  nefy'nten,  to  take  care 
of,  pay  attention  to. 

arfjt'maf,  eight  times. 

arf)t'5e!jul)tttt'bert,  eighteen  hun- 
dred. 

arf)t'5ef)tttr  eighteenth. 

/fcdj'5ettf  reg.  (^aben),  to  moan, 
groan  ;  pres.  part.,  cid^jenb. 

3Jbteu'f  ba§,  be§  -§,  bte  -8,  pro- 
nounced abjo',  farewell,  adieu. 

9lbref'fe,  bte,  bte  -n,  address. 

all ;  aller,  alle,  alle§,  all,  every ; 
alleg,  everything,  all;  Don  alle* 
bent',  from  all  that ;  sometimes 
indeclinable,  as  all  bie  33iidjer. 

affein'(c)f  alone. 

allerprtft',  hardest  of  all. 

al'lerlei,  indecl.,  all  kinds  of ;  aller= 
let  anbere^,  all  kinds  of  other 
things. 

al'letttetl,  all  the  time. 

al3f  conjunc.  with  past  time,  when, 
as  ;  correl.,  than,  as  ;  al§  ob,  as 
if ;  al§  tt)ie,  as. 


alju 


al'fo,  so,  then;  thus;  (never  also). 

alt,  alter,  titteft,  old ;  as  noun,  ber 
2tt'te,  the  old  man ;  bie  2tt'te,  the 
old  woman. 

9U'ter,  bag,  beg  -8,  bie  — ,  age,  old 
age. 

am,  for  an  bent ;  used  regularly 
with  the  adverbial  and  predicate 
superlative,  as  ant  fdjonftetu 

a'men,  amen. 

5lme'rtfu,  bag,  beg  -g,  America. 

2lmerifa'ner,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — , 
American  (noun). 

amerifa'ttifd),  American  (adjec- 
tive) . 

flit,  (!)  prep,  with  dat.  or  ace.,  to, 
at ;  rarely  on,  except  in  case  of 
time,  as  ant  @onn'tag  ;  an  etttmg 
tiorbei',  past ;  reid)  an,  rich  in ; 
laben  an,  to  regale  with;  ben'fen 
an,  to  think  of;  (2)  separable 
prefix  with  varying  meaning  ;  see 
an'fangen,  an'faffen,  an'fyaben, 
an'fontmen,  an'fdjanen,  an'jefyen, 
an'ftoften,  an'giefyen, 

Wn'bli&f  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  -e,  specta- 
cle, sight ;  to'btic!  bie'ten,  to  offer 
or  afford  a  spectacle  or  picture. 

an'ber ;  anberer,  anbere,  anbereg, 
other,  different,  else  ;  ettoag  an= 
bereg,  something  different;  atteg 
anbere,  everything  else. 

5In'ber3fein,  bag,  being  different, 
peculiarity. 

an'bertljan),  indecl.,  one  and  a  half. 

attetttatt'ber,  together. 

an'fangett,  ftng  an',  an;gefangen 
(^aben),  er  fa'ngt  an',  to  begin; 
with  the  infinitive. 


an'faffcttf    reg.    sep.    (fyaben),    to 

seize,  grasp,  take  hold  of. 
att'gefaugen,  begun ;  see  an'fangen* 
att'gefwnmett,    arrived;    see    an'* 

fommen. 

c^m,     agreeable,     pleasant;  1 

preceded  by  the  dative;    ntci^tg 

sln'gene^ntereg,     nothing     more 

pleasant. 
an'Jja&ett,  ^atte  an',  an'ge^abt  (^a* 

ben),  er  fyat  an',  to  have  on,  wear. 
att'fommen,  !ant  an',  an'gefontnten — 

(fetn),    to    arrive;     bag    tomntt 

baranf  an',  that  depends. 
5ttt'na  (bie),  Anna,  Ann,  Annie. 
att'fdjauett,   reg.    sep.    (fyaben),   to — 

gaze  at,  look  at. 
att'feljettf  fat)  an',  an'gefefyen  (^a*  — 

ben),  er  fiefyt  an',  to  look  at. 
$tt'ftrf)tf  bie,   bie  -en,  view   (thing 

looked  at) . 
5ht'firf|t3fartef  bie,  bie  -n,  picture 

postcard. 
^tt'ftmt^,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  to* 

fyriicfye,  claim ;  in  5lntymci)  ne^ 

men,  lay  claim  to. 
att'ftatt,  prep,  with  gen.,  instead  of,  in 

place  of;  also  with  infin.,  anftatt  jit 

ge^en,  instead  of  going;  asconjunc. 

with  bag,  anftatt  bag,  instead  of. 
an'ftoften,    ftieg    an',    an'geftogen 

(Ijaben),  er  ftogt    an',  to  clink 

glasses  (in  drinking  healths). 
tj,  bag,  beg  -eg,  bie  -e,  facef 

visage. 

'steljen,  gog  an',  an'ge^ogen  (Ija- 

ben),  to  draw  on,  put  on  ;  reflex., 

fic^  an'gteljen,  to  dress  oneself,  to 

get  dressed. 


cmsiifangett 


3 


Slug  c  lib  Ucf 


att'pfangen,  infin.  of  au'fangen 
with  ju. 

5ltt'5ttg,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  5ln$iige, 
suit  (of  clothes) . 

an'sufommett,  infin.  of  an'fom* 
men  with  gu. 

Sty'fel,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  2fyfet,  apple. 

5ty'felbaum,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  2fyfet= 
baume,  apple  tree. 

Stypetit',  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  ap- 
petite. 

5lr'&eit,  bie,  bie  -en,  work,  labor. 

ar'&eiten,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  work, 
labor. 

orm,  adj.,  poor. 

9ltm,  ber,  beg  -8,  bie  -e,  arm. 

5(rt,  bie,  bte  -en,  kind,  sort;  used, 
with  no  preposition  or  adjective 
before  a  following  word,  as  mit 
einer  2lrt  £tid)efn,  with  a  kind  of 
smile;  nad)  meiuer  $rt,  in  my 
own  way. 

afj,  ate  ;  see  effen. 

9lft,  ber,  be§  -(e)$,  bie  Sfte,  branch 
(of  a  tree). 

tuicfj,  also,  too,  besides. 
.^9(tt'e,  bie,  bie  -n,  meadow,  pasture, 
field. 

Uttf,  (1)  prep,  with  dat.  or  ace.,  on, 
upon,  onto ;  auf  bem  £anbe,  in  the 
country ;  auf  ben  @tra§en,  on  or 
in  the  streets ;  auf  bem  2ftarfte,  at 
the  market ;  auf  beutfd)  ober  eng= 
Hfd),  in  German  or  English  ;  auf 
bie  Sftenfur'  gefyen,  to  fight  (a 
duel)  ;  roarten  auf,  to  wait  for ; 
ftolj  auf,  proud  of ;  auf  biefe 
SBei'fe,  in  this  way  ;  auf  bag  befte, 
their  very  best ;  5luf  Sie'berfefyeu ! 


Till  we  meet  again  !  (2)  separable 

prefix,    usually    up :    auf'gefyen, 

auf'^abeu,  auf'fyatten,  auf^bren, 

auf'mactjen,       auf'fte^en,      auf'= 

rcacfyen. 
aufcinan'bcr,   at  each  other;  one 

upon  (or  at)  another. 
$hifgabe,  bie,  bie  -n,  exercise  (as 

for  instance  in  written  work  at 

school) . 
auf 'gefjalten,   stopped  ;     see    auf* 

ijaften. 
cwfgdjeu,  giug  auf,  auf gegaugen 

(jetn),  to  rise,  dawn. 
aufgeprt,  stopped;  see  auf^oren. 
auf^abcn,    fyatte    auf,    aufrget)abt 

(^aben),  to  have  on  (of  hats  or 

hoods) . 
auf Ijalten,  ^ielt  auf,  aiifgefyalten 

(^aben),  er  ^a'lt  auf\  to  stop,  to 

hold  up  (active). 
auf^iJren,    reg.   -sep.    (^aben),  to- 

stop,  cease  (neuter). 
auf'mac^cn,   reg.  sep.   (fyaben),  to 
j  open. 
•mufnaljme,    bie,    bie   -n,    sketchy 

view ;  photograph,  picture ;  eine 

^ufua^me    mac^en,    to    take    a 

picture. 
attffteijett,  ftanb  auf,  auf geftaubeu 

(fein),  to  rise,  get  up ;  to  stand 

up. 
auf  'warden,  reg.  sep.  (fein),  to  wake 

up,  awaken  (intrans.). 

,  infin.  ofatf'tyounwith 


5(tt'gc,  ba§,  beg  -$,  bie  -n,  eye. 
5ttt'gcnb(irf,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e, 
moment,  minute. 


Sluguft 


Iwueu 


ber,   beg  -g,   (the  month 
of)  August. 

9lu'jjltft   (ber),    (the  man's  name) 
August,  Augustus. 

ait3,  (1)  prep,  with  dat.,  out  of, 
out  from,  from  ;  ang  ©eibe,  of 
silk;  (2)  separable  prefix  :  ang'^ 
belnten,  aug'rufen,  ang'rnfyen, 
ang'feljen,  aug'fteigen,  a 
nen* 


re#.   sep.  (fyaben),  to 

stretch   out,  extend,   reflex.,  fid) 

ang'befynen,    to    stretch    (itself) 

out,  extend. 

f,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  Me  2Ut§^ 

briicfe,  expression. 
cw3ehuw'berge!jett,  ging  augeinan'* 

ber,  angeinan'bergegangen  (fein), 

to  separate,  part,  depart. 

,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bte  2lug'= 

ftiige,  trip,  tramp  ;  picnic. 
cw^'gefeljett,  looked  ;  see  au§'fel)en» 
ait3ge5etd)'netf     excellent,     distin- 

guished ;  see  au^eicfjnen. 
ou§'ntfenr   rief    au§',    cm§'gerufen 

(^aben),  to  call  out,  cry  out. 
au3'ttt!jett  ft(^f    reg.  sep.    (fyaben), 

reflex.,  to  rest  up,  get  thoroughly 

rested. 


ben),  er  fietyt  au^',  to  look,  ap- 
pear ;  to  have  a  certain  appear- 
ance. 

ou'^erljan),  prep,  with  gen.,  out- 
side (of). 

auS'ftetgeit,  ftieg  aits',  aus'geftiegen 
(fein),  to  climb  out,  get  out  (of 
the  train)  ;  2lu8fteigen  !  All  out  ! 

<w3'seiefyttett,  reg.  sep.   (ftaben),  to 


distinguish,  excel 
excellent,  distinguished. 
au3'$urit!)ettf    infln.    of 
ivith  ju. 


ber,    beg   -(e)g,   bie 
brook. 

$ab,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  iBaber,  bath. 

Ba'bett,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  bathe ;  bag 
33aben  (infln.  as  noun),  bathing, 
bath. 

23nljtt'l)0f,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  23afni= 
fyofe,  station  (of  a  railroad),  de- 
pot ;  auf  bem  or  ben  SBafynfyof,  at 
or  to  the  station. 

tetg,   ber,  beg  -(e)gr   bie  -e, 
station  platform. 

ilfc(e),  soon;  balb  .  .  .  balb,  now--" 
.   .  .  now  ;   at  one  time  ...  at 
another. 
if  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  SBd'Ee,  ball. 

S3anb,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  33anber, 

ribbon,  band. 

vbau'fctgcn,  reg.   (ijaben),  to  tamef"" 
subdue  ;  to  check,  restrain. 

fcang(e),  afraid  (of,  Dor,  with  dat.). 

fcau'gett,  reg.   (I)aben),  reflex,   and-^ 
impers.,  to  be  afraid,  to  fear. 

SScutf,  bie,  bie  23cinfe,  bench. 

SBarBarof'fa      (ber),      Barbarossa, 

Frederick  Redbeard. 
J  SBarm^cr'gtgFcit,  bie,  mercy?-^ 
art,   ber,   beg  -(e)g,    bie    SBarte, 
beard. 

J  23auf  ber,  beg  -(e)g,   bie   -e,   con- 
struction, building. 

fcatt'ett,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  build;  see 
also  toei'terbanen. 


Center 


^Berlin 


23att'er,  ber,  beg  -g  or  -n,  bie  -n, 
peasant,  farmer. 

tree. 
S3at)'erit,  bag,  Bavaria,  the  kingdom 

of  the  German  Empire  which  is 

next  largest  to  Prussia. 
SBe'djer,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  goblet, 

glass  (for  drinking). 
JtBe'rfer,  proper  name,  Becker. 
Befce'cfeit,   reg.   insep.    (fjaben),  to 

cover,  bedeck ;  past  part. ,  bebecft, 

covered. 
^-^ebett'tett,   reg.   insep.    (fyaben),  to 

mean  (of  things) . 
Befht'ben  ftcf),    befanb  ftd),  fid)  be* 

fnnben  (fyaben),  to  be;  to  do  (of 

health)  ;    to   find   oneself ;    28ie 

befinben   @ie  fid)?  How  do  you 

do  ?  How  are  you  ? 
BegaB',  past  o/bege'ben. 
Begamt',  began ;  see  begin'nen. 

i  fid),    begab'  fid),  fid)   be= 

ge'ben  (fjoben),  er  begibt'  fic^,  to 

go  ;  with  the  gen.,  to  waive  claim 

to,  to  renounce. 

tttf  reg.  insep.  (fein),  with 

dat.,  to  meet  (as  if  by  chance). 
.^J-Bcgc^'rcn,  reg.   insep.  (fyaben),  to 

desire,  wish  for,  long  for. 
V  Begctft'ern,  reg.  insep.  (fjaben),  to 

inspire,  uplift,  enthuse. 
Bcgitt'itctt,  begann',  begon'nen  (^a= 

ben),  to  begin. 

Begon'nen,  begun  ;  see  begin'nen. 
Begra'Ben,  begrnb',  begra'ben  (fja* 

ben),  er  begrcibt',  to  bury. 
v)  S3egrtff',  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  idea, 

notion. 


ettr  reg.  (fyaben),  to  greet. 

bc^ai'tcn,  beljielt',  befyaf'ten  (^a* 
ben),  er  behalf,  to  keep,  retain. 

fcet,  prep,  with  dat.,  by,  near,  be- 
side ;  at  the  house  of,  with  ;  un- 
der the  circumstances  of ;  bei 
fold)  em  ^Better,  in  such  weather. 

bei'fce,  both ;  two ;  it  follows  an 
article  or  demonstrative :  both 
the  books,  bie  beiben 
both  those  girls,  jene  beiben 
djen. 

fceieittim'ber,  together;  near  each 
other. 

23ehtf  ba§,  beg  -«,  bie  -e,  leg. 

behta'lje,  adv.,  almost,  nearly. 

fcei'^en,  big,  gebiffen  (^aben),  to 
bite. 

fcefam'r  befa'men,  got,  secured  ;  see 
belom'men. 

Bcfom'meu,  belam',  befom'men  (^a= 
ben),  to  get,  procure,  secure. 

fcefrau'^eit,  reg.  insep.  (fyaben),  to- 
crown  with  wreaths  ;  also  reflex. , 
fid)   befrcin^en,  to  crown  oneself 
with  a  wreath. 

&d'fettr  reg.  (fyaben),  to  bark. 

fcerett'r  ready,  prepared. 

fcerei'tettf  reg.  insep.  (^aben),  to 
prepare. 

SBerjj,  ber,  be^  -(e)8,  bie  -e,  moun- 
tain. 

ber'gen,  bargf  geborgen  (^aben),  er 
birgt,  to  hide,  conceal. 

$erg'gtyfelf  bev,  be§  -«,  bie  — , 
mountain  top,  summit  of  a  moun- 
tain. 

S3erHtt'f  ba§,  Berlin,  the  capital  of 
Germany. 


SSentf 


bitten 


,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie-e,  calling, 
mission. 

.   fceritfjmt',  famous. 
^Jl4iefdjei'i>ett,  befdjieb',  befcfyie'ben  (fya= 
ben),  to  bestow,  allot,  apportion. 

fcefrfjut^en,  re#.  msep.  (fyabeu),  to 
protect. 

&eftdj/tijjett,  re</.  insep.  (l)abeu),  to 
view,  survey,  inspect ;  to  see. 

fcefwt'ber,  adj.,  special,  peculiar, 
particular;  etttmg  23ejonbereg, 
anything  special. 

fcef0tt'ber3,  acfo.,  especially,  par- 
ticularly. 

fceffet,  better ;  comparative  of  gilt. 

&eft,  best;  superlative  of  gut;  am 
beften,  best;  see  under  am. 

',  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  existence; 
stability,  durability. 
4  23eftan'btgf  ett,   Me,   stability,  con- 
stancy, permanence. 

fceftaitfct',  covered  with  dust,  dusty. 

fcefte'fjen,  beftaub',  beftan'ben  (Ija* 
ben),  to  withstand ;  of  examina- 
tions, to  pass. 

reg.  insep.   (fyaben),   to 
order;  to  engage,  secure. 

fceftra'fett,  reg.  insep.  (fyabeu),  to 
punish ;  beftraft',  past  part.,  pun- 
ished. 

23efud)',  ber,  beg  -e(8),  bic  -e,  visit; 
gum  33ejuc^f  for  a  visit. 

^cfu'l^en,  reg.  insep.  (fyabeit),  to 
visit ;  of  lectures,  classes,  and 
schools,  to  attend. 

23efu'd)erf  ber,  beg  -$,  bie  — ,  visitor. 

be'tcn,  reg.   (fyabeti),  to  pray;  be- 

teub,  pres.  part.,  praying. 
•^betre'ten,  betrat',  betre'teu  (^abeu), 


er  betrttt',  to  step  upon,  tread, 
walk  on. 

fcetrttt',  see  betre'teu. 
J  bcttii^Ctt,    reg.  insep.   (^abeu),  to- 
afflict,  distress,  grieve  ;  betriibt', 
grieved,  sorrowful,  sad. 
S3ettf  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -eu,  bed; 
311  23ett,  to  bed. 

n,  reg.   insep.  (ijabeu),  to 
move. 


',  as  adv.,  lively. 

reg.  insep.   (fyabeu),  to 
pay,  pay  for. 
J  6ie'betr   honest,  upright,  straight- 

forward ;  loyal. 

ftie'gen,  bog,  gebo'geu  (^abeu),  to 
bend  {active);  reflex.,  to  sway, 
bend. 

SMer,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  beer. 
Hie'tenr   bot,  gebo'teti  (^abeu),  to 
offer,     afford;     Wbtid   bie'teu, 
offer  or  be  a  sight. 

bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -er,  pic- 
ture. 

tt'bett,  reg.  (^abeu),  to  form  ;  re-- 
flex., to  develop. 
iflett',    bag,    beg    -(c)«,    bie  -e, 
ticket  ;  see  also  gafyr'farte. 
in,  am  ;  see  jeln. 
^fctrgft,  conceal,  hide;  see  bergeu. 
bt$,  (1)  prep,  with   ace.,   till,   un- 
til ;  with  another  preposition,  as 
far  as,  up  to;  (2)  conjunc.,  till, 
until. 

Mftf  art,  are  ;  see  fein. 
fctt'te,  please;  you're  welcome,  'in 
answer  to  thank  you  ;  see  bitteu. 
fctt'ten,  bat,  gebeteu  (fyabeti),  to  ask 
(for,  urn,  with  ace.)  ;  (id))  bitte, 


blafcn 


please  ;  you're  welcome,  in  an- 
swer to  thank  you. 
fcfa'fett,  blieg,  gebfafen  (fyaben),  er 

bfaft,  to  blow. 
SBIatt,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  flatter, 

leaf. 

fcfatt,  blue. 
SBtouaug'leitt,  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  — , 

little  blue  eye;   plu.,   the  blue 

eyes  (of  maidens). 
58(au'ef  bie,  the  blue,  blueness. 
fclei'&en,  biieb,  geblieben  (fein),  to 

stay,  remain ;   ftefyen  bleiben,  to 

stop. 
fcli'rfen,    reg.     (Ijaben),    to    look, 

glance ;  see  also  fyinanfbiicfen. 
fe(ie&,  remained ;  see  bleiben. 
Minb,  blind;  ber  23Iin'be,  beg  -n, 

bie  -n,  the  blind  (man). 
fcltt'^Ctt,    reg.   (1)aben),   to  lighten, 

flash,   gleam,   sparkle ;  see  also 

brein'bli^en. 
&lu'f)ett,   reg.    (tyaben),   to  bloom, 

blossom ;    bftifyenb,   pres.    part., 

beautiful. 
!<Bluttt'd)Cttf  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  little 

flower,  floweret,  posy. 
25(ttrmcf  bie,  bie  -n,  flower. 
2$Itt'm(e)fettt,  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  — , 

little  flower,  floweret,  posy. 
Mtt'tttig,  adj.,  flowery. 
SBfatf  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  blood. 
J  SBtti'te,  bie,  bie  -n,  blossom,  bloom, 

flower. 
Soft,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,   bie  -g,  bob, 

double  runner  (for  coasting). 
230'beit,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  —  or  33bben, 

floor. 
feog,  bent ;  see  biegen. 


f  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  boat. 
r  broke  ;  see  bredE)en. 
brau'c^en,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  need, 
brauu,  brown. 

SBrautt  (ber),  proper  name,  Brown. 
irau'fctt,    reg.   (^aben),    to   roarp 
rush ;  hum  ;  injin.  as  noun,  bag 
53raufen,  the  roaring,  rushing. 
Sriwt'gettwttb,   bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie 
53rautgett)a'nber  or  (poetical)  -e, 
bridal  garment,  bridal  gown. 
fcre'djett,  brad),  gebro'cfyen  (^aben), 

er  bridjt,  to  break. 
Brcitf  broad,  wide. 
fcren'ttcn,    brannte,  gebrannt    (fya= 

ben),  to  burn,  glow. 
23rettf  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -er,  board. 
fetid),  break,  imperative  of  bredjetu 
SBrief,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  letter, 
epistle. 

,  brad^te,  gebrac^t  (^aben), 
to  bring ;  um  bie  @pracfye  bringen, 
to  rob  or  cheat  of  its  language. 
,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  bread. 
,  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  roll, 
bun. 
SBrii'rfe,  bie,  bie  -n,  bridge. 

f   ber,  beg  -g,  bie  SBriiber, 
brother. 

f  bie,  bie  53rufte,  breast. 

bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  ^Biit^er, 
book. 

•5  ^Bii^'fe,  bie,  bie  -n,  gun.  - 
S5ttt^'ftabcf  ber,  beg  -n(g),  bie  -n, 

letter  (of  the  alphabet). 
M'efettf    reg.     (fyaben),    to    bend, 

stoop. 

9311'be,  bie,  bie  -n,  booth. 
2htm'mcl5ug,    ber,    beg   -(e)g,  bie- 


fcttttt 


Ha* 


23ummefguge,  slow  train,  accom- 

modation train. 
fcttttt,  many-colored. 
SBurg,  Me,  bie  -en,  castle,  fortress. 
$urfrf)(e),  ber,  be3  -(e)n,bte  -(e)tt, 

youth,  lad  ;  fellow  ;  apprentice. 
Sufrf),  ber,  be$  -e«,  bie  SBiifrfje,  bush. 
SBu'fen,  ber,  be8  -8,  bte  —  ,  bosom, 

breast. 
23iit'ter,  bie,  butter. 


(£arl  (ber),  proper  name,  Charles, 

Carl  ;  see  also  $arL 
(parat'ter,  ber,  be§  -8,  bie  (Sljaraf* 

te~'re,  character. 
©drift  (ber),  for  (Eljrijhtf,  Christ; 

(also  a  Christian). 
(£le'mett3  (ber),  proper  name,  Clem- 

ent. 
(£0rne'(itt3  (ber),  proper  name,  Cor- 

nelius. 

J) 

ba,    (1)    adv.,  there  ;    and    then  ; 
here  ;    ber  2ett£  ift  ba,  spring  is 
here  ;  (2)  conjunc.,  as. 
bafcei',  adv.,   at    the    same  time  ; 

while  this  was  going  on. 
$ad),   bag,  beS  .  -(e)$,  Me  S)ad)er, 

roof  ;  a/so  proper  name,  Dach. 
iwrf)'tef  batten,  thought  ;  see  ben!etu 
bage'gen,  against  it  ;  etttmS  bogegen 

n,  to  have  any  objections. 
r',    along  ;    from  that  ;    bafyer 
ber  2Banberer,  that's  how 
the  wanderer  knew;   baljer  jagt 
man,  that's  why  they  say. 
l',  there,  thither;  along. 


)tt  (ber),  proper  name,  Dahn. 

at  that  time,  then. 
,  bie,  bte  -n,  lady. 
7,  with  it;  2Ba§  metnen  ©te 
bamit?    What  do  you  mean  by 
that? 

barn'mern,  reg.  (^aben),  to  dawn; 
to  be  twilight. 

banadj',  after  it;  Sa§  fommt  ba^ 
narf)?      What    are     the     conse- 
quences ?  banaci)  ftreben,  to  strive 
for  it. 

bane'fcett,  beside  it. 

^)anff  ber,  be$  -(e)^,  thanks,  grati- 
tude. 

bmt'fen,  reg.  (^aben),  with  dat.,  to 
thank ;  (id))  bcmfe,  I  thank  you, 
thanks. 

brunt,  then,  next. 

bar,  sep.  pref.  in  bar'fiifyren. 

baran',  of  it ;  baran  gebant,  built 
at  it,-  worked  on  it. 

barauf,  on  it;  ftol^  barauf,  proud 
of  it ;  barauf  anttDorten,  to  an- 
swer to  it ;  ba§  fommt  baranf  an, 
that  depends ;  as  conjunc.  for 
tDorauf7,  on  which. 

barau3',  out  of  it. 

barf,  barfft,  may  ;  see  biirfen. 

bar'fu^ren,  reg.  sep.  (^aben),  to 
lead  forth,  lead  along. 

bar  in',  in  it. 

barii^er,  over  it;  about  it. 

barum',  about  it;  ba'rum,  there- 
fore. 

ba3,  that ;  neuter  of  definite  article, 
ber,  bte,  ba§,  gen.,  be§,  the ;  also 
of  demonstrative,  ber,  bie,  ba8, 
gen.,  beffen,  that ;  2Bd$  fiir 


ten  ftnb  benn  bag  ?    What  kind  of 

costumes  are  those  ? 
conjunc.,  that. 

the  same   (thing)  ;    see 

berfelbe, 

5)atHb  (ber),  proper  name,  David, 
bawii',  of  it,  from  it ;  from  there, 

away, 
ban  or',    adv.    and   sep.  prefix,    in 

front  (of  it). 
ba'$tt,  for  that ;  baglt',  in  addition  ; 

to  it;  bap'  bie  -ftot  eg  $n)ittgt, 

necessity  compels  it  to. 
betfen,  reg.  (fjaben),  to  cover;  see 

also  p'berfen, 

e'gen,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  dagger  ; 

(voetic),  sword. 

reg.  (fyaben),  to  extend, 

stretch  ;  see  also  ang'befynen. 
betit,  beine,  bein,  your ;  thy. 
bcmf  dative  of  ber, 
ben,  accusative  of  ber, 
be'lteit,    dative  plural  of  demon- 
strative ber, 
bett'fen,  barf)te,  gebarfjt  (fyaben),  to 

think  (of,  an,  with  ace. ) ;  see  also 

nadj'benfen, 
betttt,    (1)    interrogative    particle, 

usually  omitted  in  translation; 

(2)  conjunction  with  normal  or- 
der, for. 
ber,  bie,  bag,  (1)  gen.,  be8,  ber,  be§, 

def.  art.,  the;    (2)    gen.,  beffen, 

beren,  beffen,  demonst. ,  that ;  (3) 

gen.,    beffen,  beren,    beffen,    rel. 

pron.,  who,  which,  that. 
berje'ttige,     bieie'nige,    basje'nige, 

gen.,  beSje'nigen,  berje'nigen,  be$= 

je'nigen,  that,  the  one. 


berfel'&e,    biefetbe,    ba^fetbe,  gen., 
beSfelben,  berfelben,  be^felben,  the 


il',  conjunc.,  while. 

be^f  genitive  of  article  ber. 

be§'f)dU),  therefore,  sor~" 

bcf'fcnf  whose,  genitive  of  relative 
ber  or  tnelcfyer. 

be'ftor    correlative  in  je  .  .  ,  befto,  ^ 
the  ...  the. 

beutfrff,  adj.,  German;  as  noun, 
ba«  3)eutfrf)e,  be^  2)entfd)en,  the 
German  language  ;  in$  S)eut((i)e, 
into  German;  ber  2)entf(i)e,  be^ 
2)entfrf)en,  the  German  (man). 

$eutfdjf  bag,  be«  -en,  German  (lan- 
guage) ;  2)eutfd)  tyrecijen,  to 
speak  German  ;  2)eutfrf)  fd^retben, 
to  write  German  ;  written  with- 
out a  capital  in  the  idiom  anf 
beutfd),  in  German. 

^cittf^'Ianb,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  Ger- 
many. 

bit^f  thee,  accusative  o/bu. 

^tc^'tcr,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  —  ,  poet. 

btrf,  thick  ;  of  persons,  fat. 

$>t'belbum  (bag),  Deedeldum,  an 
imaginary  place. 

bie,  see  ber, 

bie'nen,  reg.  (Ijaben),  with  dat.,  to 
serve  ;  ifiBomit  fann  id)  bienen  ? 
What  can  I  do  for  you  ? 

biefel'fce,  biefetben,  see  berfelbe, 

bte'fer,  biefe,  biefeg  or  bteg,  this  ; 
plu.,  these;  bieg  finb,  these 
are. 

•Sing,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  thing. 

bit,  thee,  to  thee,  dative  of  bn. 
,  bie,  bie  -n,  maid,  girl. 


bod) 


10 


eifrig 


bod),  yet,  after  all ;  with  imperative, 

pray  ;  in  exclamations,  why. 
$>of tor,  ber,  beg  -g,  Me  S)ofto'ren, 

doctor. 

$)om,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  cathe- 
dral. 

$9' mm,  bie,  the  Danube  (river). 
$on'tter3tag,  bet,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e, 

Thursday. 
$)orf,   bag,  be§  -(e)g,  bie  S)orfer, 

village. 
$orn,    ber,   beg  -(e)g,  bie  -en  or 

S)orner,  thorn. 
bort,  there,  yonder. 
brtmf,  for  barauf,  thereupon. 
brauft,   brau'ffeit,   outside,  out  of 

doors ;  out  there. 
bret,  three. 

bmljtttt'beri,  three  hundred. 
btci'ma(r  three  times,  thrice. 
^m'marfftiicf,  bag,  beg  -(e)8,  bie  -e, 

three-mark  piece. 
brcitt,  for  bar  in,  in  it. 
bmtt'&fhjett,  reg.  sep.  (fyaben),  to 

sparkle  in  it. 
brei'f?igf  thirty. 

brci'uttbcitt^a(b'r  three  and  a  half. 
brei'sel)tttf  thirteenth. 
britt,  third. 

brit'tefjani,  two  and  a  half. 
£>nt'tef,   bag,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  third 

part. 

bnt'tCttS,  thirdly. 
btii'bcr/or  barii'ber,  over  it. 
brumf  for  barnm,  therefore. 
bruu'tCttr  below,  down  there. 
bitf  beiner,  bir,  bid),  thou  ;  intimate, 

you. 
$>uefl',  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  duel. 


^btt(b'famf  lenient, 

bnmm,  stupid. 

bUtt'fc(f  dark,  gloomy. 

btttt'felgruitf  dark  green. 

btttt'felttf  reg.  (f)aben),  to  grow  dark. 

but(^f  (1)  prep,  with  ace.,  through  ; 
showing  the  means,  by;  (2)  com- 
mon prefix,  through. 

burrfjrei'fett,  bnrc^rei'fte,  burc^rciff 
(t)aben),  to  travel  through;  to 
udo"  (a  country). 

burd)3,  for  bnrd^  bag* 

bitr'fett,  burf'te,  gebnrft'  or  biir'fen 
(fyaben),  er  barf,  to  be  permitted; 
may. 

burften,  past  of  biirfen, 
4bilrrf  dry,  withered. 

bttt'ftig,  thirsty. 

bii'fter,  dark,  gloomy,  threatening. 


e'bett,  just,  as  in  just  so,  just  now  ; 

eben  tootten,  to  be  about  to,  be 

just  going  to. 
e'bettfo,  just  as;  ebenfo  alt,  just  as 

old. 
(£'fcerl)arb     (ber">,    proper     name, 

Eberhard. 

e(^tf  genuine,  "  regular.'-^ 
(£'dt,  bie,  bie  -n,  corner.-"' 
e'bel,  inflected :  ebter,  eble,  ebleg  ^ 

compared :  ebter,  ebetft,  noble. 
(S'bclfteitt,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  -e,  pre- 
cious stone,  gem,  jewel. 
e'ljef  conjunc.,  before* 
@^rc,  bie,  bie  -n,  honor. 
dj'rett,  reg.  (^aben),  to  honor. 

zealous(ly),      eager(ly)T-x 

keen(ly). 


etgen 


11 


(Sngel 


ci'gcn,  etg(e)ner,   eig(e)ne,   etg(e> 

neg,  own. 

(£i'Ie,  bte,  haste,  hurry. 
ei'len,   reg.    (fyaben  or  fein,   §  76, 

Note),  to  hasten,  hurry. 
v/(£i'mer,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  pail. 
einf  etne,  ein,  a,  an ;  one  ;  ber  eine, 

the  one;   also  sep.  prefix:   etn'- 

fallen,     etn'fefyren,     ein'fdjenlen, 

etn'fcfylafen,   etn'fcfyliefjen,  ein'ftn* 

gen,  etn'ftetgen,  etn'tan^en,  etn'- 

rtnegen. 
eutan'fcer,  one  another,  each  other ; 

usually    written     with    another 

word:  tmtetnan'ber. 
ein'faflen,     ftel    etn',     ein'gef  alien 

(fein),  eg  fa' lit  tntr  etn',  with  dat., 

to  occur  to ;   eg  fa'llt  nttr  ntc^t 

etn,  I  shouldn't  think  of  (doing, 

etc.}. 

ettt'gefaflettf  see  ein'fallen. 
ein'gclc^tct,  turned  in,  put  up ;  see 

etn'fefyren. 
ci'ntg,  adj.,  united. 
ei'ttigcf  plu.  prow.,  some,  several; 

in  sing.,  einige  3e^/  some  time. 
®i'mglcitf    bte,  unity,  oneness  of 

feeling,  union. 
©ttt'feljr,     bte,     lodging;     shelter; 

stay  (at  a  hotel). 
etn'feljrettf  reg.  sep.  (fein),  to  turn 

in,  put  up  (at  a  hotel) . 
eitt'tttaf,  once,  once  upon  a  time. 
ettt3,  indecl.,  one ;  fyalb  etng,  half 

past  twelve  ;  nad)  etng,  after  one 

o'clock. 

ettt'fam,  lonely,  lonesome  ;  alone, 
v  eitt'fdjettfettr  reg.  sep.  (Ijaben),  to 

pour  out. 


eitt'fdjlafen,  f^lief  ein',  etn'gefrfjlafen 
(fein),  er  fd^ldft  ein,  imperative, 
fcfylaf  etn',  to  go  to  sleep,  fall 
asleep. 

eitt'fdjlieftett,  fcfjloft  etn;,  etn'g^. 
fcfyloffen  (l)aben),  to  shut  in,  en- 
close. 

eitt'ftttgen,  fang  etn',  etn'gefnngen 
(Ijaben),  to  sing  to  sleep. 

eittft,  referring  to  the  past,  once, 
formerly ;  to  the  future,  some 
day,  sometime. 

eitt'fteigen,  ftteg  ein',  etn'geftiegen 
(fein),  to  climb  in ;  to  board  (a 
train)  ;  (Sin'ftetgen!  All  aboard  ! 

citt'tan5enf  reg.  sep.  (Ijaben),  to 
dance  to  sleep. 

($itt'tritt3farte,  bie,  bie  -n,  ticket  of 
admission. 

eitt'ttriegett,  reg.  sep.  (fyaben),  to 
rock  to  sleep  (in  a  cradle) . 

eitt'sigf  single  ;  only ;  !etn  einjig, 
not  a  single. 

(£i'fettad)f  bag,  proper  name,  Eise- 
nach. 

(Si'fenfialjtt,  bte,  bte  -n,  railroad, 
railway. 

df,  eleven. 
Ul'fCttBcittCtnf  (of)  ivory  (adjective). 

(£ffa,  bte,  proper  name,  Elsa. 

($(tcrttf  bie,  pi.,  parents. 

($tt't>e,  ba6,  be8  -S,  bte  -n,  end. 

cn'bcttf  reg.  (fyaben),  to  end,  finish, 
terminate. 

en'btgen,  reg.  (Ijaben),  to  end,  fin- 
ish, terminate. 

Cttb'Urf),  finally,  at  last. 

eng,  narrow  ;  closed 

(£n'ge(,  ber,  be§  -8,  bte  — ,  angel. 


12 


cr^cficn 


b,  ba§,  proper  name,  Eng- 
land. 

eitg'fifd),  English;  as  noun,  ba$ 
(SngU(d)(e),  be§  -n,  the  English 
language;  Ghiglifd)  fpredjen,  to 
speak  English  ;  auf  englifdj,  in 
English.  Compare  bentfd)  and 


^> 


reg.  insep.  (fyaben),  to 

forego,    get    along    without,    do 

without. 
etttfcte'ten,    entbot',    entbo'ten  (fya- 

ben),  to  summon. 
-Ctttferttt',  away,  distant  from. 
eittge'gen,  (1)  prep,  with  dat.  which 

it  follows,  to  meet,  toward  ;  ifym 

entgegen,   to  meet  him,   toward 

him;  (2)  separable  prefix:  ent- 

ge'genfliegen. 
eittge'gettfUegett,  flog  entge'gen,  ent* 

ge'gengeftogen     (fein),     to     fly 

toward. 
entgUm'mett,  entglomm',  entglom'* 

men  (fein),  to  catch  fire  ;  to  begin 

to  glow. 
entglom'mett,  begun  to  glow;  see 

entgUtn'men. 
cnt^at'tett,  ent^ieft',  cntftal'ten  (^a- 

ben),    e§    ctit^filt',    to    contain, 

hold. 
«/  ent!om'mcnf    cntfam',    entfom'men 

(fein),  to  escape,  get  away. 
Ctttlaitfl',  prep,  with  ace.  which  it 

follows,  along  ;  Me  ©tra'fje  ent= 

(ang',  along  the  street. 

tt,  cntfdfttog',  cntf^tof'fen 
to  decide. 
Ctttf  e^lof  ;f  enr     decided  ;     see     ent= 

fdjlie'gen, 


terrible,    dreadful(ly), 

frightful(ly). 

entftanb',     entftan'ben 

(fein),  to  arise,  come  into  exis- 

tence, result  from. 
erf  feiner,  ifym,  i^n,  he  ;  referring 

to  masculine  nouns,  it. 
erfcau'en,    reg.  insep.  (I)  a  ben),  to 

build,  construct,  erect. 
erfcit'teit,  erbat',  erbe'ten   (^aben), 

to  get  by  begging. 
erfelit'ljettf    reg.    insep.    (fein),    to 

bloom,  blossom  ;  to  (come  into) 

flower. 
<£r'fce,    bte,   earth  ;   aitf  (Srben,   on 

earth    {old  weak  dative)  ;   com- 

pare anf  ber  $eiben. 
^erffe'tyett,  reg.  insep.  (l)aben),  to  get 

by  pleading. 
erfreu'en,   reg.  insep.   (fyaben),  to 

please,  give  joy  to. 
erfri'fdjett,  reg.  insep.  (fyaben),  to 

refresh;     also     reflex.,    fief)     er= 

frif(f)en,  to  get  refreshed. 
(Srfri'fdjttttg,    bie,  bie  -enr  refresh- 

ment. 

erfitl'Ien,  reg.  insep.  (fyaben),  fulfil. 
ergtc^ctt  ft^r   ergog'  ftdj,  ftd^  er^ 

gof'fen    (^aben),   to  pour    forth, 

flow  forth. 
erglii'fjett,  reg.  insep.  (fein),  begin 

to  glow- 
ergrei'fett,   ergrtff',  ergrif'fen   (Ija-^~ 

ben),  to  grasp. 
er^artcnf  erl)te(t',  er^al'ten  (^aben)f^ 

er  er^att',  to  keep  ;  to  receive. 
erfje'feen,  erf)ob',  er^o'ben  (^aben), 

to  raise,    lift  ;    also  reflex.,   fid) 

erfye'ben,  to  rise  ;  to  lift  oneself. 


ert)tclt 


13 


etmg 


erljieft',    kept ;    received ;    see    er* 

fjaCtetu 

erijob',  lifted  ;  see  erfje'ben. 
eritt'ttern,   reg.  insep.  (fyaben),  to 

remind;   also   reflex.,   fid)   erttt'5 

nern,  to  remember,  with  gen. 
erfam'pfen,  reg.  insep.  (fyaben),  to 

get  by  fighting. 

erfamtt',  recognized ;  see  erfennen. 
erlen'nen,  erfann'te,  erfannf   (fya= 

ben),  to  recognize. 
erfla'rett,   reg.  insep.   (fyaben),  to 

explain  ;  also  reflex.,  fid)  erflciren, 

to  explain  oneself. 

,  reg.  insep.  (fyaben),  with 

dat.,  to  allow,  permit. 
erlet'ben,  erlitt',  edit' ten   (fyaben), 

to  suffer ;    to   bear,    endure ;    to 

put  up  with. 
<$d'(en)lottig,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  Me  -e, 

king  of  the  elves  or  fairies. 
edit'tett,  see  erleibetu 
erfo'fen,    reg.    insep.    (fyabett),    to 

deliver. 

(£rttft  (ber),  proper  name,  Ernest. 
erqiu'tfett,   reg.  insep.  (^aben)f  to 

refresh,  restore. 
errei'djen,   reg.  insep.  (^aben),  to 

reach,  attain ;  to  gain, 
•/errttt'gett,   erra'ng',  errun'gen   (^)a= 

ben),  to  get  by  wrestling  or  striv- 
ing. 
erfdjanen,  reg.  insep.  (fein);  also 

erfd)ott,   erfd)otfen   (fein),   to    re- 
sound. 
erft,  adv. ,  for  the  first  time  ;  just ; 

only,  not  till;   also  for 

first. 
er'ftenS,  in  the  first  place. 


er'fter,  erfte,  erfteS,  first. 

erftrei'ten,  erftrttt',  erftrtt'ten  (^a* 
ben),  to  get  by  strife   or  fight- 
ing. 
'crtraf,  killed  ;  see  ertre'ten. 

ertrc'ten,  ertrat',  ertre'ten  (Ijaben), 
er  ertritt',  to  kill  by  stepping  on, 
trample  to  death. 

erttw'd)ettr  re#.  insep.  (fein),  to 
awaken,  wake  up  (intrans.). 

emwr'tett,  reg.  insep.  (Ijaben),  to 
expect,  await. 

rtt,  reg.  insep.  (fyaben),  to 
reply,  answer. 

en,  reg.  insep.  (fyaben),  to 
tell,  relate ;  see  also  tt)ei/terer= 
gafjlen. 

^r^a^'lttttg,  bte,  bte  -en,  story,  ac- 
count. 

e3,  feiner,  tfytn,  e§,  it ;  with  fein  and 
plural  attribute,  they ;  eg  finb 
SBii'djer,  they  are  books;  some- 
times, there  :  eg  gtbt,  there  is  or 
are ;  eg  lamen  brei  Scanner,  there 
came  three  men. 

ef'fett,  aft,  gegeffen  (t)aben),  bn  iff  eft 
or  iftt,  er  ijjt,  to  eat ;  as  noun, 
bag  (Sffen,  the  meal ;  dinnerr 
supper. 

®g^tmmerr  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  — , 
dining  room. 

et'tt)a3,  something,  anything ;  some  ; 
a  following  adjective  is  neuter 
and  (except  anber)  is  written  with 
a  capital. 

Cttt^f  you  ;  see  iljr. 

en'er,  your ;  see  i^r. 

®uange'Humr  bag  beg,  -g,  gospel. 

e'ttitg,  eternal,  forever. 


14 


(S'ttitgfett,  bie,  eternity  ;  in  (Snngreit, 

forever  and  ever. 
G^a'mett,  bag,  beg  -g,  tie  —  or  (£ra= 

mina,  examination,  test. 

8f 

SaJj'ne,  bie,  bte  -n,  flag. 

fasten,   fnljr,    gefafyren    (fein),  er 

fafyrt,  to  drive;    to  ride,  go  (by 

train)  ;  (mtt)  @d)Utten  faljren,  to 

coast,  go  coasting  ;  see  also  fort'= 

fafyren,  fyinab'fafyren. 
$aljr'farte,  bie,  bie  -n,  ticket  (for 

the  train). 
fal'len,  ftel,  gefatten  (fein),  er  fattt, 

to  fall  ;   see  also  ab'fatlen,  ein'* 

fatten. 
3faHer3le&en  (ber),  proper  name, 

Fallerslebeu. 

faflt,  see  fatten  and  ein'fatlen. 
f  ftffdj,    false  ;    in    the    classroom, 

wrong. 
gatm'tte,    bie,  bie  -n  (four  sylla- 

bles), family. 

fanfc,  fan'ben,  found,  see  finbetu 
fan'gcn,  fing,  gefangen  (t)aben),  er 

fangt,   to  catch  ;    see   also  an'= 


??at'Bef  bie,  bie  -n,  color. 

faf'fettf    reg.     (^aben),    to    clasp, 

grasp  ;  see  also  cm'faffetu 
faft,  almost,  nearly. 
gauftf  bie,  bie  gtiufte,  fist  ;  hand. 
ferf)'ten,  fot^t,  gefo^ten  (Ijaben),  er 

ficfyt,  to  fence  ;  to  fight. 
Se'fcer,  bie,  bie  -n,  pen  ;  feather. 
gc'bcrbcttf  bag,  be§  -(e)g,  bie  -en, 

featherbed,  feather  mattress. 

'flf  f°r  fertig,  ready. 


^c^'(crf  ber,  be§  -§,  bie  — ,  mistake, 

error. 

fci'crttr  feg.  (^aben),  to  celebrate. 
^ei'ertag^'ber,  be^  -(e)g,   bie  -e, 

holiday. 
fettt,  fine; fit) plicate. 

mbf  ber,  £o?>  -(e)^,  bie-e,  enemy. 

§,  i  "r'i-(e)§,  bie  -er,  field. 
H£  (ber);  proper  name,  Felix. 
,  ber,  t,^  -en,  bie  -en;  also  ber 

geffen,  be§  -^,  bie  — ,  rock. 
gel'feimff,  bag,  beg  -(e)S,  bie  -e, 

rocky  reef. 

$en'fterf  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  win- 
dow. 
$c'riettf  bie,  plu.,  three  syllables, 

vacation,    holidays. 
fettt,  far,  distant. 
3fer'ttef  bie,  distance. 
fet'tig,  ready ;  done,  finished. 
$eft,    bag,  beg  -(e)g,  -e,   festival, 

celebration ;  holiday. 
fcftr  firm,  fixed,  solid. 
gcft'gefangf  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  geft^ 

gefa'nge,  festival  song. 
^eft'K^lctt,  bie,  bie  -en,  festivity. 
§Ctt'er,  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  fire. 
gen' credit,  bie,  bie  -en,  the  glow 

of  fire  ;  fiery  heat ;  fiery  red. 
fCtt'rig,    fiery,    enthusiastic ;    adv., 

vigorously,  with  fire. 
gfte'fcer,  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  fever. 
fttt'bett,  fanb,  gefnn'ben  (fyaben),  to 

find  ;  see  also  ftatt'finben. 
fittg,   ftngen,  see  fangen  and  an'- 

fangen, 

^in'gerf  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  finger. 
3«ittl(e),  ber,  beg  -(e)n,  bie  -(e)n, 

finch. 


15 


,  ber,  beg  -eg,  bie  -e,  fish. 
,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  fisher. 
,  ber,  beg  glares,  flax. 
flat'tern,  re#.  (fyaben  or  {  at,  §  76, 

JVbte),  to  flutter,  flit. 
/ftedj'tett,  ftodjt,  geflodjten    ;aben),  er 

fttdjt,  to  twine,  weav* 
gfteifdJr  bag,  be§  -eg,         -e,  meat ; 

flesh. 
$lei'fdjer,    ber,    beg    -&,    bie   — , 

butcher. 

flei'fjtg,    fteigtger,   ffeifjtgjl,  indus- 
trious (ly)  ;  fleigig  lernen,  to  study 
hard. 
ftte'gen,  flog,  geflo'gen  (fein),  to  fly; 

see  also  ^u'fUegetu 
ffic'^ettf  f(ot),  gefto'^en  (fcin),  to  flee. 
fKe'fcen,    M  geflof'fen  (fcin),  to 

flow. 
**»3fltn'tef  bie,  bie  -n,  gun. 

^(ii'gc(f  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  wing. 

ber,  beg^Iuffeg,  bie  glitffe, 
river. 

f  bie,  bie  -en,  flood ;  stream  ; 
water. 

r  fought ;  see  fedjteiu 
fo('gettf  reg.  (fein),  with  dat.,   to 
follow. 

'ne  (ber),  proper  name,  Fon- 
tane. 

bie,  bie  -en,  form,  shape. 
fort,  a<fo.  and  sep.  prefix,  away ; 
forth,  on ;    see  also  fort'fafyren, 
fort'gefyen,  fort'fyelfen,  fort'fe^en. 
fott^fa^ren,  fnl)r  fort',  fort'gefa^ren 
(^aben),  er  fafyrt  fort',  to  con- 
tinue. 

fort'fuljrett,   continued;    see   fort'* 
fa^ren. 


fort'0efal)fettf  continued ;  see  fort'* 
fafyren. 

fort'ge^ett,  ging  fort7,  fort'gegangen 
(fein),  to  go  away,  go  forth. 

fort'I)e(fett,  fjalf  fort',  fort'ge^olfen 
(fyaben),  er  i)Uft  bir  fort',  .with 
dat.,  to  help  out,  help  along. 

fort'fc^enf  reg.  sep.  (fyaben),  to 
continue  (transitive). 

fort'pfafjren,  infin.  of  fort'fafjren 
with  ^n. 

$ra'gef  bie,  bie  -n,  question. 

fra'gcn,  reg.  (^aben),  to  ask  (after, 
nad),  with  dat.)  ;  also  reflex  im- 
pers.,  eg  fragt  ftrf),  it  is  a  question. 

$ra'ger,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  ques- 
tioner. 

j,  bag,  France. 

ber,    beg   -n,    bie   -n, 
Frenchman. 

f tattoo  'fifdjr  French  ;  use  and  capi- 
talization is  like  that  of  bentfrf), 

gftau,  bie,  bie  -en,  woman  ;  wife  ; 
as  title,  Mrs. 

8frrw'ettttt0i)ef  bie,  bie  -n,  woman's 
style,  woman's  fashion. 

3frau'Ietttf  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  young 
lady  ;  as  title,  Miss. 

fret,  free(ly)  ;  of  rooms,  vacant, 
unoccupied;  as  noun,  ber  greie, 
beg  -n,  bie  -n,  the  free  man. 

gfrei'fcurg  (bag),  proper  name,  (the 
city  of)  Freiburg. 

$rei'I)ettr  bie,  freedom. 

fm'toffen,  Itcg  fret',  frei;ge(affen 
(fyaben),  er  fajst  fret',  to  set  free; 
to  free. 

fremb,  strange,  foreign. 

gfreu'be,  bie,  bie  -n,  joy,  happiness; 


frcubtg 


16 


toor  (cutter  grenb',  for  pure  (or 

very)  joy. 

freu'Mg,  joyful,  happy. 
frettb'&flfl,  joyful,  happy. 
freu'ett,  reg.    (fyctben)    impers.,  to 

make  glad ;  e§  frent  mid),  I  am 

glad  ;  also  reflex.,  ftd)  freuen,  to 

be  glad. 
3-reiwb,    ber,    beg  -(e)8,    bte    -e, 

friend. 
frettttb'Udj,  friendly,  kind ;  freunb= 

lid)  ft,  in  a  most  friendly  way. 
3frie'be(n),  ber,  beg  -(n)g,  peace. 
^rieb'(c)rtt^    (ber),  proper  name, 

Frederick. 
frtfrfj,  fresh. 
^ri^  (ber),  proper  name,  Fritz, 

Fred. 

Joyous,  glad,  pleased. 
'Ud),  cheerful,  joyful,  blithe. 
frolj'fotfen,  reg.  (fyctben),  to  exult, 

shout  for  joy. 
fromm,  pious,  religious. 
gfro'ttC,      bie,     drudgery,      unpaid 

labor;  serfdom. 
friiljf    friil)er,    early,  earlier ;  soon, 

sooner;  ntorgen  frii^,  to-morrow 

morning. 

g,  ber,  be§  -§,  bte  -e,  spring. 
g,    bie,   premoni- 
tion of  spring. 

fe    ber, 
^,  bie  grii 

spring  greeting. 
grttVHttg^Ucbf  ba§,  be«  -(e)g,  bie 

-er,  spring  song. 
5riil)'ftitrff   bag,  be§  -(e)g,  bie  -e, 

breakfast. 
fiigettf  see  $ 


fuljr,  fufy'ren,  see  fafy'ren  and  fort'* 
fafyren. 

fiilj'rett,  reg.  (fyaben),  lead;  of 
arms,  SBctffen,  to  bear;  see  also 
bar'fiifyren. 

^itlj'rer,  ber,  beg  -g,  bte  — ,  guide ; 
leader. 

3WIe,  bte,  fulness  ;  plenty. 

fitttf,  five. 

fitttfljuttbert,  five  hundred. 

fitttft,  fifth. 

fitttfttttb^ttWtt^ig,  twenty-five. 

fitttf'sig,  fifty  ;  etne  3JtorI  fftnfgig, 
a  mark  and  a  half  (fifty  pfen- 
nigs) ;  gtoei  $forf  fiinfgig,  two 
marks  and  a  half. 

iftttt'Mtt,  reg.  (l)aben),  to  sparkle. 

fiit,  prep,  with  ace.,  for;  ttmg  fiir, 
what  kind  of. 

$urdjt,  bie,  fear. 

fttre^t'fiar,  fearful(ly),  terrible, 
dreadful  (ly). 

fiirr^'tcnf  reg.  (fyaben),  to  fear;  also 
reflex.,  ftcfy  fiirt^ten,  to  be  afraid 
(of,  t)or  with  dat.). 

fitt^r  for  the ;  see  fiir. 

3fiirftf  ber,  beg  -en,  bie  -en,  ap- 
pointed prince,  as  distinguished 
from  ber  $rtn$,  prince  of  royal 
blood ;  also  chief,  ruler. 
\f  ber,  beg  5u6e^  oie  5^6ef  ^oot  5 
fltfj,  on  foot,  afoot. 


gaBf  ga'ben,  gave  ;  see  ge'ben, 
(^a^e(r  bte,  bte  -n,  fork. 
Valeric',  bte,  bte  -n,  gallery ;  hall. 
f  adj.,  entire,  whole,  all;  ein 
J,  a   whole;   indecl.  when 


gar 


17 


gegen 


used  alone:  gang  3)eutfd)'tanb, 
all  Germany;  adv.,  quite,  en- 
tirely. 

gat,  in  fact ;  really  ;  at  all. 

,®arbi'tte,  Me,  bie  -n,  curtain. 

®ar'tett,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  (Mr'ten, 
garden. 

®aft,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  ©afte, 
guest ;  gu  ©a'fte,  as  a  guest. 

®aft'I)0f,  ber,  beg  (-e)g,  bie  ©aft'* 
fjofe,  hotel,  inn. 

gear'&ettet,  worked  ;  see  ar'beiten. 

gefca'bet,  bathed ;  see  ba'ben. 

ge&fitt'btgt,  tamed,  subdued ;  see 
ban'bigetu 

©eftfttt'fce,  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  build- 
ing, edifice. 

gefcaut',  built ;  see  ban'en. 

ge'&eit,  gab,  gegeben  (fyaben),  er 
gibt,  to  give  ;  eg  gibt,  there  is, 
there  are;  28a3  gibt'g?  What's 
up? 

^cdet'f  ba£,  be^  —  (c)«,  bie  -e, 
prayer. 

gefce'teit,  asked ;  see  btt'ten. 

^JcBir'ge,  bag,  be0  -8,  bie  — ,  moun- 
tains, mountain  range. 

ge&tte'&ettf  stayed  ;  see  blei'ben. 

gcftrarfjf,  brought ;  given ;  see 
brtn'geru 

gcbrau'rf|enf  reg.  insep.  (^aben),  to 
use,  make  use  of. 

ge&rtwdjt',  needed  ;  see  brau'cfjen  ; 
also  uses  (gebrau'cfyen). 
^  bent ;  see  bii'cfetu 
trf  bie,  birth. 

gf  ber,  be§  -(e)g,  bie  -e, 
birthday. 

gebadjt',  thought ;  see  ben'fen. 


,    ber,    beg   -tt$,    bie  -n, 

thought. 

gcban'fettt>ottf  pensive,  thoughtful. 
gebanft'r  thanked;  see  ban'fetu 
^ebei'^cn,  gebie^',  gebie'^en  (t)aben>7" 

to  thrive,  nourish. 
®ebtrf)t'f    bag,    beg   -(e)g,  bie  -e, 

poem. 

®ebttlb',  bie,  patience.-- 
gccn'btgt,  ended ;  see  enrbtgen. 
©cfa^r^  bie,  bie  -en,  danger. 
geffiljr'Itrf),  dangerous ;   etttmg  ©e= 

f(i^r'tid)eg,  something  dangerous. 

efaljr'te,  ber,  beg  -n,  bie  -n,  com- 
panion. 
gefanett,  gefief,  gefaden  (^aben)<^ 

er    gefa'tlt'   mir,     with   dat.,    to 

please. 

gefaf'lett,  fallen  ;  see  faEen. 
gefan'gett,  caught ;  see  fangen  ;  ge= 

fan'gen  genom^men,  taken  pris- 
oner. 
(^efang'tti^  bag,  beg  ©efdngniffeg^ 

bie  ©efdngntffe,  prison,  jail. 
i*$efte'ber,  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  plum-  - 

age  ;  feathers. 

gefieP,  pleased ;  see  gefal'fen. 
gcfoc^'tctt,  fought";  see  fed) 'ten. 
gefolgt',  followed;  see  fol'gen. 
gcffu'gcttf  flown ;  see  fHe'gen ;  !am 

gefto'gen,  came  flying. 
ge^o'ljen,  fled ;  see  fUe^en. 
gcfloffcn,  flowed  ;  see  flte'feen. 
gefragtrf  asked;  see  fra'gen. 
geftttt'betlf  found ;  see  fin'ben. 
gegan'gcn,  gone ;  see  ge'fyen. 
gege'Bcnf  given;  see  ge'ben. 
ge'gcnf   prep,   with  ace.,   toward ; 

against;  to. 


18 


gefagt 


®e'gettb,  tie,  tie  -en,  country,  re- 
gion, place ;  surroundings,  en- 
virons. 

gegef'fett,  eaten ;  see  ef'fetu 
gcglaubt',  believed  ;  see  glan'ben. 
geljafct',  had;  see  fya'ben. 
geljal'ten,  held ;  see  fyal'ten, 
geljei'ltget,  hallowed ;  see  fyet'Ugen, 
ge'fjen,   ging,  gegan'gen  (jetn),  to 
go ;  2Bie  gel)t  eg  ?  How  goes  it? 
How  are  you  ?     See  also  fort'= 
gefyert,  fyernm'gefyen,  ^tnaitf'ge^en, 
Ijinein'geljen,  fyin'gefyen, 
um'gefyen,    ttei'tergefyen, 
gefyen. 

geljoCfett,  helped  ;  see  fyet'fen, 
gdjti'ren,  reg.  insep.  (fyaben),  with 
dat.,  or  gn  and  dat.,  to  belong  to. 
getyW,  heard  ;  see  fyo'retu 
geljt,  indie.,  goes ;  imperative,  go ; 

see  ge'ljetu 
@etftf  ber,  be§  -(c)«,  Me  -er,  mind, 

spirit. 

gcfauft',  bought ;  see  fau'fen* 
gefom'men,  come  ;  see  fom'men* 
gelat^t^  laughed  ;  see  la'djetu 
{jclaf '{ettf  let ;  left ;  see  (af'fen. 

,  ba^,  be§  -§,  bte  — ,  sound. 
§,  be§-(e)3,  bie  -er,  money. 
^  laid ;  see  le'gen* 

ba§,  be§  -(c)«,  bic-(c), 
escort,  convoy. 
gelernt',  learned  ;  see  ler'nen. 
gcJc'fettf  read  ;  see  fe'feiu 
gettcit',  loved  ;  see  lie'ben;  as  adj., 

beloved. 

gcfin'gett,  gelang',  getun'gen  (jetn), 
eg  gelingt'  ntir,  impers.  with  dat., 
to  succeed. 


',  praised;  see  lo'ben. 
gel'tenf  gait,  gegol'ten  (l^aben),  eg 
gift,  with  dat.,  to  be  for,  be  in- 
tended for  ;  to  be  worth, 
gehut'gen,  succeeded;  see  gefin'gen. 
gemarf)t'f  made  ;  done  ;  see  ma'cfyen. 
@kmai)l',   ber,   beg   -(e)g,  bie   -e, 
(poetic  also  bag  ©ema^I'  for  bie 
(Semafy'Iin),  spouse,  consort. 
($emii'fe,  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  vege- 
tables. 

®emii'fefrauf  bie,  bie  -en,  vegeta- 
ble woman. 

g,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -er,  soul, 
heart ;  feeling. 

t',  had  to  ;  see  ntiif'fen. 
Hr^f  comfortable,  cozy,  snug. 
rctf  nourished ;  see  na'fy'ren. 
^  sewed  ;  see  na'fyen. 

called,     named;      see 
nen'nen, 

^  exact (ly),  just.^ 

,  geno^,  genof'fen  (^aben), 
to  enjoy,  to  partake  of. 
gemmt'mett,   taken ;    see   ne^men; 
gefan'gen       genom'men,      taken 
prisoner. 
gcnug'f  enough. 
ftettii'gett,   reg.   insep.    (^aben),  to 

suffice,  be  enough. 
®t$M'r    bag,   beg  -(e)g,   baggage, 

luggage. 
geta'bef  adj.,  straight;  adv.,  right, 

straight,  exactly,  just. 
gereift',  traveled  ;  see  rei'fen. 
gcrnf  Ue'ber,  am  lieb'ften,  gladly; 
usually  translated  by  like  to  ;  id) 
fin'ge  gern,  I  like  to  sing. 
gefagt',  said  ;  see  fagen* 


©eftpft 


19 


®efrf)aft',   bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie   -e, 

business;  office. 

gefdjalj',  happened  ;  see  gefcfye'fyen. 
gefrfjc'fjen,  gefdjaty',  gefdje'Ijen  (fein), 

e^    gefdjteljt'    mir,    impers.  with 

dat.,  it  happens. 
®efd)td)'te,   bie,  bie  -n,  story,  his- 

tory. 

gefdjtrft',  sent  ;  see  fdfyi'cfen. 
gefdjteljf,  happens  ;  see  gefcfyeljen. 
gefdjie'tten,  shone  ;  see  jd)ei'nen. 
,gefdjto'geit,  struck  ;  see  fd)(a'gen. 
®efrf)mei'be,   bag,  beg  -g,  bie  —  , 

jewelry,  jewels. 
gefdjof'fett,     shot  ;  .  see    fcfyie'fsen  ; 

fontmt  gejcfyoffen,   comes  shoot- 

ing, leaping  or  bounding. 
gefrfjrie'&en,  written  ;  see  fcijrei'ben. 
gefrfjttieflt',     made    to    swell;     see 


gefrfjttrittb',  swiftly,  rapidly,  fast. 
gefdjttwm'mett,  swum;  see  fttyttum'* 

men* 

gefe'gnet,  blessed;  see  jeg'nen. 
gcfe'ften,  seen  ;  see  fefyen. 

'(e)f  ber,  beg  -(e)tt,  bie  -(e)n, 
companion,  comrade,  mate. 
efe^',   bag,  beg  -eg,  bie  -e,  law, 
statute. 

',  set  ;  see  fet^en, 
'f   bag,   beg  -(e)g,   bie    -erf 
face. 

/geftwCtett,  split,  see  f^aFten, 
gef  Jrieft'f  played  ;  see  fpie'ten. 
gefprengt',  burst,  split;  see  f^ren^ 
gen. 

n,  spoken  ;  see  fyre'djen. 
'gctt,  sprung  ;  see  fyrin'gen. 
;-@cftaIt'r  bie,  bie  -en,  form,  figure. 


gefterft',  put  ;  see  fte'cfen* 

gc'ftentf  yesterday  ;  a  following 
noun  is  written  as  an  adverb 
without  a  capital  :  ge'ftern  a'benb, 
ge'ftern  mor'gen;  bag  ©eftern, 
(the)  yesterday. 

geftofj^ett,  stolen  ;  see  fte^Ien. 

geftor'&ett,  died,  dead  ;  see  fter'ben. 

geftrit'ten,  fought  ;  see  ftrei'ten. 

gefutt^gcn,  sung  ;  see  ftn'gen. 

getatt;f  done  ;  see  tun. 

',    practiced,    exercised;    see 


gcttiat^'fcttf  grown  ;  see  tt>ad)'fen, 
',  chosen  ;  see  toa'fy'len. 
,  powerful,  mighty;  strong. 
bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  @e= 
tt)anber,  garment,  attire,  dress. 
gett»e'fettf  been  ;  see  fein* 
®etottttt'f   ber,   beg   -(e)gf   bie  -e, 

profit. 

gctnitt'nctt,  gemann',  gemon'nen  (I)a= 
ben),  to  win. 

f  sure(ly),  certain  (ly)T^ 

,  customary;  adv.,  usu- 
ally, generally. 

',  lived  ;  see  tDO^'nen. 
^,  wanted  to  ;  see  n)ol'(en. 
gett)Ott'ttCttf  won  ;  see  gennn'nen. 
gctuor'bcn,  got  ;  become  ;  see  toer'- 

ben. 

gettJu|trr  known  ;  see  ttnf'fen. 
ge5etgt'f  shown  ;  see  jei'gen. 
gep'gen,  drawn  ;  gone  ;  see  ^ie^en. 
gi6r  imperative,  give  ;  see  ge^ben. 
gifctf   gives;    eg   gibt,   there  is    or 

there  are  ;  see  ge'ben. 
@ic'btc^Cttftcm  (bag),  proper  name, 
Giebichenstein  (castle). 


flilt 


20 


gift,  is  for  ;  see  gel'ten. 

gittg,  gin'gen,  went  ;  see  ge'fyen, 

®ty'fel,    ber,   beg  -g,   bte  —  ,  top, 

summit. 

($fatt5,  ber,  beg  -eg,  splendor,  radi- 
ance, brightness. 

e^r.  (fyaben),  to  gleam. 
,  be^  ®fofe«,  bie  ®Iafer, 


gfau'bett,  reg.  (fjaben), 
of  person  believed,  but  ace.  when 
that  believed  is  a  thing,  to  be- 
lieve ;  to  think,  have  an  opinion. 

gletrf),  (1)  adj.,  with  dat.,  like, 
alike,  equal,  the  same;  gteici) 
ctner  23rant,  like  a  betrothed; 
(2)  adv.,  at  once;  gfeid)  narf), 
right  after  ;  id)  !omme  gleid),  I'm 
coming  at  once  ;  gleicfy'fommen, 
with  dat.,  to  equal  :  fcin'  anbre 
!ommt  bir  gleid), 

gleidi'fommett,  fam  gfetd),  gletcfH 
gefommen  (fein),  with  dat.,  to 
equal. 

e,  bie,  bie  -n,  bell. 

bag,  beg  -g,  bie  —  ,  little 
bell. 

$(itrf,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  happiness  ; 
good  fortune,  luck. 

0Iucnirfjf  superl.  gliicflic^ft,  happy, 
fortunate. 

g(ii^Cttf  reg.  (fyabett),  to  glow;  to 
be  red  (hot). 

t,  bie,  bte  -en,  glow  ;  fire,  heat  ; 
passion,  ardor,  fervor.  . 

(ber)  ,  proper  name,  Goethe. 
>,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  gold. 

got'ben,  gotb(e)ner,  goib(e)ne, 
go(b(e)neg,  golden,  gold. 


x 

^gbtt'ttCttr    reg.     (fyaben),    to   grant 

gladly,  not  to  begrudge. 
go'tifcfyf  Gothic. 

®ott,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bte  ©otter, 
god ;  also  in  singular  only,  the 
Deity,  God. 

ptt'ltcf),  divine,  godlike, 
@ott'lie&  (ber),  proper  name,  Gott- 
lieb. 
®rafcf  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  ©raber, 

grave. 

®ra'&eit,  ber,  beg  -g,  bte  @ra'ben, 
ditch,  moat;  trench. 

,  ber,  beg  -en,  bie  -en,  count. 

n,   bag,  beg   -g,   affliction, 
grief,  sorrow. 

($ramma'tif,  bte,  bte  -en,  grammar. 
f  bag,  beg  ©rafeg,  bte  @ra{er, 
grass, 
gray. 

en,  reg.  (fjaben),  usually  im- 
pers.  with  dat.,  to  shudder ;  bem 
23ater  granfet'g,  the  father  shud- 
ders. 

f  (ber),  proper  name,  Greif. 
®rct'djett     (bag),    proper     name, 
Gretchen  ;  Peggy. 

groger,  grogt,  great ;  large, 
big. 

f  bte,  greatness. 
utter,  bte,  bie  ©rogrmitter, 
grandmother. 
^ro^'tiaterf  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  ©rog= 

better,  grandfather. 
gviht,  griiner,  griinft,  green. 
($ruttbf  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bte  ©riinbe, 
ground ;     reason ;     dale,    gorge, 
glen ;  depths. 

'fid),  thorough(ly). 


grihten 


21 


gru'ttett,  reg.  (fyaben),  be  green  or 
verdant ;  to  -grow  green. 

®ritfe  ber,  beg  ©rugeg,  bie  ©riige, 
greeting;  plu.,  compliments,  re- 
gards, respects. 

grfi'ften,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  greet;  id) 
laff  fie  griiften,  I  send  her  greet- 
ings; griig'  bid)  ©ott,  or  ©ott 
griig'  bid),  good  day  (a  common 
greeting  in  many  parts  of  Ger- 
many, often  shortened  to  ,,®niJ3' 
©ott")* 

gitl'ben,  for  gofbeu,  golden. 

gut,  adj.,  good  ;  guten  Sftorgen,  good 
morning;  adv.,  well. 

®ut,    bag,    beg    -(e)g,    bie    ©liter, 
property;  estate. 
3,  bag  ©ute,  good. 


,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  hair. 
fja'&en,   fyatte,   gefyabt   (fyaben),   bit 
fyaft,   er  l]at,   to   have ;   see  also 
lieb'fyaben,  re^t  fyaben. 
^a'fen,  ber,  be^  -8,  bie  §afen,  har- 
bor. 

tain,  ber,  be§  -(e)S,  bie  -e,  grove, 
wood. 

,  half ;  half  a  mark,  eine  f)a(be 
9Jlar!  (not  t>o(b  eine  2ftarf);  l>alb 
e(f,  half  past  ten. 
tf,  helped  ;  see  fyel'fetu 
a(f 'tc,  bie,  bie  -n,  half. 
f  bie,  bie  -n,  hall. 

(lj)f  excl.,  hallelujah;  as 
noun,  ba8  §aUeIu'jta(^),  the  hal- 
lelujah. 

/4>afmf  ^er/  ^e^  -(e)^/  bit  -e,  stalk. 
tyal'tett,  l)ie(t,  gefyal'teit  (l)aben),  er 


fyd'It,   to  hold ;    to  keep ;    fatten 
fur,  with  ace.,  to  take  for,  con- 
sider :  reflex.,  fid)  fyal'ten,  to  keep 
oneself  ;  see  also  anf'fyalten, 
),  bie,  bie  §anbe,  hand. 

pfttf,   bag,  beg  -(e)g,  hand 
baggage,  grips. 

Ijau'geu,  tying,  getyan'gen  (tyaben), 

er  fycingt,  to  hang,  be  suspended. 

^pfllt3   (ber),  proper  name,    Hans; 

Jack. 

Ijart,  hard  (as  opposed  to  soft,  while 
fdjroer  means  hard  as  opposed  to 
easy). 

$f  ber,  beg  -eg,  the  Harz  Moun- 
tains. 

ift,  hast ;  see  fyaben. 
it,  has  ;  see  fyaben. 
it'te,  fyd't'te,  had ;  see  fyaben. 
»att'ftc,  bie,  bie  -n,  hood. 

),  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  breath. 

head  (more  poetic  than  $opf). 

house  ;  $u  ^)anfe,  at  home  ;  nad) 

§aufe,  home,  homeward,  (toward) 

home. 

Ije'feett,  tyob,  getyoben  (tyaben),tolift. 
J|C'gcn,  reg.   (tyaben),  to  fence  in; 

to  inclose,  contain  ;  to  cherish. 
^ei'be,  bie,  bie  -n,  heath  ;  prairie  ; 

auf  ber  §eiben,  old  weak  dative ; 

compare  anf  (Srben. 
^ci'belberg    (bag),   proper    name, 

(the  city  of)  Heidelberg. 
^>ci'bc(6ctgct,     indecl.     adj.,    (of) 

Heidelberg. 
4>etbettrii3'leitt,  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  — , 

heath  rose,  heather  rose. 


22 


Ijei'ttg,  holy,  sacred. 

jjei'ligett,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  hallow. 

fyeim,      adv.      and     sep.     prefix, 

home. 

4>et'mat,  Me,  bie  -en,  home. 
^pei'matfottti,  ba$,  be§  -(e)3,  home 

land,  native  country. 
Ijet'tttifdj,  homelike. 
^eim'ltdj,  secret  (ly). 
^>etm'tt)ei),    ba$,   be§  -(e)§,  home- 

sickness. 
^ei'ttC   (ber),  proper  name,    (the 

poet)  Heine. 
4>eitt'ridj     (ber),     proper     name, 

Henry. 
Jjei'ratett,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  marry, 

wed. 

Ijetfj,  hot. 
Jjci'^en,  fyieg,  gefyet'ften  (fjoben),  to 

be  called,  be  named  ;  in  the  class- 

room, to  be    (translated)  :    SBie 

tyeigt  ba$  auf  beutfd)  ?  How  would 

that  be  translated  into  German  ? 
Ijei'ter,   inflected:    fyeit(e)rer,   fyei* 

t(e)re,  ^ett(e)re§,  cheerful. 
^c(bf  ber,  be8  -en,  bie  -en,  hero. 
i)el'fenf  ^alf,  gc^ol'fcn   (l)aben),  er 

fytlft,  with  dat.  ,  to  help  ;  see  also 

fort'fyelfen. 

I)eJI(e),  clear,  transparent;  light. 
$tlmf  ber,  be^  -(e)§,  bie  -e,  helmet, 

helm. 
Ijer,  adv.  and  sep.  prefix,  denoting 

motion  away  from,  from  there  or 

here  ;  along  ;  fjin  nnb   fyer,  here 

and  there,  hither  and  thither  ; 

see    also    fyer'fttegen,    Ijer'jagen, 


^crauf  'r  adv.  and  sep.  prefix,  up  here. 


Jjerauffommett,  fatn  ^erauf,  ^er^ 
auf  gefomtnen  (fetn),  to  come  up 
(here). 

Jper'be,  bie,  bie  -n,  flock,  herd. 

Ijerettt',  adv.  and  sep.  prefix,  in 
here  ;  fyeretn !  come  in  ! 

ett,  bracfyte  ^erein;,  ^er= 
ein'gebrad^t  (fyaben),  to  bring  in. 
r^fltegenf    f(og  l)err,    tjer'geftogen 
(jetn),  to  fly  along  or  about, 
recited ;  see 
reg.    sep. 
hunt  along,  keep  chasing. 

^per'tttatttt  (ber),  proper  name,  Her- 
mann. 

Jjenue'&erfdjauett,  reg.  sep.  (fyaben)/ 
to  look  down. 

£err,  ber,  be§  -n,  bie  §erren,  gen- 
tleman ;  Mr.  ;  as  address,  sir ;  of 
the  Deity,  Lord. 

l)err'(tdjf  magnificent,  splendid,  glo- 
rious. 

err'Itdjfeit,     bie,     magnificence, 
glory,  splendor. 

Kjer'fagen,  reg.  sep.  (fyaben),  to 
recite ;  to  repeat. 

Ijerii'fcerljaflett,  reg. sep.  (fjaben),to 
sound  across  (to  us). 

tyerttttt',  adv.  and  sep.  prefix, 
around,  about ;  round  about. 

Ijerum'geljett,  gtng  ^erum',  bernm^ 
gegangen  (fetn),  to  go  about,  go 
around. 

Ijer'ttjefjen,  reg.  sep.  (Ijaben),  to— 
blow  along,  scurry  along. 

^,  be§  -en«,  bie  -en,  heart, 
lovable,  sweet,  charming. 

^cffcf  ber,  beg  -n,  bie  -n,  Hessian. 

Ijefftfd),  adj.,  Hessian. 


fjcutc 


23 


Ijtmwtergeljett 


Ijett'tCe),  to-day;  a  following  noun 

is  written  as  an  adverb  without 

a  capital :  fyeu'te  mor'gen. 
^pelj'fe  (ber) ,  proper  name,  Heyse. 
fyteft,  fyielten,  held  ;  see  fatten. 
Ijier,  here. 

Ijterljer',  hither,  here. 
Ijteff,  was  called  ;  see  Ijeigen. 
4?il'fe,  btc,  help. 
IjUft,  helps ;  see  fyeffetu 
4>im'mel,  ber,  be$  -8,  heaven ;  sky. 
^im'mel&ett,  ba§,  be§  -(e)8,  bte  -n, 

canopy  bed,  four-poster ;  bed  in 

the  sky. 

jJjtm'menJDdj,  high  as  heaven. 
Jljtmm'ltfd),  heavenly. 
tytn,  adv.  and  sep.  prefix  denoting 

motion    toward,    to,    along    to, 

away ;    fyin   nnb  fyer,  here    and 

there,  hither  and  thither. 
Ijutab',  adv.  and  sep.  prefix,  down, 

down  to. 
ffitta&'fafjrett,   fnfyr  fyinab',  fyinab'* 

gefaljren  (jein),  er  fci^rt  Ijinab', 

to  ride  down,  coast  down. 
fjinaft'genommen,  taken  down;  see 

fyinab'nefymetu 
tlinab'uclimcu,  nafym  ^inab',  ^inab;= 

gettommen    (^aben),    er    nimmt 

^inab',  to  take  down. 
fjittattff   adv.  and  sep.  prefix,  up, 

aloft. 
Jjittaufgefjen,  ging  fyinauf,  ^inauf^ 

gegangen  (fcin),  to  go  up. 
fjtnauf  getragen,    carried  up ;    see 

iltnauftragen. 
^inauff^auenf   reg.  sep.   (fyabett), 

to  gaze  up. 
Jjinauftragen,  trug  Ijinauf, 


getragen   (fyaben),  er  tragt  ^in^ 

aiif,  to  carry  up. 
J)tttatt3'f  adv.  and  sep.  prefix,  out. 
Jjittau3'fUttgenf  Kang  ^inaii^',  t)hi* 

au^'geflungen  (^aben),  to  sound 

forth, 


(^aben),  re- 

fiex.,  to  swing  out. 
fytneitt',  adv.  and  sep.  prefix,  in. 
tymeitt'geljen,  ging  Ijinein',  ^inein^ 

gegangen  (fein),  to  go  in,  enter. 
Ijitteut'fommett,   lam    fyinein',  ^in^ 

ein'gelommen  (fein),  to  come  in, 

enter. 
Ijitteitt'Iadjen,  reg.  sep.  (fyaben),  to 

laugh  (into). 
Ijitteut'frfifcidjett,  f(^U(^  Ijinein',  l)in^ 

ein'gefdjUcfyen  (jein),  to  slip  in, 

steal  in. 
f)itteitt'5ttf0mmettf  infin.  of  fyinein'* 

lommen  with  ju. 
^ingr  hung  ;  see  fyan'gen. 
^in'gc^en,  gtng  fyin',  Ijtn^gegangen 

(fein),  to  go  away,  go  along. 
fjitt'gefe^t,  set  down;  see  fyin'ietjen. 
Ifitt'ging,  went  along  or  away  ;  see 


,  reg.  sep.  (fjaben),  to  set 

down;  also  reflex.,  fitf)  ^in'fe^en, 

to  sit  down. 
Ijttt'ter,  prep,  with  dat.  or  ace.,  be- 

hind. 
l)tmut'terf    adv.    and    sep.   prefix, 

down  ;     bie    £rep'pe    ^inun'ter, 

down  (the)  stairs. 
fyhttttt'tergeljett,     ging     Ijinnn'ter, 

fyuwn'tergegan'gen   (fein),  to  go 

down,  descend. 


fyitmnterging 


24 


fjimut'tergtttg,     went    down ;     see 

fyimm'tergefyen. 
£irt(e),  ber,  beg  -(e)n,  bte  -(e)n, 

shepherd . 

Ijodj,  fyoljer,  fyolje,  fyofjeg;  fyofyer,  fyod)ft, 
high  ;  aufg  fyod)fte,  in  the  highest 
manner;    fybcfyft,    as   adv.,  most, 
very,    exceedingly;    ber   §od)fte, 
be§  -tt,  the  Highest,  the  Deity. 
g,  most  holy,  very  sacred. 
f  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  pride. 
§of,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bte  §o'fe,  court, 
yard  ;  farm  ;  home,  homestead. 
Jjflf  fen,  regr.  (fyabett),  to  hope. 
Ijof'fetttUrf),  adv.,  it  is  to  be  hoped  ; 

usually  translated,  I  hope. 
^pflff'mutjj,  bie,  bte  -en,  hope. 
l)0f  (id),  polite (ly). 
Ijo'tyer,   fyofye,  fyoljeg,  high;    fyofyer, 

higher;  see  tyod). 
§0'Jje,  bie,  bte  -n,  height. 

,  charming,  lovely,  graceful. 
'(cnf  reg.  (fyaben),  to  fetch;  go 
and  get. 

bag,    beg    -eg,    bte    £o($er, 
wood. 

'ren,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  hear;  see 
also  cmf'fybren,  gu'^oren. 
o'fef  bte,  bte  -n,  mostly  in  plu., 
trousers,  breeches. 
u'0et,    ber,  beg  -g,   bte  — ,  hill, 
hillock. 

,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bte  -e,  dog. 
Ijtttt'bert,  indecl.  numeral,  a  hun- 
dred ;    as  noun,    bag    §im'bert, 
the  hundred  ;  &or  ^mnberten  Don 
,  hundreds  of  years  ago. 
hungry. 
,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bte  §u'te,  hat. 


^pit'tcr,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  —  ,  guardian, 

keeper. 
£ut'fd)tmtd,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -er 

hat  ornament. 
t'tef  bte,  bte  -n,  hut  ;  cottage. 


trf)f  metner,  mtr,  mid),  I. 

tljm,  (to)  him  or  it  ;  see  er  and  eg. 

iljtt,  him  ;  see  er. 

tlj'ttett,  (to)  them  ;  see  fte. 

S^'nen,  (to)  you;  see  @ie. 

t^r,  her;  their  ;   (to)  her;  see  fte. 

t^rf  euer,  eut^,  eud),  you. 

$f)r,  your  (formal). 

i^rigf  hers. 

3$'rig,  yours  (formal). 

imf  for  in  bem. 

tm'mcr,  always. 

immerbar',  always,  ever  ;  continu- 

ously. 
inf  prep,  with  dat.  or  ace.,  in,  into  ; 

to. 
tttbent',  conjunc.,  while,  at  the  mo- 

ment when. 
ttt3r  for  in  bag. 
itttereffant',   interefjan'ter,    ittteref* 

fau'teft,   interesting  ;    ettDag  3n= 

tereffanteg,  something  interesting. 
f  earthly. 
,  indecl.  particle  ;  any  at  all  ; 

irgenb  ettDag,  anything  at  all. 
tftf  is  ;  as  auxiliary  of  tense,  has  ; 

see  fetn. 


jaf  yes  ;  with  imperative,  by  all 
means  ;  in  exclamations,  why  ; 
often  coupled  with  tool)!,  jatt)of)F. 


jagen 


25 


>ja'gen,  reo1.  (fyaben),  to  hunt;  see 

also  fyer'jagen. 
3a'ger,  ber,  beg  -8,  bie  —  ,  hunter, 

huntsman. 

Safjr,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  year. 
^aJjrijun'&ert,   bag,  beg  -g,  bie  -e, 

century. 

^a'ttuar,  ber,  beg  -g,  January. 
jaud)'sen,  r<?0.  (fyaben),  to  exult,  ju- 

bilate, rejoice  ;  pres.  part,  jc 


r,  yes. 
je,  ever  ;  regularly,  in  je  nad)  Ian'= 

gen     Sftau'me  ;     correl.,  je  .  .  . 

befto,  the  ...  the. 
je'fcer,  jebe,  jebeg,  each,  every. 
je'fcermatttt,      every     one,     every- 

body. 

j',  but,  yet,  nevertheless. 

some  one,  any  one. 
3fctta    (ba§),  proper  name,   Jena, 

a  German  city. 
jc'ncrf  jene,  jene§,  that. 
jctt'fctt^,  prep,  with  gen.,  (on)  the 

other  side  of,  beyond. 
jet^ig,  adj.  ,  present,  of  the  present 

time. 
je^t,  now. 

$o'l)atttt  (ber),  proper  name,  John. 
jttrfjljei',  excl.,  hurrah,  hooray. 
jttrf)f)ei'raffaf  excl.,  hurrah,  hooray. 
Su'flettbf  bie,  youth. 
3u'(i,  ber,  be§  -«,  July. 
$tt'litt3  (ber),  proper  name,  Julius. 
jungf  young. 
3tttt'gcr  ber,  be^  -n,  bie  -n,  young 

person,  especially  boy  (it  is  more 

current  than  the    more  formal 


t,    bie,    bie    -en,    virgin, 

maid,  maiden. 
jitngft,  recently,  lately. 
^tt'ni,  ber,  be§  -«,  June. 
^ufti'lttt^      (ber),    proper     name, 

Justin. 


f'fee,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  -g,  coffee. 

•faljl,  bare,  bald,  barren^ — 

>$aljtt,   ber,  beg  -(e)g,    bie  $afnte,_- 
skiff,  rowboat,  boat. 

$ai'fer,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  Em- 
peror. 

tai'ferfaal,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  flat'* 
f  erf  ate,  imperial  hall. 

fait,  cold. 

fam,  famen,  fame,  came ;  see  !om'* 
men. 

$amerab',  ber,  beg  -en,  bie  -en,  com- 
rade, companion,  fellow  soldier. 

$amm,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  $am'me, 
comb. 

fam'men,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  comb. 

$ampf,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  $amj)fe, 
combat,  fight,  struggle,  battle. 

fdmp'fen,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  fight. 

®aual',  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  ^ana;te, 
channel ;  canal ;  drain,  sewer, 
conduit ;  gutter. 

faun,  fannft,  can  ;  see  lomien. 

fatttt'tc,  knew,  was  acquainted 
with ;  see  fenttetu 

Cle,  bie,  bie  -n,  chapel, 
(ber),  proper  name,  Charles. 
£,  bie,  bie  -n,  card ;  map. 
I,  bie,  bie  -n,  potato. 
ar'jer,  (ber  or)  bag,  beg  -g,  Me  — , 
lockup,  detention  room. 


faufcn 


26 


frafttg 


fau'fett,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  buy,  pur- 
chase. 

taunt,  hardly. 

feitt,  feme,  !eut,  no,  not  any,  not  a, 
none  ;  neither. 

fett'nen,   fannte,  gefannt    (Ijaben), 
to  be  acquainted  with,  know. 

$er'tte*   (ber),  proper  name,  Ker- 
ner. 
ittfc,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bte  -er,  child. 

,  beg  -(e)g,  bte  -e,  chin. 
,  bie,  bte  -tt,  church. 

&fo'ge,  bie,  bte  -tt,  complaint ;  lam- 
entation. 

SHa'getteb,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bte  -er, 
dirge. 

fto'gett,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  complain, 
lament. 

$tong,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  tlange, 
sound. 

Ifar,  clear. 

£tof'fe,  bie,  bte  -it,  class. 

$(eit>,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bte  -er,  dress  ; 
plu.,  clothes. 

fleitt,  small,  little. 

i'nob,   bag,  beg  -(e)g,    bie   -e, 
jewel,  gem  ;  treasure. 

ftttt(gcitf  Hang,  gefdtngen  (^aben), 
to  sound,  resound  ;  to  ring. 

$Ho'fterf   bag,  beg  -g,  bie  tlbfter, 
cloister,  convent. 

flttij,   clever,  wise ;   sensible,   judi- 
cious, intelligent. 

:'&ef   ber,  beg  -n,  bte  -n,  boy 
(less  common  than  ber  3nnge). 

•Jta'rfett,  reg.  (Ijaben),  to  crack. 
tedjt,  ber,  beg-(e)g,  bte  -e,  serv- 
ant ;  serf;  slave. 

$ttte,  bag,  beg  -g,  bte  £ni'e,  knee. 


f,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  tnopfe, 
button. 
i'fpef  bie,  bie  -n,  bud. 

fo'djen,    reg.    (ijaben),  to  boil ;   to 
cook. 

$0'baf,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  -g,  kodak, 
camera. 

Coffer,  ber,  beg  -g,  bte  — ,  trunk. 

$01' tier,  indecl.  adj.,  (of)  Cologne. 

fo'ttufdj,  funny,  queer;  strange. 

fom'men,  lam,  gelommen  (fein),  im- 
perative, fomm,  lommt,  to  come  ; 
fya't  lom'men,  to  be  late,  come 
late ;  see  also  an'Fontmen,  i 
fommen,  fyerauf'lommett, 
lommen,  fcor'fommen, 
men. 

^ii'tttg,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  king. 

fdfyloffeg,  bte  $ontggfrf)toffer,  royal 

castle. 
fiht'tteu,  lonnte,  gelonnt  or  fon'nen, 

er  lann,  to  be  able ;  can  ;  know 

(how  to  do)  ;  may  :  bag  lann  fein, 

that  may  be. 

fonn'te,  lonnte,  could ;  see  lon'nen. 
ftoitfmtnut',   ber,  beg  -en,  bie  -en, 

consonant. 
^Ott5crt'f    bag,    beg  -(e)g,    bte  -e, 

concert. 

ff  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bte  f  opfe,  head. 
fr,   bag,   beg  -(e)g,   bie    $orbe/ 

basket. 

(ber), proper  name,  Korner. 
it  bte,  food,  fare  ;  board.   " 
I0'ftettf  reg.  (fyaben),  to  cost. 
^raft,   bie,   bte    tra'f'te,    strength; 

power. 
Iraf'tig,  strong,  powerful. 


Mftigett  27 

fraftigett,  reg.  (fyaben),  to 
strengthen. 

franf,  sick,  ill,  ailing. 

®ret'fce,  bte,  chalk ;  crayon. 

ftw'm,  bie,  bte  -n,  crown  ;  diadeui. 
^$tt'gel,    bte,   bte  -n,  bullet,  (rifle) 
ball. 

$ulj,  bie,  bie  f  iifye,  cow. 

fiiljl,  cool,  chilly. 
-*fiif)tt,  bold,  brave. 

fitljtt'fidj,  adv.,  boldly. 

fiim'mem,  reg.  reflex,  (fyaben),  to 
care,  worry,  bother  (about,  utn 
with  ace.}. 

>fmti),    known,    well   known,    noto- 
rious. 

$tttt'be,  Me,  news ;  knowledge,  in- 
formation. 

funb'madjen,  reg.  sep.  (fyaben),  to 
make  known,  proclaim;  to  in- 
form. 

®ur'fiirft,  ber,  be%  -en,  bie  -en,  elec- 
toral prince,  elector. 

furte'rett,  Inrter'te,  turiert'  (fyaben), 
to  cure,  heal. 

Shtr'&e,  bie,  bte  -n,  curve;  etne 
$ur'fce  ncfy'tnen,  to  take  a  curve 
(in  coasting). 

fttr$,  fiirger,  ritrgeft,  short. 

$ii'fter,  ber,  be3  -3,  bte  — ,  verger, 
sexton. 


laucnt 


fa'feett  fid),  reg.  (^aben),  to  regale 

or  refresh  oneself. 
la'djefttf  reg.  (fyaben),  to  smile. 
(a^cn,    reg.    (fyaben),  to   laugh ; 

pres.  part.,  facfyenb  ;  see  also  l)in- 

etn'(act)en» 


Sa'bcnf  fin,  be§  -«,  bte  —  or  £tiben, 
shop,  store. 

(a'benf  (ub,  gela'ben  (^aben),  er 
(abt,  also  reg.,  to  load. 

Iagr  lagen,  lay  ;  see  Uegen. 

Sargef  bie,  bte  -n,  situation. 

k£a'gerf  ba§,  be§  -«,  bte  — ,  couch, 
bed. 

laljm,  lame  ;  as  noun,  ber  ?al)'mef 
be§  -n,  bie  -n,  the  lame. 

£am'pef  bte,  bie  -n,  lamp. 

fiattfy  bag,  be§  -(e)§,  bie  ^tin'ber  and 
(poetic)  l^an'be,  country,  land ; 
anf  bem  £an'be,  in  the  country. 

Sanb'graf,  ber,  be§  -en,  bte  -en, 
count,  landgrave. 

tong,  langer,  langft,  adj.,  long;/oZ- 
lowing  an  accusative,  for,  dur- 
ing; etn  ^iertetftiinb^en  fang, 
for  a  little  quarter  hour. 

fatt'ge,  adv.,  long,  for  a  long  time. 

fan'gen,  reg.  (fjaben),  long  (for)  ; 
to  suffice  ;  reach  out  for  ;  seize. 

lang'fte,  longest ;  see  (ang, 

(ang'ttiei(tgf     tedious,     boresome,^ 
monotonous. 

£att'5er  bte,  bie  -n,  lance. 

la§f  (afen,  read  ;  see  le'jen. 

(af'fenf  Ue§,  getaf'fen  or  laf'fen  (^a= 
ben),  er  la'ftt,  imperative  lag,  fa§t, 
to  let ;  to  leave  ;  to  have  or  cause 
to  be  done  ;  (in  the  last  sense  it 
has  the  peculiarities  of  the  mo- 
dals:  er  fyat  e§  ma'<J)en  laf'ten); 
reflex.,  to  let  oneself;  see  also 
frei'laffen* 

*  tott,  mild,  lukewarm,  tepid.—- 
I  tott'em,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  lie  in 
to  wait  eagerly. 


Souf 


28 


Siebdjen 


£auf,    ber,    beg   -(e)g,    bte    £aufe, 

course ;     race ;     drift,     current, 

stream. 
tott'fen,   lief,    gelau'fen    (jein),   er 

Iciuft,  to  run ;  see  also  @(f)Utt'= 

jcfjiil)  lau'fetu 
lauft,  runs  ;  see  fau'fetu 
(aut,  loud,  aloud,  out  loud. 
au'ten,    reg.    (fyaben),  ring,  peal, 

toll  (of  bells). 

fatt'ter,  pure,  genuine ;  nothing  but. 
fe'&Ctt,   reg.  (fyaben),  to  live,  have 

life,  be  alive   (as    distinguished 

from  toofynen,  to  reside). 
Se'&en,  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  life. 
le&'ljaft,  lively. 
leer,  empty,  void. 
le'gett,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  lay,  put; 

also  reflex.,  fid)  tegen,  to  lie  down, 
lelj'ltett,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  lean;  usu- 
ally reflex. ,  fief)  tefmen,  to  leau. 
lelj'rett,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  teach. 
Setter,  ber,  be$  -«,  bte  — ,  teacher, 

instructor. 

£ei&f  ber,  be§  -(e)8,  bie  -er,  body. 
(Ctc^t,  light;  easy;  ntc^t^  ?cirf)'tc8, 

nothing  easy  ;  triel  ^etc^teg,  much 

easy  matter  or  material. 
*  leirfjt'&efdjttuttgt7,  light-winged. 
ficibf  ba§,  be§  -(e)§,  sorrow,  grief, 

suffering ;  eitt  ?eib^  tun,  to  hurt, 

harm,  injure. 
let'ben,    Utt,    getitten    (tyaben),  to 

suffer  ;  to  stand,  allow,  permit. 
lei'bcr,  unfortunately. 
leib'ttttt,  tat  teib',  letb'getan  (^aben), 

with  dat.,  to  be  sorry  ;  e$  tut  mir 

Ieib\  I  am  sorry. 
letfc'Uoft,  sorrowful,  grieving. 


liet)f    geliefjen  (^aben),  to 

lend. 

lei'fe,  soft(ly),  still,  gentle. 
8eitj$f    ber,    be§    -e^,    springtime, 

spring. 
fett5'gefd)murftf        decorated        or 

adorned  by  spring. 
-*£en$'ljaueljf    ber,  be§  -(e)8,  breath 

of  spring. 

,  bie,  bie  -n,  lark. 
Icr'ncn,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  learn ;  to 

study  (except  for  advanced  work, 

ftubie'ren) ;     fteigig     (ernen,     to 

study  hard. 
Ic'fctt,  Ia§,  gete'fen  (fyaben),  er  lieft, 

imperative,  lie^,  to  read  ;  see  also 

fcor'lefeiu 

Scf'futgf  proper  name,  Lessing. 
leijt,  last ;  in  ber  (e^ten  £titf  lately, 

recently.    . 

2eu'tef  bie  (plu.),  people. 
Sirf|t,  bag,  be§  -(e)«,  bie  -e,  light. 
Iiri)t'gullicit,    gleaming    with   gold, 

shining  with  gold. 
ltefcr  dear. 
2iefc'rf)ettf  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  little 

love,  darling. 
Sie'fce,  bie,  love. 
lie'feeu,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  love;   as 

noun,  bag  £ie'ben,  love. 
Hc;betf  rather  ;  prefer  to  ;  see  gertu 
ae&'lja&eit,    ^atte  lieb',  Uebrget)abt 

(fyaben),  to  love,  be  in  love  withc 
He^'Hc^,  lovely,  charming. 
licfiftf  dearest ;   am  Heb'ften,  best, 

like  best  to  ;  see  gent, 
fiiebf  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -er,  song. 
£ieb'rf)ett,  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  little 

song. 


lief 


29 


mnurtjmnl 


lief,  (te'fen,  ran  ;  see  lau'fetu 
lie'gen,  (ag,  gele'gen  (fjaben),  to  lie, 

recline  ;  pres.  part.,  Ue'genb,  re- 

clining, lying. 

Iie3,  imperative,  read  ;  see  fe'fetu 
lteJ£,    let  ;    left  ,    had  (done)  ;    see 

laffett. 

Iteft,  reads  ;  see  tefetu 
»Hiti>,  mild,  gentle,  soft. 
Sitt'be,  Me,  bie  -n,  linden  tree,  lin- 

den. 

littf,  adj.,  left  hand,  left. 
HnWf  adv.,  to  the  left,  on  the  left. 
lo'beit,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  praise. 
en,    reg.    (fjaben),  to    entice  ; 

pres.    part.,     locfenb,     enticing, 

tempting. 

lo'rfifl,  curly,  falling  in  ringlets. 
S3f  fe(,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  —  ,  spoon. 
Sofflmott'&e,  bie,  bie  -n,  locomotive, 

engine. 
Sofomotiti'fuijrer,   ber,  beg  -3,  bte 

—  ,  engineer. 

So'refet,  bie,  loreley  ;  water  witch. 
103,  loose  ;  ttmg  ift  log?  what's  the 

matter?  as  excl.,  Io§  !  go!     /See 


j'fetd,  regr.  ({jaben),  to  get,  buy 
(usually  of  tickets  or  something 
that  must  be  given  up  again)  . 
^geljeit,  ging  Io§',  loS'gegangen 
(fetn),  to  start,  break  loose  ;  to 
fight. 


fc^Iagen  (!)aben)r  er  fd)(agt  to§',  to 

hit  at,  to  "  cut  loose." 
Sub'ttitg  (ber),  proper  name,  Lewis, 

Louis. 
£uftr  bte,  bie  £iifte,  air. 


airy. 
£ltftf  bie,  bie  ?iifte,  desire ;  pleasure, 

delight,  enjoyment. 
fo'fttg,  jolly,  jovial,  merry. 
Stt't^Ct  (ber),  proper  name,  Luther. 
2u't^erftragef  bie  (abbreviated  gu'* 

tljerftr.),  Luther  Street. 


mar(^Cttf  reg.  (I)aben),  to  make  ;  to 
do  ;  e«  macfyt  nid)t^,  that's  all 
right,  it  makes  no  difference  ; 
ntacfyen  bag,  to  bring  it  about 
that  ;  eine  Sluf  nafyme  ntac^en,  to 
take  a  picture  ;  biefen  (angen  28eg 
madden,  to  take  this  long  tramp  ; 
ft(^  auf  ben  28eg  madden,  to  start 
out  ;  see  also  furtb'madjen,  gu'ma= 


tf     bie,     bte    3fttid)te,    might, 
power. 

'rf|Cttf  ba§,  be§  -8,  Me  —  ;  maid, 
maiden,  girl. 
mag,  likes  ;  see  mogen. 

nungf  bte,  bie  -en,  reminder, 
exhortation. 

i,  ber,  (the  month  of)  May. 
f,  ba^,  beg  -(e)«,  bie  -e,  time, 
point  of  time. 

ma'Iett,  reg.  (^aben),  paint. 
9Ka'(crf  ber,  beg  -g,  bte  —  ,  painter, 

artist. 

ma'lertfrfj,  picturesque. 
tnattf  one  ;  they  ;  you  ;  (also  trans- 
lated by  the  passive  :  man  fagt, 
it  is  said). 
mancf),   mand)er,  mattcfye,  ntanc^eg, 

many  (a). 
mnnrfj'mnl,  many  a  time,  often. 


30 


mitnetymen 


reg.  impers.  (f)aben), 
with  dat.,  to  want ;  mtr  nrirb 
nid)tg  mangetn,  I  shall  not  want. 

9ttatttt,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  banner, 
man;  husband. 

attau'tef,  ber,  beg  --g,  bic  Mantel, 
mantle,  cloak. 

attar'fcurg  (bag),  proper  name,  (the 
city  of)  Marburg. 

attar'djen,  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  fairy 
tale,  fable  ;  fiction,  romance. 

attarie'  (bte),  proper  name,  Marie, 
Mary. 

attar!,  bte,  g»ct  2tfar!,  bret  2ttarf, 
mark,  a  German  coin  worth  nor- 
mally about  24  cents. 

attarft,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  3Mrfte, 
market,  market-place. 

tnar'tttelftet'ttertt,  adj.,  (of)  marble. 

marfdjie'ren,  marfdjier'te,  tnar= 
fdjtert'  (fcin  or  fyaben,  §  76,  Note±, ' 
to  march. 

'tin  (ber),  proper  name,  Mar- 
tin. 

ber,  (the  month  of)  March. 

mS'ffifl,  moderate  (ly). 

matt,  exhausted,  weary,  tired  out ; 
lifeless. 

attat'te,  bie,  bie  -n,  meadow;  field. 

attattfja'uS  (ber),  beg  2ftattf)ai, 
Matthew,  the  Evangelist. 

attau'er,  bie,  bie  -n,  wall  (of  a  city 
or  garden,  as  distinguished  from 
the  wall  of  a  room,  bie  5Sanb), 

Sttccr,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  sea, 
ocean . 

attee're^ftranb,  ber,  beg-(e)g,  bie  -e, 
seashore,  border  of  the  ocean. 
,  more  ;  rather. 


melj'rere,  several. 

attei'Ie,  bie,  bie  -n,  mile. 

mettt,  my  ;  mine. 

met'ttCtt,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  mean ; 
intend  ;  to  think,  opine. 

met'tttg,  mine. 

mcift,  meiften,  most,  mostly ;  bie 
meiften,  most  of  them. 

attet'fter,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  master. 

attelobte'  and  2Mobei',  bie,  bie 
9JieIobiren  and  2ftelobei'en,  mel- 
ody. 

attcnfc^,  ber,  bag  -en,  bie  -en,  man  ; 
human  being;  plu.,  people. 

attettfdj'Ijett,  bie,  humanity,  man- 
kind. 

atteufur7,  bie,  bie  -en,  students' 
duel. 

mer'fen,  reg.  (!)aben),  to  mark, 
note,  notice. 

tttef'fen,  mag,  gemef'fen  (t)aben),  er 
tnigt,  to  measure. 

attef'fer,  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  knife. 

atte'ter,  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  meter, 
a  little  more  than  a  yard. 

ttttrf),  me ;  see  id). 

attUrf),  bie,  milk. 

tttitt'ber,  less. 

attttttt'te,  bie,  bie  -n,  minute. 

tttir,  (to)  me ;  see  id} ;  tnir  ift'g,  I 
feel. 

tttit,  (1)  prep,  with  dat.,  with  ;  (2) 
adv.  and  sep.  prefix,  along;  see 
also  mit'bringen,  mit'nefymen. 

tnit'brtngen,  bradjte  mit',  mit'ge= 
brat^t  (^aben),  to  bring  along, 
bring  with  you  or  one. 

miteinan'bcr,  together. 

wit'tteljmett,    nafym    mit',    mit'ge^ 


31 


uadjbcttfcit 


nommcn  (fyaben),  er  nimmt  mtt', 
to  take  along;  to  take  with  you 
or  one. 

g,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  Me  -e,  noon. 

SRit'tageffett,  bag,  beg  -g,  btc  — , 
noon  meal,  dinner. 

SJtit'te,  bte,  middle,  midst. 

9)tit'tetolter,  bag,  beg  -g,  Middle 
Ages. 

mtt'tett,  adv.,  in  the  midst. 

ttt0rf)'te,  should  or -would  like;  see 
mo'getu 

9tt0'be,  bie,  bie  -tt,  style,  fashion, 
mode. 

mo'gen,  modj'te,  gemod)t'  or  mo'gett 
(fyabett),  er  mag,  may;  like  to; 
past  subjunc.,  module,  should  or 
would  like. 

mijg'tirf),  possible. 

$l0'ttat,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e, 
month. 

9ft0ttb,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  moon. 

$l0tt'b(en)frf|ettt,  ber,  beg  -(e)g, 
moonlight. 

9)l0tt'tag,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  Monday. 

$hjo£,  bag,  beg  9ftoofeg,  bte  2ftoofe, 
moss. 

SOfor'gett,  ber,  beg  -g,  bte  — ,  morn- 
ing ;  gu'ten  Sftor'gen,  good  morn- 
ing ;  written  as  adverb  without  a 
capital  after  geftertt  and  fyeute : 
ge'ftern  mor'gen,  ^eurte  mor'gen. 

tn0r'gettf  adv.,  to-morrow;  auf 
mor'gen,  for  to-morrow ;  morgen 
friif)',  to-morrow  morning ;  as 
noun,  bag  Morgen,  (the)  to-mor- 
row. 

m0r'gen3,  adv.,  mornings,  in  the 
morning. 


m0r'gcnf(f)0uf  fair  as  the  morning. 
mi$'bcf  tired,  weary,  fatigued. 
9JJii'^ef  bte,  bie  -n,  trouble  ;  effort, 

labor;  pains. 
9tfiU)'(e,  bie,  bie  -n,  mill. 
ntiilj'103,  without  any  trouble. 

,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  Me  2RityI- 
rdber,  mill-wheel. 

crf  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  —  ,  miller; 
also  proper  name,  Miller. 

,   ber,   beg  -(e)g,  bte  -e,  or 
2ftun'ber,  mouth. 
9Wutt'ftcrf  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  —  ,  min- 

ster, cathedral. 
•tttun'ter,    lively,    brisk;    cheerful, 

merry,  gay. 

nttt£,  must  ;  see  miif'fetu 
tntiffen,  muft'te,  gemugt'  or  mitf'fen 
(^aben)  ,  er  mugt,  to  have  to;  must. 
trwf$'tef  mugten,  miifete,   had   to  ; 
see  miif  fen. 

,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  courage. 
'ter,  bte,  bte  flitter,  mother. 
tt'tertyradje,  bte,  bte  -n,  native 
language,  mother  tongue. 
'se,  bte,  bie  -n,  cap. 


ttad)r  prep,  with  dat.  ,  after  ;  to, 
toward  ;  according  to  ;  nad)  ber 
(e^ten  2ftobe,  in  or  according  to 
the  latest  style  ;  ttad)  §au'fe, 
(toward)  home  ;  also  sep.  prefix 
in  nadj'benfett,  nad)'fd^(agen, 
nad)'ftel)en.  . 

na^bcm',  conjunc.,  after. 

ttad^benfen,  bad^te  nac^;,  nad)'«ge= 
bad)t  (fyaben),  to  reflect,  medi- 
tate ;  to  think. 


32 


tttmm 


•Warfj'mittag,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e, 
afternoon  ;  written  as  an  adverb 
without  a  capital  after  geftern, 
fjeute,  amZmorgen:  ge'ftern  nad)'* 
mittag. 
ttadj'mittag£,  adv.,  afternoons,  in 

the  afternoon. 

>  ttadj'fdjlagett,  fdjlug  nad)',  nadj'ge* 
jdjtagen  (fyaben),  er  fcfylagt  nadj', 
to  look  up  (as  in  a  dictionary). 
1tarf)ft,  superl.  o/nafy,  nearest ;  next ; 
ber  9?ad)'fte,  beg  -n,  bie  -n,  neigh- 
bor, nearest  one. 

^nacfj'fteljen,    ftanb    nadj',    nadj'ge* 
ftanben  (fyaben),  with  dat.,  to  be 
behind,  be  inferior  to. 
t,  bie,  bie  TOdjte,  night. 
),  nightly. 

bag,  be8  -(e)g,  bie  -er, 
evening  song. 
nadj^ufrfitogett,  iwjiZw.  o/  na^'fdjta* 

gen  toi^  gu, 
naljf  near. 

naljm,  took ;  see  nefj'metu 
^na^rctt,  reg.  (tjaben),  nourish. 
•Wa'nter  ber,  beg  -ng,  bie  -n,  name. 
naim'te,  called  ;  see  nennen. 
nog,  wet. 

n',  bie,  bie  -en,  nation. 
r',  bie,  bie  -en,  nature. 
natiir'ttdj,  adv.,  of  course. 
Wt'Wr  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  fog,  mist. 
<Re'&dftreif,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e, 

misty  cloud,  streak  of  mist. 
ttc'&Ctt,  prep,  with  dat.  or  ace.,  be- 
side, by. 
Sfte'rfar   (ber),   proper   name,    the 

Neckar  (river). 
nelj'menr    nafym,   genom'men   (^a= 


ben) ,  er  nimmt,  imperative,  nimm, 
nefjmt,  to  take;  ^Ia^  ne^'men,  to 
be  seated,  take  a  seat ;  gefan'gen 
nefy'men,  to  take  prisoner;  in 
ad)t'  neynten,  to  take  care  ;  ii'bel 
nefy'tnen,  to  take  (it)  ill,  to  object 
to  ;  see  also  ein'nefymen,  tnit'nel^ 
men. 

ttf    reg.    reflex,    (fyaben;,    to 
bend  down,  droop. 

nein,  no. 

nctt;ncnf  nann'te,  genannt'  (Ijaben), 
to  call ;  to  name. 

9kft,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -er,  nest. 

nett,   new,   anew ;    et'mag  9?en'eg, 
something  new. 

ncu'(i(^f  recently  ;  the  other  day. 

UCUttf  nine. 

tteutt'se!jtttr  nineteenth. 

tttc^tr  not ;  nod)  nicfyt,  not  yet. 

nidjt3f  nothing;  eg  nta^t  nic^tg, 
that's  all  right,  never  mind ;  a 
following  adjective  is  neuter  and, 
except  anber,  is  written  with  a 
capital;  nid)tg  @d)tt)e'reg,  noth- 
ing hard  ;  nid)tg  an'bereg,  nothing 
else. 
»•  tti'rfen,  reg.  (^aben),  to  nod. 

ttte,  never. 

nic^cr,  adv.  and  sep.  prefix,  down. 
i/nie'betttetgen,  reg.  sep.  reflex.  (fya= 

ben),  to  bend  down. 
^ttie'fcerfaufeltt,  reg.  (jein),  to  rustle 
down. 

ttte'tttal^,  never. 

ttie'tttattbr  nobody,  no  one,  none. 

9H'fulau3     (ber),    proper     name, 
Nicholas. 

nimm,  imperative  of  nefymen,  take. 


tumtttermeijr 


33 


P(utilirt) 


ttimmermeljr',  never,  nevermore. 

ttit,  dialectic  for  nicfyt,  not. 

nod),  yet,  as  yet ;  still ;  more ;  nocfy 
ntcfjt,  not  yet ;  nodj  ein,  one  more; 
nod)  etttmg,  some  more  ;  nod)  biefe 
SBodje,  this  very  week;  nod)  fo, 
exceedingly;  and)  nod)  fo  bnmm, 
awfully  dull,  stupid ;  SBcilber  nod) 
fo  grog,  huge  forests,  or  no  mat- 
ter how  vast  the  forests  are; 
correl.,  toeber  .  .  .  nod),  neither 
.  .  .  nor. 

Wot,  bie,  bte  -ftote,  need,  necessity. 

tttttt,  adv.  of  time,  now  ;  excl.,  well. 

nut,  only  ;  nothing  but. 

Sttttfc  bte,  bie  ftfijfe,  nut. 

0 

0  !  oh  !  ah  !  o  ja,  oh  yes. 

0b,  if ;  whether ;  ob  .  .  .  fdjon,  al- 
though, though. 

o'fcett,  above  ;  upstairs  ;  up  there. 

£)rf)3,  Dd)'fe,  ber,  be^  Dd^'jen,  bie 
Dd)'fen,  ox. 

o't>erf  or;  enttueber  * . .  ober,  either 
...  or. 

£>'fettf  ber,  be«  -g,  bie  £)fen,  stove. 

of'fenf  open. 

DfftSter',  ber,  be§  -(e)§,  bie  -e,  offi- 
cer. 

oft,  often,  oft. 

ol^tte,  prep,  with  ace.,  without ;  also 
followed  by  infin.,  or  by  ba§  and 
a  clause. 

Dljrr  ba§,  be^  -(e)8,  bie  -en,  ear. 

Si,  bag,,  beg  -g,  bie  -e,  oil. 

Om'ttifeu^,  ber,  beg  Dm'nibuffeg,  bie 
Dm'ttibiiffe,  omnibus,  bus. 

Dttrfc(f  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  uncle. 


Op'fer,  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  sacrifice, 

offering. 

D'Jriuttt,  bag,  beg  -g,  opium. 
£>rt,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e  or  Orter, 

place,  spot,  locality. 


,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bte  -e,  pair, 
couple  ;  written  small  as  adjec- 
tive in  eitt  paar,  a  few,  some. 
^atoft^  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  ^atafte, 

palace. 
^a^icr^    bag,    beg   -(e)g,   bte   -e, 

paper. 
^arabte^    bag,    beg    ^arabtefeg, 

paradise. 

Jwffett,  reg.  (^aben),  with  dat.,  to 
suit ;  to  fit. 

(ber),  proper  name,  Paul. 
inf  bie,  suffering,  torture,  pain. 

(ber), proper  name,  Peter. 
>,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  path. 

g,  ber,  beg  -(g),  fiinf  ^fen'^ 
nig,  gefyn  ^Pfen'ntg,  pfennig,  a 
German  coin  worth  about  a 
quarter  of  a  cent. 

f  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bte  -e,  horse. 
,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  atuet  ^funb, 
pound. 

^otogta^^tc',  bte,  bte  -n,  photo- 
graph, picture. 

te'rctt,    pljotograpfyier'te, 
iert7  (^aben),to  photo- 
graph, take  a  picture  of. 
,  ber,  beg  -g,  bte  Pane,  plan. 

ber,  beg  -eg,  bte  Pctee,  room, 
space  ;  square  ;  seat ;  $Ia£  net)'* 
men,  to  be  seated,  sit  down. 
idj,  suddenly. 


34 


ft^ei',  tie,  (the)  police. 
ft,  bie,  bie  -n,  post  .office,  post. 
t,  bie,  splendor,  magnificence. 
tig,     splendid,     magnificent, 
luxurious. 
^rityofittiw',  bie,  bte  -en,  preposi- 

tion. 
$ret3,  ber,  beg  ^reifeg,  bie  ^reife, 

t  price;  praise. 

prei'fen,   reg.    (fyaben),  to   praise, 
laud  ;  pres.  part.,  preifenb,  prais- 
ing. 
^rofef'for,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  ^rofeffo'* 

ren,  professor. 
^riiffteitt,    ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e, 

touchstone. 

^ruttf'faal,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie 
^Prunf'jale,  hall  of  state  ;  festival 
hall. 

,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -en,  psalm. 
,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  desk. 

£1 
e,  bie,  bie  -n,  spring  ;  source. 


a'&e,  bie,  bie  -n,  raven. 

bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  ^a'ber, 
wheel. 

ft,  bie,  rest,  repose. 
t,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  ^dte,  ad- 
vice, counsel. 

tau'benf  reg.  (^aben),  to  rob. 
$taum,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  ^au'me, 

room  ;  period  of  time. 
-rau'fr^Ctt,    reg.    (fyaben),  to   rush, 

roar  ;  to  murmur,  gurgle. 
Olecij'ttttttg,    bie,   bie    -en,  bill,  ac- 
count, reckoning. 


t,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  right  •, 

justice. 
redjt,  adj.,  right  (morally) ;   right 

(hand)  ;      adv.,     well,     rightly, 

right ;  recfyt  fyaben,  to  be  right. 
retfjt£,   adv.,  on  the  right,  to  the 

right. 

Ofte'fce,  bie,  bie  -n,  speech,  talk ;  tale. 
re'ben,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  speak,  talk. 
DSe'gef,  bie,  bie  -n,  rule. 
Ote'geit,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  rain. 
reg'tten,  reg.  (fyaben),  impers.,  eg 

regnet,  it's  raining. 

id),  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  realm  ; 

kingdom ;  empire. 

id),  reiser,  reid)ft,  rich(ly)  ;  reid) 

an,  rich  in ;  as  noun,  ber  9?eid)e, 

beg  -n,  bie  -n,  the  rich  (man) ; 

ber  9Md)fte,  beg  -n,  bie  -n,  the 

richest  man. 
rei'djen,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  reach;  at 

table,  to  pass ;  bie  §anb  reidjen, 

to    extend    or    hold    out    one's 

hand. 
Ofei1)(e)tt,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  (poetic 

for  ber  9faig en),  party  of  dancers  ; 

dance. 
teinr   reiner,   rein  ft,    clean,    pure  ; 

chaste,  unsullied. 
rci'ttigctt,  reg.  (tjaben),  to  clean. 
SRct'fe,   bie,  bie   -n,  journey,   trip; 

gute  SReife !  a  pleasant  journey  ! 
rei^en,  reg.  (fein),  to  travel. 
rci'tcn,  ritt,  geritten  (jein  or  I)aben, 

§  76,  Note),  to  ride  ;  id)  reite  ntein  • 

neneg   ^3ferb,   I'll   ride   my   new 

horse. 
,rei'$ettr  reg.  (^aben),  to  provoke; 

to  charm. 


rcttcn 


35 


Sang 


ret'tett,  reg.  (fjaben),  to  save,  res-      JFht'ber,   bag,  beg  -g,  bte  — ,  oar; 


cue ;    bie    ret'tenbe    @tnnbe,  the 

hour  of  salvation. 
D^et'ter,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  rescuer  ; 

of  the  Deity,  Savior. 
Olljeitt,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  proper  name, 

the  Rhine. 

ridj'ttg,  correct,  right. 
rief,  called  ;  see  r  it  fen. 

:,  reg.  (fyaben  or  fetn,  §  76, 

Note),  to  gurgle,  purl,  murmur 

(usually  of  water). 
SRte'feitgebirge,  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,   j  ntlj'te,  rested ;  see  rnfyen. 

proper  name,  the   Giant  Moun-      O^ttt'lte,  bte,  bie  -n,  ruin. 

tains. 

rhtg3,    adv.,  round  about. 
ritt'ttctt,  rann,  geronnen  (fetn),  to 

flow,  run. 

',  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  knight. 


,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  $o'(fe,  coat ; 

of  ivomen's  dress,  skirt. 

r  regr.  (^aben),  to  coast,  slide 

down  hill ;  as  noun,  bag  9to'be(n, 

beg  -$,  coasting. 
9fo'fer  bie,  bie  -n,  rose. 
Oflo'fettftocff  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  9lo'- 

fenftocfe,  rosebush,  rose  tree. 
ro'fig,  rosy. 
DfiiJ§^eittf  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  little 

rose. 
9foftr   bag,  beg  9tof'fe«,  bie  iRof'fe, 

steed,  horse. 
rotf  red. 
JRii'rfett,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  back  (of 

the  body). 
DRit'efert  (ber),  proper  raawe,  Riick- 

ert. 

facff  ber,  beg  -(e)«,  bie 

facfe,  knapsack ;  pack. 


rudder,  helm. 
9l«f,    ber,   beg   -(e)g,   bie   -e,   cry, 

shout,  call. 
ru'fen,  rief,  geru'fen  (^aben),  to  call, 

cry  out  ;   see  also  aug'rufett,  gu'* 

rufen. 
ytn'fytf  bie,  also  written  9htl),  rest, 

repose. 
ru'^cn,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  rest;  see 

also  aug'rufyetu 
tgf  quiet,  calm. 


nutb,  round. 


?*,  for  Sattft,  saint. 
T§f  for  eg,  it. 


@aal,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bte  @dle,  hall, 
room. 

Saa'Ie  (bie),  proper  name,  the 
Saale  (river). 

J(Saatf  bte,  bie  -en,  seed. 

Sa'dje,  bie,  bie  -n,  affair ;  thing. 

©adj'fen  (bag),  proper  name,  Sax- 
ony. 

(3acf,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bte  @a'<fe,  sack, 
bag. 

fa'gen,  reg.  (baben),  to  say ;  to 
tell ;  see  also  fyer'fagen. 

faljr   faljen,  faf)eft,  fa^ft,   saw;   see 


i'te,  bte,  bte  -n,  (harp)  string. 
>far&ettf  reg.  (^aben),  to  anoint. 
<3a'Ie,  halls  ;  see  @aal. 
fattftf  gently,  soft. 
(Bang,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  @a'n'ge, 
song. 


fang 


36 


fdjimmern 


fang,  fangen,  sang  ;  see  ftn'gen. 

r,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  singer ; 
minstrel,  bard. 

rlrieg,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e, 
musical  competition,  song  war. 

San'gerfaaf,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie 
(San'gerja^hall  of  the  minstrels. 

fanlf  sank  ;  see  fhtfetu 

faft,  fagen,  sat ;  see  ft£en. 

@a^,  ber,  beg  -eg,  bte  ®a£e,  sen- 
tence. 

fau'er,  fanrer,  sour  •  disagreeable. 

fou'feftt,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  rustle. 

ftttt'fett,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  rush,  roar  ; 

•    as  noun,  bag  @aufen,  roar. 
cr  Sdjadjt,   beg  -(e)g,  bte  -e,  or 
@ci)cid)'te,  pit,  shaft  (of  a  mine). 

fdja'fce,  too  bad,  a  shame;  ttrie 
fcfya'be !  what  a  shame  !  what  a 
pity  ! 

(Sdja'ferht,  bie,  bie  -nen,  shep- 
herdess. 

frffaf'fett,  fdjuf,  gefdjaf'fen  (^aben), 
to  create,  bring  forth ;  to  make, 
produce ;  fd)df'fett,  bag  mein 
£anb,  bring  it  about  that  my 
country,  etc.,  or  make  my  coun- 
try, etc. 

Sdjaff'ner,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  con- 
ductor ;  manager ;  steward. 

frf|al'lettf  fd)oE,  gefdjol'len  (^aben), 
also  reg.,  to  sound,  resound, 
make  a  sound ;  pres.part.,  fd)af= 
lenb,  resounding. 

f^a'mcn  ftt^r  reg.  (Ijaben),  to  be 
ashamed  ;  as  noun,  bag  (Seamen, 
shame. 

(S^att'bc,  bie,  disgrace,  dishonor  ; 
gu  @c^an'ben  (old  weak  dative; 


see  aitf  (Sr'ben,  auf  ber  §eiben) 
rt)erben,  to  become  a  disgrace. 

Sd)at'te(tt)f  ber,  beg-(n)g,  bte  -(it), 
shadow. 

(SdjcH?,  ber,  beg  -eg,  bie  @<i)at'ge, 
treasure  ;  of  persons,  sweetheart 
(of  either  sex). 

Sdjat'^el,  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  sweet- 
heart, lover. 

frf)at'3ett,  reg.  (fyabert),  to  value  ;  to 
treasure. 

fr^au;enf  reg.  (fyaben),  to  look;  to 
gaze  ;  to  see  ;  see  also  an'fd)auen, 
Ijentie'berfdjanett,  ^inauf'fd)aiten. 
><Sdjaumf      ber,     beg     -(e)g,     bie 
@d)a'u'nte,  foam. 

fr^att'rigf  gruesome(ly),  wierd(ly). 

(Srfjeffef  (ber),  proper  name, 
Scheffel. 

fdjet'tten,  frfjien,  geft^ie'nen  (Ijabeu), 
to  shine  ;  to  appear ;  to  seem. 

fdjett'fen,  see  ein'fcfjenfen. 

<3d)ett'tte,  bie,  bie  -n,  barn. 

fdji'rfett,  reg.  (l)aben),  to  send;  eg 
fdjirft  fi(^,  it  is  proper. 

fdjiett,  seemed;  shone;  see  fd)ei'* 
nen. 

,  frf)^,  gejrf)of'fen  (fjaben), 
to  shoot. 

f  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  ship. 

Setyif'fer,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  boat- 
man. 

Srfjtff' Icttt,  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  little 
boat. 

<Si^t(bf  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -er,  sign, 
sign-board,  sign-post. 

fdjirn'mern,  reg.  (^aben),  to  shim- 
mer, gleam  ;  pres.  part.,  fdjim'* 
tnernb,  shimmering. 


37 


frfjrtcb 


6rf)faf,  ber,  be3  -(e)S,  sleep. 

fdjto'fen,  fdjlief,  gefcfyla'fen  (fyaben), 
er  fd)(cift,  to  sleep;  impers.  reflex., 
e§  fdjlaft  fid),  one  sleeps  ;  see  also 
ein'fcfytafen. 

(Sdjlafsimmer,  ba§,  be$  -«,  bie  —  , 
bedroom. 

fdjla'gett,  fdjfag,  gefcfyla'gen  (fyaben), 
er  fdjtagt,  to  strike,  beat,  hit  ;  of 
drums,  to  beat;  of  birds,  to 
warble,  carol,  sing;  reflex.,  fid) 
fdjla'gen,  to  fight  ;  of  students, 
to  fe^nce  ;  see  also  fog'fdjtagen* 

3d)  (a'  get,  ber,  beS  -$,  bie  —  ,  duel- 
ling sword. 

fdjlagt,  strikes  ;  see  fdjlagen. 

fdjfanf,  slender. 

frf)led)t,  bad;  et'ttaS  ©e^ledj'teS, 
something  bad. 

jctt,  fcpd),  gefdjtidjen  (fein), 
to  creep,  slink  ;  to  slip  (secretly)  ; 
see  also  I)inein'fd)feid)en. 
-<5rf)leu'fe,  bie,  bie  -n,  sluice;  lock 

(on  canal  or  river). 
>frf)(tdjt,  simple,  unpretentious. 

frf)Ueff  slept  ;  see  fd)(afetu 

WRc'fiew,  jd)I56,  gefd)Iof'jen  (^a* 
ben),  to  shut,  lock  ;  see  also  tin'* 
fdjfiefjen,  ju'fdjliegen* 

fctyltmm,  fd)Ummer,  bad,  worse. 

tenr  ber,  be§  -^  bie  —  ,  sled, 
sleigh  ;  bobsled  ;  double-runner  ; 
(mit)  @(^Ut'ten  faty'ren,  fu{)r, 
gefa^ren  (jein),  er  fa^rt  (mit) 
@d)(itten;  to  coast,  go  coasting. 
djIWfrfjitf),  ber,  be^  -(e)S,  bie  -e, 
skate;  (gdjUtt'^ut)  laufen,  lief 


lau'fen  (fein  or  l)aben),  to  skate  ; 


as   noun    written    together,    bag 
rfd)itl)laufen,  skating, 
bag,    beg    @d)Ioffeg,     bie 
@d)Ioffer,  castle. 
fdjfatfj'sen,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  sob. 
fd)(ntj,  struck;  see  fd)(a'gen. 
fdjhutt'mern,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  slum- 
ber, sleep. 

fcfjmaf,  small,  narrow,  slim. 
>>Sd)mau3,   ber,  beg  ®d)tnaufeg,  bie 
@dt)maufe,  feast,  spread,  banquet ; 
carousal, 
odjmibt  (ber),  proper  name,  Smith. 

@d)tniffe,  blow,  lash,  stroke  ;  of 
duelling,  scar. 

(Srfjnee,  ber,  beg  -g,  snow. 

(Sdjnei'ber,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  tailor. 

fdjnei'ett,  reg.  (fyaben),  impers.,  eg 
fdjneit,  it's  snowing. 

fttynell,  fcf)neller,  fast,  swift(ly). 

ber,    beg    ~(e)g,    bie 
e,  express  train. 

fdjim,  fd)bner,  fdjonft,  beautiful, 
fair ;  nid^tg  @d)5'nereg,  nothing 
more  beautiful;  fc^on!  all  right! 
very  well ! 

frf)Utt,  already  ;  ob  .  .  .  fd)on,  al- 
though; sign  of  continuing  action, 
®inb  @ie  fd^on  lange  l)ier?  Have 
you  been  here  long  ? 

ber,     beg     ©djo'fteg,     bie 
e,  lap ;  bosom. 

frfjrei'&en,  fdjrieb,  gefc^rie'ben  (^a* 
ben),  to  write;  as  noun,  bag 
@cfyrei'ben,  writing. 

fdjrei'en,  fd^rie,  gefdjri'en  (^aben), 
to  cry  out,  scream,  shriek. 

frfjrieb,  wrote  ;  see  fdjreiben* 


Sc^ritt 


38 


fef)en 


(Bdjrttt,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bte  -e,  step ; 
@rf)ritt  unb  Xritt,  step  and  stride. 
frf)tt'feit,  created  ;  see  fdfyaffetu 
f|,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  shoe, 
b,  bte,  bie  -en,  guilt ;  debt. 

r,    ber,  beg   -g,  bte   — , 
debtor. 

<3rf)Ul'Mglett,  bte,  indebtedness. 
(Bdju'le,  bte,  bte  -n,  school;  tn  ber 
©d)it(e,  at  school ;  tn  bte  @d)ixle, 
to  school. 

Srfjii'fe*,  ber,  beg  -g,  bte  — ,  pupil. 
Sdjiir^e,  bte,  bte  -n,  apron. 
fdjitt'teltt,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  shake. 
frfjut'^en,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  protect. 
fdjttW'btfd),  Swabian,  of  Swabia. 
(5d)ttwl'&e,  bte,  bte  -n,  swallow. 
©rfjwar&eulteb,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bte 
-er,  swallow  song,  song  of  the 
swallow. 
fdjttwttb,  disappeared;  see  fcf)rtnn'= 

ben. 

fdjttwr'mett,  reg.  (^aben),  to  be  en- 
thusiastic, enthuse  ;  to  lead  a  gay 
life;  to  dote  (on,  fiir  with  ace.). 
^  black. 

lfcr    ber,  proper  name, 
the  Black  Forest. 

>  fdjtoe'&en,  reg.   (fyaben),  to  sway, 

be  suspended  ;  pres.  part.,  fcfytoe'* 

benb,  suspended  ;  tn  jdjfte'benber 

^3etn,  in  pain  and  suspense. 

Srf)tt>etf,  ber,  be§  -(e)§,  bie  — ,  train 

(of  a  dress) . 

•  >fdjttietfett,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  wander; 
stray,  roam. 

fc^micg,     gefdjune'gen 
),  to  keep  still ;  to  be  still ; 
to  remain  silent. 


t$,  bie,  proper  name,  always 

with  article,  Switzerland. 
fd)ttiel'fettf  reg.  (fyaben),  to  cause  to 

swell. 
fdjtoer,  j(^tt)erer,  heavy  ;  hard  (not 

easy,  as  distinguished  from  l)art, 

not     soft)  ;    et'ftmS    @(i)tt)erreg, 

something  hard. 
6d)foertf   bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -er, 

sword. 

Sdjtoe'fter,  bie,  bie  -n,  sister. 
fdjtirim'mett,    fc^mamm 

men  (fein),  to  swim. 
,  f  r^njtn'bcnf    fcfyroanb, 

(fetn),  to  disappear. 
Srfjttritt'ge,  bie,  bie  -n,  pinion,  wing. 
fdjttritt'geit,    fd^trang,    gefdjtDnn'gen 

(fyaben),  to  swing;  see  also  fid)  ' 


n,  fc^tDor,  gefdjtooren  (f)a- 
ben),  to  swear;  to  take  an  oath. 

,  ber,  be$-(e)g,  bte 
oath  . 


tf  sixteenth. 

<3ee,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  -n,  lake. 

(3ccr  bie,  the  ocean. 

See'lef  bie,  bie  -n,  soul. 

Se'rjCtt,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  —  ,  blessing  ; 
prosperity. 

feg'tten,  reg.  (^aben),  to  bless. 

fe'fyen,  fa^,  gefe'^en  (^aben),  er 
ftel)t,  imperative,  fie^,  fet)t,  to  see  ; 
reflex.,  fic^  fefyen,  to  be  seen  ;  fel)en 
has  the  peculiarities  of  modals 
when  used  in  a  compound  tense 
with  a  dependent  infinitive  :  fyabe 
fafyren  fe^en,  have  seen  go;  see 
also  an'fefyen,  ang'fefyen,  j 


39 


Sottmt 


feljtt,  for  fefjen. 

feljr,  very,  much. 

fet,  be,  pres.  subjunc.  and  impera- 

tive 2d  sing,  of  fein. 
fcif  iei'tUfpres.  subjunc.  o/fein. 
fetfo,  are,  be,  pres.  indie.  and  im- 

perative 2d  sing,  of  fein. 
Set'be,  bie,  bie  -n,  silk. 
fcinf  ttmr,  getoe'fen  (fein),  id)  bin, 

Dii  bift,  er  ift,  ttrir  ftnb,  ifyr  feib, 

fie  finb;  pres.  subjunc.,  id)  fei  ; 

past  subjunc.,  id)  ftwre  ;   to  be; 

as  auxil.  of  tense,  to  have. 
fettt,  his  ;  its. 
fetnig,  his;  its. 
fett,   prep,    with  dat.,  since;    for; 

also  conjunc.,  since. 
Sei'te^  bie,  bie  -n,  side  ;  page  ;  jur 

^>ei'te,  by  or  at  the  side  ;  aside. 
3ei'tettp0rtal',  ba$,  be§  -(e)§,  bie 

-e,  side  portal. 
fefbr  same. 
feller,  indecl.  intensive  pron.,  self  ; 

myself,  himself,  yourself,  etc. 
fefbft,  intensive  pron.,  self  ;  myself, 

himself,     yourself,     etc.;     adv., 

even. 

fel'ten,  seldom,  rarely. 
fet'sett,  reg.    (fyabett),  to   set,  put, 

place  ;   reflex.  ,  fid)   fe^en,  to  sit 

down  ;  see  also  fort'fe^en. 
fe^'te,  fe£ten,  put  ;  see  fe^etu 
sfcuf5Cttf  reg.  (^aben),  to  sigh. 
firfj,   reflex,  pron.  of  3d  pers.  and 

polite  form  2d  pers.,  self,  him- 

self, herself,  themselves,  yourself. 
fi'rfjer,  secure,  safe  ;  sure. 


or  polite). 


fte,  ifjrer,  ifyr,  fie,  she. 
fie,  ifyrer,  ifynen,  fte,  they. 
fie'fcen,  seven. 

fie/&emutbtteutt/5tg,  ninety- seven. 
fie'&ettttttbsttWtt'^igft,      twenty-sev- 
enth. 
ftefc^efjtt,  seventeen. 

r  seventy. 

It,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  conquer, 
ftefyft,  fiefyt,  see  ;  see  fe'fyen  and 

<3t('ber,  ba$,  be§  -$,  silver. 
fit'bern,  adj.,  (of)  silver. 
fifberfdjttier',    heavy    with    silver, 

rich  in  silver, 

Stf  djer  (ber),  proper  name,  Silcher. 
finbf  are ;  see  fein. 
fitt'gen,  fang,  gefnn'gen  (f)aben),  to 

sing  ;  as  noun,  ba§  @in'gen,  sing- 
ing ;  see  also  ein'ftngen. 
ftn'fen,   fanf,  gefnn'fen    (fein),    to 

sink. 
Simtf     ber,     be^    -(0^    ^e    ~e/ 

thought (s);  head. 
fiu'nen,  fann,  gefon'nen  (^aben),  to 

think ;    as  noun,   ba§    @in'nen, 

thought,  thinking. 
<3tt'tef  bie,   bie  -n,  custom,  usage. 
fit'^ett,  fag,  gefef'fen  C^aben),  to  sit. 
fn,   so ;    then ;   fo  etlua^,   anything 

like  that. 

as  soon  as. 
,  in  fact ;  even. 
,  at  once,  immediately, 
ber,  beg   -(e)3,  bie 


,  as  long  as,  so  long  as. 
fold),  fof'djer,  fot'cfje,  foFdjeS,  such. 
<So(bat'f  ber,  be^  -en,  bie  -en,  soldier. 


fatten 


40 


(tad) 


fai'lett,  foilte,  gefoflt'  or  jol'len  (Ija- 
ben),  er  foil,  to  be  to ;  ought  to, 
should;  lt)ag  foil  bag?  what  does 
that  mean  ? 

fflU'te,  ought ;  see  folletu 

Som'mer,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  sum- 
mer. 

(Som'mermorgen,  ber,  bee  -g,  bie 
— ,  summer  morning. 

Sorn'mer^eit,  bie,  summer  time, 
summer. 

fan'bern,  but  (rather),  but  (in- 
stead). 

(Bon'nafcenb,  ber,  beg  -(e)«,  bte  -e, 
Saturday. 

Son'ne,  bie,  bie  -n,  sun. 

@0n'nenftral)l,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie 
-en,  sunbeam. 

(Sonn'tag,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e, 
Sunday. 

fottft,  otherwise,  or  else  ;  formerly, 
fonft  nirf)tg  meljr,  nothing  else, 
nothing  further. 

bie,  bie  -n,  care,  sorrow. 
r,  so  much. 

en,  tyal'tete,  gefyalten  (Ijaben), 
to  split. 

Wat,  fpa'ter,  late,  later. 

@^ci'fefaa(r  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie 
^^eVfefale,  dining  hall. 

tyeMie'ren,  jpefnlier'te,  fpcfuttcrt' 
(fyoben),  to  speculate. 

S^ic'gel,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  mirror, 
looking  glass. 

r,  clear  as  a  mirror. 
fir^f   reg.  (^aben),  to  be 
mirrored. 

ielf  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  game, 
play ;  auf  bem  @piel,  at  stake. 


,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  play. 

f   ber,  beg  -eg,  bie 
,  playground,  schoolyard. 
f  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie 
or  @por'nen,  spur. 

f  spoke  ;  see  fyre'cfyen. 
f  bie,  bie  -n,  language. 


f  prang,  tyran^en,  sprang;  burst; 

see  tyr  in'gen* 
fpre^cn,    jpradj,   gefpro^en   (l^a* 

ben),  er  fyritf)t,  imperative,  fpric^, 

to   speak  ;    2)entf(f)  f^re^en,  to 

speak  German. 
(Spree  (bie),  proper  name,  the  Spree 

(river)  . 

ialb  (ber),  proper  name,  the 

Spree  Forest. 
vfpren'gen,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  blow  up, 

burst. 
fprtrf),   tyridjft,  tyricfyt,  speak;  see 


ag,    beg    -(e)g,   bie 
Sorter,  proverb  ;  saying. 
fpro§,  gefyrof'fen  (fein), 
to  sprout,  bud,  bloom. 
ft>rtn'genf  fprang,  gefprnngen  (fein), 

to  spring,  leap,  jump  ;  to  burst. 
Sprut'gerf    ber,    beg   -g,    bie    —  , 

leaper,  jumper,  springer. 
@prttd)r  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  ©prii'dje, 

saying;  proverb. 
6prnngf  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  ^^riin'ge, 

leap,  bound. 
xj  f  pitmen,  reg.  (l)aben),  to  detect  ;  to 

find,  to  notice. 
Staat,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -en,  state. 


,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie 
staff. 
f  pricked  ;  see  ftecfyen. 


Stabt 


41 


Stubettt 


Stabt,  bie,  bte  ©tab'te,  city ;  in  bie 

@tabt,   into  the  city,   to  town, 

down  town. 
Stabt'cfyett,  bag,  beg  -g,  bte  — -,  little 

city. 
ftanb,   ftanben,   stood ;    see   fte'fyen 

and  aufftefyen. 
ftarfc,  died  ;  see  fter'ben. 
ftarl,    ftarfer,  ftarfft,  adj.,  strong; 

adv.,  hard,  severely. 
ftatt,  see  ftatt'ftnben. 
ftatt'fittben,  fanb  ftatt',  ftott'gefun* 

ben  (fyaben;,  to  take  place;   to 

occur. 

Stau&,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  dust. 
fte'rfjen,  ftad),  gefto'cfyen  (fyaben),  er 

fttdjt,  to  prick  ;  to  sting. 
Ste'rfett,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  rod. 
fte'rfen,  reg.   (fjaben),  to  put;    to 

stick. 

fte'ljettf  ftanb,  geftanben  (fyaben),  im- 
perative, fte^(e),  to  stand  ;  to  be  ; 

ftef)en  Meiben,  to  stop;  see  also 

auf'ftefyen,  na(i)'ftel)en» 
ftc^Icttf  fta^  gefto^Ien  (^abcn),  er 

fttefylt,  to  steal. 
ftcirgcnf    ftieg,  geftiegen  (fcin),  to 

climb. 

(Stein,  ber,  be§  -(e)0,  bie  -e,  stone. 
ftcl'leit,   reg.   (Ijaben),  to  put  (up- 
right) ;   to  place,  put ;  to  stand 

(active). 
ftct^cn,  ftarb,  geftorben  (fein)r  er 

ftirbt,  to  die. 

Stern,  ber,  be8  -(e)8,  bie-e,  star. 
ftet^f  always. 

ftte'f?enr  pushed ;  see  fto^en. 
ftifl(e)f  flitter,  still,  stiller. 

ilfltr  bie,  quiet,  seclusion. 


ftirfct,  dies,  is  dying ;  see  fter'ben. 

@torff  ber,  be^  -(e)«,  bte  Stocfe, 
stick  ;  cane  ;  staff. 

Staff f  ber,  beg  -(e)«,  bte  -e,  ma- 
terial. 

ftol^,  proud  (of,  aitf  with  ace.). 

Storm  (ber),  proper  name,  Storm. 

fti'ffeitf  ftieg,  gefto'gen  (f)aben),  er 
ftogt,  to  push,  thrust,  shove  ;  see 
also  cm'ftogen. 

Strati,  ber,  be$  -(e)8,  bie -en,  beam, 
gleam,  ray. 

ftrnlj'ten,  reg.  (^aben),  to  gleam; 
pres.  part.,  ftra^tenb» 

Stranfc,  ber,  be^  -(e)^  bte  -e, 
strand. 

Strafe,  bie,  bte  -n,  street. 

ftre'&en,  reg.  (^aben),  to  strive ;  to 
struggle ;  as  noun,  bag  €>treben, 
striving. 

Streitf  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bte  -e,  quar- 
rel, wrangle  ;  dispute,  argument ; 
conflict,  fight. 

ftrei'tenf  ftrttt,  geftrttten  (t)aben),  to 
contend,  fight ;  to  argue,  wrangle. 

ftrettg,  strict,  severe. 

Stromf  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bte  <Strome, 

stream. 

•ftrttrbe(ttf  reg.  (^aben),  to  whirl, 
swirl,  eddy ;  to  bubble,  foam. 

Strumpff  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie 
@triimpfe,  stocking. 

Stiirf,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bte  -e,  piece; 
in  @tiicf e,  to  pieces ;  a  following 
noun  is  in  apposition,  without 
preposition  or  article  ;  tntt  einem 
@tiicf  33rot,  with  a  piece  of  bread. 

Stubent',  ber,  beg  -en,  bie  -en,  stu- 
dent. 


ftubieren 


42 


ftofcie'rett,  fhtbier'te,  ftubiert'  (f)a= 
ben),  to  be  a  student;  to  do  ad- 
vanced study  ;  ftnbie'ren  is  not 
applied  to  ordinary  study  below 
the  university  ;  see  (er'tteiu 

Stitfjl,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  (Stufy'Ie, 
chair. 

ftitmm,  dumb,  silent. 

Sttttt'be,  bie,  bie  -n,  hour,  lesson; 
^ur  gn'ten  (Stun'be,  at  the  right 
time. 

Sturm,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  @tiir'tne, 
storm  ;  also  proper  name,  Sturm. 
tt,  reg.  (fjaben),  to  stop  short ; 
to  be  startled. 

•*ftiit'5ett,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  support; 
to  rest  upon  (active). 

fu'djeu,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  seek ;  to 
look  for,  hunt  for. 

Siib'beutfrfjlattb,  bag,  beg  -(e)g, 
proper  name,  South  Germany. 

Sit'bett,  ber,  beg  -g,  the  South. 

'fur,  for  Sftenfur. 

fiift,  sweet(ly). 

X 

^agf  ber,  be§  -(c)«,  bie  -e,  day. 

tag1i(^f  daily. 

Xa(f  bag,  be«  -(e)g,  bie  ^a^er,  val- 
ley ;  dale. 

Saltnt',  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  tal- 
ent. 

£att'nett&aumf  ber,  beg  -(e)«,  bie 
Xan'nettbautne,  fir-tree. 

Xan^,  ber,  beg  -eg,  bie  Xa'n^e,  dance. 

tan'5enf  reg.  (l)aben),  to  dance ;  see 
also  ein'tatt^etu 

tap'fer,  bold,  brave. 

Xa'fdfc,  bie,  bie  -n,  pocket. 


Xaf'fc,  bie,  bie  -n,  cup. 

£at,  bie,  bie  -en,  deed,  act ;  in  ber 
Xat,  in  fact. 

tatf  taten,  tate,  did ;  see  tun. 

tau'fettbf  a  thousand ;  as  noun,  bag 
Xau'fenb,  the  thousand ;  oon 
Xau'fenben  Don  9ften'fd)en,  by 
thousands  of  people. 

£eef  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  -g,  tea. 
ilr  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  part. 
f  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  plate. 

Xeftamettt',  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e, 
testament. 

Sfje'obur  (ber),  proper  name,  Theo- 
dore. 

£!jnmf  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  throne. 

tfjro'iteit,  reg.  (I)aben),  to  be  en- 
throned- 

ett    (bag),  proper    name, 
Thuringia. 

r,  indecl.  adj.,  Thuringian. 

ttcfr  tiefer,  deep(ly). 

£ier,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  ani- 
mal. 

£ter'gartettr  'ber,  beg  -g,  bie  £ier'* 
garten,  animal  garden ;  proper 
name,  the  Tiergarten  Park  in 
Berlin. 

£ttt'te,  bie,  bie  -n,  ink. 

£ifrf)r  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  table ; 
ftc^  gu  £ifcfy(e)  je^en,  to  sit  down 
to  a  meal. 

£orf)'terf  bie,  bie  £bd)'ter,  daughter. 

Xobf  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  death. 

to'nett,  reg.  (^aben),  to  resound, 
sound. 

,   ber,   beg   -(e)g,  bie    Xity'fe, 
pan ;  jar,  vessel ;  dish. 
o*f  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  gate. 


tot 


43 


iibcrijcbcu 


tot,  dead ;  tie  £oten,  the  dead. 
to'ten,  reg.  (tjaben),  to  kill. 
— -'Xradjt,   bte,  Me  -en,  costume;  ap- 
parel, dress. 
tra'gen,  trng,  getragen  (fyaben),  er 

tragt,  to  carry,  bear;  to  wear  (of 

clothes). 

tragt,  carries ;  wears ;  see  tra'gen. 
Xra'tte,  bie,  Me  -n,  tear. 
tvanf,  tran'fen,  drank  ;  see  trtn'fen. 
trat,  stepped;  see  tre'ten. 
Srau'be,  Me,  bte  -n,  grape. 
Xrau'erffeib,    bag,  beg   -(e)g,    Me 

-er,  mourning  (garb). 
trau'ertt,  reg.   (fyaben),  to  mourn, 

grieve. 
Xraitm,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  Me  £ran'me, 

dream. 

trau'men,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  dream. 
ttau'rig,  sad(ly). 
ttautr  dear,  beloved. 
trci'ben,  trteb,  getrieben  (^aben),  to 

drive ;  to  work  at,  study  ;  to  do, 

act. 

trett'itett,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  separate. 
Xre^'^ef    Me,    Me    -n,    stairway, 

stairs;    bte    Xre^^e  fjtnauf,   up 

(the)  stairs. 
tre'tett,  trat,  getreten  (fetn),  er  trttt, 

to  step. 

trcuf  faithful ;  of  love,  true. 
-*  Xteu'e,  bte,  loyalty,  fidelity. 
XricB,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bte  -e,  sprout, 

young  shoot;  impulse. 
triefo,  drove  ;  see  tretben. 
trtn'len,  tranf,  getrunfen  (^aben), 

to  drink. 
Xrinf'geto,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  Me  -er, 

fee,  tip. 


bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bte  -et, 

drinking  song. 
Xritt,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  Me  -e,  step; 

@djrttt     nnb    Xrttt,     step    and 

stride. 

tritt,  steps  ;  see  treten. 
l>£rom'tttd,  bte,  bte  -n,  drum. 
Xrop'fen,  ber,  beg  -g,  bte  — ,  drop. 
£rdft,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  consolation, 

solace. 

trB'ften,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  console. 
tro^,  prep,  with  gen.,  in  spite  of. 
trug,  carried  ;  wore ;  see  tragen. 
Xritp'pett,  bte  (plu.),  troops. 
Xurf),    bag,   beg  -(e)g,  bte  £iid)er. 

cloth. 
tunf  tat,  getan  (fyaben),  to  do ;  see 

also  (etb'tun. 
Xiir,  bie,  bte  -en,  door. 
£urm,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bte    £iirtne, 

tower. 

U 

it'oef,  bag,  beg  -g,  bte  — ,  evil. 

Mief,  evil,  ill ;  it'bet  ne^men,  nafym, 
genommen  (tjaben),  er  ntmmt  eg 
iibef,  to  take  (something)  ill ;  to 
object  to. 

ii'&Ctt,  reg.  (f)aben),  to  practise  ;  to 
exercise. 

ii'ber,  (1)  prep,  with  dat.  or  ace., 
over,  above  ;  across ;  about  ; 
(2)  insep.  prefix  in  iiberfye'ben, 
iiberfet'^en,  itbertret'ben,  iiberjen^ 
gen. 

iifcerall',  all  over,  everywhere.  • 

f    itberljob',    iiber^o'ben 
reflex.,  to  be  overween- 
ing or  proud. 


44 


uttterfdjetbett 


^,  for  iiber  bag. 

iifcerfet'sett,  r<?0.  insep.  (fyaben),  to 

translate. 
v  ii&ertm'fcett,  iibertrteb',  ubertrie'ben 

(fyaben),  to  exaggerate. 
t/iibcr^ett'gen,  reg.  insep.  (fyaben),  to 
convince. 

it'fcrtg,  adj.,  remaining;  over. 

fi'fcttltg,  bte,  bte  -en,  practice,  exer- 
cise. 
"U'fer,  bag,  beg  -g,  bte  — ,  shore. 

Ufjfatt',  ber,  beg  -en,  bie  -en>  uhlan, 
light  cavalryman. 

Uf)'  fottb  ( ber ) ,  proper  name ,  Uhland. 

tlljr,  bte,  bte  -en,  clock ;  watch ; 
time;  o'clock;  2Btet)ie(  Ufjr  tft 
eg  ?  what  time  is  it  ?  (§g  tft  gefyn 
Uljr,  it  is  ten  o'clock. 

tUm  (bag),  proper  name,  (the  city 

of)  Ulm. 
>  Urmerf  indecl.  adj.,  (of)  Ulm. 

Wit,  (1)  prep,  with  ace.,  about, 
around ;  at ;  for ;  with  infin.  and 
311,  to,  in  order  to  ;  um  ^tooff  llfyr, 
at  twelve  o'clock ;  nm  etroag 
brtngen,  to  rob ;  to  defraud, 
cheat ;  nm  , » .  tt)tllen,  with  gen., 
for  the  sake  of ;  (2)  insep.  prefix 
in  utnge'ben,  nmge'fyen. 

umgc'Bett,  nmgab',  nmge'ben  (I)a= 
ben)P  er  umgtbtr,  to  surround. 

umge'l)ettf  nmgtng',  nntgan'gen 
(fjaben),  to  evade,  avoid. 

tttttljer'f  adv.  and  sep.  prefix,  about, 

around,  round  about. 
^  ttttfaBftangtgf  independent. 

un'belattttt,  unknown. 

Uttbf  and. 

tttt'gcfd^r,  about,  approximately. 


ttn'gftirf,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bte  Un? 
gtitcfgfatte,  misfortune ;  unhappi- 
ness. 

Uniform',  bie,  bte  -en,  uniform. 

Unit) erfit fit',  bte,  bte  -en,  university ; 
auf  ber  llnttierfttat',  at  the  uni- 
versity. 

UttfoerfitatS'ftabt,  bte,  bte  Untoer* 
fttatgftabte,  university  town. 

mt'redjt,  wrong ;  un'redjt  fyaben,  to 
be  wrong. 

nn§,  us  ;  see  n)tr. 

wt'fer,  unfre,  nnfer,  our. 

mt'frig,  ours. 

tttt'teit,  below ;  downstairs  ;  down 
there. 

tttt'tet,  (1)  prep,  with  dat.  or  ace., 
under  ;  among  ;  (2)  insep.  prefix 
in  unterfyaCten,  nnterjo'djen,  nn^ 
ternefy'nten,  nnterfd^et'ben, 

cnf  nnter()tett',  unter* 
(fyaben),  er  nnter^alt',  to 
entertain;  also  reflex.,  fid)  nnter* 
^at'ten,  to  be  entertained,  have 
a  good  time;  pres.  part.,  nnter* 
fjal'tenb,  entertaining. 

tttttertrVfctfd),  adj. ,  underground. 
/Uttterjo'djett,   reg.   insep.    (^aben), 
to  subdue. 

Uttteritc^mcn,  nnterna^m7,  nnter^ 
nom'tnen  ({)aben),  er  nnterntmntt;, 
to  undertake. 

ttttterttOttt'men,  undertaken ;  see 
unternefj'tnen. 

7ttnterf^ei'bctt,  nnterfd)teb',  nnter* 
fd^te'ben  (f)aben),  to  decide ;  re- 
flex., ftdj  imterfdjet'ben,  to  distin- 
guish ;  to  differ ;  to  differen- 
tiate. 


Untertan 


45 


fcerfor 


Un'tertan,  beg  -g  or  -en,  bte  -en, 

subject. 
Utt'&erttWttbt,  unflinching  (ly) ; 

steadily,  fixedly. 
Up 'pig,  luxuriant, 
ur'teifett,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  judge; 

to  form  a  judgment. 


twflerafleri',  untranslatable  student 

call. 
$a'ter,    ber,    beg   -g,    bie    $a'ter, 

father  ;  the  Heavenly  Father. 
$a'terljau3,  bag,  beg  $aterf)cmfeg, 

bie  $aterf)aufer,  father's  house ; 

home. 
SBa'terlnnb,   bag,  beg  -eg,  mother 

country,  fatherland. 
$eil'djeit,  bag,  beg  -eg,  bie  — ,  violet. 
tjerber'gett,     fcerbarg',     fcerbor'gen 

(fyaben),   er    fcerbirgt',    to   hide, 

conceal. 
tierfcefferu,  reg.  insep.  (fyaben),  to 

correct ;  to  improve  (active). 
toerfcie'tett,    fcerbot,    fcerbo'ten    (fya* 

ben),  to  forbid. 
fcer&tn'&ett,    fcerbanb',     berbun'ben 

(f)aben),  to  bind. 
^erbitt'bttngf   bie,  bie  -en,  union, 

association  ;  club,  society. 
fcerfcor'gett,  concealed  ;  see  fcerber'= 

gen. 

Ucrbot'f   t)erbo'ten,  forbade,  forbid- 
den; see  fcerbie'ten. 
tierfcraiutt7,   burned ;  see  tterbren^ 

nen. 
ticrBrau'fctt,    reg.  insep.    (fyaben), 

to    stop    fermenting;    to    settle 

down. 


:,  tierbrann'te,  tterbrannf 
(fyaben),  to  burn. 

fcerber'&ett,      fcerbarb',     fcerbor'ben 
(fetn) ,  to  spoil ;  to  pass  away,  die. 
>tt,     Derbrog',     Derbrof'fen 
,  to  annoy. 

ir  reg.   insep.  (fyaben),  to 
unite. 

:,   gone,  past ;    see    t)er- 


n,  dergab',  fcerge'ben  (^a^ 

ben),  er  oergibt',  imperative,  fcer* 

gib,  to  forgive. 
Uerge'ljen,      merging',      tjergan'gen 

(jein),  to  go  on  ;  to  pass  on. 
toergef'fett,   bergag',  toergef'jen  (^a= 

ben),  er  feergifjt',  to  forget. 
$ergtf$'metmurf)t,  bag  -(e)g,  bie  -e, 

forget-me-not. 
^ergift'tttditmeut,  bag  (for  ^Bergig^ 

ntetnnt(f)t),  forget-me-not. 
25ergnii'genf    bag,  beg  -g,  bie  — , 

pleasure. 
>tJer^af'tcnf  reg.  insep.  (Ijaben),  to 

arrest. 
t»crfau'fcttf  reg.  insep.  (^aben),  to 

sell. 
^erflttt'gett,    t>er!(angr,   ^erldtn'gen 

(fetn),  to  die  away  (of  sound). 
Uerfluit'gett,   died  away ;   see  t)er= 

ffin'gen. 
tietlof'fett,   tjerlieg',  tjertaf'fen   (^a^ 

ben),  er  fcerta'gt',  to  leave. 
Derlie'ren,    tjerlor',    t)er(o'ren    (^a* 

ben),  to  lose. 
bertief^  i)erlte^en,  left ;  see 

fen. 

trerfo'ren,  lost ;  see 

ren. 


toermafjlen 


46 


Dorbctraufrfjcu 


tt  ftrfj,    reg.  insep.   reflex. 

(fyaben),  to  get  married. 
tiernaljmft',      perceived  ;    see    t>er= 

nefy'men. 
tternefi'mett,  fcerna^m',  Dernom'men 

(fyaben),  er  fcentimmt',  to    per- 

ceive, become  aware  of  ;  to  learn, 

understand. 
toerttom'mett,  learned  ;  see  t>ernefy'> 

men, 


it,  tterfdjtang',  fcerfrf)Inn'= 
gen  (fyaben),  to  swallow. 
'  fcerfpre'djett,  fcerfyrad)',  t>  erf  pro'rfjen 
(tyaben),  er  fcerfpridjt',  to  promise. 
promises  ;   see  tierfyre'* 


berftanb',  oerftan'ben,  understood  ; 

see  fcerfte'fyen* 
Derfte'ljett,  fcerftanb,  tierftan'ben  (f)a* 

ben),    to     understand  ;     impers. 

reflex.,   eg    t>erftel)t'  fic^,  it  is  a 

matter  of  course. 
toerfu'djen,  reg.  insep.    (fyaben),  to 

try. 

^Bctftt'i^ttug,  bie,  temptation. 
ticrtratt'ctt,     reg.    insep.    (fyaben), 

with  dat.,  to  trust. 
UerttWtt'bettf  reg.  insep.  (Ijaben),  to 

wound  ;  reflex.,  fid)   fcerttmn'ben, 

to  get  wounded. 
iJcr^au  '&entr  reg.  insep.  (^aben),  to 

enchant. 
triel,  much  ;  (used  like  etttaS  with 

adjectives)  ;  plu.,  many. 
HtcUct^t^  perhaps. 
t>tctr  four. 
inert,  fourth. 
SBtCt'tc(r  ba«,  be§  -§,  bte  —  ,  quar- 

ter; fourth;  etn  ^Sier'tet,  indecl., 


narf)  etn  $tertet  eing,  after  quar- 
ter past  twelve. 
$iertefftimb'rfjett,   bag,  beg  -g,  bie 

— ,  little  quarter  of  an  hour. 
trier '5tg,  forty. 

SBtf'tor  (ber),  proper  name,  Victor. 
$0'0ef,     ber,   beg    -g,    bte     35ogei, 

bird. 
$o'geldjeit,  bag,  beg  -g,  bte  — ,  little 

bird. 
$ij'0(e)(eut,  bag,  beg-(e)g,  bte  — , 

little  bird. 

ft  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bte  -e,  vowel, 
bag,   beg  -(e)g,   bte  Coffer, 

folk,  nation,  race,  people. 

;bf  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bte  -er, 

folksong. 

$olf$'tt)eifef  bte,  bte  -n,  folk  melody. 
t>0Hr  full;  Dott  $artoffeln,  full  of 

potatoes. 
DoHbritt'gett,  Doftbrad)'te,  Dotlbradjt' 

(fyaben),  to  finish,  accomplish. 
DoKen'bett,     Dotten'bete,     DoUen'bet 

(fyaben),  to  finish;  to  end. 
toom,  for  »on  bem, 
Uonf   prep,   with   dat.,    from;    of: 

with  passive,  by. 

toot,  (1)  prep,  with  dat.  or  ace.,  be- 
fore, in  front  of  ;  ago ;  tior  (anter 

grenb',    for  pure  joy;    (2)   sep. 

prefix  in  Dor'fommen,  toor'fefen. 
U0rbei'f  adv.  and  sep.  prefix,  past, 

by ;  see  also  Dorbei;gef)en,  : 

raufdjen,  Dorbet'tuanbern. 
t»jr6ci'0c^cnr  gtng  Dorbet', 

gegangen  (fetn),  to  pass,  go  by, 

go  past. 
&or&ei'raufd)enf  reg.  sep.  (fetn),  to 

rush  by  or  past. 


Dorbeiwanbern 


47 


iu  nru  in 


tt,  reg.  sep.  (fein),  to 
wander  by  or  past  ;  to  wander 
over. 


',  before,  formerly. 
rtg,    adj.,    former,    preceding; 
last  ;  tiorigeg  3afyr,  last  year. 
&0r'f0mmen,   !am  t>or',  Dor'gefom* 

men  (fein),  to  occur,  ha'ppen. 
|  fcor'Iefett,  fag  tier',  toor'gelefen  (fja= 
ben),  er  Heft  dor',  to  read  aloud; 
to  lecture. 
"^or'fefwtg,   bie,  Me  -n,   reading  ; 

lecture. 

DorS,  for  Dor  bag. 
fcorii'lfoer,  adv.,  past,  over,  gone. 


uw'djen,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  be  awake ; 

to  watch. 
ttwdj'fen,  nm$g,  gettmcfy'fen  (fein), 

er  ftacfyft,  to  grow. 
S&adjt,  bte,  bte  -en,  watch,  guard. 
2Borf)'ter,  ber,  beg  -g,  bte  — ,  watch- 
man. 

^393af'fef  bte,  bte  -n,  arm,  weapon. 
2Ba'gett,  bet,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  wagon, 
carriage. 

tt,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  choose. 
r,    true;    ntrf)t  ft)a^r?    isn't  it 
so  ?  repeats  the  auxiliary  in  in- 
terrogative form,  isn't  it,  don't 
we,  won't  they,  etc. 

reg.  (fyaben),  to  last,  take 
(of  time). 

fc,  prep,  with  gen.,  during; 
conjunc.,  while. 

rf)f .  ber,    beg   -(e)g,   bie 
rixcfye,  verdict;  true  say- 
ing. 


r  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  Sa(berr 
forest,  wood. 

28att»'fd)itle,  bte,  bie  -n,  forest 
school. 

fe(,  ber,  beg  -g,  bte  — , 
treetops,  top  of  the  forest. 

r  reg.  (fein),  to  wander, 
travel ;  pres.  part.,  tuattenb  ;  bag 
^Bal'len,  motion. 

f  bte,  bte  2$a'nbe,  wall  (of  a 
room,  as  distinguished  from  bie 
Sftan'er,    wall    of    a    garden   or 
city). 
298an'bererf    bev,    beg   -g,    bte  — , 

wanderer. 

3San'bcr(icbf  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bte  -er, 
song  of  wanderings,  tramping 
song. 

,  reg.  (fein),  to  wander, 
tramp,  walk ;  as  noun,  bag 
SSanbern,  wandering. 

tafc,    ber,    beg   -(e^g,   bte 
SBan'berftabe,  wander  staff. 
r  btef  bte  -n,  cheek. 
,  reg.  (fein),  to  totter;  to 
swerve  ;  pres.  part.,  ttmnfenb. 
)uaunf  interrog.,  when. 
ttwrr  waren,  tt)are,  were  ;  see  fein. 
2Ba're,    bie,    bte   -n,   commodity; 

plu.,  wares.     • 

ttwrm,  tt)cirmer,  uicirmfl,  warm. 
SBart'Burg  (bte),  proper  name,  the 

Wartburg  (castle). 
Kmr'ten,  reg.  (^aben),  to  wait  (for, 
attf  with  ace.} ;  with  ace.,    bid) 
txmrten,  wait  on  you;  with  gen., 
fetner  greitbe  Garten,  wait  for  his 
pleasures. 
uwrum',  interrog.,  why. 


48 


3,  toem,  ttmg,  interrog.,  what ; 
compound  rel.,  that  which,  what; 
rel.  after  neuter  indefinite,  which, 
that;  sometimes  for  ettoag,  some- 
thing ;  ttmg  fitr,  what  kind  of. 
ttw'fdjen,  ftmfd),  gettm'fdjen  (fyaben), 

er  ttwfcfyt,  to  wash. 
SBafdj 'frail,   tie,   bte  -en,   washer- 
woman. 
Staffer,     bag,    beg    -«,    bte    — , 

water. 
toe'fcett,  ftob,  getooben  (fyaben),  aZso 

m?.,  to  weave. 

SBedj'fel,  ber,  beg  -g,  bte  — ,  change. 
tue'fcer,  neither;  toeber  ,  »  ,  nod), 

neither  .  .  .  nor. 

ttieg,   adv.   and  sep.  prefix,  away ; 
see  toeg'retgen. 

,  ber,  be§  -(e)§,  bte  -e,  way; 

,  along  the  way. 
prep,  to^/i  gen.,  on  account 
of,  because  of. 

eg'geriffett,  torn  away ;  see  toeg'* 
retgen. 

cg'rci|ettf  rtg  tteg',  tt)egfgertffen 
,  to  tear  away. 
,  be§  -(e)«,  bte  -e,  woe  ; 
(the  crying  of)  woe. 

.  (Ijaben),  to  blow;  to 
wave  ;  ba§  SSe'!)en,  waving ;  see 
also  fyer'roefyen. 

f  proper  name,  Wehl. 

f  bte,  tender  sadness,  sweet 
melancholy. 

,  be§  -(c)«,  bte  -e,  weir ; 
dike,  dam. 

re^.  (fyaben),  with  dat., 
to  ward  off,  resist ;  reflex.,  ftrf) 
ftefyren,  to  protect  oneself. 


tfc,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bte  -er,  wo- 
man ;  wife. 

toetdj,  soft,  tender,  gentle. 
-,  bte,  bte  -n,  willow. 
[,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  pasture, 
let  graze. 

t'gle  (ber),  proper  name,  Weigle. 
\t  reg.  (fyaben),  to  dedicate, 
consecrate. 

SBei'ljer,  ber,  beg  -g,  bte  — ,  small 
pond,  fish  pond. 

)t3$eit,  bte,  bte  -en,  Christ- 
mas time, 
because. 


SSeil'djett,  bag,  beg  -g,  bte  —,  little 

while. 
SBeHe,    bt,   bte,  -n,  while,   time; 

delay. 

SBeitt,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bte  -e,  wine. 
toei'ttCtt,      reg.     (fyaben),    to    cry, 

weep. 

ji'fe,  bte,  bte  -n,  way ;  anf  btefe 

2Setfe,  in  this  way  ;  also  melody, 

tune. 

jit,  bte,  wisdom. 
toeiff,  toetjst,  knows;  see  ttriffen. 

*t|f  «^j-?  white, 
far;  distant. 
te,  bag,  beg  -n,  distance, 
r,  adv.  and  sep.  prefix,  farther ; 

on,  along  ;  unb  jo  toet'ter,  and  so 

on ;  ftet'ter !  go  on  !  see  also  nm'* 

terbauen,  lt)et'terer^a{)ten,  tt)et'ter= 

ge^en,  toei  ferret  Jen,   ttjei'tcriDan--- 

bern, 
foeHerfcrwett,  reg.  sep.  (^aben),  to 

go  on  building. 
toei'terersaljfett,  reg.  sep.  (fyaben), 

to  tell  some  more. 


toeitergefjett 


49 


taet'tergdjett,  gtng  tuei'ter,  ttei'ter* 
gegangen   (feitt),  to   go    on,  go 
farther ;  to  continue. 
ttiei'temtfett,   rey.  sep.   (jeitt),   to 

travel  on  or  farther. 
foei'terttwnbent,  reg.  sep.  (feitt),  to 

wander  on  or  farther, 
uiclrt),  tnelcfyer,  ftelcfye,  trefcfyeg,  in- 
terrog.,  which,  what;  rel.,  that, 
which;    toelcfyen   £ag,  what  day 
of  the  week. 

(e,  bie,  bie  -tt,  wave ;  water. 
,  bie,  bie  -en,  world. 
toem,  ttett,  whom  ;  see  toer. 
UJc'itig,  little  ;  ^/M..,  few. 
ttie'ttiger,  indecl.,  fewer;  less. 
toe'ttigftett^,  at  least, 
tuemt,  when ;  if  ;  whenever. 
toer,  tueffett,  tt»em,  foett,  who ;  he 

who. 

wer'&en,  ttmr'be,  getoor'bett,  and  in 
passive,  toorbett  (jetn)f  bu  tmrft, 
er  tDtrb,  to  become ;  to  get ; 
auxil.  of  .future,  shall,  will; 
auxil.  of  passive,  to  be ;  past 
subj.,  ftmrbe,  as  auxil.  of  condi- 
tional, would. 
ttJcr'fcnr  toarf,  gertjor'fen  (^aben), 

er  tt)irftr  to  throw. 
293erf,  ba^,  be^  -(e)§,  bie  -e,  work. 
3Bcttr  ber,  beg  -(e)8,  bie  -e,  worth, 
value. 
t,  worth;  worthy. 

r,  bag,  beg  -4,  bie  — ,  weather. 
3,  ber,  beg  2Btd)feS,  gala  attire. 
ll'bcr,    prep,    with   ace.,   against, 
toward.  "V 

^er,  beg   -(e)g,   bie 
e,  contradiction. 


ttlte,   how;  like;  as;  afg  trie,  as; 

trie  fcfyabe !  what  a  shame  ! 
ttrie'ber,  adv.  and  sep.  prefix,  again ; 

see  also  ttne'berfommen,  tnte'ber* 

fe^en. 
ttJic^cr^o'Ien,   rt)ieber^o('te,  timber* 

{)o(t'  (Ijaben),  to  repeat. 
nrie'berfommett,  !am  tute'ber,  trie'* 

bergefommen     (few),    to    come 

again. 
ttrie'berfdjett,  faf)  trie'ber,  tDte(berge< 

jet)en(^aben),  er  jtefyt  ttJte'ber,  to 

see  again;  2faf  SBie'berfe^en!  till 

we  meet  again ! 
293tc'gef  bie,  bie  -tt,  cradle. 
ttitc'gctt,  re^.  (^aben),  to  rock  in  a 

cradle,  to  lull  to  sleep  ;  reflex.,  to 

rock,  sway  ;  see  also  etn'uriegetu 
398te'gettUebf  bag,  beg  -eg,  bie  -er, 

lullaby. 

SBte'fe,  bie,  bie  -n,  meadow. 
ttltetriel',    how    much;    plu.,    how 

many;  ttrietrief  U^r,  what  time? 

3)en  tt)tet)ie('ten  ^aben  tt)ir  ()eute? 

What  day  of  the  month  is  to- 
day ? 
wild. 

ttnttft,  will,  see  tt)oEen» 
SBU'le,  ber,  beg  -eng,  bie  -tt,  will. 
lutUen,  tint  »  »  »  tritten,  to^/i  ^e?i., 

for  the  sake  of. 
2Btttt>f  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  wind, 

breeze. 
>tmtt'!ettf  reg.  (^aben),  with  dat.,  to 

beckon  to. 

28itt'terf  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  winter. 
rfpDrt,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -g, 

winter  sport. 

l,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  treetop. 


ttitr 


50 


SBurft 


four,  unfcr,  ung,  ung,  we. 

Kuril,     will  ;    gets  ;     becomes  ;    see 


twrft,  throws  ;  see  toerfen. 
tflirfett,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  work. 
ttrirf'ttrfj,  real(ly). 
2Btri,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  host, 

landlord. 
SBirtS'IjauS,  bag,  beg  2Birt«'l)aufeS, 

bie    SBirtg'fyaufer,  public  house; 

inn  ;  restaurant. 
tmf'fen,  nntgte,  gettwJ3t  (fyaben),  er 

toeijs,  to  know,  have  knowledge 

of  (as  distinguished  from  fennen, 

to  know,  be  acquainted  with). 
SBtt'teittierg    (bag),  proper  name, 

Wittenberg. 

too,  interrog.  and  rel.  adv.,  where. 
28o'rf)e,  bie,  bie  -n,  week. 
'ge,  bie,  bie  -n,  wave. 
tooljer',  whence,  from  where  ;  28o* 

fyer'  toeiftt  bit  bag  ?  How  do  you 

know  that  ? 
ttU)ljitt'r  where  to,  whither. 

,  perhaps,  probably  ;  I  think  ; 

also  in  poetry,  well  :  er  ()at  ntirf) 

tt)ofy[  erndf)ret,  he  nourished  me 

well  ;  er  fyat  ben  Jhtaben  tt)o^(  in 

bent  5(rm,  he  has  the  boy  well 

(firmly)  in  his  arm. 

f  ba§,  be§  -(e)§,  welfare. 
ttio^ncttf   reg.    (fyaben),  to  reside, 

dwell,  live, 

g    (ber),    proper    name, 

Wolfgang. 

,  bie,  bie  -n,  cloud. 

mm,  ba§,  beg  -(e)§,  bie 

2Bol'Fen(amtner,    fleecy    clouds  ; 

literally,  cloud  lambs. 


,  tDott'te,  gettotft'  or  tDotlen, 
bu  njtttft,  er  toil!,  to  want  to, 
will ;  tootten  tt)ir  ?  shall  we  ? 
tt)ollen  eben,  to  be  about  to ;  as 
noun,  ba§  ^Boffen,  the  will,  de- 
sire. 

tt)0U'tef  wanted  ;  see  toollen. 

ttiomit7,  with  what;  in  what  way, 
how. 

toorauf,  on  which. 

tt)0rau3'f  out  of  what ;  what  —  of. 

ttun^fceit,  sign  of  passive ;  see  tuer* 
ben. 
itt'f  in  which  ;  in  what. 

(bag),  proper  name,  (the 
city  of)  Worms. 

t,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e  (con- 
nected words)  or  SBor'ter  (sepa- 
rate words),  word. 

SBb'rt'rfjen,  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  little 
word. 

SBbYterfcudj,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bte 
^Borterbitcfyer,  dictionary. 

ttiutiOtt',  of  which,  of  what  ?  tootton 
f^re;d)en  ©ie  ?  what  are  you  talk- 
ing about  ? 

SKhm'be,  bie,  bie  -n,  wound. 

ttWtt'berbar,  strange. 

ttMtt'bermilb,  wonderfully  kind. 

ttltttt'berfant,  strange. 

ttWtt'berfdjiin,  wonderfully  beauti- 
ful. 

ttmn^ertwll,  wonderful. 

2®unf(^,  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  2Biinfd)e, 
wish. 

tt>ittt'f^en,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  wish. 

luur'bc,  ttmrbe,  would  ;  see  it)erben. 

ttmr'Mg,  worthy. 

SBurft,  bie,  bie  2Biirfte,  sausage. 


51 


SBiirft'rfjett,  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  little 

sausage,  Frankfurter. 
s2Butt'tctttBetg  (bag),  proper  name, 
Wiirttemberg. 

bie,  bie  -n,  root. 
,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  take  root, 
be  rooted. 
ttm^'te,  toiig'te,  knew ;  see  totffen. 

3 

3<*K  bie,  bie  -en,  number, 
ten. 

tttaf,  ten  times. 
Set'gen,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  show. 
3ei'(ef  bie,  bie  -n,  line. 
3ettf  bie,  bie -en,  time  ;  in  ber  fe£ten 

3eit,  in  recent  times,  recently. 
3ett'lang,  eine,  for  a  while. 
3et'twtg,  bie,  bie  -en,  newspaper. 
+£tlt,  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  tent. 
3crbre'rf)Ctt,     gerbrad)',    gerbro'cfyen 

(fyaben),  er  gerbridjt',  to  break  to 

pieces,  smash. 
^er&vo'djen,     smashed ;     see     ger* 

bre'djen. 
Serrei'ffen,    gerrijs',    gerrif'fen    (I)a* 

ben),  to  tear  to  pieces. 
Semf'fen,  torn  -see  gerrei'ften. 
Serfto'ren,   reg.  insep.  (fyaben),  to 

destroy. 
5erftreu'cnf  reg.  insep.  (fjaben),  to 

scatter. 
Ste'fjen,   gog,  gegogen    (tyaben),   to 

draw;    eg  gtefyt,  there's  a  draft; 

with  fein   as  auxil.,   to    go,   go 

along;    see  also    ab'giefyen,   an'^ 

gie^en. 

3tclf  bag,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e,  goal. 
$tctlt'lic^|f  rather,  somewhat. 


^3*^  bie,  bie  -en,  ornament ;  lus. 
tre  ;  flower. 

3itn'»terr  bag,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  room. 

5°8r  goge,  drew  ;  went ;  see  gtefyen. 

5ttf  (1)  prep,  with  dat.,  to  ;  at ;  for; 
gn  §aufe,  at  home  ;  gn  gng,  on 
foot,  afoot ;  gn  33ett,  to  bed ;  gn 
fec^g  9)^ar!,  for  six  marks ;  gn 
21'benb  effen,  to  have  supper;  gn 
SJUt'tag  effen,  to  have  dinner; 
(2)  adv.,  too  ;  (3)  "sign  of  the 
infinitive,"  to;  (4)  sep.  prefix  in 
gn'betfen,  gn'fHegen,  gu'fiigen,  gu'- 
flingen,  gu'mad^en,  gn'rnfen,  git'* 
fd)Iiegen,  gn'feljen,  gn'toenben. 
>5U'rfeit,  reg.  (fyaben),  to  palpitate, 
throb,  quiver. 

3u/rfer7  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  — ,  sugar. 

jn'beefcn,    reg.    sep.    (fyaben),    to 
cover  up,  cover  over. 

5uerff'f  at  first,  first. 

Su'fftegen,  flog  gn',  gu'geflogett(fein), 
with  dat.,  to  fly  to. 

p'fiigcn,  reg.  (^aben),  to  add  ;  to 
inflict  upon. 

;r  ber,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  3iige,  train. 
I'gettwn&t,  turned  toward,  facing  ; 
see  gu'toenben. 

itg'uogcf,  ber,  beg  -g,  bie  3ugt>oget, 
bird  of  passage. 

/fjoreit,    reg.  sep.   (fyaben),  with 
dat.,  to  listen  to. 

jen,  ftang  gn',  gu'geflnngen 
(fyaben),  with  dat.,  to  sound 
across  to. 

>3tt'fwtftf  bie,  future. 

3u'madjettr   reg.   sep.    (^aben),    to 
shut,  close. 

jurf  at  the;  see  gn;   ein   !?teb   gur 


52 


guten  9to(f)t,  a  good-night  song,  a 

lullaby. 
$nvM'f  adv.  and  sep.  prefix,  back  ; 

see  anriicf'gefyen,  jnritrf'fommen. 
j$ttrurf'{jel)ett,   ging  ^urnd 

gegattgen  (fein),  to  go  back. 
pntrf'fommett,  !am  guriicf ', 

gefommen  (fein),  to  come  back. 
au'rufen,   rief  gu',  gu^gerufen  (^a* 

ben),  with  dat.,  to  call  to. 
pfam'trtett,   adv.   and  sep.  prefix, 

together. 
Sit'ftpeffett,  fc^to6  W,  gn'gej^toffen 

(fyaben),  to  shut,  close  ;  to  lock. 
Stt'fetjen,  fat)  an',  gn'gefefjen  ftaben), 

er  fte^t  gu',  to  look  on,  watch. 
tt,  sometimes,  at  times. 
it)anbte  311',  au/9en)an^ 

(fein),  a?so  regr.,  to  turn  toward ; 

to  face. 


p. 


,   infin.  of  gu'fe^en  with 


twenty. 

r  it's  true,  I  grant;  and  that, 
too. 
f  two. 

,  twice. 
it,  second. 

f  in  the  second  place,  sec- 
ondly. 

$tt)ei'ttnbetnfjatt),  two  and  a  half. 
Jtoerg,    &er,    bc«    -(c)«,    tie     -e, 

dwarf. 
Stoin'getir  gtuang,  gcgwun'gcn  (^a- 

ben),  to  compel  ;  to  force. 
*  5ttJttt'fenf  re^.  (^aben),  to  wink;  to 

twinkle. 

$tw'fdjenf  prep,  with  dat.   or  ace., 
between. 
f  twelve. 


ENGLISH-GERMAN  VOCABULARY 


a,  ein  ;  not  a,  fetn. 

able,  to  be,  fonnen,  fonnte,  gefonnt 
(fjaben),  er  farm. 

about,  fig.,  iiber  with  ace.  ;  lit.,  um 
with  ace.;  adv.  in  sense  of  ap- 
proximately, ungefcifyr'. 

above,  iiber  with  dat.  or  ace. 

according  to,  nad)  with  dat. 

across,  iiber  with  ace. 

after,  prep.,  nacf)  with  dat.;  con- 
junc.,  nad)  bent'  with  dependent 
order. 

afternoon,  ber  •ftadj'mittag  II,  be8 
-(e)§,  bte-e;  written  small  with 
an  adverb;  geftern  nadjnttttag, 
fjeute  nadjmtttag ;  afternoons,  in 
the  afternoon,  nad)'mtttag§,  adv. 

again,  ttrieber  ;  till  we  meet  again  ! 
auf  SBte'berfefjen ! 

against,  gegen  with  ace. 

age,  ba§  2Hter  I ;  the  Middle  Ages, 
bag  Sftit'tetalter  I,  singular. 

agreeable,  cm'genefym,  with  preced- 
ing dative. 

all,  all,  see  §  144,  c ;  in  sense  of 
entire,  ganj ;  all  right,  fdjon.  gut ; 
fdjon,  §  362 ;  that's  all  right,  in  the 
sense  of  it  makes  no  difference, 
e§  madjt  nid^tg ;  by  all  means, 


with  imperative,  ja,  §  359 ;  all 
kinds  of,  al'(erlei,  indeclinable. 

allow,  ertait'ben,  reg.  insep.  (fyaben), 
with  dat. 

almost,  beina'fye,  faft 

alone,  attein'. 

along,  cnttang',  following  the  accu- 
sative. 

already,  fc^on, 

also,  aud)  ( never  aflo). 

always,  imnter, 

am,  bin  ;  see  jeitu 

America,  ba§  3lme'ri!a,  be§  -g, 

American,  amerila'ntfrf). 

among,  unter  with  dat.  or  ace. 

an,  ein, 

and,  nitD. 

animal,  bag  Slier  II,  be«  -(e)§, 
bie  -e. 

Anna,  (bie)  5lnna, 

another,  in  sense  of  different,  ein 
anber ;  in  sense  of  one  more, 
nod)  ein, 

answer,  ernn'bern,  reg.  insep.  (fya* 
ben). 

any,  tr'genb  ;  any  one,  je'manb  ;  any 
money,  etttmS  ©elb ;  not  any, 
fetn  ;  often  omitted :  Have  you 
any  paper  ?  $aben  @ie  papier'  ? 

anybody,  (tr'genb)  je'ntanb ;  not 
anybody,  nte'manb. 


53 


any 


begin 


any  one,  (tr'genb)  je'manb. 

anything,  et'toag ;  not  anything, 
nidjtg. 

appear,  in  sense  of  seem,  fd)einen, 
fd)ien,  gefdjtenen  (fyaben);  in  sense 
o/look,  aug'fefyen,  fal)  ang',  ang'= 
gefefyen  (fyaben),  er  fiefyt  aug'. 

April,  ber  ^pril',  beg  -g. 

apron,  bie  (Sdjiiqe  IV. 

are,  btft,  feib,  ftnb,  see  fein ;  also 
sign  of  progressive  form,  are 
-ing ;  there  are,  eg  gibt,  eg 
ftnb. 

arm  (limb),  ber  2trnt  II,  beg  -g, 
bie  -e ;  (weapon),  bie  SBaffe 
IV. 

around,  utn  tota/i  ace. 

arrive,  an'fomnten,  !atn  an',  an'ge* 
fommen  (fein),  usually  with  in  or 
an  and  the  dative. 

as,  conjunc.  of  time,  afg ;  conjunc. 
of  reason,  ba  ;  correl.,  fine ;  as 
good  as,  e'benfo  gnt  nne ;  as  if,  a(g 
ob  or  alg  with  inverted  order  ;  as 
long  as,  folan'ge ;  as  soon  as,  fo= 
balb'* 

ask  (beg),  bitten,  bat,  gebeten  (^a* 
ben)  ;  for,  urn  with  ace. ;  (in- 
quire), fragen,  reg.  (fyaben),  after, 
nad)  with  dat. 

at,  gu  with  dat. ;  an  with  dat. ;  of 
time,  utn  with  ace. ;  at  the  house 
or  store  of,  bet  with  dat. ;  at 
home,  gn  §aufe ;  at  last,  enb'ftd) ; 
at  the  left,  Iinf8  ;  at  night,  in  ber 
•ftadjt ;  at  once,  gleid) ;  at  school, 
in  ber  @rf)nle ;  at  the  station  or 
university,  aitf  bent  23af)n'f)of  or 
ber  Uni&erjtttit'. 


attend,  of  university,  school  or  lec- 
ture, befn'cfyen,  reg.  insep.  (fya= 
ben). 

B 

baggage,  bag  ©epacf'  II,  beg  -(e)S, 

bie  -e. 

ball,  ber  2tott  II,  beg  -g,  bie  iBdlle. 
bank  (o/  river),  bag  lifer  I,  beg  -g, 

bie  —  . 

barn,  bie  @(^enne  IV. 
basket,  ber  $orb  II,  beg  -(e)g,  bie 


bathe,  baben,  reg.  (^aben), 

be,  fein,  ttmr,  gemefen  (fetn),  id) 
bin,  bn  bift,  er  tft,  tt)ir  ftnb,  i^r 
feib,  fie  ftnb;  of  health,  fid)  be^ 
fin'ben,  befanb'  ftd^,  ftt^  befnn'ben 
(^aben)  ;  be  about  to,  toolkit, 
toollte,  getoottt  (^aben),  er  mill; 
be  to,  as  in  I  am  to  go,  foEen, 
follte,  gefottt  (f)aben),  er  foE  ;  be 
named  or  called,  fyeigen,  fyieg, 
ge^eigen  (^aben)» 

beautiful  (ly),  fd)b'n,  fdjoner,  fdjonft  ; 
wonderfully  beautiful,  ftmn'ber- 
fc^on, 

because,  toetl  with  dependent  order  ; 
because  of,  toegen  with  gen. 

become,  toer'ben,  ttwrbe,  getoorben 
(fein),  er  totrb, 

bed,  bag  Sett  V,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -en  ; 
to  bed,  git  Sett. 

bedroom,  bag  @d)(af^immer  I,  beg 
-g,  bie  —  . 

before,  prep.,  t)or  with  dat.;  con- 
junc., e^e  with  dependent  order. 

began,  ftng  an'  ;  see  begin. 

begin,  an'fangen,  ftng  an;,  an-ge= 
fangen  (fyaben),  er  fcingt  an'; 


begun 


55 


butter 


followed  by   511  with   the  infini- 

tive. 

begun,  an'gefangen  ;  see  begin. 
behind,  fytnter  with  dat.  or  ace. 
being,  see  fein  ;  sometimes  sign 

of  progressive  form  ;   sometimes 

translated  by  a  ba-clause. 
believe,  gtauben,  reg.  (fyaben),  with 

dative   of  person    believed,    but 

with  accusative  if  that  believed  is 

a  thing. 
belong,    geljo'ren,  reg.  insep.   (l)a= 

ben),  with  dat. 
below,  unten  of  rest;  fyinnn'rer  of 

motion. 

bench,  bie  23ant  II,  tie  23an?e. 
beside,  neben  with  dat.  or  ace. 
best,  ber  befte  ;  am  beften  ;  like  best, 

am  tiebften  mogen. 
better,   beffer  ;    like  better,    tieber 

mogen, 

between,  gnnfdjen  with  dat.  or  ace. 
beyond,  jen'feitg  icith  gen. 
big,  grog,  grower,  grogt 
black,  fdjttmq  ;   the  Black  Forest, 

ber  ©djltmrj'ttwlb  III. 
blood,  bag  Sfat,  beg  -(e)S. 
blow   up    (active),  tyrengen,  reg. 

(Ijabett)  ;  blown  up,  getyrengt'. 
blue,  blan, 
board    (of  wood),   bag  23rett  III, 

beg  -(e)g,  bie  -er. 
boat,    bag    SBoot    II,     beg    -(e)g, 

bie  -e. 

boil,  lo'djen,  reg.  (Ijaben). 
book,  bag  33ut^  III,  beg  -(e)g,  bie 


booth,  bie  23nbe  IV. 

both,  beibe,  preceded  by  the  article, 


instead  of  being  followed,  as  in 

English. 
bother,  fid)  fiimmern,  reg.  (fyaben), 

about,  nm  with  ace. 
bought,  tanfte,  getanft ;  see  buy. 
boy,  ber  3unge  IV,  beg  -n,  bie  -n  ; 

ber  $nabe  IV,  beg  -n,  bie  -n, 
brave,  tap'fer. 

bread,  bag  23rot  II,  beg  -(e)g. 
break,  bred)en,  brat^,  gebrod^en  (^a= 

ben),  er  brid)t ;  break  to  pieces, 

$erbre'rf)en,  gerbrad)',  gerbro'djen 

(fyaben),  er  jerbri^t', 
bridge,  bie  23riicfe  IV. 
bring,    bringen,    brad)te,    gebradjt 

(^aben). 
broad,  breit 
broken,   gebrodjen,   ^erbrodjen ;  see 

break, 
brother,  ber  23ntber  I,  beg  -g,  bie 

iBriiber, 

brought,  brac^te,  gebradjt;  see  bring, 
brown,  brann. 

Brown,  proper  name,  iBraun. 
build,  banen,  reg.  (fyaben). 
building  (edifice),  bag  ©cbaubc  I, 

beg  -g,  bie  — . 

built,  bante,  gebant ;  see  build, 
burst  (active),  tyrengen,  reg.   (l)a* 

ben). 

bush,  ber  23itfd),  beg  -eg,  bie  23ttfdje. 
but,   conjunc.,    aber  with    normal 

order;  adversative  conjunc.,  fon= 

bern  with  normal  order,  §  214,  a; 

adv.  in  sense  o/only,  nnr  ;  noth- 
ing but,  nidjtg  atg, 
butcher,    ber    gletfcfyer    I,   beg    -g, 

Me—, 
butter,  bie  Gutter  IV. 


button 


56 


consider 


button,  ber  $nopf  II,  beg  -(e)g,  bte 

tnopfe. 
buy,  laufen,  ret/,  (fyaben) ;  of  tickets, 

lojen,  reg.  (fyaben). 
by  (near),  an  with  dat.  ;  (beside), 

neben  with  dat.;  of  agent  with 

passive,  to  on  with  dat. ;  by  train, 

mit  bent  3U9(0» 


call  (call  out,  summon),  rnfen,  rief, 
gerufen  (fyaben)  ;  (name),  nen- 
nen,  nannte,  genannt  (fyaben);  be 
called,  fyetften,  fyteg,  gefyetften  (lja= 
ben), 

called,  to  be,  fyetften,  fyteft,  geljeiften 
(fyaben). 

came,  lam  ;  see  come. 

can,  lonnen,  lonnte,  gelonnt  (fya* 
ben),  er  lann. 

cane,  ber  @todE  II,  beg  -(e)g,   bie 


cannot,  see  can  and  not. 

cap,  bte  Mfce  IV. 

care,  fid)  fiintntern,  reg.  reflex.  (fya= 

ben),  about,  urn  with  ace. 
carriage,  ber  Sagen  I,  be§  -g,  bte 

carried,  trug,  getragen  ;  see  carry. 
carry,  tragen,  trng,  getragen   (l)a= 

ben),  er  tragt 

cart,  ber  2ftagen  I,  be§  -§,  bie  —  . 
castle,  ba§  ©c^tog  III,  beg  -e8,  bte 


cathedral,  ber  2)otn  II,  be§  -(e)$, 

bte  -e. 
century,  ba^  3>aljrf)nn'bert  II,  be§ 

-^,  bte  -e. 
certain  (ly), 


chair,  ber 


II, 


g,  bte 


-(e)%,  bie 


Charles,  (ber) 
child,  ba§  ^tnb  III, 

-er* 

children,  bte  $tnber  ;  see  child. 
choose,  toa'fjlen,  reg.  (fyaben). 
chosen,  getna^tt  ;  see  choose. 
church,  bie  $trd)e  IV. 
city,  bte  @tabt  II,  bte  @tabte, 
class,  bte  Piaffe  IV. 
clean,  rein. 
clock,  bte  W)r  IV;   o'clock,  Wjr  ; 

it  is    ten    o'clock,    e§    tft    jeljn 


cloth,  bag  Xnd^  III,  be«  -(e)g,  bte 

Sitdjer, 

clothes,  bie  tleiber,  pi. 
cloud,  bie  SBoffe  IV. 
coast,  go  coasting,  (tntt)  @df)(ttten 

fa^ren,  fnfyr,  gefa^ren  (^aben  or 

jein,  §  76,  Note),  er  fa'fyrt. 
coasting,  noun,  bag  Sftobetn  I,  beg 

-g  ;  to  go  coasting,  see  coast. 
coat,  ber  $ocf  II,   beg  -(e)g,  bie 


coffee,  ber  $af'fee,  beg  -g. 

cold,  colder,  fa(t,  loiter. 

color,  bte  garbe  IV. 

come,  fommen,  lam,  gelomnten 
(Hn). 

comfortable,  gentut'Iic^. 

conductor,  ber  @(^affner  I,  beg  -g, 
bie  —  . 

consider,  in  sense  of  to  take  for, 
fyalten  fitr  with  ace.,  Ijielt,  ge= 
fatten  (tjaben),  er  fya'ft  ;  I  con- 
sider it  too  far,  id)  Ijalte  eg  fiir  ju 
tt)ett. 


construction 


57 


door 


construction  (of  a  building},  ber 
33cm  II,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e. 

contain,  entfyalten,  entfyielt,  ent- 
fatten  (fyaben),  eg  entfyalt. 

continue,  fort'fafyren,  fnfyr  fort', 
fort'gefafyren  (fyaben),  er  fafyrtfort', 
with  complementary  infinitive 
where  English  may  have  a  verbal 
in  -ing. 

convince,  iibeqen'gen,  reg.  insep. 
(fyaben). 

cook,  focfyen,  reg.  (fyaben). 

cool,  fiifyL 

corner,  bie  (Me  IV. 

correct,  adj.,  ricfytig. 

cost,  foften,  reg.  (fyaben). 

costume,  bie  Xracfyt  IV. 

could,  fonnte,  fonnte  ;  see  can. 

country,  bag  £anb  III,  beg-(e)g,  bie 
Dauber  ;  in  the  country,  auf  bem 
£anbe  ;  to  the  country,  aitf  bag 
£anb. 

course,  of  course,  natuVIid);  it's  a 
matter  of  course,  eg  Derftefyt'  fief), 
e3  tjcrftanb'  fid^,  eg  rjat  ftc^  tier* 
ftan'ben, 

court,   ber  §of  II,   be§  -(e)§,  bie 


cozy, 

cup,  bie  £affe  IV  ;  a  cup  of  coffee, 
eine  Xaffe  $affee. 


dance,  tangen,  reg.  (^aben). 
danger,  bie  ©efaljr'  IV. 
dangerous,  gefciljr^i^. 
dark,    bunfel;    inflected:    bun!(er, 

bunffe,  bunlle§« 
daughter,  bie  Xod^'ter  I,  bie  £5<i)ter. 


day,  ber  Sag  II,  beg  -(e)$,  bie  -e; 
what  day  of  the  week  ?  n) eld)  en 
Sag  ?  what  day  of  the  month  ? 
ben  uneinel'ten  ? 

daytime,  in  the  daytime,  am  Sage. 

deal,  a  great  deal,  Did. 

dear,  lieb* 

deep,  tief. 

depend,  that  depends,  bag  !ommt 
barauf  an'. 

desk,  bag  s£uft  II,  beg  -(e)g, 
bie  -e. 

did,  tat;  see  do;  often  fyaben,  see 
§71. 

didn't,  see  did  and  not. 

difference,  it  makes  no  difference, 
eg  madjt  nid^tg. 

different,  anber. 

dine,  gu  2ftittag  effen,  ag,  gegeffen 
(fyaben),  er  igt  $n  S^ittag. 

dining-room,  bag  (Sg^immer  I,  beg 
'-g,  bie  — . 

dinner,  bag  2Jat'tageffen  I,  beg  -g, 
bie  — ;  to  have  dinner,  311  2ftit= 
tag  effen,  ag,  gegeffen  (fyaben),  er 
ifit  a«  aWittag. 

ditch,  ber  ©raben  I,  beg  -g;  bie 
©raben. 

do,  tun,  tat,  getan  (fyaben);  of 
health,  ficfy  befin'ben,  befanb'  ficfy, 
pd^  befnnben  (fyaben)  ;  sign  of 
progressive  or  emphatic  form, 
§  18 ;  emphatic  do  with  impera- 
tive, bod),  §  360,  b  ;  that  will  do 
(suffice),  bag  genfigt'. 

does,  tut;  see  do. 

dog,  ber  §nnb  II,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e. 

done,  getan  ;  see  do. 

door,  bie  Sur  IV. 


down 


58 


fall 


down  (rest),  itnten;  (motion'), 
nieber,  fytnnn'ter;  down  stairs 
(rest),  unten;  (motion),  bie 
Sreppe  fyinab'  or  fyinnn'ter ;  down 
town,  in  ber  or  bie  @tabt ;  sit 
down,  fid)  fe£en,  reg.  reflex. 
(l)aben), 

dress,  bag  f  leib  III,  beg  -(e)g,  bie 
-er, 

drink,  trinfen,  tran?,  getnmfett 
(fyaben), 

drive,  fafyren,  fufyr,  gefafyren  (f)aben 
or  fein,  §  76,  Note),  er  fafyrt, 

driven,  gefafyren  ;  see  drive. 

drove,  fnl)r(en) ;  see  drive. 

duel,  bie  Stfenfnr'  IV. 

during,  ftwfy'renb  with  gen.  . 


each,  jeber,  jebe,  jebeg. 

earlier,  fritter, 

early,  friil), 

easily,  (eicfjt 

easy,  easier,  easiest,  teid)t,  Ieid)ter, 

leit^teft  or  am  (etcfyteften, 
eat,  effen,  ag,  gegeffen  (fyabett),  er 

tgt,  used  of  people,  not  of  ani- 

mals. 

eighteen,  ad)t'gef)tu 
either  ...  or,  ent'toeber  ,  ,  .  ober. 
eleven,  elf, 
else,  fonft  ;  anbereS  ;  anything  else, 

in  the  sense  o/more,  nod)  etttm8  ; 

IT*  the  sense  of  different, 


end,  ba^  (Snbe  Y.  be§  -3,  bie  -n  ;  to 
end  (stop),  auf'fyoreit,   reg.  sep. 


engine,  bie  £o!omott't)e  IV. 


English,  noun,  bag  (£ngtifci)(e),  be3 
^ng(if(^en;  adj.,  englifd) ;  in 
English,  auf  englifd), 

enough,  genug' ;  to  be  enough, 
genii'gen,  reg.  insep.  (l)aben) ; 
that's  enough,  ba§  geniigt7, 

entertain,  unterfyal'ten,  nnter^ielt', 
unterlja^ten  (^aben),  er  nnteu- 
l)(ilt', 

entire(ly),  gang, 

escape,  entlom'tnen,  entfam^  ent^ 
fom'men  (fein), 

especially,  befon'ber§, 

estate,  ba^  @ut  III,  be§  -(c)«,  bie 
©liter, 

even,  felbft, 

evening,  ber  Wbenb  II,  beg  -(e)$, 
bie  -e ;  in  the  evening,  abenbS, 
am  5lbenb;  written  small  when 
used  with  an  adverb:  this  even- 
ing, fyeitte  abenb;  last  evening, 
geftern  abenb, 

ever,  je, 

every,  jeber,  jebe,  jebeg  ;  every  one, 
je'bermann, 

everybody,  je'bermann, 

everything,  aUe§, 

everywhere,  iiberaE', 

exactly,  gera'be,  genait', 

exaggerate,  iibertrei'ben,  iibertrieb'f 
iibertrie'ben  (^aben). 

exercise,  noun,  bie  5lnf'gabe  IV; 
verb,  iiben,  reg.  (fjaben). 


face,  bag  Ocftd^t'  III,  beg  -(e)«,  bte 

-er, 
fall,  faEen,  fiel,  gefaEen  (fein),  er 

faEt, 


famous 


59 


Fred 


famous,  beriilnnt'. 

far,  roeit  ;  as  far  as,  bis,-  fo  roeit 

nrie. 

farewell,  abieu,  pronounced  a  bib'. 
farther,  tueiter  ;  to  go  farther,  roet'= 

tergefyen,  ging  toei'ter,  toet'terge- 

gangen  (fein). 
fashion,  bie  Woe  IV. 
fast,  faster,  fdjnett,  fdjnetler. 
fat,  bid 
father,   ber    SBater    I,   beS  -8,   bie 


fearful(ly),  furetyt'bar. 
feather-bed,  ba§  ge'betbett  V,  be§ 

-(e)8,  bie  -en. 
February,  ber  ge'bruar. 
fell,  pel,  see  fall. 
fence,  fecfjten,  focfyt,  gefodjten  (l)d= 

ben),  er  pd)t. 

fetch,  fyoten,  reg.  (fyaben). 
few,  fewer,  roenige,   lueniger  (in- 

tied.)  ;  ein  paar. 
field,  ba§  gelb  III,  be§  -(c)«f  bie 

-er. 

fifteen,  fitnf'$ef)tu 
fifth,  fttnft. 
fiftieth,  fflnf'gigp. 
fifty,  fftnf'§tg. 
fight,  fed^ten,  fod)t,  gcfoti)tcn   fta^ 

ben),  er  pd^t 
finally,  enb'Hrf). 

find,  finben,  fanb,  gefunben  (^aben). 
fine,  fc^on. 
finish,   Dotleu'ben,   DoUcn'betc,    t)o(= 

len'bet  (^aben). 
fir-tree,   ber  San'nenbantn  II,  be§ 

-(e)§,  bie  Xannenbaume. 
first,  adj.,  ber  erfte  ;  adv.,  ^uerft'  ; 

in  the  first  place,  erftenS. 


five,  fiinf. 

flag,  bie  ga^ne  IV. 

flow,  fliegen,  flog,  gepffen  (fein). 

flower,  bie  23Iume  IV. 

follow,  folgen,  reg.  (fein),  with 
dat. 

foot,  ber  gu^  II,  be§  gufjeS,  bie 
giige  ;  on  foot,  ^u  gng. 

for, prep.,  fiir  to^  ace.;  um  toi^ 
ace. ;  conjitnc.  of  reason,  benn 
with  normal  order;  translated 
by  the  accusative  when  denoting 
extent  of  time,  sometimes  fol- 
lowed by  fang  ;  for  three  years, 
brei  3af)re  (fang)  ;  look  for, 
jnrfjen,  reg.  (fyaben) ;  wait  for, 
ttmrten,  reg.  (fyaben),  anf  with 
ace. 

forbid,  fcerbie'ten,  t>erbot',  t>erbo'ten 
(Ijaben). 

forest,  ber  2Batb  III,  be«  -(e)«,  bie 
Sdfber;  the  Black  Forest,  ber 
@d)tt)arg'tt)a(b  III. 

forget,  fcergef  Jen,  tjergag',  t^ergeffen 
(^aben),  er  Dergiftt. 

forgot(ten),  uergag',  uergeffen; 
see  forget. 

former,  ber  erftere. 

forth,  fort;  and  so  forth,  nnb  fo 
toeiter. 

fortress,  bie  23nrg  IV. 

fought,  fodjt,  gefot^ten  ;  see  fight. 

found,  fcmb,  gefnnben ;  see  find. 

four,  &ier. 

fourth,  adj.,  t>iert;  noun,  ba§ 
te(  I,  beg  -§,  bie  — . 

fourteenth,  tiier'^e^nt. 

fraternity,  bie  SBerbin'bung  IV. 

Fred,  (ber)  grtfe. 


free 


60 


grow 


free,  freu 

friend,  ber  grennb  II,  beg  -(e)8, 
bie  -e. 

from,  toon  with  dat.;  from  out  of, 
ang  w^/i  da£.  /  come  from,  J)er'= 
fommen,  !atn  fyer',  fyer'geFomtnen 
(fein), 

front,  in  front  of,  fcor  with  dat.  or 
ace. 

full,  Doll  ;  a  following  noun  has  :io 
preposition :  a  basket  full  of  po- 
tatoes, eiti  $orb  fcott  $artoffeln. 

funniest,  fo'mifd)ft 

funny,  fo'mifdj* 

further,  tueirer ;  to  go  further,  tt>ei'= 
tergefyen,  ging  iDei'ter,  toei'terge- 
gangen  (fete)* 


game,  bag  @piel  II,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e, 

garden,  ber  ©arten  I,  beg  -g,  bie 
©arren. 

gave,  gab  ;  see  give. 

gentleman,  ber  £>err  IV,  be§  -n, 
bie  §erren, 

genuine,  ed)t. 

German,  noun  (language},  bag 
2)eutfrf)(e),  beg  2)eutf(^en;  to 
speak  German,  2)eutfd)  f|)red)en ; 
«(Zj. ,  beutfcf) ;  in  German,  aiif 
beittfrf), 

Germany,  bag  2)eutfc^'(anb  II. 

get,  (secure)  befom'men,  belam;, 
betom'men  (f)aben) ;  (become) 
tt)erben;  ttmrbe,  getnorbett  (fein), 
er  tutrb ;  (go  and  get,  fetch)  fyo= 
len,  reg.  (^aben)  ;  get  up  (from 
bed)  auf'ftefyen,  ftanb  auf ,  auf'ge- 
ftanben  (fein)  ;  (from  a  chair  or 


bench)  fid)  erfye'bett,  erfyob  ftd^. 
fid)  erfyo'ben  (^aben) 

getting,  see  get. 

girl,  bag  2fttib'd)ett  I,  beg  -g,  bie  — , 

give,  geben,  gab,  gegeben  (^aben), 
er  gibt 

glad,  adj.,  fro^ ;  to  be  glad,  fid) 
freiien,  reg.  reflex,  (fyaben)  ;  eg 
freut  mid),  bid),  etc.,  reg.  impers.  ; 
to  be  glad  to  do  something,  ettoag 
gern  tun* 

gladly,  gerit* 

glass,  bag  ©lag  III,  beg  @(afe«,  bie 
©ififer. 

go,  ge^en,  ging,  gegangen  (fein) ; 
go  and  get,  fyolen,  reg.  (Ijaben)  ; 
(by  train,  boat,  or  carriage) 
faljren,  fu^r,  gcfa^rcn  (fein),  er 
fa'fyrt;  go  on!  tDeiter!  §64;  to 
go  on  (continue),  fort'fafyren, 
fnfyr  fort',  fort'gcfa^ren  (f)aben), 
erfa'fyrt  fort' ;  to  go  on  (farther), 
toei'tergefyen,  ging  tuei'ter,  toei'* 
tergegangen  (fein) ;  to  go  in, 
^inein'ge^en,  ging  ^inein',  fyinein'- 
gegangen  (fein). 

gone,  gegangen ;  see  go. 

good,  gnt 

good-by,  abien,  pronounced  abjo'» 

got,  belam  ;  tnnrbe ;  see  get. 

Gothic,  go'tifd). 

grass,  bag  ©rag  III,  beg  ©rafeg,  bie 
©rtifer. 

gray,  gran. 

great,  greater,  greatest,  grog, 
grower,  grogt ;  a  great  deal,  trieL 

green,  greenest,  griin,  griinft. 

grow  (become),  toerben,  ninrbe,  ge- 
raorben  (fein),  er  totrb* 


grown 


61 


holiday 


grown,  getoorben  ;  see  grow. 
gun,  bie  glinte  IV. 


had,  fjatte  ;  as  auxil.  for  intrans. 
verbs,  ttmr  ;  see  have. 

hair,  ba§  §aar  II,  be§  -§,  bie  -e  ; 
used  both  in  sing,  and  plu.  for 
hair. 

half,  noun,  bie  £>alfte  IV;  adj., 
fyatt),  following  the  article  :  half 
an  hour,  eine  fyalbe  @titnbe  ;  half 
past  two,  fyalb  brei  ;  and  a  half, 
unbeinfyalb,  §  265,  a  ;  one  and 
a  half,  ein'nnbeinfyalb,  an'bertfjalb. 

hall,   ber  @aal  II,  be§  -(e)§,  bie 


hand,  bie  §anb  II,  bie  §cinbe» 

handsome,  fd)on. 

hang,  fyangen,  tying,  gefyangen 

ben),  er  fyangr. 
happen,  gefdje'fjen,  gefcfyaf)', 

fyen  (fein),  e§  gejdfyiefjt',  with  dat.  ; 

(occur)    ttor'romtnen,  tarn  toor', 

t)or'ge!ommen  (fein). 
happily,  gfiicf'Iid),  frofy. 
happy  i  gtiicf'U^,  frol), 
hard,    harder,     (difficult),    fitter, 

jd^tuerer  ;  (industriously),  fleigig, 

fteigiger  ;  to  study  hard,  ffeifng 

lernen  ;  (to  the  touch)  fyart. 
hardly,  fcmnu 
has,  ^at,  ift  ;  see  have. 
hasn't,  see  has  and  not. 
hasten,  eiten,  reg.  fein,  §  76,  Note. 
hat,  ber  £ut  II,  be8  -(e)§,  bie  §iite. 
have,  ^aben,  fyatte,  geijabt  (^aben), 

er  ^at;    as  auxil.  for    intrans. 

verbs,  fein,  tear,  getoefen  (fein), 


irf)  bin,  bit  btft,  er  ift;  to  have  to 
(be  obliged),  mii^en,  muftte,  ge= 
ntngt  (^aben),  er  mug;  to  have 
done  or  made,  laffen,  He§,  ge(af= 
fen  (fyaben),  er  tagt;  to  have  din- 
ner, 311  Sftit'tag  effen,  aft,  gegeffen 
(fyaben),  er  igt 

haven't,  see  have  and  not;  haven't 
I?  nicfyt  ttrnfyr?  §  6,  c,  sentence  5. 

he,  er,  feirter,  ifym,  i^n, 

hear,  ^oren,  reg.  (fyaben);  I  have 
heard  him  play,  id)  fyabe  i^n 
tyieten  pren,  §  166. 

heard,  see  hear. 

helmet,  ber  £elm  II,  be§  -(e)«, 
bie  -e. 

help,  fyelfen,  l)a(f,  gef)olfen  (Ijaben), 
er  fyilft,  with  dat. 

her,pron.,  ifyr,  fie;  see  she;  adj.,  i^r. 

here,  fyier;  (hither),  ^ier{)er'. 

herself,  reflex.,  fid)  ;  intens.,  fetbft, 

high,  higher,  highest,  fyod),  ()o^er, 
fyodjft;  inflected  in  the  positive 
degree  :  ^o^er,  ^ol)e,  ^o!^e^» 

hill,  ber  §S'get  I,  be§  -8,  bie  —  . 

him,  ifym,  i^n  ;  see  he. 

himself,  reflex.,  fid);  intens.  fetbft 

his,  fein  ;  with  parts  of  the  body 
used  in  the  predicate,  ber,  bie, 
ba§,  usually  with  reflex.,  fid), 

history,  bie  ©efd)id)'te  IV. 

hold,  fatten,  fyielt,  ge^atten  (fyaben), 
er  pit;  (contain),  entljal'ten, 


holiday,  ber  get'ertag  II,  be§  -(e)§, 
bie  geiertage;  holidays  (vaca- 
tion), bie  ge'rten,  pi.,  three  syl- 
lables. 


home 


62  ' 


knife 


home,    (toward)    nacf)    §anfe ;    at 

home,  git  §aufe. 
hope,  fyoffen,  reg.  (fyaben). 
horse,  bag  s#ferb  II,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e. 
host,  bet  Bfrt  II,  beg  -(e)g,  bte  -e. 
hot,  fjeifj. 
hotel,   ber  ©aft'ljof,  beg  -(e)g,  bte 

©aft'pfe. 
hour,  bte  ®tnnbe  IV;   an  hour  and 

a  half,  an'bertfyalb  ©tunberu 
house,  bag  £>ang  III,  beg  §anfeg, 

bte  §anfer ;  at  the  house  of,  bet 

with  dat. 
how,    tt)ie;    how    much,    unetnet'; 

how  many,  ttneine'le;  (whence), 

footer', 
hundred,   fyun'bert;   one  hundred, 

ein  fyun'bert. 
hundredth,  luui'bertft. 
hurry,  eilen,  reg.  (fyaben). 


I,  id),  meiner,  tnir,  tnicf), 

idea,  I  haven't  the  least  idea,  eg 

fa'Et  tntr  gar  tttcfyt  etn, 

if,  tuettn,  with  dependent  order; 
after  verbs  of  asking,  ob  ;  as  if, 
alg  ob  or  afg  ivith  inverted  order. 

immediately,  gletd). 

in,  in  with  dat.  or  ace. ;  in  it,  bartn' 
(rest)\  fyittein'  (motion)-,  in  front 
of,  t)or  with  dat.  or  ace.  ;  in  Ger- 
man or  English,  ailf  bentfc^  or 
engtifd) ;  in  the  evening,  am 
5lbenb;  to  ride  in  the  train,  tntt 
bem  3u9(e)  fa^ren ;  to  go  in, 
Ijinein'gefyen,  gtng  ^tnetn'f  ^tnein= 
gegangen  (fcin). 

industrious  (ly),  fleiftig. 


ink,  bte  Xtnte  IV. 

inn,  ber  ®aft'i)5f  II,  beg  -(e)g,  bte 


instead  of,  anftatt  with  gen.  ;  with 
infin.,  §  248,  d  ;  with  bafaclause, 
§348. 

interesting,  intereffant', 

into,  in  with  ace. 

is,  tft  ;  see  be  ;  there  is,  eg  gibt,  eg 
ift;  is  (translated),  tyeiften,  fyieft, 
geljetgen  (^aben);  is  it?  is  he? 


isn't,  see  is  and  not. 

it,  eg,  fetner,  i^tn,  eg  ;  referring  to 

masc.  or  fern,  nouns  j  er  or  fie  ; 

with  preps.  ba(r)=. 


Jack,  (ber)  §ang. 

January,  ber  3a'nuar,  beg  -g. 

jar,   ber    So^f   II,    beg    -(e)g,  bte 


John,  (ber)  3o 

Johnny,  (ber) 

July,  ber  3u'Iu 

just  {exactly),  gera'be  ;  as  in  just 

now,  justso,ebett;  just  as,  e'benfo  ; 

just  as  good  as,  ebenfo  gut  une  ; 

with  imperative,  bot^,  §  360,  b. 

K 
keep    on    (continue),    fort'fafyren, 

fufyr  fort',  fort;gefat)rett  (^aben), 

er  fa'tjrt  fort'. 
kind,  what  kind  of  (a),  ttmg  fiir 

(ein);  all  kinds  of,  al'Iertei. 
king,  ber  ^'5'ntg  II,  beg  -g,  bie  -c, 
knew,  fannte  ;  rt)ngte  ;  see  know. 
knife,  bag  Sfteffer  I,  beg  -g,  bte  —  . 


knight 


63 


live 


knight,  ber  fitter  I,  beg  -g,  bie  — » 
know  (be  acquainted  with),  tettnen, 
fannte,  gefannt  (fyaben) ;  (have 
knowledge  of),  ttnffen,  ttmftte, 
gettmgt  (fyaben),  er  tt)eift;  w^ft 
bafccZawse  for  English  in/in. ,  as, 
I  knew  him  to  be  my  friend. 


laid,  legte,  getegt ;  see  lay. 

lain,  gefegen  ;  see  lie. 

lamp,  bie  £ampe  IV. 

lance,  bie  £ange  IV. 

land,  bag  £anb  III,  beg  -(e)«,  bie 

£cinber. 
landlord,  ber  SBfrt  II,  bc«-(e)«,  bie 

-e. 

language,  bie  @prad)e  IV;  the  Ger- 
man language,    bag    S)eutfd)(e); 

the  English  language,  bag  (5ng= 

UfeJ}(e). 
large,  larger,  largest,  grog,  grower, 

grflfet. 
last,  at?;.,  lefct;    acto.,  gulefet';    at 

last,  enb'(id). 
late,  later,  fpcit,  fpa'ter ;  used  only 

impersonally  with  fcin  :  it  is  late, 

eg  ift  tytit ;   I  am  late,  id)  fomme 

fpat  or  idj  tt)erbe  fpcit  anfommen ; 

Germans  do  not  say :  id)  bin  f^cit, 

ber  3ug  ift  fpat. 
latest,  le^t. 
latter,  ber  le^tere. 
lay,  laid,  laid,  legen,  legte,  gelegt 

(^abeu);  lay  (from  to  lie),  tag; 

see  lie. 

lead,  fiifyren,  reg.  (fjaben). 
leaf,  bag  Slatt  III,  beg  -(e)g,  bie 

flatter. 


learn,  lernen,  reg.  (^aben)  ;  see 
§  166. 

least,  iDcnigft  ;  I  haven't  the  least 
idea,  eg  ftitft  mir  gar  nid^t  ein. 

leave  (opposite  o/  take),  Iaffenf  Uefj, 
gelaffen  (^aben)f  er  lagt;  (desert 
or  depart  /rom),  t)erlaf'fen,  toer= 
Uc6',  t)erlaf;fen  (^aben),  er  »er= 


lecture,  bie  SJor'lefung  IV. 

led,  fiifyrte,  gefii^rt,  see  lead. 

left,  (teg,  gelaffen  ;  oerliej}', 
fen  ;  see  leave  ;  adj.,  (in!  ;  at  or  to 
the  left,  Hnfg. 

leg,  bag  SBeitt,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e. 

less,  ttje'ntger. 

lesson,  bie  <5>tnnbe  IV. 

let,  (affen,  lieg,  getaffen  (^aben),  er 
IfifH  ;  sometimes  subjunctive, 
§  324,  a. 

letter,  ber  23rtef  II,  beg  -(e)«,  bie 
-e. 

Lewis,  (ber)  £nb'tuig. 

lie,  Itegen,  lag,  gelegen  (^aben). 

life,  bag  £eben  I,  beg  -g,  bie  —  . 

like,  mogen,  ntoc^te,  gemod)t  (^a= 
ben),  er  ntagf  used  with  and  with- 
out gern;  gern  (gladly):  I  like 
to  play,  id)  tyiele  gern  ;  she  likes 
butter,  fie  i§t  gern  Gutter  ;  should 
or  would  like,  tnodjte  ;  sometimes 
an  inversion  with  gefal'fen  gefief, 
gefaFten  (baben),  er  gefa'IIt,  and 
the  dative  :  he  likes  this  game, 
biefeg  @pie(  geftittt  i^m, 

little,  (small),  ftein;  (not  much), 
toenig  ;  a  little,  ein  toenig* 

live,  (reside),  tooljnen,  reg.  (fjaben); 
(exist),  leben,  reg.  (fyaben). 


lockup 


64 


Monday 


lockup,  ber  $ar^er  I,  beg  -0,  bte  —  . 

locomotive,  bie  £ofomott't>e  IV. 

long,  longer,  longest,  fang,  langer, 
tangft;  adv.,  long,  a  long  time, 
lange  ;  as  long  as,  conjunc.,  fo= 
(an'ge,  with  dependent  order. 

look  (appear),  aug'fefyen,  fafy  aug', 
aug'gefefyen  (fyaben),  er  ftefyt  ang'; 
look  for,  fudfyen,  reg.  (fyaben); 
look  at,  an'fefyen,  faf)  an,  an'gefe= 
tyen  (fyaben),  er  ftefyt  an7;  oh  look  ! 
ftef)  bod)  ! 

lose,  tterlie'ren,  Verier',  t>er(o'ren 
(fyaben). 

lost,  tterfor'.  tterlo'ren  ;  see  lose. 

Louis,  (ber)  £ub'ttrig. 

love,  tieben,  reg.  (fyaben). 

lying,  see  lie. 

M 

made,  tnadjte,  getnad)t  ;  see  make. 
make,    madden,    reg.    (fyaben);    it 
makes  no   difference,   eg    mad)t 


man  (human  being),  ber  Sftenfcf)  IV, 
be§  -enf  bie  -en;  (male  being), 
ber  2ftann  III,  be§  -(e)S,  bie 
banner;  sometimes  omitted  in 
the  general  sense  of  people  :  some 
men,  etntge, 

many,  pi.,  triete  ;  many  a,  tnandj, 
§  144  ;  how  many  ?  ftnetrie'le? 

march,  ntarfdjie'ren,  nrarfdjter'te, 
marfc^iert'  ({)aben  or  fein,  §  76, 
Note). 

mark,  bie  9ftarf,  gnoet  9}lar!, 

market,  ber  9ftarft,  be§  -(c)«,  bie 
2JMr!te  ;  at  or  to  the  market,  auf 
bem  or  ben  2ftarfr* 


matter,  it  is  a  matter  of  course,  eS 

fcerftefyt7  fid),  e^  tierftanb'  fic^,  e3 
i)at  ftc^  Derftan'ben;  what's  the 
matter  ?  2Ba§  ift  log  ? 

May,  ber  2ttau 

may  (permission),  biirfen,  bnrfte, 
gebnrft  (fyaben),  er  barf;  (possi- 
bility), fonnen,  lonnte,  gefonnt 
(^aben),  er  fann;  sometimes 
translated  by  the  subjunctive, 
§324. 

me,  ntir,  ntid^ ;  see  I. 

mean,  (of  people),  metnen,  reg. 
Ijaben;  (of  things),  beben'ten, 
reg.  insep.  (tjaben);  What  do 
you  mean  by  that  ?  2Ba§  foil 
benn  bag  ? 

means,  by  all  means,  with  impera- 
tive, \ct,  §  359. 

meat,  bag  gleifd)  II,  beg  -eg,  bie  -e. 

meet,  begeg'nen,  reg.  insep.  (fein), 
with  dat. ;  till  we  meet  again  ! 
auf  2Bte'berfet)en! 

middle,  bie  2JUtte  IV;  the  Middle 
Ages,  bag  2tfit'tefolter  I,  sing. 

might,  fonnte;  see  may. 

mile,  bie  Sftetle  IV ;  also  used  for 
league. 

milk,  bie  2JMW). 

Miller,  proper  name,  (ber)  SftiiUer. 

mine,  mein,  ber  meine,  ber  tneinige. 

minstrel,  ber  danger  I,  beg  -§, 
bie  — . 

minute,  bie  2^inn7te  IV. 

mistake,  ber  gel)(er  I,  beg  -g, 
Me—. 

moat,  ber  ©raben  I,  beg  -g,  bie 
©rtiben. 

Monday,  ber  S^on'tag  II. 


money 


65 


now 


money,  bag  ©elb  III,  beg  -(e)§,  bie 
-er. 

month,  ber  9fto'nat  II,  beg  -(e)g, 
bie  -e ;  what  day  of  the  mouth 
is  to-day  ?  ben  ttnetriel'ten  fyaben 
fair  fyente? 

more,  mefyr;  one  more,  nod)  cut; 
some  more,  nod)  etttwg;  many 
more,  nod)  ttiele;  often  trans- 
lated by  the  comparative :  more 
beautiful,  fdjoner. 

morning,  ber  9ftorgen  I,  beg  -«,  bie 
— ;  good  morning!  gnten  2ftor-- 
gen !  in  the  morning,  am  Sftorgen, 
morgeng ;  written  small  with  ad- 
verbs:  this  morning,  Ijeitte  tnor* 
gen;  to-morrow  morning,  tnorg en 

Wfy 

most,  am  meiften;  usually  trans- 
lated by  the  superlative :  ber  -fte, 
am  -ften. 

mother,  bie  Gutter  I,  bie  SDWitter. 

mountain,  ber  23erg  II,  beg  -(e)g, 
bie  -e, 

Mr.,  §err,  §ernu 

Mrs.,  gram 

much,  triel;  sometimes,  fefyr:  he 
loves  her  much,  er  liebt  fie  fefyr; 
how  much  ?  nnetriel'? 

must,  miiffen,  mitgte,  gemngt  (fya* 
ben),  er  mng;  must  (not),  in 
withholding  permission,  biirfen, 
burfte,  geburft  (^qben),  er  barf. 
Children,  you  must  not  do  that, 
$inber,  bag  biirft  ttjr  nid)t  tun. 

my,  mein;  with  part  of  the  body  in 
the  predicate,  mir  and  the  article. 

myself,  reflex.,  mir,  mid);  intens., 
felbft 


N 

name,  noun,  ber  Sftame,  beg  -ngf 
bie  -n ;  verb,  to  name,  nennen, 
nannte,  genannt  (fyaben) ;  to  be 
named,  fyetgen,  fyieft,  ge^ei^en  (l)a* 
ben) ;  his  name  is  John,  er  I 


named,  see  name. 

narrow,  eng. 

near,    adj.,    na^e,    na^er,    na'djft ; 

prep.,    an  with  dat.,    bei   with 

dat. 
need,  brandjett,  reg.  (^aben),  to,  jit 

with  infin. 

neither  .  .  .  nor,  toeber  .  .  .  nod), 
never,  nie,  nie'matg. 
new,  nen. 

newspaper,  bie  3^trtung  IV. 
next,  adj.,  nad)ft ;  adv.,  bamu 
night,  bie  9?ad)t  II,  bie  9Md)te;  last 

night  in  the  sense  of  yesterday 

evening,  ge'ftern  a'benb. 
nine,  nenn. 
nineteen,  nenn'selm. 
ninety,  nenn'gig. 
no,  adv.,  nein;  adj.,  fein  ;  no  one, 

feitu 

nobody,  nie'manb. 
none,  !etn. 
noon,    ber    aJlit'tag    II,     beg    -g, 

bie  -e. 
nor,   nod) ;  neither  .  .  .  nor,   tt)eber 

.  .  .  nod). 

not,  nic^t ;  not  a,  not  any,  fein. 
nothing,  nidjtg  ;  a  following  adjec- 
tive is  neuter  and  is  capitalized, 

§191,  e.  _ 
now,  jefet.  ' 


occur 


66 


paper 


occur  (happen),  fcor'fommen,  fam 
&or',  fcor'gefommen  (fein) ;  (sug- 
gest itself)  ein'fallen,  fief  em', 
ein'gefatten  (fein),  e$  ftillt  ifmt 
etn',  with  dat.  of  person  to  whom 
the  idea  occurs. 

o'clock,  Ui)r  ;  it's  two  o'clock,  e§ 
ift    gtoei    Ufyr ;    as    in    English, 
omitted  except  on  the  exact  hour. 
of,  t)on  with  dat. ;  out  of,  an$  with 
dat.;  in  front  of,  t)or  with  dat.  or 
ace.  ;  of  course,  natiir'Hd) ;  think 
of,  benten,  bacfyte,  gebad)t,  an  with 
ace.  ;  often  rendered  by  the  geni- 
tive ;    omitted    with    nouns    of 
measure,  etc.,  §  130. 
officer,  ber  Officer'  II,  be$  -8,  bie  -e. 
often,  oftener,  oft,-  ofter* 
oh,  o,  ad). 

old,  older,  oldest,  alt,  alter,  atteft 
on,  atif  with  dat.  or  ace. ;  on  foot, 
jit  gng;  keep  on  (continue), 
fort'fafyren,  fuljr  fort',  fort'ge* 
fafyren  (fyaben),  er  fafyrt  fort'; 
read  on,  toei'terlefen,  la$  toei'ter, 
toet'tergetefen  (fyaben),  er  Heft 
roet'ter;  go  on  (farther),  aiet'ter- 
gefyen,  ging  tuei'ter,  toci'tergc* 
gangen  (fein) ;  go  on  (continue), 
fort'fafyren,  fitfyr  fort',  fort'ge= 
faljrcn  (fyaben) ,  er  fa^rt  fort' ; 
go  on !  tDeiter !  §  64 ;  on  the 
other  side  of,  jen'fett§  with  gen. 
once,  etn'mal ;  at  once,  gfeirf). 
one,  ein ;  not  one,  fein ;  the  one, 
ber  etne,  ber  or  berjentge,  §  190, 
d ;  often  translated  by  an  in- 


flected adjective,  §  149,  d  ;  no  one, 

niemanb ;  which  one?   tt)efrf)er? 

some  one,  jemanb  ;  one  in  sense 

of  they  in  they  say,  one  hears, 

man  :  man  fagt,  man  fyort ;  one's, 
possessive,  fein, 
only,  nnr. 
onto,  anf  with  ace. 
open,  adj.,  off  en ;  verb,  anf'madjen, 

reg.  sep.  (fyaben). 
or,   ober,  followed  by   the  normal 

order. 
order,  in  order  to,  um  .  .  .  311  with 

infln. 
other    (different),    anber ;    (more) 

nod);  on  the  other  side  of,  jen'= 

feit§  with  gen. 
ought  to,  fottte ;  see  follen. 
our,  nnfer;  ours,  nn'ferer,  ber  un'frige. 
out,  adv.,  ^inan^';    out  of,  prep., 

an^  with  dat. ;  out  of  it,  baran$' ; 

out  of  doors,  brau'^en  ;  call  out, 

rnfen,  rief,  gernfen  (fyaben). 
outside,  adv.,  brau'^en  ;  outside  of, 

prep.,  aii'fterfyalb  with  gen. 
over,  itber  with  dat.  or  ace. ;  over 

there,  bort* 
ox,  ber  Odj8  or  Od)fe  IV,  be§  Dd)fen, 

bie 


page,  bie  @eite  IV. 
pail,  ber  (Simer  I,  be§  -8,  bie  — . 
pair,  bag  ^aar  II,  be§  -(c)8,  bie  -e. 
palace,  ber  ^ataft'  II,   be§  -(c)8, 

bie  $*tft'fte. 
paper,   ba§  papier'  II,  beg  -(e)8, 

bie  -e ;  newspaper,  bie  g 

IV. 


part 


67 


put 


part,  ber  £ei(  IT,  beg  -g,  bie  -e. 

past,  half  past  two,  fyalb  brei. 

path,  ber  ^fab  II,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e, 

pen,  bie  geber  IV. 

people,  bie  £eute,  pi.  ;  bie  iftenjcfyen, 
pi.  ;  people  say,  man  fagt  ;  often 
translated  by  an  adjective  used 
as  a  noun;  the  old  people,  bie 
SUten. 

perhaps,  tnelleirfjt'  ;  tt)of)(,  §  363. 

permitted,  to  be,  biirfen,  bitrfte,  ge* 
burft  (fyaben),  er  barf, 

pfennig,  ber  ^pfen'nig,  $tt)ei  pfennig. 

photograph,  bie  -pfyotograpfyie'  IV  ; 
to  take  a  photograph  ;  eine  $uf'= 
nafyme  (IV)  macfyen,  reg.  (fyaben). 

picture,  bag  33ilb  III,  beg  -(e)g,  bie 
-er  ;  to  take  a  picture,  eine  3luf* 
nafyme  (IV)mad)en,  reg.  (fyaben)  ; 
picture  postcard,  bie  2In'fid)tg= 
Farte  IV. 

piece,  bag  ©tiicf  II,  beg  -(e)g,  bie 
-e  ;  to  break  to  pieces,  ^erbre'djen, 
$erbrad)',  ^erbro't^en  (^aben),  er 


place,  ber  £)rt  II,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e  ; 
to  take  place,  ftatt'finben,  fanb 
ftatt^  ftatt'gefunben  (^aben)  ;  (re- 
gion] bie  (Se'genb  IV  ;  in  the 
first  or  second  place,  er'fteng  or 


plan,   ber  $(an  II,  beg  -(e)g,  bie 

Pa'ne. 
platform,   ber   iBa^n'fteig   II,     beg 

-(e)g,  bic-c. 
play,  noun,  bag  @pief  II,  beg  -(e)g, 

bie  -e  ;  verb,  tyiefen,  reg.  (fyaben). 
playground,  ber  @piel'p(a^  II,  beg 

-eg,  bie 


pleasant,  an'genefym,  to,  preceded 

by  dative. 
please,    gefal'ten,   gefie((f    gefat'(en 

(fyaben),  er  gefcillt^  with  dat.  ; 

(if  you)  please,  bitte, 
pleased,  frofy. 
pleasure,  bag  35ergnurgen  I,  beg  -g, 

Me—. 

plenty  of,  trie!, 
pocket,  bie  Safrfje  IV. 
poem,   bag  ©ebidjt'  II,   beg  -(e)g, 

bie  -e. 

poet,  ber  S)id)ter  I,  beg  -«,  bie  — . 
police,   bie  ^ottgei'  IV,    collective 

singular. 

polite (ly),  Ijbf'Itfy 
poor,  arm. 
possible,  mbg'Hd). 
postcard,  bie  ^oft'farte  IV;  picture 

postcard,  bie  $n ' ft ci)tg Farte  IV. 
pot,   ber    £bpf  II,   beg  -(e)g,    bie 

Xopfe. 

potato,  bie  tartof'fel  IV. 
pound,  bag  ^3fnnb,  ^tt) 
praise,  (oben,  reg.  (l)aben). 
pray,  excl.  with  imperative,  bitte  ; 

bod),  §  360,  6. 

preposition,  bie  ^rctyofttion'  IV. 
pretty,  adj.,  fyiibfcf)  ;  adv.,  $iem'lid). 
price,   ber  $reig,   beg   ^reijeg,  bie 

^reife. 

probably,  njo^f  §  363. 
professor,  ber  ^rofef for,  beg  -g,  bie 

^rofeffo'ren. 

pupil,  ber  @^ii(er  I,  beg  -g,  bie  — . 
put   (lay],   legen,    reg.     (l)aben) ; 

(stand],    (Men,    reg.    (^aben) ; 

(se£),fe£en,  reg.  (Ijaben)  ;  (stick), 

ftedfen,  reg.  ({jaben). 


quarter 


said 


quarter,  ba§  $iertel  I,  beg  -8,  Me 
—  ;  quarter  to  two,  bret  SBtertef 


queer,  ro'tnifd). 

question,    it    is    a     question,     e$ 

fragt  ftdj,    reg.    impers.    reflex. 

(fyaben). 
quickly,  fcfynelL 
quite, 


R 

rain,  noun,  ber  9tegen  I,  be§  -8, 

bie  —  ;  verb,  e3  regnet,  reg.  im- 

pers. (Ijaben). 
ran,  lief  ;  see  run. 
rapidly,  fcfjnelL 

rather,  in  sense  of  pretty,  ^iem'* 
.   ltd)  ;  had  rather,  modjte  Ueber. 
read,  lefen,  fo$,  gelefen  (fyaben),  er 

Heft;    read  on,  toei'terlefen,   fa8 

toei'ter,  ttm'tergetefen  (ijaben),  er 

lieft  toei'ter. 
ready     (through),     fertig  ;     (pre- 

pared), berett'. 
real  (genuine),  edjt 
really,  tDtrf'Udj. 
red,  rot 

refreshment,  bie  (Srfri'frfjung  IV. 
region,  bie  ©e'genb  IV. 
regular,  fam  iliar  for  genuine,  real, 

ed)t 
relate,   er^afy'fett,   reg.  insep.   (l)a= 

ben). 
remain,    btetben,    btieb,    geblteben 

(fete). 
respond,     erttn'bern,     reg.     insep. 


rest  (rest  up,  get  rested),  fid)  an§'* 
ru^en,  ru^te  ftrf)  au$',  fic^  au^'ge* 

-  ruljt  (fyaben). 

rich,  reit^. 

ride  (on  horseback),  rettett,  rttt, 
gerttten  (^aben  or  feitt,  §  76, 
Note) ;  (in  boat,  train,  or  car- 
riage}, fatten,  ftifyr,  gefa^ren 
(fetn),  er  fci^rt 

right,  (correct)  ridjtig ;  (right- 
hand),  red)t ;  to  be  right,  rec^t 
fyabett,  ()atte,  ge^abt  (^aben) ;  all 
right,  fd)bn,  gut ;  in  the  sense  of 
it  makes  no  difference,  e$  macfyt 
nid)t§. 

rise  (from  a  seat),  fief)  erfye'^ 
ben,  er^ob'  fic^,  fici)  er^o'ben 
(^aben). 

river,  ber  gift jj  II,  be§  gtuffeg,  bie 
gliiffe. 

road,  bie  33a^n  IV;  (street),  bie 
(gtrafee  IV ;  (way),  ber  2Beg  II, 
be«-(c)«f  bie-e. 

rock,  ber  ge(3  or  geljen,  be^  getfen^, 
bie  ^clfen. 

roll  (of  bread),  ba§  33rot'd^en  I,  be$ 
-8,  bie  — . 

room  (of  a  house),  ba§  3immel*  ^» 
be§  -§,  bie  — ;  (space),  ber 
Splafe  II,  be§  -e§;  bie  Pa^e. 

rose,  bie  ffiofe  IV. 

round,  nm  toiYA  ace. 

ruin,  bie  9hit'ne  IV. 

run,  laufen,  Uef,  getcmfen  (^aben 
or  fetn,  §  76,  Note). 


said,  fagte,  gefagt ;  see  say ;  is  said 
to,  foil ;  see  foften. 


same 


69 


sleep 


same,  fefb  ;  the  same,  berfet'be,  bie= 

fet'be,  basfel'be. 
sang,  fang  ;  see  sing. 
sat,  fag  ;  see  sit. 

sausage,  bie  Surft  II,  bie  2Biirfte. 
saw,  fa  I)  ;  see  see. 
say,  fagen,  reg.  (fyaben)  ;  are  say- 

ing =  say. 
scarcely,  taum, 
school,  bie  @cf)ule  IV;  to  school, 

in  bie  (Scfjule  ;  at  or  in  school,  in 

ber  <2>d)it(e. 
school-yard,  ber  @pie(':plat3,  be$  -e8, 

bie  @piefylat3e. 

seat,  ber  «ptafe  II,  be§-e$,  bie  <pla£e. 
second,  $tt)eit  ;  in  the  second  place, 


see,  fefyen,  falj,  gefefyen  (fyaben),  er 
ftefyt  ;  I  have  seen  him  play,  id) 
fyabe  ifjn  fpielen  fefyen,  §  166. 

seek,  judjen,  reg.  (fyaben). 

seem,  fdjeinen,  fdjien,  gefdjienen 
(fyaben). 

seen,  gefefyen  ;  see  see. 

self,  selves,  reflex.,  jtd)  ;  intens., 
jelbft. 

sell,  uerfan'fen,  reg.  insep.  (tjaben). 

send,  fdjitfen,  reg.  (^aben). 

sentence,  ber  ®a£  II,  be§  -e§,  bie 


serf,  ber  ^nerf)t  II,  be§  -(e)§,  bie  -e. 
servant,  ber  $ned)t  II,  be^  -(e)8, 

bie  -e. 
serve,   bienen,  reg.   (Ijaben),  with 

dat. 

set,  fe£en,  reg.  (^aben). 
seven,  fieben* 
seventeen,  fieb'^efyn. 
seventeenth,  fteb'^e^nt. 


seventy-fifth,  fiinfimbfieb^igfr. 

several,  me^'rere. 

shall  (future),  toerben  ;  (to  be  to), 

fotten  ;  shall  we  ?  tt)  often  loir  ? 
shame,  what  a  shame  !  ftne  ft^abe  ! 
she,  fie,  ifyrer,  i^r,  fie. 
shine,    fdjeinen,    jt^ien,    gefd^ienen 

(fyaben). 

shoe,  ber  @cf)u{)  II,  be$  -(e)§,  bie  -e. 
shop,  ber  £a'ben  I,  be§  -«,  bie  —  . 
shore,  ba§  U'fer  I,  be§  -6,  bie  —  . 
short,  shorter,  shortest,  !nr^,  fiiqer, 

fiiqeft 
should,    foftte  ;    see    fotten  ;    some- 

times translated  by  subjunctive 

or  conditional,  §  334. 
show,  geigen,  reg.  (Ijaben). 
sick,  franf. 
side,  bie  @eite  IV;   on  the  other 

side  of,  jen'feitS  with  gen. 
sight   (view),  ber  Sfa'blidt  II,  be§ 

-(e)§,  bie  -e. 
silk,   bie  @eibe  IV  ;  of  silk,   uon 


since,  prep.,  feit  with  dat.;  con- 

junc.,    feitbem'    with    dependent 

order. 

sing,  ftngen,  fang,  gefungen  (^aben). 
singer,  ber  danger  I,  be^  -§,  bie  —  . 
sir,  §err  ;  yes,  sir,  ja,  tnein  §err. 
sister,  bie  @d^tt)efter  IV. 
sit,  fifeett,  fag,  gefeffen  (^abcn)  ;  sit 

down,     firf)    fe£en,    reg.     reflex. 

(^aben). 
sitting,  see  sit. 
.six,  fed)3. 

sled,  ber  @d)tttten  I,  be«  -«,  bie  —  . 
sleep,    frf)(afen,    f(i)tief,    gefc^lafen 

(^aben),  er  fc^tcift. 


slept 


70 


study 


slept,  fcfylief,  gefd)fafen  ;  see  sleep. 

small,  ffein, 

snow,   noun,   ber  @d)nee,  beg  -g  ; 

verb,     eg    jdjnett,    reg.    impers. 

(fyaben). 
so,  jo  ;  in  sense  o/sach,  fold)  ;  with 

gtauben,  think,  eg,  bag,  or  ora^  : 

id)  gtaube  eg,  bag  glaube  id),  id) 

gtaube. 

sold,  toerfauf'te,  fcerfauft'  ;  see  sell. 
soldier,   ber  @oibat'   IV,  beg  -en, 

bte  -en. 
some,  ei'nig  ;  somebody,  some  one, 

je'manb  ;    et'ttmg  :    some    paper, 

etftmg    Rapier';    often    omitted, 

especially  with  nod),  more  :   Do 

you    wish    some    more    bread  ? 

2Mnfd)en@ie  nod)  $rot? 
something,    et'  luag  ;    a   following 

adjective  is  neuter  and  is  capital- 

ized. 

sometimes,  gmtm'Ien. 
son,  ber  <SoI)n  II,   beg  -(e)g,  bie 


song,  bag  £ieb  III,  beg  -(e)8,  Me 


soon,  ba(b  ;  as  soon  as,  fobatb',  with 

dependent  order. 
sooner,  frii'fjer. 
sorry,  I  am  sorry,  eg  tut  tnir  leib, 

eg  tat  tnir  feib,  eg  ^at  tnir  (eib 

getan,  §  305. 
speak,   fpredjen,  fprad),  .  gef^roc^en 

(fyaben),  er  f^ridjt  ;  speak  Ger- 

man or  English,  S)entfd)  or  (£ng* 

Ufd)  fpredjetu 

spite,  in  spite  of,  tro£  with  gen. 
split,    fpatten,    fpaltete,    gefpalten 

(^aben). 


sport,  ber  @port,  beg  -(e)g,  bie 
0portg  ;  winter-sport,  ber  2Btn* 
terfport,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  2Binter* 
fportg. 

square  (of  a  city),  ber  ^(a£  II,  beg 
-eg,  bie  ^la£e. 

stand,  intrans.,  fte^en,  ftanb,  ge= 
ftanben  (l)aben)  ;  trans,  (to  put), 
ftetten,  reg.  (l)aben)  ;  stand  up, 
auf'ftefyett,  ftanb  auf,  anf'ge* 
ftanben  (fetn). 

station,  ber  SBafyn'fyof  II,  beg  -(e)gf 
bie  23al)n'f)ofe. 

stay,  blieben,  blieb,  gebtieben  (fein), 

stick,  noun,  ber  @tocf  II,  beg  -(e)gf 
bie  @tocfe ;  verb,  ftecfen,  reg.  (l)a= 
ben), 

still,  adv.,  nod^. 

stocking,  ber  ^trumpf  II,  beg  -(e)g, 
bie  @trnmpfe, 

stone,  ber  ®tein  II,  beg  -(e)g, 
bie-e. 

stood,  ftanb,  geftanben  ;  see  stand. 

stop,  anf'fyoren,  reg.  sep.  (fyaben) ; 
with  the  infin.  and  git,  where 
English  has  a  verbal  in  -ing. 

store,  ber  £aben  I,  beg  -g,  bie  — ; 
at  the  store  of,  bei  with  dat. 

story,  bie  ®efd)id)'te  IV  ;  bie  (grgal)'* 
Inng  IV._ 

stove,  ber  D'fen  I,  beg  -g,  bie  £)fen. 

strange,  fremb ;  to,  preceded  by 
dative. 

street,  bie  ©tra'fte  IV. 

strong,  ftart, 

student,  ber  ^tubent'  IV,  beg  -en, 
bie  -en. 

study,  lernen,  reg.  (fyaben) ;  of  ad- 
vanced study  at  a  university, 


style 


71 


these 


ftnbie'ren,  ftubier'te,  ftubiert'  (I)a= 

ben), 
style,  bie  vJftobe  IV;    in  the  latest 

style,  nad)  bet  Ie£ten  9ftobe* 
succeed,  eg  gelingt  ntir,  tfym,  etc., 

eg  gelang  tnir,  eg  ift  mir  gelnngen, 

§305. 

such,  fold),  §  144. 
suit,  ber  2ln'gng  II,  beg  -(e)g,  bte 

tyin'  jiige ;    to    suit,   paffen,   reg. 

(fyaben),  with  dat. 
summer,   ber  @ommer   I,   beg  -g, 

bie—, 

sun,  bie  @onne  IV. 
Sunday,  ber  @onn'tag  II,  beg  -(e)g. 
sung,  gefungen  ;  see  sing. 
swam,  fdjtoamm  ;  see  swim, 
swiftly,  fcfynelL 
swim,    fdjttnmmen,    fd)ttmmm,  ge= 

fdjniommen  (fyaben  or  fetn,  §  76, 

Note). 
sword,  bag  @d)tt)ert  III,  beg  -(e)g, 

bte  -er. 
swum,  gefdjtoommen  ;  see  swim. 


table,  ber  £tfrf)  II,  beg  -(e)g,  bte  -e. 
tailor,  ber  ®ci)neiber  I,  beg  -g,  bte  — , 
take,  nefytnen,  na^m,  genommen 
(^aben)f  er  ntmmt ;  take  place, 
ftatt'ftnbett,  fanb  (tatf,  (tatt'ge= 
funben  (fyaben)  ;  take  a  picture, 
etne  tofna^nte  nta^en,  reg.  (^a- 
ben)  ;  take  for  (consider),  fatten 
fiir,  Ijtett,  ge^atten  (^aben),  er  fyalt 
fiir  with  ace.  •  take  the  train, 
nttt  bent  QUQC  fa^ren,  fu^r;  gefa^- 
ren  (fein),  er  fci^rt;  to  take  (of 
time),  bcment,  reg.  (fyabett). 


tall,  l)od^  ;    inflected  :    ^o^er,  ^olje, 

^o^eg, 
teacher,  ber  £el)rer  I,  beg  -g,  bie  —  ; 

(woman),  bie  ^efy'rerin  IV,   bie 


tell  (relate),  ergafy;(ett,  reg.  insep. 

(^aben)  ;      (say),     fagen,     reg. 

(^aben), 
ten,  gefyn. 
tenth,  je^nt, 

terrible,  terribly,  furcfyt'bar. 
than,  atg, 
thank,  banfen,  reg.   (^aben),  with 

dat.  ;  thank  you,  (id))  banfe. 
that,  bag  ;  demonst.,  ber,  bie,  bag, 

gen.,  beffen  ;  jetter,  jene,  jeneg  ; 

rel.,  ber,  bie,  bag,  gen.,  befjen  ; 

toelcfyer,    tt)e(d)e,     tt)e(c^egr    gen., 

beffen  ;  rel.  after  neuter  indef.  , 

mag  ;  conjunc.,  bag  with  depend- 

ent order  ;  that  is  why,  beg'fyalb  ; 

that's  all  right,   gut  ;    eg  macfyt 


the,   ber,   bie,   bag,  gen.,  beg,  ber, 

beg  ;  the  .  .  .  the,  with  compara- 

tives, je  ,  ,  ,  befto. 
their,  t^r. 
them,   i^nen,  fie  ;  biefel'ben  ;  with 

preps.,  ba(r)=* 
themselves,   reflex.,   ftc^  ;    intens., 

felbft. 
then  (next),  bann  ;  (at  that  time), 

ba'mafg. 
there,    ba  ;   (yonder),   bort  ;  there 

is,    eg    gibt,    eg    gab,    eg    ^at 

gegeben,  or  eg  ift,  eg  ttmr,  eg  ift 

geraefen,  §  306. 
therefore,  beg'fyalb,  ba'^er. 
these,  biefe;  see  this;  bteg,  §  186. 


they 


72 


town 


they,  fie,  ifyrer,  iljnen,  fie  ;  man  ; 

eg,  §  186. 
thick,  bid 
thing,  bag  2)ing  II,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e  ; 

things,   bie  <Sad)en,  pZ.  ;    some- 

thing, anything,  et'ttmg. 
think  (believe),  gtanben,  reg.  (fya= 

ben),  with  dat.  ;  denoting  mental 

activity,    benfen,    bacfyte,    gebacfyt 

(fyaben),    of,    an   with   ace.;    I 

shouldn't  think  of  doing  that,  eg 

fd'Ilt  mir  nicfyt  ein,  bag  gu  tun  ;  I 

think,     denoting    doubt,     tt)of)(, 

§363. 
third,  adj.  ,  britt  ;  in  the  third  place, 

britteng  ;    noun,  bag  2)rit'tel  I, 

beg  -8,  bte  —  . 
this,  biefer,  biefe,  biefeg  or  Meg  ;  this 

morning  or  evening  fyente  tnorgen 

or  abenb  ;  (on)  this  side  of,  bieg'* 

feitg  with  gen. 
thoroughly,  griinb'fidj. 
those,    bie,  jene  ;    see    that  ;    bag, 

§186. 

thou,  bn,  beiner,  bit,  Mel). 
thought,  glaubte,  gegtaubt;  badjte, 

gebacfjt  ;  see  think. 
thousand,  tau'fenb. 
three,  brei  ;  three  times,  brei'mat; 

three  and  a  half,  bret'nnbeinfyalb 

or  trier'tefyalb* 
through,   bnrt^    with    ace.  ;    travel 

through,  bnrdfyret'fen,  reg.  insep. 


thy,  bein* 

ticket  (of  admission),  bie  (Sin'trittr 

farte  IV;  (railroad),  bte 

farte  IV. 
tight,  eng» 


till,  prep.,  big  with  ace.  ;  conjunc., 
big  with  dependent  order  ;  till  we 
meet  again  !  anf  2Bie'berfefyen  ! 

time  (extent),  bie  QtitlV',  (point 
of  time),  bag  9fta(  II,  beg  -g,  bte  -e  ; 
a  long  time,  tange,  adv.  ;  What 
time  is  it?  3Bie;t)ieI  Uljr  ift  eg? 
three  times,  brei'mal  ;  sometimes, 


tired,  miibe. 

to,  gn  with  dat.  ;  of  places, 
with  dat.  ;  to  school,  in  bie 
@c^nte  ;  quarter  to  two,  bret  $ier= 
tel  gtrei  ;  ten  minutes  to  three, 
$el)n  9ftinnten  t)or  brei;  ivith  injin., 
ju  ;  denoting  purpose,  urn  ,  ,  »  ju 
with  injin.  ;  to  the  station,  mar- 
ket, castle  or  country,  auf  ben 
SBafynljof,  ben  Sftarft,  bag  @<f)loj3, 
bag  !?anb  ;  (near  to)  an  wi^  ace.  ; 
according  to,  narf)  toiY^  dat.;  to 
the  left,  (infg  ;  often  dative  of  in- 
direct object. 

to-day,  fyente. 

told,  ergfifyl'te,  jagte  ;  see  tell. 

to-morrow,  tnorgen;  to-morrow 
morning,  morgen  fnil)  ;  day  after 
to-morrow,  ii'bertnorgen. 

to-night,  ^eute  abenb. 

too,  modifying  single  words, 
git  ;  modifying  whole  sentences, 
and). 

took,  nafym  ;  tnadjte  ;  see  take. 

toward,  gegen  with  ace. 

tower,  ber  Xurm  II,  beg  -(e)g,  bie 


town,  bie  @tabt  II,  bte  @tabte  ; 
down  town,  in  bie  or  ber  @tabt  ; 
to  town,  in  bie  @tabt. 


train 


73 


walk 


train,   ber  3U9  JI»   &c*  ~(e)3,  bit 

3iige. 
tramp,  ttanbern,  reg.  (fyaben  or  fein, 

§  76,  Note). 
translate,    iiberfet^en,    reg.    insep. 

(fyaben);   be   translated  in   Ger- 

man, cmf  beutfd)  fyetften,  Ijtejs,  ge* 

fyeiften  (fjaben). 
travel,   reifen,  re#.    (fein)  ;    travel 

through,  "do,"  bitrcfjret'fen,  reg. 

insep.  (fyaben)* 
tree,  ber  23aitm  II,  beg  -(e)g,  bte 


troops,  bte 
true,  roafyr. 

trunk,  ber  Coffer  I,  beg  -g,  bte  —  . 
try,  Derfu'cfyen,  regr.  insep.  (fyaben). 
Tuesday,  ber  3)teng'tag. 
twelfth,  jtooift 
twelve,  ^tt)5tf, 
twenty,  gtuanjig. 
twenty-fifth,  funf'unb^an^tgft 
twice,  ^toei'maL 

two,  gft»et  ;  the  two,  bte  gtoei  or  bte 
beiben. 


uhlan,    ber    Uf)(au'    IV,    be§    -en, 

bte  -en. 

uncle,  ber  Onfet  I,  be$  -«,  bte  — . 
under,  unter  with  dat.  or  ace. 
understand,     tierfte^en,     derftanb', 

tierftan'ben  (^aben)» 
understood,   t)erftanb',  t)erftar/ben  ; 

see  understand, 
uniform,  bte  Uniform'  IV. 
university,  bte  Unitjerfttcit'  IV  ;  at 

the    university,     cmf     ber    Unu 


unoccupied,  fret, 

until,  prep.,  bi^  with  ace.  ;  conjunc., 
bi§  with  dependent  order. 

up  (of  rest),  oben  ;  (of  motion), 
Ijinauf;  what's  up?  itmS  gibt^? 
upstairs  (of  rest),  oben  ;  (of  mo- 
tion), bie  Xreppe  fyinauf  ;  stand 
up,  get  up  (from  bed),  ctuf'ftefyen, 
ftanb  auf,  auf'geftanben  (^aben) ; 
get  up  (rise  from  chair),  fid) 
erfye'ben,  erfyob'  ftc^,  fid)  erljo'ben 
(^aben) ;  carry  up,  fyhtcmf'tragett, 
trug  ^tnauf,  ^tnaufgetragen  (f)a= 
ben),  er  tragt  ^tnauf  ;  blow  up 
(active),  fprengen,  reg.  (fjaben). 

upon,  auf  with  dat.  or  ace. 

us,  ung  ;  see  we. 

use,  gebrau'rfjen,  reg.  insep.  (Ijaben). 

usually, 


vacation,  bie  ge'rten,  pi.  (three 
syllables) . 

valley,  bag  Sal  III,  beg  -(e)S,  bte 
Xaleic. 

vegetables,  bag  ©cmii'fc  I  (col- 
lective singular). 

very,  feljr. 

village,  bag  S)orf  III,  beg  -(e)g, 
bie  2)orfer. 

visit,  beftt'c^en,  reg.  insep.  (fyaben). 

W 

wagon,  ber  SBagen  I,  beg  -g,  bie  — . 
wait,   marten,  reg.    (^aben),    for, 

auf  with  ace. 
walk,  gefyen  or  gu  gu§  gefjen,  ging, 

gegangen  (fein). 


wall 


74 


whose 


wall   (of  room),  bie  2Banb  II,  btc 

SBanbe  ;  (of  castle  or  garden),  bie 

2ftauer  IV. 
wander,  ttmuberu,   reg.    (fyabeu  or 

feiu,  §  76,  Note). 
wanderer,  ber  Sau'berer  I,  beg  -g, 

bie—. 
want,   to  want  to,  ttjollen,  ttollte, 

gett)olit  (fyabett),  er  toitt. 
ware  (merchandise),  bie  SSare  IV. 
warm,  ttmrm. 
Wartburg,  bie  SBart'burg. 
was,    rtmr;    see    be;    was    able, 

fonnte  ;  see  can. 
wasn't,  see  was  and  not;   wasn't 

it,     §  13,   b,    sentence     6,    uid)t 

ttmljr? 

watch,  bie  W)r  IV. 
water,  bag  Staffer  I,  beg  —  ,  bie  —  . 
way,  ber  2$eg  II,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e. 
we,  tt)ir,  unfer,  uug,  uug  ;  in  general 

sense,  man. 
weapon,  bie  2Baffe  IV. 
wear  (o/  clothes),  trageu,  trug,  ge= 

tragen  (fyabeu),  er  tragt. 
weather,  ba§  ^Better  I,  beg  -8,  bie  —  . 
Wednesday,    ber     2ftitt'tt)o<i),     beg 


week,  bie  2Bod)e  IV  ;  What  day  of 
the  week  is  to-day  ?  SBetcfyen  Xag 
l)aben  n)ir  ^eute? 

welcome,  you're  welcome,  in  an- 
swer to  thank  you,  bitte. 

well,  adv.,  gut;  well  written,  gut 
gefcfyriebeti  ;  be  well,  ficfy  gut  be= 
finbett,  befaub,  befunben  (fyaben)  ; 
excl.,  uun. 

went,  ging(en)  ;  see  go. 

were,  roaren,  tt)are(u)  ;  for  passive, 


trurbeu  ;  were  -ing,  sign  of  pro- 
gressive form. 

what,  ttm§  ;  what  (a),  toelrf)  (em)  ; 
what  a  shame  !  rtne  fcfyabe  !  with 
preps.,  tt)o(r)=  ;  what  for,  toarum'  ; 
what  time,  une'triet  ll^r  ;  what's 
his  name,  lt)ie  fyeiftt  er  ;  what  day 
of  the  week,  toeldjeu  Sag  ;  what 
day  of  the  month,  beu  trietjie^ten  ; 
what  kind  of  (a),  mag  fiir  (ein). 

wheel,  bag  ^ab  III,  beg  -(e)g,  bie 


when,  conjunc.  with  past  time,  a(g 

with  dependent  order;  with  pres- 

ent time,   tt)euu  with  dependent 

order;  interrog.,  ttmmt. 
whence,  ttJO^er'. 
whenever,    toenn    with    dependent 

order. 
where,  too  ;   from  where,   ttjo^er^; 

where  to,  toofyin'. 
whether,  ob  with  dependent  order. 
which,    rel.,    ber,    bie,   bag,    gen., 

beffeu;    tuetdjer,  toelcfye,   ft)elc^eg, 

gen.,   beffeu;    interrog.,   toeldfyer, 

tt)et(^e,    meld^eg,    gen.,    ttefcfyeg  ; 

with  preps.,  tt)o(r)=. 
while,    ttwfy'rettb,    with   dependent 

order. 

white,  toeig. 
whither,  tno^iu'. 
who,  rel.,  ber,  bie,  bag,  gen.,  beffeu  ; 

toelcfyer,    toetdje,      uoeld^eg,    gen., 

beffeu  ;  interrog.,  rt)er. 
whoever,  tuer. 
whole,  gau^. 

whom,  beu,  roeldjett  ;  see  who. 
whose,      rel.,     beffeu;    interrog., 

roeffen. 


why 


75 


yourself 


why,  interrog.,  ttmrum' ;  excl.,  ja, 
§  359  ;  that  is  why,  beg'fjafb. 

wide,  brett  (not  toeit,  far). 

wife,  bie  grew  IV. 

will,  future,  toerben ;  (wish,  be  will- 
ing) tootten,  toottte,  getoottt  (fja* 
ben),  er  twIL 

window,  bag  genfter  I,  beg  -g,  bie  — . 

winter,  ber  SBinter  I,  beg  -g,  bie  —  ; 
winter-sport,  ber  2Bin'tergporr,  beg 
-(e)g,  bie  -g. 

wish,  ttmnfcfyen,  reg.  (fjaben),  with 
dir.  obj.  or  with  gu  and  inftn. 

with,  ntit  with  dat. 

without,  otjne  with  ace. ;  also  with 
infin.  and  gu,  §  248,  d,  and  with 
baj}  and  the  dependent  order, 
§  348. 

woman,  bie  grew  IV. 

wonderful,  tt)un'bert>oll ;  wonder- 
fully beautiful,  ttwn'berfcfybn. 

won't,  see  will  and  not. 

wood  (forest),  ber  SBalb  III,  beg 
-(e)g,  bie  SBatber;  (cut  wood), 
bag  £ol$  III,  beg  -eg,  bie  §o(ger. 

word,  bag  2Bort,  beg  -(e)g,  bie 
^Sorter,  separate  words,  or  bie 
28orte,  connected  words. 

wore,  trug(en);  see  wear. 

work,  noun,  bie  ^r'beit  IV;  verb, 
ar'betten,  reg.  (^aben). 

world,  bie  Sett  IV. 

worn,  getragen  ;  see  wear. 

worry,  fief)  fiimmern,  reg.  reflex. 
(fyaben),  about,  um  with  ace. 


would,  ttwrbe,  aiottte ;  often  trans- 
lated by  the  subjunctive. 

wound,  bie  SBunbe  IV. 

write,  fcfyretben,  Jdjrieb,  gefc^rieben 
(fyaben). 

writing,  see  write. 

written,  gefcfyrteben  ;  see  write  ; 
well  written,  gut  gefcfyrieben, 

wrong,  falfcf) ;  to  be  wrong,  mt'reefyt 
^aben,  ^atte,  ge^abt  (^aben). 

wrote,  fdjrieb  ;  see  write. 


yard,  ber  §of  II,  beg  -eg,  bie 

year,  bag  3afyr  II,  beg  -(e)g,  bie  -e. 

yes,  ja,  jatDO^t' ;  answering  a  nega- 
tive, bocf),  §  360,  a. 

yesterday,  geftern ;  a  following 
noun  is  written  as  an  adverb 
without  a  capital:  yesterday 
evening,  geftern  abenb  ;  yesterday 
afternoon,  geftern  nadj'mittag. 

yet  (of  time),  nocfy  ;  not  yet,  nodj 
nict)t ;  (adversative)  bodj. 

yonder,  bort 

you  (intimate),  bii,  beiner,  bir,  bid) ; 
pi.,  iljr,  euer,  end),  eue^  ;  (formal) 
@ie,  3I)rer,  3^nen,  @ie,  sing,  and 
pi.  ;  (in  general  sense)  man. 

young,  younger,  jnng,  iiinger. 

your,  bein,  euer,  3^r;  with  parts 
of  the  body  in  predicate,  the 
article,  sometimes  with  bir,  end), 
or  ftei), 

yourself,  reflex.,  fid) ;  intens.,  felbft 


INDEX. 


A. 

21,  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  I,  b. 

in  diphthongs,  Intro.,  I,  e;  §  391. 
aa,  digraph,  Intro.,  I,/, 
aber,  §  214. 

contrasted  with  fonbern,  §  214,  a. 
abstract  nouns,  §  411. 

See  also  Word  formation. 
accent,  in  verbs,  inseparable,  §  229; 

separable,  §  230. 

common  verbs,  used  as  insepara- 
ble, §  238 ,  a ;  separable,  §  238,  b. 
in  foreign  words,  §  77,  2. 
in  pronunciation  (a  German  ac- 
cent) ,§§  386-403. 

accusative  case,  §  8;  §  8,  6;  §  9; 
§  19;  summary  of,  §  93;  §  94  ; 
summary  of  forms,  §§  370-375. 
of  definite  time,  §  135;  §  270. 
prepositions  with  accusative  or  da- 
tive, §  101. 

with  accusative  only,  §  117. 
impersonals  with,  §  304. 
active    voice,    distinguished    from 

passive,  §  289,  a,  b. 
more  used  in  German,  §  291,  «,  b. 
address,  formal  and  familiar,  §  11. 
adjectives,  review  of,  §  149;  §  371. 
declension  of 
strong,  §  129;  §  149,  6,2. 
weak,  §  134;  §149,  b,  1. 
mixed,  §  139;  §  149,  6,  2,  note, 
indeclinable,  §  144,  a. 
possessive,    from   genitive,   §   118; 

§179;  §210. 
predicate,  §10;  §  149,  a. 
attributive,  §  149,  b. 


use  as  nouns,  §  149,  c. 

use  after  "  one,"  §  149,  d. 

use  after  mcmd),  jokfy,  toeldj,  and  all, 

§144. 

cardinal,  §  263. 
ordinal,  §  264.    . 

formation  of,  from  suffixes,  §  412. 
adverbs 

uninflected  adjectives,  §  145. 
formed  from  cardinals,  with  =maf, 

§  263,  b. 

from  ordinals,  with  *en3,  §  264,  a. 
comparison  of,  §  257,  §  258. 
order  in  German  sentence,  §  145; 

§  353,  b,  1,  2. 
adverbial  phrases 

order  in  sentence,  §  353,  b,  1,  2. 
agent,  dative  of 
with  the  passive  and  fcon,  §  285. 
with  the  active,  §  291,  b. 
at,  Intro.,  I,  e;  §  391,  1. 
aft,  declined  when  followed  by  adjec- 
tive, §  144,  c. 

indeclinable,  §  144,  c ;  §  194,  a. 
never  weak,  §  194,  a,  2. 
neuter,  194,  a,  1. 
alphabet,  German,  Intro.,  page  x. 

phonetic,  §§  432-433. 
al3,  introducing  clauses,  §  215. 
to  translate  verbals,  §  347. 
in  comparisons,  §  259,  a,  b. 
alS  06,  alS  toenn,  §  334,  a. 
am,  with  the  superlative  in  the  predi- 
cate, §  257,  b. 
an,  prep,  with  dative  or  accusative, 

§  101. 

anber,  after  ettoaS,  §  191,  a ;  after  nicfytS, 
§  191,  e. 


11 


78 


INDEX. 


anber  (continued) 
meaning  different,  compared  with 

nod)  ein,  §  194,  6. 

anbertfyalb,  §  265,  a.  > 

another,  one  more,  nodj  ein ;  a  differ- 
ent one,  anber,  §  194,  b. 
anftatt,    preposition     with    genitive, 

§  342,  b. 
followed    by    infinitive,    §248,  d; 

§  252. 

followed  by  clause,  §  348. 
antecedents,  agreement  of  personal 

pronoun  with,  §  106. 
of  relative,  §  202,'  6. 
repetition  of,  §  204,  b. 
apostrophe,    used    in   genitive    of 

proper  names  in  *3,  §  275,  a. 
apposition,  nouns  in,  §  125. 

after  nouns  of  measure,  §  130. 
article 
definite 
forms  of,    §  9;    §   19  and  note; 

summary  of  forms,  §  371,  c. 
combined       with      prepositions 

§  101,  a. 
distinguished    from    demonst 

tive,  §  190,  a,  note, 
use    with    beibe,  §   194,   c;    wit 
proper  names,  §  275,  b,  c;  i 
stead    of    possessive    pronoun 
with  parts  of  the  body,  §  210. 
indefinite 
forms  of,  §  9;  §  25;  summary  of 

forms,  §  371,  d. 
of  indefinite  time,  §  342,  a. 
See  also  ber  and  ein, 
as,  in  comparisons,  fine,  §  259,  a,  b. 
subordinating  conjunction,  §  215; 

§  347 ;  see  also  ba. 
as  — as,  §  259,  b. 
assimilation  of  spoken  sounds, 

§404. 
ail,    pronunciation    of,    Intro.,  I,  e; 

§  391,  2. 
an,  Intro.,  I,  e ;  §  391,  3. 


auf,  prep,  with  dative  or  accusative, 

§101. 

with  adverbial  superlative,  §  257,  c. 
an3,  prep,  with  dative,  §  111. 
auxiliaries,  of  mode,  see  Modals. 
of  tense 

simple  present  for  emphatic  aux- 
iliary do  in  English,  §  18; 
§  251,  a. 

future  tenses,  §  56 ;  §  57 ;  §  160. 
rendered    in    German    by    the 

present,  §  63. 
simple  futurity,  toerben,  §  155, 

a ;  §  283,  a. 
distinctions  in  use  of  shall  and 

will,  §  155,  a,  b,  and  note, 
future  perfect,  §  88 ;  §  95 ;  §  165. 
perfect  tenses 
with  fyaben,  §  68 ;  §  95 ;  §  165. 

in  past  perfect,  §  82;  §  95. 
withfein,  §76;  §95. 

in  past  perfect,  §  82 ;  §  95. 
use  of  perfect  in  German  for 
English  past,  §  71;  §  166,  b. 
use    of    German  present  with 
fdjon  for    English    present 
perfect,  §  83. 

use  of  German  past  with  fd)on 
for   English   past  perfect, 
§  83,  a. 
of  passive  voice,   toerben,  §  283; 

§  284 ;  see  also  toerben. 
of  separable  verbs,  §  238,  b. 
position    in    dependent   clauses, 

§205. 

with  "  two  infinitives,"  §  219. 

repetition  of  auxiliary  rendered 

by  nidjt  ttafyr,  §  3,  a. 

B. 

SB,  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  b,  1. 
be*,  inseparable  prefix,  §  229. 
bei,  preposition  with  the  dative,  §  111. 
beibe,  preceded  by  the  article,  §  194,  c. 
bi3,  prep,  with  the  accusative,  §  117. 


INDEX. 


79 


fcttte,  use  of,  §  78,  a. 

but  (after  or  fonbern),  §  214,  a. 

C. 

(£,  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  b,  2. 
capitalization 
of  adjectives  after  etnmS  and  ni<fyt$f 

§  191  a,  e\  Intro.,  IV,  e. 
after  ttiel  and  toentg,  §  194,  e. 
of  nouns,  Intro.,  IV.,  c,  1,  2. 
of  pronouns,  Intro.,  IV,  d;  §  11. 
nouns,  not  capitalized  when  com- 
bined with  geftern,  fyeute,  and 
tttorgert,  §  175. 

cardinal  numbers,-  §  263. 
case,  endings,  §  40 ;  §  45 ;  §  51 ;  §  370, 

«,  b,  c. 

summary  of,  §  93;  §  94;  §§  370-375. 
of  appositives,  §  125. 
of  relatives,  §  202,  b. 
See    also    Nominative,     Genitive, 

Dative,  Accusative. 
catch,  glottal,  §§  393-396. 
causative,  faff  en,  §  170,  d. 
dj,  Intro.,  II,  b,  3,  4,  5;  §  398,  1,  2,  3. 
=djen,§39;  §89,  6,3;  §  410,  a. 
Christian     names,    inflections    of 

nouns  ending  in  *3,  §  275,  a. 
with  the  definite  article,  §  275,  6,  c. 
d)$,  sound  of,  Intro.,  II,  b,  4. 
d,  sound  of,  Intro.,  II,  b,  1,  c. 
clauses 
use    of,    in    German    instead    of 

phrases,  §  251,  b. 

independent,    inverted    when    pre- 
ceded   by    dependent    clause, 
§  215,  a. 
dependent,  order  in,  §  205 ;  §  334,  a. 

punctuation  of,  §  204,  c. 
conditional,    §329;    §330;    §334; 

§  335 ;  §  336. 
inverted    when    toemt    or    06    is 

omitted,  §  334,  a. 

cognates,  related  words  (as  SBudj, 
book),  see  vocabularies  in  each 


lesson.      Also    Grimm's    Law, 
§§  419-422. 

comma,  Intro.,  IV,  a. 
required  to  set  off  relative  clauses, 

Intro.,  IV,  a,  1;   §  204,  c. 
before    modified    infinitive,   §  233 ; 

§  249,  a. 

common  prefixes 
use  as  separable,  §  238,  b. 
•use  as  inseparable,  §  238,  a. 
comparisons  of  adjectives  and 

adverbs,  §  257. 
regular,  §  257,  a. 
in  the  predicate,  §  257,  b,  c. 
of  long  words,  §  257,  d. 
table  of  regular  and  irregular  com- 
parisons, §  258. 
particles  of,  §  259. 
of    one    adjective    with    another, 

§  257,  d. 

composition    of    nouns,    adjec- 
tives, verbs,  etc.,  §§405-418. 
See  Word  formation. 
complementary  infinitive,  §  233. 
complex    sentences,    §§  202-205 ; 

§215. 

compound  relatives,  §  203. 
compound  sentences,  §  214. 

punctuation  of,  Intro.,  IV,  a,  2. 
compound  words,  §  414. 
nouns,  §  415. 
adjectives,  §  416. 
verbs,  §  417. 

concrete  nouns,  §  410. 
conditional  (mode),  §  322;  §323,  a; 

§  335,  b. 

See  Summary  of  Forms,  §§  376-385. 
conditions 
of  fact,  §329;  §330,  a. 
contrary  to  fact,  §§  334-336. 

modals  in,  §  336. 
conjugation 

indicative,  §  1 ;  §7;  §17;  §24;  §31; 
§37;  §44;  §50;  §57;  §68;  §82. 


80 


INDEX. 


conjugation  (continued) 

of    modals,  §154;    §159;    §160; 

§  165 ;  §  166. 
of  inseparable  verbs,   §229;    of 

separable,  §  231. 
imperative,  §  244. 
subjunctive,  §  313;  §§  319-321. 

of  modals,  §  328 ;  §  336. 
infinitives,  §  248. 
participles,  §  250. 
passive,  §283;  §284. 
reflexive,  §  296. 
impersonals,  §§  302-305. 
See  Summary  of  Forms,  §§  376-385. 
conjunctions,  coordinating,  §  214. 

special  uses,  §  214,  a. 
subordinating,  §  205. 

list  of,  §215;  §426,  ft,  2. 
connecting  vowel  for  euphony, 

§  16,  a. 
consonants 

classification  of,  Intro.,  II,  a. 
pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  b, 1-20; 

difficulties  of,  §§  397^02. 
contrary  to  fact  conditions 
use  of  subjunctive  for,  §  334. 
use  of  modals  in,  §  336. 
contrast,  sbown  by  fonbern,  §  214,  a. 
coordinating1  conjunctions,  §  214. 
copula,  jetn  witb  participle,  §  289. 
correlatives 
as  — as,  §259,  b. 
not  only  —  but  also,  §214,  a,  1. 
the  —  the,  §  259,  c. 
could  have,  in  German,  §  336. 

D. 

2),  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  b,  1. 
ba,  conjunction,  §215;  §216;  §347. 
use  of  clauses  with  ba  instead  of 

English  phrases,  §251,  b. 
instead  of  verbals  in  -ing,  §  347. 
ba(r>,  combined    with  prepositions, 

§112. 
baS,  definite  article,  see  ber. 


as  relative,  §  202. 

as  demonstrative,  §  190,  a. 

complete  table  of  forms  of  ,§  371,  c ; 

§373,  a. 

distinguished  from  ba$,  §220. 
used  with  plural  forms  of  f em,  §  186. 
ba$,  subordinating  conjunction  §  215. 

distinguished  from  ba$,  §  220. 
dative  case 
indirect  object,  §  52. 
instead  of  possessive,  §  210, 
of  definite  time,  §  270. 
of  agent,  with  fcon,  in  passive,  §  285. 
after  passive  of  verbs,  §  290. 
with  certain  adjectives,  §  343,  a. 
with  certain  verbs,  list  of,  §  343,  b. 
with  impersonals,  §  305. 
prepositions  with  dative  or  accusa- 
tive, §  101. 

with  dative  only,  §  111. 
with  Son  instead  of  genitive,  §  275,  a. 
days  of  the  week,  §  271,  a. 

of  the  month,  §  271,  b. 
declension 

See  Adjectives,    Articles,    Nouns, 
Pronouns.     Also  Summary  of 
Forms,  §§  370-375. 
demonstrative    pronouns,   §  190 ; 

§224;  §374, 
benn,  use  of 
as  conjunction,  §  214. 
as  particle,  §357;  §358. 
dependent     clauses,     §§  202-205  ; 

§215;  §219;  §220. 
punctuation   of,   Intro.,   IV,   a,  1; 

§  204,  c. 

dependent  order,  see  Word  order. 
dependent     subjunctive,     §314; 

§  315.    See  Subjunctive. 
ber,  the  definite  article,  §2,  a;  §9; 
§  19 ;  §  371,  c.    For  special  uses, 
see  Article,  definite. 
demonstrative,  §i86;  §224;   §374, 
relative,  §  202  ;  §  204  ;  §  373. 
differing  from  English,  §  204. 


INDEX. 


81 


,,ber"  words,  §  134. 
words  declined  like   ,,ber"  words, 

§144;  §374,  b. 

beren,  genitive  of  relative  ber,  §  202,  a. 
derivation  of  words,  §§  405-418. 
derivatives,  Latin  and  German  syn- 
onyms, §418. 

berjem'ge,  demonstrative,  §  190,  c,  d. 
declension  of,  §  374. 
use  of,   §190,   d;    when    modified 

§224. 

in  formal  language,  §  224. 
berfelfce,  demonstrative,  §  190,  c;  §374. 
beffen,  genitive  of  relative  ber,  used 

for  toelcfyer,  §  202,  a. 
befto,  correlative  with  je,  §  259,  c. 
dialect,  relation  of,  to  correct  accent, 

§386. 

bteS,  used  with  plural  of  fein,  §  186. 
btejer,  as  adjective,  §  134;  as  demon- 
strative pronoun,  §  190 ;  §  374. 
digraphs,  aa,  ee,  ie,  00,  Intro.,  I,/, 
dixnidiatives,    cmbertfyctlfc,  brittefyalb, 

etc.,  §265,  a. 
diminutive  suffixes,  *rf)en  and  4em, 

§39;  §89,  6,  3;  §410,  a. 
diphthong's,  at,  cm,  cm,  et,  eu. 

Intro.,  I,  e;  §391;  §392. 
bodj,  as  particle,  §  357  ;  §  360. 
bu,  declined,  §  105 ;  §  372. 
capitalized,  Intro.,  IV,  d,  1. 
use,  §  11;  after  relative,  §  204,  b,  1. 
bitrdj,  prep,  with  the  accusative,  §  117. 

common  prefix,  §  238. 
biirfen,  §  154 ;  §  159  ;  §  160 ;  §  369. 
special  uses,  may,  §  170,  a,  1. 
subjunctive  of,  §  328. 
summary  of  conjugation,  §  385. 

E. 

{£,  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  I,  b. 

difficulties  of,  §§  387-390. 
*e,  weak  ending  of  adjectives,  §  134. 

plural  noun-ending,  §  59. 


typical    weak    ending,    §    134,    6; 
§  371,  c. 

noun  suffix,   §   39,  3;    §  89,   6,  2; 

§  411,  a. 
e&enfo —  hrie,      correlative      as— as, 

§  259,  b. 

et,  diphthong,  Intro.,  I,  e;  §  391,  1. 
*et,  feminine  suffix,  §  89,  6,  2 ;  §  411,  b. 
em,  indefinite  article,  §  9;  §  25. 

mixed  declension  with,  §  139. 

independent  use  of,  §  179,  b,  note. 

negative  of  (fern),  §  121. 

summary  of  forms,  §  371,  d. 
,,etn"  words,  §  118,  a ;  §  139. 

att  followed  by  ,,em"  word,  §  144,  c. 
etnicje,  §  194,  d. 
em3,  cardinal  number,  §  263. 
=el,  masculine  and  neuter  noun  end- 
ing, first  class,  §  39. 
ent^,  inseparable  prefix,  §  229. 
emphasis  in  German,  §  190,  note, 
emphatic  form  in  conjugation, 

§  18;  §  251,  a. 
=en,  noun  ending,  §  39 ;  §  370,  d. 

weak  adjective  ending,  §  134. 

suffix  to  form  adjectives,  §  412,  b ; 
to  form  verbs,  §  413,  a. 

assimilation,  §  404. 
=en3,  in  ordinal  adverbs,  §  264,  a. 
ent=,  inseparable  prefix,  §  229. 
er,  personal  pronoun,  §  105;  §  372,  c. 
*er,  suffix,  §  39 ;  §  89,  b,  1 ;  §  410,  b. 

plural  ending,  third  class,  §  72. 

to  show  comparison,  §  257. 
er=,  inseparable  prefix,  §  229. 
*ern,  verb  suffix,  §  413,  b. 
evfcf  noun  prefix,  §  408,  a. 
e$,  personal  pronoun,  §  105 ;  §  372,  c. 

with   impersonal  verbs,    §301,   a; 
§§  302-306. 

as  object  of  modal  auxiliaries,  §  161. 

used  with  plural  form  of  fein,  §  186. 

in  eg  tft,  followed  by  the  nomina- 
tive, §  306,  b. 


82 


INDEX. 


e3  (continued) 

in  e£  gtbt,  followed  by  the  accusa- 
tive, §  306,  a. 

*e3,  ending  of  adjectives,  §  139,  b. 

ettoaS,  indeclinable  indefinite,  §  191,  a. 

euf    pronunciation    of,    Intro.,  I,   e; 
§  391,  3;  §392. 

exclamation  point,  frequent  use  in 
German,  Intro.,  IV,  6;  §  78. 

F. 

3?,  pronounciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  b,  1. 
factitive  verbs,  §  306. 
foreign  nouns,  masculine,  §  77,  2. 
formal  address 

in  the  imperative,  §  78 ;  §  243 ;  §  244. 

@te  instead  of  bit,  §  11. 
fractions,  §  265. 
fiir,  prep,  with  accusative,  §  117. 
future  tense,  §  56 ;  §  57 ;  of  modals, 
§  160,  summary,  §§  376-385. 

rendered  by  present,  §  63. 

translation  of  will,  §  155. 

distinctions  between  foften,  tooflen, 

and  toerbett,  §  155,  note, 
future  perfect,  §  88;  §  95. 

of  modals,  §  165,  a. 

G. 

©,  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  6,  6. 

discussion  of,  §  399. 
ge=,  inseparable  prefix,  §  229. 

noun  prefix,  §  39,  3 ;  §  408,  b. 

in  past  participles,  §  69 ;  §  369. 
gegen,  prep,  with  accusative,  §  117. 
gender,  in  German,  §  2. 

importance  of  definite  article,  §  2,  a. 

in   German   compounds,  §  414;  in 
foreign  masculines,  §  77,  2. 

rules  of,  §  89. 
genitive  case 

denoting  possession,  §  46. 

possessive  adjective  from,  §  118. 

of  proper  names,  §  275. 

of  time,  §  342,  a. 


with  certain  prepositions,  §  342,  b. 
substitutes  for,  §  210;  §  275,  a. 
German  language 
sketch  of,  §  420. 
richness  in  compounds,  §  405. 
grammatical  terms,  Intro.,  V. 
orthography,  Intro.,  II,  6,  15,  note; 

Intro.,  IV,  c,  d,  e. 
punctuation,  Intro.,  IV,  a,  b. 
German  rules  of  grammar,  §§  423- 

426. 

gertt,  §  170,  a ;  §  171. 
Glottal  catch,  §§  393-396. 
gn,  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  b,  20. 
grammatical  terms  in  German, 

Intro.,  V;  §§423-426. 
Grimm,  Jacob,  §  15;  §  419. 

Grimm's  law,  §§  419-422. 
guttural    consonants,    Intro.,   II, 
a,  3. 

H. 

£,  Intro.,  II,  b,  15,  note;  II,  b,  1,  b. 
*>afcen,§l;  §7;  §376. 
use  in  perfect  tenses,  §  68;   §  82; 

§88;  §95. 
with  modals,  §  165 ;  position  with 

"  two  infinitives/'  §  219. 
with  certain  inseparable   verbs, 

§  238,  a. 

with  reflexives,  §  295,  6. 
with  some  impersonals,  §  301,  a. 
4>aft,  adjective  suffix,  §  412,  c. 
sfyalbf  dimidiative,  §  265,  a. 
fjatfc,  §  265,  c. 
"half  past,"  §  269,  a. 
sfyeitf    feminine    suffix,    §    89,    6,    2; 

§  411,  c. 

fyeffen,  "  two  infinitives,"  §  166. 
followed  by  infinitive  without  511, 

§  248,  «. 

by  the  dative,  §  343,  b. 
fyev,  §  239 ;  in  fyin  unb  fyer,  §  239,  a. 
§er5,  ba3,  irregular  noun,  §  370,  d. 
tyin,  §  239 ;  bin  imb  tyer,  §  239,  a. 


INDEX. 


83 


gutter,  prep,  with  dative  or  accusa- 
tive, §  101. 

hortative  subjunctive,  §  324,  a. 
Jmnbert,  §  263,  c. 

I. 

3,  vowel,  Intro.,  I,  &  ;  §  389. 
id),  personal  pronoun,  §  105 ;  §  372. 

after  the  relative,  §  204,  &,  1. 
M),  masculine  ending,  §  89,  5,  1. 
idiomatic  particles,  §§  357-363. 
te,  digraph,  Intro.,  I,/. 
4eren,  verb  suffix,  §  413,  c. 
4g,  noun  ending,  §  59  ;  §  89,  6,  1. 

adjective  suffix,  §  412,  d. 
*i§en,  verb  suffix,  §  413,  d. 
imperative    mode,    formation  of, 

§78;  §243;  §244;  §§376-385. 
of  reflexives,  §  296. 
use  of    hortative   subjunctive    for 
first  and  third  person  impera- 
tive, §  324,  a. 

passive  imperative,  §  284,  note, 
difficulties  of,  §  244,  a. 
imperfect,  see  Past  tense. 
impersonal  verbs,  §§  301-307. 
with  fein,  §  76 ;  §  301,  a. 
in  passive,  personal  in  active,  §  290. 
intransitive  reflexives,  §  297,  b. 
special  use  of  eg  gtbt,  §  306,  a ;  eg  ift, 

§306,6. 

classes  of,  §§  301-305. 
pure  (state  of  weather),  §  302. 
reflexive  (with  fid)),  §  303. 
with  dative  (c«  fdUt  tnir  em),  §  305. 
with  accusative   (eg  freut  mid)), 

§304. 

list  of,  §  301. 
in,  prep,  with  dative  or   accusative, 

§101. 

4tt, feminine  ending,  §  89,  b, 2  ;  §  410,  c. 
indefinite  article,  §  9;  §  25 ;  §  371,  d. 
indefinite  pronouns 
indeclinable 
ettt>a«,  §  191,  a;   irgenb,  §  191,  &; 


man  (with  additional  forms), 
§  191,  c,  and  note;  mefyr,  §  191, 
d  ;    nic^tS,   §  191,    e  ;    toeniger, 
§  191,  d ;  and  also  (genitive  ex- 
cepted) ,  jebermcmn,  jemcmb,  me* 
manb,  §191,/. 
inflected  (declinable) 
alt,  §  194,  a,  1,  2,  3 ;  ember,  §  194,  b ; 
fceibe,  §  194,  c ;  einige,  mefyrere, 
§  194,  d ;  met,  toenig,  §  194,  e. 
indicative  mode,  see  Conjugation, 

Tense. 

complete  summary  of,  §§  376-385. 
to  indicate  speaker's  belief,  §  315,  c 
use  for  conditions  of  fact,  §  329. 
indirect  discourse,  §  315,  a,  &,  c. 

in  questions,  §  315. 
infinitives 

present  and  perfect,  §  248. 
without  $u,  §  248,  a. 
with  511,  §  248,  b. 
use  as  noun,  §  248,  c. 
complementary,  §  233. 
of  purpose,  §97;  §248,  d. 
instead  of  verbal  after  anftatt  and 

otyne,  §  248,  d. 
passive,  §  284. 

position  of,  §58;  §233;  §249. 
with  modals,  §  161,  b. 
in  "  two  infinitives,"  §  166. 
in  compound  tenses,  §  219. 
two  or  more,  §  219,  a,  note, 
after  certain  verbs,  §  233. 
rendered  by  clause,  §  251,  b. 
inflected  indefinites,  §  194. 
4ng,  noun  ending,  §  59. 
inseparable  verbs 
list  of  inseparable  prefixes,  §  229. 
meaning  of,  §  237. 
conjugation  of,  §  383. 
inseparable  and  separable  (com 

mon)  verbs,  §  238. 
intensive  pronoun,  §  180. 
interjections,  §  363,  b ;  §  426,  h. 


84 


INDEX. 


interrogative    pronouns,     §  184; 

§  373,  c,  d. 

interrogative  sentences,  §  3. 
intransitive  verbs 
indicating  motion,  take  fein,  §  76. 
idiomatic  use  of  impersonal  reflex- 
ive, §297,  a. 
common    verbs,    when    separable, 

§  238,  b. 
inversion 

questions  by,  §  3 ;  in  clauses  when 

toemt  is  omitted,  §  334,  a. 
inverted  order,  see  Word  order. 
trgenb,  use  of,  §  191,  b. 
irregular  verbs 
definition  of  strong  verbs,  §  15, 
forms  of,  §  30. 
list  of  principal  parts  of  all  strong 

verbs,  §  369. 

conjugation  of,  §§381-385. 
*ifd),  adjective  ending,  §  412,  e. 
italicizing,  §  190,  a,  note. 

J. 

$f  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  6,  8. 
ja,  idiomatic  particle,  §  357 ;  §  359. 
jeber,  §  134. 

jebermann,  §  191, /;  §  375,  b. 
jemanb,  §191,/;  §375,  b. 
je  —  befto,  the  —  the,§  259,  c. 
jener,  as  adjective,  §  134. 
as     demonstrative,     *190;     §374, 
a,  b. 

K. 

$,  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  b,  1. 
fern,  use  of,  §121. 

without  the  noun,  §  179,  6,  note. 

declension,  §  118,  a ;  §  371,  d. 
4eit,  feminine  suffix,  §  89,  b,  2 ;  §  411,  d. 
fn,  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  &,  20. 
fb'mten,    §154;    §159;    §160;    §165; 
§385. 

with  e3  and  $u,  §  161. 


"  two  infinitives,"  §  166. 
to  translate  may,  §  170,  a,  1. 
4unft,  noun  ending,  second  class,  §  59. 

L. 

£,  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  a,  1. 

difficulties  of,  §  387;  §  400. 
laffen,  "  two  infinitives,"  §  166. 

without  511,  §  248,  a. 

as  causative,  §  170,  d;  §  171. 
Latin  derivatives,  §  418. 
lefyren,  "  two  infinitives,"  §  166. 

without  511,  §  248,  a. 
4em,  diminutive   suffix,  §  39;    §   89, 

b,  3;  §410,  a. 
lerrtett,  "  two  infinitives,"  §  166. 

without  511,  §  248,  a. 
4td),  adjective  suffix,  §  412, /. 
4ing,  masculine  ending,  §  89,  6,  1; 
§  410,  d. 

M. 

9ft,  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  a,  b. 
tnacfyen,  "  two  infinitives,"  §  166. 

without  511,  §  248,  a. 
*mal,  adverbial  suffix,  §  263,  b. 
man,  §191,  c;  §375,  b. 

used  for  passive,  §  291,  a. 
mandj,  declined  like  ber,  §  144 ;  §  371,  b. 

indeclinable,  §  144,  a. 
measure,  nouns  of,  §  130. 
tnefyr,  §  191,  d-  §257,  d. 
mefyrere,  inflected  indefinite,  §  194,  d. 
tnifH  inseparable  prefix,  §  229. 
tnit,  prep,  with  the  dative,  §  111. 
mixed  declension,  §139;  §371,  c?; 

see  Nouns,  Adjectives. 
modal  auxiliaries 

indicative  forms  of,  §  154;    §  159; 
§160;  §165. 

subjunctive,  §  328. 
in  conditions  contrary  to    fact, 
§336;  §385. 


INDEX. 


85 


modal  auxiliaries  (continued) 
"  two  infinitives  "  with,  §  166. 
infinitive  without  511,  §  248,  a. 
position  of 

in  normal  order,  §  161,  6;  §  166. 
in  dependent  order,  §  219. 
special  uses,  §  170. 
mode,    see   Indicative,  Imperative, 

Subjunctive. 

auxiliaries  of,  see  Modals. 
mogen,  conjugation  of,  see  Modals. 
special  use,  §  170,  a ;    for  should, 

§  336,  b. 

months,  names  of,  §  271,  b. 
motion  to  and   from   the   speaker, 
§  239;      hither     and     thither, 
§  239,  a. 

N. 

9£,  pronunciation  of ,  Intro.,  II,  a,  b. 
narf),  prep,  with  the  dative,  §  111. 
nefcen,  prep,  with  dative  or  accusative, 

§  101. 
negative,    use    of    jottbern     after, 

§  214,  a ;   fern,  §  118,  a  ;  §  121 ; 

§  139;  §  179,  b,  note;   §371,  d\ 

md)t,    §3,    a;    §  26;    §161,    a; 

ni$t3,  §  191,  e ;  me,  §  140. 

nicfyt,  for  repetition  of  questions,  §  3,  a. 

position  in  sentence,  §  26. 

with  modal  auxiliaries,  §  161,  a. 

nirf)t3,  indeclinable  indefinite,  §  191,  e. 

ntcfyt  toafyr,  for  repetition  of  questions, 

§3,  a. 
me,  §  140. 
ntemantv  §  191,  /. 
=tti3,  noun  ending,  §  59. 
nodj,  §  162;  §357;  §  361. 
nod)  em,  for  another,  §  162;  §  194,  6. 
nominative  case,  §  8;  §  9. 

with  eg  ift,  §  306,  b. 
normal  order,  see  Word  order. 
nouns 
classes  of,  §  38. 


first  class  (strong) ,  §  38 ;  §  39. 
declension  of  masculine,  §  40; 

§  89,  b,  1 ;  §  370,  a. 
feminine,  §  45;  §  370,  6. 
neuter,  §  51  ;§  89,  6,  3;  §265; 

§  370,  c. 
second  class  (strong),  §  59. 

declension  of,  §370,  a,  6,  c; 

§  89,  b,  1. 

third  class  (strong),  §  72. 
declension,  §  370,  a,  c. 
summary  of  strong  endings,  §  94. 
fourth  class  (weak) 
masculine  and  feminine,  §  77. 
declension    of,     §   370,    a,    b; 

§  89,  b,  2. 
fifth  class  (mixed) ,  §  84. 

declension  of,  §  370,  a,  c. 
in  apposition,  §  125;  §  130. 
of  measure,  §  130. 
substitutes  for 
adjectives  used  as,  §  149,  c. 
infinitive  used  for,  §  248,  c. 
"  one  "  used  for  noun,  §  149,  d. 
declension  of,  §§  370-371. 
gender  of,  §  89. 
proper,  inflections,  §  275,  a. 

with  definite  article,  §  275,  &,  c. 
number,  see  Singular  and  Plural. 
numerals 

ending  of  nouns  after,  §  130,  a. 
cardinal,  §  263. 

adverbs,  §  263,  6. 
ordinal,  §  264. 

adverbs,  §  264,  a. 
fractions  with  4el  (£eil),  §  265. 

O. 

O,  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  I,  b,  1,  2; 

§§387-389. 
o,  Intro.,  I,  d,  2. 

06,  subordinating  conjunction,  §  215. 
contrary    to     fact    after    a(3    ofy 

§  334,  a. 
object 
direct,  §  8,  b  ;  §  295. 


86 


INDEX. 


object  (continued) 

indirect,  §  52. 

order  of  noun  objects,  §  52 ;  §  107,  c. 
pronouns,  §  107,  a,  b. 

with  modals,  §  161. 
ofyne,  prep,  with  accusative,  §  117. 

followed  by  infinitive,  §  248,  d. 

followed  by  clause,  §  348. 
"  one,"  adjective,  §  148  d. 

translated  by  demonstrative,  §  224. 
oo,  digraph,  Intro.,  I,/, 
optative  subjunctive,  §  324. 
order  of  words,  see  Word  order. 
orthography 

use  of  capitals,  Intro.,  IV,  c,  d,  e. 

silent  fy  after  t,   Intro.,   II,   b,  17, 

note, 
ought  to  have,  translation  of,  §  336. 

P. 

ty,  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  b. 
palatal    consonants,    see     Conso- 
nants. 

participle,  past  (or  perfect) 
in  perfect  tenses,  §  68 ;    formation 
of,  §68;  position  in  sentence, 
§  70;  use  as  adjective  or  noun, 
§  250,    a  ;    impersonal,    §§  302- 
305;    passive,  §284;    reflexive, 
§296. 
of  all  strong  verbs,  see  Summary, 

§369. 

as  adjective  after  feitt,  §289;  com- 
pared with  passive,  §289. 
participial  phrases,  §251. 
particles,  of  comparison,  §259. 

idiomatic,  §§  357-363. 
passive  voice 
formation   of,  §283;    conjugation, 

§  284;    §378;    §380. 
agent   of,  §  285. 

of  verbs  with  the  dative,  §  290. 
compared   with    perfect  participle 

and  fern,  §  289. 
substitutes  for,  §  291. 


reflexive,  §297,  b.. 
less  used  in  German,  §  291. 
past  tenses,  see  Tense. 
perfect  tenses,  see  Tense. 
person,  congruence  of  pronouns  in, 

§106;  §202,6. 

for  personal  endings,  see  Summary 
of  Forms  of  Nouns,  Pronouns, 
Adjectives,  and  Verbs,  §§369- 
385. 

personal  pronouns,  see  Pronouns. 
phonetics,  §§  427-433. 
phonetic  script,  §§  432-433. 
phrases,    in    English    rendered    by 

clause  in  German,  §  251,  b. 
order  of,  §  353,  b. 

pitch  of  voice  in  German,  §  403. 
plural  number 
of  third  person,   used  for  formal 

second  person,  §  11. 
form  of  fetn  used  with  bag,  §  186. 
of  nouns  of  measure,  §  130,  a. 
ending  of  all  nouns  in  the  dative, 

*n,  §  52,  a. 
For  all  plural  forms,  see  Summary, 

§§  370-374. 

possessive     pronouns,    see    Pro- 
nouns. 

potential  subjunctive,  §  323. 
predicate,     order     in,     see     Word 

order. 
predicate  adjective,  not  declined, 

§10;  §  149,  a. 

prefixes,  inseparable,  §  229. 
separable,  §  230. 
common,  §  238. 
general,  §  408. 

prepositions,  with  the  accusative, 
§  117 ;  dative  or  accusative, 
§101;  with  the  dative,  §111; 
with  the  genitive,  §  342,  b. 
burdj,  iifcer,  um,  imter,  as  verbal  pre- 
fixes, §  238. 

omitted  after  nouns  of  measure, 
§130. 


INDEX. 


87 


prepositions  (continued) 
combined  with  ba(r>,  §  112  ;    with 
the  detinite  article,   §101,   a; 
with  too(r>,  §  185. 
present  tense,  see  Tense. 
preterit,  see  Tense,  past. 
principal  parts  of  verbs,  §  69 ;  list 

of,  for  all  strong  verbs,  §  369. 
progressive     form,    rendered    by 
simple  verb  in   German,  §18; 
§  251,  a. 
pronouns 

agreement  with  antecedent,  §  106. 
used  as  objects  of  reflexive  verbs, 

§295. 

summary  of  forms  of,  §§  372-375. 
personal,  §105;  §  372. 
dative  used  instend  of  possessive, 

§210. 

possessive  as  adjective,  §  118. 
without  a  noun,  §  179. 

effect  upon  verbals,  §  348. 
intensive,  §  180. 

interrogative,  §  184 ;  §  373,  c,  d. 
demonstrative,  §  190:  §  374. 

when  modified,  §  224. 
indefinite,  §  375. 
indeclinable,  §  191. 
inflected,  §  194. 

reflexive,  §  210 ;  §  295,  «  ;  §  375. 
relative,  §  202 ;  §  373. 
agreement       with      antecedent, 

§202,  6;  §204,  6,  1,2. 
compound,  he  who,  §203;    com- 
pound neuter,  §  203,  a. 
substitute  for,  ft»o(r)=  with  prep- 
ositions, §  203,  b. 
uses,  §  204. 

never  omitted,  §  204,  a;  §  224. 
agreement  with  verb,  §  204,  b. 
punctuation  of,  Intro.,  IV,  a,  1. 
pronunciation,  Introduction,  I-IV; 

§§  386-404. 

proper  names,  §  275 :  see  Nouns. 
punctuation,  Intro.,  IV,  a,  b. 


comma 
in  compound    sentences,   Intro., 

IV,  a,  2. 
to  set  off  relative  clause,  Intro., 

IV,  a,  1 ;  §  169,  c. ' 
with  infinitive,  §  97  ;  §  233. 
exclamation  point,  Intro.,  IV,  6,  1, 

2;  §78. 
purpose,  infinitive  of,  §  97  ;  §  248,  d. 

Q. 

G,  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  b. 
quantity,  of  consonants,  §  402. 

of  vowels,  Intro.,  I,  a,  b.  ^ 

questions 
direct 

by  inversion  or  interrogative,  §  3. 
by  nicfyt  or  ntcfyt  toafyr,  §  3,  a. 
indirect,  §  209. 
requiring  dependent  subj  uncti ve, 

§  315. 
quotation  marks,  Intro.,  IV. 

R. 

9t,  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  6,  10. 

difficulties  of,  §401. 

reflexive  pronoun,  §  295,  a. 
reflexive  verbs,  §§  295-297. 

list  of,  §  298. 

common  use  of,  in  German,  §  297, 
a,  b,  c. 

impersonal,  §  303. 

complete  conjugation  of,  §  384. 
relative  pronouns,  see  Pronouns. 
roots  of  words,  §§  406-407. 

See  also  Word  formation. 
rules,  German 

of  grammar,  §§  423-426. 

S. 

@,  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  6,  11. 

in  script,  Intro.,  II,  6,  11,  note. 
*&,  genitive  ending,  §  46,  a ;  §  275. 

See  also  Table  of  forms,  §§  371-376 


88 


INDEX. 


*fcU,  noun  ending,  §  59. 

sfcmt,  adjective  suffix,  §  412,  g. 

fcfy,  pronunciation    of,   Intro.,   II,    b, 

12. 
^fdjaft,  feminine  noun  suffix,  §  89,  6, 

2;  §411,  e. 

fcfyneit,  e£,  impersonal,  §  302. 
fdjott,  idiomatic  particle,  §  357 ;  §  362. 
with  present  for  English  perfect, 

§83. 
with  past  for  English  past  perfect, 

§  83,  a. 
script,  German,  different  3  in,  Intro., 

II,  b,  11,  note, 
fefyen,  "  two  infinitives,"  §  166. 

infinitive  without  ju,  §  248,  a. 
fetn,  conjugation  of,  §  1;  §  7 ;  §  377. 
use  of  baS,  bteg,  and  eg  with,  §  186; 
as  copula  with  perfect  partici- 
ple, §  289;    with  impersonals, 
§  301,  a;  of  predicate  nomina- 
tive after,  §  8,  a. 
as  auxiliary  of  perfect  tenses,  §  76 ; 

§82. 

fein,  possessive  adjective,  §§  118-120. 
fett,  prep,  with  the  dative,  §  111. 
felfcer,  intensive  pronoun,  §  180. 
felbft,  intensive,  §  180. 

meaning  even,  §  180,  a. 
sentences 
kinds  of,  §  424. 
complex,  §  205;  §  215;  §  219. 

punctuation  of,  Intro.,  IV,  a,  1. 
compound,  §  214. 

punctuation  of,  Intro.,  IV,  a,  2. 
order  of  words  in,  see  Word  order. 
separable  prefixes,  §§  230-233. 
separable  and  inseparable  (com- 
mon), §  238;  §237,  a. 
sequence  of  tenses,  §  315,  a,  b. 
shall,    §    155,    6;    see   also  Future 

tenses. 

ftdj,  reflexive,  §  295,  a ;  used  instead  of 
possessive,  §  210. 


fie,  personal  pronoun,  §  105. 
reflexive  of  (fidj),  §  295,  a. 
<Ste,  used  for  second  person,  formal 
address,  §  11;   capitalized,  In- 
tro., IV,  rf;  §  11. 
reflexive  of  (ftd>),  §  295,  a. 
singular  number 
of  pronouns   for    English    plural, 

§186. 

see  also   Number  and  summaries 
of   inflections   throughout  the 
book, 
fold},  declined  like  ber,  §  144. 

indeclinable,  §  144,  a. 
foflen,  §154;  §159;  §160;  §165. 
with  511,  §  161;  "two  infinitives," 

§166. 

to  translate  is  said  to,  §  170,  b. 
what  is  the  meaning  of  that,  §  170, 

6,1. 

ought  to,  subjunctive,  §  170,  b,  2. 
are  we  to,  §  155,  6. 
fcnbern 

special  use  after  negative,  §  214,  a. 
correlative,    not    only — but    also, 

§  214,  a,  1. 

spirants,  see  Consonants. 
ff,  fc,  Intro.,  II,  b,  13. 
*$,  to  form  ordinals,  §  218. 
stops,  see  Consonants. 
strong  declension 
of  nouns,  first,  second,  third  class, 
§§3&-40;  §45;  §51;  §59;  §72; 
§  370,  a,  6,  c. 
of  adjectives,  §  129. 
See  also  Table  of  forms,  §  370 ; 

§371. 

strong  verbs,  complete  list  of,  §  369. 
definition  of,  §15;    vowel  change 
in,  §30;   conjugation  of,  §31; 
§37. 

See  Table  of  forms,  §§  381-383. 
subject,  see  Nominative  case. 
subjunctive  mode 
formation  of  tenses,  §  312. 


INDEX. 


89 


subjunctive  mode  (continued) 
of  auxiliaries,  §  313. 
of  conditional,  §  322. 
of    weak    verbs,    §    319,    strong 

verbs,  §320;  §321. 
of  modals,  §  328. 
uses 
dependent,     indirect     discourse, 

§  315,  a,  6,  c. 
use  of  present  where  English 

has  past,  §  315,  a. 
conditional,  §*322;  §  334;  §  335. 
contrast  of  German  and  Eng- 
lish, §  335. 
modals,  §  336. 
potential,  §  323. 
optative,  §  324. 
hortative,  §  324,  a. 
substantive,   adjectives  as,  §  149, 

c,  d.     See  Nouns. 
suffixes 

to  form  nouns,  concrete,  §  410 ;  ab- 
stract, §  411. 
adjectives,  §  412. 
verbs,  §  413. 

adverbs,  §  263,  b ;  §  264,  a. 
See  Word  formation. 
summary  of  forms,  §§  361>-385. 
syllabication,  Intro.,  III. 
syntax,   German  rules   of,  §§  423- 
426. 

T. 

Xf  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  b. 
*\,  to  form  ordinals,  §  264. 
^tel,  with  ordinals  to  form  fractions, 

§265. 
tense 
present  indicative,  §  1 ;  §  17 ;  §  31 ; 

§  44 ;  §  154. 
personal  endings  of  weak  verbs, 

§  16. 

of  strong  verbs,  §  30. 
use  of  simple  indicative  for  em- 
phatic and  progressive,  §  18 ; 
§  251,  a. 


instead  of  future  tense,  §  63. 
with  fd)0tt  for  present  perfect, 

§83. 
past  indicative,  §   7;    §  24;   §  37; 

§50;  §159. 
personal  endings  of  weak  verbs, 

§23. 

of  strong  verbs,  §  37. 
use  of  simple  past  in  German  for 
emphatic    and    progressive, 
§  18;  §251,  a. 

of  past  in  narrative,  §  71,  a. 
with    fcfyon    for   past    perfect, 

§83,  a. 

of  perfect  for  past,  §  71 ;  §  166,  b. 
future  indicative,   §  56;   §  57;   of 

modals,  §  160. 
in  English  rendered  in  German 

by  present,  §  63. 
perfect  indicative 
formation   with   fyafcert,  §  68;   of 
modals,  §  165 ;  with  fein,  §  76 ; 
rule  for,  §  95. 
use  of  German  perfect  for  English 

past,  §71;  §  166,  b. 
of  present  with  fcfyon  for  Eng- 
lish perfect,  §  83. 
with  "  two  infinitives,"  §  166. 
past  perfect  indicative 

formation,  §  82;   rule  for,  §  95; 

of  modals,  §  165. 
use  of  past  with  fcfyon  instead  of 

past  perfect,  §  83,  a. 
future  perfect   indicative,    forma- 
tion, §  88;  §  95;  of  modals, 
§  165. 

for  tenses  of  the  subjunctive,  see 
Subjunctive    and     Table   of 
forms,  §§  376-384. 
#),  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  6,  15 

and  note  (new  spelling), 
than,  in  comparisons,  §  259,  a. 
the— the,  jc  —  befto,  §  259,  c. 
there  is  (factitive),  e3  ift,  §  306,  b; 

eg  gtbt,  §  306,  a. 
ti,  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  6,  14. 


90 


INDEX. 


time 

definite,  accusative  of,  §  135;  §  270. 
indefinite,  genitive  of,   §    342,    a ; 

regularly  recurring,  §  342,  a. 
of  day,  §  269,  a,  b. 
of  the  week,  §  270. 
of  the  month,  §  270,  a. 
of  the  year,  §  270,  6. 
transitive  verbs 

inseparables  with  figurative  mean- 
ing, §  238,  a. 

fyafcen  usually  auxiliary  with  imper- 
sonate, §  301,  a. 

transposed  order,  see  Word  order. 
tn%  preposition  with  the  genitive, 

§  342,  6. 

*titm,  noun  ending,  §  72. 
"  two  infinitives,"  §  166. 
$,  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  6,  18. 

U. 

U,  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  I,  a,  6; 

§  388 ;  §  389. 
in  diphthongs,  §  391, 2,  3 ;  digraphs, 

Intro.,  I,  e,f. 
ii,  Intro.,  I,  c,  d,  3. 
iiOer,  prep,  with  dative  or  accusative, 

§  101. 

iifcer,  common  verbal  prefix,  §  238. 
Houses  of,  §209;  §272. 
um,  preposition  with  the  accusative, 
§  117;   with  infinitive  of  pur- 
pose, §  97  ;  §  248,  d. 
lint-,  common  verbal  prefix,  §  238. 
umlaut 

history  and    effect    upon    sounds, 

Intro.,  I,  c,  d',  §  38,  a;  §  391,  3. 

use,  in  plural  of  nouns,  §  38;  §  59; 

§72. 
in    past    subjunctive    of    strong 

verbs,  §  312,  6  ;  §  369. 
omitted  in  imperative,  §  243,  6. 
un*,  general  prefix,  §  408,  c. 
nmg,  feminine  suffix,  §  89, 6, 2 ;  §  411,/. 


unfer,  ,,ein"  word,  §  118;  §  139. 
unter,  prep,  with  dative  or  accusative, 

§  101. 

untev'f  common  verbal  prefix,  §  238. 
iir*,  general  prefix,  §  408,  d. 

V. 

$8,  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  a,  b. 
fcer=,  inseparable  prefix,  §  229. 
verbals  in  -ing1,  rendered  by  infini- 
tive  after    cmffyoren   and    fort* 
fasten,  §  234;  after  anftatt  and 
ofyne,  §248,  d',  §252. 
modified  verbals,  §  348. 
in  time  or  causal  phrases,  §  347. 
verbs 

as  it  would  be  impossible  to  index 
verbs  without  referring  to  most 
of  the  sections  in  the  book,  ref- 
erences have  been  made,  under 
the  proper  special,  headings  to 
the  forms  and  uses  of  verbs, 
i.e.    to    Voice,    Mode,    Tense, 
Conjugation,  etc. 
See  also  under 
Word  formation. 
Separable,  Inseparable,  and  Com- 
mon Prefixes. 

Transitive  and  Intransitive  verbs. 
Weak  and  Strong  verbs. 
Reflexive  verbs. 
Impersonal  verbs. 
verbs  with  the  dative,  §  305 ;  §  343,  b. 
voice,  see  Active  and  Passive. 
voiced    consonants,     see    Conso- 
nants. 

voiceless  consonants,  see  Conso- 
nants. 

fcon,  prep,  with  the  dative,  §  111. 
use  with  the  agent  in  the  passive 

voice,  §  285. 
as    substitute    for  the  genitive, 

§  275,  a. 

t)or,  prep,  with  dative  or  accusative, 
§101. 


INDEX. 


91 


vowels,  kinds  of,  Intro.,  I,  a;  pro- 
nunciation of,  Intro.,  1,  b ;  dif- 
ficulties of  pronunciation, 
§§  387-391. 

vowel  changes  in  strong  verbs, 
§30. 

W. 

28,  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  6,  18. 
ttnifyrenb,  subordinating  conjunction, 

§  215 ;  use  in  clauses,  §  347. 
preposition  with  genitive,  §  342,  b. 
toaS,  interrogative,  §  184,  a. 
indefinite       compound       relative, 

§203. 

relative  after  neuter,  §  203,  a. 
toaS  fiir  em,  §  184,  c. 
weak    declension,    of  nouns,    see 

Nouns,  fourth  class. 
of  adjectives,  see  Adjectives. 
weak  verbs 

no  vowel  change,  §  15  and  note, 
personal  endings,  §  16;    additions 

for  euphony,  §  16,  a. 
past  participles  of,  §  69. 
complete  conjugation  of,  §  379. 
weather,  state  of,  §  302. 
week,  days  of  the,  §  270;  §  271,  a. 
tocgen,  prep,  with  the  genitive,  §  342,  b. 
toeil,      subordinating      conjunction, 

§  205 ;  §  215. 
toeld),  indeclinable  when  exclamatory, 

§  144,  a. 

See  also  SBeldjer. 
toeldjer,  relative,    declined    like  ber, 

§202;  §373. 
interrogative,  §  184,  b. 
toentg,  inflected  indefinite,  §  194,  e. 
toemger,       indeclinable       indefinite, 

§  191,  d. 
H?cnn,     subordinating     conjunction, 

§215;  §216. 

use  of,  §  330;  omission  of,  §  330,  a. 
alS  toenn,  in  conditions  contrary  to 
fact,  §  334,  a. 


tuer,  §  373,  c ;  as  compound  relative, 

§203. 

interrogative,  §  184,  a. 
toerben 

conjugation   of,  §  44;   §  50;    sum- 
mary, §  378. 

auxiliary  of  the  future  tense,  §  56 ; 
in  compound  tenses  of  modals, 
§219. 
of  passive   voice,  §  283;    §  284; 

§380. 

use  of  nominative  after,  §  8,  a. 
discussion  of  meanings,  §  155,  a,  b, 

note ;  §  283,  a. 
subjunctive  of,  in  the  conditional, 

§322. 

hne,  in  comparisons,  §  259,  a,  b;  cor- 
relative with  efcenfo,  §  259,  b. 
will,  showing  simple  futurity,  toer= 
ben,    §  63;    §   155,   a;    desire, 
tooflcn,  §  155,  a,  b,  note, 
hrir,  personal  pronoun,  §  105;  §  372,  b. 
too(r)=,    compounded    with    preposi- 
tions, §  203,  b. 
tool;!,    as  idiomatic    particle,    §  357; 

§  363. 

word  formation 
roots,  §  406;  verbal,  §  407. 
prefixes,  §  408. 
suffixes,  §  409. 

forming  concrete  nouns,  §  410. 
abstract  nouns,  §  411. 
adjectives,  §  412. 
verbs,  §  413. 
compound  words,  §  414. 
German  rich  in,  §  405. 
nouns,  §  415;   adjectives,  §  416; 

verbs,  §  417. 
Latin  derivatives  compared    with 

German,  §  418. 

word  order,  §  352 ;  §  353 ;  §  425. 
normal 

general  rule  for  emphasis,  §  353. 
coordinating  conjunctions,  §  214. 
position  of 
nouns  as  objects,  §  52;  §  107,  c; 


92 


INDEX. 


word  order  (continued} 

pronouns  as  objects,  §  107,  a, 
6;  indirect  object,  §  52;  ad- 
jective, §  343,  a ;  possessive 
genitive,  §  46. 

verbs,  §  88. 

separable  prefixes,  §  230,  b,  c; 
§ix  and  ge=,  §  230,  d;  infini- 
tives, §  58;  §  249;  modified, 
§  249,  a  ;  complementary, 
§  233;  "two  infinitives," 
§166. 

$11  with  modals,  §  161,  6. 

participles,  §  70;  §  250,  a. 

adverbs,  §  145 ;  §  353,  b ;  tttd)t, 
§  26 ;  me,  §  140. 

phrases,  adverbial,  §  353,  b. 
inverted 

general  rule  for,  §  113. 

in  questions,  §  3. 

in  formal  imperative,  §  78; 
§243. 

of  main  clause,  §  215,  a. 

of  the  condition,  §  330. 

after  alS  (toetm  omitted), 
§  334,  a. 


omission  of  e«,  §  306,  &. 

dependent 
general  rule,  §  205. 
with   relatives,  §  202;  in  indi- 
rect questions,  §  209 ;  with  sub- 
ordinating conj.,  §   215;   after 
ba§,  §  220 ;  the  modals  in,  §  219; 


X. 

£,  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  6,  1. 

Y. 

J),  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  I,  b. 

Z. 

3,  pronunciation  of,  Intro.,  II,  b,  19. 
5er=,  inseparable  prefix,  §  229. 
$11,  prep,  with  dative,  §  111 ;  §  114. 
position  of,  §  249. 

with  modals,  §  161,  6. 
use  of,  §  97;  248,  b. 
omission  of,  §  248,  a. 
Stoet,  §  263. 

,  prep,  with  dative  or  accusa- 
tive, §  101. 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 
BERKELEY 

Return  to  desk  from  which  borrowed. 
This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


->;i 

REC'D  LD 

,     «H«!« 

m    3  1953  U 

-'D  LD 

JUN    6  196? 

REG'D  LD 

DEC  4  -1959 

2feb  '60B*S 

LD  21-95w^ll,'50  (2877sl 

L6)476 

YB  01443 


Jfo        -ju 


-. 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


